Conair Equipment Catalog

Equipment Catalog
Storage Conveying Drying Blending/Feeding Heat Transfer Size Reduction Extrusion Systems
EQPCAT-0218
Doing Our Part for Over 60 Years

Doing
our
+CFDEAI2DBI4C>F@H@IEFIIGCIEF*HFGIDF@I;DF>4D:G>AHIH>E<;HFGIG=DG
2C>?@I=H?<IG=HI7AC2EF7IF>;-HAIC4I<?DBGE:BI<AC:HBBCABI7HGI><IDF@IA>FFEF7
H44E:EHFG?9IDF@I<AC4EGD-?9.I2EG=I=E7=HAI?H*H?BIC4I>D?EG96I0F@.I2H!AHIBGE??I@CEF7
part
C>AI<DAGIGCI=H?<I9C>I;D&HI9C>AI<?DBGE:I<AC@>:GBIGC@D96
,CI:C;<DF9IBGD9BIEFI->BEFHBBI4CAII9HDABI2EG=C>GI:CFGEF>EF7IGCI@CIG=H
&EF@BIC4IG=EF7BIG=DGI-AC>7=GIG=H;IB>::HBBIEFIG=HI4EABGI<?D:H6I3CIBGDAGI2EG=.I
2HIBGE??I;D&HID>"E?EDA9IH>E<;HFGI 4AC;I@A9HABIGCI-?HF@HABIGCI<CBG%H"GA>BECF
H>E<;HFG.IDF@IH*HA9G=EF7IEFI-HG2HHFI @HBE7FH@IGCI@H?E*HAIH":H<GECFD? to help you make yours...
<HA4CA;DF:H.IA>77H@IAH?ED-E?EG9IDF@IHDB9I;DEFGHFDF:H6I>GIEG!BIFCGI>BGI
D-C>GIEF@E*E@>D?I<AC@>:GB6I=HFIEGI:C;HBIGCI:C;<?HGHI<AC:HBBEF7IB9BGH;B.I faster
+CFDEAI=DBI>F<DAD??H?H@IH"<HAEHF:HIDF@I&FC2?H@7H.I<?>BIDI@E*HABHI<AC@>:G
?EFH.I<AC:HBB%HF7EFHHAEF7I:D<D-E?EGEHBIDF@ICA7DFEDGECFD?I@H<G=IGCIBHHIH*HF more colorful
G=HI;CBGI:C;<?H"I<ACH:GIG=AC>7=I4AC;IBGDAGIGCI4EFEB=6I
lighter
04GHAIEFBGD??DGECF.I9C>!??ID<<AH:EDGHIG=HID4GHA;DA&HGIB><<CAGI4CAI2=E:=I tougher
+CFDEAIEBIBCI2H??I&FC2F6I)>AI

IB><<CAGIB9BGH;I<>GBI9C>IEF
E;;H@EDGHIGC>:=I2EG=I;CAHIG=DFII4>??%GE;HIEF%=C>BHI<DAGBIDF@IBHA*E:H cleaner
<AC4HBBECFD?B6I)*HAIIGADEFH@IDF@I:HAGE4EH@I4EH?@%BHA*E:HI<HABCFFH?IEFIG=H
656IDF@I'H"E:CI;HDFID?;CBGIH*HA9I+CFDEAI:>BGC;HAIEBI2EG=EFII;E?HBI clearer
C4IDIBHA*E:HIGH:=FE:EDF6IHI=D*HIC*HAI6I;E??ECFI<DAGBIEFIBGC:&IDF@I2H
D*HAD7HIBD;H%ICAIFH"G%@D9IB=E<<EF7ID?;CBGIIC4IG=HIGE;H6II
more profitable
0I?CGI=DBI:=DF7H@IC*HAIG=HI?DBGIBE"I@H:D@HB.I->GIG=EBI;>:=I=DBIFCG
Conair is still doing our part.
Table of Contents
Conveying System Controls
Material Storage %,# -AND%,# -ODELS #
-ODEL%,3 #
Silos -ODEL&,8 0LUS #
7ELDED3TEELOR!LUMINUM3ILOS 3
3PIRAL!LUMINUM3ILOS 3 Vacuum Pumps/Dust Collectors
"OLTED3TEELOR!LUMINUM3ILOS 3 2'3ERIES6ACUUM0UMPS #
0$3ERIES0OSITIVE$ISPLACEMENT0UMPS #
Surge Bins ,$03ERIES,ONG$ISTANCE0UMPS #
-OBILE3URGE"IN 3 $UST#OLLECTORS$#$#AND$#-ODELS #
)N 0LANT3URGE"IN 3 #YCLONE$UST#OLLECTOR #
Gaylord Tilters Bulk Conveying Systems

AND3ERIES 3 #YCLING,OADER #
625AND6ACUUM2AILCAR
Accessories 5NLOADING3YSTEM #
-ATERIAL3TORAGE!CCESSORIES 3 2ESIN4RACKER4-&LOW-ETER #
Material Distribution
Conveying 2ESIN3ELECTION3TATION #
),0)NVISIBLE,INE0Roofing #
-60 -ATERIAL6ISION0Roofing #
Self-Contained Vacuum Loaders
!UTO2ESIN3ELECTOR!3 #
4,--ODEL4UBE,OADERS #
3ELECTOR0LATES #
!CCESS4-!,3ERIES,OADERS #
7AVE#ONVEYING4-3YSTEM#
%:,OAD4-3ERIES,OADERS #
!CCESS4-*)4-ATERIAL(OPPERS #
$UST"EATER$"-ODEL,OADERS #
"ULK$ISTRIBUTION"OXES#
4,!-ODEL4UBE,OADERS #
0-3ERIES0OWDER,OADERS #
Material Line Valves
#OMMON,INE6ALVE #
Compressed Air Material Loaders
2ATIO6ALVE #
#!-, %6"4O"ARREL 3YSTEM #
0URGE6ALVE #
#!-, %6'4O'AYLORD 3YSTEM #
!DJUSTABLE0URGE6ALVE
3INGLEAND$UALMODELS #
Central Vacuum Receivers
4,2-ODEL4UBE,OADERS #
Material Hoppers
!CCESS4-!23ERIES2ECEIVER #
-INIATURE(ANDY(OPPER#
+,OADERS+AND+#2-ODEL #
$URA,OAD$, 3ERIES #
&ILTER,ESS&, 3ERIES #
023ERIES0OWDER2ECEIVERS #
Table of Contents CONTINUED
Accessories Central Drying System

!UDIBLE6ISUAL!LARMAND!LARM+ITS# 2ESIN7ORKS $
-'-AGNET3ERIES#
Compressed Air Dryer
&ILTER$RAWER#
3LIM,INE4- $
0ELLBOW2ESIN#ONVEYING(ARDWARE#
Crystallizer
#23ERIES#RYSTALLIZERS $
Drying
MicroWheel Dehumidifying Dryers
Blending/Feeding
-7-ODELS-7AND-7 $
Gravimetric Batch Blenders
Carousel Plus Dryers 4RUE"LEND©4" "
-$#7-ODELSAND $ 4RUE"LEND©4" "
7-ODELSAND $ 4RUE"LEND©4" AND4" "
-$#7-ODELSAND $ 4RUE"LEND©4"2 "
7-ODELSAND $ 4RUE"LEND©4" AND4" "
7-ODELSn $ 4RUE"LEND©4" AND4" "
4RUE"LEND©4" 4"
EnergySmart® Drying System AND4" "
%NERGY3MART®WITH4OUCH6IEW4- 4RUE"LEND©4" 4"
7-ODELS $ AND4" "
4RUE"LEND©4" 4"
Drying Monitor AND4" "
$- ))-ODEL $
$- I-ODEL $ Insulated Gravimetric Batch Blenders
4RUE"LEND©4") "
Hopper Temperature Controllers
(0(EATER0ACK $ High Heat Gravimetric Batch Blenders
(4#-ODELS( ( $ 4RUE"LEND©4")( "
Gas Process Air Heater Extrusion Control Blender

'AS4RAC#'4-ODELSAND$ 4RUE"LEND©%84 "
Hot Air Dryers Continuous Gravimetric Blenders

(!$-ODELS $ 4RUE7EIGH4-#ONTINUOUS"LENDER "
Drying Hoppers Blender Reporting Software

#(3ERIES)NSULATED(OPPER $ 4RUE"LEND©2EPORTING3OFTWARE "
$(3ERIES)NSULATED(OPPERS $ 31,2EPORTING3OFTWARE "
Accessories Central Chillers

SB-1 to SB-3 Upgrade Kit ..................................... B-59 !IR #OOLED-ODELS%3! TO%3! (
,EVEL!LARM#ONTROL" !IR #OOLED-ODELS! 3+TO! 3+ (
73"'"2ETRofit ContrOL" %3%3ERIES#ENTRAL#HILLERS (
7ATER #OOLED-ODELS7 3+TO7 3+ (
Feeders 7ATER #OOLED-ODELS7 3+ 7 3+ (
4RUE&EED4-4&-ODELS"
4RUE&EED4-4OUCH#ONTROL-ODELS" Pump Tanks
4RUE&EED4-,1-ODEL" 04#304333TEEL-ODELS (
"&3AND"&(AT THE THROATMODELS" 04&'&IBERGLASS-ODELS (
Accessories
Intermixer 3TAINLESS3TEEL#&33ERIES7ATER3TRAINERS (
-ATERIAL-IXER" 3-&4OWER7ATER&ILTER3YSTEM (
4OWER)SOLATION0&3ERIES(EAT%XCHANGERS (
Floor Stands
4""3-ODELS" System Solutions
&3-ODELS" #ENTRAL#OOLING3YSTEMS (
Thermolator Accessories
Heat Transfer 4HERMOLATOR®!CCESSORIES (
Temperature Controllers
4HERMOLATOR47 6 ( Size Reduction
4HERMOLATOR47 3 (
4HERMOLATOR47 0 ( Beside-the-Machine Granulators
4HERMOLATORMICRO4EMP-4# ( 33ERIES '

4HERMOLATOR VACU4RAC642 $)AND642 $) ( 63ERIES '
0OSITIVE.EGATIVE0RESSURE 3ERIES '
4HERMOLATORHEAT4RAC(42 ( 3ERIES '
/IL4EMPERATURE#ONTROLLER 3ERIES '
3ERIES '
Portable Chillers
%03ERIES !IR7ATER#OOLED ( Central Granulators
%03ERIES !IR7ATER#OOLED ( 3ERIES '
3ERIES '
Cooling Tower Systems
%&3ERIES&IBERGLASS-ODELSTO4ONS ( Under Press/Low Profile Granulators
%&3ERIES&IBERGLASS-ODELSTO4ONS ( !5NDERTHE0RESS '
%3ERIES&ORCED$RAFT-ODELSTO4ONS ( ,3ERIES '
%3ERIES&ORCED$RAFT-ODELSTO4ONS (
%ARTH3MART4-%3473ERIES!DIABATIC4OWERS (
Shredders Cutters and Saws

'03ERIES '
#3#-ODEL3ERVO#UTTER %
&,%83ERIES '
3URE#UT2OTARY+NIFE#UTTERS %
5,42!3ERIES '
40#0LANETARY#UTTER %
- 40#0LANETARY#UTTER %
435P #UT4RAVELLING#UT OFF3AWS %
Upstream Extrusion #OMBINATION0ULLER#UTTER-ED,INE-ODELS %
#OMBINATION0ULLER#UTTER#0#-ODELS %
Extrusion Control
4RUE7EIGH©#ONTROL47# 5 Coilers
4RUE7EIGH©47(-ODELS 5 !4#3ERIES %
4RUE7EIGH4-,INE-ANAGER 5
Takeaway Conveyor
Film Trim Reclaim Systems 4!#3ERIES %
42)3ERIES4RIM)NDUCERS 5 -4!#3ERIES %
3CRAP3AVER©33--ODELS 5
Dump Tables
$43ERIES %
Downstream Extrusion
Accessories
Vacuum Sizing Equipment !CCESSORY%QUIPMENT %
-ED6AC4ANKS %
(4-03ERIES %
-46ACUUM3IZING4ANKS %
Spray Vacuum Sizing Equipment

-3"()3ERIES7ATER3PRAY4ANKS %
Cooling Tanks
-#"3ERIES %
-0#"3ERIES %
%#"3ERIES %
Belt Pullers
0RECISION3ERIES"ELT0ULLERS %
"03ERIES"ELT0ULLERS %
Cleated Pullers
#03ERIES#LEATED0ULLERS %
Material Storage
Silos
7ELDED3TEELOR!LUMINUM3ILOS 3
3PIRAL!LUMINUM3ILOS 3
"OLTED3TEELOR!LUMINUM3ILOS 3
Storrage
Surge Bins
-OBILE3URGE"IN 3
)N 0LANT3URGE"IN 3
Conv
vey
eying Gaylord Tilters
AND3ERIES 3
Accessories
-ATERIAL3TORAGE!CCESSORIES 3
Drying
Dr
Blendin
ng/
g Feeding
Heat Tran
nsfer
Size Reduction
U stream
Up
Downstream
Material Storage Quick Reference
5SABLE6OLUME2ANGEFT
Aluminum
10000
11000
12000
13000
14000
15000
(EIGHT 7IND
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
Steel
-ODELS 2ANGEFT ,OAD
7ELDED3ILOS
37FTINCHES TO MPH z {
3PIRAL!LUMINUM3ILOS
3!3FTINCHES TO MPH .! z
3!3FTINCHES TO MPH .! z
"OLTED3ILOS
3"FT INCHES TO MPH z {
Carbon Steel
5SABLE#APACITYLB LBFT

Stainless
10000
12000
14000
16000
18000
6OLUME
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
Steel
500
-ODELS FT
3URGE"INS
-OBILE-" z {
-OBILE-" z {
-OBILE-" z {
-OBILE-" z {
-OBILE-" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
)N 0LANT3" z {
/THER !CCESSORIES
s'AYLORD4ILTERS s,EVEL3ENSORS
z &EATURE { /PTION
s2ESIN,EVEL$ISPLAY s,OAD#ELLS
s6ALVES-AGNETS(IGH 7EAR%LBOWS
TPSX003-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE7%,$%$34%%,/2!,5-).5-3),/3
Weather-Tight
Factory Built Bulk Storage
Conair’s welded silos are shipped factory constructed and ready
to install in one day and use immediately. Because there are no
bolts, seams or gaskets, material hang up points are eliminated.
The inside of the welded steel silo is epoxy coated to keep your
material contamination free. The outside is primed and enamel
coated to prevent rusting. Welded aluminum silos require no
external painting or internal epoxy coating.
The welded silos are guaranteed to be water-tight.
Broad Range of Storage Capacities Available
Conair offers welded silos in a variety of

storage capacities ranging from 838 to 9,826 ` .OBOLTSSEAMSORGASKETS
cubic feet. Smooth welded finish on the interior of the silo eliminates material hang-up points.
Two cone configurations are available. Cone ` 1UALITYINTERNALLINER

configuration is determined by the type of Welded steel silos have a non-corrosive, epoxy coating to protect material from
material to be stored. Silos formed for pellet oxidation. Welded aluminum silos require no internal epoxy coating.
storage usually have a 45º cone bottom. For
powder and hard-to-flow materials the silo is ` #USTOMIZEDTOFITYOURNEEDS
fitted with a 60º cone. Options include a safety cage and rest platform for silos over 30 feet, a ladder and a
slide gate shut-off which is pre-drilled to accept an optional Conair distribution box.
The Conair sales team is ready to help you
select the size, style and features that will ` -ANYSTANDARDFEATURES
best suit your storage needs. Included as standard are a prefabricated roof with manway/vent combination,
Welded silos are delivered to your plant via a perimeter guardrail with safety toe board and railing. Also, a vacuum receiver
dedicated delivery truck. A crane is used to mounting flange, truck-fill nipple, high and low level indicator mounts, mounting
flange for the slide gate shut-off and a fully enclosed weatherproof vented silo skirt
erect the silo.
with a louvered access door is included. If two or more silos are purchased at once, a
Conair installation crews can set the silo four foot (span) crossover walkway is provided.
on the customer poured pad, connect all
accessories and install the unloading and
conveying system to get the plant up and
running.
WWWCONAIRGROUPCOM\INFO CONAIRGROUPCOM\
S-1
TPSX003-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE7%,$%$34%%,/2!,5-).5-3),/3
Specifications
37-ODELS
)NSIDEDIAMETER FTINCHES
Silo inside height ft {m}* 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
{5.5} {7.3} {9.1} {11.0} {12.8} {14.6} {16.5} {18.3} {20.1} {22.0}
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS
Silo capacity 45° cone 838 1310 1781 2252 2723 3194 3665 4136 4607 5079
ft3 † {liters} {23,732} {37,099} {50,438} {63,777} {77,115} {90,454} {103,793} {117,132} {130,470} {143,837}
Construction material ASTM A570 Grade 40 Steel or 5052 - H-32 Aluminum
Wind load 100 mph )NSIDE
DIAMETER
Snow load 40 lbs/ft2 )NSIDE
HEIGHT
7EIGHTlb {kg} ‡
Shipping (empty) 4783 5829 6876 7922 8968 10,827 12,475 13,549 15,090 16,515
{2170} {2644} {3119} {3593} {4068} {4911} {5659} {6146} {6845} {7491}
Full to capacity 38,303 58,229 78,116 98,002 117,888 138,587 159,075 178,989 199,370 219,675
{17,374} {26,412} {35,433} {44,453} {53,473} {62,862} {72,155} {81,188} {90,433} {99,643}
37-ODELS
{5.5} {7.3} {9.1} {11.0} {12.8} {14.6} {16.5} {18.3} {20.1} {22.0} 3IDEVIEW
Silo capacity 45° cone 1240 1909 2578 3247 3916 4585 5254 5833 6502 7171 #ENTER
ft3 † {liters} {35,117} {54,063} {73,009} {91,955} {110,889} {129,833} {148,793} {165,191} {184,137} {203,083} OPENING
Construction material ASTM A570 Grade 40 Steel or 5052 - H-32 Aluminum INCH/$
(IGHLEVEL
TRUCKFILL
Wind load 100 mph INDICATOR
STUB
OPENING
Snow load 40 lbs/ft2
2EST
p
7EIGHTlb {kg} PLATFORM
Shipping (empty) 6063 7310 8557 10,311 11,558 13,256 15,278 16,525 18,260 20,097 -ANHOLE
{2750} {3316} {3881} {4677} {5243} {6013} {6930} {7496} {8283} {9116} VENTCOM
BINATION
Full to capacity 55,663 83,670 11,1677 140,191 168,198 196,656 225,438 249,845 278,340 306,937 INCH
{25,248} {37,952} {50,656} {63,590} {76,293} {89,202} {102,257} {113,328} {126,253} {139,224} .04YO YO
,ADDER STUB
37-ODELS 0IPESUPPORT
BRACKET
4OPVIEW
{5.5} {7.3} {9.1} {11.0} {12.8} {14.6} {16.5} {18.3} {20.1} {22.0}
2AILCARUN
Silo capacity 45° cone ft3 1613 2525 3438 4350 5263 6176 7088 8001 8913 9826 6ACUUM LOADINGLINE
†
{liters} {45,680} {71,508} {97,364} {123,192} {149,048} {174,904} {200,732} {226,588} {252,416} {262,950} HOPPERAND OPTIONAL
VACUUMLINE
Construction material ASTM A570 Grade 40 Steel or 5052 - H-32 Aluminum OPTIONAL
Wind load 100 mph
7EIGHTlb {kg} p
,ADDERAND
Shipping (empty) 8787 10,299 11,755 14,265 15,721 17,178 19,161 21,282 23,925 26,569 SAFETYCAGE
{3986} {4672} {5332} {6470} {7131} {7792} {8691} {9653} {10852} {12051} WITH/3(!
REQUIRED
Full to capacity 73307 111,299 149,275 188,265 226,241 264,218 302,681 341,322 380,455 419,609 RESTPLAT
{33,251} {50,448} {67,710} {85,395} {102,621} {119,847} {137,294} {154,821} {172,567} {190,331} FORM
,OW LEVEL
Specification Notes INDICATOR
OPENING
* For overall height add 44 inches to inside height to account for Reference foundation drawing 10 feet welded 501-090 series;
the guardrail. 11 feet,11 inches welded 501-024 series; 13 feet,11 inches
†
Cones are available in 45° for pellets, except PET and 60° for welded 501-210 series.
$USTCOLLEC
powdered and PET materials. Reduce silo capacity for 60° Roof live and dead load design 25 lb/ft2. !CCESS
TOROPTIONAL
cone: 10 feet 0 inches, subtract 47 ft3; 11 feet, 11 inches, Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair DOOR 6ACUUM
subtract 358 ft3; and 13 feet, 11 inches subtract 460 ft3. representative for the most current information. PUMP
3LIDEGATE OPTIONAL
‡
Weight is based on 40 lb/ft3 materials. SHUT OFF
OPTIONAL
S-2
TPSX001-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE30)2!,!,5-).5-3),/3
Weather-Tight
Bulk Storage with
No Maintenance
Structurally tough. Contamination-free. Conair’s aluminum silos
are designed to match the rigidity of a steel structure. Unlike a
steel structure, this silo requires no external painting or internal
epoxy coating. In fact, no routine maintenance is needed inside
or out.
Aluminum silos keep your expensive material in pristine
condition, free from contamination due to rust or flaking. The
silos are guaranteed to be water-tight.
All-Aluminum and Roll Formed
The Conair spiral silo is manufactured, literally,

from the top down. A coil of 11 gauge sheet ` 3UPERIORQUALITYCONSTRUCTION
aluminum is fed into a circular roll forming High quality, non-ferrous aluminum silos are a practical solution for contamination-
machine. The forming machine rotates and free storing of expensive pelletized or powdered plastic materials.
joins the edges into an airtight fit which is
` 4HREECONECONFIGURATIONS
double crimped under extreme pressure, to Cone configuration is determined by material type. Silos formed for pellet storage
form what amounts to a one piece structure. usually have a 45° cone bottom. For powder and hard-to-flow materials the silo
The spiral silo is available in either a 10 foot includes a 60° cone. A 45°/70° compound cone is used for PET materials.
6 inch, 11 foot 6 inch or 13 foot 11 inch
diameter, pre-formed at the factory and ` #USTOMIZEDTOFITYOURNEEDS
shipped ready to erect in one day. Storage Options include a safety cage and rest platform for silos over 30 feet, a ladder and a
capacities range from 1,292 to 8,001 cubic slide gate shut-off which is pre-drilled to accept an optional Conair distribution box.
feet.
` -ANYSTANDARDFEATURES
Conair installation crews can set the silo Included as standard are: a prefabricated roof with access hatch, roof vent, perimeter
on the customer poured pad, connect all guardrail with safety toe board and railing. Also, a vacuum receiver mounting flange,
accessories and install the unloading and truck-fill nipple, high and low level indicator mounts, mounting flange for the slide
conveying system to get you up and running. gate shut-off and a fully enclosed weather-proof vented silo skirt with a louvered
access door is included. If two or more silos are purchased at once, a four foot (span)
crossover walkway is provided.
S-3
TPSX001-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE30)2!,!,5-).5-3),/3
Specifications 6ACUUM
2AILCAR
UNLOADINGLINE
HOPPERAND OPTIONAL
VACUUMLINE
OPTIONAL
3QUAREHATCH INCH.04
YO YOSTUB
2OOFVENT ,ADDERAND
)NSIDE SAFETYCAGE
DIAMETER WITH/3(!
REQUIREDREST
(IGHLEVEL PLATFORM
)NSIDE INCH/$ INDICATOR !PPLICATION.OTES
HEIGHT TRUCKFILLSTUB OPENING ,OW LEVEL
INDICATOR x#ONSTRUCTION
OPENING -ATERIAL
#ENTEROPENING 5052 - H-32 Aluminum
2EST
PLATFORM
!CCESS
$USTCOLLECTOR x7INDLOADe
0IPESUPPORT OPTIONAL
,ADDER BRACKET DOOR 100 mph
6ACUUM
3LIDEGATE PUMP x3NOWLOAD
4OPVIEW SHUT OFF OPTIONAL 40 lbs/ft2
OPTIONAL
3IDEVIEW
3!3-ODELS
Silo inside height ft {m}* 24 {7.3} 28 {8.5} 30 {9.1} 32 {9.8} 36 {11.0} 40 {12.2} 44 {13.4} 48 {14.6} 52 {15.8} 56 {17.1} 60 {18.3}
1292 1606 1763 1920 2234 2549 2863 3177 3491 3805 4119
Silo capacity 45° cone ft3 {liters} † ‡
{36,590} {45,480} {49,930} {54,370} {63,260} {72,180} {81,080} {89,970} {98,860} {107,750} {116,640}
7EIGHTlb {kg} **
3540 3910 4100 4420 5020 5460 5900 6350 7320 7760 8270
Shipping (empty)
{1610} {1780} {1860} {2010} {2280} {2480} {2680} {2890} {3330} {3520} {3760}
55,220 68,150 74,620 81,220 94,380 107,420 120,420 133,430 146,960 159,960 1730,30
Full to capacity
{25,050} {30,920} {33,850} {36,850} {42,810} {48,730} {54,630} {60,530} {66,660} {72,560} {78,490}
3!3-ODELS
1818 2234 2441 2649 3065 3480 3896 4311 4727 5142 5558
{51,486} {63,267} {69,129} {75,020} {86,801} {98,554} {110,335} {122,088} {133,869} {145,621} {157,403}
7EIGHTlb {kg} **
4066 4459 4768 5076 5664 6117 6569 7020 7846 8341 8838
Shipping (empty)
{1844} {2023} {2136} {2302} {2569} {2775} {2980} {3184} {3559} {3783} {4009}
76,786 93,819 102,408 111,036 128,264 145,316 162,409 179,460 196,926 214,021 231,158
Full to capacity
{34,830} {42,556} {46,451} {50,365} {58,180} {65,914} {73,667} {81,402} {89,324} {97,078} {104,851}
3!3-ODELS
2525 3133 3438 3742 4350 4958 5566 6176 6784 7392 8001
{71,508} {88,717} {97,364} {105,961} {123,192} {140,395} {157,612} {174,904} {192,101} {209,318} {226,588}
7EIGHTlb {kg} **
4938 5452 5892 6331 6850 7371 7890 8836 9428 10027 10611
Shipping (empty)
{2240} {2473} {2673} {2872} {3107} {3343} {3579} {4008} {4276} {4548} {4813}
111,299 136,615 149,275 161,933 188,265 213,581 238,897 264,218 28,9534 314,850 340,166
Full to capacity
{50,448} {61,968} {67,710} {73,452} {85,395} {96,878} {108,362} {119,847} {131,330} {142,814} {154,297}
Specification Notes
* For overall height add 43 inches to inside height to account for the guardrail. §
Wind load is 100 mph for Seismic Zones I and 140 mph for Seismic Zone II and III.
† ** Weight is based on 40 lb/ft3 materials.
Cones are available in 45° for pellets, except PET; 60° for powdered materials; and
compound 45°/70° for PET pellets. Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair representative for
‡
Reduce silo capacity for 60° cone. 10 feet, 6 inches, subtract 162 ft3 ; 11 feet, the most current information.
6 inches, subtract 245 ft3 ; and 13 feet, 11 inches, subtract 460 ft3.
Reduce silo capacity for a 45°/70°compound cone. 11 feet, 6 inches, subtract
460 ft3 ; and 13 feet, 11 inches subtract 534 ft3.
S-4
TPSX002-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE"/,4%$34%%,/2!,5-).5-3),/3
Low Cost
Exportable Bulk Storage
Conair’s bolted steel or aluminum silos are shipped
unassembled. They can be shipped virtually anywhere in the
world and assembled at the customer’s plant.
The individual panels of a bolted steel silo are epoxy coated on
the inside to keep material contamination free. The outside is
primed and enamel coated to prevent rusting. Aluminum panels
do not require internal or external painting or coating.
Broad Range of Storage Capacities Available
Conair offers bolted silos in a variety of

storage capacities ranging from 1,901 to ` 2EDUCEDFREIGHTCOSTS
10,412 cubic feet. Because bolted silos are delivered in pieces, they can generally be shipped by
commercial carrier.
Two cone configurations are available.
Configuration is determined by the type of ` #USTOMIZEDTOFITYOURNEEDS
material to be stored. Silos for pellet storage Options include a safety cage and rest platform for silos over 30 feet, a ladder and a
usually have a 45° cone bottom. For powder slide gate shut-off which is pre-drilled to accept an optional Conair Distribution Box.
and hard-to-flow materials the silo includes a
60° cone. ` -ANYSTANDARDFEATURES
Included as standard are a prefabricated roof with manhole/vent combination,
The Conair sales team is ready to help you perimeter guardrail with safety toe board and railing. Also, a vacuum receiver
select the size, style and features that will mounting flange, truck-fill nipple, ladder, high and low level indicator mounts,
best suit your storage needs. mounting flange for the slide gate shut-off, a fully enclosed weatherproof vented silo
Specially trained installation crews assemble skirt, and a louvered access door in the skirt of the silo is included. If two or more
the silo on a customer poured pad and silos are purchased at once, a four foot (span) crossover walkway is provided.
connect all accessories and install the
unloading and conveying system to get you up
and running.
S-5
TPSX002-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE"/,4%$34%%,/2!,5-).5-3),/3
Specifications
2AILCARUNLOADING
6ACUUM LINEOPTIONAL
HOPPERAND
VACUUMLINE
OPTIONAL
#ENTEROPENING
INCH.04
YO YOSTUB
,ADDERAND
-ANHOLDVENT SAFETYCAGE
)NSIDE COMBINATION WITH/3(!
DIAMETER REQUIREDREST
PLATFORM
)NSIDE
,OW LEVEL
HEIGHT (IGHLEVEL INDICATOR
INDICATOROPENING OPENING
,ADDER INCH/$TRUCK
FILLSTUB
$USTCOLLECTOR
!CCESS
OPTIONAL
DOOR
0IPESUPPORT
6ACUUM
BRACKET
PUMP
3LIDEGATE OPTIONAL
4OPVIEW SHUT OFF
OPTIONAL
3IDEVIEW
3"-ODELS
)NSIDEDIAMETER FTINCHES FTINCHES
Silo inside height ft {m}* 24 {7.3} 32 {9.8} 40 {12.2} 48 {14.6} 56 {17.1} 64 {20.0} 24 {7.3} 32 {9.8} 40 {12.2} 48 {14.6} 56 {17.1} 64 {20.0}
1901 2851 3802 4752 5703 6653 2923 4421 5919 7416 8914 10,412
Silo capacity 45° cone ft3 {liters} †
{53,836} {80,740} {107,673} {134,577} {161,509} {188,412} {82,779} {125,203} {167,626} {210,021} {242,444} {294,868}
Construction material ASTM A570 Grade 40 Steel or 5052 - H-32 Aluminum
Wind load 100 mph
7EIGHTlb {kg} ‡
6064 7616 9168 108,40 13,136 15,352 9257 10,977 13,757 16,337 18,787 22,477
Shipping (empty)
{2750} {3454} {4159} {4917} {5958} {6963} {4199} {4979} {6240} {7410} {8522} {10,195}
82,104 121,656 161,248 200,920 241,256 281,472 126,177 187,817 250,517 312,977 375,347 438,957
Full to capacity
{37,242} {55,182} {73,141} {91,136} {109,432} {127,673} {57,233} {85,192} {113,633} {141,964} {170,254} {199,107}
3"-ODELS Specification Notes

)NSIDE$IAMETER FTINCHES * For overall height add 43 inches to inside height to account for
Silo inside height ft {m}* 24 {7.3} 32 {9.8} 40 {12.2} 48 {14.6} 56 {17.1} 64 {20.0} the guardrail.
†
0ERFORMANCE#HARACTERISTICS Cones are available in 45° for pellets, except PET; 60° for
powdered materials and PET materials. Reduce silo capacity
Silo capacity 45° cone ft3 {liters} 3657 5871 8085 10,299 12,513 14,727 for 60° cone. 12 feet, 3 11/16 inches, subtract 289 ft3 ; and
†
{103,566} {166,267} {228,967} {291,668} {354,368} {417,069} 15 feet, 4 5/8 inches, subtract 592 ft3; and 18 feet,
Construction material ASTM A570 Grade 40 Steel or 5052 - H-32 Aluminum 5 9/16 inches subtract 1,272 ft3.
‡
Wind load 100 mph Weight is based on 40 lb/ft3 materials.
Snow load 40 lbs/ft2 Roof live and dead load design is 25 lbs/ft2.
7EIGHTlb {kg} ‡ Reference foundation drawings: 12 feet, 3 11/16 inches
bolted, 501-207 series; 15 feet, 4 5/8 inches bolted, 501-209
13,049 16,145 18,473 22,901 26,312 30,536 series; and 18 feet, 5 9/16 inches bolted, 501-217 series.
Shipping (empty)
{5919} {7323} {8379} {10,387} {11,935} {13,851}
Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair
159,329 250,985 341,873 434,861 526,832 619,616 representative for the most current information.
Full to capacity
{72,270} {113,845} {155,071} {197,249} {238,967} {281,052}
S-6
TPSX006-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE-/"),%352'%").3
Mobile Storage;
Easy Access
Conair offers a complete line of in-plant mobile surge bins
for convenient storage of a variety of materials. Stackable
Conair Mobile Surge Bins accommodate your storage needs
with a range of bin capacities from 10 ft3 to 50 ft3.* For critical
applications requiring a contamination free environment, bins
can be constructed in stainless steel with or without lids.
* Usable volume based on a 30° angle of repose.
-ODEL-"
Shown with optional two-peice
cover, 4-way vacuum ports,
and casters.
Mobile Storage for Blended or Virgin Materials
Conair’s Mobile Surge Bins are designed to

help you with storage and space issues in ` 7IDERANGEOFCAPACITIES
your plant. With incorporated two-way fork- Usable capacities are available from 350 pounds {159 kg} with the MB44-10 model,
lift channels, the bins can be easily lifted and to up to 1750 pounds {794 kg} with the MB44-50 model.
moved from either side. These bins are also ` ªHOPPERCONE
easy to stack, allowing you to save valuable The 60° cone ensures material flow for almost all free and non-free flowing materials.
plant space by stacking one bin on top of
another (up to a maximum of three bins high). ` 3TACKABLEFORSPACECONSERVATION
Mobile Surge Bins can be stacked up to three bins high to save valuable floor space.
Optional four-way vacuum ports and a 12-inch This, in conjunction with the small footprint makes these Conair bins an excellent way
discharge opening with flange allow for quick to maximize your plant square footage.
and easy evacuation and cleanout of the bin.
` "OTTOMDRAINFOREASYMATERIALREMOVAL
Available in painted carbon steel with The bottom drain works with the 60° cone to allow for easy material flow out of the
epoxy coated interior, or optional stainless bin.
steel, the Mobile Surge Bin is perfect for
any environment, including cleanroom ` (EAVYDUTYGAUGESTEELCONSTRUCTION
applications, and suitable for any material. Made to last for years, these Mobile Surge Bins are created to be a reliable piece in
your plant. The strong angle-iron frame not only allows for stacking bins, but also
protects the cone, vacuum ports and casters (if equipped) from damage.
` /VERSIZEDVACUUMPORTS
Suction wands up to three inches in diameter can be used with the Conair Mobile
Surge Bins. Another advantage of Conair’s experience and design, the oversized
vacuum ports allow for quicker cleanout and application variety.
S-7
TPSX006-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE-/"),%352'%").3
Features Options
• Painted carbon steel construction • Four-way vacuum ports
• Epoxy coated interior • Casters*
• 4-inch square discharge with stainless steel slide gate • 12-inch discharge opening with flange
• Two-way fork-lift channels for easy stacking • 1 piece, 2 piece sliding cover
• 60° cone for free and non-free flowing material • Stainless steel construction
• Special paint
• Bag opening grate and blade
Specifications
"AND#
-ODEL (OPPERCONEANGLE 7IDTHDEPTH (EIGHT #APACITY 5SABLECAPACITY† 5SABLEVOLUME† 3HIPPINGWEIGHT

STANDARD inches {cm}"AND# inches {cm} ! lb {kg} lb {kg} ft3 {m3} lb {kg}
MB44-10 60° 44 {112} 43.375 {110.2} 665 {302} 350 {159} 10 {0.28} 525 {238}
MB44-20 60° 44 {112} 55.375 {140.7} 1085 {492} 700 {318} 20 {0.57} 580 {263}
MB44-30 60° 44 {112} 64.375 {163.5} 1470 {667} 1050 {476} 30 {0.85} 625 {283}
MB44-40 60° 44 {112} 73.5 {186.7} 1820 {826} 1400 {635} 40 {1.10} 670 {304}
MB44-50 60° 44 {112} 82.5 {209.6} 2170 {984} 1750 {794} 50 {1.40} 720 {327}
* Adds 1.25 inches {31.8 mm} to height.
†
Usable capacity based on a material with a bulk density of 35 lbs/ft3 {561 kg/m3} with a 30° angle of repose.
Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair representative for the most current information.
S-8
TPSX007-0917 MATERIAL STORAGEIN-PLANT SURGE BINS
Easy Storage;
Easy Access
Conair offers a complete line of in-plant surge bins for
convenient storage of a variety of blended or virgin materials.
Conair Surge Bins accommodate your storage needs with a
range of bin capacities from 17 ft3 to 514 ft3.*
For critical applications, bins can be constructed of

contamination free stainless steel. Conair Surge Bin lids are
pre-drilled to accept your choice of Conair loading and blending
equipment.
* Usable volume based on a 30° angle of repose.
In-Plant Surge Bin

(Shown with optional
12-inch {305 mm}
manual slide gate.)
Easy Access For Blended Or Virgin Materials
In-Plant Surge Bins are available in a wide

variety of sizes and usable capacities (600 ` Wide range of sizes to meet your needs
– 8800 lbs {272 – 3992 kg}) to suit your Conair’s storage options are ideal for processors of any size, from the SB48 model,
material storage needs. With 20 inches for processors with smaller needs to keep materials ready for distribution, to the
{508 mm} of clearance under the discharge, SB84 bins, which can hold a truly massive amount of pellets.
there is plenty of room to place a manual
` Heavy duty construction
slide gate or distribution box under the bin. If Our surge bins are made using 14-gauge steel, with a painted exterior and an epoxy-
you need more room, optional leg extensions coated interior to reduce wear and tear over time.
designed for gaylord discharge can be added,
which will increase the clearance to 80 inches ` Hopper cone options to work with any material
{2032 mm}. Two cone configurations are available for the hoppers, depending on the material
they will be storing. Hoppers for pellet storage usually have a 45° cone bottom. For
Standard as painted carbon steel with an
powder and hard-to-flow materials the hopper includes a 60° cone.
epoxy coated interior, or optional as stainless
steel, the In-Plant Surge Bin is perfect for any ` Easy to check and access contents
material or application. The included strip All surge bins come with a sight glass on the side to check material levels, and a
sight glass makes it easy to see the current hinged cover on the top with an access door.
material level in the 45° hopper cone (60°
hopper cone option is available). 1.25-inch ` Easy mounting design
{31.75 mm} NPT (plugged) level sensor Surge bins have a bottom flange for mounting a distribution box, takeaway augers or
openings come as standard on the bin for slide gate.
easily adding level sensors.
Conair’s experienced Sales team is ready to
help you select the size, style, and features
that will best suit your storage needs.
www.conairgroup.com | info@conairgroup.com | 724 584 5500

S-9
Features Custom mounting pattern

Access door
• One strip sight glass • 16.25-inch square {413 mm}
(SB48-17 model only) flange bottom with 15-inch
Two strip sight glasses on square {381 mm} bolt
all other models pattern (IBO9)
• Painted exterior • Epoxy coated interior
• Lid with two access panels • 45° hopper cone
and one bolted section
with standard IB04 or IB07 • 1.25-inch {31.75 mm} NPT
mounting pattern level sensor openings
(plugged)
Options A
• 4-inch {102 mm} drop tube • Leg extensions*

with butterfly valve. • for barrel or drum (SB48 models)
• for gaylord discharge
• 12-inch {305 mm} manual Sight glass
slide gate (all other models).
* Add 5 ft {152.4 cm} to height
• 60° hopper cone for non
free-flowing materials • Stainless steel construction
• Ladder • Special paint
• Handrail D E
Note: 3 bins shown with optional leg extensions, safety ladder, and handrail.

S-
Specifications
SB45, 45º cone, SB45, 60º cone, SB60, 45º cone, SB60, 60º cone,
side view side view side view side view
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
C
SB48, top view SB60, top view
D D
E E
Models SB48-17 SB48-47 SB60-64 SB60-94 SB60-125

Performance characteristics
Capacity lb {kg} 1000 {454} 2000 {907} 3000 {1361} 4000 {1814} 5000 {2268}
Usable capacity* lb {kg} 600 {272} 1600 {725} 2200 {998} 3300 {1497} 4400 {1996}
Volume at high level sensor ft3 {m3} 17 {0.48} 47 {1.3} 64 {1.8} 94 {2.6} 125 {3.5}
Volume at low level sensor ft3 {m3} 4 {0.11}
Dimensions inch {mm}†

A - Standard height* (45° cone) 53 {1346} 75 {1905} 78 {1981} 92 {2337} 107 {2718}
B - Clearance under discharge 20 {508}
C - Leg extension height 60 {1524}
D - Length 48 {1219} 65 {1651}
E - Width 48 {1219} 65 {1651}
Shipping weight lb {kg}
45° cone unit 670 {304} 750 {340} 835 {379} 1000 {454} 1040 {472}
60° cone unit 750 {340} 830 {376} 925 {420} 1020 {463} 1190 {540}
* Usable capacity based on a material with a bulk density of 35 lbs/ft3 {561 kg/m3} with a 30° angle of repose.
Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair representative for the most current information.

S-
Specifications SB72, 60º cone, SB72 and SB84, SB60, 45º cone,
side view top view side view
A
A

Capacity lb {kg} 6000 {2722} 7000 {3175} 8000 {3629} 9000 {4082} 10000 {4536}
Usable capacity* lb {kg} 4700 {2131} 5700 {2585} 6700 {3039} 7800 {3538} 8800 {3992}
D - Length 79 {2007}
E - Width 79 {2007}
45° cone unit 1270 {576} 1330 {603} 1830 {830} 1850 {839} 2120 {961}
60° cone unit 1280 {581} 1350 {612} 1860 {844} 2070 {939} 2170 {984}

Capacity lb {kg} 12,000 {5443} 14,000 {6350} 16,000 {7257} 18,000 {8164} 20,000 {9072}
Usable capacity* lb {kg} 10,000 {4536} 12,000 {5443} 14,000 {6350} 16,000 {7257} 18,000 {8164}
D - Length 91 {2311}
E - Width 91 {2311}
45° cone unit 2220 {1007} 3700 {1678} 4180 {1896} 3880 {1760} 4550 {2063}
60° cone unit 2220 {1007} 3800 {1724} 4240 {1923} 4290 {1945} 4620 {2095}
* Usable capacity based on a material with a bulk density of 35 lbs/ft3 {561 kg/m3} with a 30° angle of repose.

S-
TPSX005-0917 GAYLORD TILTERS299 AND 120 SERIES
Safely Directs Materials

to Conveyor Feed Tubes
Conair Tilters provide a safe method of moving free-flowing
materials to one corner of a shipping container for complete
emptying by a vacuum loader. They are built tough to withstand
heavy use on production floors.
The tilters can be used beside your processing machines or in

remote central material storage rooms to assure a constant flow
of material throughout your plant. Once emptied, simple foot-
or hand-operated controls level the container for removal and
replacement. 120 Series Raised
Platform Tilter
Floor Level Or Raised Platform Models
Gaylord tilters are available for holding

containers weighing up to 3,000 lbs. ` Wide capacity range
Capacities for 1200 lb, 1500 lb and 3000 lb loads.
Floor level tilters are either hand or foot
` Prevent material voids
operated and can hold containers up to
Air or electric-operated vibrators are available to prevent material voids.
1500 lb. They can be set for either manual or
automatic operation. ` No electricity required
Compressed air operated.
It can be easily loaded by a hand truck
or pallet mover because the box platform ` Automatic or manual operation
is flat on the floor. A heavy-duty air bag Tilters can be set for either manual or automatic operation. The tilters will
device slowly fills with compressed air to automatically swing up as material is emptied to assure a constant flow of material.
automatically tilt the platform and container
as it is emptied. An adjustable conveyor feed
tube support is included.
299 Series Floor
Raised platform tilters are operated by heavy- Level Tilter
duty air cylinders. This type of tilter is adjusted
so that it will start lifting the container when
less than 500 lbs remain in the box.
Then it slowly tips the box to a 45º angle to
assure smooth continuous feeding to the
vacuum feed tube.

S-13
TPSX005-0917 GAYLORD TILTERS299 AND 120 SERIES
Specifications
Gaylord Floor Level Tilter Gaylord Raised Platform Tilter*
A A
B B
Models 299-276-01 299-276-02 120-004 120-005 Specification Notes
Performance characteristics * Allow a minimum of 30 inches on each side of

Capacity lb {kg} 2500 {1134} 1200 {544} 3000 {1361} tilter for working area.
†
Height is 54 inches from the floor with wand
Tilter type floor level raised platform
holder fully extended.
Control type foot hand foot Specifications may change without notice.
Dimensions inch {mm}† Consult with a Conair representative for the most
current information.
A - Height † 36 {914} 46.5 {1181} 74 {1880}
B - Width 52 {1321} 40 {1016} 50 {1270}
Length 73 {1854} 40 {1016} 50 {1270}
Weight lb {kg}
Options
Shipping 450 {204} 540 {245} 1450 {658}
• Electric or pneumatic vibration kits
Compressed air requirement
• Full-tilt indicator light
40 psi @ 2 CFM 80 psi @ 2 CFM
{2.75 bars} {5.52 bars} • Gaylord cover
How it works
Raised Platform Tilters Floor Level Tilters
Once placed so that containers can be loaded and removed from Once these heavy-duty tilters are placed on a level floor and
the platform, the air regulator is connected to a compressed air connected to an appropriate compressed air source, a full container
supply and a full container is placed on the platform with a hand is placed in the platform by a lift truck.
truck. When the container is about half empty, the operator opens
An air regulator and air filter are provided to operate the air cylinder
the air flow, inflating a heavy-duty air bag which tilts the platform.
which tilts the platform. Once the container is about half empty,
The correct adjustment is made when the tilter begins to lift the
air pressure is adjusted to start lifting the platform. From this
container. This becomes the correct setting for all future containers
point on tilting is automatic. As material is emptied, the platform
of that weight. The hand or foot control remains on at this point and
continues to tilt. The larger model 120-005 is designed for extra
the platform will continue to tilt automatically as material is removed
heavy container tilting. Again, about half the material should be
from the container. The tilter can also be manually operated after
emptied before setting the tilt air pressure. Once the model tilts past
the container is about half empty and can be leveled by the control
the counterbalance point, a cam shuts the air off to the cylinder to
for container changes.
maintain safe movement.

S-1
TPSX008-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE MONITOR2%3).,%6%,$)30,!9
Material Monitoring;
One Central Location
The Conair Resin Level Display (RLD) monitors material levels for
up to 40 silos or surge bins. All material levels are conveniently
displayed from one centralized control platform.
Capable of being configured to monitor low, mid or high levels of

material within a silo or surge bin, the RLD can be customized to fit
your material level monitoring needs. Audible and visual warning
indicators will energize to alert you to individual warnings for each
monitored silo or surge bin.
2ESIN,EVEL$ISPLAY2,$
Intuitive User Interface, Configurable Monitoring
The Resin Level Display (RLD) offers a

complete overview of your material storage ` 1UALITYRELIABLECONTROL
status with an intuitive Allen Bradley High quality, high reliability, time and field-proven Allen-Bradley components are used
PanelView C400 user interface. The interface with Conair’s Resin Level Display.
provides material level readouts of up
to 40 silos or surge bins with graphical ` 3ELECTABLEMONITORINGCONFIGURATIONS
representations along with password There are three configurations of material level monitoring for the RLD. Chose to
protected alarm configuration capabilities. monitor up to 40 silos or surge bins that only require low material level sensing, 20
silos or surge bins with low and high level sensing or 12 silos or surge bins with low,
An Allen Bradley Micrologix 1500 mid and high level sensing.
programmable logic controller (PLC) is
connected to sensors located at key points ` #USTOMIZABLEALARMCONFIGURATION
(low, mid or high depending upon application) Depending on the silo’s or surge bin’s application, material level alarms can be set to
on a silo or surge bin to monitor the current not alarm, alarm once or alarm on a timed basis to indicate an alarm condition for low
level of material. or high material levels.
The RLD can be mounted anywhere within ` 3IMPLE TO USEINTERFACE

your plant for easy access to view your The RLD touchscreen color display offers intuitive operator
system’s material supply and to keep close usage with visual displays that show current material levels.
watch on material levels. Each monitored silo or surge bin has its own graphical
representation.
S-15
TPSX008-0317 MATERIAL STORAGE MONITOR2%3).,%6%,$)30,!9
Specifications
-ODEL 2ESIN,EVEL$ISPLAY2,$
INCH
[MM] 0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS
INCH
[MM] Maximum number of vessels* 40, 20, 12
INCH Programmable logic controller Allen Bradley (A/B) Micrologix 1500
[MM]
Operator interface A/B Panelview C400 4 inch {102mm}
Output voltage to devices 24 VDC
INCH Input voltage to devices 24 VDC
[MM]
Power/amps 120 VAC/10 amps/60 Hz
$IMENSIONSOFCONTROLCABINETinches {mm}
!
A - Height 24.0 {609.6}
B - Width 24.0 {609.6}
C - Depth 8.6 {218.4}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg}
Installed 60 {27}
INCH Shipping 72 {32}
[MM]
!LARMNOISELEVEL
" #
103 dbA @ 2 ft
Options Specification Notes

* Dependent upon monitoring level(s) configuration.
• Ethernet communications optional with ENI module Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair representative for
the most current information.
• Continuous silo level monitoring (with 4, 8 or 12 available
quantities of analog input modules) !PPLICATION.OTE
• Ethernet communications with continuous silo level monitoring Total distance of the cabling from the RLD to the silo(s) or surge bin(s) should
(with 4, 8 or 12 available quantities of analog input modules) account for reasonable slack using an 18 gauge cable. The number of conductors
within the cable is application specific, contact a Conair representative for
• Remote alarm horn application recommendations.
Features
• Configurable low and high alarms
• Recurring alarms and alarm times (15 minutes - 4 hours)
• Graphical representations of silo monitoring
• PLC (programmable logic controller) backup and restore
• Up to 12 analog inputs for material monitoring sensors (For
example, ultrasonic or yo-yo monitoring systems with 4-20 mA
outputs.)
• Audible and visual alarms
• Configurable contacts (normally open and normally closed) used
with paddle switch or capacitance level sensors
• Security (Each security level is individually password protected)
RLD Warning Messages Alarm Configurations

!LARM7ARNING3CREEN 2ESIN,EVEL$ISPLAY!LARM#ONFIGURATIONS
,OWANDHIGH ,OWMIDAND
Warning messages with associated -ONITOREDLEVELOFMATERIALo ,OW,EVEL
LEVELS HIGHLEVELS
audible and visual indicators will
Up to 40 material vessels l
be activated for individual silo or
surge bin level alarms. Pressing the
Acknowledge All button will silence
†
only the audible and visual indicators. The maximum number of monitored vessels is dependent upon RLD configuration.
Only when the alarm condition is
satisfied will the alarm be cleared.
S-16
TPSX009-0317 -!4%2)!,34/2!'%!##%33/2)%3
Material Storage Accessory Equipment
0OINT,EVEL3ENSORS
• Capacitance Sensors and Level Switches
!PPLICATION
• Monitors the level of material within a silo or surge bin.
• Specific size ranges to fit with your material storage
requirements.
2OTARYPADDLESWITCH
#ONTINUOUS,EVEL3ENSORS
• 3-D Units
!PPLICATION
• Monitors the current level of material within a silo.
requirements.
• Continuous level sensing.
• Used with various types of conveying material.
$SENSINGDEVICES
,OAD#ELLS
• Monitors silos or other large material storage equipment by
measuring overall mass.
• Integrated mounting within your storage vessel’s legs or
gussets.
requirements.
,OAD3TAND
S-17
TPSX009-0317 -!4%2)!,34/2!'%!##%33/2)%3
Material Storage Accessory Equipment
6ALVES
• Pneumatic valves
• Diverter Valves
!PPLICATION
• For dry bulk solids using: gravity flow, dilute phasing or
vacuum conveying.
• Controls the rate, source or shut-off of material flow of non-
abrasive to moderately abrasive materials (powders, granulars
or pellets).
0NEUMATICKNIFEGATE 4WO WAYFLEXTUBEDIVERTER
• Conveying material from multiple sources for use with a single
line material feed tube.
-AGNETS
• Metal-outs
!PPLICATION
• Removing metal fines from free-flowing material.
• Preventing equipment damage and material contamination
due to ferrous material.
• To create a contamination-free material flow.
• Used for high-flow applications.
$RAWER-AGNET -ETALDETECTOR
#ONVEYING(IGH 7EAR%LBOWS
• Ceramic-lined elbows
• Stainless Steel elbows
• Nickel-plated elbows
!PPLICATION
• For high throughput and/or highly abrasive material conveying
applications.
• Replacing conventional conveying elbows, reducing downtime
and loss of material.
(IGH WEARELBOWS • Reduce angel-hair and streamers.
S-18
Conveying
Storage
Self-Contained Vacuum Loaders

4,--ODEL4UBE,OADERS #
!CCESS4-!,3ERIES,OADERS #
%:,OAD4-3ERIES,OADERS #
$UST"EATER$"-ODEL,OADERS #
4,!-ODEL4UBE,OADERS #
0-3ERIES0OWDER,OADERS #
Compressed Air Material Loaders

Conveyin
y g #!-, %6"4O"ARREL 3YSTEM #
#!-, %6'4O'AYLORD 3YSTEM #
Central Vacuum Receivers

4,2-ODEL4UBE,OADERS #
!CCESS4-!23ERIES2ECEIVER #
Drying +,OADERS+AND+#2-ODEL #
$URA,OAD$, 3ERIES #
&ILTER,ESS&, 3ERIES #
023ERIES0OWDER2ECEIVERS #
Conveying System Controls

Ble
lending/Feediing %,# -AND%,# -ODELS #
%,3 #
&,8 0LUS #
Vacuum Pumps/Dust Collectors

2'3ERIES6ACUUM0UMPS #
Heatt Transfer
0$3ERIES0OSITIVE$ISPLACEMENT0UMPS #
,$03ERIES,ONG$ISTANCE0UMPS #
$UST#OLLECTORS$#$#AND$#-ODELS #
#YCLONE$UST#OLLECTOR #
S ze Reducttio
Si ion
n
Bulk Conveying Systems
#YCLING,OADER #
625AND6ACUUM2AILCAR
5NLOADING3YSTEM #
2ESIN4RACKER4-&LOW-ETER #
Upstrea
eam
Continued on next page
Downstream
Conveying (continued)
Storage
Material Distribution
2ESIN3ELECTION3TATION #
),0)NVISIBLE,INE0Roofing #
-60 -ATERIAL6ISION0Roofing #
!UTO2ESIN3ELECTOR!3 #
3ELECTOR0LATES #
7AVE#ONVEYING4-3YSTEM#
!CCESS4-*)4-ATERIAL(OPPERS #
"ULK$ISTRIBUTION"OXES#
Conveyin
y g Material Line Valves
#OMMON,INE6ALVE #
2ATIO6ALVE #
0URGE6ALVE #
!DJUSTABLE0URGE6ALVE3INGLEAND$UALMODELS #
Drying
Material Hoppers
-INIATURE(ANDY(OPPER #
Accessories
!UDIBLE6ISUAL!LARMAND!LARM+ITS #
Ble
lending/Feediing -'-AGNET3ERIES #
&ILTER$RAWER #
0ELLBOW2ESIN#ONVEYING(ARDWARE #
Heatt Transfer
S ze Reducttio
Si ion
n
Upstrea
eam
Downstream
Conveying Quick Reference
4HROUGHPUT2ANGE
LBHR
Evacuation
Feed (JIT)
Stainless
Material
Loading
Loading
Loading
Hopper
Carbon
Single
Direct
1000
Ratio
Steel
Steel
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
750
Bin
25
50
-/$%,3
3ELF #ONTAINED #ONVEYING

&EATURES
,OADING -ETHOD
4,- )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z z z z z z
!, )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z z z { z {
!, )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z z z { z {
%:, )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z z { { z .!
%:, )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z z { { z .!
$" )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z { z z { z {
$"BRUSH )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z { z z { z {
4,! )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z z z z z
#!-, %6" #OMPRESSED!IR z z z
#!-, %6' #OMPRESSED!IR z z z
0- )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z { z z {
0-"RUSHLESS )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z { z z {
0-"RUSHLESS )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z { z z {
Evacuation
2ECEIVER6OLUME2ANGEFT
Feed (JIT)
Stainless
Material
Loading
Loading
Loading
Hopper
Carbon
Single
Direct
Ratio
Steel
Steel
0.14
0.25
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
Bin
-/$%,3
6ACUUM2ECEIVERS #ONVEYING-ETHOD &EATURES
4,2 #ENTRAL6ACUUM z z z z z {
!2 #ENTRAL6ACUUM { z z z {
+,OADER #ENTRAL6ACUUM {z

{z
{ z { z {
$URA,OAD #ENTRAL6ACUUM { z z z {
&ILTER,ESS #ENTRAL6ACUUM z { z z z {
02 02 #ENTRAL6ACUUM z { z z {
-ODELDEPENDENT
z &EATURE { /PTION
6ACUUM3YSTEM -AXIMUM.UMBER -AXIMUM.UMBER 3OURCE 2ATIO 0URGE

#ONTROLS OF2ECEIVERS OF0UMPS 6ALVES #ONTROL #ONTROL
%,# OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
&,8 0LUS BACKUP OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
%,3 OPTIONAL OPTIONAL

Conveying Quick Reference
#&-2ANGE 0UMP(P
11.5
8.45
16.9
100
150
200
250
300
350
3.4
6.2
5.1
25
40
75
2'0UMPS 3UPPORTED$UST#OLLECTOR3IZES
2' $# $UST#OLLECTOR z
#&-2ANGE 0UMP(P
10.0
15.0
25.0
100
150
200
250
300
350
5.0
7.5
25
40
75
0OSITIVE$ISPLACEMENT 3UPPORTED$UST
0UMPS #OLLECTOR3IZES
0$ $# $# $UST#OLLECTOR z
#&-2ANGE 0UMP(P
10.0
12.0
100
150
200
250
300
350
5.0
7.5
25
40
75
,ONG$ISTANCE0UMPS 3UPPORTED$UST#OLLECTOR3IZES
,$0 $# $UST#OLLECTOR z
,$0 $# $UST#OLLECTOR
$UST#OLLECTOR &ILTER!REAFT
$# $UST#OLLECTOR
$# $UST#OLLECTOR
$# $UST#OLLECTOR
#YCLONE$UST#OLLECTOR #YCLONE
z &EATURE { /PTION
TPCX038-0118 SELF-CONTAINED VACUUM LOADERSTLM MODEL TUBE LOADER
Small Package,
Big Loading Performance
The compact TLM model Tube Loader makes it easy to provide
trouble-free automatic loading wherever you need it. Without
a traditional conical hopper, the exclusive tube loader design
means that your materials will always flow easily from the
loader with no bridging or interruptions. Although small, the
TLM vacuum loader provides material loading performance
comparable to much larger units with a 4.5-inch diameter
discharge valve and up to 150 lbs/hr of material transfer. You
can be sure that material will never become lodged inside the
loader, holding up your production. TLM TLM
Hopper Loading Direct Feed
Model with ELC Model with ELC
Control Control (Shown
with 2 lb glass
Compact, Economical, Trouble-Free Loading chamber)
Available as both a hopper loader or a direct

feed “throat loader,” the TLM’s compact size ` Rates up to 150 pounds per hour
and ease of use make it a perfect fit for a Keep your machines full with material conveyed from up to 20 feet away.
wide range of loading needs.
` Optional ratio valve
Quick disassembly features allow wide open The ratio valve allows regrind to be alternately loaded with virgin material. The
access to the filter and loader body for fast ControlMateTM pendant (optional) allows setting V/R load times.
material changes and filter maintenance. ` Optional remote on/off
The 3/8 Hp vacuum motor provides up to Optional pendant on/off switch saves machine climbing
150 lbs/hr {68 kg/hr} conveying at nearly or “plug-pulling” for easy on/off loader control.
20 feet {6 m}. A blowback option extends ` All stainless construction
filter life with an adjustable, independent The TLM is constructed of 100% electropolished 304
filter cleaning cycle. Hose and feed tube are stainless steel.
included so that your loader is ready to go to
work, right out of the box. ` Easy-access hinged motor
No tools, swing clips open for easy maintenance.
A simple control package provides a user
adjustable loading cycle to match your loading
cycle to distance and material characteristics.
Add the ControlMateTM pendant remote

control for advanced loading features. Add
on the optional ratio valve for virgin and
regrind material loading capability with the
ControlMate pendant.

C-1
TPCX038-0118 SELF-CONTAINED VACUUM LOADERSTLM MODEL TUBE LOADER
The compact ratio The direct feed model Use the hopper loader
valve fits directly to the allows full view of model to keep drying,
TLM inlet for loading material flow and may blending and machine
regrind alternately with be mounted directly hoppers full of material.
virgin. A ControlMateTM to machine throats. A The large tube opening
pendant is required range of capacities are virtually eliminates
for virgin/ regrind time available. An isolator material bridging.
settings. valve may be added for
machine throats that are
not vacuum tight.
Specifications
Figure 1 - Hopper Loading Figure 2 - Direct Feed Loader Model TLM
8.25 inch 5/16 inch 1.625 inch diameter Vacuum motor 3/8 Hp-2 brush
{210 mm} {8 mm} {41.3 mm}
diameter diameter through hole
Maximum injection mold machine size 400 tons
bolt holes 4 inch Maximum extruder size inches {mm} 1.5 {38}
{101.6 mm}
Recommended throughput* lbs/hr {kg/hr} 150 {68}
7.375 inch
{187 mm} 4 inch Maximum conveying distance ft {m} 20 {6.1}
diameter {101.6 mm}
bolt pattern
Loader diameter inches {mm} 4.5 {114.3}
6-5/8 inch {167 mm} Direct feed glass hoppers require Loader volume cubic ft {liters} 0.1 {4.0}
clearance hole required match-drilling to the machine throat. Material/vacuum line size inches {mm} OD 1.5 {38.1}
Loader maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82}
1.625 inch diameter
Hopper Loading {41.3 mm} Available voltages, 50/60 Hz 120/220 VAC
through hole
Amps @ 120 VAC 8
6 inch
{152.4 mm} Amps @ 220 VAC 4
Compressed air requirements 125 maximum psi, 1.4 CFM, NPT fitting: 1/4 inch
6 inch
Filter area inch2 {cm2} 31 {201}
{152.4 mm} Filter type Spun-Bond polyester
A
Hopper Loading Model
Model TLM
Dimensions inches {mm} †
B A - Height above mounting plate 15 {381}
B - Height to center of material inlet 5.5 {140}
C - Depth below mounting plate 5.0 {127}
C D- Clearance hole diameter 6-5/8 {167}
Mounting details See Figure 1
D Approximate weight lb {kg}
Installed 19 {8.6}
Direct Feed Shipping 42 {19.1}
(Shown with 4 lb glass chamber
and iIsolator valve.) Direct Feed Model
Model TLM
Viewing chamber model 1 lb 2 lb 4 lb 15 lb 25 lb
Viewing chamber capacity lb {kg} 1 {0.5} 2 {0.9} 4 {1.81} 15 {6.8} 25 {11.3}
Isolator valve option option standard standard standard
Dimensions inches {mm}
A - Height above mounting plate 24.4 {619.8} 29.6 {751.8} 26.8 {680.7} 32.3 {820.4} 44.3 {1125.2}
B - Height to center of material inlet 12.5 {317.5} 17.6 {447.0} 16.8 {426.7} 22.3 {566.4} 34.3 {871.2}
Mounting details See Figure 2
Approximate weight lb {kg}
Installed 20 {9.0} 22 {10.0} 46 {20.9} 48 {21.8} 77 {34.9}
A Shipping 34 {15.4} 36 {16.3} 74 {33.6} 96 {43.5} 105 {47.6}
* Throughputs are based on conveying virgin material from close distances. If you convey dusty materials and regrinds, we recommend ordering
the optional compressed air blowback feature, and reducing the expected throughput to 75 lb/hr. Conveying at higher throughputs could result
B in shortened brush and filter life. For higher throughputs, ask about the DustBeater models or consult with a Conair representative about central
vacuum loaders.
†
The optional isolator valve adds 1.625 inches {41.3 mm} to the height.
All TLM Loaders are shipped with 15 ft {4.572 m} of flex hose and a vertical feed tube.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the most current information.

C-2
TPCX043-0118 SELF-CONTAINED VACUUM LOADERSACCESSTM AL SERIES LOADER
Easier Access,
for Simplified Cleaning
Cleaning and maintaining your loaders is now faster, easier
and safer than ever before. That's because the unique angled
canister design of the Conair AccessTM Loader (AL) means
workers don't need to climb as high or work as hard to service
the drop-in filter or wipe out the stainless steel canister.
A hinged lid opens easily, without tools, tilts back and locks out
of the way safely leaving both hands free for cleaning or service. Access Model AL-2
with ELC Control
Value-added Features at No Additional Cost
The AccessTM Loader (AL) Series delivers all the

performance and reliability you expect from ` The world’s most reliable discharge valve
Conair, plus added features and benefits at no Surrounded by protective feet, the large, cast aluminum outlet closes off with a
extra cost. The hinged lid tilts back and locks stainless steel, weight-biased flapper against a rugged, high temperature seal.
out of the way. Pulsed filter cleaning is included The non-contact demand level sensor is fool-proof.
as standard and greatly extends operating time
` Select option packages to suit your needs
before filter cleaning is required.
Popular options are combined for easy selection and integrated into your
The powerful vacuum motor is protected by a loader purchase.
sound-dampening plastic housing that is both
` Full-featured Control
attractive and durable. For more challenging
The Easy Loading Control (ELC) and optional
loading applications, the AL can be supplied
ControlMateTM pendant provide simple, reliable loading
with a long-life, extra powerful brushless motor.
operation and can also control line purging, ratio
Access Loaders are equipped with Conair loading and many other loading parameters.
Easy Loading Controls (ELC) featuring a
graphical illustration of loader functions with ` Optional customizable ratio valve
The ratio valve’s top and bottom material inlets can be conveniently positioned facing
LED lights. Expanded loading functions are
forward or backwards for convenient connection to your material lines.
available with use of an optional ControlMateTM
pendant. Upper Valve Casting
Ratio Valve Ratio Valve Ratio Valve

Left-side Entry Right-side Entry Opposite Entry

C-3
How it Works
Loading control The discharge flapper, when
Each on-demand loading sequence is clearly exhibited on the held open by material, prevents
graphical control face with bright, simple LED lights. loading (Figure 1). When the
A "no-load" alarm light and buzzer are included. material level drops and the
flapper swings shut (Figure 2)
the loader’s demand switch tells
the loader control to turn on the Figure 1
vacuum motor and start loading
resin. The material is drawn into
the loader body until the loading
timer stops the motor. Loading
stops and resin is dumped from
the loader while the blowback
bursts clean the filter.
Figure 2
ControlMateTM Pendant (optional)
ControlMateTM Pendant • Interchangeable programming

The ControlMate pendant One pendant can be moved from one ELC control to another to
expands your loader's program advanced settings. The same ControlMate pendant
capabilities while providing can even be used with Conair's ELC-16 central vacuum controls.
convenient remote controls Note: ControlMate pendants hold no program data, so one pendant can be
for your Access Loader.The freely used with the entire family of Conair ELC controls. Data, once programmed
with the ControlMate, safely resides in each ELC control.
ControlMate includes a 15
foot connection cable and • Change up to 16 parameters
handy holster. The additional loading functions available with the ControlMate
A helpful graphic and Pendant include:
array of LEDs, illustrate • On/Off • Load time • Fill sensor present
expanded loading • Unload time • Blowback • Load and hold
functions like ratio loading
• Load attempts • Priority demand • Purge / Adjustable
and line purging while a
Purge Valve (APV)
three-digit numeric display • Ratio layers • Fill sensor logic
shows each functions • Ratio installed
• Ratio percentage • Demand sensor
setting as it is selected. logic • Blowback installed
• Purge time
Note: Some ControlMate functions require additional components for their
ControlMateTM Function operation, i.e.: Ratio Valve, Purge Valve.
01 02 03
Push the Function button until the Use the (+) or (-) buttons located to the Once your parameters are changed there is
appropriate LED indicator is illuminated left of the Function button to change a no need for further keys strokes, all parameters
to change any loading parameter. loading parameter to your requirements. are instantly saved to the ELC control.

C-4
Features
01 04 04
Stainless steel cylindrical, Blowback solenoid for the removal of dust or
angled body provides particulates that accumulate on the loader’s
easy access to internal internal disc filter.
drop-in disc filter. 01
05
02
05 Bolt-on replaceable inlet stub (1.75 inches
All material contact {44.45 mm} standard). May be re-oriented for
surfaces are built of
02
optimum material line routing.
pristine stainless steel
or aluminum to prevent 06
corrosion.
03 03 • Cast aluminum base
ELC-M loading control with intuitive loader • Protective stand-offs
display. Enhanced control capabilities are 06
• Integral discharge flapper
possible with the optional ControlMate pendant.
Options
Stainless steel JIT Hopper Glass Hopper
Fill machine throats directly with AL-2 model Access Loaders can
"Just-In-Time" stainless steel be mounted directly to a machine
hoppers. Three sizes are available: throat with a pristine direct feed
• 10 lb capacity for AL-2 loaders glass hopper. Three capacities
• 20 lb capacity for AL-5 loaders are available to accommodate
• 40 lb capacity for AL-5 loaders throughput and/or shot size
needs. Quick disconnect clamps
Hinged lids with hold-up arms
allow easy loader removal. An
allow easy access for cleaning and
optional drop-in grate magnet
inspection without removing the
maybe provided. A height-
loader. A drop-in grate magnet may
adjustable demand sensor
be included. A remote demand sensor
bracket is included, allowing fill
bracket and clean out chute are
level adjustments.
provided on JIT-20 and JIT-40 models.
Remote semand sensor Ratio valve

Move the fill level of the vessel being loaded to an alternate level to meet This dual inlet material valve mounts to
process needs. The remote demand sensor is useful on JIT hoppers the Access Loader for loading regrind
(as shown above, left), glass hoppers, drying hoppers and bins. May alternatively with virgin material. Requires
also be used on granulators, to start off-loading when regrind is present. ControlMate pendant for V/R time settings.
Extension cables are available. Ratio Valve field retrofit kits are available.
High-wear kit Volume fill sensor Adjustable inlet positions

T-1 tool steel deflector plate is added to Provides efficient, automatic shut-off of The loader body may be
the inside of the loader’s body to reduce the vacuum motor when the loader is full. rotated to position the material
wear from highly abrasive materials, An alarm light signals if the fill sensor has inlet to the best location for
such as glass-filled compounds. not been reached during loading. your conveying line.

C-5
Specifications
B G
E
A
H
F
C Direct feed model Direct feed model

Standard model (Stainless steel hopper JIT) (Glass hopper)
Model AL-2 AL-5 AL-5* Figure 1 - AL-2

Performance characteristics 3 bolts,
5/16 inch
Loader volume ft3 {liters} 0.2 {6.0} 0.5 {14} {8 mm}
Loader body diameter inches {mm} 8.0 {203.0} 12.0 {304.0} diameter
8.25 inch bolt holes
Material inlet diameter inches {mm} 1.75 {44.45} (standard), 1.5 and 2.0 {38.1 and 50.8} (optional)
{210 mm}
Loader maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82} 180 {82} 150 {66} diameter
Vacuum motor 5/8 Hp - 2 Brush 7/8 Hp - 4 Brush 1.3 Hp - Brushless
7.375 inch
Nominal throughput† lbs/hr {kg/hr} 200.0 {90.0} 500.0 {227.0} 1000.0 {454.0} {187 mm}
Maximum conveying distance ft {m} 50.0 {15.2} 75.0 {22.9} 120.0 {36.6} diameter
6-5/8 inch {167 mm} bolt pattern
Discharge type Gravity flapper clearance hole required
Demand sensor Integrated reed switch / Remote capacitance sensor (optional)
Compressed air requirements 80 psi {5.52 bar}, 2 ft3/min {0.057 m3/min}, NPT fitting: 3/8 inch Figure 2 - AL-5
Dimensions inches {mm} 14.00 inch {355 mm}
A - Height above mounting plate 20.4 {518.2} 23.2 {588.52} diameter
13.00 inch
B - Height above mounting plate with open lid 29.7 {754.4} 34.0 {863.6} {330 mm}
C - Depth below mounting plate 4.9 {124.5} 8.1 {206.3} diameter
bolt pattern
{241 mm}
9.50 inch
D- Height to center of material inlet 8.8 {223.5} 8.6 {219.5}
Mounting details See Figure 1 See Figure 2
6 bolts,
Installed 28 {13} 49 {22} 6.00 in. 5/16 inch
Shipping 50 {23} 65 {30} {152 mm} {8 mm}
diameter
Voltage ‡ Full load amps @ VAC 12 inch {304 mm} bolt holes
8 @ 110, 4 @ 220 14 @110, 7 @ 220 17 @110, 7 @ 220 clearance hole required
Stainless Steel JIT Hopper Glass Hopper

Model AL-2 AL-5 Model AL-2
JIT Hopper model JIT-10 JIT-20 JIT-40 Glass Hopper model 3 lb 11 lb 21 lb
JIT Hopper capacity lb {kg} 11.1 {5.1} 24.3 {11.0} 41.5 {18.8} Glass Hopper capacity lb {kg} 3.0 {1.4} 11.0 {4.9} 21.0 {9.5}
Dimensions with Access Loader inches {mm} Dimensions with Access Loader inches {mm}
E - Height above mounting plate 34.3 {871.2} 42.1 {1069.3} 45.2 {148.1} G - Height above mounting plate 32.4 {822.5} 38.1 {966.7} 49.6 {1260.6}
F - Height to center of material inlet 22.6 {574.0} 27.7 {703.6} 30.8 {782.3} H - Height to center of material inlet 20.8 {527.1} 26.5 {672.6} 38.0 {965.2}
Mounting details See Figure 3 Mounting details See Figure 4
Approximate weight lb {kg} Approximate weight lb {kg}
Installed 45 {20} 80 {36} 85 {39} Installed 43 {19} 49 {22} 59 {27}
Shipping 67 {30} 96 {44} 101 {46} Shipping 65 {30} 71 {32} 82 {37}
Figure 3 - JIT Hopper Figure 4 - Glass Hopper Specification Notes

* Available with brushless motor as standard. 1.5 inch {38.1 mm} material inlet not available with
3 inch
6.0 inch {152.4 mm} square
{76 mm} brushless motor.

5.0 inch {127.0 mm}
diameter 6 inch †
Throughputs beyond the recommended ratings should not be attempted unless you are
{152 mm}
{53.8 mm}
through
2.12 inch
conveying virgin material from close distances. Higher throughputs could result in shortened brush
square
square
hole and/or filter life. For higher throughputs, consult Conair for a quote on central vacuum loaders.
‡
6 inch Brushless motors are available in 220/1/60Hz, but not in 220/1/50Hz.
{152 mm}
All Access Loaders are shipped with 15 ft {4.572 m} of flex hose and a vertical feed tube.
Note: Glass hoppers require
match-drilling to the machine throat. Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the most

C-6
TPCX067-0118 SELF-CONTAINED VACUUM LOADERSEZLOADTM SERIES LOADER
PATENT PENDING
Simplified Operation,
Budget-Friendly Loading
Equipped with a simple on/off switch, the new EZLoadTM Series
is at a price point that fits within a tight budget, and allows for
simplified operation which meets the needs of 90% or more of
everyday loading applications.
The EZLoad sets the load and dump times automatically,

requiring no programming, adjustments, or operator settings.
Simply flip the power switch to on, and walk away. At the end of Model EZL-2
production or the end of the shift, simply switch the EZLoad to (Rear of unit shown to
display the control.)
off. There are no settings to adjust, no control screens or buttons
to press; just turn it on and turn it off. It doesn’t get any easier.
The Best Loader, Simplified for EZ Loading
The new EZLoadTM Loader Series delivers all

the design advantages and reliability that you ` Simple operation for everyday use
have come to expect from a Conair loader. The Loading times are automatically adjusted and even change to accommodate different
hinged filter lid opens easily, with out tools, bulk density resins.
tilts back and locks out of the way leaving
` Cost-competitive, without losing quality
both hands free for safety and comfort.
In applications where all the available features of an advanced loading control are not
EZL Series self-contained motor loaders necessary, the EZLoadTM Loader provides all the great design features of Conair’s
are equipped with fully automatic EZLoad most popular loaders, at a reduced cost.
control. The flip of an on/off switch is all that
` Automatic control
is required for the intelligent EZLoad control
The operator turns the unit on, and the loader
to load and dump material with optimum
does the rest. The EZLoad control was specifically
vacuum cycles automatically. A horn alerts
designed for everyday loading applications where
the operator alert if a no-load event occurs.
simple operation is all that is required.
The EZL Series is perfect for users with typical
everyday loading needs. ` Operator notification of no-material
Available in two popular sizes, the EZL-2 and Equipped with a built-in alarm horn, the EZLoad control will notify the operator of a
EZL-5 are the perfect answer for applications no-material event.
where common, simple resin loading needs to ` Optional remote on/off switch
occur, and lower cost is mandatory. Commonly installed high, and out of reach, on a hopper, blender, etc., an optional
For advanced loading functions (ratio loading, remote on/off switch can even make on/off as simple as flipping a switch at
purging, etc.), see Conair’s extensive line of ground level.
Access and DustBeater Loaders.

C-7
TPCX067-0118 SELF-CONTAINED VACUUM LOADERSEZLOADTM SERIES LOADER
PATENT PENDING
Specifications
B G
E
A
H
F
D
C Direct feed model Direct feed model

Standard model (Stainless steel hopper JIT) (Glass hopper)
Model EZL-2 EZL-5 EZL-5* Figure 1 - EZL-2

Performance characteristics 3 bolts,
5/16 in.
Loader volume ft3 {liters} 0.2 {6.0} 0.5 {14.0} {8 mm}
Loader body diameter inches {mm} 8.0 {203.0} 12.0 {304.0} diameter
8.25 in. bolt holes
Material line† inches {mm} 1.75 {44.45} (Standard), 1.5 {38} and 2.0 {51} (optional) {210 mm}
Loader maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82} 180 {82} 150 {66} diameter
Vacuum motor 5/8 Hp - 2 Brush 7/8 Hp - 4 Brush 1.3 Hp - Brushless
7.375 in.
Nominal throughput† lbs/hr {kg/hr} 200.0 {90.0} 500.0 {227.0} 1000.0 {454.0} {187 mm}
Maximum conveying distance ft {m} 50.0 {15.2} 75.0 {22.9} 120.0 {36.6} diameter
6-5/8 inch {167 mm} bolt pattern
Discharge type Gravity flapper clearance hole required
Demand sensor Integrated reed switch / Remote capacitance sensor (optional)
Compressed air requirements psi recommended 80 psi {5.52 bar}, 2 ft3/min {0.057 m3/min}, NPT fitting: 3/8 inch Figure 2 - EZL-5
Dimensions inches {mm} 14.00 in. {355 mm}
A - Height above mounting plate 20.4 {518.2} 23.2 {588.52} diameter
13.00 in.
B - Height above mounting plate with open lid 29.7 {754.4} 34.0 {863.6} {330 mm}
C - Depth below mounting plate 4.9 {124.5} 8.1 {206.3} diameter
bolt pattern
{241 mm}
D- Height to center of material inlet 8.8 {223.5} 8.6 {219.5}
9.50 in.
Mounting details See Figure 1 See Figure 2
6 bolts,
Installed 28 {13} 49 {22} 6.00 in. 5/16 in.
Shipping 50 {23} 65 {30} {152 mm} {8 mm}
diameter
Voltage § Full load amps @ VAC ** 12 inch {304 mm} bolt holes
8 @ 110, 4 @ 220 14 @110, 7 @ 220 clearance hole required
Stainless Steel JIT Hopper Glass Hopper

Model EZL-2 EZL-5 Model EZL-2
JIT Hopper model 10 lb 20 lb 40 lb Glass Hopper model 3 lb 11 lb 21 lb
JIT Hopper capacity lb {kg} 11.1 {5.1} 24.3 {11.0} 41.5 {18.8} Glass Hopper capacity lb {kg} 3.0 {1.4} 11.0 {4.9} 21.0 {9.5}
Dimensions inches {mm} Dimensions inches {mm}
E - Height above mounting plate 34.3 {871.2} 42.1 {1069.3} 45.2 {148.1} G - Height above mounting plate 32.4 {822.5} 38.1 {966.7} 49.6 {1260.6}
F - Height to center of material inlet 22.6 {574.0} 27.7 {703.6} 30.8 {782.3} H - Height to center of material inlet 20.8 {527.1} 26.5 {672.6} 38.0 {965.2}
Mounting details See Figure 3 Mounting details See Figure 4
Approximate weight lb {kg} Approximate weight lb {kg}
Installed 45 {20} 80 {36} 85 {39} Installed 43 {19} 49 {22} 59 {27}
Shipping 67 {30} 96 {44} 101 {46} Shipping 65 {30} 71 {32} 82 {37}
Specification Notes Figure 3 - JIT Hopper Figure 4 - Glass Hopper

* Available with brushless motor as standard.
†
1.5 inch {38.1 mm} material line size not available with brushless motor. 3 inch
6.0 in. {152.4 mm square
‡
Throughputs beyond the recommended ratings should not be attempted unless you are conveying {76 mm}
diameter 6 in.
5.0 in. {127.0 mm
virgin material from close distances. Higher throughputs could result in shortened brush and/or {152 mm}
filter life. For higher throughputs, consult Conair for a quote on central vacuum loaders. through
{53.8 mm
square
square
212 in.
§
Brushless motors are available in 220/1/60Hz, but not in 220/1/50Hz. hole
All EZLoad Loaders are shipped with 15 ft {4.572 m} of flex hose and a vertical feed tube. 6 in.
** {152 mm}
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment.
For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to the
electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine. Note: Glass hoppers require
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the most match-drilling to the machine throat.

C-8
TPCX002-0118 SELF-CONTAINED VACUUM LOADERSDUSTBEATER DB8 AND DB12 MODELS
Rugged, Reliable,
All-Purpose Conveying
Conair’s DustBeater vacuum material loaders provide flexibility
in meeting the varying demands of conveying pelletized and
regrind materials to a hopper, bin or processing machine.
The DB8 is ideal for lower-volume conveying up to

200 lbs/hr {90.7 kg/hr}.
The DB12 provides a larger loader body, filter and vacuum motor
for higher-volume conveying, up to 1000 lbs/hr {453.6 kg/hr}.
DB8 Gravity
DB12 Discharge
Direct Feed
The Original Vacuum Motor Loader
Conair’s DustBeater, the original vacuum

motor loader, remains the most reliable ` Convey up to 1000 lbs/hr
loader in the world. With its Easy Loading A DB12 equipped with the optional 1.3 Hp brushless vacuum motor will convey up to
Control (ELC) and wide range of options, 1,000 lbs/hr {453.6 kg/hr}.
the DustBeater series meets your most
demanding loading needs. Each model ` Durable, powder-coated steel construction
provides powerful conveying, is easy to set- Each loader comes standard in carbon steel and is available in optional stainless steel.
up and simple to maintain. And an optional
` Choice of discharges
brushless motor (DB12 model) extends motor
Select gravity discharge for hopper loading or direct feed to deliver materials straight
life indefinitely, with no brush maintenance.
to the machine throat.
The optional ControlMateTM pendant allows you
to load regrind along with virgin material, purge ` Easy maintenance
the conveying line, adjust blow back pulses Plug-in connections, tool-less entry and drop-in filter make workhorse loaders
and load and hold. Built-in security levels allow easy to maintain.
easy parameter viewing of simple day-to-day
` Simple, intuitive control
settings, yet secure the critical settings.
The included Easy Loading Control (ELC) provides
A choice of loader configuration allows direct reliable control of all common loading functions.
loading to machine throats or hopper loading The optional ControlMateTM pendant provides remote
to bins and hoppers. control and opens up advanced loading features
like line purging, ratio loading, and much, much more.

C-9
How it Works
Loading control The discharge flapper, when held
Each on-demand open by material, prevents loading
loading sequence (Figure 1). When the material level
is clearly exhibited drops and the flapper swings shut
on the graphical (Figure 2) the loader’s demand switch
control face with tells the loader control to turn on the
bright, simple vacuum motor and start loading resin.
LED lights. A The material is drawn into the loader
"no-load" alarm body until the loading timer stops
light and buzzer the motor. Loading stops and resin
Figure 1 Figure 2
are included. is dumped from the loader while the
blowback bursts clean the filter.

The ControlMate One pendant can be moved from one ELC control to another to program
pendant expands your advanced settings. The same ControlMate pendant can even be used
loader's capabilities with Conair's ELC-16 central vacuum controls.
while providing Note: ControlMate pendants hold no program data, so one pendant can be freely
convenient remote used with the entire family of Conair ELC controls. Data, once programmed with
controls for your Access the ControlMate, safely resides in each ELC control.
Loader.The ControlMate
includes a 15 foot • Change up to 16 parameters
connection cable and The additional loading functions available with the ControlMate
handy holster. Pendant include:
• On/Off • Load time • Fill sensor present
A helpful graphic and
array of LEDs, illustrate • Unload time • Blowback • Load and hold
expanded loading • Load attempts • Priority demand • Purge / Adjustable
functions like ratio Purge Valve (APV)
loading and line purging • Ratio layers • Fill sensor logic
while a three-digit • Ratio installed
numeric display shows logic • Blowback installed
each functions setting • Purge time
as it is selected. Note: Some ControlMate functions require additional components for their
operation, i.e.: Ratio Valve, Purge Valve.
Configurations
Direct feed Discharge valve
Mount directly to a machine throat with The gravity discharge valve uses a non-
a Direct Feed Glass Hopper, available in contact, magnetic reed switch to signal
three sizes. Quick-disconnect clamps allow loader demand. Stand-offs provide a rugged
easy loader removal for thorough cleaning. guard to prevent discharge damage. The
A drop-in grate magnet may be included huge opening eliminates material bridging.
in the cast aluminum base for catching
An optional, air-operated "positive
tramp metal.
discharge" valve is also available.

C-10
Features
Tubing connections Easy Loading Control (ELC) Easy filter clean/exchange

DustBeaters are built for a lifetime of The simple, graphical control illuminates The lid may be easily removed from the
service, so common wear components are critical loading functions as they occur and loader with no tools. The reinforced dacron
designed for easy replacement. Tubing includes a no-load light and horn. disc filter simply drops into place. All
stubs are threaded and may be easily connections are quick-disconnect for fast
replaced in the event of damage, extreme maintenance and easy service.
wear or even for changing line sizes.
Options
Brushless motor Sound shield Ratio valve

No maintenance. Longer life. Higher The sound shield easily Dual inlet material
throughput. Brushless motors transform bolts in place with no valve allows the
incoming power into fast acting magnetic loader modification. loading of regrind
pulses to create faster motor speeds and Effectively sends alternately with
greater conveying power than traditional motor noise up, away virgin and may
brush motors. Provides near-frictionless from personnel. For be installed on the inlet stub or remotely.
motor operation and long, maintenance- brushless and brush Requires optional Controlmate pendant for
free loading performance. motors. setting V/R loading times. (Refer to the Ratio
Valve specification sheet for more information.)
Volume fill sensor Wear plates Magnets

Provides efficient, automatic shut-off of T-1 tool steel plates, installed inside the An airtight, drawer magnet may be added
the vacuum motor when the loader is full. loader body, radically reduce hopper wear below any direct feed DustBeater to trap
An alarm light signals if the fill sensor has when conveying highly abrasive materials ferrous metal. Or, a low cost grate magnet
not been reached during loading. like glass-filled compounds. Wear plates may be inserted directly into the glass hopper
may be easily replaced, if needed. of the direct feed receiver to save head room.
Stainless steel material contact Remote demand sensor Positive discharge valve
Provides stainless steel in place of carbon Move the fill level of the vessel being loaded Provides a pneumatically driven discharge
steel. The 304 grade stainless steel is to an alternate level to meet process needs. valve on the bottom of the loader in the
uncoated internally (in material contact The remote demand sensor is useful on event that gravity will not sufficiently open
areas), but powder coated externally for machine hoppers direct feed hoppers, drying the standard flapper after loading. Useful for
optimum cosmetic appearance. hoppers and bins. May also be used on very light materials or when high CFM drying
granulators, to start off-loading when regrind hoppers are being loaded. (DB12 only).
is present. Extension cables are available.

C-11
Specifications
Hopper loading Direct feed
Brushless motor
High performance brushless
motors plug directly into a
A A 120 volt, 20 amp receptacle.
dia.
dia. The motor
dia. A
C
provides power
C to the loader
C control, as
shown.
B
Loaders with
B
brush motors
operate through
Gravity discharge Positive discharge the control.
(DB12 only)
DB Series Self-contained Vacuum Loaders Specification Notes

Model DB8 DB12 DB12 * Throughputs beyond the recommended
Performance characteristics ratings should not be attempted unless you are
Vacuum motor 5/8 Hp-2 brush 7/8 Hp-4 brush 1.3 Hp brushless conveying virgin material from close distances.
Maximum injection mold machine size 500 tons 1000 tons 2000 tons Higher throughputs could result in shortened brush
Maximum extruder size inches {mm} 2 {50.8} 3 {76.2} 4 {101.6} and/or filter life. For higher throughputs, consult
Recommended throughput* lbs/hr {kg/hr} 200 {91} 500 {227} 1000 {454} Conair for a quote on central vacuum loaders.
†
Maximum conveying distance ft {m} 50 {15.24} 75 {22.86} 120 {36.58} 1.5 inch {38.1 mm} material line size not available
Loader maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82} 180 {82} 150 {66} with brushless motor.
Loader diameter inches {mm} 8 {203} 12 {304} ‡
Add 3 inches {76.2 mm} to height if using sound
Loader volume ft3 {liters} 0.14 {4.0} 0.5 {14.2} shield option.
Material/Vacuum line size † inches {mm} OD 1.5, 1.75, 2.0 {38.1, 44.4, 50.8} available for all sizes §
At 35 lbs. per ft3. {15.88 kg}
Available voltages, 50/60 Hz 120/220 VAC 120/220 VAC 120 VAC
All DustBeaters are shipped with 15 ft {4.572 m} of
Amps @ 120 VAC 8 14 17
flex hose and a vertical feed tube.
Amps @ 220 VAC 4 7 N/A
Compressed air requirements 80 psi {5.52 bar}, 2 ft3/min {0.057 m3/min}, NPT fitting: 3/8 inch Specifications may change without notice. Consult
with a Conair representative for the most current
Filter area inch2 {cm2} 50 {322.6} 113 {729}
information.
Filter type Reinforced polyester disc
Hopper Loading Configuration Figure. 1 - DB8

Model DB8 DB12 8.25 inch 5/16 inch
Dimensions inches {mm} {210 mm} {8 mm}
diameter diameter
A - Height above mounting plate ‡ 16 {406} 22 {559} bolt holes
B - Depth below mounting plate 5.5 {140} 9 {229}
with positive discharge N/A 16 {406} 7.375 inch
{187 mm}
C - Height to center of material inlet 6.2 {157.5} 9.5 {241} diameter
6-5/8 inch {167 mm}
Mounting details See Figure 1Se See Figure 2Se clearance hole required bolt pattern
Installed 27 {12} 49 {22} Figure. 2 - DB12
Shipping 50 {23} 65 {29} 14 inch 5/16 inch
{356 mm} {8 mm}
Direct Feed Configuration diameter diameter
bolt holes
Model DB8 DB12
13 inch
Viewing Chamber Model 4 lb 15 lb 25 lb 4 lb 15 lb 25 lb
{330 mm}
Viewing chamber capacity lb {kg} § 4 {1.81} 15 {6.8} 25 {11.3} 4 {1.81} 15 {6.8} 25 {11.3} diameter
12 inch {304 mm}
With isolator valve ‡ 3 {1.36} 11 {4.99} 21 {9.53} 3 3 {1.36} 11 {4.99} 21 {9.53} clearance hole required
bolt pattern
Figure. 3 - Direct Feed
A - Height above mounting plate 27.8 {706.1} 33.3 {845.8} 83.8 {2129} 33.8 {858.5} 39.3 {998.2} 89.8 {2281}
3 inch {76 mm}
C - Height to center of material inlet 18 {457.2} 23.5 {596.9} 74 {1880} 21.3 {541} 26.8 {680.7} 77.3 {1963} diameter
{152 mm}
Add for isolator valve 0 0 0 2.25 {57} 2.25 {57} 2.25 {57} through hole
6 inch
Mounting details See Figure 3 Note: Direct feed

Approximate weight lb {kg} glass hoppers
require match-
Installed 52 {24} 54 {25} 85 {39} 74 {33} 76 {34} 107 {48} drilling to the 6 inch
Shipping 80 {36} 84 {38} 117 {53} 108 {49} 110 {50} 145 {66} machine throat {152 mm}

C-12
TPCX041-0317 SELF-CONTAINED VACUUM LOADERS4,!-/$%,45"%,/!$%2
Simple, Quiet,
Compressed Air
Conveying
The compact TLA Tube Loader makes it easy to provide trouble-
free loading wherever you need it. Using compressed air, the
TLA’s highly efficient venturi draws material from drums, bins
or gaylords. From there, the material is pushed to the compact
Tube Loader body that can be mounted to virtually any vessel
or machine throat. Using a unique, low maintenance filter
assembly, material is separated from the conveying air stream
4,!
and deposited directly into a bin or machine throat. The wide- Hopper Loading
open Tube Loader body keeps material flowing without bridging
and without a discharge valve common to other types of loaders.
A demand sensor tells the TLA when to load and when it is
4,!
full. Material flow is easily adjusted for throughput, conveying Direct Feed
distance and air conservation with the included air-pressure
regulator and gauge.
Models for Machine Throats, Hoppers and Bins
` 1UIETMINIMALMAINTENANCE
The TLA uses clean, quiet compressed air to move material.
` 3IMPLETOINSTALL
Mount on hopper lid or directly to machine throat. No flappers or obstructions to
consider.
` 5PTOPOUNDS[KG]PERHOUR
Fast response compressed air energy will keep your hopper or machine throat full.
` 3TAINLESSSTEELCONSTRUCTION
Constructed of rugged, attractive stainless steel, the TLA will compliment your facility
while demanding almost no maintenance.
` %FFICIENTFILTERMEDIA
The slick, fine-mesh stainless steel “top hat” filter effectively vents compressed air
out of the loader, yet resists the accumulation of material dust, minimizing the need
for cleaning.
C-13
TPCX041-0317 SELF-CONTAINED VACUUM LOADERS4,!-/$%,45"%,/!$%2
TLA Configurations Available
4HEHOPPERLOADINGVERSION fits 4HEREMOTEOUTLETCONFIGURATION 4HEDIRECTFEEDVERSION is equipped with 2ATIOLOADING can be included by the
directly on top of a machine hopper, includes a “zero pressure” cone below a choice of a 1 or 2 lb. glass hopper that addition of a “Y” tube, and a second
or any other type of vessel. It is the TLA to prevent pressurization of the fits directly on your processing machine venturi/pressure regulator set. Individual
equipped with a demand sensor that bin below and a body mounted sensor throat. The modular design allows easy compressed air adjustments control
may be height adjusted in the receiving for safe use on drying hoppers. A length disassembly for cleaning. The demand simultaneous loading percentages.
hopper to maintain a specific level. of flex hose or tubing is installed to the sensor may be shot-size adjusted up and
cone to direct loaded material. down the glass hopper.
.OTE Not for use on drying hoppers. A Conair exclusive.
Specifications
(OPPERLOADING &EEDINGBIN2EMOTEOUTLET $IRECTFEED ,OADER-ODEL 4,!
Maximum injection mold machine size 800 tons
Maximum extruder size inches {mm} 2 {50.8}
Recommended throughput* lbs/hr {kg/hr} 700 {317.5}
Maximum conveying distance ft {m} 20 {6.1}
! Loader diameter inches {mm} 4.5 {114.3}
!
Loader volume ft3 {liters} 0.1 {2.8}
Material/vacuum line size inches {mm} OD 1.5 {38.1}
" " ! Loader maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82}
6OLTAGE
50/60 Hz 120 VAC
# " #OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS
# Consumption @60 psi ft3/min {liters/min} 8.25 {233.6}
$ NPT fitting 3/8 inch
Filter area inch2 {cm2} 62.4 {402.6}
$
Filter type 200 mesh stainless steel
(OPPER,OADING2EMOTE/UTLET-ODELS Specification Notes &IGURE (OPPER,OADING

,OADER-ODEL 4,!
* Throughputs are based on 8.25 inch 5/16 inch
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} (OPPER,OADING 2EMOTEOUTLET {210 mm} {8 mm}
conveying typical materials
A - Height above mounting plate 10.8 {274.3} diameter diameter
from close distances. bolt holes
B - Height to center of material inlet 3.75 {95.3}
C - Depth below mounting plate 3.5 {88.9} 4.5 {114.3} Specifications may change
D- Clearance hole diameter 6-5/8 {168} without notice. Consult with a 7.375 inch
Conair representative for the {187 mm}
-OUNTINGDETAILS See Figure 1 diameter
most current information.
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlbs {kg} 6-5/8 inch {167} bolt pattern
Installed 6 {3} 8 {4} clearance hole required
Shipping 26 {12} 28 {13}
$IRECT&EED-ODEL(glass hopper) &IGURE $IRECT&EED
,OADER-ODEL 4,!
1.625 inch
6IEWINGCHAMBERMODEL LB LB
{101.6 mm}
diameter
{152.4 mm}
1.625 inch
Viewing chamber capacity lb {kg} 1 {0.45} 2 {0.91} diameter {41.3 mm}
through
4 inch
6 inch
{41.3 mm}
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} through hole
A - Height above mounting plate 20.3 {515.6} 25.5 {647.7} hole
B - Height to center of material inlet 13 {330} 18.25 {463.6}
6 inch
-OUNTINGDETAILS See Figure 2 4 inch {152.4 mm}
{101.6 mm}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlbs {kg}
Installed 10 {5} 12 {5} .OTE Direct feed glass hoppers require
match-drilling to the machine throat.
Shipping 30 {14} 32 {15}
C-14
TPCX066-0118 VACUUM MATERIAL LOADERSPOWDER LOADER (PM) SERIES
Reliable Motor
Loader Conveying
of Free-flowing Powders
The Conair PM Series of Powder Loaders effectively transfers
powdered resins (down to 1 micron), with the convenience of
a self-contained motor loader. Available in a range of sizes to
fit user needs, the PM Series uses high capacity, pleated filters
coupled with a compressed air accumulated blowback system,
for long, maintenance-free operation.
A strong, long-life, built-in vacuum motor provides the vacuum

conveying power for smooth powder transfer over moderate
distances.
Model PM15
Self-contained motor loaders designed specifically for powders
Equipped with a compact filter chamber, the

PM Series is easy to maintain. Quick release ` Compact to work in limited space
latches and utility connections allow easy, The motorized Powder Loader range can provide up to 56 ft2 {5.2 m2} of filter area
no-tools disassembly and filter cartridge(s) are while short enough for installation in low headroom areas.
conveniently mounted to a plate for quick removal.
` A range of sizes and options
An oversized compressed air accumulator and Powder Loaders can be fitted with a selection of line sizes and discharge valves, with
blowback timer deliver programmable blasts of options to facilitate the use of abrasive materials. A brushless vacuum motor is
air through the filter cartridge(s) at the end of available on larger sizes.
each load cycle to eliminate material packing.
` Easy material change and cleaning
Each model includes a powerful vacuum All components disassemble quickly. No tools are needed for material changes or
motor, integrated into the quick-disconnect lid, cleanout. The pull-out filter assembly eliminates the mess associated with
simplifying removal and re-installation. “bag-style” Powder Loaders.
Loading, unloading and blowback control are ` Long filter life with minimal dust
provided by Conair’s ELC-M control system. The special, easy-release surface of the cartridge filters provides long operating life
without packing or degradation.
The programmable blowback system extends operating life and maximizes
throughput. Filter cartridges are fully washable.

C-15
How it works
Powder Loader Powder Loader

loads material. discharges material.
Loading Unloading / Filter cleaning

An integrated demand level switch on the discharge flapper (or Upon completion of loading, the discharge valve opens, allowing
separate demand level switch) initiates the start of the conveying powdered resin to flow out of the loader.
cycle by turning on the vacuum motor, drawing air and material While unloading, the blowback system directs multiple,
into the loader's lower chamber. accumulated, high-power blasts of compressed air through
A filter guard directs material as it loads down into the cone of the cartridge filter(s), pulsing them and blowing off collected
the loader. Pleated filter media in the upper chamber of the loader material, dust and fines. The blowback action also encourages
separates the material from the conveying air. total material evacuation from the loader, into the hopper below.
Note: The material flow path may be reinforced by an optional wear plate Blowback is programmable to provide optimum cycles for
if the material being conveyed is abrasive. Once the fill sensor senses maximum cleaning.
material has filled the lower chamber, the vacuum motor shuts off.
After unloading and blowback are complete, the loader either
starts again or waits for another demand signal.
Options
• Stainless steel construction • Wear plates • Filter vent assembly

Standard carbon steel construction can Replaceable plates, installed inside the The filter vent
be substituted with 304 grade stainless loader body, eliminate hopper wear- assembly provides
steel (uncoated inside the loader and through when conveying abrasive or glass- a predictable
cosmetically powder coated on the outside). filled materials. Available in either cold exhaust path for
rolled steel or electroless nickel plating. blowback air to
• Differential pressure gauge prevent pressurized
To Monitor the air passage of the filters • Positive discharge valve air and dust
to instantly determine powder compaction Provides a pneumatically driven discharge from escaping
and the need to manually clean or replace valve on the bottom of the loader in the through feed tubes
the filter(s). event that gravity will not sufficiently open or seams in the
the standard flapper after loading. Useful receiving vessel.
for very light resins or any resin that may
not flow easily.

C-16
ELC Control
Loading control
Each on-demand loading sequence is clearly exhibited on
the graphical control face with bright, simple LED lights.
A "no-load" alarm light and buzzer are included.

The ControlMate pendant One pendant can be moved from one ELC control to another
expands your loader's to program advanced settings. The same ControlMate pendant
convenient remote controls for Note: ControlMate pendants hold no program data, so one pendant
your Powder Loader. can be freely used with the entire family of Conair ELC controls. Data, once
programmed with the ControlMate, safely resides in each ELC control.
The ControlMate includes a
15 foot connection cable and • Change up to 16 parameters
A helpful graphic and array Pendant include:
of LEDs, illustrate expanded • On/Off • Load time • Fill sensor present
loading functions like ratio
• Unload time • Blowback • Load and hold
loading and line purging while
a three-digit numeric display • Load attempts • Priority demand • Purge / Adjustable
shows each functions setting • Ratio layers • Fill sensor logic Purge Valve (APV)
as it is selected. • Ratio percentage • Demand sensor • Ratio installed
• Purge time logic • Blowback installed
Note: Some ControlMate functions require additional components for

their operation, i.e.: Ratio Valve, Purge Valve.
ControlMateTM Function
01 02 03

C-17
Specifications
Standard Mounting Plate
PM8 model PM12 and PM15 models
8.25 inch 5/16 inch
{210 mm} 14 inch {356 mm}
{8 mm} diameter 5/16 inch
diameter diameter mounting {8 mm}
mounting bolt holes plate diameter
plate
A bolt holes
A
7.375 inch 13 inch
{187 mm} {330 mm}
diameter diameter
bolt pattern bolt pattern
D
D
Material / Vacuum Line Sizes
Outer diameter in inches {mm}
B
B
1.75 {44.5}
C Gravity Positive 2.00 {50.8}
discharge C discharge
Model PM8 PM12 PM12 (brushless) PM15 PM15 (brushless)

0.625 Hp 0.875 Hp 1.3 Hp 0.875 Hp 1.3 Hp
Vacuum motor
2-brush 4-brush brushless 4-brush brushless
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr} 200 {91} 450 {204} 750 {340} 550 {249} 1000 {454}
Maximum conveying distance ft {m} 50 {15.24}
Loader maximum temperature °F {°C} 180 {82} 150 {66} 180 {82} 150 {66}
Receiver volume ft3 {liters} 0.14 {4.0} 0.5 {14.2} 1.0 {28.3}
Air-to-cloth ratio cfm:ft2 * 3:1
Vacuum/material line sizes inches {mm} 1.5 - 2.0 {38 - 51} 1.75 - 2.0 {45 - 51}
120 VAC @ 8 amps 120 VAC @ 14 amps 120 VAC @ 14 amps
Electrical requirements 120 VAC @ 17 amps 120 VAC @ 17 amps
220 VAC @ 4 amps 220 VAC @ 7 amps 220 VAC @ 7 amps
Hopper diameter† 8.0 {203} 12.0 {305} 15.0 {381}
A - Height above mounting plate† 44.9375 {1141.4} 52.3125 {1328.7} 55.75 {1416.1}
B - Depth below mounting plate 5.5 {140} 8.375 {213}
with positive discharge NA 16.0 {406}
C - Clearance hole diameter 6.63 {167} 12.0 {305}
D - Height to center of material inlet 6.19 {157} 9.5 {241} 12.1875 {309.6}
Installed weight 49.0 {22.2} 77.0 {34.9} 143.0 {64.9}
Shipping weight 50 {23} 144.0 {65.3} 172.0 {78.0} 238.0 {107.9}
Compressed air requirements (intermittent duty)
Pressure 60 - 80 psi {4.1-5.5 bars}
2 ft³/min @ 80 psi 8 ft³/min @ 80 psi
Consumption
{0.94 liters/sec. @ 6 bars} {3.7 liters/sec. @ 6 bars}
NPT Fitting 3/8 inch
Filter
Filter type 1 pleated polyester cartridge
Total filter area 23 ft² {2.1 m²} 56 ft² {5.2 m²} 48 ft² {4.5 m²}
Specification Notes Application Notes

†
The optional filter vent assembly changes the dimensions of the PM unit. Height above the mounting plate increases by
* Powder Loaders are not intended for materials
7.75 inches {196.9 mm} on all PM models.
such as pure carbon black, titanium oxide or
Overall width increases to 19.625 inches {498.5 mm} for the PM8, 21.5 inches {546.1 mm} for the PM12, and
any other difficult to handle material that
23.0 inches {584.2 mm} for the PM15.
requires an air-to-cloth ratio of less than 3:1.
All PM Loaders are shipped with 15 ft {4.572 m} of flex hose and a vertical feed tube.

C-18
TPCX024-0317 COMPRESSED AIR MATERIAL LOADERS#!-, %6"%6!#5!4)/.4/"!22%, 3934%-
Off-load grinder
regrind to a barrel
with Compressed Air
The CAML-EVB system uses a compressed air venturi to draw
material from granulators or other sources and efficiently direct
it to a standard fiber barrel. The EVB includes an elastic barrel
cover that contains material dust and allows clean conveying
air to be exhausted. An optional "full" alarm can be included to
alert operators.
#!-, %6"
(Shown with optional drum
full alarm kit.)
Designed to move Material Simply and Quietly
(OW)T7ORKS
The CAML-EVB works on demand, from its ` ,OADRESININTOBARRELS ` 1UIETEFFICIENTOPERATION
capacitance sensor, mounted in the granulator
drawer. The EVB will off-load the granulator ` %VACUATEREGRINDFROMGRANULATORS ` .OTOOLSREQUIREDTOCHANGEDRUMS
only when regrind is present. The EVB stand
provides a parking spot for the barrel being
filled. Controls include a compressed air
regulator and on/off switch.
Low Materia
Exhaust
l Alarm
Optional Alarm Kit

Strobe
remain
will
on
until problem
is resolved
Alarm
-
Delay Time
filter/drum
+
Adjustable
Inside
shroud
4HESTANDARD#!-, %6"INCLUDES
• A proximity-type demand sensor.
• Control assembly with compressed air
solenoid, filter and regulator. Control
• Barrel stand with height adjustable Material Transfer

Optional Device and optional
inlet tube. Alarm horizontal bin tube
Sensor
• Elastic-edged exhaust filter/barrel shroud
Demand Sensor
with feed tube hole and plexi window.
• Compressed air venturi.
• 20 feet {6.096 m} of conveying hose. (Barrel not included)
C-19
TPCX024-0317 COMPRESSED AIR MATERIAL LOADERS#!-, %6"%6!#5!4)/.4/"!22%, 3934%-
Specifications -ODEL #!-, %6"

Maximum throughput lb/hr{kg/hr} 700 {318}
Nominal throughput* lb/hr {kg/hr} 500 {227}
Low Mater
ial Alarm
Maximum conveying distance ft {m} 20 {6}
Strobe
remain
will
on
until problem
Material line size inches {mm} 1.5 {38}
is resolve
d
$IMENSIONSinches {mm}
Alarm
Delay Time
Adjusta
ble Inside
A - Overall height with alarm option 57 {1448}

B - Maximum height, adjustment arm 30 to 46 {762 to 1168}
Compr
essed
C - Minimum height, adjustable arm 30 {762}

Air Materi
al Loade
r
D - Drum stand base diameter 25 {635}

"
7EIGHTlbs {kg}
Shipping 130 {59}
!
# Installed 90 {41}
6OLTAGESFull load amps
120V/1 phase/60 Hz 1.0
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS
Typical operating pressure psi {bars} 30 {2.1}
Consumption @ 60 psi ft3/min {liters/min} 8.25 {233.6}
NPT fitting 3/8 inch
* Recommended throughput rates are provided to insure optimum performance and life
of the product.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the
Options
-ATERIAL0ICKUP$EVICES -ATERIAL0ICKUP$EVICES 3ENSOR-OUNTING/PTIONS
/ RINGADAPTERS 6ERTICALFEEDTUBE $EMANDSENSORS

Connect the Material Inserts into open Proximity sensor
Transfer Device to material containers. with O-ring mounts
material lines with Includes a coupling through the wall
equal or larger outer for the Material of a hopper or bin.
diameters. Transfer Device. The sensor with
an angled bracket
allows external
(ORIZONTALBINTUBE 'RANULATOR"IN4UBE mounting against a
Install the Material !DAPTOR sight glass on a bin.
Transfer Device on Adapts round
granulator trays, bins granulator drawer 3ENSOREXTENSION
or other flat-walled tubes (up to 2 inch CABLE
storage containers. OD) to the material
transfer device and
provides air inlet for
optimal conveying.
$RUM&ULL!LARM+IT $RAWER-AGNET %NERGY-ISER
Includes the audible/ Install between the Provides adjustable on and off time periods
visual alarm and a 90° inlet tube and the for conveying. Ideal when full time evacuation
proximity sensor to drum filter/shroud to is not required.
Low Mate
rial Alarm
indicate when the bin catch tramp metal
or drum is full. before it can enter the
barrel.
Strobe
will
remain
on
until proble
is resolv m
ed
Alarm
Delay Time
-
+
Adjust
able Inside
C-20
TPCX034-0317 COMPRESSED AIR MATERIAL LOADERS#!-, %6'%6!#5!4)/.4/'!9,/2$ 3934%-
Off-load Grinders
to Gaylords with
Compressed Air
The CAML-EVG system uses a compressed air venturi to draw
material from granulators or other sources and efficiently direct
it to a standard gaylord box. The EVG's filling tube swivels on
its mobile frame and is designed to be positioned between two
gaylords, for rapid change-over when one gaylord becomes
filled. A "full" alarm is included to alert operators.
#!-, %6'
(Shown with the optional retractable
cover and one gaylord.)
Compact, Versatile Gaylord Filling Station
Conair's CAML-EVG provides two "parking

spots" for gaylords to be filled by a clean, ` +EEPGRANULATORSEMPTY
quiet compressed air system. When connected to an optional granulator drawer demand sensor, granulators run
free and clear of material back-up.
Controls are easily accessible on the moving
fill tube arm and an optional, retractable, poly ` #HANGEGAYLORDSQUICKLY
cover keeps off-loaded material clean. The EVG’s frame provides “parking-spots” for two gaylords so one may be moved
while the other is filling. If only one is needed, the second spot is ideal for locating a
The EVG can work continuously, on time mid-size granulator.
settings (optional) or, when coupled with an
optional demand sensor in the granulator ` &LEXIBLECOVEROPTION
drawer, the EVG will off-load the granulator Covers may be provided for one or two gaylords. They are pulled into place over
only when regrind is present. gaylords in seconds - no tucking or stretching is necessary. Covers retract just
as fast, rolling out of the way for maximum efficiency. Each cover includes a hole in
the center for the filling tube of the EVG.
` "UILTINOVERFILLALARM
The EVG lets you know when the gaylord is full so you can simply swing the filling
tube over to the next gaylord and keep the material moving.
` #LEANQUIETOFF LOADING

Adjust the compressed air supply as needed for distance and material flow. The EVG's
filling arm includes a durable filter cloth for clean air exhaust.
C-21
TPCX034-0317 COMPRESSED AIR MATERIAL LOADERS#!-, %6'%6!#5!4)/.4/'!9,/2$ 3934%-
Specifications
#
-ODEL #!-, %6'
Maximum throughput lb/hr {kg/hr} 700 {318}
Nominal throughput* lb/hr {kg/hr} 500 {227}
Maximum conveying distance ft {m} 20 {6}
Material line size inches {mm} 1.5 {38}
A - Overall height 65.5 {1664} !
B - Height, with optional casters 68.0 {1727} "
C - Depth 45.0 {1143}
D - Width 48.0 {1219}
E - Width, add for each
27.0 {686}
retractable cover
7EIGHTlbs {kg}
Shipping 185 {84}
Installed 160 {73}
Retractable cover weight, each 35 {16} % $
6OLTAGESFull load amps
120V/1 phase/60 Hz 1.5
6ENTURI
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS INCH/$[MM]
Regulator set INCH/$
20-120 {1.4-8.3} [MM]
pressure psi {bars}
Consumption @ 60 psi 8.25
ft3/min {liters/min} {233.6} INCH)$
[MM] INCH/$[MM]
Air inlet, NPT fitting 3/8 inch
* Throughput is highly dependent upon material size, shape and flow rate. Performance Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the
claims are based on typical regrind. Large, small or poor flowing materials should be most current information.
tested for suitability.
Options
-ATERIAL0ICKUP$EVICES -ATERIAL0ICKUP$EVICES 2ETRACTABLE'AYLORD#OVER
/ RINGADAPTERS 6ERTICALFEEDTUBE
Select the proper Inserts into
aluminum adaptor to open-top material Low Material
Strobe
remain
will
on
until problem
Alarm
is resolved
containers.
Alarm
Delay Time
connect the venturi

-
+
Adjustable
Inside
to the granulator Couples to venturi.

take-off tube.
Install one or two gaylord covers to minimize

(ORIZONTALBINTUBE 'RANULATOR"IN4UBE
dust during the conveying operation and to
Install the Material !DAPTOR
prevent material contamination.
Transfer Device on For air-tight granulator
granulator trays, bins drawers, this adaptor
or other flat-walled provides an air inlet %NERGY-ISER
storage containers. for optimal conveying.
Adapts to round When a demand sensor is not used, this option
granulator drawer provides adjustable air on/off time settings,
tubes (up to 2 inch OD). saving air consumption.
C-22
40#8 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERS4,2-/$%,45"%,/!$%2
Compact Receivers
For Pellets and Regrind
The compact TLR model Tube Loader provides trouble-free
material transfer within a central vacuum system. The exclusive,
4.5-inch diameter tube body means that materials will always
flow easily from the receiver without bridging. The hinged lid is
equipped with a compact vacuum sequencing valve and allows
easy, no-tools servicing of the oversized, drop-in, 20 mesh
stainless steel filter.
Any TLR may be easily equipped for ratio loading of two

materials by the simple addition of a compact ratio valve on
4,2(OPPER,OADER
the material inlet tube. with optional ELC-16 control
4,2$IRECT&EED
with UTB
Modular, Economical, All-Stainless Receivers
The TLR is available in two configurations.

The hopper loading version fits directly on top ` -ODULAREASYCLEANING
of a bin or drying hopper, or any other type of All chambers come apart without tools for easy access, material changes and cleaning.
vessel. Its wide discharge valve incorporates
` #OMPACTATTRACTIVE
a demand switch allowing the TLR to
The 4.5-inch diameter receiver sports an electro-polished stainless steel finish
automatically keep the receiving bin full (also
that will compliment any facility while requiring
available with a remote demand sensor).
almost no maintenance.
The direct feed version is equipped with a
` 6ERSATILEUSE
1 or 2 lb. glass hopper and couples easily
Available in both hopper loading and direct throat
to your processing machine throat. If the
feeding versions, the TLR may also be equipped
machine throat is not vacuum-tight an optional
with compact ratio valve.
isolator valve may be added. The demand
sensor may be shot-size adjusted up and down ` %ASY ACCESSHINGEDLID
the glass hopper. No-tools, swing clip opens easily for maintenance.
The drop-in screen filter module provides ` #HOICEOFCONTROL
more than 40 square inches of 20 mesh filter The Universal Terminal Box (UTB) is mounted on
area for efficient air/material separation. your receiver. The UTB works with FLX-128 Plus.
The optional ELC control is a stand-alone loading
control based on a receiver integrated CAN open
network.
C-23
40#8 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERS4,2-/$%,45"%,/!$%2
Specifications
(OPPERLOADING $IRECTFEED
Conair’s exclusive
Universal Terminal
Box (UTB) allows
modular, plug-in
!
options, and
the TLR may be
! readily connected
" to any central or
remote vacuum
"
system with a
# single, electrical
connector.
$
,OADERMODEL 4,2 &IGn(OPPERLOADING &IGn$IRECTFEED

Loader diameter inches {mm} 4.5 {114} 5/16 inch {8 mm}
diameter bolt holes 1.625 inch
1.625 inch diameter
8.25 inch
{152.4 mm}
Loader volume ft3 {liters} 0.1 {4.0}
{101.6 mm}
diameter {41.3 mm}
{210 mm}
6 inch
4 inch
{41.3 mm} through hole
Material line size inches {mm} OD 1.5 {38.1} diameter through hole
7.375 inch
Vacuum line size inches {mm} OD 1.5 - 2.0 {38.1 - 50.8} {187 mm}
diameter 4 inch
Available voltages, 50/60 Hz 120/24 VAC/24VDC 6-5/8 inch {168 mm} bolt pattern {101.6 mm} 6 inch
{152.4 mm}
Compressed air requirements 90 maximum psi, 1.4 CFM clearance hole required
Loader maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82}
NPT fitting 1/4 inch
Filter area in2 {cm2} 36.0 {232.3}
Filter type 20 mesh stainless steel
(OPPER,OADING-ODEL
,OADER-ODEL 4,2
A - Height above mounting plate 13.5 {343}
B - Height to center of material inlet 5.0 {127}
C - Depth below mounting plate 4.0 {102}
D - Clearance hole diameter 6-5/8 {168}
-OUNTINGDETAILS See Fig. 1
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} The compact ratio (shown) and common line valves mount
Installed 12 {5.4} directly on the TLR or remotely mounted. Both open easily with
Shipping 24 {10.9} no tools for complete, easy cleanout.
$IRECT&EED-ODEL(Glass Hopper)
,OADER-ODEL 4,2
6IEWINGCHAMBERMODEL LB LB
Viewing chamber capacity lb {kg} 1 {0.45} 2 {0.91}
A - Height above mounting plate 20.5 {521} 25.75 {654}
B - Height to center of material inlet 12.25 {311} 17.50 {445}
Installed 15 {6.8} 17 {7.7}
Shipping 24 {10.9} 26 {11.8}
For direct feed TLRs The vacuum sequencing
Specification Notes mounted on machine throats valve may be rotated any
* The optional isolator valve adds 1.625 inches {41.3 mm} to the height. that are not vacuum tight, direction for easy vacuum
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the the isolator valve option hose routing.
most current information. assures a good vacuum seal.
C-24
TPCX044-0317 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERS!##%334-!23%2)%32%#%)6%2
Easier Access For

Simplified Cleaning
Cleaning and maintaining your material receivers is now faster,
easier and safer than ever before. That’s because the unique
angled canister design of the Conair AccessTM Receiver means
workers don’t need to climb as high or work as hard to service
the drop-in filter or wipe out the stainless steel canister.
!CCESS-ODEL!2
(With optional
ELC-16 control.)
Value-Added Features at No Additional Cost
The AccessTM (AR series) Receiver delivers

all the performance and reliability you expect ` 4HEWORLDSMOSTRELIABLEDISCHARGEVALVE
from Conair, plus added features and benefits Now in cast aluminum, for years of trouble-free performance.
at no extra cost. The unique angled canister
` /PTIONPACKAGESTOSUITYOURNEEDS
is constructed of stainless steel, and the
Popular options are combined for easy selection and integrated into your receiver
discharge valve is cast aluminum, to ensure purchase.
corrosion resistance and easy cleaning. The
hinged lid opens easily, without tools, tilts ` )NTEGRATESWITHEXISTINGLOADINGSYSTEMS
back and locks out of the way leaving workers Modular design allows your AccessTM Receiver to be outfitted for your specific
with both hands free for safety, comfort and requirements including voltage, line size and material inlet orientation.
convenience.
` #HOICEOFCONTROL
The modular design provides application The Universal Terminal Box (UTB) is mounted on your
flexibility, by allowing the material inlet to be receiver. The UTB works with FLX-128 Plus. The
positioned in virtually any direction. A vertically optional ELC control is a stand-alone loading control
based on a receiver integrated CAN open network.
oriented ratio valve or a common line valve
are available. A pneumatically actuated ` /PTIONALCUSTOMIZABLERATIOVALVE
discharge valve can be added to any model. The ratio valve’s top and bottom material inlets can be conveniently positioned
facing forward or backwards to access your material lines.
Available in three popular sizes, the Access
Receivers are ready to provide years of service
Upper Valve
in new or existing resin transfer systems. Casting
Ratio Valve Ratio Valve Ratio Valve

Left-side Entry Right-side Entry Opposite Entry
C-25
Controlled by Conair’s Central Loading Controls
All of Conair’s loaders and receivers can

be controlled using one of the central
loading controls developed by Conair to
manage your entire conveying system.
Instead of choosing the ELC, select a
UTB (Universal Terminal Box) for your
Access AR Receiver and connect and
control the receiver with Conair’s
FLX-128 Plus conveying system control.
See the FLX-128 Plus specification
sheet for more information about the
capacities and capabilities of these
scalable controls.
Features
01
Optional bolt-on ratio or common line valves can replace the
receiver’s original material inlet/outlets tube. Valve retro-fit kits are
also available.
Bolt-on replacement inlet/outlets (1.75 inch {44.45 mm} standard)
vertical feed tube and flex hose clamps.
02
01 Stainless steel cylindrical, angled body for
easy access to internal drop-in disk filter.
All material contact surfaces are built of
pristine stainless steel or aluminum to
prevent corrosion.
02
03
Choose between standard Universal Terminal Box (UTB) or the
optional Easy Loading Control (ELC).
03 04
04
• Cast aluminum • Protective • Integral
(Shown with optional ELC-16 controls)
base stand-offs discharge
flapper
C-26
Options
3TAINLESSSTEEL*)4(OPPER 'LASS(OPPER
Fill machine throats directly AR-2 model Access Receivers
with “Just-In-Time” stainless can be mounted directly to a
steel hoppers. Three sizes are machine throat with a pristine
available: direct feed glass hopper.
Three capacities are available
• 10 lb capacity for AR-2
to accommodate throughput
• 20 lb capacity for AR-5
and/or shot size needs. Quick
• 40 lb capacity for AR-5 and AR-10
disconnect clamps allow easy
Hinged lids with hold-up arms receiver removal. An optional
allow easy access for cleaning drop-in grate magnet maybe
and inspection without removing provided. A height-adjustable
the receiver. A drop-in grate demand sensor bracket is
magnet may be included. A included, allowing fill level
remote demand sensor bracket adjustments.
and clean out chute are provided
on JIT-20 and JIT-40 models.
'RAVITYDISCHARGEVALVE 2EMOTEDEMANDSENSOR 2ATIOVALVE

The gravity discharge valve uses a non- To trigger the operation of the receiver A dual inlet, single outlet material valve
contact, magnetic reed switch to signal (demand) from a location other than that is mounted directly to the Access
receiver demand. Stand-offs provide a below the receiver, a remote demand Receiver allows the loading of a second
heavy-duty guard to prevent discharge sensor may be used. The remote demand material to be layered along with virgin
valve damage. The large opening sensor is useful on oversized drying material. Ratio Valve field retrofit kits are
eliminates material bridging. hoppers to sense material through a sight available.
glass. Extension cables are available.
(IGH WEARKIT 6OLUMEFILLSENSOR ,EFT SIDEMATERIALINLET

A Stainless Steel deflector plate is Shuts off the receiver’s vacuum sequence Rotates the position of the receiver’s
added to the inside of the receiver’s when the receiver is full. A LED will material inlet 180°.
body reducing wear from highly illuminate on the ELC control if the
abrasive materials, such as glass-filled vacuum sequence has not satisfied the
compounds. receiver’s demand.
(IGH TEMPERATUREKIT #OMMON,INEVALVE

Common Line Valve Common Line Valve
Replaces standard cylinders with high Mounted directly to the material inlet,
Left-side entry Right-side entry
temperature cylinders. the common line valve isolates the
receiver from a common material
conveying line in a system. This
)NDIVIDUALALARMKIT option features reversible material
An individual alarm kit can be used to valve entry and a removable top lid
monitor and alarm for individual receivers. for easy access to the material valve.
Field retrofit kits are available.
C-27
Specifications
"
% '
!
(
&
$
# $IRECTFEEDMODEL $IRECTFEEDMODEL
3TANDARDMODEL (Stainless steel hopper JIT) (Glass hopper)
-ODEL !2 !2 !2 &IG !2

0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS BOLTS
INCH
Receiver volume ft3 {liters} 0.2 {6} 0.5 {14} 1.0 {28} [MM]
Receiver body diameter inches {mm} 8.0 {203} 12.0 {304} DIAMETER
INCH BOLTHOLES
Material/vacuum line inches {mm} 1.5 - 3.0 {38.0 - 51.0} [MM]
Receiver maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82} DIAMETER
with high-heat option °F {°C} 350 {177} INCH

[MM]
Filter type 20 mesh stainless steel disc
DIAMETER
Available voltages (outputs) 120 VAC, 24 VAC and 24 VDC 6-5/8 inch {167 mm} BOLTPATTERN
clearance hole required
Discharge type Gravity flapper
Demand sensor Integrated reed switch/Remote capacitive sensor (optional) &IGn!2AND!2
Intermittent duty: 1ft3/min. @ 80 psi {28.3 liters/min. @ 5.51 bars}
Compressed air requirements INCH[MM]
NPT fitting: 1/4 inch DIAMETER
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} INCH
[MM]
A - Height above mounting plate 18.2 {462} 18.0 {458} 23.8 {603} DIAMETER
BOLTPATTERN
[MM]
INCH
B - Height to center of material inlet 26.2 {656} 31.1 {790} 36.7 {932}
C - Depth below mounting plate 5.1 {130} 8.1 {206} 8.1 {206}
D- Clearance hole diameter 8.8 {223} 8.6 {220} 14.3 {364}
-OUNTINGDETAILS See Fig. 1 See Fig. 2 See Fig. 2 BOLTS
INCH INCH
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} [MM] [MM]
DIAMETER
Installed 21 {10} 40 {18} 44 {20} 12 inch {304 mm} BOLTHOLES
Shipping 35 {16} 50 {23} 70 {32} clearance hole required
3TAINLESS3TEEL*)4(OPPER 'LASS(OPPER
-ODEL !2 !2 !2 !2 -ODEL !2
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS 0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS
Viewing bin model 10 lb 20 lb 40 lb Viewing chamber model 3 lb 11 lb 21 lb
Viewing chamber 11.1 24.3 41.5 Viewing chamber capacity lb {kg} 3.0 {1} 11.0 {5} 21.0 {10}
capacity lb {kg} {5} {11} {19} Isolator valve Standard
Isolator valve Standard $IMENSIONSWITH!CCESS2ECEIVERinches {mm}
$IMENSIONSWITH!CCESS2ECEIVERinches {mm} G - Height above mounting plate 30.5 {775} 36.2 {920} 47.8 {1213}
E - Height above 32.4 37.4 40.6 46.4 H - Height to center of material inlet 20.8 {527} 26.4 {672} 38.0 {965}
mounting plate {824} {950} {1030} {1178} -OUNTINGDETAILS 3EE&IG
F - Height to center 22.7 30.8 36.5 !PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg}
of material inlet {577} {782} {927} Installed 36 {16} 42 {19} 53 {24}
Shipping 65 {23} 56 {25} 67 {30}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} &IG *)4(OPPER &IG 'LASS(OPPER
Installed 38 {17} 71 {32} 76 {34} 80 {36} 3 inch
6.0 inch {152.4 mm} square
Shipping 52 {24} 81 {37} 86 {39} 106 {48} {76 mm}

6 inch
5.0 inch {127.0 mm}
diameter
{152 mm}
through
{53.8 mm}
212 inch
square
square
hole
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for 6 inch
the most current information. {152 mm}
Note: Glass hoppers require
match-drilling to the machine throat.
C-28
40#8 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERS+,/!$%23+!.$+#2-/$%,3
Direct Feed Receivers

for Low Throughput
K Loaders provide a compact material receiver for direct-to-
machine mounting that eliminates an inventory of material over
the machine throat.
Only the material needed for one or two shots of processing are
transferred, so materials will not regain moisture after drying.
There’s also less material to drain, so material changes are faster.
+STAINLESSSTEEL
Transfer Only the Material You Need
By minimizing your transfer of material to only

one or two shots, dried hygroscopic materials ` -ODULARCOMPONENTS
don’t have time to regain moisture during Mix and match components for sight glass size, material and vacuum line size, and
conveying. other options to suit your needs.
The modular K Loader line with quick ` !BRASIONFREEMATERIALFLOW

disassembly sections greatly simplifies Materials flow directly to the machine throat from the top of the loader section,
material changes. minimizing material breakdown from abrasion.
The K2 model is available in both carbon and ` #OMPATIBLEWITHYOURPROCESS

stainless steel and features push-fit sections Compact size fits nearly any small machine throat and options are easily added
for the simplest, fastest disassembly. to assure optimized performance with dried materials, regrinds and a broad range
of throughputs.
The K2CR is a polished stainless steel
model with thumbscrew clamp connectors ` 3EEYOURMATERIALFLOW
at each section for maintaining the highest A sight glass replaces machine hoppers. Proximity level sensors provided for demand
cleanliness standards. The K2CR is popular signaling. No moving parts.
for traditionally high-end polycarbonate,
optical media molding, and other clean room ` #HOICEOFCONTROL
environments. The Universal Terminal Box (UTB) is mounted on
your receiver. The UTB works with FLX-128 Plus.
Select either 8 oz. (small) or 33 oz. (large) The optional ELC control is a stand-alone loading
viewing chambers for just the right amount of control based on a receiver integrated CAN
material inventory above the machine throat. open network.
C-29
40#8 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERS+,/!$%23+!.$+#2-/$%,3
Features Options
%ASYDISASSEMBLYFORFASTCLEANOUT 3MALLRECEIVERYET )SOLATORVALVE 6ACUUM $RAWERANDINSERT

Modular, no-tools design provides MAXIMUMFILTERAREA For installations SEQUENCING MAGNETS
super-fast cleanout. The K2 model Each K Loader model where an air-tight VALVE Stop tramp metal
(left) features push-fit components features a no-tools, vacuum seal is Allows central before it passes to
with integrated neoprene seals. The lift-out stainless steel not obtainable vacuum operation the machine throat.
K2CR (right) is equipped with quick screen cylinder to at the machine and may be (K2 only)
release flanged couplings with maximize filter area throat. (K2 only) mounted remotely
silicone seals. and allow fast easy or directly to the
cleaning. K Loader.
Specifications
INCHDIAMETER * Stainless steel construction is available as an option
INCHDIAMETER [MM] on the K2 model.
[MM]
THROUGHHOLE
[MM]
[MM]
INCH
INCH
†
THROUGHHOLE Compressed air requirement is needed only if the
K Loader is equipped with an optional sequencing
valve.
INCH Specifications may change without notice. Consult with
[MM] INCH
[MM] a Conair representative for the most current information.
-ODELS + +#2
6IEWING#HAMBER3ELECTION 3MALL(8 oz.) ,ARGE(33 oz.) 3MALL(8 oz.) ,ARGE(33 oz.)
Receiver volume ft3 {liters} 0.009 {0.25} 0.14 {3.96} 0.009 {0.25} 0.14 {3.96}
Receiver capacity lb {kg} 3.2 {1.5} 4.75 {2.2} 3.2 {1.5} 4.75 {2.2}
Material/vacuum line size OD in {mm} 1.5 - 2 {38.1 - 50.8} $
$IMENSIONS inches {mm}
"
INCHES
[MM]
A - Height with viewing chamber 19 {482.6} 25 {635.0} 19 {482.6} 25 {635.0}

B - Height to center of material inlet... !
#
with straight inlet 23.5 {596.9} 29.5 {749.3} 23.5 {596.9} 29.5 {749.3}
with 45 inlet 25.5 {647.7} 31.5 {800.1} 25.5 {647.7} 31.5 {800.1}
with 90 inlet 25.5 {647.7} 31.5 {800.1} 25.5 {647.7} 31.5 {800.1}
C - Height to center of vacuum outlet 16.5 {419.1} 22.5 {571.5} 16.5 {419.1} 22.5 {571.5}
D - Hopper diameter 7.5 {190.5}
7EIGHTlb {kg}
If using an optional isolator valve with
Installed 10.5 {4.8} 14 {6.4} 9 {4.1} 13 {5.9}
Shipping 14 {6.4} 21 {9.5} 12 {5.4} 20 {9.0}
the K2 model add 5.5 inches {139.7 mm}
Filter type 20 mesh stainless steel screen cylinder to total height or measurement B in the
Standard construction material* carbon steel stainless steel line drawing on the left.
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENT† 80-120 psi {5.5-8.3 bars}
C-30
TPCX007-0118 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERSDURALOADTM (DL) SERIES
Reliable Receivers for

Pellets and Regrind
Conveying
Conair DuraLoadTM vacuum receivers are the industry standard
for trouble-free conveying of plastic pellets and regrinds. With
more than 60,000 receivers installed worldwide, the DuraLoad
answers the needs of processors who cannot afford to worry
about the reliability of their material transfer systems. Available
in either a hopper loading configuration with a discharge valve or
direct feed models with a glass hopper, every DuraLoad may be
outfitted to answer the needs of your operation with ratio loading
capability, heavy duty wear plates, a choice of control voltages
and many other options are also available.
Model DL-8 Direct Feed
with UTB
Versatile, Rugged and Reliable Receivers
Hopper loading models are ideal for filling and

maintaining the level of material in machine ` Direct feed or hopper loading
hoppers, drying hoppers or any other vessel. You choose the material delivery you need. Keep a hopper full or feed directly to the
With our reliable discharge valve, you will be machine throat.
assured efficient, vacuum-tight loading and ` Thick wall steel construction
rapid material discharge with no bridging. Five precision engineered workhorse models are provided as standard with carbon steel.
Direct Feed models, with their choice of glass Stainless steel construction is optional.
reservoir sizes, are designed to feed directly ` Built-in sequencing valves
to processing machine throats without the Provide vacuum control from the vacuum pump without additional wiring
need of interim hoppers. An airtight seal at or remote valving.
the machine throat is normally required, but
direct feed models can also be fitted with an ` Modular components
isolator valve to provide additional application No-tools access filter cleaning, screw-in tube stubs, plug-in electrical components,
flexibility when needed. plus dozens of optional accessories.
DuraLoadTM Receivers are available with ` Choice of control

a Universal Terminal Box (UTB) or an Easy The Universal Terminal Box (UTB) is mounted on
Loading Control (ELC). your receiver. The UTB works with FLX-128 Plus.
The optional ELC control is a stand-alone loading
control based on a receiver integrated CAN
open network.

C-31
Features
Engineered for Long Life

Trouble-free, continuous performance for many years, Conair has built DuraLoadTM Vacuum Receivers with features and functionality
required by demanding plastics processing professionals. They are easy to install, a snap to maintain and are backed by Conair’s long-
standing tradition of application assistance, eternal customer support and off-the-shelf spare parts. From easy, drop-in filter screens, to
extra large discharge throats that eliminate material bridging; to heavy-wall spun construction, these conveying components are thoroughly
engineered for long life and trouble-free, continuous performance.
Easy Loading Controls DuraLoad Receivers can Universal Terminal Box Each DuraLoad Receiver can
(ELC-16) be equipped with Conair’s (UTB) be equipped with Conair’s
optional Easy Loading Controls exclusive Universal Terminal
(ELC-16). Individually mounted Box, providing the user with
controls, up to 16, operate an industrial-strength, quick-
within a single CAN open release electrical plug for
network. Each network offers a connection to the control. In
First-In/First-Out (FIFO) priority addition, each input and output
demand. This feature provides device for the receiver plugs
material to each receiver into the UTB making service
in order of its demand. The or the addition of optional
optional ControlMateTM pendant equipment quick and easy. An
further adds to this feature by optional on/off switch right on
including the capability to add the UTB is also available.
a higher priority demand tier.
Integrated Vacuum Sequencing Valve Direct Feed
All Direct Feed

models feature
quick disconnect
clamps for easy
receiver release
and thorough
cleaning. An
isolator valve
(shown here) may
also be provided
for non-airtight
applications.
The isolator valve
can also provide
demand sensing
All DuraLoad Series Receivers
on 4 and 15 lb.
incorporate a vacuum
glass hopper.
sequencing valve module right
in the lid, so there are never
wires or extra compressed air
lines to install. The lid may be
easily removed from the receiver
with no-tools lid clamps and a
quick-release air fitting.

C-32
Options
A Broad Choice of DuraLoad Options Stretch the Value of your Purchase
• Volume fill sensor • Stainless steel material contact
Provides automatic shut-off of the Provides stainless steel in place of carbon steel. The 304 grade
receiver’s vacuum sequence when stainless steel is uncoated internally (material contact areas), but
the receiver is full. Also drives powder coated externally for optimum cosmetic appearance.
an alarm out-put on most Conair
loading controls if not satisfied • Remote demand sensor
during the vacuum sequence. To trigger the operation of the receiver (demand) from a location
other than directly below the receiver, a remote demand sensor
may be employed. Useful on oversized drying hoppers to sense
Material Valves through a window (6-foot cable provided) or when off-loading a
• Ratio Valve granulator (30-foot cable provided). Extension cables also available.
Dual inlet, single outlet material • Positive discharge valve
valve allows the loading of Provides a pneumatically driven discharge valve on the bottom of
a second material (usually the receiver in the event that gravity will not sufficiently open the
regrind) in approximate, standard flapper after loading. Useful for very light materials or
layered percentages along with when high CFM drying hoppers are being loaded.
virgin material. May be installed
on receiver inlet or remotely (ratio signal must be provided
from loading (control). See Ratio Valve specification sheet Hopper venting
for more information. Used to provide relief of displaced air in the receiving vessel
below the receiver during material discharge.
• Common Line Valve
An isolation valve for the
material line, typically used for
systems employing a common Closed-loop
material line connected to venting to
multiple receivers. See Common receiver lid
Line Valve specification sheet for more information. (recommended
Displaced air for critical
• High-performance valves vented to drying hopper
Ratio and Line valves are constructed with both high heat atmosphere. installations).
and abrasive resistant materials to withstand the rigors of
conveying hot and/or highly abrasive materials.
• High-heat package
• Wear plates When the receiver is exposed to temperatures exceeding
Stainless steel plates, installed inside 225°F {107°C}, this option outfits components in the lid (vacuum
the receiver body, radically reduce sequencing valve, tubing, etc.) with high heat capability to extend
hopper wear-through when conveying operational life in a heated environment. All pieces of the receiver
highly abrasive materials like glass are designed for high-heat applications. An oversized vent kit,
filled compounds. May be easily replaced, if ever needed. high temperature level switch, high temperature screen filter, and
screen protector are used.
• Magnets
An airtight, drawer magnet may be added below any direct • Knife gate
feed DuraLoad to trap ferrous metal. Or, a low cost grate A knife gate can be added to the DuraLoad to create a tight seal
magnet may be inserted directly into the glass hopper of the between the hopper and receiver. This is very useful in high-
direct feed receiver to save head room. temperature applications.
• Filter Drawer • Screen protector

A Conair filter drawer can be added to simplify filter cleaning Add an additional layer of protective metal mesh screen to your
and changes. Adds 3.5 inches {8.9 mm} to height. See Filter DuraLoad filter for prolonged life in applications where excessive
Drawer specification sheet for more information. filter wear is a problem.

C-33
Specifications
Hopper loading Direct feed
A diameter
A diameter
A d ia . D
diameter
D C
C
A
C
B
B
B
Gravity discharge Positive discharge
DL Series Vacuum Receivers Fig. 1 – DL8

Receiver model DL8 DL12 DL15 DL20 DL25 8.25 inch
5/16 inch {8 mm}
{210 mm}
Receiver diameter inches {mm} 8 {203} 12 {305} 15 {381} 20 {508} 25 {635} diameter diameter bolt holes
Receiver volume ft3 {liters} 0.14 {4.0} 0.5 {14.2} 1.0 {28.3} 1.8 {51} 3.0 {85.0}
Material/Vacuum line size range inches {mm}* 1.5-2 {38-51} 2.25-3 {57-76}
Receiver maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82} 6.6 inch {167 mm} 7.375 inch {187 mm}
with high-heat option °F {°C} 350 {177} clearance hole required diameter bolt pattern
Filter type 20 mesh stainless steel disc
Available voltages (outputs) 120 VAC, 24 VAC and 24 VDC Fig. 2 – DL12, DL15, DL20 and DL25
Compressed 3
Intermittent duty: 1ft /min. @ 80 psi 5/16 inch
{8 mm}
air requirements {28.3 liters/min. @ 5.51 bars} NPT fitting: 3/8 inch 14 inch diameter
{356 mm} bolt holes
diameter
Hopper Loading Configuration
13 inch {330 mm}
Receiver model DL8 DL12 DL15 DL20 DL25 diameter
Dimensions inches {mm} 12 inch {304 mm} bolt pattern
clearance hole required
A - Height above mounting plate 12.19 {310} 17.37 {441} 20.8 {528} 26.19 {665} 33.75 {857}
B - Depth below mounting plate 5.5 {140} 8.37 {213} 9.5 {241} Fig. 3 – Direct Feed
with positive discharge N/A 16.0 {406} 3 inch diameter {76 mm}
C - Height to center of material inlet 6.19 {157} 9.5 {241} 12.34 {313} 15.9 {404} 21.25 {540} through hole
D - Height to center of vacuum outlet 10 {254} 14.4 {366} 17.5 {445} 22.62 {575} 29.19 {741}
Mounting details See Fig.11 See Fig. 2 6 inch {152 mm}
Installed 22 {10} 41 {19} 49 {22} 69 {31} 99 {45}
Shipping 35 {16} 50 {23} 70 {32} 130 {59} 225 {102} 6 inch {152 mm}
Direct Feed Configuration (glass hopper)

Receiver model DL8 DL12 DL15
Viewing chamber model 4 lb 15 lb 25 lb 4 lb 15 lb 25 lb 4 lb 15lb 25 lb
Viewing chamber capacity lb {kg}† 4 {1.81} 15 {6.8} 25 {11.3} 4 {1.81} 15 {6.8} 25 {11.3} 4 {1.81} 15 {6.8} 25 {11.3}
with isolator valve† 3 {1.36} 11 {4.98} 21 {9.52} 3 {1.36} 11 {4.98} 21 {9.52} 3 {1.36} 11 {4.98} 21 {9.52}
A - Height above mounting plate 24.0 {609} 29.5 {749} 41.5 {1054} 29.25 {742} 35.0 {889} 47.0 {1193} 32.5 {825} 37.75 {958} 49.75 {1263}
B - Height to center of material inlet 17.75 {450} 23.25 {590} 35.25 {895} 21.25 {539} 27 {685} 39 {990} 23.75 {603} 30.5 {774} 42.5 {1079}
C - Height to center of vacuum outlet 22.75 {577} 27.25 {692} 39.25 {996} 26.5 {673} 32.25 {819} 44.25 {1123} 29.25 {742} 35.0 {880} 47.0 {1193}
add for isolator valve 0 2.25 {57}
Mounting details See Fig. 3
Installed 49 {22} 51 {23} 80 {36} 68 {31} 70 {32} 99 {45} 76 {34} 78 {35} 107 {49}
Shipping 77 {35} 79 {36} 108 {49} 96 {44} 98 {44} 127 {58} 104 {47} 106 {48} 135 {61}
* Outside diameter
†
At 35 lbs. per cubic ft.

C-34
40#8 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERS&),4%2,%33&, 3%2)%3
Versatile Loading
For Mid to Large
Throughput
Pellets, virgin-regrind mixes, dusty/problem materials, coarse
powders — Conair FilterLess Vacuum Receivers can handle
the job.
The FilterLess vacuum has the ability to convey dusty materials
and free-flowing powder larger than 100 microns in diameter.
Each FilterLess receiver has a patented “filterless insert” that
uses continuous reversal of vacuum air to separate incoming
material from conveying air without filters or screens. The
process provides dramatic air/material separation without -ODEL&, $IRECT&EED -ODEL&, (OPPER,OADING
with UTB with ELC control
relying on filtration.
No Filter, No Screen, Twin-Cyclone Action
Twin cyclone action allows FilterLess

Receivers to efficiently load materials without ` #HOICEOFDISCHARGE
filter blinding or abrasion. The tangential Gravity discharge with integral demand switch; air-driven positive discharge with a
material inlet provides smooth material entry, rotating level sensor or a direct feed glass hopper with level sensor.
decreasing material fracturing and dust.
` 4HICK WALLSTEELCONSTRUCTION
Available in both hopper loading and direct Cyclone receivers are precision-engineered, in carbon steel or stainless steel.
feed models, the FilterLess can supply
hoppers and surge bins or feed directly to a ` "UILT INVACUUMSEQUENCINGVALVE
processing machine throat. No need for extra wiring or plumbing.
Hopper loaders incorporate the demand level ` /PTIONALHIGHWEARKIT
switch in the discharge valve. The positive
discharge option provides an air driven ` #HOICEOFCONTROL
discharge valve with a rotary demand switch. The Universal Terminal Box (UTB) is mounted on
Direct feed configurations include a choice of your receiver. The UTB works with FLX-128 or
glass hopper sizes, equipped with a capacitive FLX-128 Plus. The optional ELC control is a stand-
alone loading control based on a receiver integrated
demand sensor. An isolator valve option may
CAN open network.
be included when an airtight seal at the base
of the loader cannot be assured. The isolator ` 3IMPLENO TOOLSCLEANOUT
valve may also provide demand sensing. Material changes are fast and easy with quick-release
Fill sensors are latches on the receiver lid, and the drop-in filterless
provided to terminate insert. No filters, no screens.
the fill cycle and can
also provide a “no
material” alarm output.
C-35
40#8 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERS&),4%2,%33&, 3%2)%3
Specifications
(OPPERLOADING $IRECTFEED
! !
DIAMETER DIAMETER
$ $ DIAMETER
#
# !
#
"
"
"
'RAVITYDISCHARGE 0OSITIVEDISCHARGE
&,3ERIES6ACUUM2ECEIVERS &IGUREn(OPPER,OADING-ODELS
2ECEIVERMODEL &, &, &, &, 5/16 inch
Receiver diameter inches {mm} 10 {254} 15 {381} 20 {508} 24 {610} 14 inch {8 mm}
{356 mm} diameter
Receiver volume ft3 {liters} 0.28 {7.9} 1.0 {28.3} 2.3 {65.1} 4.0 {113.3} diameter bolt holes
Material/Vacuum line size range inches {mm}* 1.5-2 {38-51} 1.5-2.5 {38-64} 2.25-3 {57-76} 2.5-4 {64-102}
Receiver maximum temperature rating °F {°C} 180 {82} 180 {82} 180 {82} 180 {82}
13 inch
with high-heat option °F {°C} 350 {177} 350 {177} 350 {177} 350 {177} {330 mm}
Available voltages (outputs) 120 VAC, 24 VAC and 24 VDC diameter
bolt pattern
Compressed air NPT fitting 3/8 inch
Hopper Loading Configuration &IGUREn$IRECT&EED

2ECEIVERMODEL &, &, &, &,
3 inch diameter
$IMENSIONS inches {mm} {76 mm}
A - Height above mounting plate 20.5 {521} 32.75 {832} 45.25 {1150} 57.0 {1450} through hole
B - Depth below mounting plate 8.375 {213} 8.375 {213} 9.5 {241} 9.5 {241}
with positive discharge 16.0 {406} 16.0 {406} 16.0 {406} 16.0 {406}
C - Height to center of material inlet 10.5 {267} 21.25 {540} 28.5 {724} 37.0 {940} 6 inch
D - Height to center of vacuum outlet 19.25 {489} 30.5 {775} 42.5 {1080} 52.5 {1334} {152 mm}
-OUNTINGDETAILS See Figure 1
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHT lb {kg}
Installed 40 {18} 58 {26} 92 {42} 126 {57}
6 inch {152 mm}
Shipping 120 {54} 170 {77} 200 {91} 260 {118}
$IRECT&eed Configuration (glass hopper)

2ECEIVERMODEL &, &,
6IEWINGCHAMBERMODEL LB LB LB LB LB LB
Viewing chamber capacity lb {kg}† 4 {1.81} 15 {6.8} 25 {11.3} 4 {1.81} 15 {6.8} 25 {11.3}
with isolator valve† 3 {1.36} 11 {4.98} 21 {9.52} 3 {1.36} 11 {4.98} 21 {9.52}
A - Height above mounting plate 32.3 {820.4} 37.8 {960.1} 49.8 {1265} 44.5 {1130} 50.0 {1270} 62.0 {1575}
B - Height to center of material inlet 20.9 {530.9} 28.3 {718.8} 40.3 {1024} 31.7 {805.2} 39.1 {993.1} 51.1 {1298}
C - Height to center of vacuum outlet 29.7 {754.4} 37.1 {942.3{ 49.1 {1247} 40.9 {1038.9} 48.3 {1226.8} 60.3 {1532}
add for isolator valve 2.25 {57}
-OUNTINGDETAILS See Figure 2
Installed 40 {18} 55 {25} 113 {51} 58 {26} 85 {39} 143 {65}
Shipping 68 {31} 83 {38} 143 {65} 90 {41} 119 {54} 179 {81}

Outside diameter
†
At 35 lbs. per cubic ft.
C-36
TPCX065-0317 VACUUM MATERIAL RECEIVERS0/7$%22%#%)6%202 3%2)%3
Reliable, Central
Vacuum Conveying
of Free-flowing Powders
The Conair PR Series of Powder Receivers effectively transfer
powdered resins (down to 1 micron), with the efficiency of a
central vacuum system. Available in a range of sizes to fit user
needs, the PR Series uses high capacity, pleated filters coupled
with a compressed air accumulated blowback system, for long,
maintenance-free operation.
Each receiver includes a vacuum sequencing valve in its lid for

easy connection to a central vacuum system.
-ODEL02 -ODEL02
(With terminal (With optional
box for wiring ELC-16 control.)
to a central
control system.)
Central Vacuum Receivers Designed Specifically for Powders
Equipped with a compact filter chamber, the

PR Series is easy to maintain. Quick release ` #OMPACTFORLOW HEIGHTAREAS
latches and utility connections allow easy, The Powder Receiver range can provide up to 168 ft2 {15.6 m2} of filter area with a
no-tools disassembly and filter cartridge(s) lower profile than most receivers on the market, allowing installation in low
are conveniently mounted to a plate for headroom areas.
quick removal.
` 7IDERANGEOFSIZESANDOPTIONS
An oversized compressed air accumulator and These receivers can be fitted with a wide selection of line sizes and a choice of
blowback timer deliver programmable blasts of discharge valves, with options for a wear plate and stainless steel construction for
abrasive materials.
air through the filter cartridge(s) at the end of
each load cycle to eliminate material packing. ` #HOICEOFCONTROL
The receiver is compatible with an Easy Loading Control (ELC-16) or a Universal
Each model includes a reliable vacuum
Terminal Box (UTB) to link with Conair’s central loading control systems such
sequencing valve tucked neatly into its domed
FLX-128 Plus.
lid, ready to be connected to a vacuum source.
` %ASYMATERIALCHANGEANDCLEANING
A terminal box is provided as standard for
All components disassemble quickly. No tools are needed for material changes or
connection to a central vacuum control system,
cleanout. The pull-out filter assembly eliminates the mess associated with
or the PR Series can be supplied with Conair's
“bag-style” Powder Receivers.
ELC-16, for localized control of loading.
` ,ONGFILTERLIFEWITHMINIMALDUST
The special, easy-release surface of the cartridge filters provide long operating life
without packing or degradation. The programmable blowback system minimizes dust
and maximizes throughput.
C-37
How it works
0OWDER2ECEIVER 0OWDER2ECEIVER
LOADSMATERIAL DISCHARGES
MATERIAL
,OADING 5NLOADING&ILTERCLEANING
An integrated demand level switch on the discharge flapper (or Upon completion of loading, the discharge valve opens, allowing
separate demand level switch) initiates the start of the conveying powdered resin to flow out of the loader.
cycle by turning on the vacuum motor, drawing air and material
While unloading, the blowback system directs multiple,
into the receiver's lower chamber.
accumulated, high-power blasts of compressed air through the
A filter guard directs material as it loads down into the cone of the cartridge filter(s), pulsing them and blowing off collected material,
receiver. Pleated filter media in the upper chamber of the receiver dust and fines. The blowback action also encourages total
separates the material from the conveying air. material evacuation from the receiver, into the hopper below.
Note: The material flow path may be reinforced by an optional wear plate Blowback is programmable to provide optimum cycles for
if the material being conveyed is abrasive. Once the fill sensor senses maximum cleaning.
material has filled the lower chamber, the vacuum motor shuts off.
After unloading and blowback are complete, the loader either
starts again or waits for another demand signal.
Options
s 3TAINLESSSTEELCONSTRUCTION s 7EARPLATES s &ILTERVENTASSEMBLY

Standard carbon steel construction can Replaceable plates, installed inside the The filter vent
be substituted with 304 grade stainless loader body, eliminate hopper wear- assembly provides
steel (uncoated inside the loader and through when conveying abrasive or glass- a predictable
cosmetically powder coated on the outside). filled materials. Available in either cold exhaust path for
rolled steel or electroless nickel plating. blowback air to
s $IFFERENTIALPRESSUREGAUGE prevent pressurized
To Monitor the air passage of the filters s 0OSITIVEDISCHARGEVALVE air and dust
to instantly determine powder compaction Provides a pneumatically driven discharge from escaping
and the need to manually clean or replace valve on the bottom of the loader in the through feed tubes
the filter(s). event that gravity will not sufficiently open or seams in the
the standard flapper after loading. Useful receiving vessel.
for very light resins or any resin that may
not flow easily.
C-38
Control Options
5NIVERSAL4ERMINAL"OX54" %ASY,OADING#ONTROL%,#
Conair’s exclusive Universal Terminal Box provides an industrial Each on-demand loading sequence is clearly exhibited on the
strength quick-release electrical plug for connection to the control. graphical control face with bright, simple LED lights. A "no-load"
The UTB is available with an optional on/off switch and can be alarm light and buzzer are included.
connected to Conair’s FLX Plus Control.
All of Conair’s Loaders and Receivers can be controlled using

one of the central loading controls developed by Conair to
manage your entire conveying system. Instead of choosing the
ELC, select a UTB (Universal Terminal Box) for your Powder PR
Receiver and connect and control the receiver with Conair’s
FLX-128 Plus conveying system control. See the FLX-128 Plus
specification sheet for more information about the capacities
and capabilities of these scalable controls.
ControlMateTM Pendant (optional) with ELC Control

#ONTROL-ATE4-0ENDANT The 16 additional loading functions available with the ControlMate
The ControlMate pendant expands your Pendant include:
loader's capabilities while providing • On/Off • Load time • Fill sensor present
convenient remote controls for your Powder
Receiver. The ControlMate includes a 15 foot • Unload time • Blowback • Load and hold
connection cable and handy holster. • Load attempts • Priority demand • Purge / Adjustable
A helpful graphic and array of LEDs, illustrate Purge Valve (APV)
• Ratio layers • Fill sensor logic
expanded loading functions like ratio loading and • Ratio installed
line purging while a three-digit numeric display
logic • Blowback installed
shows each functions setting as it is selected. • Purge time
C-39
Specifications
3TANDARD-OUNTING0LATE
02MODEL 020202AND02MODELS
8.25 inch 5/16 inch 14 inch {356 mm}
{210 mm} {8 mm} diameter 5/16 inch
diameter diameter mounting {8 mm}
mounting bolt holes plate diameter
! plate bolt holes
!
7.375 inch 13 inch
{187 mm} {330 mm}
diameter diameter
bolt pattern bolt pattern
$
$
-ATERIAL6ACUUM,INE3IZES
"
" Outer diameter in inches {mm}
#
1.75 {44.5} 2.25 {57.2} 3.0 {76.2}
# 2.0 {50.8} 2.5 {63.5} 4.0 {101.6}

02'RAVITYDISCHARGE 020OSITIVEDISCHARGE
-ODEL 02 02 02 02 02

Receiver volume ft³ {liters} 0.14 {4.0} 0.5 {14.2} 1.0 {28.3} 1.8 {51} 3.0 {85.0}
* Air-to-cloth ratio cfm:ft² 3:1
Line sizes inches {mm} 1.75 - 2.0 {45 - 51} 1.75 - 2.5 {45 - 64} 2.25 - 3.0 (57 - 76} 2.5 - 4.0 {64 - 102}
&ILTER
Two pleated polyester
Filter type one pleated polyester cartridge Three pleated polyester cartridges
cartridges
Total filter area 23 ft² {2.1 m²} 56 ft² {5.2 m²} 48 ft² {4.5 m²} 69 ft² {6.4 m²} 168 ft² {15.6 m²}
Hopper diameter† 8.0 {203} 12.0 {305} 15.0 {381} 20.0 {508} 25.0 {635}
A - Height above mounting plate† 39.0625 {992.2} 44.25 {1123.9} 45.1875 {1063.6 50.50 {1282.7} 57.25 {1454.2}
B - Depth below mounting plate 5.5 {140} 8.375 {213}
with positive discharge N/A 16.0 {406}
C - Clearance hole diameter 6.63 {167} 12.0 {305}
D - Height to center of material inlet 6.19 {157} 9.5 {241} 12.1875 {309.6} 15.9 {404} 21.25 {540}
Height to center of vacuum outlet 36.875 {936.6} 41.3125 {1049.3} 41.875 {1063.6} 46.8125 {1189.0} 52.625 {1336.7}
Installed 44.0 {20.0} 77.0 {34.9} 143.0 {64.9}
Shipping 139.0 {63.0} 164.0 {74.4} 225.0 {102.1} 246.0 {111.6} 277.0 {125.6}
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTSINTERMITTENTDUTY
Pressure 60 - 80 psi {4.1 - 5.5 bars}
2 ft³/min @ 80 psi
Consumption 8 ft³/min @ 80 psi {3.7 liters/sec. @ 6 bars}
{0.94 liters/sec. @ 6 bars}
NPT Fitting 3/8 inch
Specification Notes !PPLICATION.OTE

†
The optional filter vent assembly changes PR dimensions. Height above mounting plate increases * Powder Receivers are not intended for materials such as pure carbon
7.75 inch {196.9 mm} on the PR8, PR12, PR15 and 9.6875 inch {246.1 mm} on the PR20 and PR25. black, titanium oxide or any other difficult to handle material that
Overall width becomes 19.625 inch {498.5 mm} on the PR8, 21.5 inch {546.1 mm} on the PR12, requires an air-to-cloth ratio of less than 3:1.
23.0 inch {584.2 mm} for the PR15, 35.5 inch {901.7 mm} on the PR20, and 38.0 inch {965.2 mm}
on the PR25.
%LECTRICAL.OTE
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the most
The PR Series, Powder Receiver is equipped to operate with 24 VDC output
as standard, with 24 VAC or 120 VAC outputs available upon request.
C-40
40#8 CENTRAL VACUUM CONTROLS%,# -!.$%,# -/$%,3
Versatile Control
For Vacuum Conveying
The Easy Loading Control (ELC) from Conair offers a simple-to-
use interface for your conveying system.
With the ELC, loading parameter setup can be accomplished

with a few simple steps. Available with two application specific
models, the ELC is capable of handling all your conveying needs.
%,# #ONTROL
Simple-to-Use Pendant for Conveying Control
The ELC is available as two models; the

ELC-M and the ELC-16. The ELC-M is used ` %ASY TO READDISPLAY
for stand-alone hopper loader applications. Both the ELC control module and optional ControlMateTM pendant have clearly visible
The ELC-16 uses a CAN open network that display panels. Loading sequence symbols and LED indicators display exactly where
allows up to 16 controls with receivers on one your loader or receiver is in the conveying process.
network cable, operated by a pump controller.
` &IRST )N&IRST /UTDEMANDLOADING
The ELC’s optional ControlMateTM pendant uses The ELC-16 control module comes standard with First-In/First-Out (FIFO) demand.
the same type of intuitive interface as the ELC Unlike earlier loading controls, the ELC-16 does not load receivers based
control, but allows the capability to change a on traditional demand loops. Instead, the receivers are loaded based on the order of
total of 16 preset parameters to fine-tune your demand for material.
conveying needs. The ControlMate pendant
can be used interchangeably with either the ` #ONFIGUREFORPRIORITYRECEIVERDEMAND
ELC-M or ELC-16 controls. Use the optional ControlMate pendant to activate priority demand for your ELC-16
control. This setting creates a second priority demand First-In/First-Out demand loop,
The ELC will ship mounted and connected to that takes priority over the standard First-In/First-Out demand loop.
your loader or receiver when purchased from
Conair. Installation of your loader or receiver ` )NTERCHANGEABLE#ONTROL-ATE4-PENDANT
with the ELC is as simple as bolting it to your The addition of the optional ControlMate pendant allows the capability to alter up to
material vessel and connecting your power 16 loading parameters for even more functionality. All loading changes are
and/or communication cables. saved within the standard ELC module, so one ControlMate can be used with multiple
ELC controls.
C-41
Control Models
%,# CONTROL %,# -CONTROL

A trunk cable supplies power and communications to up to 16 Used with a self-contained vacuum motor loader. The ELC-M is
controls mounted on receivers from a central pump control via a provided as standard with a three pronged power cable for easy
CAN open network. installation.
All ELC-16 controls are equipped with easy connections to the
cables and junction boxes that make up the CAN open network.
#ONTROL-ATE4-0ENDANT s )NTERCHANGEABLEPROGRAMMING
The ControlMate pendant One pendant can be moved from one ELC control to another
expands your loader's to program advanced settings. The same ControlMate pendant
convenient remote controls .OTE ControlMate pendants hold no program data, so one pendant
for your Access Loader. The can be freely used with the entire family of Conair ELC controls. Data, once
ControlMate includes a 15 programmed with the ControlMate, safely resides in each ELC control.
foot connection cable and s #HANGEUPTOPARAMETERS
A helpful graphic and array Pendant include:
of LEDs, illustrate expanded • On/Off • Load Time • Fill Sensor Present
loading functions like ratio • Unload Time • Blowback • Load and Hold
loading and line purging while • Load Attempts • Priority Demand • Purge / Adjustable
a three-digit numeric display Purge Valve (APV)
• Ratio Layers • Fill Sensor Logic
shows each functions setting
• Ratio Percentage • Demand Sensor • Ratio Installed
as it is selected.
• Purge Time Logic • Blowback Installed
.OTESome ControlMate functions require additional components for

their operation, ie: Ratio valve, purge valve.
#ONTROL-ATETM&UNCTION
01 02 03
C-42
How it Works
%,# -CONTROL
Figure 1 Figure 2
A signal from the loader’s demand switch indicates to
the ELC-M on the loader that it requires material to be
conveyed to satisfy its demand. The ELC-M sends a
signal to the vacuum motor on the loader to energize
and start a loading cycle. The material is then drawn
in by the loader’s vacuum motor. If the hopper is filled,
the demand switch will remain open (Figure 1) and
no further load cycles will be needed. However, if the
demand was not satisfied and the demand switch closes
(Figure 2) the loader will continue with loading cycles
until the demand is satisfied.
%,# CONTROL -ORE2ECEIVERS

'ROUND 5PTO
0UMP#ONTROL
*UNCTION"OX
6ALVE/UTPUT
,INE6OLTAGE
)DLE-ODE
$UST#OLLECTOR/UTPUT
-OTOR3TARTER/VERLOAD
)DLE-ODE6ALVE #ONTROL-ATE4-
0UMP
-OTOR
3TARTER
,INE6OLTAGE
6ACUUM0UMP $UST#OLLECTOR
A signal from the receiver’s demand switch indicates to the individually The ELC-16 control is used for a number of receivers (up to 16) on a
mounted ELC-16 on the receiver that it requires material to be CAN open network. The ELC-16 control uses First-In/First-Out (FIFO)
conveyed to satisfy its demand. The ELC-16 then communicates its for receiver demand. The FIFO setting works within your CAN open
need for material to the pump control via a CAN open network. The network and will allow the receiver that demanded material first to
demand signal from the ELC is then added to the pump control’s receive it first. For example, if there are four (4) receivers in a series
queue. The vacuum pump control will then permit the receiver to load that have demands for material, but the third receiver demanded
on a First-In/First-Out (FIFO) basis. material first, regardless of the receiver’s physical location on the CAN
open network, it will be provided with material.
C-43
Specifications -4APPED
INCH
[MM]
" #
-ODELS %,# - %,# #ALCULATING%,# SYSTEMCABLELENGTH

3UPPLYVOLTAGE Total the distance from the vacuum pump power supply to the last loading station.
115VAC 50Hz, 230VAC 50/60Hz 24VDC (from pump control) Account for reasonable slack at each loading station for connections, cable routing, etc.
0UMPCONTROLVOLTAGEFull load amps Junction boxes must be provided to connect between the system trunk cable and
230VAC/60Hz N/A 0.64 each ELC-16 control.
400VAC/50Hz N/A 0.37
460VAC/60Hz N/A 0.32 Specification Notes
#ONTROLDIMENSIONSinches {mm} The ELC-16 system trunk cable is two, 4-conductor shielded twisted cables.
A - Height 4.5 {114.4} * FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
B - Width 6.0 {152.4} on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
C - Depth 2.9 {73.0} systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
#ONTROLWEIGHT lb {kg} applied to the machine.
Installed 7.6 {3.4} Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the
Shipping 9.1 {4.1} most current information.
/PTIONAL#ONTROL-ATE4-0ENDANTAND#RADLE
#ONTROL-ATE4-0ENDANT#RADLE
INCH
[MM]
The ControlMate Pendant is provided with a
[MM]
INCH
INCH
[MM]
surface mountable docking cradle for quick and

easy retrieval. The cradle can be mounted to
any vertical or horizontal surface by using M3
flat-head mounting screws.
-
[MM]
INCH
SCREW A cable clip on the control cradle keeps the

HOLE INCH[MM]
ControlMate’s communication cable up and
[MM]
INCH
out of the way for neat installation. It can also

be used for a permanent communication cable
INCH location when the ControlMate is being used
[MM] elsewhere.
INCH[MM]
/PTIONAL#ONTROL-ATE4-0ENDANTAND#RADLE
%,# PUMPCONTROL INCH[MM]

The ELC-16 pump control provides power and communications
to all the ELC-16 controls within the CAN open network via
a 4-conductor trunk cable. The pump control also provides
BOLDPATTERN
[MM]
[MM]
the “start” signal to the vacuum pump used in the conveying

INCH
INCH
process in the ELC-16 system. Cord grips are provided to allow

interconnection with the ELC-16 system’s trunk cable, dust
collector and idle mode valve connections.
The pump control enclosure is equipped with wall mounting
accommodations and can be mounted to a flat surface using the
supplied mounting holes. The pump control should be located so INCH
[MM] INCH
access to its switches and viewing of its lights are not obstructed. INCH[MM] [MM]
C-44
40"8 CENTRAL LOADING CONTROLS-/$%,%,3
High Capacity Resin

Conveying Automation
All the benefits of a unified conveying system control can now
reach every receiver, pump and valve in your operation with the
all new ELS, Ethernet Loading System Control from Conair. This
fully distributed control system utilizes reliable Allen-Bradley
components, interconnected via industrial Ethernet to provide control
of up to 500 receivers, 96 pumps and over 1000 source valves.
Simplified navigation using international icons on the large,

touchscreen control panel will assure every authorized user is
comfortable monitoring up to 90 independently operating conveying -ODEL%,3
systems and making adjustments with little or no training.
Fully Distributed Conveying System Control
Older conventional controls place all of the

brains and input/output capabilities required ` &ULLYDISTRIBUTED%THERNETINTEGRATION
for conveying system operation in a box on the Rock solid Allen-Bradley components are interconnected via industrial Ethernet.
wall, and require long runs of multi-conductor
cables to be extended to each receiver, pump ` INCHCOLORTOUCHSCREEN
and valve in the system. All of that changes The full color control provides easy navigation via internationally understood icons.
with the ELS. This single-wire Ethernet- A 15-inch screen is optional. Add up to five additional touchscreens, wherever you
need them.
based loading system is fully distributed,
completely flexible and scalable, and easy
` -INIMIZEWIRINGWITHMODULARCOMPONENTS
and cost-effective to install. The I/O modules,
Allen-Bradley, ArmorBlocks and ArmorPoints are located where the work takes place,
connected via industrial Ethernet, are added
minimizing long runs of multi-conductor cables. Connections are easy plug and play.
as needed and placed near conveying system
components, eliminating hard wiring. Up to six ` #HOOSEYOURLEVELOFCONTROL
compact touch screen panels can be placed Systems are available from A-B CompactLogix through A-B Control-Logix models with
anywhere. Dozens of independently operating dual processors for hot swap, instantaneous backup capabilities.
conveying systems can be easily networked,
viewed and controlled from multiple locations.
Shared components, like back-up pumps,
material purge valves can operate seamlessly
with multiple vacuum systems, all controlled
from a master conveying control system, as
reliable as it is sophisticated.
C-45
How it Works
The ELS Control is Conair’s most powerful material-handling
system. Scalable from the basic configuration of 90 loaders, to the
fully deployed configuration that can manage up to 500 loaders, the
ELS can be programmed for simple intuitive navigation.
I/O connections are located in compact modules near the loader or
pump location. Communication between the PLC and the modules
takes place via a single Ethernet cable. Adding more loaders to the
system is as simple as tying it into a remote module nearby.
The ELS control makes use of Allen-Bradley ArmorBlock
and ArmorPoint I/O modules. These are commonly available
components that make it easy to build and grow a control network.
Each ArmorBlock provides connections for up to 4 loaders, 3
pumps, and 8 material sources.
When expanding in larger increments, ArmorPoint modules can be
used to add up to 16 loaders, 12 pumps, and 32 sources with 1
Ethernet connection.
Because it is all Ethernet-based, ELS users have the advantage of
internet connectivity. Any device – computer, tablet, or even a smart
phone – with access to a company network, can be used to reach
the ELS control. Whatever can be done via the in-plant Ethernet-
connected monitors can also be completed on the remote device.
!RMOR"LOCK !RMOR0OINT
The ArmorBlock and ArmorPoint system allows for clean

installation, and features open design that is dust-tight and water-
tight. Rated for IP69K and NEMA 4X (when marked) for use without
an enclosure.
The panel can be mounted to C-channel framing and allows for
easy access to the ArmorBlock and ArmorPoint connections.
Connections are quick and simple, and the open design allows
for easy viewing of the connection and communication lights
incorporated on each panel.
Features
• Industrial ethernet CAT 5 communications • Fully distributed, totally flexible, wiring • Purge and pocket valve operation
• Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation and control • 10-inch {254 mm} HMI standard,
components • Unloading (reverse regrind) system 15-inch {381 mm} optional
• Choice of ArmorBlock or ArmorPoint capability • Multiple levels of password protection
I/O modules • Ratio loading, positive discharge and fill • International icon control navigation
• Up to six Human Machine Interface sensor operation
(HMI) panels
C-46
Features
$ESCRIPTIVESCREENSWITHANIMATEDICONS
The ELS screens are highly descriptive
with active icons to let you know what is
currently happening with the machine.
Just by looking at the icon, you can tell if
a loader has demand, is loading, dumping
or faulting.
This screen shows the specific selected
pump and all the loaders attached to
it. Also shown are the runtime hours
for the pump and all the preventative
maintenance information associated with
the pump accessories. This is where a
backup pump is assigned to take over the
currently operating pump.
You can choose which icons appropriately

represent your equipment. Select an
RG Pump style icon for one pump, and a
PD icon for a Positive Displacement Pump.
Select an Access Receiver icon for your
Access Receivers. This type of flexibility
and built-in programming allows the user
to identify the correct equipment with what
is displayed on the screen.
.AVIGATEYOURWAY
Conair’s Quick Find Feature allows
for navigation in many different ways.
Navigate by shift, personnel, function,
plant layout, or even a plant drawing.
Quick Find allows the user to simply touch
an area of interest to zero-in on a piece
of equipment. A great way for multiple
users to find the equipment they use
the most, Quick Find allows a variety of
ways to navigate to specific controls or
components. Aimlessly searching through
screens trying to remember or decode
which piece of equipment is which is a
thing of the past. Welcome to Quick Find!
C-47
Specifications
-AIN#ONTROL0ANELAND2EMOTE(-)
" % Specification Notes
* Maximum number of vacuum receivers, source

valves, and vacuum pumps depends on the I/O
expansion options.
†
10-inch screen shown. 15-inch is optional.
‡
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not
include any options or accessories on equipment.
!
For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific
1 1
machines and systems, refer to the electrical
diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
applied to the machine.
Specifications may change without notice.
Consult with a Conair representative for the most
&RONTVIEW† 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS %,3
Maximum number of vacuum receivers Up to 500*
Maximum number of vacuum pumps 96 (any pump can be assigned as backup)*
Maximum number of source valves 1000
0ROGRAMMABLE,OGIC#ONTROLLER0,#
Main control panel Allen-Bradley ControlLogix
Operator interface Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus V.6
Screen size - diagnonal inches {mm} 10 {254} standard, 15 {381} optional
Output voltage to receivers/valves 24 VDC
Input voltage to receivers 24 VDC
Output voltage to pumps 24 VDC
Full load amps ‡ 120 Vac/1 Phase 60 Hz (Optional 230 VAC)
)NPUTOUTPUTCAPABILITIESANDMAXIMUMNUMBEROFINPUTOUTPUTDEVICES
Main control panel Block device Point device Block pump Point pump Block source Point source Block alarm
Receivers N/A Up to 4 Up to 16 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Pumps No inputs/ N/A N/A Up to 3 Up to 16 N/A N/A N/A
Valves outputs N/A N/A N/A N/A Up to 8 Up to 32 N/A
Alarms N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1
Max. number
N/A 30 blocks 30 points 6 blocks 6 points 30 blocks 30 points 6 blocks
blocks/points
Totals N/A 500 devices 96 pumps 1000 sources 6 alarms

A - Height 20 {508}
B - Width 24 {610}
C - Depth 10 {254}
7EIGHT MAINENCLOSURElb {kg}
Installed 60 {27.2}
Shipping 80 {36.3}
-AXIMUMNUMBEROFREMOTE(-)S
Remote HMI panel 5 remote HMIs maximum
C-48
40#8 CENTRAL LOADING CONTROLS-/$%,&,8 0,53
Total Control of Various

Size Conveying Systems;
Easily Expandable
Now with features never offered before by any conveying control,
the FLX-128 Plus was designed for today’s newest conveying
technology. The FLX-128 Plus maintains all the features and
capability that made the original FLX-128 so popular, plus
much more! Smarter, faster, and stronger, the FLX-128 Plus is
designed to work with Conair’s Wave ConveyingTM System, the
ILP (Invisible Line Proofing), the MVP (Material Vision Proofing) and
the AS (AutoResin Selector). The FLX-128 Plus Flexible Control
System utilizes a combination of centralized I/O and expansion
modules, interconnected via industrial Ethernet to provide control
of up to 128 receivers, 40 pumps (plus 2 back-up pumps) and
256 source valves. A color touchscreen with descriptive picture
icons assures that even with little or no training, any user will
be comfortable monitoring or making changes on up to 40 -ODEL&,8 0LUS
independently operating vacuum systems.
With Recipes and VFD Control, Multiple Functions with Each Pump
The FLX-128 Plus allows one pump to do multiple

functions. Using a VFD and customized recipes, ` %CONOMICALANDEXPANDABLE
the same pump can convey at multiple rates to Buy only the control capacity you need today, and then expand with additional
the same or different receivers. Each receiver modules as your business grows. The FLX-128 Plus is the right choice for small
can have up to ten unique recipes, which store systems all the way up to 128 receivers and 40 pumps.
settings for load time (programmable to 1/10th
of a second), VFD speed, Wave ConveyingTM ` -INIMIZEWIRINGWITHMODULARCOMPONENTS
settings, and purge time. Groups of receivers, pumps and valves can be easily added with a simple Ethernet
connection to modular expansion panels.
Conveying components are commonly spread
across plants; on processing machines, on ` #OLORTOUCHSCREEN
mezzanines, in pump rooms, on multi-component The 8-inch full color touchscreen control provides easy navigation via internationally
blenders and source valves and grouped at understood icons. Add up to five additional touchscreens, wherever you need them.
material supply hoppers. In these common A 15-inch control is available as an option.
arrangements, the FLX-128 Plus conveying
control is right at home, providing input/output ` 2EMOTEACCESSVIAWEBPAGES
(I/O) capability in modular panels, interconnected Ethernet connection allows you to connect and view the system from any PC,
via Ethernet. Connections to individual conveying anytime, anywhere.
components are minimized since I/O modules can
` 7AVE#ONVEYING4-),0-60!3READY
be placed where they are needed and connected
The FLX-128 Plus is ready for use with Conair’s Wave ConveyingTM System,
to the main FLX-128 Plus control via Ethernet.
ILP (Invisible Line Proofing), and/or MVP (Material Vision Proofing), and/or
The FLX-128 Plus system utilizes Programmable AS (AutoResin Selector) equipment.
Logic Controllers (PLC’s) in modular panels, with
touchscreen panel(s) equipped with colorful icons
to assure that all authorized personnel can operate
the system. Shared conveying components, like
back-up pumps and material purge valves, operate
seamlessly with multiple vacuum systems.
C-49
How it Works
• Input and output signals can be connected via a Conair UTB

(Universal Terminal Box) for an easy plug-in loader connection.
%THERNET#ABLE &IBER/PTICS
• Once I/O panels are interconnected to the main FLX-128 Plus control • Ethernet makes the long runs. Via CAT 5 copper wire or fiber
panel, the FLX instantly recognizes them and makes all connected optics, the Ethernet network connects all of the FLX-128 Plus
conveying components available for use. The FLX automatically expansion panels. Receivers, pumps and valves then wire into
provides pump management for independently operating systems these localized panels.
that call upon shared source valves at the same time.
Features Options
• First-In/ First-Out (FIFO) • Set-up Wizard, I/O test • Add simple expansion panels for groups of receivers, pumps,
priority loading mode, help screens source valves or a combination of receivers and valves
• Load and hold loading • Text messaging and email • Control where you need it. Up to six (6) full color operator
• Multi-source, multi- capabilities interface panels can be located wherever is best for you
destination conveying • Preventive maintenance Each panel controls the entire conveying network
• Unloading (reverse regrind) tracking • Remote alarm and/or Remote HMI with alarm
system capability • CAT 5 or fiber optic
• Ratio loading, positive network wiring
discharge and fill sensor • Industrial Ethernet
operation communications
• Purge and pocket valve • Alarms can be set for use in
operation up to eight different zones
• Broad choice of expansion • Custom navigation, custom
panels for system growth receiver groups
• Up to six Human Machine • Ready for use with
Interface (HMI) panels Wave ConveyingTM, ILP, MVP,
• Multiple levels of and AS equipment
password protection
C-
TPCX073-0817 CENTRAL LOADING CONTROLSMODEL FLX-128 PLUS
The Recipe Advantage

Ten unique recipes can be set for each
receiver (up to 128 maximum) for quick setup. 2ECEIVER 2ECEIVER 2ECEIVER
Each recipe allows for setting: Load Recipe 6 3 9
• Load time (can be programmed down Purge Recipe 10 0 0
to 1/10th of a second
• VFD speed
• Wave ConveyingTM settings
• Purge time
VFD 60% 80% 100%
Load Time 30s 20s 15s
Operation Wave Conveying Standard Wave Conveying
Performance Graph
This web-enabled Performance Graph screen shows current throughput, and can be used for diagnostics for up to 10 receivers at a time.
The Performance Graph displays:
• VFD speed • Wave Conveying valve pulses

• Resin speed (when equipped with Wave Conveying Sensor) • Wave Conveying valve parameters
• Throughput (when equipped with fill sensor) • Pump pressure (Wave Conveying Pump Expansion Box required)

C-
ILP, MVP, Wave ConveyingTM, AS Ready. . .
),0/PERATION -60/PERATION
Add invisible Line Proofing (ILP) to your system to assure each Let the Material Vision Proofing (MVP) system not only assure
material connection never suffers from human error. Each proper connections, but also tell the operator where the hose
connection must be made correctly, or material through that line should be connected.
will not move. The FLX-128 Plus can control 16 ILP Stations, A camera keeps track of all connections. The MVP can monitor up
each capable of proofing 16 material lines. to 12 material sources.
See the ILP specification sheet for more information. See the MVP specification sheet for more information
7AVE#ONVEYING4-/PERATION !3/PERATION
The FLX-128 Plus is essential for the operation of Conair’s Conair’s AutoResin Selector (AS) is the most advanced automated
Wave ConveyingTM system. Wave Conveying uses slow-speed material selection system yet. An operator uses the AS control to
conveying (300 – 2800 feet-per-minute) to move sensitive input which source needs to be connected to which destination.
materials that often cause problems like dust, angel hair, or wear FLX-128 Plus Communication uses an RS485 connection from the
to conveying systems when conveyed at the high speeds of AS valve control wired back to the any of the FLX-128 Plus boxes
conventional conveying. with an HMI.
See the Wave Conveying specification sheet for more information. See the AS specification sheet for more information.
C-
Control Features
The FLX-128 Plus Conveying Control System is not only powerful
and flexible, but is also the most convenient loading system control
to operate.
• Colorful icons mimic the system components they represent and
change to show operating status with minimal need for words.
• Help screens provide multi-lingual support for every page and
every control activity.
• Shop floor personnel immediately understand and find the
touchscreen FLX very easy to use.
/PERATINGSYSTEM 0REVENTATIVEMAINTENANCE $ETAILEDSCREENS

• An entire group of receivers can be • The FLX-128 Plus automatically keeps track • From selecting equipment
viewed at once and each function is of equipment run times to help you plan interconnections to adjusting load
exhibited so you know exactly what’s periodic maintenance. Back-up pumps may times, monitoring and managing resin
happening in your operation. Shown are be easily selected with the press of an icon movement throughout your factory has
loading, dumping and demand activities. on the touchscreen. never been easier.
#ENTRALVACUUMUNLOADING 6ALVESHARING The FLX-128 Plus’s sophisticated pump management

Each FLX-128 Plus has the ability to not only capability, often referred to as valve sharing or pump stacking means
load hoppers and machines, but also unload the FLX-128 Plus will automatically organize multiple demands on
vessels that need to be kept evacuated, like common components like purge valves, streamlining operation and
granulator bins. A level sensor in the bin can eliminating redundant equipment needs.
trigger unloading from multiple bins to a
common receiver, or dedicated receivers. 3YSTEMRESTORATION Both the PLC program and user settings are
preserved on memory cards for safekeeping.
-ULTI SOURCE The multi-source button allows
a single receiver to pull material from multiple %MAILANDTEXTOPTIONWith this option, the FLX-128 Plus can send
sources to a common destination. alarm messages as emails or text messages.
-AKEITCLEAR The FLX-128 Plus not only displays icons that aid in
understanding system operation, but specific icons can be selected
for the actual equipment in use, with minimal need for words.
C-
Specifications
-AIN#ONTROL0ANELAND2EMOTE)/ 2EMOTE(-)AND%XPANSION0ANELS
! !
" # " #
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW &RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODEL &,8 0LUS
Maximum number of vacuum receivers up to 128
Maximum number of vacuum pumps up to 40 (plus 2 back-up)
0ROGRAMMABLE,OGIC#ONTROLLER
Main control panel Wago 8202
Remote I/O Wago 750-871
Operator interface Red Lion (8-inch standard, 15-inch optional)
Output voltage to receivers/valves 24 VDC (24/120 VAC optional)
Input voltage to receivers 24 VDC
Output voltage to pumps 24 VDC (24/120 VAC optional)
Power/Amps 120 VAC/1.6 Amps/60 Hz
-AINCONTROL
2EMOTE)/ 2ECEIVER 0UMP 3OURCE6ALVE 2ATIO6ALVE 7AVE#ONVEYING 7AVE#ONVEYING
PANEL
)NPUT/UTPUT#APABILITIES (available with EXPANSION EXPANSION EXPANSION EXPANSION 0UMP6&$ 6ALVEEXPANSION
(available with
or w/o HMI)* PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL EXPANSIONPANEL PANEL
or w/o HMI)*
Receivers up to 32 up to 32 up to 8o - - up to 8 - -
up to 10, (plus up to 10, (plus
Pumps - up to 4 - - up to 4 -
1 back-up) 1 back-up)
Valves up to 64 up to 64 - - up to 16 up to 16 - up to 8
-AINCONTROL -AINCONTROLW 2EMOTE)/ 2EMOTE)/W(-) 2EMOTE %XPANSION

PANEL OPTIONALVOLTAGE W(-) WOPTIONALVOLTAGE (-) PANELS
A - Height 24 {609} 36 {914} 24 {609} 36 {914} 14 {355} 14 {355}
B - Width 24 {609} 30 {762} 24 {609} 30 {762} 12 {304} 12 {304}
C - Depth 8 {203} 8 {203} 8 {203} 8 {203} 8 {203} 8 {203}
Installed 60 {27} 48 {21} 60 {27} 60 {27} 29 {13} 22 {10}
Shipping 72 {32} 60 {27} 72 {32} 72 {32} 36 {16} 35 {15}
-AXIMUMNUMBEROFEXPANSIONPANELSPERPANELTYPE p
Main control panel 1 panel maximum (32 loaders and 64 valves each – with or without HMI)*
Remote I/O panel 1 panel maximum (32 loaders and 64 valves each – with or without HMI)*
Receiver expansion panel 8 panels maximum (8 loaders each, or 16 loaders each with no options)
Pump expansion panel 5 panels maximum (4 pumps each)
Source valve expanison panel 8 panels maximum (16 valves each)
Receiver/valve combo expansion panel 8 panels maximum (8 loaders and 16 valves each)
Pump/VFD expansion panel 5 panels maximum (4 pumps each – required for Wave Conveying)
Wave Conveying valve expansion panel 8 panels maximum (8 devices and 16 valves each)
* Maximum of six HMI total. ‡
Selected I/O expansion panels cannot exceed the total FLX capacity of 128 receivers,
†
Total number of receivers on the receiver expansion panel can be 8 with options 40 pumps and 256 source valves.
(fill sensor) and alarms, or 16 with no options. Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the
C-
40#8 CENTRAL VACUUM PUMPS2'3%2)%36!#55-05-03
Low-Noise, Vacuum
Conveying Power
For moderate distance conveying applications, nothing beats
the simplicity of a regenerative vacuum pump from Conair.
Replacing larger, more complex positive displacement pump/
motor units, RG Series Pumps utilize a one piece fan/motor unit
to produce reliable vacuum power for loading systems up to
450 feet {137 m} and 7000 lbs/hr {3175 kg/hr}.
The simple, compact design allows the pump to be installed

in nearly any indoor location, it can even be wall-mounted.
Because the operating sound level is very low, concerns over -ODEL2'
noise pollution and proximity to personnel are minimal.
Single and Dual Stage Regenerative Pumps
Each pump is equipped with its own magnetic

starter, ready to be connected to any loading ` 2EQUIRESNOMAINTENANCE
control system. A vacuum pressure gauge The pumps are permanently lubricated to reduce downtime.
and mechanical vacuum relief valve are also ` 1UIETOPERATION
included.* Requires no soundproofing.
If short, frequent loading cycles are ` 2ELIABLECOMPONENTS
anticipated, the pump may be equipped with RG Series Pumps include a vacuum relief valve, vacuum gauge, magnetic starter and
an optional idle mode valve that allows the overload protection.
pump to continue to run between loading ` /PTIONALIDLEMODEVALVEANDTIMER
cycles, eliminating nuisance start/stop cycles This option eliminates frequent starting and stopping of the pump motor.
that can reduce pump life.
` /PTIONALFILTERCANISTER
* Every vacuum conveying application should
be assessed by Conair engineers to apply the The filter canister provides simplified dust collection for virgin material systems.
appropriate equipment.
4YPICAL#ENTRAL6ACUUM#ONVEYING3YSTEM
using a RG Series Pump and Central Vacuum Line
Central Dust Collector
Optional Idle
Mode Valve Material
2'6ACUUM Hoppers
0UMP Material
Inlet
Receiving
Central Dust Hoppers
Collector Optional Cartridge Filter for small systems
C-55
40#8 CENTRAL VACUUM PUMPS2'3%2)%36!#55-05-03
Specifications
&IGURE!
"
Connection
on side
Pump
Housing Starter
Connection in Motor
! front
Connection in back
#
)NLET/UTLET/RIENTATION4OPVIEW
-ODEL 2' 2' 2' 2' 2' 2'

3INGLE3TAGEOR$UAL3TAGE Single Single Single Dual Dual Dual
60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
Motor Hp* 3.4 N/A 6.2 5.4 11.5 10.1 5.1 4.4 8.45 7.4 16.9 14.8
Equivalent kW {2.6} N/A {4.6} {4.0} {8.6} {7.5}{3.8} {3.3} {6.3} {5.5} {12.6} {11.0}
Line size inches 1.5 N/A 2.0 1.5 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.5 2.0 1.5 2.5 2.0
Airflow at material pickup ft3/min 55 N/A 76 43 135 76 41 60 74 41 138 74
Airflow at pump inlet ft3/min 70 N/A 101 57 191 107 67 79 122 69 226 131
Pump Vacuum Inches Hg † -6.2 N/A -7.4 -7.4 -8.8 -8.4-11.7 -7.3 -11.7 -12.2 -11.7 -12.9
Sound level (dba) 70 N/A 72 69 74 70 71 67 76 73 78 74
Inlet orientation (see Figure 1) Back Back Back Front Back Back
Outlet orientation (see Figure 1) Back Back Back Back Side Back
Motor type TEFC
Dust collector recommended DC1 DC1 DC1 DC1 DC2 DC1 DC1 DC1 DC1 DC1 DC2 DC1
A - Height 14 {355.6} 16 {406.4} 21 {533.4} 25 {635.0} 17 {431.8} 23 {584.2}
B - Width 22 {558.8} 24 {609.6} 31 {787.4} 36 {914.4} 27 {685.8} 32 {812.8}
C - Depth 15 {381.0} 18 {457.2} 21 {533.4} 18 {457.2} 28 {711.2} 28 {711.2}
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Shipping 60 {27} 103 {47} 302 {137} 116 {53} 164 {74} 472 {214}
Installed 55 {25} 93 {42} 282 {128} 106 {48} 154 {70} 452 {205}
6OLTAGEFull load amps (FLA) p
230V (220-275)/3 phase/60 Hz 10.3 N/A 16.4 N/A 30 N/A 14.2 N/A 23 N/A 50.2 N/A
460V (380-480)/3 phase/60 Hz 6 N/A 9.5 N/A 17.3 N/A 8.2 N/A 13.3 N/A 29 N/A
400V (345-415)/3 phase/50 Hz N/A N/A N/A 9.5 N/A 16.7 N/A 7.5 N/A 13.3 N/A 28
575V/3 phase/60 Hz 4.5 N/A 7.6 N/A 13.6 N/A 5.4 N/A 10.4 N/A 20.4 N/A
* Hp rating is based on the kW rating of the blower. Not comparable to positive Hp ratings.
†
Inches Hg: Inches of Mercury
N/A: Not Available
‡
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to the
electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
C-56
40#8 CENTRAL VACUUM PUMPS0/3)4)6%$)30,!#%-%.405-03
Consistent, Reliable,
Time-Tested Conveying
Positive Displacement Vacuum Pumps are designed for long
distance, high-volume material conveying.*
Each model employs a powerful, rotating lobe-type blower,

protected by a vacuum relief valve (factory-set to 12 inch Hg)
and belt driven by a three-phase motor with magnetic starter
and overload protection. An integral pump protection filter is
included. All components are mounted on a rugged frame that
houses an integral exhaust muffler. An optional sound enclosure
may be added to reduce noise.
-ODEL0$0UMP
idle mode valve.)
High-Performance Vacuum Conveying
i Power
P
Five models are provided for a complete range

of vacuum power for your resin conveying ` 2OTATINGLOBEVACUUMBLOWER
The most powerful vacuum source available.
application. When coupled with our extensive
line of vacuum receivers, dust collectors ` 0UMPPROTECTIONFILTERINCLUDED
14 square foot filter protects the pump against damage from resin dust.
and control systems, Conair’s Positive
Displacement Pumps will provide you with the ` %ASYMAINTENANCE
longest, low-maintenance vacuum conveying All service components are within easy reach.
performance in the industry. ` 2EADYTOINSTALL
Includes vibration pads, vacuum gauge, vacuum relief valve and magnetic starter.
* Every vacuum conveying application should ` 0OWERFULANDRELIABLE
be assessed by Conair engineers to apply the
Expect years of service with minimal attention.
appropriate equipment.
Optional Idle Central Vacuum Line

Mode Valve
Positive Displacement
Vacuum Pump
Material
Receivers
Material
Inlet
Receiving
Hoppers
Central Dust
Collector
40#8 CENTRAL VACUUM PUMPS0/3)4)6%$)30,!#%-%.405-03
Specifications
-ODEL 0$ 0$ 0$ 0$ 0$
-OTOR4YPE
TEFC TEFC TEFC TEFC TEFC
Vacuum Inlet
Horsepower 5 7.5 10 15 25
Standard CFM at Material
76.6 121.2 154.5 201.1 346.2
Pickup Point @ 10" Hg
Average Sound Level (dbA) !
86.3 86 85.8 88.8 93
@ 8", 10" and 12" Hg
Standard Inlet Size (OD) 1.75 {44} 2.25 {57} 2.5 {64} 3.0 {76} 4.0 {102}
Exhaust Line Size (OD) 2.5 {64} 2.5 {64} 4.0 {102} 4.0 {102} 4.0 {102}
A - Height 37 {940} 41 {1041} 51 {1295} 51 {1295} 52 {1321}
Exhaust
B - Width 35 {889} 35 {889} 39.5 {1003} 39.5 {1003} 39.5 {1003}
C - Depth 27 {686} 27 {686} 33 {838} 33 {838} 34 {864}
7EIGHTlb {kg} " #
Installed 325 {147} 370 {168} 625 {283} 640 {290} 960 {435}
6OLTAGEFull load amps
240 12.0 18.8 28.0 39.0 59.0 * Energy-saving, high efficiency motors are also available.
480 6.0 9.4 14.0 19.5 29.5
575 4.8 7.5 10.7 16.0 27.0
Optional Sound Enclosures

Positive Displacement Pumps provide the
strongest vacuum power available, but when
operated for long periods at high performance
levels, noise should be abated if the pump
is located near personnel. Sound Enclosures
are available for all pump models and provide
maximum noise control with minimal space
and easy access to pump maintenance areas.
Super Quiet Sound Enclosures include
externally mounted protection filter, vacuum
gauge and filter gauge; 8 ft exhaust stack (for
noise); and easy access, tool-free front door.
5 Hp pumps in sound enclosures Super quiet sound enclosure (with Dust Collector)
V Vacuum Inlet
V
Service Access
V V
Starter
Vacuum Gauge
5, 7.5 HP 10, 15, 25 HP Super Quiet
Specifications for Pumps with Sound EncLOSURES

-ODEL 0$ 0$ 0$ 0$ 0$ 3UPER0$ 0$ Specification Notes
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS Specifications not listed in this table are
Enclosure Construction Painted Steel Natural Aluminum Painted Steel the same as those listed above.
Average Sound Level (dbA) All Sound Enclosures include a cooling
69.8 76.2 79.3 86.0 90.0 Under 60 dbA
@ 8", 10" and 12" Hg fan 115 VAC @ 2 amps.
Allowance Space for 220 VAC sound enclosure cooling fan is
48 (Opposite Vacuum Inlet) 36 (Opposite Vacuum Inlet) 36 (Front, Next to Filter)
Service Access / inches an option. Consult Conair for more info.
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} Specifications may change without
A - Height 49 {1245} 64 {1626} 96 {2438} notice. Consult with a Conair
B - Width 54 {1372} 55 {1397} 70 {1778} representative for the most current
information.
C - Depth 32 {813} 36 {914} 50 {1270}
40#8 CENTRAL VACUUM PUMPS,$0,/.'$)34!.#%#,!7 349,%6!#55-05-0
Extended Range,
Deep Vacuum
Conveying Power
High efficiency, claw style Long Distance Positive Displacement
Pumps provide the highest level of vacuum power available for
conveying plastic material. The LDP employs an advanced claw-
shaped lobe design that cuts through and pressurizes air in a
quiet, nearly maintenance free package. The direct drive pump
delivers stronger conveying performance at longer distances
and higher elevations for challenging resin transfer applications.
-ODEL
,$0
Reduce Energy/Noise and Convey Greater Distances
The Claw Pump utilized in the LDP

revolutionizes the way vacuum conveying air ` %XTENDCONVEYINGSYSTEMRANGE
is created for resin transfer. Deep vacuum can provide conveying performance to 1000 feet {304 meters}.
Conventional compression lobes are replaced ` )NCREASECONVEYINGSYSTEMPERFORMANCE

with precision machined “claws” that Replace your pump with a LDP to solve conveying problems without redesigning your
smoothly cut, capture and compress the air conveying or vacuum tubing network.
with minimal draft and vibration, reducing
traditional positive displacement noise and ` 3IMPLEALTERNATIVETOPRESSURESYSTEMS
energy consumption and extending vacuum The LDP provides a high performance vacuum conveying solution for long distance,
conveying power to new levels. high volume resin requirements.
Using the same vacuum/material line size, the ` "ROADERADJUSTMENTOFAIR TO MATERIALRATIOS
LDP range provides approximately twice the Increased vacuum conveying power at the material pick-up point provides trouble-
conveying performance in pounds per hour free resin flow without line plugging or surging.
and/or capable distance, with less energy and
nearly half the noise of traditional lobe style ` 2EADYTOINSTALL
vacuum pumps. Includes motor starter, vacuum guage, vacuum relief, vacuum breaker, idle mode
valve, and pump protection filter.
In addition, drive belts and motor adjustments
are replaced with smooth, low maintenance,
direct drive operation. Energy consumption,
depending upon the application, is reduced by
up to 25% over common PD pumps.
C-59
40#8 CENTRAL VACUUM PUMPS,$0,/.'$)34!.#%#,!7 349,%6!#55-05-0
Specifications
# "
!
3IDEVIEW 4OPVIEW
&RONTVIEW
-ODEL ,$0 ,$0 ,$0 ,$0 ,$0 !PPLICATION.OTES

All conveying system pump applications should
Horsepower {kW} 5.0 {3.7} 7.5 {5.6} 10.0 {7.5} 15.0 {11.2} 30.0 {22.4}
be specified and approved by Conair system
Average sound level (dbA) 82 79 84 84 83
engineers for optimal performance. Critical
Vacuum inlet size inches {mm} 1.5 {38.1} or 2.25 {57.1} or 2.5 {63.5} or 3.0 {76.2} 4.0 {101.6} information for correct sizing must include:
2.0 {50.8} 2.5 {63.5} 3.0 {76.2}
• Horizontal material conveying distance
Outlet size inch NPT 1.5 2.5 3 3 4
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} • Vertical material conveying distance
A - Length 43.8 {1112.5} 50.2 {1275.0} 51.6 {1310.6} 51.37 {1304.7} 65.0 {1651.0} • Number and type of material conveying elbows
B - Width 31.6 {802.6} 32.1 {815.3} 45.2 {1148.08} 46.5 {1181.1} 36.8 {934.7}
• Length of material conveying flex hose
C - Height 32.5 {825.5} 38.9 {988.0} 37.06 {941.3} 40.3 {1023.6} 58.3 {1480.8}
7EIGHTlbs {kg} • Length of vacuum line
Installed • Altitude (feet above sea level) of operating
Shipping location
6OLTAGEFull load amps *
• Material(s) being conveyed and bulk density(s)
230-400V / 3-phase / 50 Hz 10.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A
208-230/460V / 3-phase / 60 Hz 13.0 / 6.0 19.0 / 9.0 25.0 / 11.5 37.5 / 17.0 72.0 / 36.0 • Total throughputs
400-690V / 3-phase / 50 Hz N/A 10.1 15.0 19.0 35.7
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTo
575V/3 phase/60 Hz 80 - 120 psi {5.5 - 8.2 bar} @ 1 - 2 ft3 {28 - 57 liters}
* FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems,
refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
†
For operation of Idle Mode Valve.
Features Options
LDP Pumps must be used in conjunction with a Conveying System Dust Collector installed • 3-phase disconnect switch (Use of a
on the vacuum line prior to the LDP inlet. LDP pumps are equipped with: 3-phase disconnect switch near the pump
• Voltage matched, magnetic pump • 12 square foot pump protection installation is recommended.)
starter with 24 VDC starter coil cartridge filter in no-tools access • Aftercooler on dust collector
• Mechanical vacuum relief valve housing
• Pump stacking stand
• Vacuum idle mode valve with filter • Vacuum gauge
(requires 90 to 120 psi {6.2 to 8.2 bar} • Internal cooling fan
compressed air)
C-60
40#8 DUST COLLECTORS$#$#!.$$#-/$%,3
Dust-Free Vacuum
System Filtration
Conair Dust Collectors keep your plant free of air-born dust and
fines and prevent dust from fouling the vacuum pump.
A central vacuum dust collector allows dust filtration to take

place at the floor level. An air-tight collection container makes
the removal of fines quick and easy.
Automatic filter cleaning is standard, lengthening the time

between service requirements. DC1 and DC2 models use an
integrated “popper valve” to remove dust from the filter, while
the DC3 has a sophisticated sequential blowback system.
-ODEL$#
-ODEL$#
Easy, No Tools Emptying and Servicing
The integrated dust canister releases easily

for periodic emptying. A single hand knob ` !UTOMATICFILTERCLEANING
opens the lid for quick access to the filter The cartridge filter releases entrained dust with each cycle.
cartridge.
` 4ANGENTIALAIRDUSTINLET
Each model comes equipped with a free Preliminary air/dust separation takes place right at the dust collector inlet. The
standing floor frame. On models DC1 and tangential inlet causes the air to spiral upon entry, spinning the dust free from the air.
DC2, the stand may be removed for wall-
mounting. An auto-dump option is available ` &LEXIBLEAPPLICATION
to automatically remove collected dust or to Easy, screw-in line adapters in
allow open dumping into other containers. a wide range of sizes mean that
each unit works with a variety
The DC1 and DC2 are sized to provide the of pumps and line sizes.
right amount of filter area for the pump CFM
and line size of the conveying system. ` 3IMPLEMAINTENANCE
The largest dust collector, the DC3, provides

three filters with an automatic sequential Remove the dust collection No-tools filter removal
blowback system for maximum filter life. canister without tools for provides simplified filter
easy dumping. maintenance.
C-61
40#8 DUST COLLECTORS$#$#!.$$#-/$%,3
How it Works
$#AND$# $#3UPER$UST#OLLECTOR
Dust-laden vacuum air enters the Three filter cartridges collect the dust.
collector, where the spinning air A purging cycle uses accumulated
stream separates most of the dust. The compressed air to blast each cartridge
oversized filter traps the remaining dust clean from the inside out. This
and collects the excess in the integrated continuous adjustable sequence drops
canister. The “popper” valve closes fines into the collection canister. The
at the end of the conveying sequence, DC3 provides maximum filter life
rapidly changing the air pressure. This between manual cleanings.
shocks the filter clean and allows fines
to drop into the collection canister.
Features Applications
!UTO $UMPOPTION
automatically ejects the
collected fines and dust
at the conclusion of each
vacuum cycle. The Dust
Collector can be placed
over an open drum or
gaylord to receive fines.
An elevated frame is
recommended, or the
DC1 and DC2 Dust
4YPICALINSTALLATION Screens in the vacuum receivers permit some fines to be passed back
Collector bodies may be
towards the pump. These fines are trapped in the central dust collector and collected in the
wall mounted.
integral air-tight canister. Typically, the collector is located near the vacuum pump.
Specifications
" -ODEL $# $# $#
Pump size range Hp {kW} * 3-7.5 {2.2-5.6} 10-25 {7.5-18.7} 3-25 {2.2-18.7}
Vacuum line size OD inches {mm} 1.5-2.5 {38.1-63.5} 2.25-4.0 {57.2-101.6} 1.5-4.0 {38.1-101.6}
Out
Out Filter area ft2 {m2} 42.8 {4.0} 100.3 {9.3} 162.0 {15.0}
Maximum collection capacity ft3 {liters} 1.1 {31.1} 2.1 {59.4} 1.1 {31.1}
In Recommended dust collection ft3 {liters} 0.75 {21.2} 1.0 {28.3} 0.75 {21.2}
! ! $IMENSIONSinches {mm}
In
A - Height 58.0 {147.3} 67.0 {170.1} 92.5 {235.0}
B - Width 23.0 {584.2} 36.5 {92.7}
Depth 23.0 {584.2} 36.5 {92.7}
Installed 110 {50} 150 {68} 545 {247}
Shipping 140 {64} 280 {127} 695 {315}
Compressed air requirements 80-120 psi {5.5-8.3 bars}
6OLTAGEFull load amps o
" 120V/1 phase/60Hz 1.0 1.0 5.0
-ODEL$#AND$# -ODEL$# EfficiencY 95% at 10 microns
* Model DC1 works with Conair pump models RG1-3, RG1-6, RG2-5, RG2-8, PSS3, PSS6, †
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on
PD3, PD5, PD7.5, LDP5, LDP7.5. Model DC2 works with RG1-11, RG2-16, PSS11, PD10, equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer
PD15, PD25, LDP10, LDP15, LDP30. DC3 works with all sizes. DC3 is not recommended for to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
use with Conair’s LDP Series pumps. Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the
C-62
40#8 DUST COLLECTORS#9#,/.%$534#/,,%#4/2
Cyclone Action Captures

Dust without Filters
Conair Cyclone Dust Collectors remove up to 90% of the dust
before it ever reaches the filter in your filtered dust collectors.
Incorporating the Cyclone into your vacuum line greatly reduces
the filter maintenance frequency, and filter replacement
frequency of your Conair DC1, DC2, or DC3 Dust Collector.
The Cyclone Dust Collector uses the nature of physics to remove

dust particles from your line. The cycloning action of the air inside
the carbon steel cyclone drops the dust particles into the dust
collection canister. No power or compressed air are required.* #YCLONE$UST
Service consists of periodic emptying of the dust canister. #OLLECTORWITH
#YCLONE !UTO DUMP
* 120 V power and compressed air are required for the Auto-dump option. $UST#OLLECTOR /PTION
Captures 98% of Dust 105 Microns and Larger
The Conair Cyclone Dust Collector is to

be used in conjunction with Conair’s filter ` 1UICKINSTALLATIONINTONEWOREXISTINGSYSTEMS
dust collectors (DC1, DC2, or DC3). Placing The filterless, sealed cyclone is installed in front of the system dust collector. A
the Cyclone in line before the Central Dust free-standing frame allows easy placement close to, or away from the pump/dust
Collector helps to remove the larger particles collector. Inlets and outlets are modular, allowing a range of pump and tubing sizes
that can start to clog filter cartridges to be connected. The Cyclone is available with line sizes ranging from 1.75 inches to
prematurely. The Cyclone’s integrated dust 4.0 inches O.D. {44.5 - 101.6 mm}.
canister releases easily for periodic emptying.
` 3IMPLETOMAINTAIN
The Cyclone includes no moving parts, and no filter. No utilities are required. Service
consists of periodic draining of the dust collection bucket. Utilizing the Cyclone also
reduces dust collector filter service and extends filter life.
Central Vacuum Line
Material
Positive Displacement Receivers
Vacuum Pump
Material
Inlet
Receiving
Hoppers
Central Dust Cyclone Dust

Collector Collector
C-63
40#8 DUST COLLECTORS#9#,/.%$534#/,,%#4/2
Specifications
Out
3TANDARD 7ITH!UTO DUMPOPTION
In
"
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODEL #YCLONE$UST#OLLECTOR
!UTO DUMPOPTION
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS automatically ejects
Pump size range Hp {kW} * 5 - 25 {3.7 - 18.7} the collected fines and
dust at the conclusion of
1.75, 2.00, 2.25, 2.50, 3.00, 4.00 {44.45, 50.80, 57.15,
Vacuum line size OD inches {mm} each vacuum cycle. The
63.50, 76.20, 101.60}
Cyclone Dust Collector
Maximum collection capacity ft3 {liters} 1.1 {31.1} can be placed over an
Recommended dust collection ft3 {liters} 0.75 {21.2} open drum or gaylord to
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} receive fines. An elevated
A - Overall Height 68.3 {1734.8} frame is recommended,
or the Cyclone Dust
B - Inlet tube height 60.5 {1536.7}
Collector body may be
C - Width 14.0 {355.6} wall mounted.
D - Depth 24.8 {629.9}
Installed 130 {59} Specification Notes
Shipping 200 {91}
* Cyclone works with PD Pump models, RG Pump
6OLTAGEFull load amps (Applies only to Cyclone Dust Collector with auto-dump option) models, and LDP Series Pumps from Conair.
120V/1 phase/60Hz 1.0 Specifications may change without notice.
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENT(Applies only to Cyclone Dust Collector with auto-dump option) Consult with a Conair representative for the most
80 - 120 psi {5.5 - 8.3 bars}
C-64
40#8 BULK CONVEYING SYSTEMS#9#,).',/!$%2
Convey Bulk Material

From Railcars to Silos
Economically
Easily achieve high capacity conveying performance for
bulk unloading from railcars to silos without the high cost of
conventional vacuum/pressure units in the same pounds-per-
hour range.
Conair’s Cycling Loader works on a simple principle that delivers

thousands of pounds per hour over long distances with one
hopper and one pump, but without pump reversal and without
using a rotary feeder. A series of trouble-free flapper valves and
a four-way air flow reversing valve make the Cycling Loader
a convenient, self-contained system that alternately uses the
vacuum hopper as a pressure hopper. One 25 horsepower
Positive Displacement Pump provides both the vacuum and the #YCLING,OADER
(Cycling Bulk Railcar Unloading)
pressure power by the action of the reversing valve.
Thousands of Pounds Per Hour; Long Distances
With throughput rates up to 12,000 lbs/hr, the

Cycling Loader conveys material efficiently ` 3IMPLEANDEFFICIENT
and inexpensively. You get the control, Get the same high-capacity performance and simple operation without the high cost
interconnecting hose, piping, valves, and of conventional vacuum/pressure units.
material injector in one compact package,
` )NDUSTRIALPERFORMANCE
ready to use in any location, and easy to move
Delivers thousands of pounds per hour over long distance. Throughput rates up to
around when necessary. The whole assembly
12,000 lbs/hr {5443 kg/hr}.
can have fork truck pockets for easy transport,
or can even be mounted on a wheeled cart for ` #OMPACTANDMOBILE
mobile use. Prepackaged system provides both vacuum and pressure cycles with a single, non-
The vacuum/pressure pump pulls material reversing pump.
from the railcar into the vacuum/pressure
` 4URN KEYOPERATION
hopper. When the level control monitor detects
The Cycling Loader comes ready to use, equipped with controls, interconnecting
that the hopper is filled to a predetermined
hose, piping and valves.
level, a four-way valve reverses the air flow,
without stopping the pump. Pressurized ` 3AFESOLIDRELIABLE
air is pumped into the hopper, cleaning the Conair has been manufacturing Cycling Loaders for over 40 years. Cycling Loaders
filter and forcing material into a pressurized have been and continue to be the favorite solution for customers who need a reliable
air-stream through an adjustable material and economical method to quickly and safely convey material over long distances.
injector, located at the base of the hopper.
Once the hopper and line are clear of material,
the system repeats the cycle until the railcar
unloading is complete.
C-65
40#8 BULK CONVEYING SYSTEMS#9#,).',/!$%2
How it Works
Material Material outlet (i)
outlet (i)
Inlet check Filter
Inlet check valve (d)
valve (d) Filter
Rotating
Rotating level control
level control switch (f) Vacuum
switch (f) Vacuum relief valve
relief valve
Material Filter
Material Valve (b) Filter
Filter inlet (h) cleaned
inlet (h) Valve (b)
Outlet Vacuum/pressure
Outlet Vacuum/pressure check
check pump pump
valve (c)
valve (c)
In-line Bypass Valve (a) In-line Bypass Valve (a)

check valve (e) valve (g) check valve (e) valve (g)
6ACUUMCYCLE 0RESSURECYCLE
Material unloading from the bulk railcar Material loaded into the storage silo
1. Valve (A) open (vented to atmosphere) 1. Valve (A) closes (vacuum pump exhaust now supplies pressure
2. Valve (B) closed to push material)
3. Outlet check valve (C) closed (by vacuum) 2. Valve (B) opens and becomes the air intake for the vacuum pump
4. Inlet check valve (D) open (by vacuum) 3. Outlet check valve (C) opens (by pressure)
5. In-line check valve (E) closed 4. Inlet check valve (D) closed (by pressure)
Material is pulled by vacuum into the loading hopper until 5. In-line check valve (E) opened
material stops rotating level control. When the vacuum cycle Air, at 5-6 PSI, is piped into the hopper and the secondary air tube to
ends, the pressure cycle starts. push material up into the silo. Reverse pressure automatically cleans
the hopper air filter during the pressure cycle. When the fill line is
purged, the unit switches back to the vacuum cycle.
Typical Installation Specifications

&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
#OMPARITIVE,OADING2ATES
gAVERAGE
$
" #
$ISTANCEh$v ,OADING2ATE
#YCLING,OADER
100 ft {31 m} 10,000 - 12,000 lbs/hr {4536 - 5443 kg/hr}
300 ft {91 m} 9,000 - 10,000 lbs/hr {4082 - 4536 kg/hr}
Hopper capacity ft3 {liter} 7.0 {198.0}
500 ft {152 m} 8,000 - 9,000 lbs/hr {3629 - 4082 kg/hr} Vacuum pump Hp {kW} 25.0 {18.6}
* Lesser distance on vacuum side will increase loading rate. Operating pressure psi {bar} 5 - 6 {0.34 - 0.41}
Rates based on free flowing pelletized materials weighing 35 lbs/ft3. Compressed air requirement 1 cfm @ 60 PSI {4.1 bar}
Material tubing inches {mm} 4.0 {101.6} OD
A - Height 90.0 {2286.0}
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories B - Width 84.0 {2133.6}
on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and C - Depth 48.0 {1219.2}
systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
Shipping 1300 {590}
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
the most current information. 6OLTAGEFull load amps †
230 V/3 phase/60Hz 58
460 V/3 phase/60Hz 29
C-66
40#8 BULK CONVEYING SYSTEMS625!.$6!#55-2!),#!25.,/!$).'3934%-3
Railcar Unloading
That is Simple and
Self-Cleaning
Simple to operate and easy to maintain, the system requires
minimal attention and features an easy-to-use control. The
self-cleaning feature eliminates typical maintenance while
the ground level dust collector and
silo-mounted stainless steel receiver
provide easy access for filter changes.
The VRU is a reliable, low cost and
simple solution for your railcar
unloading requirements.
-ODEL625"ULK6ACUUM2ECEIVER INCH/$
VRU system also includes:
4-inch Bulk Pump 25 Hp 480/3/60
4-inch Bulk Dust Collector
Highly Reliable, Low Cost, Simple to Operate
Its reliability is based on simplicity. The VRU

uses a vacuum pump to convey material to a ` 2ELIABLEEFFICIENTOPERATION
silo-mounted receiver. A timed valve on the Loads, power unloads and cleans filters automatically with each cycle.
pump then reverses the air flow to “power ` ,OWCOSTVERSATILE
unload” the receiver and backwash all filters Allows system to grow with your needs.
in the system without stopping the pump.
Operation is completely automatic, highly ` 3IMPLETOOPERATEEASYTOMAINTAIN
efficient and fast. Requires minimal attention and maintenance.
A lower cost alternative to combination ` 4URN KEYOPERATION

vacuum/pressure units, the single pump/ The Cycling Loader comes ready to use, equipped with controls, interconnecting hose,
dust collector design of the VRU can direct piping and valves.
material to as many as 12 silos by just adding ` 3YSTEM#OMPONENTS)NCLUDE
receivers, allowing your system to grow with • Stainless steel bulk receiver with 7 ft3 capacity
your material conveying needs.
• Vacuum pump assembly with air reversal valve
If you need proven, long-life performance for • Dust collector
unloading bulk material from distances up to • System control: Standard model monitors up
500 ft {152.4 m} without the investment in a to 4 silos; optional model up to 6 silos
vacuum/pressure unit, put one of Conair’s VRU • Railcar unloading tube kit
systems to work for you.
• 10 ft. {3.04 m} and 20 ft. {6.09 m} flex hoses
with quick couplers; available in stainless
steel as an option
• Railcar hatch filter
C-67
40#8 BULK CONVEYING SYSTEMS625!.$6!#55-2!),#!25.,/!$).'3934%-3
How it Works
6ACUUMCYCLETOLOADMATERIAL 0RESSURECYCLETOPOWERUNLOADANDCLEANFILTER
Specifications
$IMENSIONS inches {mm} (All Models) 4YPICALCONVEYINGRATEDISTANCEPERFORMANCEFOR625
#ONTROL 2ECEIVER 0UMP $UST#OLLECTOR

Height 25 {635} 45 {1143} 52 {1321} 67 {1702}
Width 25 {635} 28 {711} 37 {940} 23 {584}
Depth 8 {203} 28 {711} 62 {1575} 19 {483}
Conveying Rate, lb/hr
Weight lb {kg} 100 {45} 145 {66} 720 {327} 180 {82} 0%4
Hours to Unload a
200,000 lb Railcar
-ODEL 625 625 625 LBCUFT
(x 1,000)
Motor Hp 10 15 25
6OLTAGEFull load amps*
240 30 40 60 0%
480 15 20 30 LBCUFT
Power is connected to the main control enclosure.
Cable must be provided to connect the pump motor to the control.
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENT

¼ inch NPT to Air Reversal Valve on Vacuum Pump - 60 psi @ 1 CFM

Conair offers a complete line of bulk conveying systems for rates Effective Conveying Distance, ft
up to 50,000 lb/hr {22,679.6 kg/hr} and distances up to 1,000 ft. -ODEL 625 625 625
{304.8 m} Conair’s engineers will evaluate your requirements and
4HROUGHPUTRATESFOR625SYSTEMS
offer the system solution that best fits your needs.
Throughput with PE 35 lb/ft3 *
at 100 ft. 7000 lbs/hr 11000 lbs/hr 16000 lbs/hr
Specification Notes at 500 ft. 3000 lbs/hr 5000 lbs/hr 8000 lbs/hr
Throughput with PET 53 lb/ft3 *
* In pounds per hour, rates are approximate. Contact a Conair Representative for
guaranteed rates for your application. at 100 ft. 9000 lbs/hr 14000 lbs/hr 20000 lbs/hr
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the at 500 ft. 4000 lbs/hr 6000 lbs/hr 9500 lbs/hr
most current information. -ATERIALAIRLINESIZE
2.5 inch OD 3 inch OD 4 inch OD
C-68
40#8 RESIN MEASUREMENT2%3).42!#+%24-
Dependable, In-Line
Resin Flow Measurement
Measuring resin flow has never been easier nor more accurate.
The Conair ResinTrackerTM flow meter accurately measures resin

and/or regrind as they flow freely through its compact housing
with no holding hopper nor weigh bins. Inside the ResinTracker,
the patented weighing platform senses the mass flow of
material as it flows over the arc-shaped flow pan to measure
its weight and throughput via centripetal force regardless of
material type, density or uniformity of flow. The results are
effortless, accurate resin consumption records. ResinTracker can
also be applied to meet target weights with an integrated servo
2ESIN4RACKER-ODEL24 #6
driven control valve that stops material flow when a desired
weight has been achieved.
Fill to Target Weight or Track Resin Flow
There is no longer any need to pre-weigh,

guess or calculate resin flow to your process, ` #ONTINUOUSFLOWCONTINUOUSMEASUREMENT
drying hopper, surge bin or even silo. The ResinTrackerTM provides dynamic measurement of materials as they flow over its
ResinTrackerTM resin flow meter and its smooth sensing platform, without interruption. Resins and regrinds from 1 to
remote touchscreen display can now keep 100 lbs/ft3 {16 to 1601 kg/m3} up to 10,800 lbs/hr {4898 kg/hr} are all sensed reliably
track of resin and/or regrind passage without and continuously.
time consuming manual weighing, nor holding
hoppers and gravimetric weigh cycles. And ` 4HEHIGHESTACCURACY
if reaching a target weight is required, Within ½ of 1%, so 2000 pounds of resin free-flowing through the ResinTracker can
that weight can be easily selected on the be relied upon to be within 10 pounds of actual weight.
ResinTracker’s remote touch screen control
and a highly accurate, servo-motor driven ` %ASYCONTROL
Integrated Control Valve (ICV) will shut off flow The ResinTracker’s color touchscreen control panel is typically remote mounted to
upon reaching the desired weight. Typical a convenient location for instant verification of resin transfer and/or target values.
accuracy is 0.25% on free flow applications.
Set-up is fast and simple and communications options include Ethernet (standard),
The heart of the ResinTracker is centripetal DeviceNet, and ProfiBus.
measurement of weight and flow over a
simple, smooth, curved sensing platform ` &LEXIBLEAPPLICATIONS
protected inside the rugged, stainless steel The ResinTracker can be integrated into a wide variety of applications to accurately
housing. Weight is sensed dynamically,
measure resin and regrind flow. Talk to your Conair representative about your
as the material flows, so optimum speed
dynamic resin measurement needs.
and efficiency are maintained without the
complexity or time requirements of ‘hold
and weigh’ systems. Resin bins can be
filled quickly with accurate tracking of the
material’s weight. Or a target weight can be
delivered into a bucket, box, drum, bin or silo.
C-69
Common ResinTracker Applications

2OTO -OLDING
Labor intensive and often inaccurate hand-filling of molds
is replaced with fast, accurate dispensing of granular resin
into molds with a ResinTracker installed on a filling station
frame. The Integrated Control Valve in the ResinTracker
shuts off flow when a pre-programmed dispense quantity is
delivered. Different resin quantities are easily programmed
and selected by the operator.
'AYLORD&ILLING

The operator sets a target weight on the remote control for a
quantity of resin to be delivered into a gaylord box. Vacuum loaded
resin is first collected in a JIT Holding Hopper where it readily flows
into the ResinTracker that measures its weight as it passes into the
gaylord box below. The servo-driven Integrated Control Valve, built
into the ResinTracker, responds to the approaching target set point
and closes, to precisely meet the target weight in record time.
3HREDDER'RANULATOR
Reground and/or shredded material quantities are

accurately tracked with no interruption of flow by
passing the flow through a ResinTracker. Output can
be delivered by conveyor (shown here) or by cyclone,
vacuum, or compressed air unloading from the
granulator or shredder. The ResinTracker ignores the
variations in bulk densities that can be common to size
reduction for accurate record keeping of reclaim by
weight.
C-70
Features
01
06 01 05
Customizable infeed transition Measurement pan
03 (options available)
02
06
02 Bubble level
ICV (Integrated Control Valve), when
equipped, inside stainless steel 07
enclosure
Electrical enclosure with touchscreen
08 03 control
05 Mounting interface 08
04
04 Load cell enclosure
07 Stainless steel enclosure with access

door
Touchscreen Control
The remote, touchscreen control provides operators with a simplified,
intuitive interface for collecting weight data as resin flows across the
ResinTracker’s weight platform, inside the main unit. The control
can also provide intuitive, easy inputting of target weights for filling
operations.
The NEMA 4 rated control includes a 7-inch, full color, touchscreen
display panel that can be used to select to default to flow rate or
totalization operations. User data storage is provided via a 2 GB
CompactFlash® card and calibration data is easily stored for multiple
types of flow.
The control includes operation of the ResinTracker’s Integrated Control
Valve for target weight measurement, but can also be interfaced with a
wide range of auxiliary functions, including these inputs and outputs:
#OMMUNICATIONSOUTPUTS #OMMUNICATIONSINPUTS
$ATA4RANSMITTEDFROM2ESIN4RACKER $ATA4RANSMITTEDFROM0,#TO
TO0,# 2ESIN4RACKER
Flow Rate Remote Reset
Totalization Remote Zero
Zero Readback Product Multiple Cal. Option
Product: Multiple Cal. Option Dynamic Cal. Value
Remote Alarm Target Remote Target (Remote Alarm)
Meter’s Internal Temperature
Auxilary 4-20 mA Output
Dynamic Cal. Value Readback
Bulk Density
Status Not Ready Bit
C-71
Specifications
-ODELS24 #&24 #&24 #&24 #&24 #&24 #&24 #& -ODELS24 #& ,AND24 #& ,
! !
# " # "
-ODELS24 /&24 /&AND24 /& -OUNTING)NTERFACE !LL-ODELSo in {cm}
[]
[]
!

[]
# "
&REE&LOW& -ODELS 24 #& , 24 #& 24 #& , 24 /& 24 #& 24 /& 24 #& 24 /& 24 #& 24 #&
Supply Voltage 85 to 264 volts AC

Remote Control Cable 25 ft {7.6 m} 24 VDC
3.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 12.00 12.00 24.00 24.00 36.00 48.00
Weigh Pan Width inch {cm}
{7.62} {15.24} {15.24} {15.24} {30.48} {30.48} {60.96} {60.96} {91.44} {121.92}
Housing Closed Closed Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Closed
$IMENSIONS inches {cm}
22.70 34.19 22.70 19.50 34.19 19.50 34.19 19.50 34.19 34.19
A - Height
{57.65} {86.84} {57.65} {49.53} {86.84} {49.53} {86.84} {49.53} {86.84} {86.84}
10.00 12.00 10.00 12.00 18.00 18.00 30.00 30.00 42.00 54.00
B - Width
{25.40} {30.48} {25.40} {30.48} {45.72} {45.72} {76.20} {76.20} {106.68} {137.16}
19.40 28.19 19.40 28.19 28.19 19.66 28.19 19.66 28.19 28.19
C - Depth
{49.28} {71.60} {49.28} {71.60} {71.60} {49.94} {71.60} {49.94} {71.60} {71.60}
&LOWRATE#APACITY
Maximum Flowrate 75.00 405.0 202.0 405.0 900.0 900.0 1800.0 1800.0 2700.0 3600.0
Capacity lb/min {kg/min}* {34.0} {183.7} {91.6} {183.7} {408.2} {408.2} {816.5} {816.5} {815.1} {1630.0}
-ODELS24 #624 #6AND24 #6
)NTEGRATIED#ONTROL6ALVE
24 #6 24 #6 24 #6
6 -ODELS
Supply Voltage 85 to 264 volts AC
Remote Control Cable 25 ft {7.6 m} 24 VDC
!
Weigh Pan width inch {cm} 6.00 {15.24} 12.00 {30.48} 24.00 {60.96}
Housing Closed
$IMENSIONSinches {cm}
A - Height 20.75 {52.71} 20.75 {52.71} 20.75 {52.71} # "
B - Width 13.50 {34.29} 19.50 {49.53} 31.50 {80.01} Specification Notes

C - Depth 29.61 {75.21} 29.61 {75.21} 29.61 {75.21} * With materials having a bulk density of 30 lbs/ft3 {480 kg/m3}.
†
All models excluding RT-3CF-L and RT-6CF-L.
&LOWRATE#APACITY
Maximum Flowrate Capacity most current information.
405.0 {183.7} 900.0 {408.2} 1800.0 {816.5}
lb/min {kg/min}*
C-72
40#8 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION2%3).3%,%#4)/.34!4)/.
Expandable, Manifold
System for Multiple Lines
Conair Resin Selection Stations (table top fantails) are ideally
suited for central drying and distribution systems that require
conveying multiple materials to multiple destinations.
The Resin Selection Station can be placed anywhere between

the material sources and destinations. The modular design
provides a variety of configurations for flexibility and expansion.
Push-fit connectors make changing materials fast and easy.

Simply purge the line to assure it is clean and primed for the
next conveying cycle, then move the connector to the desired 2ESIN3ELECTION
material source line. 3TATION233
Convey Multiple Sources to Multiple Destinations
` %XPANDABLETOFITYOURNEEDS
Modular components provide convenient expansion and a variety of configurations.
You can choose the best combination of line sizes, manifolds and connectors to suit
your application.
` %ASYTOUSE
Simply move your material line hose from one connector to another to change
material destinations.
` $URABLECONSTRUCTION
Rugged construction ensures long life. Material contact points are non-ferrous to
prevent contamination and require minimal maintenance.
` %RGONOMICDESIGN
Convenient tabletop design gives you easy access to every connection and promotes
complete material line purging.
` /PTIONALPROOFINGAVAILABLE
Push-fit connector design allows easy Invisible Line Proofing (ILP) is available as an option, even as a field retrofit.
insertion of the material lines into the Resin See the ILP specification sheet for more information.
Selection Station. Quick release lids allow for
fast, simple removal.
C-73
40#8 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION2%3).3%,%#4)/.34!4)/.
233 4HE2ESIN3ELECTION3TATION -60 -ATERIAL6ISION0ROOFING3YSTEM ),0 )NVISIBLE,INE0ROOFING3YSTEM

can be used in conjunction with Conair’s adds proofing functionality to the RSS adds "wireless" proofing technology to
ResinWorksTM drying system to simplify system. See the MVP specification sheet the RSS system. See the ILP specification
installation of conveying lines to each for more information. sheet for more information.
hopper. See the ResinWorks specification
sheet for more information.
Specifications
-ODEL 233 233 233 233 233 233 233

Line size inches {mm} 1.5 {38} 1.75 {45} 2.0 {51} 2.25 {57} 2.5 {64} 3.0 {76} 4.0 {102}
Maximum hole position
6 6 6 6 5 5 5
per column
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} * !
Installed 170 {77} 230 {104} 320 {145}

Shipping 240 {109} 300 {136} 390 {177}
-OUNTING/PTIONS 3MALL&RAME -EDIUM&RAME ,ARGE&RAME

-AXIMUMNUMBEROFFANTAILS # "
2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 positions per fantail up to 2 up to 4 up to 6

A - Height 42.12 {107}
0USH FITTUBE
B - Depth 35.87 {91}
CONNECTORS
C - Width 16.37 {42} 32.37 {82} 48.62 {124}
Tubes are
stainless steel to
Specification Notes prevent material
* Weights are based on using the maximum number of selector plates and connectors. contamination.
These tables define standard configurations only. Attach flexible hose
to the tube ends
using hose clamps.
C-74
40#8 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION),0).6)3)",%,).%02//&).'
0!4%.453"
No Connectors,
No Wires, Fool Proof
Sophisticated Yet
Simplified Proofing
The differences between a standard material manifold station
like Conair’s RSS (Resin Selector Station), and one with the
ILP (Invisible Line Proofing) option are not something that can be
seen. The difference is in the engineering. Conair’s efficient RSS,
equipped with the ILP option uses sensors at the base of each
manifold, to proof connections and ensure that material conveys
only when the correct connections are made. There are no wires,
no clunky connectors, no cameras, and no special processes for
operators to follow. Connections are made as normal. No further
action necessary. ILP automatically assures that connections are
correct or material will not flow and an alarm on the control will
alert the operator that an incorrect connection was made.
Accuracy is at 100%, with no chance of operator error.
The Easiest Resin Proofing System Yet!
We hear it time and time again – material is

the primary expense in production. Proofing ` 3AFEGUARDSMATERIALIN2332ESIN3ELECTION3TATION TABLES
eliminates operator error which can result Remote sensors are installed as part of the RSS (at the exit end of the manifolds)
in bad parts, plant downtime, and wasted to ensure vacuum is flowing through the correct connection, indicating the correct
material. connection has been made.
` #ONFIRMSCORRECTMATERIALLINECONNECTIONS
The ILP is the most simple, yet sophisticated If the material line connections are correct, material will be conveyed normally. Hoses
method of proofing yet. It’s so simple that attached to the wrong port will prevent conveying and provide a control system alarm.
any existing Conair RSS can be retrofitted
to work as an ILP station. The ILP system ` 5SES#ONAIRS&,8 0LUSCONVEYINGCONTROL
does not require a separate control or special Material routing is programmed into the FLX-128 Plus, and the ILP assures physical
operator instructions. The ILP system can be connections match the desired connections selected in the control. FLX-128 Plus
used on both fantail manifolds and individual icons confirm proper routing with normal conveying, or indicate an improper routing
conveying lines. The ILP uses the existing connection with an alarm not allowing material to convey.
abilities of Conair’s FLX-128 Plus conveying
control to allow proofing to happen within the ` .OTHINGTOBREAKNOTHINGTOLEARN
conveying system. There are no visible wires on the table, no visible devices, no special fittings,
no special orientation of hoses, no problems when replacement connectors are
necessary, and the ILP system is not affected by light, temperature, material, or line
size. Invisible Line Proofing protects your process against human error and accidents.
C-75
40#8 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION),0).6)3)",%,).%02//&).'
0!4%.453"

How it Works
Invisible Line Proofing, or ILP, does not use wires nor connectors nor any type of signal exchange between material line couplers to confirm
that source to destination material flow connections have been properly made by the user. If vacuum is not properly sensed, the ILP prevents
material flow.
An ILP installation includes ILP Sensors in each fantail manifold or individual material line, and an ILP Valve installed in the vacuum line.
ILP Components
• ILP Valve • FLX-128 Plus
• ILP Sensor for each material to be proofed • ILP Interface Box
),06ALVE ),03ENSORS &,8 0LUS#ONTROL
Specifications
-ODEL ),0
Maximum number materials 16 per ILP Box. 16 ILP Boxes per FLX-128 Plus
Required control FLX-128 Plus
Required FLX-128 expansion box ILP Expansion Box, or Fill Sensor Cards in FLX-128 main/remote box
&,8 0LUS6OLTAGEREQUIREMENTS
120 Volts for FLX-128 Plus*

!
Regulated clean compressed air 65-90 PSI (ILP Valve)
233-ODELS 233 233 233 233 233 233 233

# "
Line Size inches {mm} 1.5 {38.1} 1.75 {44.5} 2.0 {50.8} 2.25 {57.2} 2.5 {63.5} 3.0 {76.2} 4.0 {101.6}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} †
Installed 170 {77} 170 {77} 230 {104} 230 {104} 230 {104} 320 {145} 320 {145}
Shipping 240 {109} 240 {109} 300 {136} 300 {136} 300 {136} 390 {177} 390 {177}
* FLX-128 Plus sends 24 VDC to the ILP Sensors.
The FLX-128 also sends power to the valve on
233&RAME/PTIONS 3MALL&RAME -EDIUM&RAME ,ARGE&RAME the pump.
-AXIMUMNUMBEROFFANTAILS †
Weights are based on using the maximum number
of selector plates and connectors.
2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 hole positions per fantail up to 2 fantails up to 4 fantails up to 6 fantails
These tables define standard configurations only.
Specifications can change without notice. Contact
A - Height 42.12 {107.0} 42.12 {107.0} 42.12 {107.0} a Conair representative for the most current
information.
B - Depth 35.87 {91.1} 35.87 {91.1} 35.87 {91.1}
C - Width 16.37 {41.58} 32.37 {82.2} 48.62 {123.5}
C-76
40#8 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION-60-!4%2)!,6)3)/.02//&).'
0!4%.453"
Vision Proofing
Automatically Confirms
Resin Connections
Close the efficiency gap in material handling by ensuring that
source-to-destination connections are correct before conveying
the wrong material to the wrong location.
The patented new Material Vision Proofing (MVP) System is

easily added to Conair Resin Selection Stations and interfaces
with loading controls to assure that routing decisions set at the
control panel are made correctly, before material is allowed to
flow. An automatic, traveling camera works with the loading
control to make sure it can “see” the chosen connection with
no wires, special sensors, or couplings. An incorrect connection
inhibits material flow and signals an alarm. The press of a button 2ESIN3ELECTION3TATION233
tells the operator where the connection should go. EQUIPPEDWITH-603YSTEM
Wireless Video Camera Proofs Resin Connections
With RSS tube stubs simplified into slim,

rugged connectors, the MVP takes care of ` #ONNECTIONSSIMPLIFIED
validating connections with an industrial The simple, rugged, coded connector is easily plugged into the table with no wires,
camera that automatically double-checks sensors, or special orientation.
that connections match the control settings.
` 0ROOFYOURCONVEYING
The Material Vision Proofing System and Resin
The MVP camera verifies that connections match routing choices made in the
Selection Station integrate seamlessly via
conveying control by “seeing” which connector is where. Incorrect connections sound
an Ethernet connection to Conair's
an alarm and prevent conveying.
FLX-128 Plus conveying control to make
source to destination resin routing simple, ` !CCOMMODATEONEORTWO233TABLES
and then uses a scanning industrial camera to MVPs are available in single and double widths and may be used in multiples to
automatically validate that connections have accommodate system needs.
been made properly.
` 3AFESOLIDRELIABLE
The secret is in the simple rings on the tubing
The MVP’s moving camera is fully enclosed in a slim yet rugged housing, protecting
stubs that uniquely identify each destination
the industrial camera from damage. It has no pinch points, no exposed moving parts,
to the control system. The MVP camera sees
and is not sensitive to dust.
and understands these simple ring codes and
knows which port on the RSS it should be
plugged into. If a tube stub is not found where
it should be, or a stub is found in the wrong
port, the MVP alerts the conveying control
system to prevent resin movement through
the incorrect path and triggersan alarm to
alert the operator to correct the connection.
C-77
40#8 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION-60-!4%2)!,6)3)/.02//&).'
0!4%.453"

Specifications
-ODEL-60
" #
-ODEL-60
" #
-ODEL -60 3 -60 , -60 3 -60 , Specification Notes

0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS * Dimensions may vary depending on your RSS model
specifics.
Maximum number materials 6 6 12 12 †
Larger line sizes have fewer ports per fantail.
$IMENSIONSinches {cm} * S models accommodate line sizes of 2.25 inches
{57 mm} and smaller with six ports in each vertical
A - Height 74.63 {190}
row. L models accommodate line sizes of 2.5 inches
B - Width 64.44 {164} 113.38 {288} {64 mm} with five ports in each vertical row.
C - Depth 52.94 {134} ‡
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include
Line size† inches {cm} 1.75 {4.45} to 2.50 {6.35} any options or accessories on equipment. For
full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} machines and systems, refer to the electrical
Shipping 690 {313} 1100 {499} diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
p
Specifications may change without notice. Consult
120 < 15 with a Conair representative for the most current
information.
Control
The MVP is controlled by Conair’s
state-of-the-art conveying control, the
FLX-128 Plus. In addition to control at
those platforms, the MVP features a
4-inch HMI at the machine for quick
display of what connections are made and
for simple visual display/ instruction when
a tube needs to change position.
C-78
TPCX069-0317 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION!54/2%3).3%,%#4/2
Simultaneous Automatic
Source-Destination
Selection; Proofing
Conair’s AutoResin Selector (AS) is the most advanced
automated material selection system yet. An operator uses
the FLX-128 Plus to input which source needs to be connected
to which destination. Using a heavy-duty stepper motor, the
AS automatically adjusts the manifold connection sources and
destinations, simultaneously, to connect the desired source to the
desired destination — perfect proofing. A pneumatic clamping
system assures accurate connections, and prevents leaks of !UTO2ESIN
pressure or material. No flex-hose is used in the AS, which 3ELECTOR!3
guarantees long industrial life and and secure connections.
No Flex Hose; Leak-Free, Secure Pneumatic Clamping
The AutoResin Selector (AS) is designed to

make a secure connection between one of up ` Space-saving fleXIBILITY
to 20 sources, to one of up to 20 destinations. Compact and efficiently designed, the AutoResin Selector uses less pipework than
(2-inch line size. Refer to the table on next other material distribution systems, has a smaller footprint, and can be used vertically
page for number of connections for various or horizontally.
line sizes.) A simple-to-use control allows
the operator to select a source and select ` %LIMINATEOPERATORERROR
a destination, and the AS does all the No more accidental conveying of material from the wrong source to the wrong
connecting. Unlike sliding contact points used destination. The Conair FLX-128 Plus allows for customized naming of the sources
in some systems, the AS uses pneumatic and the destinations. The operator simply choses the correct source and the correct
clamping, which eliminates any potential for destination and the AutoResin Selector makes the material connection. This system
pressure drop. eliminates the possibility of an operator accidently connecting the wrong tube to
the wrong position.
All parts of the AS that come in contact with
material are stainless steel. The central ` (IGH QUALITYACCURATEINDUSTRIALDESIGN
rotating arm is made from hard stainless Stainless-steel material contact points, heavy-duty servo stepper motors,
steel, for additional anti-wear protection when anti-wear system, encoder position guaranteeing connection position accuracy to
dealing with abrasive materials. 1/50th of a degree, pneumatic clamping, motor torque braking system, quick
coupling connections, and no flex-hose — just a few of the key reasons that the
The design of the AS makes it highly flexible. AutoResin Selector is perfect for medical and complicated industrial applications.
It has a small footprint and may be used either
vertically or horizontally.
C-79
How it works
As directed by the FLX-128 Plus Vacuum System Control,

01
05 the inlet selection tube is rotated to connect one of multiple
Inlet selection tube material sources to the central connecting tube by the inlet
/54 servo motor. Simultaneously, the outlet selection tube is rotated
02 to connect one of the multiple material destinations to the
04
Central connecting tube central connecting tube by the outlet servo motor. Both inlet and
outlet connections are then pneumatically locked into perfect
03 alignment for smooth, vacuum-tight resin flow.
02 Inlet servo motor Once resin loading is completed, the entire conveying path is
04 automatically and fully purged of material, with dehumidified
.OTEThe or ambient air, leaving a clean conveying path for the next
AutoResin Outlet selection tube loading cycle.
01 Selector
). may also 05 The AutoResin Selector Valve operates on demand and
be oriented
horizontally. Outlet servo motor remains at rest until another source-to-destination conveying
03
cycle is required.
P
P
2ESIN$ESTINATIONS
Surge Bins
P
P
FLX-128 Plus System Control
Central Dust
/54 Collector
P P
Gaylords
Silos !UTO2ESIN
2ESIN3OURCES
). 3ELECTOR!3
Vacuum Pump
P Line Cleaning Purge Valve
C-80
Features
• Heavy duty stepper motor driven selector arms
• Communicates with the Conair FLX-128 Plus Conveying control
• Anti-wearing system suitable for abrasive materials,
central rotating
• Rotating arm in hard stainless steel
• Positioning system - absolute optical encoder
• Fast and accurate positioning
• Leakage free system
• Line cleaning with purge valve (required) on each material source
• Multiple outlet configuration
• All material contact points are stainless steel
• The automatic manifold enables pneumatic conveying
connections between sources and destinations
Specifications
#
* • Sizes listed are standard tubing sizes -
outside diameter.
• Maximum number of sources and destinations
per valve.
"
†
! include any options or accessories on equipment.
For full FLA detail for power circuit design of
specific machines and systems, refer to the
electrical diagrams the equipment order and the
nameplate applied to the machine.
information.
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODEL !UTO2ESIN3ELECTOR!3
4UBINGSIZE/$
INCHES[MM]
#ONFIGURATIONSAVAILABLE
[] [] [] [] [] []
Number of sources 24 20 20 20 20 16
Number of destinations 24 20 20 20 20 16
A - Overall height with expandable mounting frame 78.3 - 109.8 {1990 - 2790}
B - Valve height 62.4 { 1584}
C - Overall width with control 42.95 {1091}
!PPROXOMATEWEIGHTlb {kg}
Shipping 1036 {470} 1565 {710}
Installed 972 {441} 1488 {675}
110-265 V/1 phase 50 or 60 Hz 16 (maximum)
#ONTROL
FLX-128 Plus Communication uses an RS485 connection from the AS Valve Control wired back to any of the FLX 128 Plus boxes with an HMI.
C-81
Page Left Intentionally Blank
C-82
40#8 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION3%,%#4/20,!4%3
Expandable Manifold
System for Multiple Lines
Conair Selector Plates are ideally suited for central drying 3ELECTOR0LATE 3ELECTOR0LATE
and distribution systems that require conveying multiple WITH0LAIN4UBE WITH1UICK
#ONNECTORS #ONNECTORS
materials to multiple destinations.
Wall mount, table top and vertical frame designs can be placed
anywhere between the material sources and destinations.
Modular design provides a variety of configurations for flexibility
and expansion.
Quick-disconnect style connectors makes changing materials

fast and easy. Simply purge the line to assure it is clean and
primed for the next conveying cycle, then move the connector to 4ABLE4OP3ELECTOR0LATESWITH
1UIKLOK#ONNECTORS 7ALL3USPENSION-OUNT
the desired material source line.
Convey Multiple Sources to Multiple Destinations
4OMATERIAL &ROM
DESTINATION MATERIAL ` &LEXIBLEDESIGN
SOURCES Mounts in a wall or on a floor stand. Modular plates and connectors allow you to
choose the best combination of line sizes, manifolds and connectors to suit
your application.
` %ASYTOUSE
Simply move your material line hose from one connector to another to change
material destinations.
` $URABLECONSTRUCTION
Rugged construction ensures long life. Material contact points are non-ferrous to
prevent contamination and require minimal maintenance.
` !CCURATE
Optional electronic proofing available to assure material is being conveyed correctly.
Selector Plates on a vertical angled frame with

Quiklok connectors.
C-83
40#8 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION3%,%#4/20,!4%3
Specifications
3INGLE3ELECTOR0LATE 4ABLE4OP&RAME !NGLED&RAME
for wall/suspension mount with four selector plates with four selector plates
! !
(adjustable)
!
#
#
"
"
#
"
3ELECTOR0LATE-ODELS 30 30 30 30 30
6ERTICAL&RAME
Line size inches {mm} 1.5 {38} 1.75 {45} 2.0 {51} 2.25 {57} 2.5 {64} with four selector plates
A - Height of a single plate 7.0 {18}
B - Depth of a single plate 1.75 {4}
C - Width of a single plate 28.0 {71}
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Shipping weight * 200 {91} 275 {125} 350 {159} 475 {215} 600 {272} !
-OUNTINGOPTIONS 7ALL-OUNT 4ABLE4OP !NGLED&RAME 6ERTICAL&RAME

Number of Selector Plates 1 or more 1 to 8
A - Height #
"
Single plate 7 {18} 32 {81} N/A
Four plates 28 {71} 32 {81} Adjustable 56 to 76 {142 to 193}
Six plates 42 {107} 32 {81} Adjustable 56 to 76 {142 to 193}
Eight plates 56 {142} 32 {81} Adjustable 56 to 76 {142 to 193}
B - Depth of a single plate 1.75 {4} 31.5 {80} 24 {61} 32 {81} * Weights are based on using the maximum number
C - Width Single Plate 4 plates wide 6 plates wide 8 plates wide of selector plates and connectors.
Single plate 28 {71} 7 {18} N/A 31.5 {80} These tables define standard configurations only.
Four plates 28 {71} 31.5 {80} Specifications may change without notice. Consult
Six plates 28 {71} 42 {107} 45.5 {116} 31.5 {80} with a Conair representative for the most current
information.
Eight plates 28 {71} 56 {142} 59.5 {151} 31.5 {80}
Connector Options
0LAIN4UBE -ALE"RANCH
1UICK#ONNECTORS
#ONNECTORS #ONNECTOR Aluminum
Tubes are connectors and caps
stainless steel to lock manually to
prevent material seal. Flexible hose
contamination. attaches to the tube
Attach flexible hose end of the drop
to the tube ends &EMALE$ROP connector.
#ONNECTOR ,OCKING#AP
using hose clamps.
C-84
TPCX068-0917 VACUUM CONVEYING SYSTEMSWAVE CONVEYING™
PATENT #US 9,745,149
Wave Conveying™
Speed-controlled
Conveying Protects Resin
Eliminates Angel Hair Patent
Pending
Conair’s patent-pending Wave ConveyingTM is distinctly different
than conventional conveying. While the 5000 plus feet-per-
minute speed of dilute phase conveying has been the preferred
method of material conveying for decades, it was never ideal
for some sensitive resins. Conair’s new Wave Conveying System
uses controlled-speed conveying (300 – 2800 feet-per-minute)
to move these more sensitive materials that often cause
problems like dust, angel hair, or wear to conveying systems
when conveyed at high speeds. Wave Conveying
System
Testing has shown that Wave Conveying can accommodate a
variety of throughput needs. As a result of the speed control used,
common conveying issues with sensitive materials are eliminated.
Convey Smoother, Reduce Wear, Prevent Angel Hair
There are some undesired side-effects that

come from conveying material from point A to ` Controlled resin flow
point B as quickly as possible. Inherent with Fast moving, uncontrolled streams of pellets are replaced with highly-controlled,
typical dilute phase conveying are problems slow moving waves for greater pellet integrity.
like excessive dust, conveying system ` Reduce dust, maintenance, angel hair, static and tubing wear
premature wear, streamers/angel hair, pellet Slow movement means less pellet degradation, less dust creation, and less filter
fracturing, wearing of pellets that make proper maintenance. Angel hair streamers do not form. Tubing, elbows, and even hose last
melt difficult during processing. Until today, much longer. Static charges in the conveying lines are significantly reduced.
there were only ways to battle the symptoms
of this problem – high-wear elbows, ` Patent-pending and retro-fittable
angel hair screens in conveying systems, Conair’s Wave ConveyingTM can often be adapted to utilize existing tubing networks
per shift or per day filter changes, wasted for low-cost implementation.
material. Today that all changes. ` Fully tunable manual operation
TM
Introducing Wave Conveying , designed to Each Wave Conveying receiver can be individually tuned for throughput or material type.
vacuum convey pellets through existing tubing ` Accurately measured conveying speed
at existing rates. Not in a high-speed race of Only the movement of air in a traditional dilute phase conveying
“pellet projectiles”, but in a gentle series of system can be measured. But with Wave Conveying’s slow
controlled, slow-moving resin waves. speed conveying, the Wave Conveying speed sensor measures
Wave Conveying takes charge of material the actual speed of the material as it flows through the
feeding into the conveying line and then conveying line, for total control.
controls the pump speed for adjustable ` Use only the power you need
conveying parameters. Pellets arrive at the Most conveying pumps are either on, running at 100% capacity, or off. The pump
processing machine undamaged, and without used in the Wave Conveying System is highly energy-efficient, thanks to the VFD
creating dust or angel hair. Elbows, valves, (Variable Frequency Drive) which allows the pump to operate using only the amount
hose, and receivers all last longer with of power necessary to achieve the desired material speed. In addition to energy
Wave Conveying delivery. savings, the pump life will be extended by only running at the capacity necessary.

C-85

Components
What is the Wave ConveyingTM System?
The Wave Conveying System solves problems associated with material conveying. The material speed varies based on application
and material. It is moving waves of material fast enough that throughput is appropriate for the application desired, but slow enough
that the individual pellets and the conveying equipment are undamaged.
Can my existing system be converted?
Your existing conveying system can be easily adapted to create a Wave Conveying System. Many of your conveying components can
remain in use, saving money and without requiring new installation.
What if I’m building a new plant or installing a new system?
New Wave Conveying Systems are easily installed using conventional installation practices and components.
01
07
06
05
09
04 08
03 02
01 04 07
FLX-128 Plus Conveying Control – The Wave Conveying Distribution Box – Not your Wave Conveying Sensors – The Wave Conveying
FLX-128 Plus has advanced features that are standard distribution box, this box has been System uses patent-pending sensors to monitor
necessary for the Wave Conveying System. modified to work with the demands of the Wave the material speed, and ensure that the material
Features such as recipes and VFD control are Conveying System. waves are moving at the perfect speed.
required. Depending on when it was purchased,
your existing FLX-128 may work for your system
05 08
with a simple software update. Wave Conveying VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) Dust Collector – Conair’s standard DC1 and DC2
This drive allows the LDP Pump to operate at the Dust Collectors can be used with the
02 perfect level, saving you money by saving energy, Wave Conveying System.
Long Distance Pump (LDP) – This deep vacuum saving wear on the pump, and maximizing the
pump works with a VFD to allow for energy savings, efficiency of your conveying system.
09
and specific control of the amount of vacuum Tubing, Bends, Couplings – Standard tubing,
necessary for moving the pellets at the appropriate
06 bends, and couplings are used as part of the Wave
speed that makes resin protection possible. Receivers – Standard DuraLoad material receivers Conveying System.
are perfect for the Wave Conveying System.
03
Wave Conveying Valve – Specifically designed for
the Wave Conveying System, this valve ensures
that the correct vacuum and material speed are
maintained for perfect conveying.

C-8

How it Works
This conveying technology, developed by Conair to solve common conveying problems, utilizes specially modified Conair equipment to make
Wave Conveying’s speed-controlled resin conveying possible. Conair’s patent-pending system is a very cost effective way to solve many
conveying problems that have existed in the past. A carefully grouped set of products, working together thanks to the brains of Conair’s
FLX-128 Plus, make resin protection conveying possible. The conveying method of choice for the future, available today from Conair.
FLX-128 Plus
Conair’s widely popular FLX-128 conveying system control has been updated to
accomodate the features and functions necessary for Wave Conveying.
The FLX-128 Plus controls the LDP long distance pump(s), receivers, valves, and other
Wave Conveying components. The FLX-128 Plus allows your conveying system to
operate in Wave Conveying mode, conventional dilute phase mode, or both - using the
same LDP pump with recipe selection.
Long Distance Pump (LDP)

This deep vacuum pump works with a VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) to allow for
energy savings, and specific control of the amount of vacuum necessary for moving the
pellets at the ideal speed that makes resin protection possible.
DuraLoad Receiver
The DuraLoad receivers that are used as part of an Wave Conveying System
communicate with the FLX-128 Plus and have a unique recipe for use with the system.
Wave Conveying Distribution Box and Wave Conveying Valve

Total control of the material flow is managed by Conair’s patented Wave Conveying
valve, connected directly to a distribution box installed below a material supply. Its
operation is automatic and controlled by the FLX-128 Plus conveying system control.
Wave Conveying Speed Sensor

With Wave Conveying’s patent-pending flow pattern, this speed sensor varifies that
material moves slowly, smoothly, and reliably from source to destination. Only with Wave
Conveying can the speed of moving material be measured in a vacuum conveying system.
Don’t worry - it’s all retrofitable. If you have an existing system with these components, you already have the majority of what you need to make an
Wave Conveying System in your plant. A few updates to your FLX-128, pump, and distribution box, and you’re well on your way to saving money and time by
eliminating the problem of wasted degraded material, not having to constantly replace worn elbows, and not having the clogs and conveying problems that,
before Wave Conveying, were just the cost of doing business with some “high maintenance” materials.

C-8

Is the Conair Wave ConveyingTM System Right for You?
The Wave Conveying System answers the needs of processors
dealing with:
• Brittle materials – Materials that fracture during conveying,

creating excess dust that requires frequent dust collector filter
maintenance, and loss of material.
• Soft materials – Material that rubs the inside of conveying tubes,

creating angel hair streamers that bridge and clog conveying and
Less Dust/Less Filter No Angel Hair/ Slow Speed/
Maintenance Less Pellet Fracturing High Throughputs blending systems.
• Abrasive materials – Material that wears out material tubing,

elbows, valves, and receivers.
• Plugged material lines – Some types of material are prone to

getting stuck in vertical rises, particularly between loading cycles.
This material creates “plugs” that can clog the material lines.
• Uneven processing, due to pellet degradation – Wave Conveying

slows pellet travel, significantly reducing pellet wear and providing
Adjustable Speed Reduced Wear Less Static more uniform pellets to processing machines for a more even melt.
Frequently Asked Questions

What material and vacuum line sizes are used From 1.5 inch to 5.0 inch (OD) for both vacuum and material.
with Wave Conveying Systems?
How far can a Wave Conveying System move In most cases, the advantages of Wave Conveying slow speed conveying can be utilized for conveying resin
material? up to 1000 feet.
What conveying rate can Wave Conveying To date, Wave Conveying slow speed conveying has been accomplished with throughputs up to 15,000 lbs
achieve with slow speed conveying? per hour.
Can Wave Conveying match my current system Conair’s lab testing shows that the Wave Conveying System can achieve the same high throughputs.
rates (using standard dilute phase conveying)? Conair’s lab is available for visits and for running conveying tests in the Wave Conveying System to prove its
capabilities, prior to purchase.
Can the Wave Conveying System operate Yes. And an Wave Conveying System can operate in either Wave Conveying slow speed mode or
multiple receivers? conventional dilute phase conveying mode.
Can an Wave Conveying System convey any Generally, yes - for 99% of plastic resins. Although it was designed to help eliminate problems associated
type of material? with conveying of very soft and very abrasive materials, Wave Conveying has been found beneficial for the
movement of a wide variety of materials.
Does use of an Wave Conveying System save Yes. The VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) of the LDP vacuum pump starts the pump slowly and operates
energy? the pump only at the exact speed setting required for conveying, which saves energy, and extends the
life of the pump.
Can an existing conveying system be Yes. A Conair Sales engineer can collect the details of a current system and assess the feasibility. In many
converted to Wave Conveying? instances, retrofitting requires minimal changes. Typically, changes only include updating the vacuum
pump, the controls and adding Wave Conveying valve(s).
Can an existing conveying system, with no Conair Yes. Typically, changes only include updating the vacuum pump, the controls and adding Wave Conveying
components, be converted to Wave Conveying? valve(s). Non-Conair vacuum receivers, tubing, hoppers and dust collectors can all be operated within an
Wave Conveying System. Wave can be tuned to accomodate most existing tubing sizes.

C-8
40#8 STAINLESS STEEL MATERIAL HOPPERS!##%334-*)4*)4!.$*)4
Finally... Safety and

Convenience Built into
a Material Hopper
These rugged stainless steel hoppers are ideal for throat mount
applications where a material reservoir is required. Material
handlers appreciate the convenience of the hinged lid design,
which allows efficient hopper cleanout without removal of the
loader or receiver. The lid even locks in place when it's in the
open position so both hands can be used to clean the hopper. -ODEL*)4 -ODEL*)4
Safety and convenience in one design! -ODEL*)4
Hinged Lid for Fast, Easy Cleanout
The AccessTM JIT Material Hoppers are

available in 10, 20, and 40 lb models for ` 3IMPLEFASTCLEANOUT
With the lid safely hinged out of the way there is wide open access to the interior of
various throughput requirements. The
the material hopper for wiping the unit clean. The material drainport is designed so
maintenance-free stainless steel reservoir will that flexible conveying hose can be attached for spill free material changeovers.
provide years of service.
` 3EEMATERIALFLOW
You can depend on the convenient features Dual sight glasses with a provision for
of these hoppers to make your material an adjustable level sensor allow quick
processing more efficient. A hopper material level verification.
discharge drain port (JIT20 and JIT40 only) ` (INGEDLOADERMOUNT
promotes ease and efficiency of cleanout No tools are needed to quickly hinge
and is designed so that flexible conveying the hopper lid safely out of the way.
hose can be attached for spill free material Eliminates the need to remove the
loader/receiver during cleanout.
changeovers. Dual sight glasses allow you to
check your material level at a glance.
When combined with the AccessTM Loaders or

Receivers, the Access JIT Material Hoppers
offer the most efficient cleanout possible.
An optional remote demand sensor may be

installed at the sight glass, which allows
the operator to vary the material level in the
hopper (JIT20 and JIT40 only).
C-89
40#8 STAINLESS STEEL MATERIAL HOPPERS!##%334-*)4*)4!.$*)4
Top Interface Adapter Kits

0ROCESSING0OSITION $RAINING0OSITION
$RAINPORTMODELS*)4AND*)4ONLY 2EMOTE$EMAND3ENSORMODELS*)4AND*)4ONLY
Use the integrated drainport for easy cleanout with no spills. Simply The optional bracket and capacitive type remote demand sensor
attach flex hose to the mounting stub and evacuate the material. permits simple material level adjustments.
Specifications
" #
3IDE6IEWLIDOPEN
$
!
&RONT6IEW 3IDE6IEW
3ELECTOR0LATE-ODELS *)4 *)4 *)4 -OUNTING)NTERFACE

Capacity at 35 lb/ft3 {16 kg/ft3 } 11.1 {5} 24.3 {11} 41.52 {19} 6.0 inch {152 mm}
Capacity in ft3 {liter} 0.32 {9} 0.69 {20} 1.19 {34}
5.0 inch {127 mm}
Construction stainless steel
A - Overall height (lid closed) 13.81 {351} 19.0 {483} 22.13 {562}
B - Width (at top plate) 13.25 {552} 19.25 {552} 19.25 {892}
6.0 inch {152 mm}
5.0 inch {127 mm}
C - Depth (at top plate - includes handle) 16.63 {422} 22.63 {575} 22.63 {286}
2.12 inch
{54 mm}
D - Overall height (lid opened) 23.13 {587} 32.0 {813} 35.13 {552}
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Installed 17 {8} 31 {14} 36 {16}
Shipping 20 {9} 45 {20} 50 {23} 2.12 inch
{54 mm}
,OADERINTERFACE
Conair loader/receiver compatibility (model) AL2, AR2, AL5, AR5, AL5, AR5, AR10,
DL8 or DB8 DL12 or DB12 DL12, DL15 or DB12
0.40 inch {10 mm}
4 holes for 3/8 inch
diameter bolts
C-90
TPCX028-0717 MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION"5,+$)342)"54)/."/8%3
Modular Construction
for Easy Expansion
Because Conair’s Bulk Distribution Boxes are modular; material
outlets may be added as your needs grow. Any module may be
directed towards your material destination to assure the easiest
possible line routing. The box modules are the industry standard
16-inch square bolt pattern and allow for a wide variety of line
sizes, draining and easy cleanout options.
Trouble-Free Material Flow to Multiple Destinations
` !LUMINUMANDSTAINLESSSTEELCONSTRUCTION
For years of trouble-free performance.
` %ASYAIR TO MATERIALRATIOADJUSTMENT
To prevent material from surging,
starving or jamming.
` -AYBEHARDPIPED
No need for flex hose.
` -ODULAREXPANDABLE
Additional outlets may be added
$ISTRIBUTION"OXmodular layers may be when needed.
independently specified and oriented in * All stainless steel construction is optional.
any direction.
C-91
Features / Options
3MOOTH-ATERIAL&LOW
Conair Distribution Boxes assure smooth material flow with hand

adjustable slip tubes that ratio the amount of material to be
conveyed in proportion to the inlet air used for vacuum conveying.
This way, material jamming, slugging or starving is minimized.
The sliding air inlet tube is fitted with a filter screen to prevent
unwanted debris from entering the conveying system, or material
from leaving the distribution box.
4YPICAL$ISTRIBUTION"OX&EED4UBE
Locking Thumb
Inlet Screw Material
Filter Inlet Material
Outlet
For dry air conveying

Air
Inlet systems, the air inlet is
fitted with an optional tubing
Air / Material End Plate
Adjustment Tube adapter that may be plumbed
to the dry air source.
Optional Cartridge Filter

1UICK#LEANOUT
Add any of these options directly to the base of your material vessel or below any Distribution Box Modules.
4HE3"-ODULESHOWN 4HIS3LIDE"OTTOM

HERE is perfect for 0LATEallows full
frequent material change access to the
overs. Equipped with up underside of your bin
to three material outlets and the inside of the
plus a drain port (with slide Distribution Box for
gate), the hinged bottom fast, easy cleaning
may be hand released after and inspection (not
draining and the round bot- recommended for
tom wiped clean. For close partial draining of
clearance installations, the bin).
where there is not enough
room for the swing down
chamber, the single outlet
RB Module (not shown),
also with a round bottom,
may be bolted in place.
%ASY$RAIN
4RANSITIONWITH6ALVE 3LIDE"OTTOMWITH6ALVE

is designed for manual allows you to drain
filling of gaylords or material then slide the
barrels and assures full bottom open for thorough
draining with no dead cleanout and inspection.
spots and easy on/off The valve plate is also
flow control. available in a nonslide
version.
C-9
Accessories
!NGEL(AIR2EMOVAL
Trap material clogs before they clog your conveying system
"Angel hair", "streamers", or "skins", created by high-velocity

conveying of soft material, can clog your conveying system by
blocking distribution box tubes or creating material bridges in
hoppers. Conair’s Angel Hair Remover provides a stainless steel

screen in the material flow path to filter out the clogging material
and allow it to be easily removed from the system. Usually fitted
at the base of a silo or storage bin, the Angel Hair Remover should
be installed below a Conair Slide Gate (see below) and above your
main Distribution Box. The unit fits the same 16-inch square bolt
pattern as Conair’s entire line of Distribution Box components and
requires only 8.5 inches of height.
Silo or Bin Cone

Slide Gate
Angel Hair 4HEEASY TO CLEAN !NGEL(AIR2EMOVER .
Remover (EIGHTINCH[MM]
A low-profile version is also available. #220122L010P01
Modular Distribution Box
3LIDE'ATE
To stop the flow of material from a bulk 3LIDE'ATE (EIGHTINCH[MM]

storage vessel, Conair’s Slide Gate FORSQUAREBOTTOMBINS
A low-profile version is also available. #126011
provides a heavy-duty hand crank that
16.25 in. {413 mm} square
3.5 in. {89 mm}

7/16 in.
allows the stainless steel knife gate to cut
13.5 in. {343 mm}
{11 mm}
through a solid column of material and 4 in. {102 mm}
square
stop material flow for service, cleaning 4 in. {102 mm}

or equipment changes. The rugged
housing requires mini below your silo 3.5 in. {89 mm}
and is constructed of aluminum, with an 4OPAND"OTTOM&LANGES)DENTICAL

all stainless steel mechanism. Available
in both round and square top flanges to
fit both popular vessel outlet flanges, the
bottom flange is the industry standard
3LIDE'ATE (EIGHTINCH[MM]
16-inch square bolt pattern to allow 15.5 inch {394 mm}
FORROUNDBOTTOMSILOS Base Circle Diameter
fitting any of Conair’s extensive line of

Bulk Distribution Box products.
12 Slots
12 inch Diameter 7/16 inch x
{311 mm} 1-1/16 inch
{11 x 33 mm}
17 inch Diameter
{432 mm}
C-9
Specifications 16.25 inch sq

{413 mm sq}
4.63 inch
&ITSIN&EED4UBE+IT/$ 0ORT3IZE {112 mm} S S S Module A
1.5 inches {38 mm} Small port size

7.5 inch L L Module C
1.75 inches {45 mm} Small port size {191 mm}
2 inches {51 mm} Small port size
2.25 inches {57 mm} Small port size

8.63 inch Module DA
2.5 inches {64 mm} Small port size {219 mm}
S S S
3 inches {76 mm} large port size
4 inches {102 mm} large port size

9.63 inch L Module DB
{245 mm}
S S
!PPLICATION.OTES -OUNTING&LANGE$IMENSIONS
When using a multi-outlet
Hinge S S
16.25 in. {413 mm} square
distribution box directly 3.5 in. {89 mm}

below a vessel with a 7/16 in.
13.5 in. {343 mm}
11.19 inch Module SB

{11 mm} {284 mm}
material outlet diameter 4 in. {102 mm}
square
S Twist Lock
under 8 inches, use box
Release
modules DA or DB to 4 in. {102 mm}
2.5 inch
assure adequate material {64 mm}
flow to the outside tube 3.5 in. {89 mm}
positions.
4OPAND"OTTOM&LANGES)DENTICAL
5.94 inch Module RB
{151 mm} S
2.5 inch
{64 mm}
Other Models
For compact material conveying systems
requiring only a single material outlet,
Conair’s Single Tube Boxes are ideal.

Built entirely out of stainless steel, these
boxes fit easily onto small bin outlets
with a 5" x 5" square bolt pattern. Each
model includes a quick drain/easy clean
slide gate in the bottom, plus an air inlet 7 inch
{178 mm}
screen filter and a sight glass. Air-to-
material adjustments are made in the
same precise fashion as Conair’s line of
6 inch sq {152 mm sq}
larger Bulk Distribution Boxes.
-ATERIAL/UTLET/$ "OX0ART.UMBER -OUNTING&LANGE$IMENSIONS
6 inch sq
1.50 inches {38 mm} 101-631-01 {152 mm sq}
1.75 inches {45 mm} 101-631-02
2.00 inches {51 mm} 101-631-03

4 inch sq 5 inch sq
{102 mm sq} {127 mm sq}
2.25 inches {57 mm} 101-631-04
7/16 inch
{11 mm}
C-9
40#8 MATERIAL LINE VALVES#/--/.,).%6!,6%3
Isolate Receivers
in Common Material
Line Systems
Externally mounted Line Valves effectively stop the flow of
material to vacuum receivers for trouble-free operation of
common or single material line conveying systems.
At rest, the inlet is closed, allowing the valve to isolate the

receiver from the common material line of central systems.
When the vacuum sequence valve opens, the line valve allows
material to fill the receiver. -ODEL#6
Positive Shut-Off and Smooth Flow
Unlike competitive internal flappers that rely

upon the system’s vacuum to close, Conair ` -ODULARDESIGN
Line Valves utilize a reliable compressed air Screw-in components allow common wear parts to be easily replaced and line
piston to shut off material flow. And mounted sizes to be changed without the need of purchasing another valve on models
external to the loader, Line Valves can never CV-1 and CV-2.
fall off, and can never contaminate or jam the
` 3MOOTHALUMINUMBODY
receiver’s flow of material.
A non-corrosive, smooth path for material flow.
The valve operates in unison with the loader’s
vacuum sequencing valve to effectively start ` %ASYTOCLEAN
and stop material flow. Removable with no tools, the lid provides wide open access.
Standard valves have an aluminum inlet ` (IGHPERFORMANCEOPTION

and outlet for use with materials up to The optional high performance valve is optimized for use with high temperature
225°F {107°C}. and/or highly abrasive materials.
An optional high performance version is also
available. It is optimized for use with high
temperature materials, those exceeding
225°F {107°C}, and for highly abrasive
material including glass-filled resins and
sharp regrind.
C-95
40#8 MATERIAL LINE VALVES#/--/.,).%6!,6%3
Specifications
#ORRECTMOUNTING
POSITIONSHOWN
Material flow
DIRECTION 4OCONTROL
!
$
$
#OMPRESSED
AIRSUPPLY
" #
-ODEL #6 #6 #6 #6
Line size diameter inches 1.5 - 2 2.25 - 2.5 3 2
Type of inlet/outlet connection screw-in welded
Body type aluminum cast fabricated
A - Overall height 9.0 {229} 9.75 {248} 11.0 {279} 12.0 {305}
B - Length 12.5 {318} 13.0 {330} 13.875 {352}
C - Width 4.5 {114} 5.5 {140} 7.0 {178}
D - Inlet/outlet offset height 2.75 {70} 3.438 {87} 3.875 {98}
Installed 7 {3} 9 {4} 11 {5}
Shipping 9 {4} 11 {5} 13 {6} 14 {6}
o
120V/1 phase/60 Hz 0.25
24V/1 phase/50 or 60 Hz 1.0
Air consumption 0.2 ft3/min. @ 80 psi {0.09 liters/sec @ 5.5 bars}
Hose requirement 1/4 inch hose fitting
* Do not mount valve in a vertical position.
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems,
Options
(IGHPERFORMANCE 6ACUUMVALVEOPERATION
The high performance Common Line Valve has a stainless steel inlet Although specifically designed to handle the flow of material,
and outlet, includes a high temperature Viton seal in the pneumatic Common Line Valves may also be used for controlling air flow, to
cylinder and a specially plated and heat-treated valve body, lid and shut off the flow of vacuum air to receivers, or operate in response
plunger for maximum wear-resistance. to vacuum control systems for pumps.
The high performance valve is optimized for use with high tem-
perature materials, those exceeding 225°F {107°C}, and for highly
abrasive materials including glass-filled resins and sharp regrind.
C-96
40#8 MATERIAL LINE VALVES2!4)/6!,6%
Efficiently Combine
Two Materials
While Loading
Externally mounted Ratio Valves connect readily to Conair vacuum
receivers and loaders equipped with ratio-capable controls.
The dual inlets alternately open and close in response to a timed

control signal, providing a mix of virgin and regrind materials
during each vacuum loading cycle.
At rest, the regrind side is open and the virgin inlet is closed,
26 2ATIO6ALVE
allowing the valve to isolate the receiver from the common
material line of central systems.
Automatically Load Regrind as it is Generated
The Conair Ratio Valve may be readily used as

a dual inlet to single outlet valve for a variety ` -ODULARDESIGN
of material conveying applications. Screw-in components allow common wear parts to be easily replaced and line sizes to
be changed without the need of purchasing another valve.
Standard model ratio valves have aluminum
inlets and outlets and can be used with ` 3MOOTHALUMINUMBODY
materials up to 225°F {107°C}. A non-corrosive, smooth path for material flow.
An optional high performance version of the
` %ASYTOCLEAN
Ratio Valve is available. It is optimized for
Removable with no tools, the lid provides wide open access.
use with high temperature materials, those
exceeding 225°F {107°C}, and for highly ` (IGHPERFORMANCEOPTION
abrasive materials including glass filled resins Optimized for use with high temperature and/or highly abrasive materials.
and sharp regrind.
C-97
40#8 MATERIAL LINE VALVES2!4)/6!,6%
Specifications
#ORRECTMOUNTING !PPLICATION.OTES
POSITIONSHOWN
Ratio Valves alternate between virgin and

regrind materials based on time.
4OCONTROL
No provisions are made for confirmation of
! material flow, conveying rate or compensation
for variations in bulk density. Ratio Valves are
# ideally suited for applications where 100% of
#OMPRESSED generated regrind may be safely reintroduced
AIRSUPPLY to the process.
"
-ODEL 26 26 26 26
Type of inlet/outlet connection screw-in welded
Body type aluminum cast fabricated
A - Overall height 9.5 {241} 10.5 {267} 13.0 {330}
B - Length 12.5 {318} 13.25 {337}
C - Width 4.75 {121} 7.0 {179} 8.0 {203}
Installed 10 {5} 13 {6} 17 {8}
Shipping 14 {6} 17 {8} 21 {10}
120V/1 phase/60 Hz 0.25
24V/1 phase/50 or 60 Hz 1.0
Air consumption 0.2 ft3/min. @ 80 psi { 0.09 liters/sec @ 5.5 bars}
* Valves are to be mounted horizontally only.
†
Options
s $UALSOLENOID s 2ATIO6ALVEASAMATERIALSELECTOR
This special Ratio Valve option allows both A simple A/B toggle switch selects
material inlets to be normally closed for which material inlet is open, for easy
dual common material line operation. selection between two material lines.
(120V/1phase/60 @ 2 amps.)
s (IGHPERFORMANCE
The high performance Ratio Valve has s !DDRATIOLOADINGCAPABILITY
stainless steel inlets and outlets, includes Any 120 Volt single inlet loader may
high temperature Viton seals in the be converted to ratio operation with this
pneumatic cylinders, specially plated and control. The control uses the vacuum
heat-treated valve body, lid and plungers loading signal to create timed virgin
for maximum wear resistance. and regrind signals.
C-98
40#8 MATERIAL LINE VALVES052'%6!,6%3
Evacuate Vacuum
Conveying Lines
Conair Purge Valves provide an effective means of purging
conveying lines of residue material between conveying sizes and
material changes.
Each valve is equipped with a single outlet and dual inlets: one
for material and one for air. When activated, the valve halts
material flow, and then floods the conveying line with air to 0URGE6ALVE
evacuate material.
Automatically Floods Conveying Line With Air
The Purge Valve is programmed to remain open

for a specific amount of time during the vacuum ` -ODULARDESIGN
conveying cycle to allow material to flow. Screw-in components allow common wear parts to be easily replaced and line sizes
to be changed without the need of purchasing another valve on models PV1 and PV2.
While vacuum is still present, the material
valve closes and the air valve opens, flooding ` 3MOOTHALUMINUMBODY
the conveying line with air. The purging vacuum A non-corrosive, smooth path for material and air flow.
air moves any material in the line through to ` %ASYTOCLEAN
the destination, usually a vacuum receiver. Removable with no tools, the lid provides wide open access.
Equipped with an air inlet filter, the Purge ` (IGHPERFORMANCEOPTION
Valve may be installed on most distribution Optimized for use with high temperature and/or highly abrasive materials.
box outlets to purge the line of material.
For dry air conveying systems, the air inlet

filter may be easily substituted with a direct
connection to the dry air source.
Most Conair controls provide the required

signal to operate the valve’s purging function.
Both inlet and the outlet are popular OD line
sizes.
C-99
40#8 MATERIAL LINE VALVES052'%6!,6%3
Options
(IGHPERFORMANCE
The high performance line valve has a stainless steel inlet and outlet, includes a high temperature Viton seal in the pneumatic cylinder and a
specially plated and heat-treated valve body, lid and plunger for maximum wear-resistance.
The high performance valve is optimized for use with high temperature materials, those exceeding 225°F {107°C}, and for highly abrasive
materials including glass-filled resins and sharp regrind.
Specifications
#ORRECTMOUNTING
POSITIONSHOWNo
4OCONTROL
!
$
$
#OMPRESSED
AIRSUPPLY
" #
-ODEL 06 06 06 06
Type of inlet/outlet connection Screw-in Welded
Body type aluminum Cast Fabricated
A - Overall height 9.5 {241} 10.5 {267} 13.0 {330}
B - Length 13.0 {330.2} 16.75 {425.4}
C - Width 7.5 {190.5} 8.25 {210.0} 12.0 {304.8}
D - Inlet/outlet offset height 2.5 {63.5} 3.0 {76.2} 4.0 {101.6}
Installed 10 {5} 13 {6} 17 {8}
Shipping 14 {6} 17 {8} 21 {10}
6OLTAGEFull load amps ‡
120V/1 phase/60 Hz 0.25
24V/1 phase/50 or 60 Hz 1.0
Air consumption 0.2 ft3/min. @ 80 psi {0.09 liters/sec @ 5.5 bars}
* Length dimension may vary by up to three inches depending on the length of the filter. Filter lengths change based on line size. The length also varies slightly depending on the
positioning of the clamped on filter.
†
Valves are to be mounted horizontally only.
‡
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the most current information.
C-100
40#8 MATERIAL LINE VALVES!$*534!",%052'%6!,6%
Control Material Flow

and Purge Lines
The Adjustable Purge Valve (APV) controls material flow from a
hopper or surge bin, and is ideal for use with central drying and
conveying systems.
The APV releases material into the conveying lines as needed,

and then purges the material lines to prevent material cross-
contamination and/or moisture regain.
The APV can be used in either dry or ambient air conveying

applications.
-ODEL!06
Automatically Purges Conveying Line With Air
The Adjustable Purge Valve will remain open

for a specified amount of time (set by the ` $ESIGNENSURESCOMPLETEPURGING
user in the central loading control) during the This valve design ensures positive material shut off and successfully evacuates all
vacuum conveying cycle to allow material to material from the valve during purging.
flow through the valve. ` &LEXIBLEINSTALLATION
While vacuum is still present, the material Equipped with a 360° swiveling material outlet which allows quick placement of
valve closes and the material flow stops. equipment during installation.
The flow of air continues through the valve
` -ODULARCOMPONENTSEASYMAINTENANCE
and material line, fully purging the valve and Bolt-on components allow common wear parts to be easily maintained without the
material line. need for removing the entire valve.
The valve conveniently bolts to the bottom
` 3MOOTHALUMINUMBODY
of the material hopper discharge. Unlike A non-corrosive, aluminum body provides a smooth path for material and air to flow.
alternative models, a separate distribution box All other valve components are made of stainless steel.
is not required.
` %ASYANDSAFETOCLEAN
The APV can be used with FLX-128 Plus and Removable with no tools, the cleanout door provides wide open access.
ELC Loading Controls when used to convey
from a single source to a single destination. ` $UAL PUMPSYSTEMSONEMATERIALSOURCE
However, when conveying from multiple Purge material conveying lines that are served by separate vacuum pumps with the
sources to multiple destinations, the Dual Outlet Adjustable Purge Valve.
FLX-128 Plus must be used.
` (IGH WEARPLATINGISAVAILABLEASANOPTION
C-10
How it Works Application
Both the Single and Dual Outlet Adjustable

Purge Valve (APV) convey and completely
purge material lines resulting in
contamination-free processing. Use the
4HEOPENINGOFTHEVALVEDURING 4HECLOSINGOFTHEVALVEDURING Single Outlet APV when only one (1)
LOADINGCYCLE THEPURGINGCYCLE vacuum pump is used. In applications
where two (2) vacuum pumps are required
to convey material from a single material
-ATERIALCONVEYING 0URGING source, the Dual Outlet APV is ideal. A “Y”
diverter casting in addition to two (2) APVs
When a signal from the loading system After a period of time, (the loading
comprises the dual outlet assembly.
is received, the solenoid valve on the time is set by the user at the central
./4% An optional straight outlet tube is
APV will engage the dispensing valve. loading control) the dispensing valve
available for gravity flow applications.
The dispensing valve will open to a pre- will close causing the material flow
determined level and allow the hopper to stop. The loading system will
material to flow down to the lower continue to flow through the valve,
portion of the APV, which is under high clean the valve and completely
velocity air from the dryer’s vacuum convey the hopper material to its
system. The high velocity air will then destination. This is referred to as
transport the hopper material to its purge time.
destination. This is the load time.
Accessories
3INGLEOUTLET!06 $UALOUTLET!06
WITHDRYAIRKIT WITHDRYAIRKIT
$RYAIRCONVEYINGKIT
The dry air conveying kit provides low dewpoint air to the air inlet of the APV and is recommended for applications where dried material is
being conveyed and moisture regain is a concern. (Pictured here is the Dual Outlet APV with the Dry Air Conveying Kit attached.)
C-102
Specifications
" Specification Notes
* Throughputs will depend upon pump size,
material line size and conveying distances.
†
Overall height will vary slightly due to
INCH line size.
[MM]
‡
The height under the hopper may vary by
up to 1.5 inches {38.1 mm} depending on
the material tube size. Material tube sizes
! change based on line size and on the amount
of material being conveyed. An optional
[MM]
INCH
straight tube outlet is available for gravity flow.
Specifications may change without notice.

Consult with a Conair representative for the
$ most current information.
-ODEL !06 -OUNTING)NTERFACE

inches {mm}
)" for 5 x 5 inch bolt pattern
Material inlet size diameter 3.5 {88.9}
)" for 7 x 7 inch bolt pattern
Purge air inlet 3.0 {76.2}
Type of inlet/outlet connection bolt-on
INCH[MM]
Body type aluminum cast DIAMETERTHROUGHHOLE
INCH[MM]
A - Overall height †
SQUAREBOLTPATTERN
B - Depth
C - Width
[MM]SQUARE
D - Height under the hopper ‡ Discharge line OD Height under the hopper
1.5 {38.1} 10.8 {274.3}
INCH
1.75 {44.5} 10.8 {274.3}
2.0 {50.8} 10.8 {274.3} INCH
[MM]
2.25 {57.2} 10.9 { 277.6} DIAMETER
2.5 {63.5} 11.8 {299.7} BOLTHOLE
3.0 {76.2} 12.1 {306.0} INCH[MM]

7EIGHT lb {kg} SQUAREBOLTPATTERN
Installed 12.0 {5.4} IN[MM]

Shipping 22.0 {9.9} DIAMETERBOLTHOLES
%LECTRICALCOMPATIBILITY
Available voltage 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 120 VAC
0.1 ft3/min {3 l/min} @ minimum of 60 psi {4.1 bar} maximum of 100 psi {6.9 bar}; 1/4 NPT male fitting.
C-10
Specifications
"
INCH[MM]
[MM]
INCH
%
-ODEL $UAL/UTLET!06 -OUNTING)NTERFACE

inches {mm} )" for 5 x 5 inch bolt pattern
Material inlet size diameter 3.5 {88.9} )"for 7 x 7 inch bolt pattern
Purge air inlet 3.0 {76.2} INCH[MM]
Type of inlet/outlet connection bolt-on SQUAREBOLTPATTERN
Body type aluminum cast INCH[MM]
DIAMETER
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} THROUGHHOLE
A - Overall height† 16.3 {414.0}
[MM]
B - Depth 15.1 {383.5}
INCH
SQUARE
INCH
C - Width 16.9 {429.3} [MM]
DIAMETER
D - Adapter plate height 5.0 {127.0}
BOLTHOLE
E - Height under the hopper‡ Discharge line OD Height under the hopper
1.5 {38.1} 15.8 {401.3}
INCH
1.75 {44.5} 15.8 {401.3}
[MM]
2.0 {50.8} 15.8 {401.3} DIAMETER INCH[MM]
BOLTHOLES SQUAREBOLTPATTERN
2.25 {57.2} 15.9 {403.9}
2.5 {63.5} 16.8 {426.7}
3.0 {76.2} 17.1 {434.3} Specification Notes
7EIGHT lb {kg} * Throughputs will depend upon pump size, material line size and conveying
distances.
Installed 45.0 {20.5}
†
Overall height will vary slightly due to line size.
Shipping 55.0 {24.9}
‡
%LECTRICALCOMPATIBILITY The height under the hopper may vary by up to 1.5 inches {38.1 mm} depending
on the material tube size. Material tube sizes change based on line size and
Available voltage 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 120 VAC on the amount of material being conveyed. An optional straight tube outlet is
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENT available for gravity flow.
0.2 ft3/min {5.6 l/min} @ minimum of 60 psi {4.1 bar} maximum of 100 psi {6.9 bar}; Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative
two (2) 1/4 NPT male fittings. for the most current information.
C-10
40#8 MATERIAL HOPPERS-).)!452%(!.$9(/00%2
See-Through Hopper
with Removable Cone
Material changes are fast, clean and simple with this removable
polycarbonate hopper on your processing machine. No tools
are needed to quickly hinge the hopper lid out of the way and
pull the miniature, see-through hopper cone from the compact
frame. A dribble-proof slide gate automatically engages as the
hopper is removed, allowing remaining material to be returned
to the gaylord, bag or barrel. The Miniature Handy Hopper is also -INIATURE
(ANDY(OPPER
an ideal supply hopper above additive feeder throats.
Confirm Material Flow at the Machine Throat
Constructed of rugged, clear polycarbonate,

the Miniature Handy Hopper provides about ` &ASTCLEANMATERIALCHANGES
a 0.3 cubic feet of material that may be The Miniature Hopper cone and leftover
supplied via an automatic loader or hand- material may be easily removed from
filling. The lid closes firmly on the top of the the machine with no tools.
material cone and allows a wide range of
` 3EEMATERIALFLOW
loading devices to be installed, then is easily
The clear polycarbonate hopper allows
hinged out of the way for hopper access. With
you to confirm material flow, avoiding
the lid safely and automatically locked in the
costly interruptions and downtime.
open position, the clear cone may be easily
A sensor may be provided to
removed using the dual lifting handles. determine or confirm material level.
A level sensing device may be installed in the
` (INGEDLOADERMOUNT
frame of the hopper to provide a low material
The rugged lid accommodates an
warning or trigger the loader for a controlled
automatic loader which may be hinged
material level. A grate magnet may be
and safety-locked out of the way.
supplied for the material cone, to catch tramp
The lid is pre-drilled and tapped to
metal before it can reach the processing accept Conair Loader models AR2,
machine throat. AL2, TLM, DL8, and DB8.
The 6 x 6 inch mounting plate accommodates
a wide range of custom drilled bolt patterns to
match your machine dimensions. Spare cones
may be provided as replacements to further
enhance quick material changes.
C-105
40#8 MATERIAL HOPPERS-).)!452%(!.$9(/00%2

Benefits
%ASYDUMPAND
CLEAN
The clear, rugged,
polycarbonate
hopper may be
easily removed
with no spilling or
draining, allowing
the remaining
material to be
returned to
storage.
#OMPACTANDVISUAL
The Miniature Handy Hopper’s base plate can be easily drilled for
nearly any machine throat. The hinged lid provides a sturdy
mounting surface for an automatic loader or the lid may be
opened for hand-filling. Operators can easily verify material flow.
Specifications Options
• Grate Magnet

Part number 294 008
• Top Hole Cover

Part number 105 525 38
# "
-ODEL0ART.UMBER -INIATURE(ANDY(OPPER"ASE0LATE

Capacity lb {kg} @35 lb ft3 10. 5 {4.76} 6.0 inch {152 mm}
Capacity ft3 {liters} 0.30 {8.5}
Polycarbonate, with aluminum 5.0 inch {127 mm}
Cone construction
and stainless steel
Maximum material temperature °F {°C} 260 {127}
Maximum loader weight lb {kg} 80 {36} 1.8750 diameter
Maximum loader height inches {mm} 22 {559}
6.0 inch
{152 mm} Hopper locking tabs (2)*
A - Overall height (lid closed) 12.75 {324}
B - Overall height (lid opened) 27.3125 {694} 5.0 inch
C - Width (at top plate) 14.5 {368} {127 mm} Hopper frame bolts (4)*
Depth (at top plate) 17.375 {441}
Center hole diameter 1.75 {45} 4 holes for 3/8 inch
diameter bolts
Installed 15 {7}
* Fasteners cannot be used in these areas.
Shipping 18 {8}
C-106
TPCX029-1017 ACCESSORIESAUDIBLE/VISUAL ALARM AND ALARM KITS
Small, Loud, Bright

and Affordable
Alarm Box
In noisy manufacturing environments, immediately see and hear
where your process problem is before you lose production and
quality. The Conair Universal Alarm Box signals with a loud, clear
buzzer and a flashing stobe light notifying you of a problem.
The many uses include alerting workers of problems with dryers,

blenders, loading, material flow, and material levels. Connect
directly to existing alarm signals, or use where no alarm signals
presently exist.
Universal Alarm Box
Catch Process Problems Before Losing Production
The Universal Alarm Box provides an audible

and visual notification of a problem. Safety is ` Wide range of applications
built in: the strobe light remains on, even after Be notified of high or low levels in bins and hoppers, material flow problems, loading
the buzzer is acknowledged, until the alarm system problems, or blender and dryer faults.
signal stops.
` Customize with an alarm kit
The alarm is small enough to readily mount Add rotating level switches or proximity sensors and alarms to any bin, granulator or
anywhere it is needed and can even be hopper with Conair’s Alarm Kit. We offer kits that signal high or low material levels.
positioned up to 150 feet {45.72 m} from the
equipment it is monitoring. ` Catch hidden problems
With the alarm box connected to a sensor or other alarm output, know immediately
Identification labels let you know immediately when there is a problem inside a dryer, blender, bin or loader.
which machine is in distress, eliminating the
time-consuming search for the problem. ` Custom labeling
Choose from one of the prelabeled stickers, or write your own label to quickly and
Customize your system by choosing the alarm easily identify the alarm.
box only, the alarm box with rotating paddle
switch, or the alarm box with proximity sensor.

C-107
TPCX029-1017 ACCESSORIESAUDIBLE/VISUAL ALARM AND ALARM KITS
Universal Alarm Boxes Universal Alarm Kits

This audible/visual alarm with strobe, Try one of our Universal Alarm Kits when you don’t have an alarm output but need a
horn and silence button can be used with material level alarm.
any 24 VAC or 115 VAC alarm output. The Kits can be configured with a small, light duty, or large, heavy duty rotary level switch, or
box is equipped with a bare wire input with a proximity sensor. For a high material level alarm, for example granulator bins, the
cable or green phoenix plug (that mates alarm is wired normally open (NO). For a low material level alarm (hoppers, surge bins),
with Conair loader terminal boxes). the alarm is wired normally closed (NC). All kits require 115 VAC @ 2 amps. A cord set
with a plug is provided.
Specifications
Models 107-510-01 107-510-02 107-510-07 107-510-08 107-510-10 107-510-11
Cable length ft {m} 15 {4.6}
Electrical requirements
Alarm input voltage 115 VAC 24 VAC 115 VAC 24 VAC 115 VAC*/24 VDC 24 VDC
Full load amps † 0.5
Cable end bare wires green phoenix connector bare wires phoenix
Height 9 {229}
Width 5 {127}
Depth 4 {102}
Shipping 10 {4.5}
Models 107-510-03-01 107-510-03-02 107-510-04-01 107-510-04-02 107-510-04-03 107-510-04-04

small rotary level large rotary level 18 mm 18 mm 30 mm 30 mm
Sensor type
sensor (NO or NC) sensor (NO or NC) NC proximity NO proximity NC proximity NO proximity
Cable length ft {m} 10 {3} 6 {1.829}
Sensor installation 3/4" NPT 1 1/4" NPT plastic nuts (2) aluminum nuts (2)
Electrical requirements
Alarm input voltage 115 VAC
Full load amps† 2.0
Height 9 {229}
Width 5 {127}
Depth 4 {102}
Shipping 10 {4.5}
* Model 107-510-10 includes a standard 115 VAC plug and can operate on 115VAC or 24VDC.
†

C-108
40#8 FLANGE MOUNTED DRAWER MAGNETS-'3%2)%3
Assure Metal Free

Processing
There is no substitute for the elimination of tramp metal from
your process stream. Damaged screws, molds or dies, plugged
gates and clogged filter packs stop productivity and often lead
to costly process equipment downtime and expensive repairs.
A drawer magnet provides the single best investment your
process can make in protection against metal contamination
and the damage it can cause. Drawer magnets provide a filter
of magnetic power to draw ferrous metals out of the material
stream, collect them and allow them to be safely removed from
the process stream.
The Conair MG Series drawer magnets are capable of separating
-ODEL-'
ferrous metals too small to be visible, for the utmost in protection. (Shown with optional
slide gate.)
Designed for Reliable Tramp Metal Filtration
Drawer magnets provide a safeguard against

the entry of ferrous metal into the process. ` 3UPERIORCONTAMINANTCAPTURE
Staggered rows of powerful, neodymium rare Neodymium, rare earth, temperature compensated magnets never lose their power;
earth cartridge magnets provide a smooth, yet even when installed over hot, processing machine throats.
asymmetrical path for resin flow, assuring that
` 3TACK UPSTRENGTH
material passes in close proximity to one of the
Up to 10,000 pounds {4536 kg} of symmetrical load may be safely installed above the
powerful magnets. The magnets attract and then
rugged stainless steel housing.
hold the tramp metal securely until it is removed
from the magnet surface by the operator. ` %ASYCLEANING
The robust magnet housing is constructed of Large, high-torque hand knobs on swing bolts release the clear faceplate of the
11 gauge {3.18 mm} welded stainless steel to magnet drawer for easy cleaning.
safely support material handling equipment
Metal particles and fines are
above it. The flat, top surface may be custom
collected on the powerful
drilled to suit. A bottom flange is provided for
magnetic cartridges for safe
match drilling to the processing machine throat.
removal from the process
Options include low-profile models, to minimize
material stream.
stack-up height and material shut off gates to
allow cleaning with-out draining material.
The magnetic cartridges are mounted in
a rugged, removable, clear faceplate for
easy access and cleaning. Options include
self-cleaning models equipped with stainless
steel sleeves around the magnet, allowing the
magnet cartridge to be withdrawn from the
sleeve, and collected metal to easily fall away.
C-109
40#8 FLANGE MOUNTED DRAWER MAGNETS-'3%2)%3
Advanced Metal Detection Solutions Options
Conair offers a wide range of integrated To match your processing needs,

metal detection solutions for both ferrous Conair offers many options to
and non-ferrous metals. Systems can streamline control of your process flow.
include fully integrated loading and storage
plus reject elimination. Contact a Conair • Self-cleaning magnets
representative for more information. • Material shut-off gate above magnet
drawer
• Pneumatic conveying line magnets
• Vacuum tight magnet drawer for
• High volume (silo mounted) magnets direct feed loaders
• Grate magnets • High temperature gaskets
• Conveyor magnets • Purge spout
• Machine mounted all metal separators • Drain port
• Liquid colorant dispensing port
Specifications
&RONTVIEW 4OPVIEW "OTTOMVIEW
# '
% )
" %
!
$ (
-ODELS -' -' -' -' Specification Notes

$IMENSIONSinches {mm} * Height may vary up to 0.25 - 0.375 in. (6 - 10 mm)
A - Standard housing height* 10.500 {267} 10.625 {270} 10.875 {276} 12.875 {327} depending on the thickness of the flange required.
Standard housing with slide gate height† 10.500 {267} 10.625 {270} 10.875 {276} 12.875 {327} †
Slide gate is optional.
Low profile housing height* N/A 5.688 {144} 5.938 {151} 7.500 {191}
Top mounting bolt holes are threaded. Bottom
Low profile housing with slide gate height† N/A 5.688 {144} 5.938 {151} 7.500 {191} mounting plate is provided with clearance holes
B - Top mounting plate size (sq.) 4 {102} 6 {152} 8 {203} 10 {254} for bolts.
C - Top mounting plate bolt pattern (sq.) 3 {76} 5 {127} 7 {178} 8 {203} Stainless steel housing is equipped with cast
D - Top mounting bolt thread size 3/8-16 1/2-13 steel top and bottom mount-ing flanges.
E - Top material hole diameter 2 {51} 3 {76} 5 {127} 6 {152} Specifications may change without notice.
F - Bottom mounting plate size (sq.) 4 {102} 6 {152} 8 {203} 10 {254} Consult with a Conair representative for the most
G - Bottom mounting plate bolt pattern (sq.) 3 {76} 5 {127} 7 {178} 8 {203} current information.
H - Bottom mounting bolt hole size 7/16 {11} 9/16 {14}

I - Bottom material hole diameter 1.875 {48} 2.875 {73} 4.875 {124} 5.875 {149}
C-1
40#8 ACCESSORIES&),4%2$2!7%2
Screen Access
Made Easy
When only routine maintenance is required to monitor the
condition or clean a vacuum receiver’s screen filter, nothing is
faster than the easy clean Filter Drawer.
This add-on module fits between the lid and body of Conair
DuraLoad Receivers and provides easy screen filter access,
without the need for lid removal. Tool-free twist clamps hold the
drawer in place and once released, allow the drawer to slide
out, exposing the screen disc, nested in the drawer cradle. Once
checked, cleaned or replaced the screen may be easily slid back -ODEL&$ &ILTER$RAWER
into position above the loader body and clamped vacuum tight. on a DL-15 Receiver
Easy, Vacuum Receiver Screen Service
` -AKESCREENACCESSEASIER
The easy clean Filter Drawer is highly
recommended for processors that do
not require frequent material changes,
but need an easy method for checking
their filter screen. Also, for locations
where lid clearance is marginal and /
or where abrasive material conveying
requires frequent screen attention.
Specifications
` %ASYADD ONMODULE
-ODELS &$ &$ &$ &$ The Filter Drawer is easily installed
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} between the receiver body and lid
Nominal diameter 12 {304} 15 {381} 20 {508} 25 {635} with its own twist clamps. It may be
Nominal diameter DL-12 DL-15 DL-20 DL-25 installed and removed quickly with
no tools.
All standard models are constructed of powder coated carbon steel and are suitable for materials up to ` ,OWPROFILE
250°F {121°C}. The Filter Drawer adds only 3.5 inches
Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair representative for the most current information. {89 mm} to the installed height of the
receiver and is offered for popular
Options Conair DuraLoad diameters.
• High temperature models (-HT) for materials up to 350°F {171°C}

• Stainless steel construction (-SS)
C-111
C-112
40#8 RESIN CONVEYING HARDWARE 0%,,"/7®
Eliminates Fines, Streamers

rs
and Tubing Wear from
Resin Conveying
In resin conveying, conventional radius elbows are designed to
“soften” the turn resin must take when changing direction. But
traditional long or short radius bends, create undesirable friction
from the high speed resin, creating heat, abrasion of the resin
and the elbow, streamers and dust.
Now, with stainless steel or aluminum Pellbows, a compact

"pocket" elbow installed in place of conventional bends, resin
no longer rides against the inside wall of a radius elbow, but
efficiently rolls across a collected pocket of resin. The results
are a dramatic decrease in heat, dust, streamers and virtually no
wearing of the elbow.
Compact, Self-Cleaning Pocket Elbow Guides Resin Across Resin
Resin conveying is an efficient, high speed

process that moves pellets quickly to their ` %ASILYREPLACESTRADITIONALELBOWS
destination. But conveying can be self- Pellbows are offered in a wide range of stainless steel tubing diameters to match your
destructive when the resin being moved is system needs perfectly.
abrasive and damaging to bends that must
direct fast-moving resin in another direction. ` -INIMALPRESSUREDROP
Elbows can quickly wear, from the inside Long radius sweeps are not required to keep your resin moving. The smooth operation
out, resulting in lost resin, lost production, of Pellbows allow them to replace any radius sweep with minimal change to conveying.
downtime and costly elbow replacement.
` #OMPACTANDEASYTOINSTALL
Soft material conveying often results in the
Pellbows are measurably more compact than any elbow they will replace. Tubing can be
formation of streamers and dust from the
routed far easier with no need to accommodate cumbersome bends.
same elbows.
Pellbows solve these issues and many more ` #ONVEYANDPURGEWITHCONFIDENCE
by providing a smooth, compact pocket for Resin is efficiently conveyed through the
temporary resin collection. Once filled with Pellbow pocket and is also efficiently purged
resin, the accumulation provides an efficient in systems equipped with line purging
redirection of resin around the bend with no capability.
abrasive contact with the metal bend. This
` #HOOSEALUMINUMORSTAINLESSSTEEL
dynamic resin to resin contact creates no
Choose aluminum construction for soft
heat, and as a result, no resin abrasion, no
streamers and no dust. materials like PE, or stainless steel for harder,
more abrasive resins.
And unlike competitive models, Pellbows
rapidly and totally evacuate resin during purge
cycles, permitting the use of multiple resins
without contamination.
C-113
40#8 RESIN CONVEYING HARDWARE 0%,,"/7®
How it Works
Resin tumbles over

accumulated resin in
the pocket, eliminating
impact and wear
Resin flow
Self-cleaning
resin pocket
!PPLICATION.OTES !LLYOURCONVEYINGSYSTEMNEEDS
Conair supplies the widest range of conveying components for complete plant-wide
Pellbows also available in cast iron and with flanged
inlets and outlets.
installations or single components. Call Conair for:
* Optional abrasion resistance treatment is available • Tubing • Material purge valves
on all sizes of Stainless Steel Pellbows. To order the • Bends • Feed tubes
abrasion resistance option, add a "01" to the end of • Couplers • Take-off (distribution) boxes
the stainless steel part number.
• Flex hose • As well as complete resin conveying systems.
Contact the factory for pricing and information.
• Material shut-off valves
Specifications
!PPLICATIONGUIDE
3TAINLESS
0ELLBOWCONSTRUCTION !LUMINUM
STEEL
'
-ATERIAL
$
HDPE, LDPE, PP, PS z
PET, PC, PVC, Acrylic z
" # Any glass filled z
%
Any mineral filled z
&
Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair
! representative for the most current information.
-ODELS(tube OD in.)

Tube gauge 16 16 16 16 16 11 14 11
0ARTNUMBER
Stainless steel* 26725701 26725702 26725704 26725706 26725708 26725709 26725712 26725713
Aluminum N/A 26725703 26725705 26725707 26725710 26725711 26725714 26725715
A - Tube length 4.00 {100} 4.00 {100} 4.00 {100} 4.00 {100} 4.00 {100} 6.00 {150}
B - Overall length 11.91 {302} 12.87 {327} 13.96 {356} 15.39 {391} 17.67 {449} 21.45 {545}
C - Body width 2.80 {71} 3.66 {93} 4.62 {117} 5.55 {141} 7.14 {181} 8.43 {214}
D - From CL 10.00 {254} 10.50 {267} 11.00 {279} 11.75 {298} 13.00 {330} 16.00 {406}
E - Tube OD 1.50 {40} 2.00 {50} 2.50 {65} 3.00 {75} 4.00 {100} 5.00 {125}
F - Tube ID 1.37 {35} 1.87 {47} 2.37 {60} 2.87 {73} 3.87 {98} 3.76 {96} 4.83 {123} 4.76 {197}
G - Overall length 11.22 {285} 12.01 {305} 12.98 {330} 14.04 {357} 15.94 {405} 19.53 {497}
!PPROXIMATEINSTALLEDWEIGHTlb {kg}
Stainless steel 5 {2} 7 {3} 9 {4} 15 {7} 28 {13} 40 {18}
Aluminum N/A 3 {1} 6 {3} 11 {5} 18 {8}
C-114
Drying
Sttor
orage
MicroWheel Dehumidifying Dryers

-7-ODELS-7AND-7 $
Carousel Plus Dryers

C nveyin
Co y g -$#7-ODELSAND $
7-ODELSAND $
-$#7-ODELSAND $
7-ODELSAND $
7-ODELSn $
EnergySmart® Drying System

%NERGY3MART®WITH4OUCH6IEW4-7-ODELS $
Drying Monitor
$- ))-ODEL $
Drrying $- I-ODEL $
Hopper Temperature Controllers

(0(EATER0ACK $
(4#-ODELS( ( $
Blend
nding/Feeedin
i g
in Gas Process Air Heater
'AS4RAC#'4-ODELSAND $
Hot Air Dryers

(!$-ODELS $
Heat Trransfer
Drying Hoppers
#(3ERIES)NSULATED(OPPER $
$(3ERIES)NSULATED(OPPERS $
Central Drying System

2ESIN7ORKS $
Size Reedu
Si d ction
Compressed Air Dryer

3LIM,INE4- $
Crystallizer
Upstream
m #23ERIES#RYSTALLIZERS $
Do
own
w st
stream
Drying Quick Reference
-ODELS 4EMPERATURE2ANGE°&[°#] $EWPOINT .OMINAL4HROUGHPUT2ANGELBSHR

-ICRO7HEEL$EHUMIDIFYING$RYERS (ZOR(Z
-7 FTLB TO[TO] °& n
-OBILE$RYING#ONVEYING (Z (Z

-$#7 TO[TO] °&
-$#7 TO[TO] °&
-$#7 TO[TO] °&
-$#7 TO[TO] °&
-$#7 TO[TO] °&
-$#7 TO[TO] °&
-$#7 TO[TO] °&
%LECTRIC$EHUMIDIFYING$RYERS (Z (Z

7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
7 TO[TO] °&
#OMPRESSED!IR$RYERS (ZOR(Z
3, TO TO °&
TO
3, TO TO °&
TO
3, TO TO °&
TO
3, TO TO °&
TO
3, TO TO °&
TO
* with optional membrane
(OT!IR$RYER(!$ (ZOR(Z
(!$ TO[TO] !MBIENT UPTO
Drying Quick Reference
-ODELS
(0(EATER0ACK(0 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
(0 #ONAIRS(EATER0ACK
(0 PROVIDESDIRECTHEATATTHE
(0 BOTTOMOFTHEHOPPER
(0 4HISTABLESHOWSTHE(0
(0 MATCHEDWITHANAPPROPRI
(0 ATELYSIZED#ENTRAL$RYER
(0
'AS4RAC0ROCESS!IR(EATER 4HE'AS4RACCONVERTS 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
#'4 ELECTRICDRYERSTOGAS
#'4 FUELS4HISTABLESHOWS
#'4 'AS4RACSMATCHEDWITH
#'4 ANAPPROPRIATELYSIZED
#'4 #ENTRAL$RYER
#APACITY2ANGELB LBFT

-ODELS 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 9500 12000 17000
$RYING(OPPERS
#(THROUGH#(MODELSMAX
#(THROUGH#(MODELS
$(THROUGH$(MODELS
(15,750 through
#(
31,500)
TPDX038-0317 MICROWHEEL DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS -7-/$%,3-7!.$-7
The Ultimate Compact,

Clean Desiccant Wheel
Drying Solution
Conair’s MicroWheel dryer is the perfect solution for processes
that don’t need the capacity of a large dryer and hopper, but still
need the efficiency and reliability of Conair’s desiccant wheel
drying technology.
As the smallest and most compact dryer of its type on the
market today, Conair now offers this perfect option for
applications requiring a small and efficient dryer/hopper
combination. Designed with the medical industry in mind, this
dryer features stainless construction, clean operation, and a
compact footprint.
-ODEL-7
New Wheel Drying Technology in a Micro Package
Previously, small drying jobs would require a

dryer and hopper that were oversized for the ` !PPLICATIONFLEXIBILITYLESSDUSTENERGY EFFICIENT
processing machine, using excess energy Designed for flexibility, the MicroWheel can be used with a large variety of materials,
and wasting material or hopper space. Some with a delivery air temperature range of 131 - 356°F {55 - 180° C}. The delivery air
blower automatically adjusts airflow based on application throughput, which saves
small drying solutions were previously offered
energy and makes drying more efficient. In addition to being more energy-efficient than
only with twin-tower drying or compressed compressed air and twin-tower dryers, the MicroWheel does not create the dust that
air. Conair’s continued success with reliable twin-tower desiccant beads produce. This makes the MicroWheel perfect for medical
desiccant wheel drying led to this new, better and applications that require clean operation.
solution. In comparison with twin-tower
` %ASYSETUPWITHBUILT INMATERIALDATABASE
drying, the MicroWheel dryer can provide 40%
Changing from one mold or production setup to another is quick and easy. The
energy savings. MicroWheel has a built-in material database. Simply select the material type from the
The MicroWheel dryer features a four-stage list, set your desired rate, and the dryer performs all the necessary calculations for
circuit for lower and adjustable dewpoint. optimum dryer settings. In addition to the up to 30 pre-set materials, user material
settings can be saved as well.
Each dryer can be configured with a hopper
sized to best fit your application. The MW1 ` "UILT ININTELLIGENCETOPROTECTYOURMATERIAL
models are available with 0.2 - 1.0 ft3 {6 - 30 l} All MicroWheel dryers now come programmed with Smart Mode, which protects your
hoppers. The MW2 models are available with material and drying process. When activated, Smart Mode automatically adjusts the
1.0 - 1.75 ft3 {30 - 60 l} hoppers. process air flow to protect resin from over drying, and to increase drying efficiency.
This is accomplished by maintaining a constant delta temperature for the return air
temperature. It’s like cruise control for your dryer.
` %ASYTOMAINTAIN
The MW Series requires no cooling water or compressed air. Gaining access to the
interior of the dryer is quick. Filters are easily maintained and the reliable gear drive of
the desiccant rotor is maintenance free.
D-1
Which Package is Right for You?

3TANDARD0ACKAGES "ASE 0LUS
#ONTROL&EATURES
Built-in material database y y
Smart Mode y y
Red LED alarm light y y
Remote control kit y y
Dewpoint sensor kit y
!VAILABLE/PTIONS
Loader adapter y y
Network connection kit y y
Weekly timer kit y y
Filter check kit y y -ED,INE® configuration also avAILABLE
Drain port/throat adapter y y
Feature Descriptions
!DVANCED$RYING#ONTROL $ESSICANT7HEEL )NSIDETHE#ABINET
• "UILT INMATERIALDATABASEFOREASY • 0ROVENDESICCANTWHEELOPERATION • Single-phase electrical connection

OPERATION The cleanest, most efficient drying • No water or compressed air required
x Select the material from list medium used today. Continuous wheel
x Set the required rate rotation provides uniform, spike-free • Compact hopper-mounted package
x Dryer performs all calculations drying that is easily monitored • Clean, efficient operation
necessary • 'EARDRIVEN • Easy access for maintenance
• User settings can be easily saved No belt, no chain. • Designed for precision molders and
• 3MART-ODE • Full process, regeneration, and cooling medical production
x Adjusts the process air flow stages
x Protects resin from overdrying • Dust-free, bead-free honeycomb desiccant
x Increases drying efficiency media
x Maintains a constant delta temperature
• -INIMALAIRFLOWREQUIRED
• %ASILYVIEW Air flow is automatically adjusted to match
x Drying temperature throughput requirements.
x Dewpoint
• Highly energy efficient
x Airflow
x Operation status • Quiet
• Red LED alarm light
• Remote control kit !VAILABLE/PTIONS • ,OADERADAPTER
An adaptor for Conair TLM or TLR Tube
• $EWPOINTSENSORKITAVAILABLEONLYWITHTHE
Loaders.
0LUS0ACKAGE
A dewpoint sensor that provides the • .ETWORKCONNECTIONKIT
RS485 Modbus serial is available for
operator with the actual dewpoint of the
communications.
process air.
• 7EEKLYTIMERKIT
Set a timer for auto start/stop of dryer.
• &ILTERCHECKKIT
Keep an eye on your process air filter.
• $RAINPORTTHROATADAPTER
A stainless steel mounting base is available
$RAINPORTTHROATADAPTER with drain port and purge port.
D-2
Throughputs
The following chart shows the throughput range for various material types that are pre-programmed into the dryer control.
-ATERIAL "ULKDENSITY 2ESIDENCETIME 4EMPERATURE $EWPOINT -7 -7

LBHR[KGHR] LBHR[KGHR] LBHR[KGHR] LBHR[KGHR]
2ECIPECODE LBFT[+GDM] (OURS &[#] &[#]
MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM
AS Mold 37.5 {0.60} 3 176 {80} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 12.5 {5.6} 11.0 {5} 21.9 {9.9}
ABS ext 37.5 {0.60} 3.5 185 {85} -40 {-40} 2.4 {1.1} 10.7 {4.9} 8.8 {4} 18.8 {8.5}
ABS / PC 40.6 {0.65} 3 212 {100} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 13.5 {6.1} 11.0 {5} 23.7 {10.8}
ASA 31.2 {0.50} 3 194 {90} -40 {-40} 2.4 {1.1} 10.4 {4.7} 11.0 {5} 18.2 {8.3}
CA 31.2 {0.50} 2.5 158 {70} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 12.5 {5.6} 8.8 {4} 21.8 {9.9}
CAB 31.2 {0.50} 2.5 158 {70} -40 {-40} 2.0 {0.9} 12.5 {5.6} 8.8 {4} 21.8 {9.9}
CP 37.5 {0.60} 4 167 {75} -40 {-40} 2.0 {0.9} 9.4 {4.3} 8.8 {4} 16.4 {7.4}
EVA 37.5 {0.60} 3 176 {80} -40 {-40} 1.8 {0.8} 12.5 {5.6} 6.6 {3} 21.9 {9.9}
EPDM 32.5 {0.52} 4 176 {80} -40 {-40} 1.8 {0.8} 8.1 {3.7} 6.6 {3} 14.2 {6.4}
LCP 37.5 {0.60} 4 302 {150} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 9.4 {4.3} 11.0 {5} 16.4 {7.4}
PA 6 40.6 {0.65} 5 167 {75} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 8.1 {3.7} 8.8 {4} 14.2 {6.4}
PA 66 40.6 {0.65} 5 176 {80} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 8.1 {3.7} 8.8 {4} 14.2 {6.4}
PA 66 + 35FV 53.1 {0.85} 5 176 {80} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 10.6 {4.8} 11.0 {5} 18.6 {8.4}
PA 12 40.6 {0.65} 3 167 {75} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 13.5 {6.1} 8.8 {4} 23.7 {10.8}
PA 11 40.6 {0.65} 5 167 {75} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 8.1 {3.7} 8.8 {4} 14.2 {6.4}
PC 43.7 {0.70} 3 248 {120} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 14.6 {6.6} 11.0 {5} 25.5 {11.6}
PC for CD 43.7 {0.70} 4 248 {120} -40 {-40} 1.8 {0.8} 10.9 {4.9} 6.6 {3} 19.1 {8.7}
PC + PBT 43.7 {0.70} 3.5 230 {110} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 12.5 {5.6} 8.8 {4} 21.9 {9.9}
PE 37.5 {0.60} 3 194 {90} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 12.5 {5.6} 11.0 {5} 21.9 {9.9}
PE (40% n.f) 37.5 {0.60} 5 185 {85} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 7.5 {3.4} 8.8 {4} 13.1 {5.9}
PEEK 37.5 {0.60} 4 311 {155} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 9.4 {4.3} 11.0 {5} 16.4 {7.4}
PEI 37.5 {0.60} 4.5 311 {155} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 8.3 {3.8} 11.0 {5} 14.6 {6.6}
PEN 53.1 {0.85} 5 338 {170} -40 {-40} 2.0 {0.9} 10.6 {4.8} 6.6 {3} 18.6 {8.4}
PES 43.7 {0.70} 4 311 {155} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 10.9 {4.9} 11.0 {5} 19.1 {8.7}
PES 43.7 {0.70} 4 356 {180} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 10.9 {4.9} 8.8 {4} 19.1 {8.7}
PET 53.1 {0.85} 4 266 {130} -40 {-40} 2.4 {1.1} 13.3 {6.0} 8.8 {4} 23.2 {10.5}
PET ext 53.1 {0.85} 6 338 {170} -40 {-40} 1.8 {0.8} 8.9 {4.0} 6.6 {3} 15.5 {7.0}
PETG 37.5 {0.60} 4.5 149 {65} -40 {-40} 2.0 {0.9} 8.3 {3.8} 8.8 {4} 14.6 {6.6}
PBT 43.7 {0.70} 3.5 257 {125} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 12.5 {5.6} 11.0 {5} 21.9 {9.9}
PI 37.5 {0.60} 2.5 248 {120} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 15.0 {6.8} 11.0 {5} 26.3 {11.9}
PMMA 40.6 {0.65} 4 176 {80} -40 {-40} 2.4 {1.1} 10.2 {4.6} 8.8 {4} 17.8 {8.1}
POM 37.5 {0.60} 3 212 {100} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 12.5 {5.6} 11.0 {5} 21.9 {9.9}
PP 31.2 {0.50} 2.5 194 {90} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 12.5 {5.6} 11.0 {5} 21.9 {9.9}
PP ext 31.2 {0.50} 2 212 {100} -40 {-40} 3.1 {1.4} 15.6 {7.1} 13.2 {6} 27.3 {12.4}
PP GF20 39.3 {0.63} 3 194 {90} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 13.1 {5.9} 11.0 {5} 22.9 {10.4}
PP GF30 42.5 {0.68} 3 194 {90} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 14.2 {6.4} 11.0 {5} 24.8 {11.2}
PP (40% t.) 37.5 {0.60} 2.5 194 {90} -40 {-40} 2.2 {1.0} 15.0 {6.8} 8.8 {4} 26.3 {11.9}
PPO 31.2 {0.50} 2.5 221 {105} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 12.5 {5.6} 11.0 {5} 21.8 {9.9}
PPS 37.5 {0.60} 3.5 284 {140} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 10.7 {4.9} 11.0 {5} 18.8 {8.5}
PS 34.3 {0.55} 2 176 {80} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 17.2 {7.8} 11.0 {5} 30.0 {13.6}
PSU 40.6 {0.65} 3.5 275 {135} -40 {-40} 2.6 {1.2} 11.6 {5.3} 11.0 {5} 20.3 {9.2}
PSU GF20 52.4 {0.84} 3 302 {150} -40 {-40} 1.8 {0.8} 17.5 {7.9} 6.6 {3} 30.6 {13.9}
PUR 43.7 {0.70} 3 185 {85} -40 {-40} 2.4 {1.1} 14.6 {6.6} 8.8 {4} 25.5 {11.6}
PVC 49.9 {0.80} 1.5 158 {70} -40 {-40} 4.0 {1.8} 33.3 {15.1} 15.4 {7} 58.2 {26.4}
SAN 31.2 {0.50} 2.5 176 {80} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 12.5 {5.6} 11.0 {5} 21.8 {9.9}
SB 37.5 {0.60} 2 176 {80} -40 {-40} 2.8 {1.3} 18.8 {8.5} 11.0 {5} 32.8 {14.9}
TPE 40.6 {0.65} 3 230 {110} -40 {-40} 2.0 {0.9} 13.5 {6.1} 8.8 {4} 23.7 {10.8}
TPU 40.6 {0.65} 3 194 {90} -40 {-40} 2.4 {1.1} 13.5 {6.1} 8.8 {4} 23.7 {10.8}
4HROUGHPUT.OTES
Information contained in this throughput table is for reference purposes only. Throughputs will vary based on application. Always consult with your Conair Sales Representative
for proper sizing for your application.
*Specifications can be found on the following page.
D-3
Specifications
-
(OPPERTOPFLANGE
IN[MM]
" DIAMETER
# $
& ' (
-ODEL-7 front-left view -ODEL-7 front-right view (OPPERBOTTOMFLANGE
-ODELS -7 -7 -7 -7 -7
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS(with full hopper)
Drying temperature* F {C} 131 - 356 {55 - 180} 131 - 320 {55 - 160}
Dewpoint† F {C} -40 {-40}
Maximum airflow‡ ft3/min {m3/hr} 8.2 {14.0} 14.7 {25.0}
A - Overall height 19.5 {495} 24.6 {626} 27.7 {704} 38.5 {978}
B - Overall width 18.3 {465} 20.6 {524} 25.1 {637} 28.8 {732}
C - Depth of dryer 17.7 {450} 25.8 {655}
D - Overall depth (including filter) 20.7 {526} 21.6 {549} 23.9 {607} 26.8 {681}
Hopper capacity ft3 {liter} 0.21 {6.0} 0.53 {15.0} 1.06 {30.0} 1.77 {50.0}
Air hose diameter 1.5 {38}
E - Hopper top flange diameter 5.1 {130} 7.1 {180} 11.0 {280}
F - Hopper bottom flange width 5.9 {150} 7.9 {200}
G - Hopper bottom flange mounting pattern 4.9 {125} 6.5 {165}
H - Hopper bottom flange outlet diameter 2 {50} 2.4 {60}
Standard installed (hopper empty) 77 {35} 82 {37} 106 {48} 133 {60} 144 {65}
6OLTAGE Full load amps** (Standard/long conveying distance)
220V/1 phase/50hz or 60hz 4.5 9.5
* Drying temperature setpoint is set by the user, depending on the material type and the application.
†
Energy usage and calculations are based on a dewpoint of -40F {-40C}.
‡
Airflow range is calculated by the control, based on application.
** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the most current information.
D-4
TPDX020-0317 CAROUSEL PLUS MOBILE DRYING AND CONVEYING -$#7-/$%,3!.$
The Next Generation in

Mobile Cart Dryers
Mobile Drying and Conveying systems eliminate the need for
machine-mounted hoppers by placing all components on a safe,
convenient cart.
Set-up, pre-drying, clean-out and maintenance can all take
place without tying up valuable process machine time, or
climbing on the machine.
The MDCW system integrates an efficient Carousel Plus Dryer
with a conveying blower, dust collector and direct-feed vacuum
receiver to convey with dry air to the throat of a processing
machine. The self-loading option adds an integral hopper loader
which allows the MDCW to load itself. If you don’t need dry-air
conveying, order a non-dry air conveying MDCW with a dryer
and hopper, and add a self-contained vacuum loader.
-ODEL-$#7
Proven Mobile Performance for Low Throughputs Up to 100 lbs/hr
These Carousel Plus MDCW models are small

enough to be used beside the machine. ` 3IMPLETOUSEADVANCEDTOUCHSCREENCONTROL
The DC-A control on the MDCW dryers makes controlling your mobile drying and
MDCW units feature true closed-loop drying conveying easier than ever. The touchscreen control has descriptive help screens for
and conveying technology to eliminate operators and features detailed trending screens, auto start capabilities, password
moisture that can cause defects in parts. You protection and has Conair’s excellent Drying Monitor capabilities built into the control
can dry at temperatures up to 375°F {191°C} (requires the appropriate hardware).
and at through put rates of 10 to more than
100 pounds per hour {4.3 to 45.4 kg/hr}. ` #LOSED LOOPDRYINGCONVEYING
Each unit provides drying temperatures up to 375°F {191°C}, automatic desiccant
The Carousel Plus Dryers use molecular sieve regeneration and dewpoints of -40°F {-40°C}.
desiccant that is bonded into a fiberglass
substrate and formed into a continuously ` .O DOWNTIMEMATERIALCHANGES
rotating wheel. The result is rock steady With a spare MDCW system, material changes are fast. Roll one unit to the processing
machine, while another heats and pre-dries material for the next run.
drying temperatures and dewpoint levels,
critical for processing moisture and ` -AXIMUMUPTIMEMAXIMUMRELIABILITY
temperature sensitive material. With significantly reduced part count, easy access and less wear, you can expect many
years of trouble-free operation. The weight of the desiccant assembly has been reduced
The thermo-formed, impact resistant ABS
by 70%, the part count reduced by 90%, there are no more indexing bed plates, no
cover adds to the good looks and space-
more cumbersome 4-way valves and no more messy desiccant beads.
saving design of the Carousel Plus Dryers.
` 0RECISEADJUSTABLEDEWPOINTCONTROL
The dewpoint control option built into the control system allows you to select a
particular dewpoint value, onto which the control locks. The control then adjusts various
dryer functions to precisely hold the dewpoint selected, virtually eliminating any chance
of overdrying expensive material.
D-5
How it Works The Benefits

The core of the Carousel Plus Dryer is the Munters® unique fluted • The high airflow across the rotor surface area produces a resin-
desiccant rotor, which is made of molecular sieve desiccant. The drying low dewpoint within five minutes of start-up and offers multi-
molecular sieve has been grown into the rotor’s porous fiberglass year media life with virtually no maintenance.
substrate, preventing desiccant break down and dusting over time. • The continuously revolving rotor provides rock steady temperature
The desiccant rotor revolves slowly at the rate of 12 revolutions per and dewpoint control.
hour passing through three cycles with each revolution. • The rotor technology minimizes energy consumption by reducing
the structural mass. Less structural mass to heat means less energy
Regeneration Regen. wasted.
Return Air Fiter
Blower
Ambient Air
01
Process Regen. The dry air is dehumidified in the adsorption cycle, capturing and removing
Heater Heater
moisture from the drying air stream.
01
Desiccant 02 02
Wheel
The desiccant passes into the high temperature regeneration cycle; absorbed
moisture is heated and purged out of the desiccant to the atmosphere.
03
Return Air Aftercooler
Filter 03
Process
Blower The desiccant is then advanced to the post regeneration cooling cycle and
cooled with closed loop dry air. This unique closed loop cooling technology
eliminating moisture that can cause defects in parts.
Features and Options

-ODEL -$#7-ODELS &EATURE$ESCRIPTIONS
3TANDARD z 3TANDARD • !UDIBLEANDVISUALALARM - A combination of a blinking red alarm light and a
Audible and visual alarms z | /PTION horn alert the operator to any shut down alarm.
Temperature setback z • 4EMPERATURESETBACK - Automatically reduces the drying temperature to a
Dewpoint monitor z lower standby mode when the machine throughput is reduced or stopped.
Dewpoint control z
• $EWPOINTMONITOR- Monitor the performance of the dryer with a digital
Aftercooler z dewpoint readout of the drying air.
/PTIONS
• $EWPOINTCONTROL- Allows the dryer to maintain an operator-selected
Volatile trap |
dewpoint level. This feature helps prevent overdrying of moisture sensitive
Precooler | materials such as Nylon.
Process filter check |
• #OMMUNICATIONS - Allows the dryer to be networked to industrial control
Communications |
systems. When a dryer is connected to a network, the controller on the
Drying Monitor | net-work may read actual temperatures, change setpoints, read dryer status,
Dry air conveying | and process and display this information at a central location. Ethernet
Hopper loading (+ ratio) | communications are available.
Aftercooler flow control |
$RYING-ONITOR
Save time and money from the aggravation of improperly dried material.
The Drying Monitor automatically monitors the heat profile inside your drying hopper with a 6-zone temperature probe, to protect
resin from over or under-drying. A control alarm and a light tower alert if proper drying is in jeopardy. Advanced notice provides
time to correct issues instead of wasted drying and product defects from common issues like: failed or out-of-place process
temperature probe, an improperly sized hopper or dryer for the application, lack of resin or loading equipment failure, reduced
airflow from dirty filters, linked hoses and other obstructions, unplanned throughput change and loss of power.
Your DC-A control will alarm on most dryer-related problems, but the Drying Monitor goes further to report proper drying happening
inside the drying hopper. !VAILABLEONMODELS-$#7ANDABOVE
D-6
$# !#ONTROL&EATURES
• 7-inch color touchscreen
• Trending (dewpoint, temperature, heater on-time)
• Auto Start
• Allen-Bradley micro 850 PLC
• Easily switch between english/metric units
• Password protected
• Temperature Setback (manual and auto)
• Energy usage meter
3IMPLEHOMESCREEN • Easy, familiar Loader Control
%ASYDRYERSETUP $RYERSETTINGSWITHGRAPHICAID 4RENDFUNCTIONS TRACKRESINDRYING
2ECOMMENDED4HROUGHPUTS(ZCHART
&OR(Z!PPLICATION2EDUCE2ATESBY
$RYING $RYING )NITIAL "ULK -ODEL4HROUGHPUT2ATEeLBHR
-ATERIAL
4EMP&[#] 4IME(R† -OISTURE $ENSITYp 7
7
7
7
7
ABS 180-190 {82-88} 4 0.40 40 {0.64} 15 25 50 75 100

Acetal 180-230 {82-110} 4 0.60 40 {0.64} 13 19 37 55 75
Acrylic 170-180 {77-82} 4 0.30 40 {0.64} 17 29 59 86 116
Nylon 160-180 {71-82} 6 0.40 40 {0.64} 16 27 54 80 108
PBT 210-260 {99-127} 4 0.30 45 {0.72} 17 28 56 83 112
PC 250 {121} 4 0.30 40 {0.64} 16 26 52 77 104
PE (HD/LP) w/40% black 170 {77} 5 - 26-34 {0.42-0.54} 15 25 50 75 100
PET virgin bottle grade 300-350 {144-177} 6 0.30 50 {0.80} 15 25 50 75 100
PETG 140-150 {60-66} 6 0.30 50 {0.80} 16 27 54 80 108
Polysulfone 200-275 {93-135} 4 0.50 50 {0.80} 8 16 32 46 62
Polyurethane 180-210 {82-99} 4 0.50 40 {0.64} 9 17 35 51 70
SAN 160-180 {71-82} 2-4 0.30 45 {0.72} 20 31 63 94 125
3ELECTTHERIGHTDRYERFORYOURAPPLICATION !PPLICATION.OTES
)DENTIFYTHERESINANDTHROUGHPUTRATE Use * Material throughputs are based on typical virgin material with initial moisture content as supplied by the material
the chart to quickly select the correct dryer suppliers. Consult Conair if specific initial and final moisture content of your material are known for your
application.
model for your throughput rate.
†
The parameters of drying temperature and time may vary depending upon the type, grade and manufacturer of the
-ULTIPLYTHESUGGESTEDDRYINGTIMEBY material being processed. Consult your material supplier for their precise recommendations.
YOURTHROUGHPUTRATETODETERMINETHE ‡
Unit of measurement for bulk density is lb/ft3 {g/cm3}. Bulk density listed is the nominal weight for typical pellets.
HOPPERSIZE Refer to Conair drying hopper The bulk density may vary somewhat depending upon the size and shape of the pellets. The bulk density of
specifications, or contact a Conair representative regrind may vary widely depending upon the size and the shape of the flake. Be sure to consider the bulk density
to determine the correct hopper for your of the material when selecting and the drying time desired.
application. §
Throughputs will vary by type of material. Consult Conair concerning throughputs for materials that are not listed
here.
3ELECTTHEDRYERMODELANDOPTIONSTOSUIT
YOURAPPLICATION ** All Conair Dryers are equipped with an intercooler as standard. The intercooler reduces the temperature of the
return air from the drying hopper, improving the efficiency of the desiccant. The aftercooler should be connected
Carousel Plus models can be used for individual with the proper water flow rating and temperature to attain the listed throughput.
station or central drying applications.
D-7
Specifications
4,24UBE,OADER(machine loader) 4,24UBE,OADER(hopper loader)
Outlet diameter 2 in. {5.1 cm)
inlet diameter
1.5 in. {3.8 cm)
)
(
! #
'
%
& % Receiver diameter
4.5 in. {11.4 cm}
& Height with
viewing chamber ' Receiver diameter
1 lb. {0.45 kg} 4.5 in. {11.4 cm}
22 in. {55.9 cm} ) Overall height
2 lb. {0.91 kg} 17.5 in {44.5 cm}
$ " ( Height above mounting plate
27 in. { 68.6 cm}
% 13.5 in {34.3 cm}
-ODELS -$#7 -$#7 -$#7 -$#7 -$#7 ,OADER"ASE0LATES

Standard hopper models 27( 27( 27( 27( 27( 1.625 in. dia.
{4.1 cm}
Optional hopper models .! 27( .! 27( 27( through hole
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS(with full hopper) 4 in.
{10.2 mm}
Drying temperature 150° - 375°F {66 - 191°C} with options
Dewpoint -40°F {-40°C} 4 in.
Standard conveying distance 8 ft {2.44 m} vertical; 6 ft {1.83 m} horizontal {10.2 cm}
1.625 in. dia.
Long distance conveying option 15 ft {4.57 m} vertical; 50 ft {15.24 m} horizontal {4.1 cm}
through hole
6 in.
A - Height top of conveying pipe 81.9 {208.0} 90.3 {229.4} {15.2 cm}
B - Overall width 30.8 {78.2} 43.2 {109.7}
C - Height to top of hopper (standard) 60.9 {154.7} 74.2 {188.5} 91.1 {231.4} 85.5 {217.2} 93.5 {237.5}
6 in.
C - Height to top of hopper (optional) N/A 81.9 {208.0} N/A 93.5 {237.5} 117.4 {298.2} {15.2 cm}
D - Depth 45.9 {116.6} 59.0 {149.9}
E - Overall depth 53.5 {139.9} 60.8 {154.4} !PPLICATION.OTES
Drying outlet/inlet tube size OD 2.5 {6.35} All dryers are supplied with an aftercooler as standard.
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlbs {kg} The aftercooler reduces the temperature of the return
Standard dryer installed 500 {227} 550 {250} 600 {272} 675 {306} 750 {340} air from the drying hopper, improving the efficiency
of the desiccant.The aftercooler should be connected
Standard dryer shipping 695 {315} 700 {318} 790 {358} 815 {370} 950 {431} with the proper water flow rate and temperature to
6OLTAGE Full load amps** (standard/long conveying distance) attain the optimal throughput.
208 V/3 phase/60 Hz 17.0/21.0 21.9/25.9 28.4/32.4 N/A 7HENTOUSEADDITIONALFILTRATION
230 V/3 phase/60 Hz 15.3/18.9 19.8/23.4 25.6/29.2 26.8/30.4 The standard return air cartridge filter is sized for the
airflow of each dryer model and is suited for most
400 V/3 phase/50 Hz* 8.6/9.7 11.1/12.2 14.4/15.5 14.6/15.7
applications. You should consider adding an optional
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 7.6/9.4 9.8/11.6 12.7/14.5 13.3/15.1 dust collector and/or volatile trap if:
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 6.0/7.6 7.8/9.4 10.1/11.7 10.6/12.2 • The material contains excessive fines. An additional
4OTALKILOWATTSo kW (std./long) 4.1/5.0 5.3/6.2 6.1/7.0 6.4/7.3 dust collector or cyclone will extend time between
7ATERREQUIREMENTS(for aftercooler or optional precooler)‡ filter cleaning.
Recommended temperature§ 45° - 85°F {7.2° - 29.4°C} • The material produces volatiles during drying which
condense into a waxy or oily residue. A volatile trap
Water flow gal./min. {liters/min.} 1 {4.6} 2 {9.1} will help to protect the desiccant.
Water connections NPT 3/4 inch NPT
* Dryers running at 50 Hz will have 17% less airflow, and a 17% reduction in ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
material throughput. on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines
† and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the
Total kW listed at a process setpoint of 250°F {121°C} and a regeneration
temperature of 350°F {177°C}.
‡ Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the
When drying below 150°F {66°C} a precooler is required.
§
Temperatures above or below the recommended levels may affect dryer
performance. Tower, chiller, or municipal water sources can be used.
D-8
TPDX017-0317 CAROUSEL PLUS DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS7-/$%,3!.$
Touchscreen Technology
in a Compact Wheel Dryer
Now with a 7-inch DC-A touchscreen control, Conair’s smallest
Carousel Dryers just got better! Dubbed the Carousel Plus,
everything about this dryer is improved to help you stay
profitable in a dramatically more competitive world market. The
product improvements are an extension of the legacy of the
original, workhorse Carousel desiccant dryers.
Purchase this dryer and you will find that you have more control
over drying dewpoint and temperature than ever before, in a
package that is simpler, smaller, lighter, more energy efficient, easier
to use and maintain than any other dryer on the market today.
-ODEL7
Compact Dryer, Big Performance

These dryers are small enough to be used
beside the machine with a mating hopper, yet ` 2EDUCEDENERGYCOSTS
powerful enough for small multiple hopper The desiccant wheel heats and cools more easily than other drying technology saving
you up to 35% on your energy bill. Fewer parts, lighter structural mass, less to heat,
systems as well.
therefore less wasted energy. Easily view power consumption on the DC-A control’s
The Carousel Plus Dryers use molecular "Energy Usage Meter".
sieve desiccant that is bonded onto a
fiberglass substrate and formed into a ` -AXIMUMUPTIMEMAXIMUMRELIABILITY
With significantly reduced part count, easy access and less wear you can expect
continuously rotating wheel. The result is rock
many years of trouble-free operation. The weight of the desiccant assembly has been
steady drying temperatures and dewpoint reduced by 70%, the part count reduced by 90%. There are no more indexing bed
levels, critical for processing moisture and plates, no more cumbersome 4-way valves and no more messy desiccant beads.
temperature sensitive material. Shift-after-shift this dryer will deliver the performance you need to stay up
and running.
This range of dryer models are capable of
delivering nominal throughput rates ranging ` 0RECISEADJUSTABLEDEWPOINTCONTROL
from 10 to more than 100 lb/hr The dewpoint control option built into the microprocessor control system allows
{4.5 to 45.4 kg/hr}. you to select a particular dewpoint value, which the control locks maintains.
The control then adjusts various dryer functions to precisely hold the dewpoint
The thermo-formed, impact resistant ABS selected, virtually eliminating any chance of overdrying expensive material.
cover adds to the good looks and space-
saving design of the Carousel Plus Dryers. ` !DVANCEDTOUCHSCREENCONTROL
Mobile Drying and Conveying (MDCW) uses The 7-inch DC-A control features trending, auto-start, password protection, manual
the same drying technology. Refer to the and auto temperature setback and an energy usage meter.
MDCW spec sheets for more information.
D-9

desiccant rotor, which is made of molecular sieve desiccant. The drying low dewpoint within 5 minutes of start-up and offers multi-
molecular sieve has been grown onto the rotor’s porous fiberglass year media life with virtually no maintenance.
substrate, preventing desiccant break down and dusting over time.
• The continuously revolving rotor provides rock steady temperature
The desiccant rotor revolves slowly at the rate of 12 revolutions per
and dewpoint control.
hour, passing through three cycles with each revolution.
Regeneration Regen. • The rotor technology minimizes energy consumption by reducing the
Return Air Fiter
Blower structural mass. Less structural mass to heat means less energy wasted.
Ambient Air
Process Regen. 01

Heater Heater 02
The dry air is dehumidified in the adsorption cycle, capturing and removing
01 moisture from the drying air stream.
Desiccant
Wheel
02
03 The desiccant passes into the high temperature regeneration cycle. Absorbed
Return Air Aftercooler moisture is heated and purged out of the desiccant to the atmosphere.
Filter
Process 03
Blower
The desiccant is then advanced to the post-regeneration cooling cycle and
eliminates moisture that can cause defects in parts.
-ODEL 7$RYERS &EATURE$ESCRIPTIONS

3TANDARD&EATURES z 3TANDARD • !UDIBLEANDVISUALALARM
Audible and visual alarms z
| /PTION A combination of a blinking red alarm light and a horn alert the
Temperature setback z
operator to any shut down alarm.
Dewpoint monitor z
Dewpoint control z • 4EMPERATURESETBACK
Aftercooler z Automatically reduces the drying temperature to a lower stand
!VAILABLE/PTIONS by mode when the machine throughput is reduced or stopped.
Volatile trap | Processors using resins prone to degradation due to overdrying
Precooler | could greatly benefit from the temperature setback feature.
Communications | • $EWPOINTMONITOR
Drying Monitor | Monitor the performance of the dryer with a digital dewpoint
Aftercooler flow control | readout of the drying air.
$RYING-ONITOR • $EWPOINTCONTROL
Allows the dryer to maintain and control an operator-selected
dewpoint level. This feature helps prevent overdrying of
The Drying Monitor automatically monitors the heat profile inside your drying hopper with a 6-zone
moisture sensitive materials such as Nylon. Location and
temperature probe, to protect resin from over or under-drying. A control alarm and a light tower
season changes can drastically change the atmospheric
alert if proper drying is in jeopardy. Advanced notice provides time to correct issues instead of
wasted drying and product defects from common issues like: dewpoint of the air used for drying. Dewpoint control is used
to increase or decrease the regeneration temperature as
• Failed or out-of-place process temperature probe,
needed depending on atmospheric conditions. This type of
• Improperly sized hopper or dryer or unplanned change of rate,
control saves energy costs and increases end-product quality.
• Lack of resin or loading equipment failure,
• Reduced airflow through filters, kinked hoses or obstructions, • #OMMUNICATIONS
• Loss of power. Allows the dryer to be networked to industrial control systems.
Your DC-A control will alarm on most dryer-related problems, but the Drying Monitor goes further to When a dryer is connected to a network the controller on the
report proper drying happening inside the drying hopper. network may read actual temperatures, change setpoints, read

!VAILABLEONDRYERMODELS7ANDLARGER dryer status, and process and display this information at a
central location. Ethernet communications are available.
D-10
DC-A Control Features

• Auto Start
• English/metric units
• Energy Usage Meter
3IMPLEHOMESCREEN
%ASYDRYERSETUP $RYERSETTINGSWITHGRAPHICAID 4RENDFUNCTIONS TRACKRESINDRYING
$RYING $RYING )NITIAL -ODEL4HROUGHPUT2ATEe,B(R
-ATERIAL "ULK$ENSITYp
4EMP&[#] 4IME(R† -OISTURE 7
7
7
7
7
ABS 180-190 {82-88} 4 0.40 40 {0.64} 15 25 50 75 100

Acetal 180-230 {82-110} 4 0.60 40 {0.64} 13 19 37 55 75
Acrylic 170-180 {77-82} 4 0.30 40 {0.64} 17 29 59 86 116
Nylon 160-180 {71-82} 6 0.40 40 {0.64} 16 27 54 80 108
PBT 210-260 {99-127} 4 0.30 45 {0.72} 17 28 56 83 112
PC 250 {121} 4 0.30 40 {0.64} 16 26 52 77 104
PE (HD/LP) w/40% black 170 {77} 5 - 26-34 {0.42-0.54} 15 25 50 75 100
PET virgin bottle grade 300-350 {144-177} 6 0.30 50 {0.80} 15 25 50 75 100
PETG 140-150 {60-66} 6 0.30 50 {0.80} 16 27 54 80 108
Polysulfone 200-275 {93-135} 4 0.50 50 {0.80} 8 16 32 46 62
Polyurethane 180-210 {82-99} 4 0.50 40 {0.64} 9 17 35 51 70
SAN 160-180 {71-82} 2-4 0.30 45 {0.72} 20 31 63 94 125
3ELECTTHERIGHTDRYERFORYOURAPPLICATIONn !PPLICATION.OTES
* Material throughputs are based on typical virgin material with initial moisture
)DENTIFYTHERESINANDTHROUGHPUTRATE
content as supplied by the material suppliers. Consult Conair if specific initial
Use the chart to quickly select the correct dryer model for your and final moisture content of your material are known for your application.
throughput rate. †
The parameters of drying temperature and time may vary depending upon the
type, grade and manufacturer of the material being processed. Consult your
-ULTIPLYTHESUGGESTEDDRYINGTIMEBYYOURTHROUGHPUTRATETO material supplier for their precise recommendations.
‡
DETERMINETHEHOPPERSIZE Unit of measurement for bulk density is lb/ft3 {g/cm3}. Bulk density listed is
the nominal weight for typical pellets. The bulk density may vary somewhat
Refer to Conair drying hopper specifications, or contact a Conair depending upon the size and shape of the pellets. The bulk density of regrind
representative to determine the correct hopper for your application. may vary widely depending upon the size and the shape of the flake. Be sure
to consider the bulk density of the material when selecting and the drying time
3ELECTTHEDRYERMODELANDOPTIONSTOSUITYOURAPPLICATION desired.
§
Carousel Plus models can be used for individual station or central Throughputs will vary by type of material. Consult Conair concerning throughputs
for materials that are not listed here.
drying applications. ** All Conair Dryers are equipped with an intercooler as standard. The intercooler
reduces the temperature of the return air from the drying hopper, improving the
efficiency of the desiccant. The aftercooler should be connected with the proper
water flow rating and temperature to attain the listed throughput.
D-11
Specifications !PPLICATION.OTES
All dryers are supplied with an aftercooler/intercooler as
standard. The aftercooler/intercooler reduces the temperature
of the return air from the drying hopper, improving the
)3/VIEW efficiency of the desiccant. The aftercooler/intercooler should
be connected with the proper water flow rate and temperature
to attain the optimal throughput.
#ENTRALMODELS
Central dryers do not have process heaters. These models
should be used when drying multiple materials that require
different drying temperatures. Central models dehumidify the
process air, which is then heated to the correct setpoint by a
! Hopper Temperature Controller (HTC) or a “pre-heater” mounted
on the hopper.
Additional filtration options
The standard return air cartridge filter is sized for the airflow
of each dryer model and is suited for most applications. You
should consider adding an optional dust collector and/or volatile
trap if:
• The material contains excessive fines. An additional dust
collector or cyclone will extend time between filter cleaning.
• The material produces volatiles during drying which
condense into a waxy or oily residue. A volatile trap will help
# "
to protect the desiccant.
3IDEVIEW &RONTVIEW
-ODELS 7 7 7 7 7

Drying temperature 100° - 375°F {38° - 191°C} with options
Dewpoint All models -40°F {-40°C}
A - Height 40.15 {102} 47.7 {121}
B - Overall width 21.06 {53} 29.0 {74}
C - Depth 22.8 {58} 29.4 {75}
Outlet/inlet tube size OD 2.5 {63.5}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHT lbs {kg}
Installed 180 {82} 220 {91}
Shipping 245 {111} 265 {120} 280 {127} 280 {127} 300 {136}
6OLTAGE Full load amps **
208 V/3 phase/60 Hz 14.8 19.7 26.2 NA
230 V/3 phase/60 Hz 13.3 17.8 23.6 24.8
400 V/3 phase/50 Hz* 7.8 10.3 13.6 13.8
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 6.6 8.8 11.7 12.3
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 5.3 7.1 9.4 9.9
4OTALKILOWATTSokW (BTU/min) 2.1 {120} 2.1 {120} 3.3 {188} 4.1 {233} 4.4 {250}
7ATERREQUIREMENTS(for aftercooler or optional precooler)‡
Recommended temperature§ 45° - 85°F {7.2° - 29.4°C}
Water flow gal./min. {liters/min.} 1 {4.6} 2 {9.1}
Water connections NPT 3/8 inch
* Dryers running at 50 Hz will have 17% less airflow, and a 17% reduction in ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
material throughput. on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
† systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
‡ Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the
§
performance. Tower, chiller or municipal water sources can be used.
D-12
TPDX021-1117 CAROUSEL PLUS MOBILE DRYING AND CONVEYING MDCW 150 AND 200 CAROUSEL PLUS MODELS
The Next Generation in

Mobile Cart Dryers
Mobile Drying and Conveying systems eliminate the need for
machine-mounted hoppers by placing all components on a safe,
convenient cart.
Set-up, pre-drying, clean-out and maintenance can all take
place without tying up valuable process machine time, or
climbing on the machine.
The MDCW system integrates an efficient Carousel Plus Dryer
with a conveying blower, dust collector and direct-feed vacuum
receiver to convey with dry air to the throat of a processing
machine. The self-loading option adds an integral hopper loader
which allows the MDCW to load itself. If you don’t need dry-air
conveying, order a non-dry air conveying MDCW with a dryer
and hopper, and add a self-contained vacuum loader.
MDCW150
Proven Performance for Low Throughput Up to 200 lbs/hr
These Carousel Plus MDCW models are small

enough to be used beside the machine. ` Simple to use, advanced touchscreen control
The DC-A control on the MDCW dryers makes controlling your drying and conveying
MDCW units feature true closed-loop drying easier than ever. The touchscreen control has descriptive help screens for operators
and conveying technology to eliminate and features detailed trending screens, auto start capabilities, password protection and
moisture that can cause defects in parts. You has Conair’s excellent Drying Monitor capabilities built into the control (requires the
can dry at temperatures up to 375°F {191°C} appropriate hardware).
and at throughput rates of 150 to more than
200 pounds per hour {68.0 – 90.7 kg/hr}. ` Closed-loop drying/conveying
Each unit provides drying temperatures up to 375°F {191°C}, automatic desiccant
The Carousel Plus Dryers use molecular sieve regeneration and dewpoints of -40°F {-40°C}.
desiccant that is bonded into a fiberglass
substrate and formed into a continuously ` No-downtime material changes
rotating wheel. The result is rock steady With a spare MDCW system, material changes are fast. Roll one unit to the processing
drying temperatures and dewpoint levels, machine, while another heats and pre-dries material for the next run.
critical for processing moisture and ` Maximum uptime, maximum reliability
temperature sensitive material. With significantly reduced part count, easy access and less wear, you can expect many
years of trouble-free operation. The weight of the desiccant assembly has been reduced
by 70%, the part count reduced by 90%. There are no more indexing bed plates, no
more cumbersome 4-way valves and no more messy desiccant beads.
` Precise, adjustable dewpoint control

The dewpoint control option built into the microprocessor control system allows you
to select a particular dewpoint value, onto which the controls locks. The control then
adjusts various dryer functions to precisely hold the dewpoint selected, virtually
eliminating any chance of overdrying expensive material.

D-13

desiccant rotor, which is made of molecular sieve desiccant. The drying low dewpoint within five minutes of start-up and offers multi-
molecular sieve has been grown into the rotor’s porous fiberglass year media life with virtually no maintenance.
hour passing through three cycles with each revolution. • The rotor technology minimizes energy consumption by reducing
the structural mass. Less structural mass to heat means less energy
Regeneration Regen. wasted.
Return Air Fiter
Blower
01
Ambient Air
Process Regen. The dry air is dehumidified in the adsorption cycle, capturing and removing
Heater Heater moisture from the drying air stream.
01
Desiccant 02 02
Wheel
moisture is heated and purged out of the desiccant to the atmosphere.
03
Return Air Aftercooler
Filter 03
Process
Blower The desiccant is then advanced to the post regeneration cooling cycle and
eliminating moisture that can cause defects in parts.

Model MDCW Models 150 and 200 Feature Descriptions
Standard z Standard • Audible and visual alarm - A combination of a blinking red alarm light and a
Audible and visual alarms z | Option horn alert the operator to any shut down alarm.
Temperature setback z
• Temperature setback - Automatically reduces the drying temperature to a
Dewpoint monitor z lower standby mode when the machine throughput is reduced or stopped.
Dewpoint control z
• Dewpoint monitor - Monitor the performance of the dryer with a digital
Aftercooler z
dewpoint readout of the drying air.
Options
• Dewpoint control - Allows the dryer to maintain an operator-selected
Volatile trap |
dewpoint level. This feature helps prevent overdrying of moisture sensitive
Precooler |
materials such as Nylon.
• Communications - Allows the dryer to be networked to industrial control
Communications |
systems. When a dryer is connected to a network, the controller on the
Drying Monitor |
net-work may read actual temperatures, change setpoints, read dryer status,
Dry air conveying | and process and display this information at a central location. Ethernet
Hopper loading (+ ratio) | communications are available.
Drying Monitor
The Drying Monitor automatically monitors the heat profile inside your drying hopper with a 6-zone temperature probe, to protect
resin from over or under-drying. A control alarm and a light tower alert if proper drying is in jeopardy. Advanced notice provides
time to correct issues instead of wasted drying and product defects from common issues like: failed or out-of-place process
temperature probe, an improperly sized hopper or dryer for the application, lack of resin or loading equipment failure, reduced
airflow from dirty filters, linked hoses and other obstructions, unplanned throughput change and loss of power.
Your DC-A control will alarm on most dryer-related problems, but the Drying Monitor goes further to report proper drying happening
inside the drying hopper. Available on models MDCW50 and above.

D-14
DC-A Control Features

• Auto Start
• Easily switch between english/metric units
• Energy usage meter
• Easy, familiar Loader Control
Simple home screen
Easy dryer set up Dryer settings with graphic aid Trend functions - track resin drying
Recommended Throughputs (60 Hz chart)* For 50 Hz Application, Reduce Rates by 17%

Drying Drying Initial Bulk Model Throughput Rate§ / Lb/Hr
Material
Temp / ˚F {˚C} Time / Hr † Moisture Density ‡ W150** W200**
ABS 180-190 {82-88} 4 0.40 40 {0.64} 150 200
Acetal 180-230 {82-110} 4 0.60 40 {0.64} 113 149
Acrylic 170-180 {77-82} 4 0.30 40 {0.64} 173 233
Nylon 160-180 {71-82} 6 0.40 40 {0.64} 162 215
PBT 210-260 {99-127} 4 0.30 45 {0.72} 168 223
PC 250 {121} 4 0.30 40 {0.64} 155 208
PE (HD/LP) w/40% black 170 {77} 5 - 26-34 {0.42-0.54} 150 200
PET virgin bottle grade 300-350 {144-177} 6 0.30 50 {0.80} 150 200
PETG 140-150 {60-66} 6 0.30 50 {0.80} 162 215
Polysulfone 200-275 {93-135} 4 0.50 50 {0.80} 92 123
Polyurethane 180-210 {82-99} 4 0.50 40 {0.64} 105 140
SAN 160-180 {71-82} 2-4 0.30 45 {0.72} 188 250
Select the right dryer for your application Specification Notes

1. Identify the resin and throughput rate. Use * Material throughputs are based on typical virgin material with initial moisture content as supplied by the material
the chart to quickly select the correct dryer suppliers. Consult Conair if specific initial and final moisture content of your material are known for your
application.
model for your throughput rate.
†
The parameters of drying temperature and time may vary depending upon the type, grade and manufacturer of the
2. Multiply the suggested drying time by material being processed. Consult your material supplier for their precise recommendations.
your throughput rate to determine the ‡
Unit of measurement for bulk density is lb/ft3 {g/cm3}. Bulk density listed is the nominal weight for typical pellets.
hopper size. Refer to Conair drying hopper The bulk density may vary somewhat depending upon the size and shape of the pellets. The bulk density of regrind
specifications, or contact a Conair representative may vary widely depending upon the size and the shape of the flake. Be sure to consider the bulk density of the
to determine the correct hopper for your material when selecting and the drying time desired.
application. §
Throughputs will vary by type of material. Consult Conair concerning throughputs for materials that are not listed
here.
3. Select the dryer model and options to suit
your application. ** All Conair Dryers are equipped with an intercooler as standard. The intercooler reduces the temperature of the
return air from the drying hopper, improving the efficiency of the desiccant. The aftercooler should be connected
Carousel Plus models can be used for individual with the proper water flow rating and temperature to attain the listed throughput.
station or central drying applications.

D-15
Specifications
TLR Tube Loader (machine loader) DuraLoad DL12 (hopper loader)
Outlet diameter
Outlet diameter 2 in. {5.1 cm)
2 in. {5.1 cm)
inlet diameter
1.5 in. {3.8 cm)
G
H I
A
E inlet diameter
F 1.5 in. {3.8 cm)
E - Receiver diameter G - Receiver diameter

4.5 in. {11.4 cm} 12.0 in. {30.5 cm}
F - Height with H - Height
viewing chamber 29.3 in. {74.4 cm}
C D 4 lb. {1.8 kg} H - Height above mounting
23.7 in. {60.2 cm} plate 17.4 in. {44.2 cm}
Models MDCW150 MDCW200 Application Notes

Standard hopper models CH33-21 CH39-35 All dryers are supplied with an aftercooler as
Optional hopper models CH33-28 CH39-42 standard. The aftercooler reduces the temperature
of the return air from the drying hopper, improving
Performance characteristics (with full hopper)
the efficiency of the desiccant.The aftercooler
Drying temperature 150° - 375°F {66° - 191°C} with options should be connected with the proper water
Dewpoint -40°F {-40°C} flow rate and temperature to attain the optimal
throughput.
Standard conveying distance 8 ft {2.44 m} vertical; 6 ft {1.83 m} horizontal
Long distance conveying option 15 ft {4.57 m} vertical; 50 ft {15.24 m} horizontal When to use additional filtration
The standard return air cartridge filter is sized for
Dimensions inches {cm} the airflow of each dryer model and is suited for
A - Height to top of hopper (standard) 107.6 {273.3} 119.4 {303.3} most applications. You should consider adding an
A - Height to top of hopper (optional) 121.7 {309.1} 129.5 {329.0} optional dust collector and/or volatile trap if:
C - Overall width 87.2 {221.5} 102.0 {259.1} • The material contains excessive fines. An
additional dust collector or cyclone will extend
D - Depth 52.0 {132.1} 55.0 {139.7}
time between filter cleaning.
Drying outlet/inlet tube size OD 5.0 {12.7}
• The material produces volatiles during drying
Approximate weight lbs {kg} which condense into a waxy or oily residue. A
Standard dryer installed 750 {340.2} volatile trap will help to protect the desiccant.
Standard dryer shipping 1350 {612.3}
Voltage - Full load amps** (standard/long conveying distance)
230 V/3 phase/60 Hz 43.7/47.3 58.0/61.6
400 V/3 phase/50 Hz* 24.1/25.2 31.9/33.0
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 21.9/23.7 29.1/30.9
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 17.5/19.1 23.6/25.2
Total kilowatts† kW (std./long)
7.5/8.6 9.4/10.5
Water requirements (for aftercooler or optional precooler)‡
Water flow gal./min. {liters/min.} 1 {4.6}
Water connections NPT 3/4 inch NPT
* Dryers running at 50 Hz will have 17% less airflow, and a 17% reduction in ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
material throughput. on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines
† and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the
‡ Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the
§
performance. Tower, chiller, or municipal water sources can be used.

D-16
Touch Controlled Central

or Machine-side Drying
Conair Carousel Plus dehumidifying dryers guarantee moisture
removal from resins, regardless of moisture content. You can be
assured your molded or extruded products will be unaffected by
moisture content that can jeopardize their quality.
Equipped with highly efficient desiccant wheels, long-life tube
heaters and powerful blowers, Conair W Series Dryers can be
coupled with a single hopper for efficient resin drying up to
400 lbs/hr {181.4 kg/hr} or more (see chart, next page). Or they
can be connected to multiple hoppers, each equipped with their
own heat controls for efficient delivery of dry air in a central
drying station configuration. -ODEL7
Shown with
These W Series Dryers, models 150 through 400 offer a choice of DC-T control
full color, high resolution touchscreen controls for the simplest, yet
most sophisticated control over the drying of your valuable resin.
Throughputs from 150 to Over 400 lb/hr
Conair Carousel Plus Dryers use molecular

sieve desiccant that is bonded onto a ` #HOICEOFEASY TO USEFULL COLORTOUCHSCREENS
fiberglass substrate and formed into a light, Intuitive screen navigation will allow you to easily view critical drying parameters
compact, continuously rotating wheel that such as dewpoint, temperature and alarms. Choose the 8-inch DC-T for total control
never breaks down, while providing low- of multiple drying configurations, like ResinWorksTM central drying systems, and a range
pressure, free-flow of dehumidified air. of communication options. Or choose the 7-inch DC-A for economically priced reliability
The result is rock-steady, spike-free drying in the most easy to understand, yet fully featured drying control ever produced.
temperatures and low, consistent dewpoint
levels, critical for processing engineering ` 2EDUCEDENERGYCOSTS
resins. Desiccant is efficiently regenerated The desiccant wheel assembly heats and cools more easily than previous drying
at reduced temperatures, making Conair technology, saving you up to 35% on your energy bill. 90% fewer parts and 70%
Carousel Plus Dryers the most energy lighter structural mass means less to heat, therefore less wasted energy.
efficient dryer you can buy. ` -AXIMUMUPTIMEMAXIMUMRELIABILITY
The W Series includes significantly fewer parts and easier access for easy
The W Series described here is capable of maintenance, so you can expect less wear, less downtime and many years of trouble-
delivering nominal throughput rates from 150 free operation. There are no indexing desiccant beds, no complex air valves and no
to more than 400 lb/hr {68.9 - 181.4 kg/hr}, but loose desiccant beads. The desiccant wheel is a solid, continuously rotating trouble-
talk to your Conair representative about dryer free desiccant module. Shift-after-shift, year after year, these dryers will deliver
models above and below these rates. All worry-free drying performance.
Conair desiccant dryers use proven desiccant
wheel technology for the most reliable ` 0RECISEADJUSTABLEDEWPOINTCONTROL
dehumidification of resin possible. Precision dewpoint control is built into the control and allows you to easily select a
desired dewpoint. The control does the rest by adjusting dryer functions to precisely
MDCW, mobile drying and conveying systems deliver that drying dewpoint, day in and day out, from one resin supply to another.
are also available, as well as ResinWorks, Never worry about over-drying or under-drying again.
multi-hopper, centralized drying stations.
D-17

desiccant rotor, which is made of molecular sieve desiccant. The drying low dewpoint within 5 minutes of start-up and offers multi-
molecular sieve has been grown onto the rotor’s porous fiberglass year media life with virtually no maintenance.
hour, passing through three cycles with each revolution.
• The rotor technology minimizes energy consumption by reducing the
Regen.
Return Air
Regeneration
Blower Fiter
structural mass. Less structural mass to heat means less energy wasted.
Ambient Air
01
Process Regen.

Heater Heater 02 The dry air is dehumidified in the adsorption cycle, capturing and removing
01 moisture from the drying air stream.
Desiccant
Wheel
02
03
Return Air Aftercooler moisture is heated and purged out of the desiccant to the atmosphere.
Filter
Process
Blower
03
eliminates moisture that can cause defects in parts.
$RYING $RYING )NITIAL -ODEL4HROUGHPUT2ATEe,B(R
-ATERIAL "ULK$ENSITYp
4EMP&[#] 4IME(R† -OISTURE 7
7
7
7
ABS 180-190 {82-88} 4 0.40 40 {0.64} 150 200 300 400

Acetal 180-230 {82-110} 4 0.60 40 {0.64} 113 149 225 300
Acrylic 170-180 {77-82} 4 0.30 40 {0.64} 173 233 347 465
Nylon 160-180 {71-82} 6 0.40 40 {0.64} 162 215 323 430
PBT 210-260 {99-127} 4 0.30 45 {0.72} 168 223 335 445
PC 250 {121} 4 0.30 40 {0.64} 155 208 313 416
PE (HD/LP) w/40% black 170 {77} 5 - 26-34 {0.42-0.54} 150 200 300 400
PET virgin bottle grade 300-350 {144-177} 6 0.30 50 {0.80} 150 200 300 400
PETG 140-150 {60-66} 6 0.30 50 {0.80} 162 215 323 430
Polysulfone 200-275 {93-135} 4 0.50 50 {0.80} 92 123 185 245
Polyurethane 180-210 {82-99} 4 0.50 40 {0.64} 105 140 210 280
SAN 160-180 {71-82} 2-4 0.30 45 {0.72} 188 250 375 500
3ELECTTHERIGHTDRYERFORYOURAPPLICATIONn !PPLICATION.OTES
* Material throughputs are based on typical virgin material with initial moisture
)DENTIFYTHERESINANDTHROUGHPUTRATE
content as supplied by the material suppliers. Consult Conair if specific initial
Use the chart to quickly select the correct dryer model for your and final moisture content of your material are known for your application.
throughput rate. †
The parameters of drying temperature and time may vary depending upon the
type, grade and manufacturer of the material being processed. Consult your
-ULTIPLYTHESUGGESTEDDRYINGTIMEBYYOURTHROUGHPUTRATETO material supplier for their precise recommendations.
DETERMINETHEHOPPERSIZE ‡
Unit of measurement for bulk density is lb/ft3 {g/cm3}. Bulk density listed is
Refer to Conair drying hopper specifications, or contact a Conair the nominal weight for typical pellets. The bulk density may vary somewhat
depending upon the size and shape of the pellets. The bulk density of regrind
representative to determine the correct hopper for your application. may vary widely depending upon the size and the shape of the flake. Be sure
to consider the bulk density of the material when selecting and the drying time
3ELECTTHEDRYERMODELANDOPTIONSTOSUITYOURAPPLICATION desired.
Carousel Plus models can be used for individual station or central §
Throughputs will vary by type of material. Consult Conair concerning throughputs
drying applications. for materials that are not listed here.
** All Conair Dryers are equipped with an intercooler as standard. The intercooler
reduces the temperature of the return air from the drying hopper, improving the
efficiency of the desiccant. The aftercooler should be connected with the proper
water flow rating and temperature to attain the listed throughput.
D-18
Choose the control you need... DC-A or DC-T z 3TANDARD | /PTION
#ONTROL $# ! $# 4

3TANDARD&EATURES
Allen-Bradley
Processor / control type Proprietary
micro 850 PLC
Display / HMI screen 7-inch color 8-inch color
Trending screens (dewpoint,
z z
temperature, heater on-time)
English / metric units z z

Password protected z z
Web-enabled z
Audible and visual alarms z z
$# !#ONTROL Temperature setback
z z
(manual and auto)
Return air temperature display z
Solid-state heater contractors
z
with isolation protection
Dewpoint monitor z z
Dewpoint control z z
Real-time clock-time of day z
Date format selection z
Auto start z z
Multiple hopper control z
Energy usage meter z
$# 4#ONTROL !VAILABLEOPTION
&EATURE$ESCRIPTIONS /PTION$ESCRIPTIONS
• !UDIBLEANDVISUALALARM • 6OLATILE4RAP
A combination of a blinking red alarm light For materials that give off plasticizer residue • $RYING-ONITOR
and a horn alert the operator to any shut when dried, an optional Volatile Trap is Save time and money from the aggravation of
down alarm. recommended to demist the volatiles from the improperly dried material. The Drying Monitor
• 4EMPERATURESETBACK hopper’s return air and collect them prior to the automatically
Automatically reduces the drying temperature air entering the desiccant. Volatile traps extend monitors the heat
to a lower standby mode when the machine desiccant life and reduce maintenance and profile inside your
throughput is reduced or stopped. Processors include a convenient drain spigot. drying hopper
using resins prone to degradation due to over • 0RECOOLER with a 6-zone
drying could greatly benefit from the For drying temperatures below 150°F {65 150°C}, temperature
temperature setback feature. an optional Precooler is required to remove the probe, to protect
• $EWPOINTMONITOR internal heat of the dryer for low temperature drying. resin from over or
Monitor the performance of the dryer with a Precooler water connections match those of the under-drying. A control alarm and a light tower
digital dewpoint readout of the drying air. standard aftercooler as listed in the specifications alert if proper drying is in jeopardy. Advanced
section. notice provides time to correct issues instead of
• $EWPOINTCONTROL wasted drying and product defects from common
Allows the dryer to maintain and control an • 0ROCESSFILTERCHECK
To conveniently monitor air flow critical for drying, issues like:
operator-selected dewpoint level. This feature • Failed or out-of-place process temperature probe,
helps prevent overdrying of moisture the Process Filter Check option provides an alarm
when the resin drying air filter is blinded, jeopardiz- • Improperly sized hopper or dryer or unplanned
sensitive materials such as nylon. Location change of rate,
and season changes can drastically change ing effective drying. Process Filter Check provides
essential guidance to maintenance intervals. • Loss of power,
the atmospheric dewpoint of the air used for • Lack of resin or loading equipment failure,
drying. Dewpoint control is used to increase • #OMMUNICATIONS • Reduced airflow through filters, kinked hoses or
or decrease the regeneration temperature When connected to a network the controller obstructions.
as needed depending on atmospheric on the network may read actual temperatures, Your DC-A or DC-T control will alarm on most dryer-
conditions. This saves energy costs and change setpoints, read dryer status, and process related problems, but the Drying Monitor goes
increases end-product quality. and display this information at a central location. further, to report proper drying happening inside
Ethernet communications are available. the drying hopper.
D-19
Specifications
!PPLICATION.OTES
All dryers are supplied with an aftercooler/intercooler as standard. The aftercooler/
intercooler reduces the temperature of the return air from the drying hopper, improving
the efficiency of the desiccant. The aftercooler/intercooler should be connected with
the proper water flow rate and temperature to attain the optimal throughput.
#ENTRALMODELS
Central dryers have no process heaters and are used to supply dry air to multiple
! drying hoppers. The central dryer, equipped with a desiccant wheel and regeneration
system, supplies dehumidified air, which is heated to individual set points by the
heaters and controls located at each drying hopper.
Additional filtration options
The standard return air cartridge filter is sized for the airflow of each dryer model and
is suited
for most applications. You should consider adding an optional dust collector and/or
volatile trap if:
• The material contains excessive fines. An additional dust collector or cyclone will
extend time between filter cleaning.
" #
• The material produces volatiles during drying which condense into a waxy or oily
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW residue. A volatile trap will help to protect the desiccant.
-ODELS 7 7 7 7

Drying temperature * 100° - 375°F {38° - 191°C} with options
Dewpoint -40°F {-40°C}
A - Height 64.3 {163}
B - Overall width 29 {74}
C - Depth 51.5 {131}
Outlet/inlet tube size OD 2.5 {63.5} 5.0 {127}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHT lbs {kg}
Installed 600 {272} 660 {300} 710 {322} 760 {345}
Shipping 790 {358} 995 {451} 1045 {474} 1305 {592}
6OLTAGE- Full load amps standard / central drying
†
230 V/3 phase/60 Hz 41.7 / 16.6 56.0 / 18.3 66.1 / 28.4 N/A
400 V/3 phase/50 Hz† 23.3 / 8.8 31.1 / 9.4 36.9 / 15.2 63.5 / 20.1
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 20.9 / 8.3 48.1 / 9.2 33.2 / 14.3 55.5 / 17.8
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 16.8 / 6.7 22.9 / 7.8 26.6 / 11.5 44.5 / 14.3
7ATERREQUIREMENTS(for aftercooler or optional precooler)‡
Water flow gal./min. {liters/min.} 3 {11.4}
Water connections NPT 3/4 inch
* Total kW listed at a process setpoint of 250°F {121°C} and a regeneration ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
temperature of 350°F {177°C}. on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
†
Dryers running at 50 Hz will have 17% less airflow, and a 17% reduction in material systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
throughput. applied to the machine.
‡
When drying below 150°F {66°C} a precooler is required. Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the
§
Temperatures above or below the recommended levels may affect dryer performance.
Tower, chiller or municipal water sources can be used.
D-20
TPDX019-0317 CAROUSEL PLUS DEHUMIDIFYING DRYERS7-/$%,3
Wide Range of Controls:

Intuitive Drying
The new DC-T control measures 8-inches diagonally and features es
bright, crisp, high-resolution graphics. Individual screens show
how your process is running and ways to improve it. Plus, you
can now control and monitor process heat from the dryer!
With three new models in this range, processors can more closely ely
match dryer capacity to process throughput. Purchase this
dryer and you will find that you have more control over drying
dewpoint and temperature than ever before, in a package that is
simpler, smaller, lighter, more energy efficient, easier to use andd
maintain than any other dryer on the market today.
-ODEL7
Shown with optional DC - T control
Large Capacity Central or Machine-Side Drying
The Carousel Plus Dryer Series is now offered

with TouchViewTM Technology featuring ` %ASY TO USEOPTIONALFULL COLORTOUCHSCREEN
full-color touchscreen controls. DC-T dryer Intuitive screen navigation will allow you to easily view critical drying parameters
controls display critical process settings such as dewpoint and temperature.
and actual data on an 8-inch touchscreen
graphical layout. At a glance you see ` 2EDUCEDENERGYCOSTS
everything going on in your drying system The desiccant wheel assembly heats and cools more easily than previous drying
and can make adjustments with a touch technology saving you up to 35% on your energy bill. Fewer parts, lighter structural
of your fingertip for more efficient drying, mass, less to heat, therefore less wasted energy.
better product quality and more profit on your
bottom line. Warning messages are now easy ` -AXIMUMUPTIMEMAXIMUMRELIABILITY
to read with the elimination of cumbersome With significantly reduced part count, easy access and less wear, you can expect
alarm codes. Password security prevents many years of trouble-free operation. The weight of the desiccant assembly has been
unauthorized drying parameter changes. With reduced by 70%, the part count reduced by 90%, there are no more indexing bed
DC-T, your control is web-enabled, so you plates, no more cumbersome 4-way valves and no more messy desiccant beads.
can connect wirelessly with your tablet or
smartphone. ` 0RECISEADJUSTABLEDEWPOINTCONTROL
An industry first! The dewpoint control option built into the microprocessor control
This series of dryers are capable of delivering system allows you to select a particular dewpoint value, which the control locks onto.
nominal throughput rates ranging from 600 to The control then adjusts various dryer functions to precisely hold the dewpoint
more than 5,000 lb/hour {272 to 2,268 kg/hr}. selected, virtually eliminating any chance of overdrying expensive material.
D-21

The core of the Carousel Plus Dryer is the Munters® unique fluted • The high airflow across the surface area of the rotor produces a
desiccant rotor, which contains molecular sieve desiccant. The resin-drying low dewpoint within 5 minutes of start-up and offers
molecular sieve has been grown into the rotor’s porous fiberglass multiyear media life with virtually no maintenance.
substrate, preventing the possibility of desiccant break down and
• The continuously revolving rotor provides rock steady temperature
dusting over time. The desiccant rotor revolves slowly, passing
and dewpoint control.
through three cycles with each revolution.
Regeneration Ambient Air
• The rotor technology minimizes energy consumption by reducing the
Blower structural mass; less structural mass to heat means less energy wasted.
Regen.
Fiter
Ambient Air 01

Process Regen. 02 First, the dry air is dehumidified in the adsorption cycle, capturing and
Heater Heater
removing moisture from the drying air stream.
Return Air
01
Desiccant
Wheel 02
03 Next, the desiccant passes into the high temperature regeneration cycle
Aftercooler where the absorbed moisture is heated and purged out of the desiccant to the
(optional)
atmosphere.
Return Air Process
Filter Blower
03
cooled with closed loop dry air. All Carousel Plus Dryers feature this unique
.OTEDryers W600-W5000 that are central dryers do not have process heaters. Heater Packs,
Hopper Temperature Controllers (HTC’s), or GasTrac Dryers (CGT’s) are used at the hopper for closed loop cooling technology to eliminate moisture that can cause defects
heating the process air. in parts.
Which package is right for you?

3TANDARD0ACKAGES -8 -: (9 !$ 3$ 46 3TANDARD0ACKAGES -8 -: (9 !$ 3$ 46
&EATURES /PTIONS
DC-1 control z z Communications | | | |
DC-2 control z Audible and visual alarms | |
DC-T control z Trending screens | |
Allen-Bradley TouchView control z Recipe storage screens | |
Conveying control screens | |
Siemens TouchView control z
Precooler | | | | | |
Audible and visual alarms z z z | | | | | |
Volatile trap
Temperature setback z z z z z Filter check | | | |
Dewpoint monitor z z z z z Heat current monitor |
Dewpoint control z z z z z Drying Monitor | |
z 3TANDARD | /PTION
&EATURE$ESCRIPTIONS
• !UDIBLEANDVISUALALARM A combination of a blinking red alarm light and a • 6OLATILE4RAP Allows the operator to monitor the performance of the dryer
horn alert the operator to any shut down alarm. by providing a digital dewpoint readout of the drying air.
• 4EMPERATURESETBACK Automatically reduces the drying temperature to a • &ILTERCHECK Keeps the drying system’s air flow optimized by monitoring
lower standby mode when the machine throughput is reduced or stopped. the filter condition through automatic differential pressure measurements on
each side of the filter. An alarm indicates when it’s time for cleaning.
• $EWPOINTMONITOR Allows the operator to monitor the performance of the
dryer by providing a digital dewpoint readout of the drying air. • $RYING-ONITOR Automatically monitors the temperature profile inside the
drying hopper(s) within a pre-set temperature band to protect from over
• $EWPOINTCONTROL Allows the dryer to lock onto and track an operator
drying or under drying your material.
selected dewpoint level. This feature helps prevent over drying of moisture
sensitive materials such as Nylon. The Carousel Plus is the first dryer in the • #OMMUNICATIONS Allows the dryer to be networked to industrial control
plastics industry to provide precise dewpoint control. systems. When a dryer is connected to a network, the controller on the
network may read actual temperatures, change set points, read dryer status,
• 0RECOOLER To achieve and maintain very low drying temperatures, a pre-
and process and display this information at a central location.
cooler can be supplied to assure the supply air to the hopper is not heated
by the heat of the dryer’s blower, residual heat from regeneration, etc.
D-22
Choose the control you need... DC - 1, DC - 2 or DC - T
Set Point
Set Point Actual
Actual Menu
ShutdownAlarms
Shutdown Alarms
A1 Process
A1 Process High
High Temp
Temp
A2 Process
A2 Process Loop
Loop Break
Break
A3 Process
A3 Process Heater
Heater High
High Temp
Temp 1 Process Temp. Select
A4
A4 Regen
RegenHeater
HeaterHigh Temp
High Temp 12Process
Regen.Temp.
Temp. Process Blower Regen. Blower Auto Start Category Prev Process Blower Regen. Blower Auto Start
A7
A7 Return
ReturnAir
AirHigh Temp
High Temp 23Regen.
Return Temp.
Air Temp.
A49 Process Pressure Regen. Pressure Desiccant Indexing Scroll List Process Heater Regen. Heater Dewpoint Control
A49 Process
ProcessProtection High
Protection Temp
High Temp 34Return Air Temp.
Auto Start
A53 Process Blower Overload 4 Auto Start
A53 Process Blower Overload 5 Load Time (MDC) Process Heater Regen. Heater Set-Back Temp. ext Set-Back Temp.
A55 Wheel Rotation Failure 5 Load Time (MDC)
A55 Wheel Rotation Failure 6 Activate Setback Temp. 1 2 3
6 Activate Setback Temp.
Passive Alarms 77Setback
Setback Temp.(Process)
Temp.(Process)
Passive
P1 Alarms
Process Temp Deviation 88Dewpoint
Dewpoint
Ad ust Setpoint
P1 Regen
P3 Process Temp
Temp Deviation
Deviation 4 5 6 Acknowledge
P3 Return
P5 RegenAir
Temp Deviation
Mid High Temp Alarm
P17
P5 MDC Conveying
Return Air MidDemand
High Temp
P17 MDC Conveying Demand 7 8 9 Start Stop
Clear nter
150 150
$# #ONTROL&EATURES $# #ONTROL&EATURES

• 6-character, 7-segment • Operator password protection • LCD (2 X 20 character) alphanu- • Real time clock
LED display for high visibility • English / metric units meric display with access to setup • Temperature setback
of setpoint and actual operating parameters, full diagnostics, alarm/
parameters • Solid-state heater contactors event log and numerous options • Operator password protection
• Full access to setup parameters • 8-character, 14-segment • Date format selection
and alarms through error codes • Return air temperature display LED display for high visibility of • English / metric units
• Autostart count down timer selected parameter status
• Return air temperature display
• Keypad for easy operator access
• Solid-state heater contactors
$# 4#ONTROL&EATURES
• 8-inch color touchscreen • Real-time clock - time of day
• Web-enabled • Auto start
• Trending - air temperature and • Date format selection
dewpoint • Temperature setback
• Password protected (multiple level) • Solid-state heater contactors
• English / metric units with isolation protection
• Return air temperature display • Multiple hopper control
• The DM3-e is the latest generation of technology created for analyzing

drying performance from a multi-zone, resistance temperature
detector (RTD) probe installed in the drying hopper. Embedded into the
DC-T dryer control software, the DM3-e is designed to provide early
detection of poor drying conditions and provide alarms for correcting
problems. Up to 15 hoppers can be monitored.
.OTE Also available with Allen-Bradley or Siemens platform
!LLEN "RADLEYCONTROL 3IEMENSCONTROL
D-23
Specifications
!PPLICATION.OTES
All dryers are supplied with an aftercooler/intercooler as standard. The aftercooler/intercooler
reduces the temperature of the return air from the drying hopper, improving the efficiency
of the desiccant. The aftercooler/intercooler should be connected with the proper water flow
rate and temperature to attain the optimal throughput.
7HENTOUSECENTRALMODELS
Central dryers do not have process heaters. These models should be used when drying
! multiple materials that require different drying temperatures. Central models dehumidify the
process air, which is then heated to the correct setpoint by a Hopper Temperature Controller
(HTC) or a “pre-heater” mounted on the hopper.
When to use additional filtration
The standard return air cartridge filter is sized for the airflow of each dryer model and is
suited for most applications. You should consider adding an optional dust collector and/or
volatile trap if:
• The material contains excessive fines. An additional dust collector or cyclone will extend
time between filter cleaning.
" # • The material produces volatiles during drying which condense into a waxy or oily residue.
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW A volatile trap will help to protect the desiccant.
-ODELS 7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

Drying temperature All models 100° - 375°F {38° - 191°C} with options
A - Height 93.8 {238.3} 92.2 {234.2} 98.3 {249.7}
B - Width 49.3 {125.2} 53.9 {136.9} 58.2 {147.8}
C - Depth 63.1 {160.2} 97.5 {247.6} 112.9 {286.7}
Outlet/inlet hose diameter 8.0 {20.3} 12.0 {30.5}
Installed 1300 {590} 1400 {636} 1600 {726} 2000 {907}
Shipping 1495 {678} 1515 {687} 2620 {1188} 3385 {1535}
6OLTAGE- standard/central full load amps† ‡‡
‡
400 V/3 phase/50 Hz 89.2 / 34.3 115.9 / 33.5 116.6 / 34.2 152.7 / 42.9 159.4 / 49.6 213.7 / 76.4 248.7 / 84.0 282.7 / 90.5 371.3 / 96.8 371.9 / 97.4
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 77.6 / 29.8 100.9 / 29.2 101.5 / 29.8 133.4 / 37.8 138.6 / 43.0 186.4 / 66.9 216.5 / 73.1 247.3 / 80.0 323.0 / 84.0 323.7 / 84.7
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 62.1 / 23.9 80.7 / 23.4 81.1 / 23.8 106.6 / 30.2 110.8 / 34.4 149.1 /53.6 173.0 / 58.4 197.7 / 64.0 258.1 / 67.1 258.7 / 67.7
7ATERREQUIREMENTS(for aftercooler or optional precooler)§
Recommended temperature** 45° - 85°F {7° - 29°C}
Water flow gal./min. {liters/min.} 6 - 25 {22.7 - 94.6}†† 12 - 40 {45.4 - 151.4}†† 15 - 50 {56.8 - 189.3}††
Water connections NPT 1 1/2 inch
Specification Notes )NSTALLATION.OTE

* Dryers W600-W5000 that are central dryers do not have process §
When drying below 150°F {66°C} a precooler is required. Wiring between process
heaters. Heater Packs, Hopper Temperature Controllers (HTC’s), air heater, Heater
or GasTrac Dryers (CGT’s) are used at the hopper for heating the ** Temperatures above or below the recommended levels may affect Pack, and dryer where
process air. See the Hopper Temperature Controller (HTC) and dryer performance. Tower, chiller or municipal water sources can be control for this heater is
GasTrac Dryer (CGT) specification sheets for further technical used. located is not included.
information. Even though Heater Packs are remote from †† Maximum wire length
Higher chilling water temperatures will require a greater flow rate.
the dryer, they are controlled by the dryer. between dryer and
‡‡
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options heat source is 100 feet
†
The first full load amps number listed includes current to operate or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit {30 meters}. Consult
the dryer and the heat supply controlled by the dryer. The second design of specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical Conair or a qualified
full load amps number is current required for the dryer only, when diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the electrician to determine
operated as a central dryer with heaters (more than one) controlled machine. gauge of wire required
and powered remotely. for distance. Maximum
‡
Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair physical distance
Dryers running at 50 Hz will have 17% less airflow, and a 17% representative for the most current information. between dryer and
reduction in material throughput.
hopper is 20 feet
{6 meters}.
D-24
TPDX029-0317 ENERGYSMART® DRYER WITH TOUCHVIEWTM TECHNOLOGY7-/$%,3
Intuitive Touchscreen
Precise Drying
The EnergySmart® Dryer with TouchViewTM Technology combines
traditional drying with an intuitive full-color, touchscreen control
that allows you to easily navigate and adjust all dryer system
settings. This new, powerful control is designed for variable
throughputs of 400 to 5,000 lbs/hr {181 to 2,268 kg/hr}.
All EnergySmart Dryers feature OptimizerTM Mode technology

that automatically adjusts the dryer’s blower to match your
processing machine. This ensures that you make high-quality,
consistent product while dramatically reducing your energy cost.
Optional loading, trending and recipe control screens further

expand the capabilities of your EnergySmart Dryer System.
Take Charge of Your Process and Energy Usage
The EnergySmart® Dryer with TouchViewTM

Technology allows you to fine-tune your ` %ASY TO USEFULL COLORTOUCHSCREEN
system settings to achieve consistent drying You’ll have more visibility and control of your drying system than ever before. View
results. System overview screens and profile and control critical drying parameters such as airflow, dewpoint and temperature
temperature readouts display the current with intuitive screen navigation.
status of your process for simple and easy ` 2EAL TIMEVIEWINGOFYOURPROCESS
adjustment. View the drying temperatures, air flow, dewpoints and differential pressure of your
process provided by sensors located throughout your drying system. Each sensor’s
Molecular sieve desiccant that is bonded profile is stored to the dryer control’s memory for historical trending and fine tuning of
to a fiberglass substrate and formed into a the dryer.
continuously rotating wheel is the heart of the
` 3LASHENERGYWASTEREDUCEENERGYBILL
EnergySmart Dryer. Every desiccant wheel
The OptimizerTM mode works with the dryer’s variable frequency drive (VFD) to
provides consistent drying temperatures
automatically adjust the dryer’s blower output to the processing machine. This feature
and dewpoints levels that are critical to your reduces the blower output, minimizing the total amount of energy needed to dry at
drying process. variable throughputs.
EnergySmart® Dryer options include: an ` %ARLYWARNING CONSTANTMONITORING

insulated hopper, a gas or an electric heater, The TouchViewTM Technology control constantly monitors temperature and air flow.
dust collector(s), positive displacement Any external changes that could effect your process are immediately displayed in time
pump(s), receiver(s), a cyclone and a patented for you to adjust them.
DM-II drying monitor package. ` 4WO9EARTOP TO BOTTOMWARRANTY
A full two-year warranty from top-to-bottom and a 3-year warranty for the
desiccant wheel ensures long life. You can expect high performance and reliable
operation from your Conair equipment.
D-25
Features Options
• 6ARIABLEFREQUENCYDRIVE6&$ • 4RENDINGSCREENS
The VFD allows for automatic adjustment of View and record live data on the operation of
the airflow to the dehumidifying drying circuit the system.
of the EnergySmart® Dryer. • 2ECIPESCREENS
• /PTIMIZER4-MODE View, save and upload application specific
Automatically controls the material temperature recipes for drying materials.
profile of the drying material based on environ- • ,OADINGSCREENS
mental changes that may occur during View, configure and activate secondary loading
processing. controls.
• $EWPOINTMONITOR • #OMMUNICATIONS
Allows the user to monitor the performance of The dryer can be networked to industrial
the dryer by providing a digital dewpoint read- control systems. TCPIP and PROFINET commu-
out of the supply and return air. nications are available, depending on the
• $- ))DRYINGMONITOR control type. (Allen-Bradley or Siemens)
Automatically monitors the temperature profile • !UDIBLEANDVISUALALARM
inside the drying hopper. Working with the A combination of a blinking red alarm light
OptimizerTM mode, the DM-II drying monitor and a horn alerts you to any shut down alarm
helps maintain the drying system’s performance. condition.
• $EWPOINTCONTROL
Allows the dryer to lock onto and track an
operator selected dewpoint level. This feature
helps prevent over drying of moisture sensitive
materials such as Nylon.
How it Works: Wheel Dryer Technology

The core of the EnergySmart® Dryer is the
Munters® unique fluted desiccant rotor,
Regeneration Ambient Air
which contains molecular sieve desiccant. Blower
The molecular sieve has been grown into the Regen.
rotor’s porous fiberglass substrate, preventing Fiter
the possibility of desiccant break down
Ambient Air
and dusting over time. The desiccant rotor
revolves slowly, passing through three cycles Process Regen.
with each revolution. Heater Heater
02
01 Return Air
Desiccant
First, the dry air is dehumidified in the adsorption Wheel
01

cycle, capturing and removing moisture from the
drying air stream. 03
02 Aftercooler
(optional)
Next, the desiccant passes into the high
temperature regeneration cycle where the Return Air Process
absorbed moisture is heated and purged out Filter Blower
of the desiccant to the atmosphere.
03
The desiccant is then advanced to the post
regeneration cooling cycle and cooled with closed
.OTEDryers W600-W5000 that are central dryers do not have process heaters. Heater Packs, Hopper
loop dry air. All EnergySmart® Dryers feature this Temperature Controllers (HTC’s), or GasTrac Dryers (CGT’s) are used at the hopper for heating the process air.
unique closed loop cooling technology to eliminate See the Hopper Temperature Controller (HTC) and GasTrac Dryer (CGT) specification sheets for further technical
moisture that can cause defects in parts. information. Even though Heater Packs are remote from the dryer, they are controlled by the dryer.
D-26
Control Features
4OUCH6IEW4-4ECHNOLOGY
The touchscreen control eliminates confusing alarm codes and hard-
to-navigate parameters and replaces them with full-color, easy-to-read
graphics and status indicators.
Each screen of the control displays all parameters and allows each to
be individually altered for maximum control over your process. Drying
and dewpoint monitors track your process and provide early warnings
to indicate a problem before it is too late.
The Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) and OptimizerTM mode streamline
your process to maximize energy savings and increase profits.
Optional Control Features

4RENDING3CREENS
Optional trending readout screens are available to view your drying

status from one central location. Easy-to-read screens graph
material temperature, air flow, air temperature, dewpoint and
differential pressure making the monitoring of your drying system
super simple.
Color-coded lines on each graph are dedicated to sensors located
throughout the system. Keys located below the graph indicate what
sensor is providing the information.
2ECIPE-ANAGEMENT
Save current dryer settings for a specific material with the optional recipe

management screen. Saved recipes can be instantly recalled when you
are processing the same type of material.
Up to 99 dryer recipes can be stored to the dryer’s control. Recipes
that are used with the dryer’s OptimizerTM mode can be saved and
later reused for worry-free and efficient material drying. Improve the
identification of each recipe by individually saving it with a name
that is unique to the type of material that your are processing.
(OPPER,OADER#ONTROL
Control up to two optional receivers with the addition of the

hopper loader control feature. Load time, pump time, purge time
and alarm checks can all be altered from the loader screens,
eliminating secondary loading controls and allowing all software to
be contained inside one electrical enclosure. Large user-friendly
icons and text make setting loader functions simple and easy. The
second loader control screen can operate a loader at the throat of a
processing machine or to fill an auxiliary hopper.
D-27
Specifications
!PPLICATION.OTES
All dryers are supplied with an aftercooler/intercooler as standard. The aftercooler/intercooler
reduces the temperature of the return air from the drying hopper, improving the efficiency
of the desiccant. The aftercooler/intercooler should be connected with the proper water flow
rate and temperature to attain the optimal throughput.
7HENTOUSECENTRALMODELS
Models W600 - W5000 EnergySmart® Dryers are all configured as central dryers. Central
dryers do not have process heaters. Central models dehumidify the process air, which is then
heated to the correct set point by a Heater Pack, Hopper Temperature Controller (HTC) or
! GasTrac Dryer (CGT).
When to use additional filtration
The standard return air cartridge filter is sized for the airflow of each dryer model and is
suited for most applications. You should consider adding an optional dust collector and/or
volatile trap if:
• The material contains excessive fines. An additional dust collector or cyclone will extend
time between filter cleaning.
• The material produces volatiles during drying which condense into a waxy or oily residue.
" # A volatile trap will help to protect the desiccant.
#HOOSE )NSTALLATION.OTES
BETWEEN
TWOCONTROL Wiring between process air heater, Heater Pack, and dryer where control for this heater is
located is not included. Maximum wire length between dryer and heat source is 100 feet
PLATFORMS
{30 meters}. Consult Conair or a qualified electrician to determine gauge of wire required for
distance. Maximum physical distance between dryer and hopper is 20 feet {6 meters}.
!LLEN "RADLEY#ONTROL 3IEMENS#ONTROL
-ODELS 7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

Drying temperature All models 100° - 375°F { 38° - 191°C } with options
A - Height 93.8 {238.3} 92.2 {234.2} 98.3 {249.7}
B - Width 49.3 {125.2} 53.9 {136.9} 58.2 {147.8}
C - Depth 72.4 {183.9} 106.6 {270.7} 108.3 {275.0} 123.6 {313.9}
Outlet/inlet hose diameter 8.0 {20.3} 12.0 {30.5}
Installed 1300 {590} 1400 {636} 1600 {726} 2000 {907}
Shipping 1495 {678} 1515 {687} 2620 {1188} 3385 {1535}
6OLTAGEstandard/central full load amps‡‡†
400 V/3 phase/50 Hz ‡ 90.3 / 35.4 117.8 / 35.4 182.0 / 72.2 189.3 / 79.5 216.9 / 79.6 253.7 / 89.0 288.3 / 96.1 377.5 / 103.0
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 80.2 / 32.4 104.8 / 32.4 160.5 / 64.9 167.8 / 72.2 192.2 / 72.7 224.3 / 80.9 255.6 / 88.3 334.3 / 95.4
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 63.6 / 25.4 82.7 / 25.4 127.0 / 50.6 132.7 / 56.3 152.3 / 56.8 176.4 / 61.8 200.9 / 67.2 263.1 / 72.3
7ATERREQUIREMENTS(for aftercooler/intercooler or optional precooler) §
Recommended temperature ** 45° - 85°F {7° - 29°C}
Water flow gal./min. {liters/min.} 6 - 25 {22.7 - 94.6} †† 12 - 40 {45.4 - 151.4} †† 15 - 50 {56.8 - 189.3} ††
Water connections NPT 1 1/2 inch
§
* Dryers W600-W5000 that are central dryers do not have process heaters. Heater When drying below 150°F {66°C} a precooler is required.
Packs, Hopper Temperature Controllers (HTC’s), or GasTrac Dryers (CGT’s) are used at ** Temperatures above or below the recommended levels may affect dryer performance.
the hopper for heating the process air. See the Hopper Temperature Controller (HTC) Tower, chiller or municipal water sources can be used.
and GasTrac Dryer (CGT) specification sheets for further technical information. Even
††
though Heater Packs are remote from the dryer, they are controlled by the dryer. Higher chilling water temperatures will require a greater flow rate.
‡‡
†
The first full load amps number listed includes current to operate the dryer and the FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
heat supply controlled by the dryer. The second full load amps number is current on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
required for the dryer only, when operated as a central dryer with heaters (more than systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
one) controlled and powered remotely. applied to the machine.
‡
Dryers running at 50 Hz will have 17% less airflow, and a 17% reduction in material Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the
throughput. most current information.
D-28
TPDX025-0317 DRYING QUALITY CONTROL $- ))-/$%,$29).'-/.)4/2
Assure Proper Drying for

Defect-Free Product
The DM-II Drying Monitor option can save you time and money,
and from the aggravation of dealing with improperly dried
material. The DM-II automatically monitors the temperature
profile inside your drying hopper within a pre-set temperature
band to protect you from overdrying or underdrying your
material. A warning alarm shown on the control display and light
tower alerts you to improper drying conditions. This advanced
notice provides time to diagnose and correct otherwise
undetected problems that can lead to defects in products.
In addition, the DM-II may be used to tune the dryer process
temperature to minimize energy consumption.
$- ))-ODEL
No Guesswork; Monitor Your Process
This valuable option can help you uncover

common drying problems that may exist, ` %ASYTOUSE
including: a failed or out-of-place process The DM-II can be used in automatic mode with just a few simple parameters set by the
RTD; improperly sized hoppers or dryers; operator or can be tuned to individual material requirements by adjusting the inputs on
drying or loading equipment failures; reduced several more screens on the DC-2 control.
airflow caused by dirty filters; kinked hoses ` !LERTSYOUTOPOSSIBLEDRYINGPROBLEMS
and other obstructions; a throughput change; Any temperature swing above or below the setpoints triggers a related alarm.
loss of power or overheated material.*
` )NTEGRATEDINTOTHE$# AND4OUCH6IEW4-CONTROLS
The DM-II is available as an option to the HY DM-II capabilities are built into both the TouchViewTM and DC-2 dryer controllers. No
packages on Carousel Plus Dryer models W50 stand alone panel, or board interface to contend with.
and MDCW50 and above. The drying monitor
can be fitted to 39 different sized CH, RW or ` !UTOMATEDMONITORING
ESH series hoppers. The dryer must have a The DM-II monitors the temperature profile of the material in the hopper using 6
DC-2 control and be dedicated to a single Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) sensors. These RTD sensors are located at evenly
drying hopper. A field retrofittable upgrade is spaced positions on a probe that has been installed in the drying hopper. Monitoring
available for existing DC-1 controllers. the six sensors creates an accurate hopper temperature profile. If the temperature
moves beyond the high or low setpoints, the DM-II alerts the operator with a passive
alarm displayed on the control display and a light tower that lights green during proper
operation, amber to indicate possible trouble or red to alert you that the dryer has
stopped due to an alarm condition.
` 4RENDINGGRAPHS
* The DM-II does not alert you to the specific drying When used in conjunction with a ControlWorks or EnergySmart system, the hopper
problem, however, the DC-2 control will identify most temperature profile is stored to memory.
dryer related faults.
D-29
TPDX025-0317 DRYING QUALITY CONTROL $- ))-/$%,$29).'-/.)4/2
Specifications
0ROBE-OUNTING!DAPTER+IT
(Includes half coupling, two
mounting plates, screws and
gasket)
./4% The mounting adapter kit will only

be included if the DM-II was ordered
as a retrofit kit. Otherwise, the
adapter plate will already be in place
on the hopper.
!NGLED0ROBE
Allows the DM-II to be used on
hoppers that have insufficient
clearance for correctly mounting
the probe around loading devices.
#OMMUNICATION/PTIONS 4HE$- ))PACKAGEINCLUDES

Information produced by the DM-II may be retrieved from • Drying monitoring probe
the DC-2 control using anyone of the following dryer • Connecting cable
communication options:
• Pre-wired dryer panel
• Modbus RTU EIA/RS-232 • Light tower
• Modbus RTU EIA/RS-485
./4% If your dryer does not have a DC-2 or TouchView
• Modbus RTU Ethernet control, you will need to purchase a control upgrade.
• DeviceNet
D-30
TPDX030-0317 DRYING QUALITY CONTROL $- I-/$%,$29).'-/.)4/2
Assure Proper Drying;

Defect-Free Products &
Energy Savings
Conair extends the legacy of the patented Drying Monitor with
the introduction of the DM3-i. Drying performance analysis
occurs inside the drying hopper providing you with early
detection of poor drying conditions and allowing you to correct
potential issues before you have processed improperly dried
material. With the DM3-i, you will have control of polymer
drying, make defect-free parts, save energy and increase your
profitability.
Now available as an independent touch panel, the DM3-i model
can monitor up to 30 hoppers – even non-Conair hoppers. The
DM3 is also available as a dryer option, embedded into the dryer
control. Contact Conair for more information on the DM3-e.
-ODEL$- I
Monitor Drying from Within the Hopper
The Drying Monitor consists of a unique,

6-zone, stainless steel temperature probe ` $ONTWASTETIMEENERGYORMATERIAL
installed in the drying hopper that senses The DM3 monitors the temperature profile inside the drying hopper.
the specific temperature profile required for
` %ARLYWARNINGSEARLYDETECTIONOFPROBLEMS
proper drying of your particular material.
Any out-of-spec temperature zone reading that may lead to incorrectly dried material is
Interpretation of that temperature profile from
shown for immediate correction.
the DM3-i monitor leads directly to predicting
under or over-dried material, inadequate air ` &ITSANYBRANDHOPPER
flow, clogged filters, heater failure, excess Any size hopper, of any brand may be easily fitted with a Drying Monitor Probe to report
throughput, unresponsive loading, over- on the state of your drying process, at any time.
capacity drying and many other conditions
that are likely to produce scrap and waste
time, energy and material. In addition, DM3-i
provides information for hopper temperature
trending, energy reduction and other data
logging all in one display. It’s web-enabled
too, so you can get that information on the go.
The DM3-i temperature profiles are your
visual assurance and recorded proof that your
resins have been held at supplier’s required
drying temperatures for the required drying 4HEMODEL$- ICANMONITORUPTOHOPPERSFORPROPERDRYINGPERFORMANCE
time. Trend data for all monitored hoppers is
retrievable for up to seven days and may be
exported directly to a spreadsheet of actual
resin residence times and temperatures.
D-31
TPDX030-0317 DRYING QUALITY CONTROL $- I-/$%,$29).'-/.)4/2
Features
%QUIPYOURDRYINGHOPPERSWITH$RYING-ONITORTEMPERATUREPROBE
(OPPER0ROBES 2EQUIREDMEASUREMENTSFOR
Unobtrusive, smooth, one piece, $RYING-ONITOR0ROBE
stainless steel Drying Monitor For easy fitting of the Drying
Probes are sized for each drying Monitor Probe into Conair hoppers,
hopper so they can relay precise " simply provide the model number
readings of 6 crucial temperature and serial number of the hopper.
zones in the drying hopper to the Other hoppers can be fitted by
!
DM3-i TouchView Panel. measuring the critical dimensions
# as shown below and then supplying
Hopper probes may be supplied
straight or angled to accommodate the measurements and engineering
loading equipment. The exclusive drawing to Conair.
adaptor plate allows for secure A = Straight section height
installation of the probe down from B = Hopper inside diameter
the top or up from the inside of the C = Straight section from loader
hopper. discharge
(OPPERSATAGLANCE 9OUR$RYING(OPPERINDETAIL !DVANCEDWARNING

Up to 30 hoppers are displayed and easily Each hopper being monitored by DM3-i When temperatures are not what they
accessed for review or changing settings will display its critical drying temperature should be, Drying Monitor will be first to
on the graphical touchscreen interface profile for examination and trending, and let you know with a flashing alarm banner
panel. most importantly, assuring proper drying and listing the alarm by date and time in
is taking place. the alarm log.
Specifications -ONITOR0ANEL
-ODEL $- I
#ONTROLBOXTYPE $- IMONITORPANEL $- IPROBEJUNCTIONBOX
!
A - Height 13.0 {330} 10.0 {254}
B - Width 14.0 {355} 8.0 {203}
C - Depth 8.0 {203} 4.0 {101} " #
7EIGHT lb {kg} &RONT6IEW 3IDEVIEW
Installed 29 {13}
0ROBE*UNCTION"OX
Shipping 36 {16}
Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair representative for the !
The DM3 is also available as a dryer option, embedded into the dryer control. Contact
Conair for more information on the DM3-e.
" #
&RONT6IEW 3IDE6IEW
D-32
TPDX037-0317 HOPPER DELIVERY AIR HEATERS (0(%!4%20!#+
Heat at the Hopper

Controlled by the Dryer
Conair’s new Heater Pack provides direct heat at the bottom
of the hopper, where you need it most, but is conveniently
controlled by the Conair’s dryer control. It’s no longer necessary
to make adjustments at the dryer, followed by moving to a
separate control to make adjustments at the hopper. Now all
adjustments to your drying process are convenient and quick, at
one location.
Another significant convenience and cost savings of the new
Heater Pack is that only a single power drop is required which
powers the dryer and the Heater Pack.
(EATER0ACK-ODEL(0
(shown with DC-T Dryer Control)
Energy Efficient Heat at the Hopper Inlet
Conair’s HTC Heat Boosters have been a

success for years. The new Heater Pack is ` &ULL COLORTOUCHSCREENAVAILABLE
an improvement on that design. Engineered In addition to operating the Heater Pack, the TouchView Control has intuitive screen
with new tube heaters that are not only navigation which allows you to easily view critical drying parameters such as dewpoint
energy efficient, but also heat quickly, the and temperature.
Heater Pack has taken all the aspects that ` 2EDUCEDENERGYCOSTS
you loved about the HTC (Hopper Temperature Heating the process air at the hopper inlet prevents heat loss and wasted energy. Conair
Controller) and improved them. has engineered the Heater Pack to be the most energy efficient method for hopper
Now instead of a seperate power drop and a heating.
seperate control for the hopper temperature, ` )NSTALLATIONSAVINGS
all control and power comes direct from your Now you only need one power drop - at the dryer. The dryer will not only control the
Conair dryer DC-T control. Heater Pack, it will also power it.
With a temperature range up to 350°F {178°C} ` /PTIMIZEDAIRFLOW
and a full complement of safety devices, Heater Packs have been designed to accept the dehumidified air at the top, heat the air,
a Conair Heater Pack is exceptional for and let it exit out the bottom of the heater, directly into the bottom of the hopper, where
providing safe, precise drying temperatures it naturally works its way up through your material for the most efficient material drying
inside the hopper. possible.
Available in a variety of sizes based on your
dryer size, hopper size, and application, the
Heater Pack can be chosen to perfectly suit
your needs.
D-33
Heater Pack Advantage
Material Material
Receiver Receiver
Heater
Pack
Drying
Hopper Drying
Hopper
HTC
Dryer Dryer
(Dehumidifier) (Dehumidifier) HTC Control
(EATER0ACKSETUP (4#SETUP
Conair’s HTC Hopper Temperature Controllers have a history of Installation and routing of both hard pipe and flexible hose is easier
being an efficient and reliable source of heat direct at the hopper and more efficient since the inlet of the Heater Pack is at the top.
inlet. The HP Heater Pack takes the best of the traditional HTC and • Floor space is open since hoses are no longer routed along the
improves upon that technology. floor.
Originally designed for use with Conair DH Series Hoppers and • No separate control - the HP is controlled at the dryer control
applications where high-efficiency is a must, the Heater Pack is now interface (DC-1, DC-2, DC-T, Allen-Bradley and Siemens).
available for both DH Series and CH Series Hoppers. The HP has
• Single electrical drop - the HP gets all it’s power from the dryer,
been engineered with several significant advantages over the HTC
making seperate power drops unnecessary.
models.
• The HP mounts higher on the hopper than the HTC, which
mounted to the hopper stand. This opens up the area around the
hopper stand.
Process Heater Information

0ROCESS-OTOR(P 2EGENERATION-OTOR(P 0ROCESS(EATERK7 2EGENERATION(EATERK7
W600 7.5 0.5 38 15
W800 7.5 0.5 38 15
W1000 7.5 0.5 38, 19 15
W1300 10 0.5 38, 38 19
W1600 15 0.5 38, 38 19
W2000 20 0.5 38, 38, 19 19
W2400 20 0.5 38, 38, 38 19
W3200 25 1 38, 38, 38, 19 38
W4000 30 1 38, 38, 38, 38 38
W5000 30 1 38, 38, 38, 38, 38 38
D-34
Heater Pack Sizing

(OPPER-ODELS #( #(AND$( #(AND$( #(AND$( #(
!PPROPRIATE(EATER0ACKMODELFOR7 3ERIES$RYER
W600 HP38 N/A
W800 HP57 N/A
W1000 HP57 N/A
W1300 N/A HP76 N/A
W1600 N/A HP76 N/A
W2000 N/A HP95
W2400 N/A HP114
W3200 N/A HP134
W4000 N/A HP190
W5000 N/A HP190
Cable and Conduit Sizing Requirements

(OPPER-ODELS 6OLTAGE 3IZEOF!MERICAN7IRE'UAGE!7' #ONDUIT3IZE 1UANTITYOF#ONDUIT
400 VAC 6 1.5 1
W600 460 VAC 6 1.5 1
575 VAC 8 1.5 1
400 VAC 6 1.5 1
W800 460 VAC 6 1.5 1
575 VAC 8 1.5 1
400 VAC 4 1.5 1
W1000 460 VAC 6 1.5 1
575 VAC 8 1.5 1
400 VAC 4 1.5 1
W1300 460 VAC 6 1.5 1
575 VAC 8 1.5 1
400 VAC 4 1.5 1
W1600 460 VAC 6 1.5 1
575 VAC 8 1.5 1
400 VAC 6 1.5 2
W2000 460 VAC 6 1.5 2
575 VAC 8 1.5 2
400 VAC 6 1.5 2
W2400 460 VAC 6 1.5 2
575 VAC 8 1.5 2
400 VAC 4 1.5 2
W3200 460 VAC 6 1.5 2
575 VAC 8 1.5 2
400 VAC 4 1.5 2
W4000 460 VAC 6 1.5 2
575 VAC 8 1.5 2
400 VAC 4 1.5 2
W5000 460 VAC 6 1.5 2
575 VAC 8 1.5 2
D-35
Specifications
" #
&
(ARD0IPE#ONNECTION &LEXIBLE4UBE#ONNECTION
)NSTALLATION.OTES
Wiring between process air heater, Heater Pack, and dryer where control for this heater is located is not included. Maximum wire length between dryer and heat source
is 100 feet {30 meters}. Consult Conair or a qualified electrician to determine gauge of wire required for distance. Maximum physical distance between dryer and
hopper is 20 feet {6 meters}.
-ODEL (0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
#AROUSEL0LUSDRYER 7
7 77 77 7 7 7
MODEL 7
Temperature range 150°- 375°F {66°-191°C}
Control type DC-1, DC-2, DC-T, TouchView Allen-Bradley and Siemens
$IMENSIONS inches {cm} and weight lb {kg}
Inlet size (OD) 8.0 {20.3} 12.0 {30.5}
Outlet size (OD) 5.0 {12.7} 8.0 {20.3} 5.0 {12.7} 8.0 {20.3} 12.0 {30.5} 8.0 {20.3} 12.0 {30.5} 8.0 {20.3} 12.0 {30.5}
A - Height 24.4 {62.1} 30.9 {78.5}
B - Width 10.2 {25.8} 17.7 {44.9} 17.8 {45.1} 21.0 {53.3} 28.3 {71.8}
C - Depth 16.5 {41.9} 12.8 {32.5} 16.9 {42.8} 22.1 {56.2} 24.7 {62.7} 26.6 {67.6} 31.0 {78.8} 26.6 {6} 31.0 {78.8} 29.4 {74.7} 32.8 {83.2}
D - Height of discharge
9.3 {23.6} 22.2 {56.4} 10.3 {26.3} 21.4 {54.5} 31.9 {81} 26.7 {67.9} 32.8 {83.2} 26.7 {67.9} 32.8 {83.2}
(below the heater box)
E - Height of flanged inlet
4.3 {11} 3.6 {9.1} 2.9 {7.5} 7.5 {19.1} 8.1 {20.6} 7.6 {19.4}
(above the heater box)
F - Height of slip inlet
16.6 {42.1} 15.8 {40.1} 15.2 {38.6} 25.7 {65.4} 26.4 {67} 25.9 {65.7}
Installed 100 {45.4} 175 {79.4} 170 {77.1} 205 {93} 230 {104.3} 260 {117.9} 295 {133.8} 310 {140.6} 295 {133.8} 310 {140.6} 320 {145.2} 365 {165.6}
* The HP model number reflects the kilowatts of each unit. For example, HP57 has a 57 kilowatt heater.
D-36
TPDX022-0317 HOPPER TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS (4#-/$%,3
Precise Central
Drying Control
Heat Boosters supply economical drying heat to individual drying
hoppers for the most efficient material pre-conditioning system
available. With a temperature range up to 350°F {178°C}, and a
full complement of safety devices, Heat Boosters are exceptional
for providing safe, precise temperatures for drying.
Each (OPPER4EMPERATURE#ONTROLLERis equipped with a

(EATER"OX(left) that connects directly to the drying hopper
and a precision $#TEMPERATURECONTROLLERRIGHT
Fast Responding, Energy Efficient Heaters
The HTC Heat Boosters feature tube type

heaters with fast responding, energy efficient, ` )NDIVIDUALHEATINGUNITS
open-wire resistance heaters located within Allows you to heat hoppers individually for your unique drying needs.
mica-lined stainless steel tubes. High
` 0RECISIONHEATCONTROL
temperature safety shut off protection is an Features dual display of setpoint and actual temperatures.
integral feature of each HTC.
` 3AFESURFACETEMPERATURE
The HTC controls feature a lockable, fused
Insulated heater box ensures safe surface temperature.
disconnect switch, solid state heater contactor,
isolation contactor for over temperature safety ` 3AFEOPERATION
protection and a proportioning temperature Redundant safety switches and alarms help eliminate accidents.
controller. The temperature is monitored and
controlled with a remote sensor located at the
hopper air inlet.
!CCURATESAFETEMPERATURECONTROL
Drying temperatures are set and monitored easily with the DC Control which displays
both setpoint and actual temperatures. Over/under temperature and temperature
deviation faults are also clearly alerted along with low airflow conditions, which
prevent operation during hopper cleaning or without airflow from the central dryer.
D-37
TPDX022-0317 HOPPER TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS (4#-/$%,3
Specifications
(4#FOR#AROUSEL0LUS$RYERS
" #
$
&
*
' (
-ODEL(4# (4# (

(4# (
(4# (
(4# (
(4# (
(4# (
#AROUSEL0LUSDRYERMODEL 7 77 7 7 7 7

Temperature range 150° - 375° F {66° - 191° C}
Flow rate cfm 300 400 500 800 1200 1600 2500
Pressure drop @ flow rate
inches WC† 3.0 1.8 2.3 4.0 3.8 5.9 6.4
{mm} WC† {76.2} {45.7} {58.4} {101.6} {96.5} {149.9} {162.6}
Heater box dimensions
Inlet size (OD) 8 12
Outlet size (OD) 8 12
A - Height 31.4 {79.8} 27.5 {69.9} 27.0 {68.6} 31.0 {78.7} 34.0 {86.4} 36.4 {92.5}
B - Width 10.1 {25.7} 13.6 {34.5} 16.0 {40.6} 18.0 {45.7} 24.2 {61.5}
C - Depth 10.7 {27.2} 10.9 {27.7} 16.0 {40.6} 17.0 {43.2}
D - Height of discharge nozzle
1.75 {4.4} 1.5 {3.8} 2.0 {5.1} 1.0 {2.5} 2.0 {5.1} 1.0 {2.5}
E - Height of inlet nozzle
10.6 {26.9} 7.1 {18.0} 8.0 {20.3} 10.0 {25.4} 13.0 {33.0} 15.4 {39.1}
(below the heater box)
Installed weight lb {kg}‡ 38 {17} 37 {17} 78 {35} 93 {43} 102 {46} 131 {59}
Control center dimensions
F - Height 24.0 {61.0} 36.0 {91.4} 48.0 {122.0} 60.0 {152.4}
G - Width 24.0 {61.0} 30.0 {76.2} 36.0 {91.4} 42.0 {106.7}
H - Depth 10.0 {25.4} 12.0 {30.5}
J - Clearance for heat sink 3.0 {7.6}
Installed weight lb {kg} 150.0 {68.0} 180.0 {81.6} 250.0 {113.0} consult Conair
6OLTAGE full load amps §
400V/3 phase/50 Hz 44 87 131 175 261 381
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 38 76 114 152 227 340
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 30 61 91 122 182 272
* The HTC model number reflects the kilowatts of each unit. For example, HTC-60 has a 60 kilowatt heater.
†
The unit of measure WC is water column.
‡
Weights are approximate.
§
D-38
TPDX009-0317 GAS DEHUMIDIFIED DRYING'!342!#02/#%33!)2(%!4%2
Retrofit Electric Dryers

with Efficient Gas
Retrofit your existing electric dryer to cost effective natural gas
with the Conair GasTrac Process Air Heater.
The unique combustion airflow system of the GasTrac

consistently maintains drying temperatures under any
conditions, while cutting energy costs below that of electric
resistance heaters. The GasTrac Process Air Heater uses your
dryer’s desiccant beds, circulating air through the GasTrac heat
exchanger and hopper. Because the GasTrac is designed to
convert your existing electric dryer, realizing your energy savings
has never been easier.
-ODEL#'4
Retrofit for Lower Burning Emissions
Conair’s GasTrac air heater uses a state-of-

the-art radiant heat burner with one of the ` #LEANRADIANTHEATBURNING
lowest emissions levels. The GasTrac has one of the lowest emissions of any burner available in the world
today. The ceramic/fiber matrix burner couples high heat transfer with extremely
Gas-fired heaters substantially lower energy low emissions.
costs and provide energy savings up to 70%
over an equal amount of electricity. The ` 3PACESAVINGCONSTRUCTION
indirect heat exchanger, designed completely Compact design provides a smaller footprint for easy out-of-the-way placement of
of stainless steel, separates process air from your dryer.
the combustion air, eliminating any possibility
of contamination. The ceramic/fiber matrix ` 5NIQUEAIRFLOWSYSTEM
burner provides safe, high-efficiency radiant The process airflow is heated indirectly as it flows around the heat exchanger. It never
heat. comes in contact with the combustion airflow and contamination.
Off-the-shelf controls and gas components ` %XCEEDSINDUSTRYREQUIREMENTS

monitor every function of the heater and are All GasTrac components meet or exceed industry requirements for UL, AGA, CGA, FM,
easy to maintain. Automatic shutdown occurs NFPA and IAS.
if pressure switches sense unsafe conditions.
D-39
TPDX009-0317 GAS DEHUMIDIFIED DRYING'!342!#02/#%33!)2(%!4%2
Specifications
%MISSIONS
Primary excess air 10 - 30%
Oxygen (O2) (ideal 3 - 4%) 2 - 5%

!
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 9 - 10.5%
Carbon Monoxide (CO) <10 ppm corrected to 3% O2

NOX <20 ppm corrected to 3% O2
Unburned hydrocarbons <10 ppm corrected to 3% O2
!LL'AS4RACCOMPONENTSMEET
# UL372, UL795, FM, CGA, AGA, NFPA 54, NFPA 79, NFPA 86 and IAS
"
-ODELS #'4 #'4 #'4 #'4 #'4

0ERFORMANCECHARACTERSTICS
Temperature range °F {°C} 250 - 350 {122 - 177}
Maximum flue temperature °F {°C} 750 {399}
Combustion blower 0.5 Hp peripheral 1 Hp peripheral
Ignition source Spark igniter, interrupted
Burner type Metal-ceramic
Minimum burner capacity BTU/hr 40,000 75,000 90,000 125,000 150,000
Maximum burner capacity BTU/hr 150,000 225,000 350,000 500,000 700,000
'ASCONSUMPTION

CFH @250°F {121°C} L/hour 50 {1416} 90 {2549} 105 {2973} 150 {4248} 230 {6513}
CFH @350°F {177°C} L/hour 140 {3964} 215 {6088} 325 {9203} 465 {13167} 675 {19114}
Gas pressure to regulator In. H2O {kPa} 10 - 20 {2.49 - 4.98}
Gas pressure from regulator In. H2O {kPa} 4 - 7 {0.99 - 1.74}
Gas heating rate BTU/ft3 1000
A - Height 54 {1372} 61{1549}
B - Width 29 {737} 37 {940}
C - Depth 66 {1676} 64 {1626} 74 {1880}
Air inlet/outlet, OD 8 {203} 12 {300}
Gas inlet size (NPT) inches 3/4 1
Exhaust flue, OD 6 {152}
Installed 600 {272}
Shipping 700 {317} 600 {272}
6OLTAGEFull load amps †
400 V/3 phase/50 Hz 3.0 6.2 1.6 1.3 3.0
240 V/3 phase/60 Hz 3.0 10.9 2.5 2.0 3.0
580 V/3 phase/60 Hz 3.0 5.4 6.7 3.0
* Designed for natural gas. For alternate fuel, contact your Conair representative.
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the most current information.
D-40
TPDX024-0317 HOT AIR DRYER(!$-/$%,3
Perfect for Preheating

Non-Hygroscopic Materials
For non-hygroscopic materials (like Polyethylene and
Polypropylene) compressed air drying and desiccant drying is
not necessary. Using simple heated air can remove the surface
moisture from the pellets. Hot Air Dryers are a simple system,
consisting of a heater, a blower, a temperature controller, and
a filter. This system is typically paired with a drying hopper for
effective drying of non-hygroscopic resins. The system can also
be used for pre- or post-drying of hygroscopic resins that have
been, or will be thoroughly dried by a desiccant dehumidifying
dryer.
Using a modular design, the HAD system can be easily configured

to work with various plant layouts and drying configurations.
Remove Surface Moisture with Simple Heated Air
Hot Air Dryers for drying resin use exactly

the same drying hoppers as dehumidifying ` $ESIGNEDFORPREHEATINGNON HYGROSCOPICPELLETS
desiccant dryers, and rely on a constant flow The HAD was designed to convey continuous heated air for removing surface
of heated air through the hopper to predictably moisture from pellets that only capture moisture on the pellet surface.
remove surface moisture from the pellets. ` -ODULARCONSTRUCTION
The only difference is that HAD dryers do not Adapting easily to every plant environment is just one advantage of the modular
recirculate the air that passes through the construction. Additionally, the modular construction allows for designing perfect
hopper. The expelled air passes through an sizing configurations for your process needs.
exhaust filter sock.
` 4HROUGHPUTSFROM LBSPERHOURINTHEMODULARUNITS
Conair also offers an integrated housing Available in five models to best suit your requirements.
package, similar to Conair’s desiccant dryers,
` 4HROUGHPUTSFROM LBSPERHOURINTHEINTEGRATEDFRAMEUNITS
utilizing the heater, blower, inlet filter, and
Available in four models for mobility and smaller throughput needs.
control, into a single, floor standing unit with
casters for user portability. These integrated ` 4EMPERATURESUPTOª&
units have CFM capabilities from 75 to 250 Designed to blow the perfect heated air for removing the surface moisture from the
cfm, providing throughputs from 150 to 400 pellet without unnecessarily over drying material.
lbs/hr.
D-41
Features
01 05
Centrifugal Blower Assembly Insulated Hose
07
06 02 06
02
05 Control Center Process Temperature RTD
03 07
03
Electrical Heater Assembly Outlet Filter Sock (optional)
01 04
04 Hose
Specifications
(OT!IR$RYERMODEL(!$ (!$"LOWER
o o o o o
2ECOMMENDED-ODEL(4#
(4# " (4# ! (4# ! (4# ! (4# ! (4# !o
"
Flow rate cfm 300 400 500 800 1200 1600 2500
Disc. pressure @ flow rate
inches {mm} WC ‡ 25 {635} 32 {813} 30 {762} 28 {711} 30 {762} 33 {762}
Motor Hp {kW} 5 {3.7} 7.5 {5.6} 10 {7.5} 15 {11.2} 25 {18.6}
!
Outlet size selection (OD) 5 8 12
A - Height 42 {107}
B - Width 33 {84}
C - Length 39 {99} 42 {107} 80 {203} 82 {208}
Installed 250 {113} 320 {145} 380 {172} 500 {227} 700 {317} 900 {408} &RONTVIEW
6OLTAGESfull load amps of blower only §
400V/3 phase/50 Hz 9.1 13.2 16.8 25.2 40.8

460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 7.6 11.0 14.0 21.0 34.0
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 6.1 9.0 11.0 17.0 27.0
.OISELEVEL
with standard soundproofing < 90 dbA @ 5 ft.
* For single hopper system.
†
The HTC model number reflects the kilowatts of each unit. For example, HTC-60 has a 60 kilowatt heater.
‡
§
Full load amps apply to the Hot Air Dryer (blower) only, see reverse side for heater amp draw.
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power
#
circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
3IDEVIEW
** Standard soundproofing will be included only when the rating exceeds 90 dbA.
D-42
Specifications
(4#FOR(!$ #ONTROL#ENTER
" #
$
!
&
*
%
' (
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODEL(4# (4# "
(4# !
(4# !
(4# !
(4# !
(4# !
(OTAIRDRYERMODEL AND

Temperature range 120° - 250°F {49° - 121°C}
Flow rate cfm 300 400 500 800 1200 1600 2500
Pressure drop @ flow rate
inches {mm} WC † 3.0 {76.2} 5.0 {127.0} 3.2 {81.2} 5.4 {137.2} 6.1 {155.0} 6.4 {163.0} 8.0 {203.2}
$IMENSIONSn(EATERBOXinches {cm}
Inlet size (OD) 5 8 12
Outlet size selection (OD) 5 8 12
A - Height 31.4 {79.8} 27.5 {69.9} 32.0 {81.3} 31.0 {79.0} 34.0 {86.3}
B - Width 10.1 {25.7} 13.6 {34.5} 15.9 {40.4} 16.0 {40.6} 18.0 {45.7}
C - Depth 10.7 {27.2} 10.9 {28.0} 16.0 {40.6} 17.0 {43.2} 20.0 {50.8}
D - Height of discharge nozzle above heater box 0 {0} 5.9 {15.0} 2.0 {5.1} 1.0 {2.5} 2.0 {5.1} 1.0 {2.5}
E - Height of inlet nozzle below the heater box 8.0 {20.3} 11.4 {30.0} 8.0 {20.3} 11.0 {27.9} 13.0 {33.0}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTn(EATERBOXlb {kg}
Installed 37 {17} 58 {26} 78 {35} 93 {42} 102 {46} 131 {59}
$IMENSIONSn#ONTROLCENTERinches {cm}
F - Height 24.0 {61.0} 36.0 {91.4} 48.0 {122.0} 60.0 {152.4}
G - Width 24.0 {61.0} 30.0 {76.2} 36.0 {91.4} 42.0 {106.7}
H - Depth 10.0 {25.4} 12.0 {30.5}
J - Clearance for heat sink 3.0 {7.6}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTn#ONTROLCENTERlb {kg}
Installed 150.0 {68.0} 180.0 {81.6} 250.0 {113.0} consult Conair
6OLTAGESfull load amps ‡
400V/3 phase/50 Hz 44 87 131 175 261

460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 38 76 114 152 227
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 30 61 91 122 182
* The HTC model number reflects the kilowatts of each unit. For example, HTC-60 has a 60 kilowatt heater.
†
‡
Full load amps apply to the Hopper Temperature Controller (heater) only, see reverse side for blower amp draw.
D-43
D-44
TPDX006-0717 DRYING HOPPERS#(3%2)%3).35,!4%$(/00%23
Efficient Drying with

Minimum Downtime
CH series drying hoppers save you time, energy and money by
delivering consistent, efficient drying and fast, easy clean outs.
Conair hoppers are designed to promote even heat distribution
and mass material flow to ensure adequate drying throughout
the hopper. Large access doors and smooth interior surfaces
keep downtime for material changes to a minimum.
We offer a wide range of hopper sizes, with capacities from
18 to 31,500 lb/ft3 {288.3 to 504,581.6 kg/m3}.
-ODEL#(
-ODEL#(
-ODEL#(
Improve Product Quality, Lower Operating Costs
All hoppers may look the same, but they’re

not. Hopper design can influence three ` 1UICK CLEANDESIGN
critical parameters that affect overall drying Large hinged doors, smooth walls and removable spreader cones make cleaning fast
performance: airflow, drying temperature and and easy.
drying time. ` #ONSISTENTDRYINGTIME
The shallow cone angles and perforated Don’t let your material leave the drying hopper before its time. Conair’s air inlet design,
material spreaders found in some hopper smooth material/air spreaders and steep cone angles promote uniform mass material
designs can cause surface friction that holds flow. This means material at every level has been exposed to drying air for the same
dry material in the hopper while wet material amount of time before leaving the hopper.
flows into the process. ` 5NIFORMAIRHEATDISTRIBUTION
Conair hoppers have steep cone angles and Conair hoppers introduce heated drying air low in the cone of the hopper, ensuring that
smooth interior surfaces that promote mass material at all levels in the hopper will be dry when you’re ready to process it.
material flow. This ensures that all material ` 0REVENTSENERGYLOSS
has dried at the same rate before it leaves the Insulated side walls prevent the heat loss that occurs with uninsulated hoppers. This
hopper. means consistent temperature levels throughout the hopper, better overall drying
Our insulated side walls prevent the heat performance, and energy savings for you.
loss that can drive up energy costs and
keep material along the outer walls of the
hopper from attaining the required drying
temperature.
D-45

3ELECTTHERIGHTHOPPERFORYOURAPPLICATION
Hopper design can determine whether your material is dry when it enters the process, as well as how easy the hopper is to clean between
material changes.
)NSULATEDSIDEWALLS maintain #ONAIR$RYING(OPPER /THER(OPPER$ESIGNS

temperature at desired level,
prevent heat loss and protect (EATLOSSTHROUGHuninsulated
workers from hot surfaces. side walls.
-ASSMATERIALFLOW
#ENTERhFUNNELvFLOW induced
Smooth surfaces and steep
by a shallow cone angle
cone angles ensure that each
allows wet material to enter
pellet is exposed to heated
the process.
drying air for the specified
drying time.
%VENAIRHEATDISTRIBUTION
0ERFORATEDMETALinhibits
throughout the hopper.The air
mass material flow and can
spreader has a drop tube that
be difficult to clean.
forces drying air to material at
the bottom of the hopper.
!LARGEACCESSDOOR less than 5NEVENHEATDISTRIBUTION No
EASILYREMOVABLESPREADER 60˚ cone angle 60˚ cone angle drying air is forced into the
CONEANDSMOOTHINTERIORWALLS
bottom of the hopper.
minimize downtime for clean-
out and material changes.
Options and Accesories

!LL-ODELS -ODELS#(#(#(AND#(
&LOOR3TAND • 4HERMOMETER
(standard on CH39 and CH44 hoppers) For the inlet or outlet of the drying hopper.
Stands can be bolted to the floor or • -ATERIAL,EVEL3ENSORAND"RACKET
fitted with casters. Stands designed to For mounting on strip sight glasses on insulated hoppers only.
fit over a gaylord are available for larger
• -ODULAR0RECISION3LIDE'ATE
hopper models.
For above the drain port, to allow material sampling without
(OPPER,OADERS draining the hopper.
Conair vacuum loaders and receivers • (AND FILL,ID
mount easily to the top of the hopper. For hand filling batches or hopper storage.
Select from a wide range of capacities • 0ASSIVATION4REATMENT
to accommodate your throughput. Available only on stainless steel hoppers.
• 3TRIP3IGHT'LASS
• $ISTRIBUTION"OXES For viewing material levels within the hopper.
Mount beneath the hopper to help convey the dried material to -ODELS#(#(AND#(
the processing machine.
• 3TRIP3IGHT'LASS
• 3PECIAL0AINT
For viewing material levels within the hopper.
Automotive or non-automotive paint (available only on carbon
steel)
D-4
Specifications
!
! !
"
"
"
#( #(
CH10-0.5
CH10-1 #( #(
CH10-1.5 #( #(
&IGURE &IGURE &IGURE
Hopper extension
on CH39-42 only
" " ! "

# ! # #
#( #(

17.5" #( 21" #( 21" #(
#( #( #(
$ $ $
Hopper extension
on CH100-900
Hopper extension
on CH74-487 Hopper extension
on CH100-675
Hopper extension Hopper extension

on all models on CH74-366
except CH54-70
and CH64-158
A
! !
"
#( #(
#( " # #(
"
# #( # #(
#( .OTEThe air
#( inlet on the
#( CH100 Series is
#( #( located on the
#( 20"
#( opposite side of
20" 20"
#( #( the hopper.
$ $ $

+EY 4OPFORHOPPERLOADERS "OTTOMATDISCHARGE
3 equally spaced 4 equally spaced )" 5 x 5 in. )" 7 x 7 in. )"

3IGHTGLASS mounting clips on mounting clips on a {127 x 127 mm} {178 x 178 mm} 16 bolt holes, 7/16 in.
a 10.5 in. {267 mm} 16.375 in. {416 mm} bolt pattern; 4 bolt pattern; 4 {11 mm}, on a 16.25 in.
!IRINLETOUTLET diameter bolt circle bolt holes, {413 mm} square plate
)4 diameter bolt circle bolt holes,
)4 7/16 in. {11 mm} 9/16 in. {14 mm}
D-4
Specifications
-ODEL #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #(
&IGURE.UMBER &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE
Capacity ft3 {liter} 0.5 {14} 1.0 {28} 1.5 {42} 2 {57} 3 {85} 4 {113} 6 {170} 8 {227} 12 {340} 15 {425}
Capacity @ 35 lb/ft3 lbs 18 35 53 70 105 140 210 280 420 525
A - Inside diameter 10 {25} 14 {36} 18 {46} 24 {61}
B - Hopper height 25 {64} 39 {99} 50 {127} 41 {104} 52 {132} 58 {147} 44 {112} 64 {163} 60 {152} 75.5 {192} 91.5 {232}
C - Height with stand* 54 {137} 68 {173} 79 {201} 70 {178} 81 {206} 87 {221} 73 {185} 93 {236} 89 {226} 89.5 {227} 105.5 {168}
D - Footprint w/stand in {cm} sq. 31 {79} 34 {86}
Inlet size (OD) 1.75 {4.4} 2 {5.1} 2.5 {6.4}
Outlet size (OD) 2 {5.1} 2.5 {6.4} 3 {7.6}
Material discharge (ID) 2 {5.1} 2.5 {6.4}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Installed weight (hopper only) 40 {18} 50 {23} 70 {32} 80 {36} 95 {43} 110 {50} 145 {66} 170 {77} 210 {95} 230 {104} 240 {109}
-OUNTINGINTERFACES
Hopper loader (top) IT06 IT07
Material discharge (bottom) IB02
-ODEL #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #(
&IGURE.UMBER &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE
Capacity ft3 {liter} 18 {509} 21 {595} 28 {793} 35 {991} 42 {1189} 58 {1643} 70 {1982} 85 {2407} 99 {2804} 114 {3228} 129 {3653}
Capacity @ 35 lb/ft3 lbs 630 735 980 1225 1470 2030 2450 2975 3465 3990 4515
A - Inside diameter 24 {61} 33 {84} 39 {99} 44 {112} 54 {137}
B - Hopper height 105.5 {268} 88 {224} 102 {259} 103 {262} 113 {287} 123 {312} 103 {262} 121 {307} 133 {338} 139 {353} 151 {384}
C - Height with stand* 119.5 {304} 109 {277} 123 {312} 124 {315} 134 {340} 144 {366} 123 {312} 141 {358} 153 {389} 159 {404} 171 {434}
D - Footprint w/stand in {cm} sq. 34 {87} 43 {109} 49 {125} 54 {137} 66 {168}
Inlet size (OD) 2.5 {6.4} 5 {12.7} 5 {12.7} or 8 {20.3}
Outlet size (OD) 3 {7.6} 5 {12.7} 5 {12.7} or 8 {20.3}
Material discharge (ID) 2.5 {6.4} 3 {7.6} 6 {15.2}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Installed weight (hopper only) 250 {113} 450 {204} 700 {318} 800 {363} 900 {408} 950 {431} 1100 {499} 1250 {567} 1450 {658} 1550 {703} 1650 {748}
-OUNTINGINTERFACES
Hopper loader (top) IT07
Material discharge (bottom) IB02 IB03 IB09
-ODEL #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #( #(
&IGURE.UMBER &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE
Capacity ft3 {liter} 158 {4475} 187 {5296} 215 {6089} 248 {7023} 245 {6938} 366 {10365} 487 {13792} 450 {12743} 675 {19114} 900 {25485}
Capacity @ 35 lb/ft3 lbs 5530 6545 7525 8680 8575 12810 17045 15750 23625 31500
A - Inside diameter 64 {163} 74 {188} 100 {254}
B - Hopper height 145 {368} 159 {434} 175 {445} 194 {493} 173 {439} 221 {561} 268 {681} 186 {472} 234 {594} 283 {719}
C - Height with stand* 165 {419} 179 {488} 195 {495} 214 {544} 193 {490} 241 {612} 288 {732} 206 {523} 254 {645} 303 {770}
D - Footprint w/stand in {cm} sq. 76 {193} 86 {218} 120 {305}
Inlet size (OD) 8 {20.3} 12 {30.5} 12 {30.5}
Outlet size (OD) 8 {20.3} 12 {30.5} 12 {30.5}
Material discharge (ID) 6 {15.2} 8 {20.3} 11.875 {30.2}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Installed weight (hopper only) 1850 {839} 2050 {930} 2150 {975} 2250 {1021} 3230 {1465} 3830 {1737} 5030 {2282} 9750 {4423} 10800 {4899} 11850 {5375}
-OUNTINGINTERFACES
* Add 5 inches {12.7 cm} to the height, if you order optional casters.
D-4
TPDX031-0317 DRYING HOPPERS$(3%2)%3).35,!4%$(/00%23
Additional Insulation for

Higher Temperature
Materials
DH Series Drying Hoppers save you time, energy and money by
delivering consistent, efficient drying.
Conair hoppers are designed to promote even heat distribution
and mass material flow to ensure adequate drying throughout
the hopper. Large access doors and smooth interior surfaces
keep downtime for material changes to a minimum.
We offer a wide range of hopper sizes, with capacities from 70
to 487 ft3 {1.98 to 13.79 m3}.
$((OPPER
(Shown with W Series Dryer
and optional hard piping kit.)
Greater Volume of Hot Material; Less Energy
All hoppers may look the same, but they’re

not. Hopper design can influence three ` 1UICK CLEANDESIGN
critical parameters that affect overall drying Large hinged doors, smooth walls and removable spreader cones make cleaning fast
performance: airflow, drying temperature and and easy.
drying time. ` 5NIFORMMATERIALFLOWFORMORECONSISTENTDRYING
The shallow cone angles and perforated Don’t let your material leave the drying hopper before its time. Conair’s air inlet design,
material spreaders found in some hopper smooth material/air spreaders and steep cone angles promote uniform mass material
designs can cause surface friction that holds flow. This means material at every level has been exposed to drying air for the same
dry material in the hopper while wet material amount of time before leaving the hopper.
flows into the process. ` %NGINEEREDTOOPTIMIZEDRYINGTHROUGHOUTTHEHOPPER
Conair hoppers have steep cone angles and Conair hoppers introduce heated drying air low in the cone of the hopper, ensuring
smooth interior surfaces that promote mass that material at all levels in the hopper will be dry when you’re ready to process it. The
material flow. This ensures that all material spreader of the DH Series has been redesigned for improved air distribution in the cone
has dried at the same rate before it leaves the section, and better process air to resin contact throughout the hopper.
hopper. ` 4HICKERINSULATIONPREVENTSHEATLOSSSAVESENERGY
Our insulated side walls prevent the heat Compared to our CH Series Hoppers, the DH Series has three inches of additional insu-
loss that can drive up energy costs and lation all the way around, and has been engineered to keep large volumes of material
keep material along the outer walls of the at high temperature for a longer amount of time. Insulated side walls prevent the heat
hopper from attaining the required drying loss that occurs with uninsulated hoppers. This means consistent temperature levels
temperature. throughout the hopper, better overall drying performance, and energy savings for you.
D-49
Benefits
3ELECTTHERIGHTHOPPERFORYOURAPPLICATION
Hopper design can determine whether your material is dry when it enters the process, as well as how easy the hopper is to clean between
material changes.
%XTRAINSULATIONINTHESIDE
WALLS maintain temperature at #ONAIR$RYING(OPPER /THER(OPPER$ESIGNS
desired level, prevent heat
loss and protect workers (EATLOSSTHROUGHuninsulated
from hot surfaces. side walls
-ASSMATERIALFLOW
#ENTERhFUNNELvFLOW induced
Smooth surfaces and steep
by a shallow cone angle
cone angles ensure that each
allows wet material to enter
pellet is exposed to heated
the process.
drying air for the specified
drying time.
%VENAIRHEATDISTRIBUTION
0ERFORATEDMETALinhibits
throughout the hopper.The re-
mass material flow and can
designed spreader improves air
be difficult to clean.
distribution and provides better
process air to resin contact
throughout the hopper.
less than 5NEVENHEATDISTRIBUTION No
!LARGEACCESSDOOR 60˚ cone angle 60˚ cone angle drying air is forced into the
ANDSMOOTHINTERIORWALLS bottom of the hopper.
minimize downtime for clean-
out and material changes.
Options Features
• /PTIONALHARDPIPEKIT • (OPPERLOADERMOUNTS
Recommended for pipe sizes 8 inches and Conair vacuum loaders and receivers mount
above, provides better airflow and a more easily to the top of the hopper. Select from
finished look with less maintenance required a wide range of capacities to accommodate
than typical flex tubing. your throughput.
• /PTIONALACCESSLADDERWITHHANDRAIL • $RYINGMONITORPROBEANCHOR
For safety and ease of access. The cones of the DH series hoppers include an
• /PTIONALHOPPERMOUNTEDCYCLONE anchor location for the drying monitor probe
The cyclone can be mounted left or right for near the bottom of the hopper for increased
your application needs. stability. The RTD units inside the probe can
be replaced without removing the probe.
• /PTIONALSPECIALPAINT
Automotive or non-automotive paint. • 3TRIPSIGHTGLASS
For viewing material levels within the hopper.
• /PTIONALHEATERPACK
The heater packs for these hoppers mount so • &LOORSTAND
that air flows in the top and out the bottom. Stands can be bolted to the floor.
This keeps the area under the heat pack clear
and keeps the hose off of the floor.
• /PTIONALGAYLORDFLOORSTAND
Allows for gaylord bin to fit below the hopper.
• /PTIONALDISTRIBUTIONBOXES
Mount beneath the hopper to help convey the
dried material to the processing machine.
D-50
Accessories
A (EATER0ACK designed The optional ,ADDERAND(AND

specifically for applications 2AIL provide sturdy, safe and easy
requiring a DH hopper, has been access to the top of the hopper.
engineered to increase efficiency Having the ladder and hand
and ease installation. Design rail simplifies maintenance and
advantages include: installation tasks for loaders, RTD
probes, and other accessories
• hot air from the Heater Pack that are on top of the hopper.
enters directly into the bottom Simple maintenance procedures
of the hopper. are convenient and quick, saving
• more efficient routing to the time and money. Made from
Heater Pack inlet for hard industrial grade steel and painted
piping or flex hose. safety yellow, the ladder and
hand rail are not only functional,
• increased open floor space
but add to the professional
between the dryer and hopper
finished look of the hopper and
since hoses are not routed your plant.
along the floor.
An optional (OPPER-OUNTED
An optional (ARD0IPING+IT
#YCLONE can be placed on either
(Conair highly recommends this
the right or left side of the DH
accessory for line sizes of eight
hopper, based on what works
inches and above) can be used
best for your application. The
as an upgrade over standard
cyclone provides an added layer
flex hose. Hard piping kits are
of protection for your dryer.
recommended because they:
Ideal for PET applications or
applications which utilize regrind • eliminate the possibility of sag
with dust and particles, the or collapse, especially around
cyclone: corners where these are
• has no moving parts, and no common issues with flex hose.
filter to clean. Simply dump • eliminate the possibility of
the canister when necessary. restricted air flow due to hose
• uses cyclonic action to damage (collapse, puncture,
separate dust from the air leaking, moisture infiltration).
before it reaches the dryer. • minimize maintenance needs.
• is mounted directly to • create a more permanent
the hopper, decreasing finished appearance.
footprint size and floor space • reduce air flow drag due to the
requirements around the smooth interior surface.
hopper.
/PTIONS!CCESSORIES.OTES
Heater pack adds to the overall width of the DH Hopper. Spacial considerations are: All models add 17.5 inches
{44.5 cm} to overall width for box (not including piping).
Optional cyclone adds to the overall width of the DH Hopper. Spacial considerations are: DH54 add 9.4 inches
{24.0 cm}, DH64 add 15.0 inches {38.1 cm} and DH74 add 15.0 inches {38.1 cm}.
Optional access ladder and handrail add 41 inches {104 cm} to height and 40 inches {102 cm} to depth of the
hopper.
4OPVIEWWITHOPTIONSADDED
D-51
Specifications
$( $( $(
&IGURE
4OPVIEW 4OPVIEW 4OPVIEW
&IGURE
&IGURE
&IGURE
! !
!
-OUNTING)NTERFACES
" &IGURE
Top for hopper loaders Bottom at discharge
#
IT07 IB09
4 equally spaced 16 bolt holes, 7/16 inches
mounting clips on a {11 mm}, on a 16.25 inches
16.375 inches {416 mm} {413 mm} square plate
diameter bolt circle
$(HOPPER
FRONTVIEW
$
-ODEL $( $( $( $( $( $( $( Specification Notes
&IGURE.UMBER
&IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS * Note that the different figures
represent different hopper sizes
Capacity ft3 {liter} 70 {1982} 85 {2407} 99 {2804} 114 {3228} 129 {3653} 158 {4475} 187 {5296}
within a single model size range.
Capacity @ 35 lb/ft3 lbs 2450 2975 3465 3990 4515 5530 6545 For example, Figure 1 represents
$IMENSIONS inches {cm}† a DH74-215, the grayed extension
A - Inside diameter 54 {137} 64 {163} to the height shown at Figure 2
B - Hopper height 107 {272} 119 {301} 137 {347} 140 {354} 153 {387} 147 {373} 162 {411} represents a DH74-300, and so
C - Height with stand 127 {324} 139 {353} 157 {399} 160 {406} 173 {439} 167 {424} 182 {462} on. Depending on which model
D - Footprint w/stand in {cm} sq. 71 {181} 81 {206} DH hopper you order, and what
options you choose, your hopper
Inlet size (OD) 8.0 {20}
may appear slightly different
Outlet size (OD) 8.0 {20} than the graphic. Refer to the
Material discharge (ID) 6.0 {15} specifications chart for specific
7EIGHT lb {kg} dimensions.
Installed weight (hopper only) 1568 {706} 1828 {823} 1953 {879} 1973 {888} 2066 {930} 2320 {1044} 2439 {1098} †
Note that adding options changes
-OUNTINGINTERFACES overall dimensions of the hopper.
Hopper loader (top) IT07 See the notes on the Options
Material discharge (bottom) IB09 and Accessories pages for more
details.
-ODEL $( $( $( $( $( $(
Specifications may change
&IGURE.UMBER
&IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE without notice. Consult a Conair
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS representative for the most current
Capacity ft3 {liter} 215 {6089} 248 {7023} 245 {6938} 300 {8496} 366 {10365} 487 {13,792} information.
Capacity @ 35 lb/ft3 lbs 7525 8680 8575 10500 12810 17045
$IMENSIONS inches {cm}†
A - Inside diameter 64 {163} 74 {188}
B - Hopper height 175 {445} 196 {498} 170 {431} 191 {485} 212 {539} 261 {663}
C - Height with stand 195 {495} 216 {549} 190 {483} 211 {537} 232 {590} 281 {714}
D - Footprint w/stand in {cm} sq. 81 {206} 91 {231}
Inlet size (OD) 8.0 {20} 12.0 {30}
Outlet size (OD) 8.0 {20} 12.0 {30}
Material discharge (ID) 6.0 {15} 8.0 {20}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Installed weight (hopper only) 2551 {1148} 2929 {1318} 2847 {1281} 3285 {1478} 3485 {1568} 4185 {1883}
-OUNTINGINTERFACES
D-52
TPDX016-0917 RESINWORKSTM SYSTEMSRESIN DRYING HOPPERS AND STANDS
Consolidated Resin
Drying Hopper Systems
Conair ResinWorksTM systems offer a new level of manufacturing
efficiency. By consolidating resin handling and pre-conditioning
into a central area, material changes can take place quickly,
cleanly, and safely away from the processing machine.
Simplified resin dehumidification is the heart of the ResinWorks
system, where multiple hoppers are supplied on a common,
pre-plumbed, pre-wired sled, and connected to a dehumidifying
dryer to provide superior drying and maximum productivity.
Individual sleds can be connected to form an efficient,
ResinWorksTM System
centralized resin drying area supplying large numbers of W400 Dryer shown with
processing machines with a wide array of dried resins. RWH33-21, RWH24-12
and RWH 16-6 hoppers
Rugged Hopper Stands Incorporate Heat/Air Control
ResinWorksTM central drying systems are

designed to solve real-world productivity ` Quick clean hoppers
challenges. Energy and time saving features Located within easy operator reach, each hopper includes the industry’s largest
create an efficient central drying system. clean-out doors, a removable cone, and smooth all-stainless steel construction.
Starting with simplified shipping and
` Superior mass flow
installation, ResinWorks continually improves
Design assures that all material is evenly exposed to dry air and heat. Funnel flow and
your bottom line.
material hang-up points are eliminated for superior drying.
Integral supply and return manifolds carry
dehumidified air from your central dryer. ` 100% insulated
Individual hoppers are easily isolated for clean From the base of the cone, to the oversized door, to the full body wrap, each hopper
out by dual air valves opened and closed is designed to preserve heat and save energy.
with a single hand lever. This 3-position lever
located beside the temperature controller ` Long life tube heaters
Highly accurate, compact ‘tube’ heaters are located at the inlet of each hopper for
provides fool-proof 'On/Off' operation for both
superior temperature control and minimal energy loss.
heat and airflow. Three phase disconnects at
each sled conveniently distribute power to all
` Super safe hopper control
hoppers. Air is turned on and off with the exclusive ResinWorks control lever.
Stainless steel drying hoppers provide Safe. Simple. Foolproof.
exceptional air distribution and material mass
flow. Removable air spreader cone and extra- ` Automatic airflow balancing
large access door minimize clean out time. Earlier designs meant having to independently adjust each hopper for proper airflow
now, with this new design, there will never be any adjustment needed.
Use the hopper's extra-long sight glass with
optional sensor bracket and sensor kits to
easily adjust and indicate material level.

D-53
Options
Adjustable Purge Valve Multiple Sled Hopper
This valve controls material Connection Kit Discharge
flow from material source This option allows the Drain Port
to destination. This easy to connection between Facilitates
clean and install valve has a multiple sleds for hopper draining
discharge that rotates 360 the integral supply, and clean out.
degrees to allow complete return and conveying
purge of material lines. manifolds. For each
junction between sleds,
a kit is required.
Slide Gate Temperature Setback RTD Communications

Use the Slide Gate to Automatically reduces the drying temperature Options include: Modbus and DeviceNet.
prevent material leakage to a lower standby mode when the machine
when no purge valve throughput is reduced or stopped.
or distribution box is
specified on the hopper.
Specifications
Models RWH14-3 RWH18-6 RWH24-12 RWH24-18 RWH33-21 RWH33-28 RWH39-35‡ RWH39-42‡ RWH44-58‡
Figure Number Figure 1 Figure 2
Performance characterstics
Volume ft3 {liter} 3.0 {85} 6.0 {170} 12.0 {340} 18.0 {509} 21.0 {595} 28.0 {793} 35.0 {991} 42.0 {1189} 58.0 {1643}
Capacity @ 35 lb/ft3 lb {kg} 105.0 {48} 210.0 {95} 420.0 {191} 630.0 {286} 735.0 {333} 980.0 {445} 1225.0 {556} 1470.0 {667} 2030.0 {921}
Capacity @ 52 lb/ft3 lb {kg} 156.0 {71} 312.0 {142} 624.0 {283} 936.0 {425} 1092.0 {495} 1456.0 {660} 1820.0 {826} 2184.0 {991} 3016.0 {1368}
Air inlet/outlet OD {mm 2.5 {64} 5.0 {127}
Inside diameter OD {mm} 14.0 {356} 18.0 {457} 24.0 {610} 33.0 {838} 39.0 {991} 44.0 {991}
Material inlet IT06 IT07
Material outlet ID {mm} 2.38 {60} 3.0 {76}
Material discharge (bottom) IB02 IB03
Voltages full load amps§
Heater kW 4 10 30
208 V/3 phase/60Hz 11.4 21.2* N/A
230 V/3 phase/60Hz 10.3 25.3 N/A
400 V/3 phase/50Hz 5.9 14.5 43.7
460 V/3 phase/60Hz 5.1 12.7 38.0
575 V/3 phase/60Hz 4.1 10.2 30.4
Dimensions inches {cm}
Standard sled
A - Overall height† 78.7 {200} 86.5 {220} 92.6 {235} 116.3 {295} 107.5 {273} 118.5 {301} 121.5 {308} 132.5 {337} 138.5 {352}
B - Height below mounting flange 29.3 {74} 25.6 {65} 20.6 {52} 24.0 {61} 19.5 {50} 14.5 {37}
C - Panel height 41.3 {105} 41.8 {106}
D - Sled width 25.0 {64} 36.0 {91} 45.0 {114} 69.0 {175} 74.0 {188}
E - Depth 51.3 {130} 59.0 {150} 64.0 {162}
Shipping weight 350 {159} 450 {204} 670 {304} 700 {318} 1000 {454} 1250 {567} 1700 {771} 1750 {794} 2000 {907}
§
* Uses 230 V heater derated to 7.5 kW. FLA ratings are per hopper. FLA ratings for a ResinWorks sled is the
†
For multi-hopper sled, be sure to use the largest hopper as the sum of the sled’s individual hopper FLA ratings.
reference for the overall height dimension. Specifications can change without notice. Contact a Conair
‡ representative for the most current information.
Conair 39 and 44 inch hoppers are mounted on individual sleds.

D-5
Specifications
Depending upon hopper requirements, ResinWorks drying systems may be configured with Available Hopper Combinations (Figure 3)
single-hopper sleds, multiple-hopper sleds or a combination of both.
RWH Hopper Models Sled Total Length
possible sled combinations inches {mm} ft. {cm}
Multi-Hopper Sled (Figure 1)
33 45 {1143} 3.8 {116}
33 33 90 {2286} 7.5 {229}
33 33 24 126 {3200} 10.5 {320}
33 33 14/18 115 {2921} 9.6 {293}
33 24 70 {1778} 5.8 {177}
A 33 24 24 95 {2413} 7.9 {241}

33 24 14/18 14/18 131 {3327} 10.9 {332}
33 14/18 14/18 14/18 120 {3048} 10.0 {305}
24 36 {914} 3.0 {91}
C
24 24 72 {1829} 6.0 {183}
B
24 24 24 108 {2743} 9.0 {274}
E D
24 24 14/18 97 {2464} 8.1 {247}
24 24 14/18 14/18 122 {3099} 10.2 {311}
24 14/18 14/18 14/18 111 {2814} 9.3 {283}
Single-Hopper Sled (Figure 2) 14/18 25 {635} 2.1 {64}

14/18 14/18 50 {1270} 4.2 {128}
14/18 14/18 14/18 75 {1905} 6.3 {192}
14/18 14/18 14/18 14/18 100 {2540} 8.3 {253}
Note: Conair 39 and 44 inch hoppers are mounted on their own

individual sleds. (see Figure 2)
Use Figure 3 to identify the available hopper

A combinations that would be right for your
operation, and determine the overall width of each
multi-hopper sled. More specific dimensions for
hoppers can be found on the previous page, in the
specifications table.
*A minimum
clearance of
42 inches C
{107 cm} is B *A minimum clearance
required. of 14 inches {35.6 cm}
is required.
E D
Hoppers that are 33 inches {84 cm} in diameter and smaller may be joined together onto a single
sled and shipped as a unit, installed as a unit and connected into your drying system as a single unit
(see Figure 1). This consolidation greatly saves time and expense and once connected to the proper
central drying unit, provides an optimum dehumidification system for all of your resins. Hoppers 39
inches {99 cm} and over in diameter are provided on their own individual floor stands (sleds) and
each is equipped with air connections, heater, control, etc. (see Figure 2).

D-5
Features
Systems that are conceived, configured and designed
to make you more competitive, efficient, productive and
profitable.
• Provides full flexibility – any material to any

machine at any time.
• Ten minute material changes – pre-dried,

pre-blended material always ready.
• Clean, neat processing – removes drying and

blending equipment from the machine area.
• Convey small batches from dryer or blender

to machine.
ResinWorks drying hopper sleds can accommodate up to four drying hoppers, each
• Conveying lines purged after every cycle. sized specifically for either multi-machine, long run or single machine, short run opera-
tions. The sled is shipped with drying hoppers, heaters, controls, dry air manifolds and
• Minimizes labor, energy, material and inventory costs.
purge valves pre-assembled or easy installation.
The Conair
Integrated supply ResinWorks mass
and return air flow, stainless steel,
manifolds replace drying hopper is
the externally equipped with an
mounted bulky oversized door for
manifolds for quick, easy clean
a simplified out and thorough
installation of material changes.
material conveying A full length sight
lines to each glass with level
hopper. indication lets you
see your material
level at a glance.
We’ve eliminated the need for additional The new, fully-automatic airflow balancing valve Each hopper is now equipped with individual
clearance behind the sled by relocating all eliminates the need for tedious individual air 3-phase disconnects allowing you to
electrical access points to the front of the flow adjustments at each hopper. independently shut off one hopper without
sled. Now you can save valuable floor space disrupting production.
and reduce troublesome equipment location
problems.

D-5
TPDX026-0317 COMPRESSED AIR DRYERS3,)-,).%4- 3,-/$%,3!.$
The Perfect Solution;

The Right Price
Simple, reliable, good looks and the right price - everything
you’d expect from a Conair dryer. The Conair SlimLineTM Series
of Compressed Air Dryers offer a cost-effective drying solution
for any low throughput applications and most resins.
The SlimLine is desiccant-free, moving parts are eliminated,
energy consumption and maintenance costs are minimal.
This is the perfect solution for efficient drying at an
affordable price.
-ODEL3,
Compact Design Installs to Machine Throat
These small-sized, light-weight dryers are

easy to handle and can be conveniently ` %ASYTOUSE
mounted onto the throat of your processing Installation is quick and easy. The on-board control is simple to learn – all functions
machine, saving precious floor space. are clearly identified right on the dryer label. You won’t even have to think about this
dryer once you start processing.
SlimLineTM dryers use a continuous supply of
clean, dehumidified compressed air at 100 psi ` .OMAINTENANCEREQUIRED
{6.9 bar} to dry material. The standard dryer No moving parts, no filters to contend with on standard units, no desiccant. This dryer
produces a dewpoint of O°F {-18°C} which is will deliver the reliable performance you need.
sufficient for most drying applications. With ` #OMPACTDESIGN
the use of an optional membrane, process air This slim, attractive dryer mounts easily to the throat of your machine. No need to buy
can be generated with a dewpoint of or mount a separate hopper, the hopper for the SlimLineTM is incorporated into the
-40°F {-40°C}. sturdy, yet light-weight design.
Units are capable of delivering nominal ` 3AVESYOUMONEY
throughput rates ranging from 0.25 {0.11} to Energy efficient and low cost initial investment, the Conair SlimLine Series of
more than 50 lb/hour {23 kg/hour}. Compressed Air Dryers are a fraction of the price of traditional dryers. Dryer
Operation of this dryer couldn’t be easier: start-up is intuitive.
adjust the regulator, flip the switch to on, set
the process temperature and you’re drying.
D-57
How it Works Material In Air Out
The SlimLine Compressed Air Dryer uses

clean, dehumidified compressed air* supplied Optional Membrane
from your plant’s compressed air system or Pressure Gauge
01
a portable air compressor to produce hot, Isolation Valve
low dewpoint air that removes moisture from From Plant
hygroscopic plastic materials. Distribution System
02
03
*Compressed air must meet specification requirement of
100 psi {6.9 bar} and 40°F {4°C} dewpoint and a residual
oil content of less than 3 mg/m3.
Filter Filter

.OTEThis drawing is provided as an
The Benefits aid to understanding the technology, on
Membrane
the actual dryer, the compressed air is
plumbed from the opposite side.
• 9OULLSAVEMONEYThe initial investment
Material Out
in a compressed air dryer costs far less
than conventional dryers. 01 02 03
• 9OUWONTHAVETODEALWITHDESICCANT Clean, dry air is expanded to low Next, the air passes through Then, the air is injected into the
The use of desiccant has been eliminated. pressure during the process of an electric heater where it’s hopper where it passes over
passing through the air regulator. temperature is raised to the the pellets and reduces the final
• 9OULLELIMINATETHEHASSLEOFUP KEEP
Expanding the air reduces the process setpoint temperature. moisture content of the plastic
MAINTENANCE No moving parts, no dewpoint. material to acceptable processing
desiccant, no filter on standard units. This levels.
dryer ends the need for a lengthy list of The regulator is also used to
standard maintenance procedures. adjust the airflow to the green The air exhausts from the hopper
range on the pressure gauge. into the atmosphere.
Options
#OMPRESSED!IR-EMBRANE 4,!!DAPTERFOR,OADER&ILL
This option is necessary when the This adapter lets you mount a TLA
compressed air supplied does not meet Loader to fill the hopper, eliminating
the 40°F {4°C} dewpoint. the need to hand fill the material.
The membrane serves as a refrigerant .OTEAdapter shown is for models SL2.5
air conditioner and reduces the and 5. This adapter is not required for
dewpoint to the 40°F {4°C} dewpoint models SL15 and 25. The TLA Loader will
specification. The included filters aid in not be used with model SL50, other loaders
are available.
cleaning the compressed air.
-OBILECART (AND FILL,ID

The mobile cart option allows the Slim- If you choose not
Line dryer and hopper combination to to use a loader on
be quickly and easily moved from one Models SL15, SL25
location to another. or SL50, purchase
the hand-fill lid to
SL15 hopper has a hinged Hand-fill lid for models prevent material
top plate. Hand-fill lid SL25 and SL50.
needed to cover center hole. contamination.
3LIDE'ATE -OUNTING!DAPTERWITH$RAIN
Shuts off the material flow Install the mounting adapter
and isolates the dryer from the with drain to facilitate clean out
machine throat. or material changeovers.
D-58
Features
3IMPLERELIABLECONTROL Loader fill or Hand-fill feature (model dependent)
You’ll have all the functionality you need and not be burdened
by an overly complicated control. Actual and setpoint drying
temperatures are continuously displayed. Control functions are
Models SL2.5 and SL5
identified right on the label. Toggle between the percentage
come standard with a
output of the heater (read only) and the high temperature alarm
hand-fill lid.

setpoint. Choose to view the temperature in fahrenheit or celsius.
Models SL15, SL25 and

SL50 come standard
Alarm
Actual Heater with an IB06 mounting
Run/Reset

S

interface for mounting a
loader.
Setpoint
The loader is sold
separately. This unit is
pictured with an
Access AL Series Loader
installed.
!3LIM,INE4-TOFITYOURAPPLICATION
The right technology for the right price, throughputs range from 0.25 {0.11} to 50 lb/hr {23 kg/hour}.
3,
3,
3,
3,
3,
D-59
Specifications -ODELS3,
3,AND3,
-ODELS3,AND3,
! !
COMPRESSED
AIRINLET
COMPRESSED
AIRINLET
" # " #
-ODELS 3, 3, 3,

3, 3, -OUNTING)NTERFACES
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERSTICS(with full hopper)
"ASE0LATE)"
Drying temperature 100° - 350°F {38° - 177°C} standard on models SL2.5, INCHES
[CM]
Dewpoint 0°F {-18°C} with optional membrane - 40°F {- 40°C} SL5 and SL15 DIAMETER
Airflow SCFM {SLM} 2.5 {71} 5.0 {142} 7.5 {212} 12.5 {354} 22.0 {623}
Airflow with membrane SCFM {SLM} 3.1 {88} 6.8 {193} 9.3 {263} 15.7 {445} 34.9 {988}
Hopper volume ft3 {L} 0.125 {4} 0.25 {7} 0.75 {21} 1.25 {35} 2.50 {71} INCHES
Heater size kW 1 2 INCH [CM]
[CM] SQUARE
$IMENSIONSinches {cm} DIAMETER
A - Height 22.5 {57} 40.0 {102} 26.5 {67} 32.0 {81} 47.5 {121}
B - Overall width 11.0 {28} 12.5 {32} 15.5 {39}
INCHES[CM]SQUARE
C- Depth 19.0 {48} 25.5 {65} 24.0 {61}
Drying hopper inlet pipe size 1/2 inch NPT female
7EIGHTlbs {kg} ght lb {kg} "ASE0LATE)"
INCHES
Standard dryer installed (empty) 32 {15} 37 {17} 56 {25) 87 {39} 107 {49} standard on models [CM]
Shipping weight 60 {27} 70 {32} 160 {73} SL25 and SL50 DIAMETER
6OLTAGEFull load amps p

120 V/1phase/60 Hz 8.5 16.7
220 V/1 phase/50 Hz 4.3 8.4 INCHES
INCHES [CM]
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTSo [CM] SQUARE
DIAMETER
100 PSI {6.9 bar} clean, dry compressed air pressure
dewpoint of 40°F {4°C}; residual oil content of less than 3 mg/m3
INCHES[CM]SQUARE
‡
SCFM - Standard Cubic Feet per Minute FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not
include any options or accessories on equipment. !PPLICATION.OTES
SLM - Standard Liters per Minute For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific
* Model SL15 does not include an access door on the machines and systems, refer to the electrical #ONAIRRECOMMENDSPURCHASINGTHEOPTIONAL
hopper. diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate MEMBRANEWHEN
†
Compressed air supplied to the dryer must meet Your process requires that you obtain a dewpoint of
specification requirement of 100 psi {6.9 bar} and Specifications can change without notice. Contact -40°F {40°C} or the compressed air dewpoint you are
40°F {4°C} pressure dewpoint and a residual oil a Conair representative for the most current suppling is above 40°F {4°C} .
content of less than 3 mg/m3. information.
D-60
TPDX028-0317 CRYSTALLIZING SYSTEMS#23%2)%3
Convert Amorphous PET

to Usable Cystalline Material
With the increased use of PET in plastic processing, the
efficient use of amorphous regrind material is critical. A Conair
Crystallizing System allows you to convert amorphous PET to a
crystalline state that then can be dried. The drying can occur at
elevated temperatures to obtain low moisture levels without the
fear of agglomeration.
The Conair Crystallizing System consists of a high temperature

heat source, an insulated hopper with an agitator and a rotary
discharge valve. This equipment can be easily integrated with
other material handling equipment.
#23ERIES
Reliable, High-Quality Material Output
As amorphous PET material is loaded into the

agitating hopper, the processing temperature ` #ONTINUOUSAUTOMATICOPERATION
is set on the control. When the system is Automatic monitoring of the temperature inside the hopper ensures a reliable output
turned on, the Crystallizer automatically of high-quality crystallized material.
directs heated air to the material through
the bottom spreader cone of the agitating ` !CONFIGURATIONTOMEETYOURNEEDS
Use in-line crystallizing for direct discharge into your processing or batch processing
hopper. Constant, slow agitation of the
for storage of the crystallized material to re-use at a later time.
blades prevents agglomeration and material
degradation during heating.
` !GITATINGHOPPERPREVENTSAGGLOMERATION
Once material is crystallized, determined by The combination of the agitator blades and stationary bars in the CR Series
a system monitor located in the hopper, a Crystallizers provide constant tumbling of the material breaking apart any clumps that
rotary discharge valve meters the material may form and preventing agglomeration during processing.
into a surge bin and distribution box. Material
` 3AFEDESIGNCONVENIENTCLEANOUT
can then be transferred by your conveying
Access doors and removable cone section have safety interlocks. The flexible design
system to storage or processing hoppers.
of these units allow the agitator weldment to be removed from the top or bottom.
Material is metered away at an appropriate
Internal breaker bars are removable to simplify clean out.
rate depending on the temperature profile
in the hopper. If the temperature profile falls
below a selected level, the Crystallizing
System automatically stops the material
discharge until the correct temperature profile
is obtained.
D-61
TPDX028-0317 CRYSTALLIZING SYSTEMS#23%2)%3
Specifications
-ODEL#2AND#2 -ODEL#2 #2 "LOWER
%
&RONT
! !
VIEW
3IDE
VIEW
" # " # &
-ODELS #2† #2† #2† #2† #2† #2†
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERSTICS
Throughput ft3/hr {l/hr} 4 {113} 10 {283} 21 {595} 42 {1189} 85 {2407} 135 {3823}
Heater energy source electric or natural gas
Air circuit open or closed loop
A - Overall crystallizer height 159.2 {4044} 169.0 {4293} 192.5 {4890} 226.8 {5761} 261.8 {6650} 281.1 {7140}
B - Overall crystallizer width 66.0 {1676} 69.0 {1753} 79.1 {2009} 86.3 {2192} 98.3 {2497}
C - Overall crystallizer depth 70.5 {1791} 75.0 {1905} 70.1 {1781} 81.4 {2068} 94.2 {2393} 106.3 {2700}
D - Blower height† N/A 37.8 {960} 45.8 {1163}
E - Blower width† N/A 32.5 {826} 37.5 {953}
F - Blower depth† N/A 68.4 {1734} 70.4 {1788} 77.5 {1969} 80.6 {2047}
Crystallizer installed 2863 {1299} 3130 {1420} 3315 {1504} 4422 {2006} 6590 {2989} 7754 {3517}
Surge bin installed 270 {122} 650 {295}
Blower installed N/A 700 {318} 800 {363} 900 {408} 1100 {499}
6OLTAGEfull load amps ‡
230V/3 phase/60 Hz 38.8 N/A
400 V/3 phase/50 Hz 22.3 55.6 107.5 159.1 292.5 305.3
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz 19.3 48.4 93.5 138.4 254.4 265.5
575 V/3 phase/60 Hz 15.5 38.7 74.8 138.4 203.5 212.4
$ISCHARGETYPE(via rotary air lock)
Surge bin 10 ft3 {281 l/hr} standard N/A
Surge bin 17 ft3 {481 l/hr} N/A standard
"LOWERNOISELEVEL
<90 dbA @ 5 ft.
Specification Notes Options

* Shown with optional cyclone mounted on stand. This applies to model CR4 only.
†
• %LECTRIC(EATOR.ATURAL'AS%NERGY3OURCE
The blowers on models CR4 and CR10 are located on the stand. Blowers on models
CR21, CR42, CR85 and CR135 are independent of the stand. Adequate space will • /PEN LOOPOR#LOSED LOOP!IR#IRCUIT
need to be planned for positioning of the blower on these models.
‡
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories • 'AYLORD$ISCHARGE
on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate • %XHAUST&ILTER – choose a cyclone or a dust collection unit to
applied to the machine. keep fines contained. For particularly dusty applications both can
Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the be applied.
• 3PECIAL0AINT - Automotive or non-automotive.
D-62
Blending/Feeding
Storage
Gravimetric Batch Blenders

4RUE"LEND©4" "
4RUE"LEND©4" "
4RUE"LEND©4" AND4" "
Conveying 4RUE"LEND©4"2 "
4RUE"LEND©4" 4" AND4" "
Drying
Insulated Gravimetric Batch Blenders
4RUE"LEND©4") "
High Heat Gravimetric Batch Blenders

4RUE"LEND©4")( "
Extrusion Control Blender

4RUE"LEND©%84 "
Continuous Gravimetric Blenders

Blen
nding/Feeding 4RUE7EIGH©#ONTINUOUS"LENDER "
Blender Reporting Software

4RUE"LEND©2EPORTING3OFTWARE "
31,2EPORTING3OFTWARE "
Heat Transfer
He
Accessories
3" TO3" 5PGRADE+IT"
,EVEL!LARM#ONTROL"
73"'"2ETRofit ContrOL"
Size Redu
duction
Feeders
4RUE&EED©4&-ODELS"
4RUE&EED©4OUCH#ONTROL-ODELS"
4RUE&EED©,1-ODEL"
"&3AND"&(AT THE THROATMODELS"
Upstream Intermixer
-ATERIAL-IXER"
Floor Stands
4""3-ODELS"
&3-ODELS"
Downstream
Blending / Feeding Quick Reference
4HROUGHPUT2ANGELBHR
Maximum
Maximum
Materials
Additives
Number
Number
10,000
11,000
12,000
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
250
500
-ODELS
'RAVIMETRIC"ATCH"LENDERS "ATCH3IZELB[G]
4RUE"LEND4-4"
[]
4RUE"LEND4-4"2
[]
4RUE"LEND4-4"2
[]
4RUE"LEND4-4"
[]
AND4"
4RUE"LEND4-4"
[]
AND4"
4RUE"LEND4-4"
[]
AND4"

4RUE"LEND4-4"
[]
4" AND4"

4RUE"LEND4-4"
[]
4" AND4"

4RUE"LEND4-4"
[]
4" AND4"

4RUE7EIGH#ONTINUOUS"LENDERS
4RUE7EIGH47"
$IRECT7EIGH(OPPER
.O7EIGH(OPPER
4RUE7EIGH47"
$IRECT7EIGH(OPPER
.O7EIGH(OPPER
4RUE7EIGH47"
$IRECT7EIGH(OPPER
.O7EIGH(OPPER
4RUE7EIGH47"
$IRECT7EIGH(OPPER
.O7EIGH(OPPER
!LSOSEE4RUE"LEND(IGH(EAT-ODELS4"!4"(
2EMOVABLEADDITIVEBINS
4RUE"LEND!CCESSORIES /UTPUT2ANGE
4HROAT!DAPTERS 4"4"24"24"4"4"47"47"
3URGE"IN3TAND "4"24"24"4"4"47"47"
-ATERIAL$RAIN#HUTES 4"4"24"24"4"4"
,EVEL!LARM#ONTROL !LLMODELSSTANDARDIN47"CONTROL
4RUE"LEND/PTIONS
)NTEGRAL,OADER#ONTROL1UICK#LEAN%NHANCED&LOW0ACKAGE !LL4"MODELS
#ONTROL#ABLE%XTENSIONS !LL4"MODELS
,OADER$ROP#ABLEWITH#ONNECTOR !LL4"MODELS
2EMOTE$EMAND3ENSOR 2EMOTEMOUNTMODELSONLY
!IR"LOW OFFFOR-IX#HAMBER,EVEL3ENSOR !LL4"MODELS
-INOR#OMPONENT&LOW2ESTRICTOR 4" 4"
-AJOR#OMPONENT&LOW2ESTRICTOR !LL4"MODELS
4RUE"LEND2EPORTING3OFTWARE !LL4"MODELS
%XTRUSION#ONTROL !LLMODELSINCLUDING47"MODELS
3" #ONTROLLER !LLMODELS
3ELF #LEAN !LL4"MODELS
(IGH 4EMPERATURE !LL4"MODELSALL47"MODELS
&EEDERS (OPPER6OLUME -OTORRPM(P /UTPUT2ANGE

'RAVIMETRIC4& FT RPM(P TOLBSHR[TOKGHRORTOGS]
6OLUMETRIC"&3 FT RPM(P TOLBSHR[TOKGHRORTOGS]
6OLUMETRIC"&( FT RPM(P TOLBSHR[TOKGHRORTOGS]
TPBX024-0317 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERS425%",%.$©4"
Accurate
Gravimetric Blending
In Small Batches
Get accurate blends, better mixing, faster material changes and
increased profits with Conair’s TrueBlendTM Series Blenders.
Steep-sided material compartments allow resin to flow evenly
and freely through vertical dispense valves into the weigh
chamber. Efficient mixing assures full integration of all recipe
ingredients. Fully-enclosed cabinet design assures no pellet
spillage and clean operation. Standard convenient features such
as quick access material compartment bins, a hinged chassis
access door and removable components in the mixing chamber
reduce downtime during cleanout. -ODEL4"
Access Receivers.)
Throughput Rates to 175 Pounds an Hour
The TrueBlendTM TB45 Series Blenders offer

small extruders and small tonnage injection ` "LENDACCURACYTOOF
molding machines a superior way to blend Colorant and/or additive weights are held to within 0.5% of setting. A selectable
color and additives centrally or at the throat of Precision AdditiveTM feature is also available for additives for even greater accuracy.
the processing machine. The microprocessor control automatically calibrates after every cycle and
compensates for variations in dispense method, resin bulk density or particle geometry.
The blender dispenses up to four materials
from respective material compartments ` %ASY TO USECONTROL
into a common weigh chamber. The control Intuitive 7-inch LCD touchscreen control with full
determines the correct weight of each color graphics allows quick and easy setup of blender
ingredient based on setpoints entered on the setpoints. All setpoints are displayed simultaneously.
touch screen display. Up to 3000 recipes and Enter the percentages of the blend on the touchscreen
4000 resin names can be entered and stored display and the blender does the rest. The system
in the processor. automatically weighs the recipe ingredients in the proper sequence and maintains the
correct blend relationship. Any position can be identified as one of the four material
Unique fast-acting “no stick” vertical valves type selections adding flexibility to your application setup.
control the amount of material dispensed. All
dispense valves use two-way air cylinders ` #ONVENIENTEASYCLEANOUT
assuring positive operation. Easy access to all material contact points for fast and
safe cleaning during color or resin changes. Quick
Choose between throat mounted or central access material compartment bins, a removable weigh
blender models. Options include an integrated bin, mix agitator and mix chamber liner allow quick
loader control feature, and a flow control valve efficient cleaning. The blender features a built-in manual
for central blending applications. material shut-off valve below the mixing chamber, this
can be replaced with the automatic flow control valve for
remote and central blending applications.
B-
Features
)NTUITIVE3" TOUCHSCREENCONTROLOFFERSTHEINDUSTRYSBESTMULTI COMPONENTACCURACY
This easy-to-use touchscreen control allows for fast setup of blender setpoints and automatically weighs recipe ingredients in the proper sequence to
maintain correct blend relationship. Any position can be identified as any of the four material type selections, adding flexibility to your application setup.
)NSTANTLYSEEYOUR 6IEWANDMAKE
MATERIALSUSAGE CHANGESTOTHE

Material usage / totals ACTIVERECIPE
screen tracks the number Save and recall up to
of batches, weights 3000 recipes and 4000
dispensed by bin and resin names in the
weight dispensed in total Recipe Book.
since the last reset.
"UILT INREPORTING /N CALLDIAGNOSTICS

Every SB-3 Blender Diagnostic screen

control is equipped displays target set point
with the capability to percentage and actual
help users track their percentage dispensed.
settings, alarms, material Also displays start and
consumption, shift and finish weights for each
inventory needs. material per batch.
Verifies true and accurate
blend performance.
3MART"LEND©3"
Premium touchscreen control offers these high performance functions • Precision metering yields industry’s best batch-to-batch
to target the unique process needs of molders and extruders. accuracy.
• Best choice for the needs of rapidly changing custom jobs or • Precision ratio control - all components.
sophisticated extrusion and molding applications with complex • Individual material accuracy settings.
and highly critical recipes.
• SMS or text message alarm notification capable.
• Progressively approaches each ingredient target. Never overshoots.
• VNC viewer for displaying and using the control screen on
If setpoint is not met, remainder is recalculated to correct.
a larger monitor.
3TANDARD0ACKAGES #OMPONENT 43 ,3
&EATURES
Material bin sight glasses y y
Touchscreen control y y
Loading control option y
Machine mount with manual slide gate discharge† y y
Remote/bin mount with pneumatic slide gate discharge† y y
&EATURE.OTES
No pellet leakage.
* Includes an optional integrated loader control feature. No material waste.
†
Completely sealed
Choose between either machine or remote mounted blender packages.
chassis.
B-
Features
3IMPLEANDQUICK /PTIONALFLOORSTANDWITHRESERVOIR
CLEANOUT Blender installs easily to this floor stand,
Easy access to all which is equipped with a material
material contact points reservoir. Each blender stand features:
for fast and safe • Sturdy design
cleaning during color or • Easy cleanout
resin changes. Material • Fork-lift provisions
compartment access
• Drawer magnet provision
doors, removable weigh
• One standard material takeaway tube
bin, mix agitator and mix
(up to two additional material tubes are
chamber allow quick available as options)
efficient cleaning.
• Available with one or two cubic foot
reservoir capacities
• Optional casters (one cubic foot
capacity model only - TBBS01)
Options
4"2EPORTS !IRBLOW OFFFORMIX
Used to track and document CHAMBERLEVELSENSOR
material usage, alarms, batch This feature is integrated
and shift reports and recipes. into the blender mix
See TrueBlend Reporting chamber to blow excessive
Software specification sheet dust and fines away from
for more information. the mixing chamber sensor
and ensure accurate level
sensor reading.
2EMOTE(-)OPERATORCABLE 2EMOTEMIXERDEMAND
Place the SB-3 control up SENSOR
to six meters away with This sensor provides a fill-to
convenient plug-in cable set. level option in a surge bin
or other material receptacle
that sits below a remote
mounted blender.
-ATERIALLEVELALARMCONTROL $RAINCHUTE
Eliminate costly material For fast, safe, thorough and
shortage problems and simple blender draining prior
machine downtime with this to cleanout. The drain chute
early warning system. The quickly installs over the
control monitors up to six blender front opening.
material levels. Each sensor
can be set as a high or low
warning. See Level Alarm
Control specification sheet.
B-
Specifications 4OPVIEWep
3IDEVIEWe &RONTVIEWe
01 02
"
04 03
01 04
'
!
04 ( 03
$RAINCHUTE #ONTROL
Purchase the OPTIONAL
MATERIALDRAINCHUTE that $
readily installs to the chassis
opening of the blender for fast
and simple cleanout. & %
-ODELS 4" !PPLICATION.OTES Dimensions shown in inches and {mm}.

Batch size lbs {g} 1.0 {450} 1-22/32 {45}
Mixing chamber access
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 175 {79} diameter centered
door - this side of the
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.2 {5.7} interface
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.2 {5.7}
7-1/2 {190}
5 sq. {127}
Maximum number of materials 4

Number of vertical discharge valves 4
Number (size) of major bin valves 2 - (40 mm) Mounting bolt hole size
(4 holes) 7/16 inch {11.0 mm}.
Number (size) of minor bin valves 2 - (20 mm)
Predrilled 5 x 5 mounting
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} 7-7/8 {200} pattern as standard.
A - Height above mounting plate† 32.50 {826}
B - Width 25.00 square {635}
C - Depth 27.00 square {686}
D - Control height 6.50 {165}
E - Control width 8.75 {222} * Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material, using all
standard valve sizes. Use of reducer inserts will lower the rate shown.
F - Control depth 6.75 {172}
Throughput rates are based on:
G - Loader center distance 12.75 {324}
• A 4-position blender recipe of 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color and
H - Loader center distance 12.91 {328} 2% additive material.
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlbs {kg} †
The optional flow control valve will mount inside the chassis in the space of the
Installed 150 {68} manual slide valve. The optional automatic flow control valve is recommended
when mounting the blender on a stand, surge bin or hopper.
Shipping 230 {104}
‡
Hopper positions three and four are supplied with eight inch cover plates as
6OLTAGEFull load amps **
standard.
115V/1 phase/60 hz 1.0 §
Numbers in top view drawings represent hopper positions.
230V/1 phase/50 hz 0.5
** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
90 psi @ 0.2 ft3/min {6 bars systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
Discharge valves applied to the machine.
@ 0.09 liters/sec}; 1/4 inch NPT fitting
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
8-inch loaders Number of loaders - 4
B-4
Versatile, Yet Compact

Accurate
Steep-sided component hoppers allow material to flow evenly
ingredients. The fully-enclosed cabinet design assures no pellet
spillage and clean operation. Standard convenient features such
as wide access doors on each main material compartment, a
hinged access door and removable components in the mixing
chamber reduce downtime during cleanout. -ODEL4"
Access Receivers.)

small extruders and medium tonnage injection ` "LENDACCURACYTOOF
molding machines a superior way to blend Colorant and/or additive weights are held to within 0.5% of setting. A selectable
color and additives centrally or at the throat of Precision AdditiveTM feature is also available for additives for even greater accuracy.
the processing machine. The microprocessor control automatically calibrates after every cycle and
compensates for variations in dispense method, resin bulk density or particle geometry.
The blender dispenses up to four materials
from respective material compartments ` %ASY TO USECONTROL
into a common weigh chamber. The control Intuitive 7-inch LCD touchscreen control with full
determines the correct weight of each color graphics allows quick and easy setup of blender
ingredient based on setpoints entered on the setpoints. All setpoints are displayed simultaneously.
touch screen display. Up to 3000 recipes and Enter the percentages of the blend on the touchscreen
4000 resin names can be entered and stored display and the blender does the rest. The system
in the processor. automatically weighs the recipe ingredients in the proper sequence and maintains the
correct blend relationship. Any position can be identified as one of the four material
Unique fast-acting “no stick” vertical valves type selections adding flexibility to your application setup.
dispense valves use two-way air cylinders, to ` #ONVENIENTEASYCLEANOUT
ensure positive operation. Easy access to all material contact points for fast and
blender models. Options include an integrated bin, mix agitator and mix chamber liner allow quick
loader control feature, and a flow control valve efficient cleaning. The blender features a built-in manual
for central blending applications. material shut-off valve below the mixing chamber, this
B-
Features



blend performance.
3MART"LEND©3" • Precision metering yields industry’s best batch-to-batch

Premium touchscreen control offers these high performance functions accuracy.
to target the unique process needs of molders and extruders. • Precision ratio control - all components.
Best choice for the needs of rapidly changing custom jobs or • Individual material accuracy settings.
sophisticated extrusion and molding applications with complex • SMS or text message alarm notification capable.
• Progressively approaches each ingredient target. Never overshoots. a larger monitor.
3TANDARD0ACKAGES #OMPONENT 43 4% ,3p ,%p

&EATURES
Material bin sight glasses and main bin clean out doors y y y y
Touchscreen control y y y y
Loading control option y y
Loader, pump and compressed air interconnection kit y y
Material bin finger guards y y
Quick clean/enhanced flow option* y y
Machine mount with manual slide gate discharge† y y y y
Remote/bin mount with pneumatic slide gate discharge† y y y y
No pellet leakage.
&EATURE.OTES No material waste.
* Material bin door safety interlocks and drain ports. Completely sealed
†
chassis.
‡
Includes an optional integrated loader control feature.
B-
Features
3IMPLEANDQUICK /PTIONALFLOORSTANDWITHRESERVOIR
CLEANOUT Blender installs easily to this floor stand,
Easy access to all which is equipped with a material
material contact points reservoir. Each blender stand features:
for fast and safe • Sturdy design
cleaning during color or • Easy cleanout
resin changes. Material • Fork-lift provisions
compartment access
doors, removable weigh
bin, mix agitator and mix
(up to two additional material tubes are
chamber allow quick available as options)
efficient cleaning.
• Available with one or two cubic foot
reservoir capacities
• Optional casters (one cubic foot
capacity model only - TBBS01)
Options
4"2EPORTS !IRBLOW OFFFORMIXCHAMBERLEVEL
Used to track and document material SENSOR
usage, alarms, batch and shift reports This feature is integrated into the blender
and recipes. See TrueBlend Reporting mix chamber to blow excessive dust and
Software specification sheet. fines away from the sensing device and
ensure accurate level sensor reading.
-ATERIALLEVELALARMCONTROL 2EMOTEMIXERDEMANDSENSOR
Eliminate costly material shortage This sensor provides a fill-to level
problems and machine downtime with this option in a surge bin or other material
early warning system. The control monitors
receptacle that sits below a remote
up to six material levels. Each sensor can
mounted blender.
be set as a high or low warning. See Level
Alarm Control specification sheet.
$RAINCHUTE 4RUE"LENDHIGH HEATMODELS
For fast, safe, thorough and simple Used to blend high temperature plastics
blender draining prior to cleanout. The such as ABS, nylon, polycarbonate and
drain chute quickly installs over the PET resins. Available in:
• Medium temp. (160° - 250°F {71° - 121°C}) TBA models.
blender front opening. • High temp. (250° -375°F {121° - 191°C}) TBH models.
See TBA and TBH specification sheet.
$RYAIRBLANKET
This option blankets the material
-AJORCOMPONENTFLOWRESTRICTOR compartments and mixing chamber with
Generally used when feeding more hot dry air to prevent moisture regain
than two minor ingredients. during processing. Available on both the
TBA and TBH models. See TBA and TBH
specification sheet.
-INORCOMPONENTFLOWRESTRICTOR 2EMOTE(-)OPERATORCABLE
Generally used when feeding 1% or Place the TrueBlend control up to six
less of an ingredient. meters away with convenient plug-in
cable set.
B-
3IDEVIEWe &RONTVIEWe
" 01 02
#
+
01
04 03
04
'
!
*
04 ( 03
$RAINCHUTE #ONTROL
& %
and simple cleanout.
-ODELS 4" !PPLICATION.OTES Dimensions shown in inches and {mm}.

Batch size lbs {g} 2.2 {1000}
2-5/32 {55}
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 400 {181} Mixing chamber access
diameter centered
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.2 6} door - this side of the
interface
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.3 {8}
Maximum number of materials 4
8 sq. {203}
Number of vertical discharge valves 4

Number (size) of major bin valves 2 - (60 mm)
Number (size) of minor bin valves 2 - (20 mm) 8 x 8 (inches) square
bolt pattern supplied as
standard, for 9/16 inch
A - Height above mounting plate† 45.25 {1149} 10-1/4 sq. {260} {14.0 mm} diameter bolts.
B - Hopper width and depth (square) 30.25 {769}
C - Depth 32.75 {832}
E - Control width 8.75 {222} Specification Notes
G - Loader center distance 16.25 {413} * Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material, using all
H - Loader center distance 15.50 {394}
J - Loader center distance 7.75 {197} Throughput rates are based on:
K - Hopper height differential 6.00 {152} • A 4-position blender recipe of 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color and 2%
additive material.
†
Installed 160 {72}
manual slide valve. Conair recommends using the optional flow control valve when
Shipping 270 {122} mounting the blender on a stand, surge bin or hopper.
6OLTAGEFull load amps ** ‡
Hopper positions three and four are supplied with eight inch cover plates as
115V/1 phase/60 Hz 3.0 standard.
230V/1 phase/50 Hz 1.5 §
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
90 psi @ 0.2 ft3/min {6 bars on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
Discharge valves
@ 0.09 liters/sec}; 1/4 inch NPT fitting systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES applied to the machine.
8-inch loaders Number of loaders - 2 Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
12-inch loaders Number of loaders - 2
B-
TPBX026-0317 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERS425%",%.$©4" !.$4"
Accurate
For Higher Throughputs
increased profits with Conair's TrueBlendTM Series Blenders.
Steep-sided component hoppers allow material to flow evenly and
freely through vertical dispense valves into the weigh chamber.
Efficient mixing assures full integration of all recipe ingredients.
The fully-enclosed cabinet assures no pellet spillage and clean

operation. Standard convenient features such as wide access
doors on each main material compartment, a hinged access
door and removable components in the mixing chamber reduce
downtime during cleanout. -ODEL4"
Access Receivers.)

processors with medium-sized extruders or ` "LENDACCURACYTOOF
Colorant and/or additive weights are held to within 0.5% of setting. A selectable
large tonnage injection molding machines
Precision AdditiveTM feature is also available for additives. The microprocessor control
a superior way to blend color and additives
automatically calibrates after every cycle and compensates for variations in dispense
centrally or at the throat of the processing
method, resin bulk density or particle geometry.
machine.
The blender dispenses up to six materials ` %ASY TO USECONTROL
Intuitive 7-inch LCD touchscreen control with full
(depending on model) from material compart-
color graphics allows quick and easy setup of blender
ments into a common weigh chamber. The
setpoints. All setpoints are displayed simultaneously.
control determines the correct weight of each
Enter the percentages of the blend on the touchscreen
ingredient based on setpoints entered on the
display and the blender does the rest. The system
touch screen display. Up to 3000 recipes and
automatically weighs the recipe ingredients in the
4000 resin names can be entered and stored proper sequence and maintains the correct blend relationship. Any position can
in the control. be identified as one of the four material type selections adding flexibility to your
Unique fast-acting "no stick" vertical valves application setup.
` #ONVENIENTEASYCLEANOUT
dispense valves use two-way air cylinders
Easy access to all material contact points for fast and
assuring positive operation.
Choose between four component or six access material compartment bins, a removable weigh
component blender models. Options include bin, mix agitator and mix chamber allow quick efficient
an integrated loader control feature, a flow cleaning. The blender features a built-in manual
control valve for central blending applications material shutoff valve below the mixing chamber, this
and material compartment drain ports. can be replaced with the automatic flow control valve for
B-9
Features



blend performance.

&EATURES
Material bin sight glasses and clean out doors y y y y
Material bin finger guards y y
Quick clean/enhanced flow option* y y
Machine mount with manual slide gate discharge †
y y y y

&EATURES
No pellet leakage.
No material waste.
Material bin finger guards y y Completely sealed
Quick clean/enhanced flow option* y y chassis.
&EATURE.OTES
* Material bin door safety interlocks and drain ports.

†
‡
B-10
Features
3IMPLEANDQUICKCLEANOUT /PTIONALFLOORSTANDWITHRESERVOIR
Mixing chamber and weigh bin Provide blending beside the machine or
are easily removed as single remotely with a rugged, mobile floor stand,
units, then the mix chamber equipped with a blended material reservoir.
comes apart for detailed Each blender stand features:
cleaning. All with no tools in
• Sturdy design
record time.
• Easy cleanout
• Fork-lift provisions
(up to two additional material tubes
are available as options)
Options • Available with two or five cubic foot reservoir capacities
3TANDARDBINOR4APEREDBIN
While the Standard mixing chamber is suitable for a wide variety of
applications, the Tapered mixing chamber is ideal for critical
application blends with material percentages less than 1%.
The tapered design allows for improved mixing.
3TANDARD"IN 4APERED"IN
4"2EPORTS $RYAIRBLANKET
Used to track and document material This option blankets the material compart-
usage, alarms, batch and shift reports and ments and mixing chamber with hot dry air
recipes. See TrueBlend Reporting Software to prevent moisture regain during processing.
specification sheet. Available on both the TBA and TBH models.
-ATERIALLEVELALARMCONTROL 4RUE"LEND(IGH HEAT-ODELS

Eliminate costly material shortage problems Used to blend high temperature plastics such
and machine downtime with this early as ABS, nylon, polycarbonate and PET resins.
warning system. The control monitors up to • Medium temperature (160° - 250°F
six material levels. Each sensor can be set {71° - 121°C}) TBA models.
as a high or low warning. See Level Alarm • High temperature (250° -375°F {121° - 191°C})
Control specification sheet. TBH models. See TBA and TBH specification sheet.
!IRBLOW OFFFORMIX 2EMOTEMIXER 2EMOTE(-)OPERATOR

CHAMBERLEVELSENSOR DEMANDSENSOR CABLE
This feature is integrated into This sensor provides Place the TrueBlend
the blender mix chamber to a fill-to level option in control up to six meters
blow excessive dust and fines a surge bin or other away with convenient
away from the mixing chamber material receptacle that plug-in cable set.
sensor and ensure accurate sits below a remote
level sensor reading. mounted blender.
$RAINCHUTE
-AJORCOMPONENT -INORCOMPONENT
For fast, safe, thorough and
FLOWRESTRICTOR FLOWRESTRICTOR
simple blender draining
Generally used when Generally used when
prior to cleanout. The drain
feeding more than two feeding 1% or less of an
chute quickly installs over
minor ingredients. ingredient.
the blender front opening.
B-11
3IDEVIEWe &RONTVIEWe POSITIONp POSITIONp
# "
(
01 02 (
01 02
04 03
01 04
'
' 06
03
!
05 04
*
04 03 +
,
.OTE Side and front view $RAINCHUTE #ONTROL

drawings are model TB250-4. Purchase the OPTIONAL
The bin positions change for a MATERIALDRAINCHUTE that $
TB250-6. See the top view. readily installs to the chassis
-ODELS 4" 4" !PPLICATION.OTES Dimensions shown in inches and {mm}.

0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS Mixing chamber access door
- this side of the interface
Batch size lbs {g} 5.5 {2500} 16-3/16 sq.{411}
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 950 {431} 750 {340} 12 sq.{305}
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 1.6 {45} 2.7 {76}
8 sq.{203}
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 1.6 {45} 1.4 {40}
Maximum number of materials 4 6 3-5/32
diameter
Number of vertical discharge valves 4 6 {80}
Number - (size) of major bin valves 2 - (60 mm)
Number - (size) of minor bin valves 2 - (30 mm) 4 - (30 mm)
A - Height above mounting plate† 57.50 {1461} 63.0 {1600}
B - Hopper width and depth (square) 36.50 {926} 40.13 {1026} Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes) 9/16 inch {14.0 mm}.
C - Depth 40.83 {1037} 42.67 {1084} Predrilled 8 x 8 and 12 x 12 mounting pattern as standard.
E - Control width 8.75 {222}
F - Control depth 6.75 {172} * Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material, using all
G - Loader center distance 21.81 {554} 14.88 {378} standard valve sizes. Use of reducer inserts will lower the rate shown.
H - Loader center distance 20.13 {511} 20.0 {508} Throughput rates are based on:
J - Loader center distance N/A 9.75 {248} • A 4-position blender recipe of 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color and 2% additive
K - Loader center distance N/A 13.00 {330} material.
L - Loader center distance N/A 28.00 {711} • A 6-position blender recipeof 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color at position 3, 2%
additive at position 4, 3% additive at position 5 and 2% additive at position 6.
†
Installed 320 {145} 400 {182} The optional automatic flow control valve is recommended when mounting inside the
chassis in the space of the manual slide valve. Conair recommends using the optional
Shipping 440 {200} 520 {236}
flow control valve when mounting the blender on a stand, surge bin or hopper.
6OLTAGEFull load amps** ‡
TB250-4 hopper positions two and four are supplied with 12-8 adapters with eight
115V/1 phase/60 hz 6.3 inch cover plates as standard. TB250-6 hopper position two is supplied with a 12-8
230V/1 phase/50 hz 3.2 adapter with an eight inch cover.
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS §
90 psi @ 0.2 ft3/min {6 bars ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on
Discharge Valves
@ 0.09 liters/sec}; 1/4 inch NPT fitting equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
15-inch loaders 4 2 applied to the machine.
8-inch loaders N/A 4 Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
B-12
TPBX035-0317 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERS425%",%.$©4"2
Accurate
with Removable Bins
Get accurate blends, better mixing, faster material changes and 2EMOVABLE
increased profits with Conair's TrueBlendTM Series Blenders. Steep- -ATERIAL"IN
sided component hoppers allow material to flow evenly and freely
through vertical dispense valves into the weigh chamber. Efficient
mixing assures full integration of all recipe ingredients.
The fully-enclosed cabinet design assures no pellet spillage and

clean operation. Standard convenient features such as wide access
doors on each main material compartment, a hinged access
door and removable components in the mixing chamber reduce
(Shown with
AL-5 Loaders.)
The TrueBlendTM TB250R-4 Blender offers

large tonnage injection molding machines
machine.
The blender dispenses up to four materials ` %ASY TO USECONTROL
from respective material compartments Intuitive 7-inch LCD touchscreen control with full
color graphics allows quick and easy setup of blender
into a common weigh chamber. The control
setpoints. All setpoints are displayed simultaneously.
determines the correct weight of each
ingredient based on setpoints entered on the
touch screen display. Up to 3000 recipes and
automatically weighs the recipe ingredients in the
4000 resin names can be entered and stored
proper sequence and maintains the correct blend relationship. Any position can
in the control. be identified as one of the four material type selections adding flexibility to your
Unique fast-acting "no stick" vertical valves application setup.
` #ONVENIENTEASYCLEANOUT
assuring positive operation.
blender models. Options include an integrated bin, mix agitator and mix chamber allow quick efficient
loader control feature, a flow control valve cleaning. The blender features a built-in manual
for central blending applications and material material shut-off valve below the mixing chamber, this
compartment drain ports. can be replaced with the automatic flow control valve for
B-13
Features



blend performance.
3MART"LEND©3" • Precision metering yields industry’s best batch-to-batch

Premium touchscreen control offers these high performance functions accuracy.
to target the unique process needs of molders and extruders. • Precision ratio control - all components.
• Best choice for the needs of rapidly changing custom jobs or • Individual material accuracy settings.
sophisticated extrusion and molding applications with complex • SMS or text message alarm notification capable.
• Progressively approaches each ingredient target. Never overshoots. a larger monitor.

&EATURES
Material bin sight glasses and main bin clean out doors y y y y
Material bin finger guards y y
Quick clean/enhanced flow option* y y
No pellet leakage.
&EATURE.OTES No material waste.
Completely sealed
* Material bin door safety interlocks and drain ports. chassis.
†
‡
B-14
Features
record time. • Sturdy design
• Easy cleanout
• One standard material
takeaway tube (up to two
additional material tubes are
available as options)
• Available with two or five cubic foot reservoir capacities
Options
While the Standard mixing chamber is suitable for a wide variety
of applications, the Tapered mixing chamber is ideal for critical
4"2EPORTS -ATERIALLEVELALARMCONTROL
Used to track and document material Eliminate costly material shortage problems
usage, alarms, batch and shift reports and and machine downtime with this early
recipes. See TrueBlend Reporting Software warning system. The control monitors up to
specification sheet. six material levels. Each sensor can be set
as a high or low warning. See Level Alarm
Control specification sheet.

the blender mix chamber a fill-to level option in control up to six meters
to blow excessive dust and a surge bin or other away with convenient
fines away from the mixing material receptacle that plug-in cable set.
chamber sensor and ensure sits below a remote
accurate level sensor reading. mounted blender.
$RAINCHUTE
B-15
3IDEVIEWe &RONTVIEWe POSITIONp
" (
#
01 02
04 03
01 04
'
!
,
04 03
$RAINCHUTE
#ONTROL
-ODELS 4"2 !PPLICATION.OTES Dimensions shown in inches and {mm}.

Batch size lbs {g} 5.5 {2500} - this side of the interface
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 850 {386} 16-3/16 sq.{411}
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 1.6 {45} 12 sq.{305}
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.3 {8} 8 sq.{203}
Maximum number of materials 4 3-5/32

Number of vertical discharge valves 4 diameter
{80}
Number - (size) of major valves 2 - {60 mm}
Number - (size) of minor valves 2 - {20 mm}
Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes) 9/16 inches {14.0 mm}.
C - Depth 38.88 {988}
Predrilled 8 x 8 and 12 x 12 mounting pattern as standard.
F - Control depth 6.75 {172} Specification Notes
G - Loader center distance 18.44 {468} * Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material, using all
H - Loader center distance 20.13 {511} standard valve sizes. Use of reducer inserts will lower the rate shown.
I - Loader center distance 15.13 {388} Throughput rates are based on:
J - Loader center distance 11.25 {286} • A 4-position blender recipe of 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color and 2% additive
K - Loader center distance 9.00 {229} material.
Installed 280 manual slide valve. Conair recommends using the optional flow control valve when
Shipping 400 mounting the blender on a stand, surge bin or hopper.
‡
6OLTAGEFull load amps ** TB250R-4 hopper position two is supplied with a 12-8 adapter with an eight inch
cover plate as standard. Position three and four are supplied with hand-fill lids.
115V/1 phase/60 hz 6.3
§
230V/1 phase/50 hz 3.2
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
90 psi @ 0.2 ft3/min {6 bars systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
Discharge Valves
@ 0.09 liters/sec}; 1/4 inch NPT fitting applied to the machine.
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES
15-inch loaders - number of loaders 2 the most current information.
8-inch loaders - number of loaders 2
B-16
Accurate Gravimetric
Blending For Medium to
High Throughputs
increased profits with Conair's TrueBlendTM Series Blenders.

and freely through respective vertical dispense valves into the
weigh chamber. Efficient mixing assures full integration of all
recipe ingredients. The fully-enclosed cabinet design assures no
pellet spillage and clean operation. Standard convenient features
such as wide access doors on each material compartment, a
hinged access door and removable components in the mixing
chamber reduce downtime during cleanout.
-ODEL4"

medium-to-large injection molding machines
machine. The blender dispenses up to six
materials (depending on model) from material ` %ASY TO USECONTROL
compartments into a common weigh chamber. Intuitive 7-inch LCD touchscreen control with full
The control determines the correct weight of color graphics allows quick and easy setup of blender
each ingredient based on setpoints entered on setpoints. All setpoints are displayed simultaneously.
the touchscreen display. Up to 3000 recipes Enter the percentages of the blend on the touchscreen
and 4000 resin names can be entered and display and the blender does the rest. The system
stored in the control. automatically weighs the recipe ingredients in the
proper sequence and maintains the correct blend relationship. Any position can
Unique fast-acting "no stick" vertical valves be identified as one of the four material type selections adding flexibility to your
control the amount of material dispensed. All application setup.
assuring positive operation. ` #ONVENIENTEASYCLEANOUT
Choose between four component or six safe cleaning during color or resin changes. Quick
component blender models. Options include an access material compartment bins, a removable weigh
integrated loader control feature, a flow control bin, mix agitator and mix chamber allow quick efficient
valve for central blending applications and cleaning. The blender features a built-in manual
material compartment drain ports. material shut-off valve below the mixing chamber, this
B-17
Features



blend performance.

&EATURES
y y y y

&EATURES
No pellet leakage.
No material waste.
Loading control option y y Completely sealed
Loader, pump and compressed air interconnection kit y y chassis.
&EATURE.OTES
†
‡
B-18
Features
• Sturdy design
record time.
• Easy cleanout
3TANDARD"INOR4APERED"IN
applications, the Tapered mixing chamber is ideal for critical
-ATERIALLEVELALARMCONTROL 4RUE"LENDHIGH HEATMODELS


the blender mix chamber a fill-to level option in control up to six meters
to blow excessive dust and a surge bin or other away with convenient
fines away from the mixing material receptacle that plug-in cable set.
chamber sensor and ensure sits below a remote
accurate level sensor reading. mounted blender.
$RAINCHUTE
B-19
# " (
01 ( 02 01 02
04 03
01 04
'
'
06 03
!
*
05 04
04 03 +
,

The bin positions change for a MATERIALDRAINCHUTEthat $
& %

Batch size lbs {g} 11 {5000} - this side of the interface
16-3/16 sq.{411}
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 1500 {680} 1150 {522}
12 sq.{305}
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 2.7 {76}
8 sq.{203}
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 2.7 {76} 1.35 {38}
Maximum number of materials 4 6 3-5/32
diameter
Number of vertical discharge valves 4 6
{80}
Number - (size) of major bin valves 2 - (100/60 mm)
B - Hopper width and depth (square) 40.13 {1026} Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes) 9/16 inch {14.0 mm}.
C - Depth 43.00 {1092} Predrilled 8 x 8 and 12 x 12 mounting pattern as standard.
F - Control depth 6.75 {172} * Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material, using all standard
G - Loader center distance 22.00 {559} 14.88 {378} valve sizes. Use of reducer inserts will lower the rate shown.
H - Loader center distance 22.00 {559} 20.00 {508} Throughput rates are based on:
J - Loader center distance N/A 9.75 {248} • A 4-position blender recipe of 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color and 2% additive
material.
K - Loader center distance N/A 13.00 {330}
• A 6-position blender recipeof 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color at position 3, 2%
L - Loader center distance N/A 28.00 {711}
additive at position 4, 3% additive at position 5 and 2% additive at position 6.
The optional flow control valve will mount inside the chassis in the space of the manual
Installed 400 {182} slide valve. Conair recommends using the optional flow control valve when mounting
Shipping 520 {236} the blender on a stand, surge bin or hopper.
TB500-4 hopper positions two and four are supplied with 12-8 adapters with eight inch
115V/1 phase/60 hz 6.3 cover plates as standard. TB500-6 hopper position two is supplied with a 12-8 adapter
with an eight inch cover.
230V/1 phase/50 hz 3.2 §
** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
90 psi @ 0.2 ft3/min {6 bars on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
Discharge Valves
@ 0.09 liters/sec}; 1/4 inch NPT fitting systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES applied to the machine.
15-inch loaders 4 2 Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the
8-inch loaders N/A 4 most current information.
B-20
Accurate
for Higher Throughputs
Steep-sided component hoppers allow material to flow evenly and
freely through vertical dispense valves into the weigh chamber.
Efficient mixing assures full integration of all recipe ingredients.
The fully-enclosed cabinet design assures no pellet spillage and

clean operation. Standard convenient features such as wide
access doors on each main material compartment, a hinged access
door and removable components in the mixing chamber reduce -ODEL4"
downtime during cleanout. (Shown with optional
Access Receivers.)
The TrueBlendTM TB900 series blenders offer

` "LENDACCURACYTOOF
processors with medium-to-large extruders
or large tonnage injection molding machines
machine.
` %ASY TO USECONTROL
The blender dispenses up to six materials
Intuitive 7-inch LCD touchscreen control with full
(depending on model) from material color graphics allows quick and easy setup of blender
compartments into a common weigh chamber. setpoints. All setpoints are displayed simultaneously.
The control determines the correct weight of Enter the percentages of the blend on the touchscreen
each ingredient based on setpoints entered on display and the blender does the rest. The system
the touch screen display. Up to 3000 recipes automatically weighs the recipe ingredients in the
and 4000 resin names can be entered and proper sequence and maintains the correct blend relationship. Any position can
stored in the processor. be identified as one of the four material type selections adding flexibility to your
application setup.
Unique fast-acting "no stick" vertical valves
control the amount of material dispensed. All ` #ONVENIENTEASYCLEANOUT
dispense valves use two-way air cylinders Easy access to all material contact points for fast and
assuring positive operation. safe cleaning during color or resin changes. Quick
access material compartment bins, a removable weigh
Choose between four component or six bin, mix agitator and mix chamber allow quick efficient
component blender models. Options include cleaning. The blender features a built-in manual
an integrated loader control feature, a flow material shutoff valve below the mixing chamber, this
control valve for central blending applications can be replaced with the automatic flow control valve for
and material compartment drain ports. remote and central blending applications.
B-21
Features



blend performance.

&EATURES
y y y y

&EATURES
Material bin sight glasses and clean out doors y y y y No pellet leakage.
Touchscreen control y y y y No material waste.
Loading control option y y Completely sealed
chassis.
&EATURE.OTES

†
‡
B-22
• Sturdy design
record time.
• Easy cleanout
applications, the Tapered mixing chamber is ideal for critical application
blends with material percentages less than 1%. The tapered design
allows for improved mixing.
-ATERIALLEVELALARMCONTROL 4RUE"LENDHIGH HEATMODELS


the blender mix chamber to a fill-to level option in control up to six meters
blow excessive dust and fines a surge bin or other away with convenient
away from the mixing chamber material receptacle that plug-in cable set.
sensor and ensure accurate sits below a remote
level sensor reading. mounted blender.
$RAINCHUTE
B-23
Specifications 4OPVIEWe
# "
01 ( 02 01 ( 02
01 06 05 04
'
' 06 03
! 05 04
*
04 03 +
,

The bin positions change for a MATERIALDRAINCHUTE that $
& %

Batch size lbs {g} 19.8 {9000} - this side of the interface
1 7 {5 5}
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 3500 {1588} 2800 {1270}
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 4.4 {125} 16 { 6}
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 4.4 {125} 2.2 {62} {2 3}
Maximum number of materials 4 6
3 15 16
Number of vertical discharge valves 4 6 diameter
Number - (size) of major bin valves 2 - (100 mm) {1 }
Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes) 9/16 inch
{14.0 mm}. Predrilled 8 x 8 and 16 x 16
C - Depth 51.00 {1296} mounting pattern as standard.
E - Control width 8.75 {222} Specification Notes
* Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material, using all
G - Loader center distance 24.00 {610}
H - Loader center distance 24.00 {610} 18.00 {457}
Throughput rates are based on:
J - Loader center distance N/A 11.19 {284}
• A 4-position blender recipe of 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color and 2% additive material.
K - Loader center distance N/A 15.00 {381}
L - Loader center distance N/A 33.44 {849} • A 6-position blender recipeof 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color at position 3,
2% additive at position 4, 3% additive at position 5 and 2% additive at position 6.
†
Installed 550 {249} The optional flow control valve will mount inside the chassis in the space of the
manual slide valve. Conair recommends using the optional flow control valve when
Shipping 700 {318} mounting the blender on a stand, surge bin or hopper.
TB900-4 hopper positions three and four are supplied with 12-8 adapters with
115V/1 phase/60 hz 6.3 eight inch cover plates as standard. T900-6 hopper position two is supplied with a
230V/1 phase/50 hz 3.2 12-8 adapters and eight inch cover plates as standard.
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS §
90 psi @ 0.2 ft3/min {6 bars ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on
Discharge Valves
@ 0.09 liters/sec}; 1/4 inch NPT fitting equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
20-inch loaders - number of loaders 4 2 Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the
15-inch loaders - number of loaders N/A 2 most current information.
8-inch loaders - number of loaders N/A 2
B-24
TPBX031-0317 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERS425%",%.$4-
4" 4" !.$4"
Accurate
for Central Blending
spillage and clean operation. Standard convenient features
such as wide access doors on each main material compartment, a
hinged access door and full access to the mixing chamber reduce
(Shown with (2) DL20
and (2) AR10 vacuum
receivers.)

processors with large extruders or central ` "LENDACCURACYTOOF
blending applications a superior way to blend Colorant and/or additive weights are held to within 0.5% of setting. A selectable
naturals, regrinds and additives centrally or at Precision AdditiveTM feature is also available for additives. The microprocessor
the throat of the processing machine. control automatically calibrates after every cycle and compensates for variations
in dispense method, resin bulk density or particle geometry.
(depending on model) from respective ` %ASY TO USECONTROL
material compartments into a common weigh Intuitive 7-inch LCD touchscreen control with full
chamber. The control determines the correct color graphics allows quick and easy setup of blender
weight of each ingredient based on setpoints setpoints. All setpoints are displayed simultaneously.
entered on the touchscreen display. Up to
3000 recipes and 4000 resin names can be
automatically weighs the recipe ingredients in the proper
entered and stored in the control.
sequence and maintains the correct blend relationship.
Air solenoids and major electrical components Any position can be identified as one of the four material
are easy to access through the electrically type selections adding flexibility to your application setup.
interlocked main power box.
` #ONVENIENTNO TOOLSCLEANOUT
Choose between four, five or six component Easy access to all material contact points for fast and safe cleaning during
blender models. Options include an integrated color or resin changes. Material compartment access doors and removable weigh bin,
blender/loader control feature, a flow control allow quick efficient cleaning. The blender can have a built-in material shut-off
valve for central blending applications, valve below the mixing chamber or this can be replaced with the automatic flow
material compartment drain ports, and control valve for remote and central blending applications.
ethernet communications.
B-25
4" 4" !.$4"

Features
maintain correct blend relationship. Any position can be identified as one of the four material type selections adding flexibility to your application setup.


Every SB-3 blender Diagnostic screen

blend performance.

&EATURES
Electrical material bin door interlocks y y y y
No pellet leakage.
3TANDARD0ACKAGES #OMPONENT 43 4% ,3p ,%p No material waste.
Completely sealed
&EATURES
chassis.

&EATURES &EATURE.OTES
Touchscreen control y y y y * Material bin door safety interlocks and drain ports.
†
Loading control option y y y Choose between either machine or remote mounted
blender packages.
Loader, pump and compressed air interconnection kit y y ‡
Quick clean/enhanced flow option* y y Specifications may change without notice. Consult
Machine mount with manual slide gate discharge† y y y y information.
B-26
4" 4" !.$4"
Features
3IMPLEANDQUICKCLEANOUT #USTOMSTANDSAVAILABLE
Easy access to all material contact points for fast and safe Each blender stand features:
cleaning during color or resin changes. Material compartment
• Application specific • Available in Conair beige
access doors allow quick efficient cleaning.
modular construction with standard safety
yellow handrails and
• One or two level designs
optional ladders
• Designs to accommodate
low overhead clearances
Options
2EPORTS !IRBLOW OFFFORMIX
Used to track and CHAMBERLEVELSENSOR

document material This feature is
usage, alarms, integrated into the
batch and shift blender mix chamber
reports and recipes. to blow excessive dust
See TrueBlend and fines away from
Reporting Software the sensing device and
specification sheet. ensure accurate level
sensor reading.
2EMOTE(-) 2EMOTEMIXER
OPERATORCABLE DEMANDSENSOR

Place the TrueBlend This sensor provides
control up to six a fill-to level option in
meters away with a surge bin or other
convinient plug-in material receptacle
cable set. that sits below a
remote mounted
blender.
-ATERIALLEVELALARMCONTROL 3TANDARDBINOR4APEREDBIN
Eliminate costly material shortage While the Standard mixing chamber is

problems and machine downtime with this suitable for a wide variety of applications,
early warning system. The control monitors the Tapered mixing chamber is ideal for
up to six material levels at one blender. critical application blends with material
Individual switches can be adjusted to percentages less than 1%. The tapered
monitor high or low material levels. See design allows for improved mixing.
Level Alarm Control specification sheet.
B-27
4" 4" !.$4"

Specifications 4OPVIEWp
3IDEVIEWp &RONTVIEWp POSITION POSITION
# " 01 ( 02 ( *
01 02
+
' ' 03
,
Front 05 04
04 03 Front ,
! ! POSITION
+ *
#ONTROL
01 02
,
06 03 +
'
+ $
04
,
& %
.OTESide and front view drawings are shown for model TB1800-6. The bin 05
(
positions change for a TB1800-4 and TB1800-5 models, see the top view. Front
-ODELS 4" 4" 4" !PPLICATION.OTES

0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS 3 {762 }
Batch size lbs {g} (grams or kilograms) 40 {18000} 27 {6 5 }
Dimensions
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 6000 {2722} 5500 {2495} 4800 {2177} shown in
Ø6 inches and
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 6 {170} 15 {3 1 } {Ø152.4}
{mm}.
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 6 {170} 4 {113}
Maximum number of materials 4 5 6 7 16 {11}
Number (size) of major bin valves 4 (5X5) 3 (5X5) 2 (5X5)

35{ }
Number (size) of minor bin valves 0 2 (2X5) 4 (2X5)
13 5 {1 2}
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} 16 25 {3 3}
{ 13}
A - Height above mounting plate† 94.4 {2398} {1 2}
B - Hopper width and depth (square) 53.0 {1346} 35{ }

C - Depth 53.0 {1346}
G - Loader center distance 30.00 {762} Specification Notes
H - Loader center distance 30.00 {762} * Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3
J - Loader center distance N/A 4.25 {108} pelletized material, using all standard valve sizes. Use
K - Loader center distance N/A 21.63 {549} of reducer inserts will lower the rate shown.
L - Loader center distance N/A 12.63 {321} Throughput rates are based on:
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlbs {kg} • A 4-position blender recipe of 50% natural, 40% natural,
Installed 1465 {665} 1498 {679} 1532 {695} 5% additive material and 5% additive material.
Shipping 1715 {778} 1748 {793} 1782 {808} • A 5-position blender recipeof 50% natural, 20% natural,
6OLTAGEFull load amps § 20% natural, 5% additive material and 5% additive material.
220V/1 phase/50 hz 11.3 • A 6-position blender recipeof 50% natural, 20%
natural, 10% natural, 10% natural, 5% additive material
220V/1 phase/60 hz 11.3
and 5% additive material.
240V/3 phase/60 hz 7.5 †
The optional flow control valve will mount inside the
400V/3 phase/50 hz 5.0 chassis in the space of the manual slide valve. Conair
480V/3 phase/60 hz 4.5 recommends using the optional flow control valve when
575V/3 phase/60 hz 3.9 mounting the blender on a stand, surge bin or hopper.
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS ‡
0.3 ft3/min @ 90 psi {6 bars @ 0.14 liters/sec} §
3/8 inch NPT fitting any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment
4 DL25 3 DL25 2 DL15 2 DL25 4 DL15
order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
2 DL25 2 DL15 3 DL25 2 AR10 2 DL25 4 AR10
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with
2 DL25 2 AR10 4 DL20 2 DL15 a Conair representative for the most current information.
4 DL20 4 DL20 2 AR10
B-28
4" 4" !.$4"
Accurate
for Large Extruders
and (4) DL20 vacuum
receivers.)

Choose between four, five or six component Easy access to all material contact points for fast and safe cleaning during color or
blender models. Options include an integrated resin changes. Material compartment access doors and removable weigh bin
blender/loader control feature, a flow control allow quick efficient cleaning. The blender can have a built-in material shut-off
valve for central blending applications, valve below the mixing chamber or this can be replaced with the automatic
material compartment drain ports, and flow control valve for remote and central blending applications.
Ethernet communications.
B-29
4" 4" !.$4"

Features



blend performance.

&EATURES
No pellet leakage.
Completely sealed
&EATURES
chassis.

Material bin sight glasses and clean out doors y y y y * Material bin door safety interlocks and drain ports.
Touchscreen control y y y y †
Choose between either machine or remote mounted
Loading control option y y blender packages.
Material bin finger guards y y Specifications may change without notice. Consult
Quick clean/enhanced flow option* y y with a Conair representative for the most current
B-30
4" 4" !.$4"
Features
3IMPLEANDQUICKCLEANOUT #USTOM3TANDS!VAILABLE
optional ladders
Options

sensor reading.

remote mounted
blender.
-ATERIALLEVELALARMCONTROL
Eliminate costly material shortage problems

and machine downtime with this early
warning system. The control monitors up to
six material levels at one blender. Individual
switches can be adjusted to monitor high or
low material levels. See Level Alarm Control
B-31
4" 4" !.$4"

3IDEVIEWp &RONTVIEWp POSITION POSITION
# " 01 ( 02 (
01 02
+
' ' 03
,
Front 05 04
04 03 Front ,
! ! POSITION
, +
#ONTROL
01 02
,
06 03 +
'
+ $
04
,
& %
.OTESide and front view drawings are shown for model TB2500-6. The bin 05
( *
positions change for a TB2500-4 and TB2500-5 models, see the top view. Front

3 { 65 2}
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS Dimensions
35 { }
Batch size lbs {g} (grams or kilograms) 55 {25000} shown in
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 9000 {4082} 8000 {3629} 7000 {3175} 1 { 2 6}
Ø8 inches and
{Ø203.2}
{mm}.
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 10 {283}
7 16 {11}
Maximum number of materials 4 5 6 35{ }
Number (size) of major bin valves 4 (6X6) 3 (6X6) 2 (6X6) 13 5 {1 2}

16 25 {3 3}
Number (size) of minor bin valves 0 2 (2X6) 4 (2X6) { 13}
{1 2}
35{ }
B - Hopper width and depth (square) 72 {1828}
C - Depth 72 {1828}
F - Control depth 6.75 {172} * Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3
pelletized material, using all standard valve sizes. Use of
G - Loader center distance 35.75 {908} reducer inserts will lower the rate shown.
H - Loader center distance 35.75 {908} Throughput rates are based on:
J - Loader center distance N/A 10.5 {267} • A 4-position blender recipe of 50% natural, 40% natural,
K - Loader center distance N/A 26.13 {664} 5% additive material and 5% additive material.
• A 5-position blender recipeof 50% natural, 20% natural,
L - Loader center distance N/A 20.0 {508}
20% natural, 5% additive material and 5% additive material.
7EIGHTlbs {kg} • A 6-position blender recipeof 50% natural, 20% natural,
Installed 2483 {1126} 2531 {1148} 2580 {1170} 10% natural, 10% natural, 5% additive material and 5%
additive material.
Shipping 2783 {1262} 2831 {1080} 2880 {1306}
†
6OLTAGEFull load amps § chassis in the space of the manual slide valve. Conair
‡
480V/3 phase/60 hz 6.4 Numbers in top view drawings represent hopper positions.
§
575V/3 phase/60 hz 5.6
any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS detail for power circuit design of specific machines
0.3 ft3/min @ 90 psi {6 bars @ 0.14 liters/sec} and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the
3/8 inch NPT fitting equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES
Conair representative for the most current information.
Number of 25-inch loaders 4 5 6
B-32
4" 4" !.$4"
Accurate
for Very Large Extruders
and (4) DL20 vacuum
receivers.)
The TrueBlendTM TB3500 series blenders offer

Choose between four, five or six component Easy access to all material contact points for fast and safe cleaning during color or
blender models. Options include an integrated resin changes. Material compartment access doors and removable weigh bin allow
blender/loader control feature, a flow control quick efficient cleaning. The blender can have a built-in material shut-off valve
valve for central blending applications, below the mixing chamber or this can be replaced with the automatic flow control
material compartment drain ports, and valve for remote and central blending applications.
Ethernet communications.
B-33
4" 4" !.$4"

Features



blend performance.

&EATURES
No pellet leakage.
Completely sealed
&EATURES
chassis.

Touchscreen control y y y y * Material bin door safety interlocks and drain ports.
†
Loading control option y y Choose between either machine or remote mounted
blender packages.
Quick clean/enhanced flow option* y y Specifications may change without notice. Consult
B-34
4" 4" !.$4"
Features
3IMPLEANDQUICKCLEANOUT #USTOMSTANDSAVAILABLE
optional ladders
Options


sensor reading.

remote mounted
blender.

and machine downtime with this early
warning system. The control monitors up to
six material levels at one blender. Individual
switches can be adjusted to monitor high or
low material levels. See Level Alarm Control
B-35
4" 4" !.$4"

POSITION POSITION
3IDEVIEWp &RONTVIEWp 01 ( 02 , +
# "
01 02
,
06 03 +
'
'
+
04
,
Front
04 03 05
( *
POSITION Front
! !
( #ONTROL
01 02
+
' 03
$
,
05 04 %
&
.OTESide and front view drawings are shown for model TB3500-6. The bin Front ,
positions change for a TB3500-4 and TB3500-5 models, see the top view.

3 { 65 2}
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS Dimensions
35 { }
Batch size lbs {g} (grams or kilograms) 77 {35000} shown in
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 12000 {5443} 10500 {4763} 9000 {4082} 1 { 2 6}
Ø8 inches and
{Ø203.2}
{mm}.
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 18 {510}
7 16 {11}
Maximum number of materials 4 5 6 35{ }
Number of major valves 4 (6 x 6) 3 (6 x 6) 2 (6 x 6) 13 5 {1 2}

16 25 {3 3}
Number of minor valves 0 2 (2 x 6) 4 (2 x 6) { 13}
{1 2}
35{ }
A - Height above mounting plate† 156 {3962}
B - Hopper width and depth (square) 72 {1828}
C - Depth 72 {1828}
F - Control depth 6.75 {172} * Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3
pelletized material, using all standard valve sizes. Use of
G - Loader center distance 35.75 {908} reducer inserts will lower the rate shown.
H - Loader center distance 35.75 {908} Throughput rates are based on:
J - Loader center distance N/A 10.5 {267} • A 4-position blender recipe of 50% natural, 40% natural,
K - Loader center distance N/A 26.13 {664} 5% additive material and 5% additive material.
• A 5-position blender recipeof 50% natural, 20% natural,
L- Loader center distance N/A 20.0 {508}
20% natural, 5% additive material and 5% additive material.
7EIGHTlbs {kg} • A 6-position blender recipeof 50% natural, 20% natural,
Installed 2982 {1353} 3049 {1383} 3115 {1413} 10% natural, 10% natural, 5% additive material and 5%
additive material.
Shipping 3282 {1489} 3349 {1519} 3415 {1549}
†
6OLTAGEFull load amps § chassis in the space of the manual slide valve. Conair
‡
480V/3 phase/60 hz 6.4 Numbers in top view drawings represent hopper positions.
§
575V/3 phase/60 hz 5.6
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
0.3 ft3/min @ 90 psi {6 bars @ 0.14 liters/sec} systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment
3/8 inch NPT fitting order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES
a Conair representative for the most current information.
Number of 25-inch loaders 4 5 6
B-36
TPBX043-0317 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERS425%",%.$©4")).35,!4%$-/$%,3
Keep It Dry
While You Blend
When process flow specifications dictate that materials are
dried and then blended, your process can suffer from unwanted
moisture regain in your dried material. Standard blenders,
incapable of dealing with hot material can operate erratically,
with seal and/or bearing failures, heat loss, sensor malfunctions
and hot surface hazards.
Conair TBI Insulated Blenders are specifically outfitted to handle

hot material safely, reliably and most importantly, prevent
moisture from re-saturating your dried material.
-ODEL4")
2-component
Insulated Blender
Material Retains Heat and Stays Dry
Built upon the highly accurate and reliable

TrueBlendTM Gravimetric Batch Blender design, ` "UILTTOHANDLEHOTMATERIAL
the TBI Series assures that all ingredients being Blender is specifically designed for material temperatures up to 375°F {177°C} with
blended do not lose heat, nor regain moisture insulated drying hopper supply bins.
as they are inventoried, blended and mixed.
` $ESIGNEDTOPREVENTMOISTUREREGAIN
The model TBI provides insulated hoppers, Hot air recirculation through the supply bins keeps materials dry and prevents the
blanketed with dry air and special high heat re-introduction of wet, ambient air.
components that accompany a wide range
` (IGHTEMPERATURECONSTRUCTION
of standard TB options like vacuum loading Load cells, level sensors and air cylinders are specified for their ability to stand up to
systems that can be operated from within the elevated temperatures. Electronics are isolated from elevated temperatures.
blender control, flow aids, easy cleanout and
intuitive touchscreen control. ` !FULLRANGEOFMODELS
Models range from 1000 to 9000 gram batches.
Material usage reports and other data logging
are all available via TrueBlend reporting software.
` &ULLY FEATUREDPRECISIONBLENDERS
Gravimetric accuracy to ½ of 1%. Automatic self-
calibration compensates for material and flow variations.
Up to 3000 recipes can be stored in the 7-inch touch
screen control. Loaders or receivers can be controlled
right from the blender control.
B-37
TPBX043-0317 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERS425%",%.$©4")).35,!4%$-/$%,3
Features
01 05
+EEPITHOTANDSEALED 05 !DDCONVEYING
Supply hoppers are insulated, sealed and High temperature loading equipment
equipped with large cleanout doors with can be specified and controlled by the
strip sight glasses. 01 TrueBlend control.
02 06
3HORTCIRCUIT 06 +EEPITDRY
By-pass/drain line allows priming the Dry air is blanketed throughout the supply
process with unblended material and/or hoppers to prevent moisture regain as
draining supply hopper(s). 02 materials wait to be blended.
03 07 07
)NDUSTRIALMIXER &ULLYENCLOSED
Mixing chamber includes a heavy-duty agita- 03 Weigh hopper is protected inside
tor, duty-rated for demanding PET materials enclosure, but is easily accessed or
plus a high temperature demand sensor. removed for inspection and cleaning.
04 08
&IRMFOOTING 08 +EEPINVENTORYDRY
Rugged support frame may be customized Optional, insulated receiving hopper
for mezzanine, on-the-throat or beside the retains heat and dryness while blended
process mounting. 04 material awaits processing.
0ERFECTFOR2ECYCLED0%4 3PECIFY9OUR4")"LENDER
Producers of PET sheet, strapping and other products using • TBI batch blenders are capable of handling materials up to
recycled polyesters can reap significant energy savings and 375°F {177°C} and may be specified:
productivity benefits with insulated TBI blenders. These blenders
• Batches from 1000 to 9000 grams.
allow separation of virgin and recycled materials until just before
they are fed to the feed throat, with these benefits: • Up to 6 components.
• Contamination or other problems in the recycled content • Conveying equipment for supply and takeaway.
does not require shutting down the entire production • By-pass and drain lines.
line. Production can continue on one material, while the
• Mezzanine, floor or machine mounting.
questionable ingredient is corrected.
• Each TBI includes these features for long life, blending of
• Virgin and regrind, with significantly different bulk densities
hot materials:
and flow characteristics, will reach the machine throat with
far less separation (common to drying and conveying), by • High temperature air cylinders and hosing.
blending them last. • High temperature load cells.
• Retaining drying heat throughout the blending process • High temperature level sensor.
means less heat is required during processing, saving • Tempered sight glasses.
significant energy.
B-38
TPBX037-0317 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERS425%",%.$©()'((%!4-/$%,3
Accurate Blending for

High Heat Applications
TrueBlendTM High-Temperature Models allow processors running
engineering plastics like ABS, Nylon, Polycarbonate and PET to
blend these resins after they have been dried.
Until now, processors had to blend the material before drying,

but by doing so ran the risk that some ingredients could
separate out of the mix during the drying and conveying process.
Like all TrueBlend models, the new high-heat blenders feature

a fully enclosed cabinet design assuring no pellet spillage and
clean operation. Standard convenience features, such as wide
access doors on each component bin, a hinged chassis access
door and removable components in the mixing chamber reduce -ODEL4"(
material waste and downtime during clean out. High Heat
Dry Air Blanket Prevents Moisture Regain
Models TB100, TB250, TB500 and TB900,

which offer throughputs ranging from 450 ` "LENDACCURACYTOOF
to 3500 lbs/hr are available with two different Colorant and additive weights are held to within 0.5% of the requested ratio.
high-temperature packages. One to handle The control automatically calibrates after each cycle and corrects for variations in
temperatures from 160° to 250°F material and dispensing.
{71 to 121°C} for materials such as Nylons,
` %ASY TO USECONTROL
ABS and PC. The second package handles
Enter the percentages of the blend using the touchscreen. The blender does the rest.
temperature levels from 160° to 375°F
The system automatically adds ingredients in the proper ratio and maintains the
{71°C to 191°C}, including materials like PBT,
correct level of material in the mix chamber.
PET and other polyesters.
Both temperature levels are available with an ` #ONVENIENTNO TOOLSCLEANOUT

Electrically interlocked access doors provide fast, safe cleaning of component bins.
optional dry air blanket package. This option
The weigh bin, mix blade and mix chamber slide out for easy cleaning.
blankets the material compartments and
the mixing chamber with dry air to prevent ` !PACKAGETOFITYOURNEEDS
moisture regain during processing. Two temperature levels are available. One for temperatures of 160° to 250°F
{71° to 121°C} with the second package covering temperatures from 160° to 375°F
{71° to 191°C}. A dry air blanket option introduces dry air into the material compartments
and the mixing chamber from an external source to prevent moisture regain.
B-39
Features
!HIGHHEATBLENDERTOFITYOURAPPLICATION
Choose from two temperature levels. TBA models cover medium processing temperatures, those ranging up to 250°F {121°C}. TBH models
handle higher processing temperatures - up to 375°F {191°C}. Both are specifically designed to accept engineered resins that have been dried
prior to processing.
4"!-ODELS MEDIUMTEMPERATUREUNIT 4"(-ODELS HIGHTEMPERATUREUNIT

Designed for temperatures of more than 160°F and ranging to Handle temperatures ranging up to 375°F {191°C}. Materials
250°F {71° to 121°C}. Materials such as Nylons, ABS and PC. such as PBT, PET and other polyesters.
Some blender enhancements include: Some blender enhancements include:
• Safety disconnect relocated to the outside of the door. • Safety disconnect relocated to the outside of the door.
• High temperature air cylinders and hosing. • High temperature air cylinders and hosing.
• High temperature load cells. • High temperature load cells.
• Standoff to isolate the power box from the chassis. • High temperature level sensor.
• Standoff to isolate power box from chassis.
• High temperature glass-tempered sight glasses.
• Each access door opening has high temperature glass-
tempered sight glasses.
01
Each access door opening has two
round heat-treated sight glasses.
4"(MODELS
02
High temperature, heat-treated sight
glasses.
01
4"(MODELS
03
Safety disconnect has been
02
relocated to the outside of the door.
4"(AND4"!MODELS
04
High temperature level sensors.
Located on the rear of the unit.
03
4"(MODELS 04
B-40
Options
$RYAIRBLANKET $RAINCHUTE
Introduce hot dry air to the material bins The material drain chute readily installs to the chassis
of your blender with the dry air blanket opening of the blender for fast and simple cleanout.
option. This option blankets the material
!IRBLOW OFFFORMIXCHAMBERLEVELSENSOR
compartments and mixing chamber with
This feature is integrated into the blender mix chamber
dry air to prevent moisture regain during
to blow the dust and fines away from the sensing device
processing. Available on both the TBA
and ensure accurate level sensor reading.
and TBH models.
2EMOTEMIXERDEMANDSENSOR
!DJUSTINGTHEAIRFLOW This sensor provides a fill-to level option in a surge bin or other
Isolation valves allow the material receptacle that sits below a remote mounted blender.
air flow to be adjusted
-AJORCOMPONENTFLOWRESTRICTOR
independently or completely
Available with TB/TBA/TBH models 100, 250, 500 and 900 on bin
shut-off depending on the need
positions one and/or two. (Generally used when feeding more than
at each of the material bins.
two minor ingredients.)
-INORCOMPONENTFLOWRESTRICTOR
Available with TB/TBA/TBH models 100, 250, 500 and 900 on bin
positions three and/or four. (Generally used when feeding 1% or
less of an ingredient.)
and machine downtime with this early warning
./4%This dry air source is no
included with this package, but can system. The control monitors up to six material
be purchased seperately from Conair. levels at one blender. Individual switches can be
adjusted to monitor high or low material levels.
Mounting Interfaces
4"!AND4"( 4"!AND4"( 4"!AND4"( 4"!AND4"(
Mixing chamber access door - Mixing chamber access door - Mixing chamber access door - Mixing chamber access door -
this side of the interface this side of the interface this side of the interface this side of the interface
2-5/32 16-3/16 sq.{411} 16-3/16 sq.{411}

10-1/4 sq.
diameter {260} 12 sq.{305} 12 sq.{305} 19-7/8 {505} sq.
centered
8 sq.{203} 8 sq.{203} 16 {406} sq.
{55}
8 {203} sq.
{203}
3-5/32 3-5/32
8 sq.
diameter diameter 3-15/16

{80} {80} diameter
{100}
Mounting bolt hole size

(4 holes) 9/16 inch {14.0 mm}.
Predrilled 8 x 8 mounting pattern
as standard.
Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes) Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes)
9/16 inch {14.0 mm}. Predrilled 8 x 8 and 9/16 inch {14.0 mm}. Predrilled
12 x 12 mounting pattern as standard. 8 x 8 and 12 x 12 mounting pattern Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes)
as standard. 9/16 inch {14.0 mm}. Predrilled
8 x 8 and 16 x 16 mounting pattern
as standard.
B-41
Specifications
-ODEL4"!4"( -ODEL4"!4"( 4"!4"(
# " # "
! !
3IDEVIEW &RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW &RONTVIEW
01 02 01 02
01 02
03 04 03 04 03
04
& %
4OPVIEW4"!( 4OPVIEW4"!( 4OPVIEW4"!( #ONTROL
-ODELS 4"!4"( 4"!4"( 4"!4"( 4"!4"( Specification Notes

Batch size lbs {g} 2.2 {1000} 5.5 {2500} 11.0 {5000} 19.8 {9000} * Maximum throughput rates are based on
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 400 {181} 950 {431} 1500 {680} 3500 {1588} 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material and using all
of the standard valve sizes. Use of valve
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.6 {17} 1.6 {45.3} 2.7 {76.4} 4.4 {124.6} inserts will lower the rate shown.
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.3 {8} 1.6 {45.3} 2.7 {76.4} 4.4 {124.6}
Maximum number of materials 4 Throughput rates are based on:
• A 4-position blender recipe of 20%
Number of vertical discharge valves 4 regrind, 80% natural, 3% color and 2%
Number of major bin valves 2 - (60 mm) 2 - (100/60 mm) 2 - (100 mm) additive material.
Number of minor bin valves 2 - (20 mm) 2 - (60 mm) †
The optional flow control valve will mount
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} inside the chassis in the space of the
A - Height above mounting plate† 45.25 {1149} 57.50 {1461} 63.00 {1600} 74.75 {1896} manual slide valve. Conair recommends
B - Width 30.25 {769} 36.50 {926} 40.13 {1026} 48.00 {1219} using the optional flow control valve when
mounting the blender on a stand, surge bin
C - Depth 32.75 {832} 40.83 {1037} 43.00 {1092} 51.00 {1296} or hopper.
D - Control height 6.50 {165.1}
‡
E - Control width 8.75 {222.3} For loader mounting dimension details,
refer to the corresponding TrueBlend
F - Control depth 6.75 {171.5} blender specifications sheet.
§
Installed 160 {72} 320 {145} 400 {182} 550 {249} FLA data for reference purposes only.
Does not includeany options or accessories
Shipping 270 {122} 440 {120} 520 {236} 700 {318} on equipment. For full FLA detail for power
6OLTAGEFull load amps§ circuit design of specific machines and
115V/1 phase/60 hz 3.0 6.3 systems, refer to the electrical diagrams
of the equipment order and the nameplate
230V/1 phase/50 hz 1.5 3.2
Discharge valves 90 psi @ 0.2 ft3/min. {6 bars @0.09 liters/sec}, 1/4 inch NPT fitting Specifications may change without notice.
p
Consult with a Conair representative for
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES the most current information.
20-inch loaders - number of loaders N/A N/A N/A 4
15-inch loaders - number of loaders N/A 4 N/A
12-inch loaders - number of loaders 2 N/A N/A N/A
8-inch loaders - number of loaders 2 N/A N/A N/A
B-42
TPBX040-0317 EXTRUSION CONTROL BLENDER425%",%.$©%84
Gravimetric
Batch Blending
With Extrusion
Yield Control
TrueBlend EXTTM Extrusion Control Blenders combine precision
gravimetric batch blending with extrusion yield monitoring or
control to provide the tightest possible output and blend quality
control for single layer extrusion lines.
With the extrusion control option, you can control extruder output
to 0.5% accuracy and blended batches to 0.025% accuracy. Tie
in an encoder and take-off drive control and you can control line
speed and product weight-per-length.
-ODEL4" %84
Integrated Extrusion Control Blender
TrueBlend EXTTM delivers the industry’s best

multi-component feed accuracy and precision ` 3IMPLEOPERATORCONTROLMEETSEVERYNEED
extrusion control. Designed for extruder operators with varying skill sets. Intuitive input and recipe
screens are laid out according to the extrusion process. Touch buttons provide access
Better product quality: TrueBlend EXT’s to recipes, extruder output, line speed, weight-per-length, material usage, alarms and
advanced dosing algorithm meters the reports. Built-in help screens walk you effortlessly through set-up and operations.
target weight of each batch ingredient in
progressively smaller ‘approach’ amounts ` 5P TO THE MINUTEINVENTORYREPORTING
to achieve extremely precise dosing without TrueBlend EXTTM provides real time and historical trending production status reports.
ever overshooting. The batch continues only Comprehensive reports include; job name, recipe setpoint and actual, components,
after the desired accuracy is achieved for the inventory and shift totals, alarms and more. Alarm log stores 100 or more events in
memory. Automated reports can be sent direct to printer, USB or accumulated on a
current ingredient.
customer’s PC hard drive.
Better yield: TrueBlend EXT employs
` !NYWHEREACCESS
adaptive control and monitoring software
The TrueBlend EXT comes standard with a built-in VNC viewer (Virtual Network
that measures the throughput rate and
Client) and OPC server. VNC allows remote Ethernet IP based monitoring and control
automatically controls the extruder screw
anywhere within a private network and OPC offers simple integration with an extruder
and/or take-off speed to achieve the yield or
or plant supervisory control system. The control is supplied standard with Modbus
extrusion thickness tolerance you need.
TCP, Ethernet IP and FTP. Optional interface protocols are available.
Better flexibility: Standard systems blend up
to 12 components. Designed for feed throat
mounting, the blender can optionally be
remote mounted from the TrueWeigh
Loss-in-Weight Hopper.
B-43
How it Works
TrueBlend EXTTM can control the extrusion process, as well as Line control options include weight-per-length, weight-per-area and
gravimetrically blend material. Throughput and haul-off control thickness; all as functions of length or weight-per-time.
options allow you to: TrueBlend EXT can control one mono-extrusion line consisting of a
• Monitor or control extruder throughput. homogenous blend of up to twelve ingredients.
• Monitor or control haul-off. For co-extrusion lines, the optional TrueWeigh layer ratio control
system supervises up to twelve extruders feeding common die.
• Monitor and control line haul-off and extruder throughput
to provide yield control.
Throughput or
Weight/Length Control
Drive Speed Adjustment
An optional line speed

encoder at the haul-off
allows the blender to
Components are dispensed, weighed and mixed
calculate and control the
according to the recipe percentages entered by the
extruded product
operator. Completed batches drop into the TrueWeighTM
weight-per-length.
hopper on demand and are fed in a continuous rate to
the extruder.
The rate of weight loss in the weigh hopper is read by
the controller and used to control extruder output to
within 0.5%.
The TrueBlend EXTTM yield control option adjusts the extruder screw speed to compensate for material variations and other process
variables while monitoring/controlling the haul-off speed – continually delivering precise dimensional stability at minimal tolerances.
%XTRUSION#ONTROL3AVES-ATERIAL
)NCREASEYIELDUPTO
108 The TrueBlend EXTTM blending system slashes raw material waste
7ITHOUT'RAVIMETRIC by providing precise control of consumption and length of extruded
7EIGHTPERRUNNINGLENGTH
106 %XTRUSION#ONTROL product.

LBSFT
TrueBlend EXT’s advanced control algorithm automatically

104 AVERAGE OF OVER SPEC PRODUCT compensates for material variations to maintain consistent
throughput or weight-per-length.
102 7ITH'RAVIMETRIC This means material can be extruded at the ideal set point and
%XTRUSION#ONTROL optimum tolerances.
)DEAL
0RODUCT 100
3ETPOINT /N3PEC0RODUCT
B-44
Features
3AFETYFIRST !NYMATERIALFROMANYBIN
All major electrical components are UL and CE Any bin can be set up for any material type.
approved. Material bins are provided standard Bin sequencing is automatic or can be set
with finger guards or optionally with bin access manually.
door interlocks. The mixing chamber access .O TOOLSCLEANING
door is interlocked with the power supply to the Clean-out for materials and color changes
blender motor and compressed air solenoids. is fast and easy. No hang-up or hiding
.OSPILLSNOLEAKCHASSIS places in material bins. Weighing and mixing
Rugged, closed chassis assures all weighed pellets components remove in seconds.
move from the weigh pan to the mixer to the 0ADDLEMIXER
machine. No pellets escape the chassis, improving Aggressive paddle mixer assures
operator safety and ensuring blend integrity. homogeneous blending. Relief notches in
VISIBILITYINTOTHEMATERIALSBINS the mixer blades prevent trapping of pellet.
Material levels, ingredient type, and position are All models are supplied with electric mixing
quickly identified and confirmed. motors for complete 360 degree mixing
)NTERNALPROTECTEDNO STICKVERTICALVALVES rotation.
Internal 2-way pneumatic valves are away from -ASSFLOW,OSS IN WEIGHTHOPPER
external operator access and are separated from 60° cone angle assures mass flow to prevent
the pellet flow by protective shrouds. separation in the weigh hopper.
"LENDUPTOCOMPONENTS 7EIGHHOPPERPRECISIONLOADCELL
Comes standard with 4 or 6 bins. The blender High accuracy precision cantilever load cell
can be upgraded to 12 positions for material allows extruder output control to +/- 0.5%.
staging or complex recipes.
Options
4"2EPORTS !IRBLOW /FFFORMIXCHAMBERLEVEL
Used to track and document material SENSOR
usage, alarms, batch and shift reports and This feature is integrated into the blender
recipes. See TrueBlend Reporting Software mix chamber to blow excessive dust and
specification sheet. fines away from the sensing device and
ensure accurate level sensor reading.
Eliminate costly material shortage 3ELFCLEAN
problems and machine downtime with Hands-free cleanout. No equipment
this early warning system. The control tear-down. TrueBlend self clean system
monitors up to six material levels at sequences compressed air nozzles
one blender. Individual switches can to evacuate material from all contact
be adjusted to monitor high or low surfaces, providing fast material
material levels. See Level Alarm Control changeovers.
2EMOTEMIXERDEMANDSENSOR
$RAINCHUTE This sensor provides a fill-to level
The material drain chute readily installs option in a surge bin or other material
to the chassis opening of the blender for receptacle that sits below a remote
fast and simple cleanout. mounted blender.
/THERAVAILABLEOPTIONSINCLUDE
• TrueBlend high heat models • Regrind flow enhancers • Minor component flow restrictor
• Remote blender mounting • Major component flow restrictor • Dry air blanket
B-45
Control
Home screen shows Line recipes are easy to
up-to-the-moment line enter and save to ensure

performance. Settings and repeatability, improved
the actual status from the inventory and process control
weigh hopper, extruder job to job. Material set points
output, extruder and haul- are automatically loaded
off drive RPM, line speed and locked independent of
and weight-per-length are operator skills. A recipe book
presented in an easy to read provides access to up to 500
full-color graphic display. stored production recipes.
The blender home screen Blender recipe simply asks

offers instant viewing of for component as a percent

recipe set points and the or part of the batch. Up to
actuals by bin position and 500 recipes can be stored
total inventory processed in the recipe book for
since last reset. Touch quick set-up and assured
buttons provide easy access repeatability. Options allows
to blender recipes, total quick setup of any position
materials, reports, loader for any material and allows
settings and more. automatic or manual bin
sequence selection.
Totals screens instantly Operate up to thirteen

show up-to-date inventory loaders and one pump
and shift data for total directly through the blender

inventory processed, control. Allows full loader
number of batches, linear functionality, including
feet (m) processed through priority loading selection.
the nip or puller, and
extruder output. Totals
for recipes and individual
components are also shown.
Data is easily outputted to
several report options.
3TANDARD&EATURES /PTIONAL&EATURES
• 7-inch touchscreen • Extrusion control • Integral Loading System • VNC Viewer (Virtual Network
operator interface allows the user to load Client) allows you to view or
• Extruder and haul-off drive
panel up to a 13 receivers (12 operate the touchscreen
control cards. The type of
component blender) within remotely on any Windows
• PLC based controls drive control outputs are:
the same blender/extrusion XP compatible PC. The user
0-10 VDC, up/down inter
• Numerous languages control touchscreen interface. is presented with a virtual
face and motorized
available with one Utilizing a single controller image of the system touch
potentiometer.
button key press to maintain both the integrity screen. This off-the-shelf
• Haul-off drive control includes of the blend, the extrusion remote communication
• Audible/Visual alarm
drive card and pulse encoder process and the loading solution can view or operate
• Control up to 12 equipment provides the any number of TrueBlendTM EXT
• Remote communication
material positions most economical approach or TrueWeigh touchscreens
protocols
• Simple, menu to gravimetric blending, within a customer’s plant.
• Bumpless transfer of control extrusion control and blender All the parameters accessed
driven, Q&A set-up
(motorized potentiometer or loading interface. at the system touchscreen
signal isolator board or can be accessed with the
pulse encoder) VNC viewer.
B-46
Specifications
-ODELS 4" %84o 4" %84 4" %84 4" %84 4" %84 4" %84 4" %84p 4" %84p
&IGURE.UMBER &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE &IGURE
Batch size lbs {g} 1.0 {450} 2.2 {1000} 5.5 {2500} 11.0 {5000} 19.8 {9000}
Maximum throughput lbs/hr {kg/hr}* 140 {63} 310 {140} 880 {399} 675 {306} 1400 {635} 1050 {476} 2850 {1292} 2350 {1066}
Bin capacity - main ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.20 {5.7} 0.60 {17} 1.60 {45.3} 2.70 {76.4} 4.40 {124.6}
Bin capacity - minor ingredient ft3 {liter} 0.20 {5.7} 0.30 {8} 1.60 {45.3} 1.40 {39.6} 2.70 {76.4} 1.35 {38.2} 4.40 {124.6} 2.20 {62.3}
Maximum number of materials 4 6 4 6 4 6
Number of vertical discharge valves 4 6 4 6 4 6
Number - (size) of major bin valves 2 -{40mm} 2 - {60mm} 2 -{100/60mm} 2 -{100mm}
Number - (size) of minor valves 2 -{20mm} 2 -{30mm} 4 -{30mm} 2 -{30mm} 4 -{30mm} 2 -{60mm} 4 -{60mm}
A - Height above mounting plate 30.90 {785} 45.00 {1145} 57.50 {1461} 63.00 {1600} 74.75 {1896}
B - Width 23.63 {600} 30.25 {769} 36.50 {926} 40.13 {1026} 48.50 {1229}
C - Depth 25.78 {655} 31.85 {809} 40.83 {1037} 42.67 {1084} 43.00 {1092} 51.00 {1296}
D - Control height 8.25 {209.6}
F - Control depth 4.75 {120.6}
Installed 75 {34} 160 {72} 320 {145} 400 {182} 550 {249}
Shipping 125 {57} 270 {122} 440 {200} 520 {236} 700 {318}
115V/1 phase/60 hz 1 3 6.3
230V/1 phase/50 hz 0.5 1.5 3.2
Discharge Valves 90 psi @ 0.2 ft3 /min ( 6 bars @ 0.09 liters/sec); 1/4 inch NPT fitting
-AXIMUMLOADERSIZES
8-inch loaders 4 2 N/A 4 N/A 4 N/A 2
12-inch loaders N/A 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
15-inch loaders N/A N/A 4 2 4 2 N/A 2
20-inch loaders N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 4 2
4RUE7EIGHHOPPERL}
Configurable hopper TWH-05 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Configurable hopper TWH-27† N/A N/A
Configurable hopper N/A TWH-44
(OPPER-ODEL 47( 47( 47( Specification Notes (continued)
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS †
TB45 EXT requires a plate adapter to bolt directly to a TWH-27 hopper.
Hopper capacity ft3 {liter} 0.5 {14} 2.7 {76} 4.4 {125}
‡
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} TB900 EXT cannot be supported directly by a weigh hopper. Blender requires
G - Height 18.5 {469.9} 30.5 {774.7} 42.0 {1066.8} remote stand or mezzanine mounting. Associated weigh hopper requires
separate surge hopper with slide gate and loader.
H - Depth 12 {343.8} 20 {508}
§
J - Hopper width 18 {457.2} 26 {660.4} TB45 and 100 hopper positions three and four are supplied with 12-8
K - Overall width 23.91 {607.3} 32.12 {815.9} adapters with eight inch cover plates as standard.
L - Mounting plate width 10.16 {257.9} 11.00 {279.4} ** TB250-4 hopper positions two and four are supplied with 12-8 adapters
M - Square bolt pattern 8 {203.2} 9 {228.6} with eight inch cover plates as standard.
N - Hole diameter (bottom) 2.68 {68.3} 3.00 {76.2} ††
TB250-6 hopper position two is supplied with a 12-8 adapter with an eight
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlbs {kg} inch cover.
Shipping 75 {34} 125 {57} 250 {114}
‡‡
TB500-4 hopper positions three and four are supplied with 12-8 adapters
Specification Notes with eight inch cover plates as standard. TB500-6 hopper position two is
supplied with a 12-8 adapter and an eight inch cover plate as standard.
* Maximum throughput rates are based on 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material, using all standard valve
sizes. Use of reducer inserts will lower the rate shown. §§
TB900-4 hopper positions three and four are supplied with 12-8 adapters
Throughput rates are based on: with eight inch cover plates as standard. TB900-6 hopper positions three
A 4-position blender recipe of 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color and 2% additive material. and six are supplied with 12-8 adapters and eight inch cover plates as
A 6-position blender recipeof 20% regrind, 80% natural, 3% color at position 3, 2% additive at standard.
position 4, 3% additive at position 5 and 2% additive at position 6. Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair
Higher throughput models are available. Consult with a Conair representative for more representative for the most current information.
information.
B-47
Specifications
4"%84&IGURE 4"%84&IGURE
Side view Front view Side view Front view
# " # "
! !
Top view Top view

Position 1 Position 2 #ONTROL Position 1 Position 2
& %
e e
Position 4 Position 3 e
Position 4 e
Position 3
4"4"AND4"%84&IGURE

-OUNTING)NTERFACE4" -OUNTING)NTERFACE4"
Side view Front view
# " Mixing chamber access door Mixing chamber access door
- this side of the interface - this side of the interface
1-25/32 2-5/32
diameter 10-1/4 sq.
diameter {260}
centered centered
{45} {55}
7-1/2 {190}
{127}
{203}
5 sq.
8 sq.
!
7-7/8 {200}
Mounting bolt hole size (4 holes) Mounting bolt hole size (4 holes)
7/16 inch {11.0 mm}. Predrilled 5 x 5 9/16 inch {14.0 mm}. Predrilled 8 x 8
mounting pattern as standard. mounting pattern as standard.
Top view
4 position 6 position -OUNTING)NTERFACE4" -OUNTING)NTERFACE4"
pp
Position 1 **Position 2 Position 1 Position 2
Mixing chamber access door Mixing chamber access door
- this side of the interface - this side of the interface
19-7/8 {505} sq.
16-3/16 sq.{411}
12 sq.{305} 16 {406} sq.
8 {203} sq.
8 sq.{203}
3-15/16
ee
3-5/32
Position 3
diameter
Position 6
diameter {100}
{80}
ee
pp
Position 4 Position 3 Position 5 Position 4
4RUE7EIGH(OPPER
+ Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes) Mounting bolt hole size (8 holes)
( *
9/16 inch {14.0 mm}. Predrilled 8 x 8 and 9/16 inch {14.0 mm}. Predrilled 8 x 8 and
12 x 12 mounting pattern as standard. 16 x 16 mounting pattern as standard.
,
Dimensions shown in inches and {mm}.
-
'
, - .
B-48
TPBX041-0317 GRAVIMETRIC BLENDERS425%7%)'(4-#/.4).5/53",%.$%23
Continuous Blending
in Exact, Precise Ratios
TrueWeighTM Continuous Blenders provide extremely precise
loss-in-weight dispensing of dry solids of various size and bulk
densities including pellet, regrind, micro-bead and powder.
These highly consistent and repeatable blenders are ideally
suited to extrusion processes that require perfect blend
homogeneity and extremely accurate dosing.
Designed for extrusion rates to 3,000 lb/hr {1,360 kg/hr},

TWB Blenders are available with up to six component positions.
-ODEL47"
Perfect Multi-Component Homogeneous Blend
TrueWeighTM Continuous Gravimetric Blenders

consist of a series of loss-in-weight material ` !CCURACYTO OFSETPOINT
hoppers symmetrically located above a The PLC-based control holds each component to +/- 0.5% of its set point. The control
cascade mixing chamber to simultaneously uses a proprietary learning algorithm that simultaneously monitors and adjusts each
and homogeneously meter all components feeder for material flow and bulk density changes.
within a recipe. The system incorporates
` (OMOGENOUSLYBLENDDISSIMILARMATERIALS
an extruder throat-mounted weigh hopper
Easily and accurately blend virgin pellets, free flowing powders, regrinds, granules,
which can be supplied as part of the blender
flakes, concentrates and additives. Each component is simultaneously metered
or sourced independently. The weigh hopper
through material-specific feed augers. A conical cascade static mixer integrates the
measures the blended material feed rate and
materials and eliminates separation caused by ledge or step type cascades.
sends that information to the PLC control for
monitoring and reporting. ` !DD ONEXTRUSIONYIELDCONTROL
All component hopper-feeder assemblies The blender PLC readily communicates with an extruder through an optional drive
card to provide yield control. Add an encoder and haul-off drive control card and you
are mounted on individual single-point
can control line speed and product weight-per-length to +/- 0.5% of target set point.
contact load cells and are supplied with
quick-release, variable speed synchronous
motors and configured to accept a range of
interchangeable feed augers designed to
accommodate specific material shape and
flow characteristics. Feeders are inclined for
more consistent output and to accommodate
fast material drain-out.
B-49
Configurations
-ACHINEMOUNTED 3TANDMOUNTED
The machine mounted design includes a TrueWeighTM Gravimetric The stand mounted design feeds material exiting the static mixer
Hopper mounted direct to the feed throat for monitoring feed rate to the through a central tube design to a remote destination.
extruder or for optional extrusion yield control.
Features
VISIBILITYINTOMATERIALHOPPERS
)NTEGRALLOADINGPLATFORM Material levels, ingredient type and
position are quickly identified and
Canopy cover provides stable mounting
confirmed. Since each material bin is
platform for hopper material loaders.
weighed, automatic audible alarms are
available for each ingredient.
%ASYMATERIALANDAUGERCHANGES 3TATICMIXER
Quick change material feed augers are available The conical static mixing chamber
from 0.5 to 2.0 inch diameters. The material provides the most homogenous material
cutoff slide gate allows auger changes to occur blend available. Discriminating processors
with material still present in the hopper. Auger that require a perfect mix, with no
feeder motors are easily removed with quick- mechanical agitation required, can rely on
release clamps. The inclined auger tube allows the Conair cascade static mixer for those
a complete and easy way of draining materials. critical product applications.
3INGLEPOINT OF CONTACTLOADCELLS
-ASSFLOWLOSS IN WEIGHTHOPPERS Cantilever load-cells achieve repeatable,
precise readings since there is no effect
Sixty degree cone angle assures consistent
from an imbalanced load from a second
mass flow, and prevents material separation point of reference. Load cells are dutyrated,
within the central weigh hopper. provide a long, reliable service life and
allows ingredient feeder or optional extruder
output control to +/- 0.5%.
2IGIDFRAMECONSTRUCTION
0OSITIVEPOSITIONSLIDEGATES Heavy-duty tubular steel frame resists
Detents hold slide gates open to protect bending and provides rigid structural
against vibration induced closure. stability to minimize vibration and aid
precision dosing and blending.
B-50
Control Features
Designed for extruder operators with varying skill sets, intuitive input and recipe screens are laid out according to the extrusion process. Touch-
button access to recipes, material usage, alarms, reports, and optionally to extruder output, line speed and weight-per-length. Built-in help
screens walk you effortlessly through set-up and operations.
• PLC control with user friendly setup and control screens • Loader control (seven [7] loaders and one [1] pump)
• 7-inch touchscreen HMI (can be remote located) • Remote start/stop
• Full color, high visibility graphics • SMS or text message alarm capable
• Stores up to 250 recipes • Built-in Virtual Network Client (VNC). VNC allows remote Ethernet
• Built-in diagnostics / self-calibrating IP based monitoring and control within a private network.
• Material usage monitoring • Fully configurable priority of hopper specific or system level
alarms. Stores up to 100 alarms for recall.
• Remote communications: Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP
• Material inventory, recipe and diagnostic reports. Automated
• Three levels of security passwords for limiting access reports can be sent direct to printer, USB or accumulated on
• Screen languages: English, Spanish, French, German, Chinese memory stick.
2ECIPE
(OMEPAGE
The recipe screen offers
The blender home page

very simple, intuitive
shows all primary
operator inputs for each
information including set
component position.
point and actual values
Recipes can be input by job
for component dosing
or selected from memory.
percentages and blender
The onboard recipe book
output, weigh hopper fill
can store up to 500
weights, selected recipe
recipes for quick set up
and blender start-stop.
and assured repeatability.
-ONITOR 4OTALS

Monitor screens are Instant access to
presented in an easy to cumulative material
read table format. Process weights processed in
variable settings are total, by component
shown for each component position and by shift
position. Up and down since last reset. Data is
arrows toggle through available for output to
additional or prior positions. reporting software.
3ETUP ,OADING
Setup touch button access Familiar icons and simple-
for easy configuration

to-follow help instructions
of system and all are used in the available
components, as well as loader control screen.
access to diagnostics,
trend screens and
maintenance.
B-51
How it works: with Extrusion Control

TrueWeigh Continuous Blenders can control the extrusion process, as Line control options include weight-per-length, weight-per-area and
well as gravimetrically blend material. Throughput and haul-off control thickness; all as functions of length or weight-per-time.
options allow you to: TrueWeigh Continuous Blenders can control one mono-extrusion line
• Monitor or control extruder throughput consisting of a homogenous blend of up to six ingredients.
• Monitor or control haul-off For co-extrusion lines, the optional TrueWeighTM layer ratio control

• Monitor and control line haul-off and extruder throughput to system supervises up to twelve extruders feeding a common die.
provide yield control
Throughput or
f Weight / Length Control f
Drive Speed Adjustment
f
f
Components are dosed according to the recipe An optional line speed encoder
percentages entered by the operator and are at the haul-off allows the
fed in a continuous rate to the extruder. blender to calculate and
control the extruded product
weight-per-length.
f
The rate of weight loss in the weigh hopper Line Speed Encoder
is read by the controller and used to control
extruder output to within 0.5%.
f
The TrueWeigh Continuous Blender yield control option adjusts the extruder screw speed to compensate for material variations
and other process variables while monitoring/controlling the haul-off speed – continually delivering precise dimensional stability
at minimal tolerances.
Options
• Powder feeder • Stainless steel hoppers and material • Non-fused rotary disconnect
• Regrind feeder contact points • Bumpless transfer of control (motorized
• Custom augers • Remote communications: Modbus Serial, potentiometer or signal isolator board or
Profibus, A-B DH+, CAN bus, DeviceNet pulse encoder)
• UL or cUL label on control panel
• CE approval • Extruder and haul-off drive control cards -
• Remote throat-mounted weigh hopper The drive control outputs are: 0-10 VDC,
• Special paint
• High temperature 350°F {177°C} operation up/down interface and motorized
• Haul-off encoder potentiometer.
• Extension cable for remote control mount
B-52
Specifications
-ODEL47" #ENTRAL(OPPER -ODEL47" #ENTRAL4UBE
$ $
# #
" "
4OPVIEW 3IDEVIEW 4OPVIEW 3IDEVIEW
+ +
# #
" "
$ $

$ $
! !
# #
" "
+ ! + !
# #
" "
$ $
B-53
Specifications
-ODELS 47" 47" 47" 47"
Maximum throughput lbs {g}
with central hopper* 700 {317} 3000 {1360}
with central discharge tube† 2800 {1270} 4300 {1950} 12000 {5443} 18000 {8164}
A - Riser height N/A 6.4 {162.1}
B - Height to loader mounting deck 55.3 {1403.4} 61.0 {1549.4} 72.3 {1835.2} 83.3 {2114.6}
C - Width 41.1 {1044.6} 57.8 {1467.9} 48.0 {1219.2} 69.9 {1775.1}
D - Depth 51.4 {1304.7} 54.8 {1392.9} 58.2 {1477.8} 65.3 {1657.9}
E - Control height 6.5 {165.1}
F - Control width 8.8 {222.3}
G - Control depth 6.8 {171.5}
H - Mounting plate width (square) 13.5 {342.9}
I - Mounting plate bolt pattern (square) 12.0 {304.8}
J - Mounting plate center hole diameter 2.6 {66.7}
K - Total depth 6 position model N/A 65.1 {1653.1} N/A 75.5 {1918.1}
Installed with central weigh hopper 550 {249} 750 {340} 720 {326} 1050 {476}
Shipping with central weigh hopper 700 {317} 900 {408} 870 {394} 1200 {544}
Installed with central discharge tube 520 {235} 730 {331} 700 {317} 1020 {462}
Shipping with central discharge tube 680 {308} 880 {399} 850 {385} 1170 {530}
%LECTRICALREQUIREMENTSFull load amps §
115V/ 1 phase/ 60 Hz 15 20 15 20
-OUNTING0LATE #ONTROL Specification Notes

( * Maximum throughput rate is limited to the throughput capacity of the central weigh
)
hopper. Calculation is based on 35 lb/ft3 pelletized material.
†
Maximum throughput rate is for all positions configured with the largest available
material hopper and the largest associated feed auger. Calculation is based on
%
35 lb/ft3 pelletized material.
* ‡
Any position can accept the largest hopper size available for the model size.
§
&
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not includeany options or accessories on
' equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
Hopper and Loader Choices

(OPPER#HOICES ANYPOSITION p 47" 47" 47" 47"
(OPPERS
3.4 ft3 {96.3 liter} N/A N/A y y
1.7 ft3 {48.1 liter} N/A N/A y y
1.0 ft3 {28.3 liter} y y y y
0.3 ft3 {8.5 liter} y y y y
-AXIMUM,OADER3IZES
(OPPERS ,OADER3IZE
3.4 ft3 {96.3 liter} 20-inch
1.7 ft3 {48.1 liter} 15-inch
1.0 ft3 {28.3 liter} 12-inch
0.3 ft3 {8.5 liter} 8-inch
B-54
TPBX029-0317 TRUEBLEND™ REPORTING SOFTWARE425%",%.$©2%0/24).'3/&47!2%
Get Control
Of Your Process
Rising material costs, increased competition and demands from %THERNET(UB
your customers make it absolutely essential for you to track
your material usage. When you choose a Conair TrueBlendTM
Gravimetric Blender you are already well on your way to
making efficient use of every pellet of material you process.
Pair your blender purchase with Conair’s TrueBlend Reporting
and Recording Software for easy and precise tracking and
documentation of your material usage.
Many different types of reports can be generated with the

software including: Material data (shift); Batch data; Alarm
messages; Scale data; Recipe parameters and Diagnostic data.
Production Data From Your Blender
The TB Reporting Software runs on Microsoft®

operating systems Windows® 98, NT, 2000, XP, ` 0RECISEINVENTORYCONTROL
and 7. The connection from the blender to the Use the Reporting Software to track your material usage to help with your “just in
time” material order process, to control costs, and to estimate the cost of future jobs.
computer can be a RS-232 serial connection
These important measurements can help you to improve your bottom line.
or an Ethernet network connection (preferred).
` 0RODUCTSPECIFICATIONANDQUALITY
The RS-232 connection is limited to one TrueBlend Reports make it easy for ISO certified companies to prove that they are
blender and a maximum of 50 feet between meeting quality, safety and recycling requirements.
the blender and the computer. The Ethernet
connection has the advantages of connecting ` )DENTIFYYOURCOSTS
The data will help you identify your production costs
multiple blenders to one computer and faster
for quoting jobs. Helps you to track your material costs
data collection.
- no more guessing where your material has gone.
Data can be easily viewed on screen and also ` *OBTRACKING
exported to Microsoft® Excel spreadsheets for Understand your process. You will be able to verify how
data manipulation. much material was used and how much product was molded. Need a printout...
merely select the time interval required and send it to the printer.
B-55
TPBX029-0317 TRUEBLEND™ REPORTING SOFTWARE425%",%.$©2%0/24).'3/&47!2%
Specifications
4"2EPORTING3OFTWARE Specification Notes
Computer 800 MHz Processor PC recommended with a minimum of 20 MB free hard disk space, Specifications can change
128 MB RAM, printer port. Mouse required. without notice.Contact
your Conair representative
Operating system Microsoft® Windows® 98, NT, 2000, XP, or 7 for the most current
Video SVGA information.
Printer Required for hard copy reports
Interface Serial Connection RS-232 serial connection
Serial cable using DB9 connectors
Interface Ethernet Connection Category 5 ethernet cable
2EPORTS - Use your TB Reporting software to generate on-screen or printed reports that contain valuable production information about your process. These
reports can be used to track your material usage, troubleshoot your process, to determine production costs and plan for future jobs. Several types of
reports can be generated with the software including:
• -ATERIAL$ATA2EPORT3HIFT2EPORT Shows material usage within a date and time period you specify. See Figure 1 below.
• "ATCH2EPORT Shows current recipe, date, time, batch number, percentage of weight for each ingredient (target and actual). See Figure 2 below.
• !LARM2EPORT Gives you a report of the alarm as it occurs and a summary of up to 100 events.
• 3CALE$ATA2EPORT A report of the last calibration information.
• 2ECIPE$ATA2EPORT A report of all the recipes that have been saved. See Figure 3 below.
• $IAGNOSTIC$ATA2EPORT An advanced troubleshooting report.
&IGURE
&IGURE
&IGURE
B-56
40"8 REPORTING SOFTWARE31,2%0/24).'3/&47!2%
Robust, Definable
Performance Reports
SQL (Structured Query Language) data makes it fast and easy
to generate detailed reports and learn more about your system,
whether you want to view the alarm history, check a log of every
batch run, or even monitor amounts of different resins.
Conair’s new SQL Reporting Software enables precise system

tracking, without requiring any previous experience with SQL
to implement. Whether you’re looking to identify and solve
potential problems, or just make your process more efficient,
reporting software is the key to improvement. 31,2EPORTING
3OFTWARE
Query and Organize Blending Consumption Data
Conair’s blenders are equipped to export job

data to an SQL server, to help you keep track ` !VARIETYOFPREPROGRAMMEDREPORTS
of your costs and system efficiency. The SQL The SQL Reporting Software can generate reports on your processes based on
software works with Microsoft® Windows® 7, ingredients, recipes, resins, jobs, batches, alarms and even product lines as defined
and requires an Ethernet port. by the user. SQL can generate reports over time periods you define, including specific
user-defined shifts or the entire history of the software.
SQL is a language designed for managing ` 4RACKJOBSPECIFICATIONSANDYOURCOSTS
relationships between data. Because it’s SQL reports can help you identify production costs to streamline estimates and
a relationship system, users can generate quotes. The reports also make it simpler for ISO certified companies to check and
reports based on a number of factors, prove that they are meeting standards for quality, safety, and recycling. It even
including shifts, recipes, and materials used. records every alarm that stops the system running, to make it easy to identify
For instance, after you define the specific chokepoints.
materials used in each of your hoppers,
reports can even track the resins being used ` $EFINEYOUROWNPARAMETERS
and their proportions. The structure of SQL records allows for detail and ease of organizing the specific
information you need in order to understand your process. Reports can be made for
each batch, the history of recipes, the inventory of materials in hoppers, and even the
alarms that have stopped the blenders.
` 2EPORTOUTPUTOPTIONS
Plant-wide data is stored long-term in the SQL database. Reports can be generated
and saved digitally or printed out, and can be exported into styles formatted for
Adobe® PDF, Microsoft® Word, or Microsoft® Excel®.
B-57
40"8 REPORTING SOFTWARE31,2%0/24).'3/&47!2%
Specifications
31,2EPORTING3OFTWARE Specification Notes
Specifications can change without notice. Contact your
Compatible equipment TrueBlend™ (with SB-3 controls) Conair representative for the most current information.
TrueBlend EXT™
TrueWeigh
TrueWeigh Continuous Blender #ONNECTING3" CONTROLPANELTOTHENETWORK
®
Compatible SQL database Microsoft SQL Server® 2008 and 2012
management software Microsoft® SQL Server® 2008 and 2012
Express Edition
Computer 800 MHz Processor PC recommended with a minimum
of 4 GB free hard disk space
Operating System Microsoft® Windows® 7
Video SVGA
Printer Required for hard copy reports
Interface Ethernet connection Category 5 Ethernet cable
2EPORTS - Use your SQL Reporting software to generate on-screen or printed reports that contain valuable production information about your process.
These reports can be used to track your material usage, troubleshoot your process, determine production costs and plan for future jobs. SQL allows users
to define the reports they want to have generated, by choosing from information the SQL server collects continuously, including:
• "ATCHLOGGING Record of every batch run by a blender. This data includes a timestamp, blender name, recipe name, recipe number, order
number,batch number, production line, shift name, hopper name, material name, set weight, actual weight, set recipe and actual recipe.
• !LARMLOGGING Record of every alarm that stops a blender. This data includes a timestamp, blender name, production line name, shift name, alarm
source, alarm message and alarm severity.
• )NVENTORYLOGGING Periodic record of the blender stocks, taken in regular increments of time and every time the blender starts and stops. This data
includes a timestamp, blender name, production line name, shift name, processed material weight and reason for entry.
• 2ECIPELOGGING Records every time the blender changes recipe or resin selection. This data includes a timestamp, blender name, recipe name,
recipe number, order number, production line, shift name, material name, set weight, actual weight, hopper number, set recipe and actual recipe.
Sample Reports
B-58
TPBX051-1017 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERSSB-1 TO SB-3 UPGRADE KIT
Upgrade to 3rd Generation

SmartBlendTM (SB-3)
Technology.
The Conair SmartBlendTM SB-1 was a very innovative control
at the time of its release nearly 20 years ago. It was a color
touch screen control on a blender, that held 50 recipes! Coming
from thumbwheels and recipes on index cards, this was a huge
advancement.
Over the last two decades, the SmartBlend control has

drastically improved. The SB-3 control is far superior to its
predecessors. The SB-3 is not only much more reliable, it can TrueBlend SB-3 Control
store 3000 recipes, and 4000 materials, making changing
processes quick and simple.
Reliable and Intuitive. Simple Upgrade, Big Rewards.
Conair sets the industry standard when

it comes to blender controls. A simple ` Simple, more versatile control
inexpensive control upgrade on your existing The SB-3 control is intuitive, easy to set up, operate and troubleshoot. All setpoints
blender may make it seem like a new blender. are displayed simultaneously. You just enter the percentages on the blender
touchscreen control and the blender does the rest. The system automatically
The 7-inch color touchscreen simultaneously weighs the recipe ingredients in the proper sequence and maintains the correct blend
displays all material positions and settings. relationship.
The control comes standard for either 4- or
6-position blenders, but has an option for ` Store up to 30X the recipes in one control
handling up to 12 positions. Create and assign up to 3,000 easy-to-recall recipes and 4,000 materials with
custom alpha-numeric IDs while the SB-1 control can only store 50-100 recipes.
The SB-3 control has 15 available languages SB-3 will report resin usage data to a file on a PC or a USB flash drive. With SQL
for ease of use by operators worldwide. Reporting Capability the SB-3 control has the ability to collect each blender's batch,
How long does it take to update your SB-1 resin usage (by name or recipe), and generate consolidated summary reports of this
to an SB-3? Under two hours, including the information across all blenders on the system.
phone call to order.
` Alarm storage and recall
Alarms are meaningful, with helpful messages to keep the blending operation running
trouble-free. The SB-3 tracks up to 100 events and reports alarm time and error type,
and are set according to user-defined parameters.
` Self-Loading Capability
While the SB-1 is limited to controlling loading for a single blender and pump, the
SB-3 blender control has the ability to control vacuum loaders on five blenders and
up to one pump per blender.

B-59
TPBX051-1017 GRAVIMETRIC BATCH BLENDERSSB-1 TO SB-3 UPGRADE KIT
Features
Intuitive, SB-3 touch screen control offers the industry’s best multi-component accuracy
Instantly see your View and make

materials usage changes to the
Material usage / totals active recipe
Built-in reporting On-call diagnostics

Diagnostic screen

Every SB-3 Blender
blend performance.
Specifications
Models SB-3
Touchscreen unit dimensions inches {mm}
A - Height 8.25 {210}

A
B - Width 9.25 {235}
C - Depth 5.00 {127}
Touchscreen unit approximate weight lb {kg} B

C
TrueBlend Models TB45 TB100 TB250 - TB900

Panel
Panel dimensions inches {mm}
D - Height 15 {381} 22 {559} 25 {635}
E - Width 12 {305} 10 {254}
F - Depth 7 {178}
Panel approximate weight lb {kg}
Installed 20 {9.1} 25 {11.3} 40 {18.1} D
Voltages
115/1/phase/60 hz
230/1 phase/50 hz
F E
Specifications can change without notice. Contact a Conair representative for the most current information.

B-60
TPBX036-0317 BLENDING ACCESSORIES,%6%,!,!2-#/.42/,
Consistently Monitor
Material Levels
Eliminate costly material shortage problems and machine
downtime with Conair’s Level Alarm Control. Sensors mounted
to your blender’s material bins constantly monitor the level of
material within the blender. Audible and visual indicators will
activate when material levels are above or below your sensor
position depending on your selection.
Individual sensors are available with detachable monitoring

cables for use with removable bins. Also, individual sensor
switches allow you to change the level alarm to sense high or
low material levels.
,EVEL!LARM#ONTROL
Model LAC-1
Simple-T0-Use Material Level Alarm Control
The Conair Level Alarm Control module is a

simple-to-use early warning detection system ` -ULTIPLEMONITORINGSETPOINTS
for your blending equipment. This module Configure the Level Alarm Control module to detect a combination of high or low
is capable of monitoring up to six levels of material levels within one blender. Individual setpoints can be used to keep your
material at one blender with an extra input for material bins from being overfilled by your conveying equipment or to closely monitor
auxiliary needs, typically a surge bin or other the low levels of critical materials.
material supply. Selector switches can be
adjusted to monitor high or low material levels ` %ASYTOINSTALL
depending on your blender application.
The Level Alarm Control module is mounted directly to the blender cabinet with
four self-tapping screws for easy visual alarm indication. Additional optional remote
Audible and visual alarms indicate an excess
warning indicators can be added to the module to signal you of alarm conditions from
or shortage of material within a blender. The
alarm indicates exactly which material bin is further distances.
alarming with an associated LED.
` -ONITORUPTOSIXMATERIALBINSPLUSONE
Optional remote warning alarms can be added Monitor a combination of up to six material bins with one
to your module to alert you to alarm conditions additional input to monitor auxiliary material sources.
from further distances with audible and/or
visual indicators. ` %ASYDISCONNECTSFORMATERIALBINREMOVAL
Optional sensor cables are available for removable
material bins. These cables can also be joined
together for larger size blenders with the addition of
extension cables.
B-61
TPBX036-0317 BLENDING ACCESSORIES,%6%,!,!2-#/.42/,
Specifications
-ODELS ,!#
INCH
INCH $IMENSIONS inches {mm}
[MM]
[MM]
A - Height 10.5 {267}
B - Width 5.2 {132}
C - Depth 5.0 {127}
Installed 7 {3.2}
Shipping 17 {7.7}
6OLTAGESFull load amps*
110V/1 phase/60Hz 5
220V/1 phase/50Hz 2.5
INCH
[MM] ! ,INEVOLTAGEOUTPUT
110V/1 phase/60Hz (2) 110V @ 2.5 amps

220V/1 phase/50Hz (2) 220V @ 1.3 amps
$RYCONTACTVOLTAGEOUTPUTS
24VDC @ 8 amps
115VAC @ 10 amps
* The line voltage output is determined by the voltage
requirements of the LAC-1.
" # Specifications can change without notice. Contact
your Conair representative for the most current
information.
Options !PPLICATION.OTE
The Level Alarm Control module has seven (7) capacitance
• Sensor cable length extensions (6 meters, 20 meters) sensor connections. Up to six (6) can be used for the
monitoring of material levels. The seventh sensor can be used
with a surge bin or other material storage device located
• Additional capacitance sensors (for use with a surge bin or other beneath the blender. The eighth connection is a dry contact
material sources) output with (1) N.O.(normally opened) and (1) N.C. (normally
closed) contact that can be connected to other processing
• Remote alarms (compatible with Conair's Universal Alarm Box) equipment or monitoring devices. (For example, an output
used with an alarm connected to a PC monitoring system.)
#APACITANCESENSORCONNECTIONS 2EMOTEALARMSOPTION
3ATISFACTORYSTATE
When there is no alarm
condition this outlet will
supply a continuous flow
of 110V/220V single phase
power. Only during an
alarm will the power supply
be terminated.
!LARMSTATE
During an alarm condition
this outlet will energize any
The Level Alarm Control module’s capacitance sensors are positioned 110V/220V remote alarm
within a blender’s material bin sight glass to provide adjustable indicator that is connected.
This outlet will not
material level detection. The sensor can be positioned high on the
have power at any time
sight glass (left image) to monitor material levels of high throughput other than during alarm
applications or low on the sight glass (right image) to monitor material conditions.
levels of low or less critical throughput applications.
B-62
TPBX030-0317 BLENDER ACCESSORIES73"'"2%42/&)4#/.42/,
Upgrate to
Touchscreen Technology
No more complicated key sequences, mechanical switches or
clumsy thumbwheels. In just a few simple steps, you can replace
your out-of-date thumbwheel controller with Conair’s SB-3
(SmartBlendTM) touchscreen technology.
The WSB/GB Retrofit Control can be used with WSB/GB blenders

of all sizes to convert the existing thumbwheel controller to the
SB-3 7-inch touchscreen control. This updated technology offers
full color graphics and quick and easy blender setup.
73"'"2ETROFIT#ONTROL
Intuitive: Easy to Set-Up; Easy to Use
The WSB/GB Retrofit Control will convert your

thumbwheel blender control to the Conair ` %ASYTOINSTALL
In just a few simple steps, you can replace your out-of-date thumbwheel controller
SB-3 control.
with Conair’s SB-3 touchscreen technology. The converter box was designed
You will very simply remove your WSB/GB specifically to fit in the space where the WSB/GB controller was located. The SB-3
control can be conveniently mounted to your blender or blender stand.
thumbwheel controller and replace it with the
WSB/GB retrofit control and a TrueBlendTM ` 3IMPLEMOREVERSATILECONTROL
touchscreen operator panel. Once you have The SB-3 control is intuitive, easy to set up, operate and troubleshoot. All setpoints
installed the touchscreen interface it will are displayed simultaneously. You just enter the percentages on the blender
touch screen control display and the blender does the rest. The system automatically
function exactly as the TrueBlend control.
weighs the recipe ingredients in the proper sequence and maintains the correct blend
relationship.
` 5PGRADETOTHELATESTTECHNOLOGY
The SB-3 control sets the industry standard for excellence. Our customers who
have made the switch to touch screen technology are amazed and delighted at the
simplicity and intuitiveness of this control. It’s faster, better and easier than
antiquated thumbwheel technology.
B-63
TPBX030-0317 BLENDER ACCESSORIES73"'"2%42/&)4#/.42/,
Specifications
-ODELS 73"'"
# A - Height 8.5 {215.9}
B - Width 12.1 {307.3}
C - Depth 8.1 {206.0}
er
ed
Fe se
Fu
Pow
e r
Shipping 24.0 {10.1}
ol
Ma e
s
in
6OLTAGESFull load amps*
ntr
on Fu
ti
lec
Co Se
fit er
Valve
Posit
ion
™
Re
t ro Fe
ed
ed
ers
110V/1 phase/60Hz 5
nd
Pulse 3 Valv Fe &4
3
Ble
Valve Posi e
tion
230V
4
Puls
Tru
e
23
0V
220V/1 phase/50Hz 3
Stan
dard Valv e On
230V e
Valve
! ed
Fe &6
ers
Stan
Valv dard
e
5
Off Specification Notes
Load et
ern
Cells Eth
r
Specifications can change without notice. Contact a Conair representative
we
Va
lve
s
Fe
ed
er
Po
for the most current information.
Touc
h Sc noid
reen Sole
"
#ONTROL
# "
The WSB/GB retrofit control includes:
02 -CABLEFOR4"OPERATORINTERFACE
3" TOUCHSCREEN
03 OPERATORPANEL
01 73"'"2ETROFIT#ONTROL
!PPLICATION.OTES
o
WSB and GB micro and 100 model blenders require a load cell adapter to be placed between the
existing load cell cable and the load cell connection on the retrofit control.
The WSB/GB retrofit can only be used on existing WSB/GB controllers with 17-pin amphenol
connectors and 24 volt DC solenoids. The WSB/GB retrofit control is not available with older
8-pin or 14-pin models with 120 volt AC solenoids.
,OADCELLADAPTERo Minor wiring changes will be required to modify the mixing chamber level sensor from normally
04 IFNEEDED
opened to normally closed. Detailed instructions appear in the user guide. All electrical
connections should be made only by qualified personnel.
B-64
TPBX034-0617 GRAVIMETRIC ADDITIVE FEEDERS425%&%%$4-4&-/$%,3
No More Wasting
Expensive Colorant
Optimize your feeding process with the Conair TrueFeedTM
Gravimetric Feeder. Units are simple to install and use, extremely
accurate and economical. These color and additive feeders
deliver accurate feeding rates on the basis of continuous loss-
in-weight metering technology with closed-loop control of the
feeding speed.
The TrueFeed can be used in injection molding, extrusion and -ODEL4&!!

(with handfill hopper lid.)
blow molding processes. All operate with the same bi-lingual,
userfriendly control.
Costly Downtime Eliminated
Unlike volumetric feeders the new gravimetric

feeders from Conair are self-calibrating, ` 2EDUCEYOURMATERIALCOSTS
adjusting automatically for changes in The consistency of this feeder ensures that every pellet counts. Absolutely no
material type, bulk density or pellet geometry. material waste. Unique dispensing cylinder eliminates pulsing outputs of auger and
pocket type feeders.
Color changes are quick - under 60 seconds
` )NCREASEDPRODUCTIVITY
- and easy. The TrueFeedTM does not require The TrueFeedTM does not require time-consuming color calibration when materials
time-consuming color calibration when are changed. Eliminates machine downtime associated with conventional volumetric
materials are changed. feeders.
Each feeder is equipped with a throat adapter ` 5NBEATABLEACCURACY

that fits between the machine hopper and the The dispensing cylinder is driven by a stepper motor for
throat. The feeder installs easily to the adapter consistent speed. The design ensures that the colorant is
allowing additives to be metered by the dispensed evenly, extremely accurately, and without any
dispensing cylinder into the flow of material pulsation from the cylinder into the plastic, giving you
as it passes through the adapter. Metering maximum control of the process and the end product.
and feeding additives at the throat result in
` 3UPERSIMPLETOUSE
even greater savings in material inventory and
Injection molders, simply set the additive percentage, enter the shot weight, screw
colorant over traditional pre-colored, centrally
recovery time and press start. For extrusion processes the unit can be run open-loop
blended materials or imprecise volumetric or slaved to the extruder (extrusion tracking). Touch control also available.
technologies.
` &ASTRETURN ON INVESTMENT
Call today! These value-priced units quickly pay for themselves in material savings
and machine uptime.
B-65
Features
.OTOOLSREQUIREDFORMATERIALANDCOLOR
CHANGES
The unit is easy to disassemble. Simply
release the knob holding the feeder to the
scale, remove the feeder, pull back on the
slide gate to drain the material from the
hopper, then release the motor clamps and
remove the motor and dispense cylinder.
)MPROVEYOURPROCESSINGTIMEANDYOUR
profits! ...ask about our payback analysis.
less than
60 Second
cleanout!
Options
#OMPRESSEDAIRLOADINGLID 4HROATADAPTERS
Choose the TrueFeed with the compressed A variety of throat adapters are available
air loading for processing granular pellets. to fit with your processing machine. The
standard adapter has a 76 mm diameter
inlet and 45 mm square outlet. See
following pages.
#OMPRESSEDAIRVACUUMLOADINGLID 7ATER COOLEDTHROATADAPTER

Use the TrueFeed with the vacuum loading This throat adapter provides temperature
option for dusty or granular materials. isolation from hot dried material. Used
The vacuum loading option offers increasing when combining a temperature sensitive
pulling power and a filter to trap dust and additive into a hot dried material.
fines. Vacuum is generated with
compressed air.
$ISPENSECYLINDER !LARMS VISUALANDORAUDIBLE

Cylinders are designed to provide a An alarm light and/or a alarm horn are
non-pulsing consistent feed and are more available to alert the operator to low
accurate than traditional auger screws. material level.
The cylinders allow for quick and easy
change out during cleaning. Several sizes
are available to fit with your application.
3LIDEMOUNTBASE ,ARGECAPACITYHOPPER
Makes cleanout and calibration even A 12 liter hopper is available for larger
more convenient and easier than the throughput requirements and light density
standard unit. It allows quick interchange materials.
of feeders.
#OMMUNICATIONS (IGHTORQUESTEPPERMOTOR
Track material usage with the Ethernet The high torque stepper motor is required
TCP/IP communications package. for feeding regrind or hard to flow
materials. This motor is always used in
conjunction with the A-20HT or A-30HT
dispense cylinder.
B-66
Features
)NCONTROLOFYOUREXPENSIVECOLORANTANDADDITIVES
The Conair dispensing cylinder gives you outstanding control of the
feeding process. The consistent feeding of this unit allows the actual
setpoint to be lowered, ensuring a substantially faster return on your
investment.
&INDYOURADDITIONALPROFITSHERE
4HEGRAPHCOMPARESTHE#ONAIR$ISPENSING#YLINDERTOANAUGER
An auger dispensing device will give an irregular output because of
the pulsations created by the auger, which in turn, causes the colorant
to be dispensed irregularly into the main material. A Conair Dispensing
Cylinder guarantees even dispensing. The dispensing cylinder works

in combination with a stepper motor that ensures exact, controllable
cylinder speed time after time.
Both tests were performed under identical circumstances, using the same material.
Dispensing Cylinders
Front
Side View
',8 '8 (8 ! ,4 ! ,4 ! ,4 ! (4 ! (4
Back
Side View
&EEDINGSYSTEM 0ELLETMATERIAL 2EGRINDHARD TO FLOWMATERIAL &EEDRATEogram/sec &EEDRATEokg/hr &EEDRATEolb/hr

GLX Yes No 0.01 to 1.1 0.05 to 4.1 0.11 to 8.9
GX Yes No 0.1 to 5.0 0.5 to 12.6 1.11 to 28.0
‡
HX No No 0.007 to 0.4 0.03 to 1.3 0.56 to 2.78
A-8LT Yes Yes 0.01 to 1.1 0.05 to 4.1 0.11 to 8.9
A-15LT Yes Yes 0.1 to 5.0 0.5 to 12.6 1.11 to 28.0
A-20LT Yes No 0.4 to 14.0 1.3 to 50.4 2.78 to 112.0
A-20HT* Yes Yes 0.4 to 14.0 1.3 to 50.4 2.78 to 112.0
A-30HR* Yes Yes 1.4 to 35.0 5.0 to 126.0 11.1 to 280.0
† ‡
* Used for regrind and irregular shaped materials. Feed rates are based on materials with a bulk density of 35 lb/ft3. For granular/free-flowing powder.
Throat Adapters
-ODEL )NLET /UTLET(sq.) (EIGHT 4OP&LANGE(sq.) "OTTOM&LANGE(sq.) "OTTOM-OUNTING#ENTER2ANGE(sq.)
07 Ø3.0 {Ø76.2} 1.77 {45} 9.4 {239} 6.0 {152} 5.5 {140} 2.75 - 4.5 {69.9 - 114.3}
08 Ø3.0 {Ø76.2} 3.54 {90} 9.4 {239} 6.0 {152} 5.5 {180} 4.5 - 6.0 {114.3 - 152.4}
09** Ø3.0 {Ø76.2} 1.77 {45} 9.4 {239} 6.0 {152} 5.5 {140} 2.75 - 4.5 {69.9 -114.3}
§
Used for regrind and irregular shaped materials. ** Model 09 is a water-cooled throat adapter. .OTESee next page for a throat adapter drawing
reference. Model 07 shown.
B-67
Specifications
3IDEVIEW 4&!! 3IDEVIEW 4&!"
Shown with standard hand-fill lid Shown with optional compressed air loading lid
INCH
INCH[MM]
INCH[MM]
[MM] INCH
[MM]
INCH[MM]
INCH[MM]
INCH[MM] INCH[MM]
INCH[MM] INCH[MM]
3IDEVIEW 4&!+ 3IDEVIEW 4&!(!*

Shown with optional compressed air vacuum loading lid Shown with optional twin color/regrind package INCH
[MM]
[MM]
IN
INCH[MM]
INCH[MM]
IN
IN[MM]
[MM]
IN[MM]
IN[MM]
INCH[MM] INCH[MM]
IN[MM]
4HROAT!DAPTER2EFERENCE Model 07 shown 4HROAT!DAPTER(EIGHT 4HROAT!DAPTER"OTTOM

Throat Adapter Top
INCH[MM]
INCH[MM]
IN[MM]
IN[MM]
INCH
[MM]
INCH
[MM]
IN
[MM]
INCH[MM]
-ODEL 4&!! 4&AB 4&!+ 4&!(!* Specification Notes

$IMENSIONSinches {mm} * All models shown with 0.2 ft3 {6 liter} material hoppers.
See drawings above for all dimensions except depth. †
Applies to Models TF01AB and TF01AK (models that
Depth 8.31 {211} 17.94 {456} 18.94 {481} 17.94 {456} are sold with the loading option).
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlbs {kg} ‡
The loader option is provided with a control solenoid
Standard feeder installed (empty) 49 {22} 54 {24} 65 {29} 74 {34} to be installed/mounted by the customer.
Shipping (approximate) 55 {25} 60 {27} 75 {34} 84 {38} §
Model TF01AB - compressed air loader supplied
6OLTAGEFull load amps ** material hose is 25 mm diameter, 3 m in length.
120 V/1 phase/60 hz 0.75 1.5 Model TF01AK vacuum compressed air loader
220 V/1 phase/50 hz 0.38 0.75 supplied material hose size is 38 mm diameter,
3 m in length.
,OADEROPTION SPECIFICATIONSope
Maximum conveying distance 3 meters ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include
Compressed air hose 1/4 inch NPT fitting to 8 mm hose
detail for power circuit design of specific machines
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of
Compressed air loader 58 -116 psi {4 -8 bar}; 8.8 to 15.9 ft3/min {0.25 to 0.45 m3/min} the equipment order and the nameplate applied to
Compressed air vacuum loader 58 -116 psi {4 -8 bar}; 8.8 to 15.9 ft3/min {0.25 to 0.45 m3/min} the machine.
4EMPERATURERATINGS Specifications may change without notice. Consult with
a Conair representative for the most current information.
3TANDARD4RUE&EEDISRATEDFORNATURALUPTOª&[ª#]ANDADDITIVEUPTOª&[ª#](IGHTEMPERATURE
4RUE&EEDWATER COOLEDTHROAT ISRATEDFORNATURALUPTOª&[ª#]ANDADDITIVEUPTOª&[ª#]
B-68
TPBX044-0317 GRAVIMETRIC ADDITIVE FEEDERS425%&%%$4-4/5#(#/.42/,
Precisely Controlled
Dosing In-Line
Selecting the touchscreen control option for your gravimetric
feeder gives precise control, optimum efficiency, and extreme
savings. Using continuous loss-in-weight measuring, this
TrueFeedTM Touch Control continuously calibrates dosages and
adjusts automatically, ensuring the best results with the highest
accuracy and efficiency.
This 8-inch touchscreen control is now available for all Conair

TrueFeed Gravimetric Feeders, allowing very simple operation
of single and multi-component systems.
4RUE&EED
4OUCH#ONTROL
User-Friendly Touchscreen Feeder Control
Built with stainless steel housing, the robust

TrueFeedTM Touch is the next generation of ` 4OUCHSCREENSIMPLICITY
gravimetric dosing control. The full-color touchscreen allows for
simple, intuitive screen navigation. It
In addition to being the most user-friendly and visually displays parameters as well as
intuitive feeder control to date, the TrueFeed alarm descriptions, calibration process,
Touch allows for double station setup all on current system status, and allows for
one easy to understand screen. Make changes download of history to a flash drive.
to recipes, weights, percentages and times all
from the main screen, while viewing live data. ` -ULTIPLEUNITCONTROL
The TrueFeedTM Touch control advantage
Device configuration is simple thanks to is not only that it is easier to use, it also
self explanatory menus, intuitive icons, and allows for control of multiple feeders.
automatic calibration features. This control
has an easy setup procedure for each of the ` 5PTOSAVINGSOFADDITIVES
additives, making the process from installation Saving up to 50% of additives yields a huge return on your investment.
to operation much quicker.
` 3IMPLEDATASTORAGEANDTRANSFER
Control for extrusion allows setpoint The TrueFeed Touch utilizes internal recipe and data storage, which can be
percentage adjustment, and auto transferred via USB. Software updates and recipe exchanges are also completed
synchronization to the extruder speed. using the simple and versatile USB. External communication is through Ethernet
Control for injection molding allows setpoint Modbus TCP/IP, for easy connectivity.
percentage adjustment, and auto metering
time synchronization. For both extrusion and
injection applications, dosing calculations just
became a thing of the past.
B-69
TPBX044-0317 GRAVIMETRIC ADDITIVE FEEDERS425%&%%$4-4/5#(#/.42/,
Features

$OUBLESTATIONSETUP &OURCOMPONENTSETUP
The TrueFeedTM Touch allows you to view and control both feeders on the Processors can view four components all on one screen, and make
same screen, simplifying work with multiple feeders. changes to each component as necessary. From one screen, you can see
which materials are currently filling and dosing.
Specifications
-ODEL 4RUE&EED4OUCH#ONTROL
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS "
Power supply 95-250 VAC, 50-60 hz
Power consumption 150 watt maximum
Operating temperature 14 - 140°F {-10 - 60°C} !
Weighing 20 bits A/D resolution
)NPUTSIGNALS
Start input Potential free, 24 VDC, 0-30 VDC Tacho
/UTPUTSIGNALS
Warning/alarm/filling valve 24 VDC
Alarm, running Potential free relay
#OMMUNICATIONS /PTIONALTILTMOUNTINGBRACKET
Modbus TCP/IP Standard
VNC (Virtual Network Client) Optional
Data storage Internal or via USB
Software update and recipe exchange via USB #
$IMENSIONSinches {mm}i
A - Height 7.91 {247}
B - Width 9.29 {236}
C - Depth 3.39 {86}
D - Control bracket bolt pattern 2.36 {60}
E - Control bracket bolt pattern 6.30 {160} -OUNTINGBRACKETBOLTPATTERN
$
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the most current information. %
B-70
TPBX042-0317 GRAVIMETRIC ADDITITIVE FEEDERS425%&%%$4-,1-/$%,
Gravimetric Precision
for Liquid Coloring
Put gravimetric precision to work on your liquid additives with
the Conair TrueFeedTM LQ Series liquid dispensing system.
By weighing the colorant storage vessel while metering, the
TrueFeed LQ model delivers consistent, precise gravimetric
dosing of colorant to the machine throat, or throat mounted mixer.
The TrueFeed LQ Feeding System can be used for injection

molding or extrusion and includes a user friendly, multi-language
control, a rugged weigh scale platform for your colorant supply
and a choice of dispensers
-ODEL4& ,1
(weigh platform with
liquid color drum.)
Simple, Clean, Precise Liquid Dosing
The TrueFeedTM LQ utilizes precision peristaltic

liquid color pumps while measuring the loss ` -ETERBYWEIGHT
in weight of the colorant supply to deliver By carefully tracking the loss in weight of the colorant supply the TrueFeedTM LQ
precision dosing never before possible. delivers accuracy in liquid dosing never before possible.
No calibration is required since the additive ` 2EDUCECOLORANTCOSTINCREASECOLORPRECISION
is continuously weighed and metering is Precision color weighing eliminates costly under
adjusted automatically. Variations in liquid or over-dosing, saving you colorant, time, material
viscosity and even air in the dispensing line and money.
are automatically self-compensated.
` 3IMPLETOUSE
Colorant can be metered directly to the For molders, simply enter letdown percentage,
machine throat, to be mixed with base shot weight, screw recovery time and press start.
materials during processing. The TrueFeed For extruders, run open loop or precisely track the
LQ can also operate with a throat mounted metering rate with the extruder speed.
mixer to assure and visually confirm thorough
` &EEDITYOURWAY
dispersion and mixing of ingredients before
Use the simple, rugged throat adaptor plate with
they enter the machine throat.
metering nozzle or feed to a throat mounted mixer to
assure thorough mixing with your base materials.
` -AKEITPORTABLE
The optional trolley provides easy transport of your
colorant, the TrueFeed control and the weigh scale/
pump for a compact, portable metering system.
B-71
TPBX042-0317 GRAVIMETRIC ADDITITIVE FEEDERS425%&%%$4-,1-/$%,
Features
0UMP&EATURES 7EIGH0LATFORM&EATURES
• A choice of peristaltic pumps to match colorant delivery tube diameters • Load cell, loss-in-weight detection of colorant supply
• Easy, safe tubing placement into pump mechanism • Accommodates all common supply vessels with simple flat platform scale
• Automatic check valve prevents back-flow of colorant • Weigh platform may be separated from pump housing if desired
• Pump is integrated into weigh scale platform • Precision stepper motor drives peristaltic pump
Options
!LUMINUMTHROATADAPTORS )NTERMIXERS
Available in two sizes, throat adapters fit A choice of two robust intermixers may be
to the machine throat below your material used to pre-mix colorant and base material(s)
supply equipment to deliver colorant Inline above the machine throat. The inline model
intermixer
directly into the material flow. A nozzle provides basic mixing, while the offset model
with spigot valve is included. The universal extends material flow for increased mixing.
“star” mounting pattern provides easy Both include sight glass cleanout end caps,
installation without custom drilling. thick mounting plates, rugged gear motors,
Offset an on/off switch with over load protection
intermixer and removable agitators.
The convenient TrueFeedTM transport trolley consolidates the LQ weigh Color usage can be accurately tracked by the use of Conair’s powerful
platform, pump, control and a liquid colorant buffer tank onto a rugged, MC-LAN software, developed specifically for gravimetric additive
yet mobile cart for portability between machines. metering feeders.
Specifications
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW Specification Notes
" * Flow rate is measured using water 71.6°F {22°C}
with Norprene and Tygon tubing. Multiple hoses are
supplied for optimizing feeding rate.
! Input signals: Potential free (24 VDC) or extruder

tachometer (0-30 VDC) start input.
# Communications: TCP/IP, Modbus, CANbus.
Control languages: English, German, Spanish,

-ODEL 4& ,1
French, Polish, and Italian.
0UMPTYPE ,OWRATE (IGHRATE
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS †
Flow rate* include any options or accessories on equipment.
Minimum 0.22 ml/min 1.7 ml/min For full FLA detail for power circuit design of
Maximum 60 ml/min=1.0 ml/sec 792 ml/min=13.2 ml/sec specific machines and systems, refer to the
7EIGHPLATFORMDIMENSIONSinches {mm} electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the
A - Height 9.45 {240} nameplate applied to the machine.
B - Width 8.98 {228}
C - Depth (with pump) 12.90 {327.60} Specifications may change without notice. Consult
4HROATADAPTORinches {mm} square with a Conair representative for the most current
Large information.
Outside dimensions 7.09 {180}
Throat opening 3.54 {90}
Small
Outside dimensions 5.9 {150}
Throat opening 1.77 {45}
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Weigh platform 15 {68}
6OLTAGE Full load amps †
80-260 VAC, 50/60 Hz 80
B-72
TPBX008-017 METERING FEEDERS"&3!.$"&(!4 4(% 4(2/!4-/$%,3
Economical Feeding
of Colorants, Additives
Conair Feeders provide injection molders and extruders with
a versatile, economical way to volumetrically meter colorants
or other additives into the flow of virgin material directly at
the throat of the processing machine. "&3-ODEL
By metering additives directly at the throat, greater savings

in material inventory and colorant can be achieved over
traditional pre-colored or centrally blended material schemes.
"&(-ODEL
Precise Metering Reduces Colorant Costs
Each feeder is equipped with a throat adapter

that fits between the material supply hopper ` -ODELSFORLOWHIGHTHROUGHPUT
and the processing machine throat. The Model BFS and BFH feeders feature a compact size for metering additives to
feeder connects easily to the adapter allowing machines down to 0.01 gram per second or up to 160 lb. per hour. Model BFH
additives to be metered by an auger into provides high throughput metering up to 100 grams per second or 800 lb. per hour.
the flow of material as it passes through the ` )NJECTIONOREXTRUSIONCONTROL
adapter. Up to two feeders may be mounted The precision injection control provides on-demand metering, based on a signal from
on one throat adapter. the press. The extrusion control is designed to operate continuously with the extruder.
For injection machines the feeder’s digital ` %ASYNO TOOLSCLEANOUT

timer controls the metering motor during BFH models have removable supply hoppers and augers to allow fast clean-out for
screw recovery. This supplies a consistent color changes. The standard BFS model has a stationary hopper, a removable supply
volume of additive in proportion to the flow of hopper option is available.
material into the machine throat.
` $IGITALSETPOINTACCURACY
For extruders the feeder meters continuously. Easy-to-set thumbwheel switches provide digital accuracy for speed and time rate
The speed control of the extrusion models control.
includes a voltage tracking circuit to slave
` /PTIONALLOWLEVELALARM
the feeder metering rate to the speed of the
Small add-on module offers audible and visual warnings if the additive level drops
extruder. below the hopper sight glass.
B-73
Controls
The 0RECISION&EEDER#ONTROL The %XTRUSION#ONTROL for the feeder
for injection molding provides is designed to operate continuously
on-demand metering, based on a with the extruder, to meter a precise
signal from the press (for example, flow of additives at the desired rate.
the screw retraction start.) The Push button thumbwheels set the
signal may be a contact closure or a speed of the metering auger. The
voltage (Choose from these available speed of the feeder may be slaved
voltages: 120 VAC; 240 VAC; or to the extruder with a DC voltage
24 VDC). Push button thumbwheels follower circuit, driven by the
set the metering cycle time and extruder tach generator or armature
motor speed. An accurate digital voltage (0 to 600 VDC or 4-20
timer controls the metering duration milliamps). (Shown is control with
indicated by the setting. The feeder optional voltmeter.)
speed setting is a percentage of
maximum motor speed.
Features
The standard BFH model includes a combination hopper/auger The compact BFS model is available with an optional quick release
assembly that may be quickly removed from the feeder’s mainframe/ hopper with a built-in electrical interlock and slide gate that allows
motor assembly. No tools are required. quick removal cleaning and replacement for color changes. No tools
are required.
Options
4HE"&3&EEDERWITHA 4HE"&(&EEDERWITH
#ONAIRSELF CONTAINED A$UST"EATERMOUNTED
VACUUMLOADER ONAHIGHVOLUME
The loader automatically
fills the additive hopper
LOADEREXTENSION
At 500 pounds per hour,
with color concentrate or
the standard Conair
other pelletized additives.
DustBeater assures a
reliable material supply for
extrusion or continuous
molding. Choose the ,OWLEVELALARMKIT
brushless DustBeater for The low level alarm kit may be
loading rates up to 1000 factory ordered, or may be installed
pounds per hour. later on any feeder control package.
B-74
Specifications
"
$
INCH[MM]SQUARE INCH[MM]SQUARE
INCH[MM] INCH[MM]
INCH[MM]
INCH[MM]
DIAMETERBOLTHOLES DIAMETERBOLTHOLES
BOLTPATTERN
BOLTPATTERN
SQUARE
SQUARE
INCH[MM]DIAMETER INCH[MM]
MATERIALENTRYHOLE DIAMETERMATERIALENTRYHOLE
INCH[MM]DIAMETER INCH[MM]DIAMETER
MATERIALEXITHOLE MATERIALEXITHOLE
-ODEL "&3 Specification Notes

3/8 x 1/4 3/8 x 3/8 1/2 x 1/2 3/4 x 3/4 1x1 * Overall height is
Auger sizes
{9.53 x 6.35} {9.53 x 9.53} {12.70 x 12.70} {19.05 x 19.05} {25.40 x 25.40} different with the
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICSPellets only optional removable
hopper. See the
Throughput @ 9 rpm, Injection† grams/sec 0.005 to 0.05 0.006 to 0.06 0.015 to 0.15 0.051 to 0.51 0.108 to 1.08 specification table.
Throughput @ 9 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 0.042 to 0.42 0.051 to 0.51 0.12 to 1.2 0.42 to 4.2 0.87 to 8.7
†
Throughput is
Throughput @ 30 rpm, Injection† grams/sec 0.016 to 0.16 0.02 to 0.2 0.05 to 0.5 0.17 to 1.7 0.36 to 3.6 dependent upon the
Throughput @ 30 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 0.14 to 1.4 0.17 to 1.7 0.40 to 4.0 1.4 to 14.0 2.9 to 29.0 combination of auger
Throughput @ 64 rpm, Injection† grams/sec 0.034 to 0.34 0.043 to 0.43 0.107 to 1.07 0.363 to 3.63 0.77 to 7.68 and motor rpm selected.
Throughput @ 64 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 0.297 to 2.97 0.363 to 3.63 0.85 to 8.53 2.98 to 29.8 6.19 to 61.86 ‡
Optional loader adapter
Throughput @ 95 rpm, Injection† grams/sec 0.05 to 0.51 0.063 to 0.63 0.158 to 1.58 0.538 to 5.38 1.14 to 11.40 lid is shown for use
Throughput @ 95 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 0.44 to 4.43 0.538 to 5.38 1.27 to 12.67 4.43 to 44.34 9.18 to 91.84 with 8 inch and TLM
Throughput @ 170 rpm, Injection†grams/sec 0.09 to 0.91 0.113 to 1.13 0.283 to 2.83 0.963 to 9.63 2.04 to 20.4 tube loader, standard
Throughput @ 170 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 0.79 to 7.93 0.96 to 9.63 2.27 to 22.67 7.93 to 79.34 16.43 to 164.34 is supplied with a
handfill lid.
Hopper capacity ft3 {liter} 0.68 {19.2}
§
Motor power Hp {kW} 1/8 {0.093} FLA data for reference
purposes only. Does not
Gear motor output rpm 0 - 9, 0 - 30, 0 - 60, 0 - 95, 0 - 170
include any options or
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} accessories on
Top/bottom throat adapter plate 6 x 6 {152 x 152} 8 x 8 {203 x 203} equipment. For full
A - Overall height - with removable hopper 21.69 {550.9} FLA detail for power
A - Overall height - with standard hopper 21.31 {541.3} circuit design of specific
B - Loader lid adapter height‡ (optional) 6.44 {163.5} machines and systems,
refer to the electrical
C - Length to centerline throat plate 22.50 {571.5} 23.50 {596.9}
diagrams of the
D - Hopper to centerline throat plate 8.87 {225.4} 9.87 {250.8} equipment order and
E - Throat adapter height 6.50 {165.1} 7.00 {177.8} the nameplate applied
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} to the machine.
Installed 61 {27.7} Specifications may
Shipping 110 {49.9} change without notice.
6OLTAGEFull load amps § Consult with a Conair
representative for the
120/1 phase/60 Hz 4
240/1 phase/50-60 Hz 2
B-75
Specifications
"p
INCH[MM]SQUARE INCH[MM]SQUARE
INCH[MM]
INCH[MM] INCH[MM]
INCH[MM]
DIAMETERBOLTHOLES DIAMETERBOLTHOLES
BOLTPATTERN
BOLTPATTERN
SQUARE
SQUARE
INCH[MM] INCH[MM]
DIAMETERMATERIALENTRYHOLE DIAMETERMATERIALENTRYHOLE
INCH[MM]DIAMETER INCH[MM]DIAMETER
MATERIALEXITHOLE MATERIALEXITHOLE
-ODEL "&( Specification Notes

1/2 x 1/2 3/4 x 3/4 1x1 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 2x2 * Powder requires a
Auger ssizes
izes different auger.
{12.7 x 12.7} {19.05 x 19.05} {25.4 x 25.4} {38.1 x 38.1} {50.8 x 50.8}
†
0ERFORMANCE#HARACTERISTICSPellets and free flowing powder* Throughput is
dependent upon the
Throughput@9 rpm, Injection† grams/sec 0.015 to 0.15 0.036 to 0.36 0.087 to 0.87 0.280 to 2.90 0.581 to 5.81 combination of auger
Throughput@9 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 0.102 to 1.02 0.280 to 2.90 0.730 to 7.30 2.180 to 21.80 4.360 to 43.60 and motor rpm selected.
Throughput@30 rpm, Injection† grams/sec 0.048 to 0.48 0.120 to 1.20 0.290 to 2.90 0.968 to 9.68 1.936 to 19.36 ‡
Standard handfill
Throughput@30 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 0.339 to 3.39 0.968 to 9.68 2.419 to 24.19 7.260 to 72.60 14.57 to 145.20 loading is shown in
Throughput@64 rpm, Injection† grams/sec 0.100 to 1.00 0.250 to 2.50 0.600 to 6.00 2.000 to 20.00 4.000 to 40.00 measurement "A".
Throughput@64 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 0.700 to 7.00 2.000 to 20.00 5.000 to 50.00 15.00 to 150.00 30.00 to 300.00 Optional adapter
Throughput@95 rpm, Injection† grams/sec 0.153 to 1.53 0.383 to 3.83 0.919 to 9.19 3.065 to 30.65 6.129 to 61.29 also shown in
Throughput@95 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 1.072 to 10.72 3.065 to 30.65 7.660 to 76.60 22.98 to 229.8 45.97 to 459.7 measurement "B"
available for 8-inch,
Throughput@170 rpm, Injection†grams/sec 0.266 to 2.66 0.685 to 6.85 1.650 to 16.50 5.484 to 54.84 10.968 to 109.68 TLM tube loader and
Throughput@170 rpm, Extrusion† lb/hour 1.919 to 19.19 5.480 to 54.80 13.71 to 137.10 41.13 to 411.3 82.26 to 822.6 12-inch loaders.
Hopper capacity ft3 {liter} 0.62 {17.5} 0.62 {17.5} 0.62 {17.2} 0.62 {17.2} 0.62 {17.2} §
FLA data for reference
Motor power Hp {kW} 1/8 {0.19} 1/8 {0.19} 1/8 {0.19} 1/8 {0.19} 1/8 {0.19} purposes only. Does not
Gear motor output rpm 0 - 9, 0 - 30, 0 - 60, 0 - 95, 0 - 170 include any options or
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} accessories on
Top/bottom throat adapter plate 6 x 6 {152 x 152} 8 x 8 {203 x 203} equipment. For full
FLA detail for power
A - Overall height 23.50 {596.9}
circuit design of specific
B - Loader lid adapter height‡ (optional) 10.00 {254.0} machines and systems,
C - Length to centerline throat plate 29.25 {743.0} 30.25 {768.4} refer to the electrical
D - Hopper to centerline throat plate 12.40 {315.0} 13.40 {340.4} diagrams of the
E - Throat adapter height 6.25 {158.8} equipment order and
the nameplate applied
7EIGHTlb {kg}
to the machine.
Installed 61 {27.7}
Specifications may
Shipping 110 {49.9}
change without notice.
6OLTAGEFull load amps § Consult with a Conair
120/1 phase/60 Hz 4 representative for the
240/1 phase/50-60 Hz 2 most current information.
B-76
40"8 INTERMIXER-!4%2)!,-)8%2
Economical, Compact
Material Mixing
An Intermixer mounts between the processing machine throat )NLINE)NTERMIXER
and material supply. The Intermixer can be combined with a
Conair throat feeder, material hopper and vacuum loader to
provide economical and reliable mixing, feeding and loading.
The unit’s removable plexiglass front cover provides visual

inspection of the mixing and easy access for clean out. Compact /FFSET)NTERMIXER
rugged construction with choice of 6 or 8 inch mounting flanges
features a product for enhancing the mixing capability of your
process machine.
Two Models Available: Inline and Offset
For materials requiring minimal mixing the

use of an Inline Intermixer provides a tumbling ` %ASYNO TOOLSCLEANING
of materials as they feed by gravity through Smooth surface chamber body won’t trap material. Quick release latches allow easy
the blades of the mixing paddle. Compact size access to mixing chamber.
and straight through design allows application
` )DEALFORUSEWITHFEEDERS
with almost any equipment arrangement.
Matches with Conair feeder models BFO Loader
(low to medium) throughputs and BF6

Use the Offset Intermixer for materials Handy
(medium to high) throughputs. Hopper
requiring increased mixing before entering
the process or machine throat. The offset Feeder
` -IXRESINSADDITIVESONPROCESS Throat
intermixer forces material to traverse its Adapter
Continuous mixing enhances the blend
length and undergo agitation before exiting. consistently to the process machine
The Offset design provides thorough mixing to Intermixer
when throat feeding colorants and
improve the mixing screw capabilities in both To Process
additives.
injection presses and extruders. This model is
ideal for larger shot sizes that may evacuate
the Inline model before sufficient mixing.
)NLINEAND/FFSET)NTERMIXERS
provide an inexpensive way to mix
material at the machine throat.
B-77
40"8 INTERMIXER-!4%2)!,-)8%2
Specifications
! !
" "
)NLINE)NTERMIXER /FFSET)NTERMIXER
Inline and Offset Intermixers are easily disassembled for quick and easy cleaning.
-ODELS )NLINE /FFSET -OUNTING&LANGE0ATTERNS

110V 230V 110V 230V XINCH&LANGE
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS INCH[MM]SQUARE
Mixer speed rpm 42 47 42 47
Volumetric capacity 0.1 0.15
INCH
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} INCH [MM]
A - Height 11 {279} 10.75 {273} [MM] DIAMETER
SQUARE MATERIAL
B - Length 16 {406} 16.875 {429} 20.125 {511} 21 {533} BOLT ENTRYHOLE
PATTERN INCH
Width 10.25 {260} [MM]
Top/bottom mounting flange* 6 x 6 or 8 x 8 - specify to match selected feeder DIAMETER
INCH MATERIAL
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlbs {kg} EXITHOLE
[MM]
Installed 46 {21} 59 {27} DIAMETER
BOLTHOLES
Shipping 65 {30} 70 {32}
110V/1 phase/60 hz 3.6 N/A 3.6 N/A XINCH&LANGE
230V/1phase/50 or 60 hz N/A 0.78 N/A 0.78 INCH[MM]SQUARE
INCH INCH
* Inline Intermixers are only available with 3 inch {76.2 mm} diameter material holes and 6 x 6 inch {152 x 152 mm} [MM] [MM]
flanges. Offset intermixers are available with 5 inch {127 mm} or 3 inch {76.2 mm} diameter material holes and 6 x 6 inch SQUARE DIAMETER
BOLT MATERIAL
{152 x 152 mm} or 8 x 8 inch {203 x 203 mm} flanges. PATTERN ENTRYHOLE
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power INCH
[MM]
circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate INCH DIAMETER
applied to the machine. [MM] MATERIAL
DIAMETER EXITHOLE
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the most current information. BOLTHOLES
B-78
TPBX038-0317 COMBINATION FLOOR STAND/SURGE BINS&/2%,%6!4).'",%.$).'%15)0-%.4
TrueBlendTM Blender Stand

for Beside-the-Process
Blending
` 3TURDYCONSTRUCTION
Long-lasting construction provides years of operation.
` %ASYCLEANOUT
Built-in reservoir for fast and thorough material clean out.
` %ASYTOPLACEANDMOVE
New design incorporates fork-lift user-friendly provision.
` /PTIONALCASTERS
Make movement easy. (Model TBBS01 only)
Specifications
$RAWER
MAGNET
PROVISION
!
"
!DDITIONAL
TAKEAWAY
TUBE
PROVISION
$ #
-ODELS 4""3 4""3 4""3 Specification Notes

Blender applications TB45, TB100 TB45, TB100, TB250, TB500 TB100, TB250, TB500, TB900 * Blender stands are provided
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} with one takeaway tube as
A - Height 33.0 {838} 32.5 {826} 40 {1016} standard. Up to two additional
takeaway tubes can be
B - Height with casters 37.9 {963} N/A N/A
included as an option.
C - Depth 45.0 {1143} 53.5 {1359} 60 {1524}
Specifications may change
D - Width 36.7 {932} 48.0 {1219} 48.4 {1229} without notice. Consult with
Reservoir capacity ft3 {m3} 1 {0.02} 2 {0.05} 5 {0.14} a Conair representative
Takeaway tube OD 1.5, 1.75, 2 1.5, 1.75, 2, 2.25, 2.5, 3 1.5, 1.75, 2, 2.25, 2.5, 3 for the most current
inches {mm}* {38.1, 44.5, 50.8} {38.1, 44.5, 50.8, 57.2, 63.5, 76.2} {38.1, 44.5, 50.8, 57.2, 63.5, 76.2} information.
-OUNTING0ATTERN
INCH[MM]
INCH
-ODEL [MM] -ODEL -ODEL INCH
INCH [MM]
4""3 4""3 [MM] 4""3
INCHES INCHES
INCHES
[MM] [MM]
[MM]
[MM]
[MM]
[MM]
INCH
INCH
INCH
INCH INCH INCH INCH

[MM] [MM] [MM] [MM]
INCH INCH INCH

[MM] [MM] [MM]
B-79
TPBX039-0317 FLOOR STANDS&/2!,%6!4).'!58),)!29%15)0-%.4
Economical, Compact
Material Mixing
Model FS2, shown at right, and Model FS3 feature angle iron
construction. Model FS1 has a solid sheet metal top surface with
an opening for the adapter plate.
When ordering, please detail the equipment to be mounted on

the stand so that the correct adapter plate may be specified.
` 3TANDARDANDCUSTOMSIZES ` -OUNTINGPADSONLEGS
Ensure the perfect fit for Allow stand to be bolted
your equipment to the floor
` &ULLWELDEDCONSTRUCTION ` /PTIONALCASTERS
A 1/4 inch thick adapter plate, matching the bolt pattern of the Provides strength and Make movement easy
auxiliary equipment, is bolted to the top of the floor stand.
durability
Specifications
3TANDARD-ODELS #USTOM-ODELS
-ODELS &3 &3 &3 &3 &3 &3
Maximum weight capacity lb {kg} 1000 {454} 2000 {907} 3000 {1361} 1000 {454} 2000 {907} 3000 {1361}
/UTSIDEDIMENSIONSInches {mm}
Height 29 {737} 66 {1676} 12–42 {305–1067} 18–66 {457–1676}
Width 30 {762} 60 {1524} 24–36 {610–914} 38–70 {965–1778} 40–70 {1016–1778}
Depth 30 {762} 60 {1524} 24–36 {61-–914} 38–70 {965–1778} 40–70 {1016–1778}
#ASTERS
Casters may be added only if the combined stacked height of the mounted equipment is less than 3.5 times the selected width or depth.
If casters are added, specify desired height, less caster dimension (5 inches for FS1, 6 inches for FS2).
Addition to Height inches {mm} +5 {127} +6 {152} N/A +5 {127} +6 {152} N/A
)NSIDEDIMENSIONSinches {mm}
For Custom Models, subtract the value shown from the outside dimensions.
Height 26.75 {679} 58.25 {1480} 59.25 {1505} 2.25 {57} 7.75 {197} 6.75 {171}
Width 24 {610} 46.5 {1181} 51 {1295} 6 {152} 13.5 {343} 9 {229}
Depth 25 {635} 51.25 {1302} 51 {1295} 5 {127} 8.75 {222} 9 {229}
B-80
Heat Transfer
Storage
Temperature Controllers
4HERMOLATOR47 6 (
4HERMOLATOR47 3 (
4HERMOLATOR47 0 (
Conv
vey
eyin
y g 4HERMOLATORMICRO4EMP-4# (
4HERMOLATORVACU4RAC642 $)AND642 $) (
0OSITIVE.EGATIVE0RESSURE
4HERMOLATORHEAT4RAC(42 (
/IL4EMPERATURE#ONTROLLER
Dry
ying Portable Chillers
%03ERIES !IR7ATER#OOLED (
%03ERIES !IR7ATER#OOLED (
Cooling Tower Systems

%&3ERIES&IBERGLASS-ODELSTO4ONS (
%&3ERIES&IBERGLASS-ODELSTO4ONS (
Blendin
ng/
g Feeding
%ARTH3MART4-%3473ERIES!DIABATIC4OWERS (
Central Chillers
!IR #OOLED-ODELS%3! TO%3! (
!IR #OOLED-ODELS! 3+TO! 3+ (
%3%3ERIES#ENTRAL#HILLERS (
7ATER #OOLED-ODELS7 3+TO7 3+ (
7ATER #OOLED-ODELS7 3+ 7 3+ (
Heat Trransfer Pump Tanks

04#304333TEEL-ODELS (
04&'&IBERGLASS-ODELS (
Accessories
3TAINLESS3TEEL#&33ERIES7ATER3TRAINERS (
Size Reduction 3-&4OWER7ATER&ILTER3YSTEM (
4OWER)SOLATION0&3ERIES(EAT%XCHANGERS (
System Solutions
#ENTRAL#OOLING3YSTEMS (
Upstream Thermolator Accessories

4HERMOLATOR®!CCESSORIES (
Downstream
Heat Transfer Quick Reference
4EMPERATURE 0ROCESS 0UMP (EATER .OOF #OOLING
-ODELS
2ANGE°& &LUID 2ANGE(P 2ANGEK7 :ONES -ETHOD
4EMPERATURE#ONTROL5NITS
4HERMOLATOR®47 6 TO WATER OR $IRECT)NJECTION
4HERMOLATOR®47 3 TO WATER TO TO OR $IRECT)NJECTION
4HERMOLATOR®47 0 TO WATER TO TO OR $IRECT)NJECTION
4HERMOLATOR 47 0
®
TO WATER TO TO OR #LOSED#IRCUIT
4HERMOLATOR®MICRO4EMP-4# TO WATER TO OR $IRECT)NJECTION
4HERMOLATOR®VACU4RAC642 TO WATER TO TO OR $IRECT)NJECTION
4HERMOLATOR®HEA4RAC(42 TO OIL TO OR /PTIONAL)SOLATED#IRCUIT
#APACITY2ANGE 0UMP2ANGE 3TANDARD0ROCESS

-ODELS 2EFRIGERANT #OOLING-ETHOD
TONS (P &LOW2ATE'0-
0ORTABLE#HILLERS
%0!3ERIES!IR #OOLED TO TO TO 2 # !IR
%073ERIES7ATER #OOLED TO TO 2 # 7ATER
%023ERIES2EMOTE TO 2 # 2EMOTE
%0!3ERIES!IR #OOLED TO TO TO 2 ! !IR
%073ERIES7ATER #OOLED TO TO TO 2 ! 7ATER
%023ERIES2EMOTE TO TO TO 2 ! 2EMOTE
#APACITY2ANGE &AN-OTOR2ANGE 3TANDARD0ROCESS

-ODELS -ATERIALOF#ONSTRUCTION
TONS (P &LOW2ATE'0-
#OOLING4OWERS
%&3ERIES TO TO TO &IBERGLASS
%&3ERIES TO TO TO &IBERGLASS
%3ERIES TO TO TO 0OLYETHYLENE
%3ERIES TO XTOX TO 0OLYETHYLENE
4-
%ARTH3MART !DIABATIC4OWERS TO XTOX TO 'ALVANIZED0AINT
#APACITY2ANGE #OMPRESSOR2ANGE
-ODELS #OMPRESSOR4YPE 2EFRIGERANT #OOLING-ETHOD
TONS 1TY (P
#ENTRAL#HILLERS
%3!3ERIES3MALL!IR #OOLED TO XTOX 3CROLL 2 ! !IR
! 3+3ERIES,ARGE!IR #OOLED TO XTOX 3CREW 2 ! !IR
%3%3ERIES2EMOTE!IR #OOLED TO XTOX 3CROLL 2 ! !IR
%3%3ERIES7ATER #OOLED TO XTOX 3CROLL 2 ! 7ATER
7 3+3ERIES-EDIUM7ATER #OOLED TO XTOX 3CREW 2 ! 7ATER
7 3+ 2#3ERIES2EMOTE#ONDENSER TO XTOX 3CREW 2 ! 2EMOTE
7 3+3ERIES,ARGE7ATER #OOLED TO 3CREW 2 ! 7ATER
4ANK#APACITY #HILLER#APACITY 4OWER#APACITY

-ODELS -ATERIALOF#ONSTRUCTION
GALLONS 2ANGETONS 2ANGETONS
0UMP4ANKS
04#33ERIES TO TO TO #ARBON3TEEL7ELDED4ANK
04333ERIES TO TO TO 3TAINLESS3TEEL7ELDED4ANK
04&'3ERIES TO TO TO -OLDED&IBERGLASS
0ROCESS&LOW #HILLER#APACITY 4OWER#APACITY

-ODELS
2ATE'0- 2ANGETONS 2ANGETONS
!CCESSORIES
&ULL&LOW3TRAINERS#&33ERIES TO TO TO
3ANDAND'RAVEL5NITS3-&3ERIES .! .! TO
)SOLATION(EAT%XCHANGES0&3ERIES TO .! TO
TPHX052-0817 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITSTHERMOLATOR® TW-V SERIES
WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Traditional Reliability
Packaged for
Increased Value
The Thermolator® TW-V Series temperature controller is designed
to maintain the process temperatures by circulating cooling tower
or chiller water. Internal heaters provide rapid pre-heating of
molds and dies.
All models offer incoloy heaters; silicon carbide pump seals;

pressure gauges; easy-to-use microprocessor controls and
tool-free access panels for fast removal. Process line purge is
available as an option.
TW-V Thermolator®
Value Priced; Compounded Energy Savings
Conair’s TW-V Series liquid temperature

controllers are single-zone, direct cooling ` Clear, accurate, easy to use
Microprocessor controls with adjustable tuning parameters offer uniform temperature
models. Pump sizes of 3/4 Hp {0.56 kW},
control, regardless of external loading.
or 2.0 Hp {1.49 kW} are standard. Energy-
efficient 12 kW heaters are used on all units. ` Energy savings
Process temperatures to 250°F {121°C} are This new generation of Thermolators is much more efficient. Offering as much
as 50% increase in the pump operating envelope, an application that may have
standard.
previously required a 5 Hp {3.73 kW} pump may now only require a 2 Hp {1.49 kW}
pump. PLUS, today’s pumps use less energy than their predecessors. Average yearly
The TW-V Series Thermolators® were
operating cost savings of the new Thermolators is $740 per unit. Conair Sales can
designed for processors seeking the help determine which Thermolator suits your needs.
traditional reliability that Conair Thermolators
are known for, but don’t require the additional ` Higher-efficiency pumps
More efficient pumps— 36% wire to water to be exact. 3/4 Hp {0.56 kW} or 2 Hp
features and options available in the TW-S or
{1.49 kW} pumps are available and feature silicon carbide seals and sediment traps
TW-P Series. for extended seal life. Cast iron impellers are standard.
For indirect cooling and/or multi-zone models, ` Incoloy heaters

consider Conair’s TW-S or TW-P Series, Standard on all models, long-life incoloy heaters resist damage from high
temperature and chemicals.
each with their own specification sheets. No
matter what your application, Conair has a ` "Casters up" warranty
Thermolator model that fits perfectly. Three full years on all Thermolator TW Series models.

H-1
Features
Incoloy heaters
minimize chemical and high
temperature damage.
Three-piece cast construction

eliminates potential leak points.
Built-in pressure gauges

are standard for all Conair TW Series
Thermolators.
High efficiency pumps

3/4 Hp {0.56 kW} or 2 Hp {1.49
kW} pumps available. Industry
standard cast iron pump
impellers on all models.
Silicon carbide pump seals are

standard on all models.
Built-in sediment trap

settles contaminants away
from the pump seals.
Options
Compressed Air Purge Valve Stacking Rack
Quickly evacuates fluid from the Save floor space by stacking TCUs two-high. The stacking rack
process circuit, allowing for faster, can be used only with single-zone models.
cleaner disconnection of the
temperature controller from molds
and hoses.

H-2
Control
The TW-V Control
Created specifically for the value-minded, the

TW-V Thermolator Control provides simple
operation, without many of the options and
features available in the TW-S and TW-P
models. An easy-to-use LCD control with
multiple illuminating indicator lights, the
TW-V Control may be all that is required for
STOPPED
To
applications requiring basic everyday “turn it
Setpoint Process
200°F 199°F on, turn it off” Thermolator operation.

RUN MP
Using the charts below, verify that the TW-V

control suits your needs. If not, perhaps the
TW-S or TW-P Series Thermolators are more
appropriate for your application. Refer to the
individual specifications sheets for those
products.
Control features on the TW-V Series Thermolators Control features on the TW-S and TW-P Series Thermolators
Model TW-V Model TW-S TW-P

Direct Injection z Direct Injection z z
z Standard
Closed Circuit - Common Source Closed Circuit - Common Source |
Closed Circuit - Separate Source | Optional Closed Circuit - Separate Source |
Construction Construction
3/4 or 2 Hp 3/4 to 10 Hp 3/4 to 10 Hp
Standard Pump Range Standard Pump Range
{0.56 or 1.49 kW} {0.56 to 7.45 kW} {0.56 to 7.45 kW}
Standard Heater Range 12 kW Standard Heater Range 0 to 48 kW 0 to 48 kW
Cast Heater / Pump z Cast Heater / Pump z z
Incoloy Heaters z Incoloy Heaters z z
Silicon Carbide Seals z Silicon Carbide Seals z z
Pressure Gauges z Pressure Gauges z z
250°F Setpoint Range z 250°F Setpoint Range z z
300°F Setpoint Range 300°F Setpoint Range | |
Controls Controls
PID Control z PID Control PID Control z z
Setpoint / Actual Display z Setpoint / Actual Display z z
Password Protection Password Protection z z
Modbus RTU via RS-485 Modbus RTU via RS-485 |
SPI via RS-485 SPI via RS-485 |
Retransmit Process Temp (4-20mA) Retransmit Process Temp (4-20mA) |
Hand Held Remote Hand Held Remote |
Purge On/
Auto Restart Capability Off button Auto Restart Capability z z
High Temperature Safety included on High Temperature Safety | |
Mold Purge | control. Mold Purge |
Phase Detection Circuit Phase Detection Circuit z
Heat Error for Heater Malfunction Heat Error for Heater Malfunction z
Remote Start/Stop Remote Start/Stop z z
120°F Air Purge Cancel z 120°F Air Purge Cancel z z
Quick Access Cool Down Mode Quick Access Cool Down Mode z z
Status / Alarm Lights Status / Alarm Lights
Panel Mounted Status Lights 1 LED Panel Mounted Status Lights 7 LEDs 12 LEDs
Panel Mounted Alarm Lights 1 LED Panel Mounted Alarm Lights 3 LEDs 5 LEDs
Audible Alarm Audible Alarm z z
Strobe Light Strobe Light | |

H-3
Specifications
Models TW-V
Minimum setpoint temperature °F {°C} 40 {4}
Maximum setpoint temperature °F {°C} 250 {121}
Minimum operating temperature °F {°C} Approximately 20° {11°} above the cooling water inlet temperature*
Standard cooling valve size inches {mm} Cv 3/8 {9.5} Cv 2.5
Available pump sizes 0.75, 2 {0.56, 1.49 kW}
Available heater sizes 12 kW
Pump performance - Consult your Conair representative for pump performance characteristics at other operating points.
Pump 3/4 Hp {0.56 kW} 2 Hp {1.49 kW}
Nominal flow gpm {lpm} 50 {189} 75 {284}
Pressure @ nominal flow psi {kg/cm2} 20 {1.4} 30 {2.1}

Standard cabinet, not including any connections
A - Height 28.31 {719}
B - Width 14.00 {356}
C - Depth 25.75 {654}
A
Water connections
All models NPT inches (female)
To/From process 1.50
Cooling water in/out 1.00
B C
Shipping weight ranges lb {kg} Weights vary depending on cabinet size, options, and cooling type (DI or CC). operating points.
Single Zone
Pump Minimum Maximum
0.75 Hp {0.56 kW} 240 {109} 325 {147}
2 Hp {1.49 kW} 248 {113} 338 {153}
Total full load amps per zone † Standard voltage is 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
Heater 12 kW
Voltage 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60
Pump size
0.75 Hp {0.56 kW} 33.4 19.3 19.6 16.7 13.5
1.0 Hp {0.75 kW} 36.4 20.9 22.3 18.1 14.6
* Lower operating temperatures can be obtained with larger cooling valves.
†

H-4
TPHX053-0817 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITSTHERMOLATOR® TW-S SERIES
Re-Engineered for
Energy Savings;
Increased Performance
The new Thermolator® TW-S Series takes everything that you
loved about Conair’s reliable Thermolators of the past, and
improves upon performance and available options. The TW-S
offers a wide variety of options and features to make maintaining
the process temperature at your required setpoint simple.

pressure gauges; easy-to-use controls and tool-free access
panels for fast removal. The TW-S options include: rotary non-
fused disconnect switch, C-UL508A industrial control panel
construction, hand-held remote control panel, solid state relay
heater controls, brazed plate heat exchangers in two sizes, TW-S Thermolator®
300°F {149°C} maximum operating temperature and vertical unit

stacking rack.
Save Money Up Front and in the Long Term
Units are available in direct injection, single-

zone and dual-zone configurations. Pump ` State-of-the-art controls
Microprocessor controls offer uniform temperature control regardless of external
sizes to 10 Hp {7.46 kW} per zone. Heaters
loading. Status lights, process supply and setpoint values are displayed on the
to 48 kW per zone. Standard process control simultaneously. Built-in features include: cool down sequence, pump running
temperatures to 250°F {121°C}, with a high- hours count, temperature deviation alarms & warnings, adjustable alarm delay times,
temperature option which increases the unit’s toggle to process return temperature, alarm horn & silence switch, error diagnostics
and independent start and stop buttons.
capacity to 300°F {149°C}.
` Energy savings
The TW-S Thermolator® was designed to be This new generation of Thermolators is much more efficient. Offering a 50% increase
in the pump operating envelope, an application that may have previously required a
flexible for your needs. Add as many or as few
5 Hp {3.73 kW} pump may now only require a 2 Hp {1.49 kW} pump. PLUS, today’s
options as you need. pumps use less energy than their predecessors. Average yearly operating cost
savings of the new Thermolators is $740 per unit. Conair Sales can help determine
Dual-zone models can control two process which Thermolator suits your needs.
temperatures at different locations in a mold. ` Higher-efficiency pumps
These units have common cooling water More efficient pumps— 36% wire to water to be exact. Sizes from 3/4 Hp {0.56 kW}
manifolds and electrical connections for to 10 Hp {7.46 kW} and feature silicon carbide seals and sediment traps for extended
convenience. seal life. Cast iron impellers are standard; silicon brass impellers are optional.
` Incoloy heaters
Made to resist damage from high temperature and chemicals.
` "Casters up" warranty
Three full years on all Thermolator TW Series models.

H-5
Features
Incoloy heaters
minimize chemical and high temperature
damage.

Built-in pressure gauges High efficiency pumps

are standard for all Conair TW Series from 3/4 Hp {0.56 kW} to 10 Hp {7.46 kW}.
Thermolators. Industry standard cast iron pump impellers on
all models. Brass impellers available for non-
ferrous applications.
Two-zone models
Silicon carbide pump seals are standard on all
allow independent control of dual cooling
models.
zones with the convenience of common
cooling water manifolds and electrical
connections.
settles contaminants away from the pump
seals.
Options
Corrosion Resistance Package Alarm Packages
Protect components from damage with bronze or stainless Call attention to alarm conditions
external fittings, non-ferrous pump impellers, stainless steel with red alarm strobe light.
heater flanges and corrosion-resistant coating on all interior
fluid surfaces, including heater tanks and pump volute.
Modulating Cooling Valve Stacking Rack

Fully modulating cooling valve provides consistent temperature Save floor space by stacking TCUs two-high. The stacking rack
control while eliminating water hammer issues. can be used only with single-zone models.
Closed Circuit with Two Brazed Plate Heat Exchanger Sizes Communications Options
Offers greater performance, greater capacity, and less pressure Autostart/Remote start, Remote alarm dry contact, Remote
drop. temperature sensor.
SSR Heater Controls 300°F {149°C} Construction

Used in high-temperature applications such as medical and
packaging.

H-6

Control
The TW-S Control
Control features on the TW-S Series Thermolators Control features on the TW-P and TW-V Series Thermolators
Model TW-S Model TW-P TW-V
z Standard
Closed Circuit - Common Source Closed Circuit - Common Source |
Closed Circuit - Separate Source | Optional Closed Circuit - Separate Source |
3/4 to 10 Hp 3/4 to 10 Hp 3/4 or 2 Hp
{0.56 to 7.45 kW} {0.56 to 7.45 kW} {0.56 or 1.49 kW}
Standard Heater Range 0 to 48 kW Standard Heater Range 0 to 48 kW 12 kW
300°F Setpoint Range | 300°F Setpoint Range |
Controls Controls
Setpoint / Actual Display z Setpoint / Actual Display z z
Password Protection z Password Protection z
Modbus RTU via RS-485 Modbus RTU via RS-485 |
SPI via RS-485 SPI via RS-485 |
Retransmit Process Temp (4-20mA) Retransmit Process Temp (4-20mA) |
Hand Held Remote Hand Held Remote |
Auto Restart Capability z Auto Restart Capability z
High Temperature Safety | High Temperature Safety |
Mold Purge Mold Purge | |
Phase Detection Circuit Phase Phase Detection Circuit z
Heat Error for Heater Malfunction detection Heat Error for Heater Malfunction z
Remote Start/Stop z indicates Remote Start/Stop z
120°F Air Purge Cancel z incorrect 120°F Air Purge Cancel z
Quick Access Cool Down Mode z pump Quick Access Cool Down Mode z
Status / Alarm Lights rotation or Status / Alarm Lights
Panel Mounted Status Lights 7 LEDs an open
Panel Mounted Status Lights 12 LEDs 1 LED
electrical
Panel Mounted Alarm Lights 3 LEDs Panel Mounted Alarm Lights 5 LEDs 1 LED
leg.
Audible Alarm z Audible Alarm z
Strobe Light | Strobe Light |

H-7

Specifications
Models TW-S (direct injection)‡
Maximum setpoint temperature °F {°C} 250 {121}, (300 {149} optional)
Available pump sizes 0.75, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10 Hp {0.56, 0.75, 1.49, 2.24, 3.73, 5.59, or 7.46 kW}
Available heater sizes 9, 12, 18, 24, 36 or 48 kW
Connections to/from process NPT (female) 1.50 inches
Connections in/out cooling water NPT (female) 1.00 inches
Pump 3/4 Hp {0.56 kW} 1 Hp {0.75 kW} 2 Hp {1.49 kW} 3 Hp {2.24 kW} 5 Hp {3.73 kW} 7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 10 Hp {7.46 kW}
Nominal flow gpm {lpm} 50 {189} 55 {208} 75 {284} 85 {322} 100 {379} 120 {454} 150 {568}
Pressure@ nominal flow psi {kg/cm2} 20 {1.4} 25 {1.7} 30 {2.1} 32 {2.2} 46 {3.2} 56 {3.9} 65 {4.5}

Cabinet style Single Zone (A) Dual Zone (B)†
Height 28.31 {719} 29.00 {734}
Width 14.00 {356} 28.34 {720} A B†
Depth 25.75 {654} 26.06 {662}
Shipping weight ranges lb {kg} Weights vary depending on cabinet size and options.
Single Zone Dual Zone
Pump Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
0.75 Hp {0.56 kW} 240 {109} 280 {127} 491 {223} 576 {261}
1 Hp {0.75 kW} 245 {111} 290 {132} 499 {226} 584 {265}
2 Hp {1.49 kW} 248 {113} 298 {131} 515 {234} 590 {268}
3 Hp {2.24 kW} 259 {118} 299 {136} 538 {244} 623 {283}
5 Hp {3.73 kW} 302 {137} 352 {160} 629 {285} 699 {317}
7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 317 {144} 362 {164} 649 {294} 729 {331}
10 Hp {7.46 kW} 329 {149} 379 {172} 683 {310} 763 {346}
Total full load amps per zone §
Heater 9 kW 12 kW 18 kW
Voltage 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60
Pump size
0.75 Hp {0.56 kW} 25.9 15.0 12.9 10.5 33.4 19.3 16.7 13.5 48.5 28.0 24.2 19.5
1.0 Hp {0.75 kW} 26.8 15.2 15.3 13.3 10.6 34.3 19.5 19.6 17.1 13.6 49.4 28.2 28.3 24.5 19.6
2.0 Hp {1.49 kW} 28.9 16.6 16.7 14.3 11.6 36.4 20.9 21.0 18.1 14.6 51.5 29.6 29.7 25.6 20.6
3.0 Hp {2.24 kW} 31.7 13.4 18.0 15.4 12.5 39.2 22.4 22.3 19.2 15.5 54.3 31.1 31.0 26.7 21.5
5.0 Hp {3.73 kW} 36.3 20.7 18.2 17.7 14.2 43.8 25.0 22.5 21.5 17.2 58.9 33.7 31.2 29.0 23.2
7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 42.1 24.9 20.5 20.3 16.3 49.6 29.2 24.8 24.1 19.3 64.7 37.9 33.5 31.6 25.3
10.0 Hp {7.46 kW} 50.3 28.9 24.8 24.1 18.9 57.8 33.2 29.1 27.9 21.9 72.9 41.9 37.8 35.4 27.9
Total full load amps per zone §

Voltage 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60
Pump size
0.75 Hp {0.56 kW} 63.6 36.6 31.7 25.6 93.7 54.0 46.8 37.6 N/A 61.9 49.7
1.0 Hp {0.75 kW} 64.5 36.8 36.9 32.1 25.7 94.6 54.2 54.3 47.2 37.7 N/A 62.3 49.8
2.0 Hp {1.49 kW} 66.6 38.2 38.3 33.1 26.7 96.7 55.6 55.7 48.2 38.7 N/A 63.3 50.8
3.0 Hp {2.24 kW} 69.4 39.7 39.6 34.2 27.6 99.5 57.1 57.0 49.3 39.6 N/A 64.4 51.7
5.0 Hp {3.73 kW} 74.0 42.3 39.8 36.5 29.3 104.1 59.7 57.2 51.6 41.3 N/A 66.7 53.4
7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 79.8 46.5 42.1 39.1 31.4 109.9 63.9 59.5 54.2 43.4 N/A 69.3 55.5
10.0 Hp {7.46 kW} 88.0 50.5 46.4 42.9 34.0 118.1 67.9 63.8 58.0 46.0 N/A 73.1 58.1
§
* Lower operating temperatures can be obtained with larger cooling valves. FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
†
Available in TW-S and TW-P models only. on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
‡
Direct Inject (DI) cooling injects cooling water directly into the process loop upon applied to the machine.
demand.

H-8
TPHX054-0817 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITSTHERMOLATOR® TW-P SERIES
Cost Savings Starting

from Purchase Date,
and Continued Daily
The Thermolator® TW-P Series is designed as the top-of-the-
line Thermolator package. The TW-P offers extensive options for
maintaining the process temperature with circulated water that
has been heated or cooled to the required setpoint.

pressure gauges; easy-to-use controls and tool-free access
panels for fast removal. The TW-P options include: rotary non-
fused disconnect switch, C-UL508A industrial control panel
construction, hand-held remote control panel, solid state relay
heater controls, brazed plate heat exchangers in two sizes,
300°F {149°C} maximum operating temperature and vertical unit TW-P Thermolator®
stacking rack.
A Premium Control on a Premium Thermolator®
Units are available in direct injection or closed

circuit cooling; single-zone and dual-zone ` State-of-the-art controls
configurations. Pump sizes to 10 Hp {7.46 kW} Microprocessor controls with adjustable tuning parameters offer uniform temperature
per zone. Heaters to 48 kW per zone. Standard control, regardless of external loading.
process temperatures to 250°F {121°C}, with ` Energy savings
a high-temperature option which increases The newest generation of TW Series Thermolators is much more efficient. Offering
the unit’s capacity to 300°F {149°C}. 50% increase in the pump operating envelope, an application that may have
previously required a 5 Hp {3.73 kW} pump may now only require a 2 Hp {1.49 kW}
The TW-P Thermolator® is designed to offer
pump.. PLUS, today’s pumps use less energy than their predecessors. Average yearly
every premium option available. Options can operating cost savings of the new Thermolators is $740 per unit. Conair sales can
be included or excluded based on your desired help you determine which Thermolator suits your needs.
configuration.
` Higher-efficiency pumps
Dual-zone models can control two process More efficient pumps— 36% wire to water to be exact. Sizes from 3/4 Hp to 10 Hp
temperatures at different locations in a mold. and feature silicon carbide seals and sediment traps for extended seal life. Cast iron
These units have common cooling water impellers are standard; silicon brass impellers are optional.
manifolds and electrical connections for
` Incoloy heaters
convenience.
Made to resist damage from high temperature and chemicals.
Closed circuit units keep the process fluid
` "Casters up" warranty
separated from the cooling water, eliminating
Three full years on all Thermolator TW Series models.
cross-contamination and allowing for the use
of two different fluid sources.

H-9
Features
Incoloy heaters
minimize chemical and high temperature
damage.

Built-in pressure gauges High efficiency pumps

are standard for all Conair TW Series from 3/4 Hp {0.56 kW} to 10 Hp {7.46 kW}.
Thermolators. Industry standard cast iron pump impellers on
all models. Brass impellers available for non-
ferrous applications.
Two-zone models
Silicon carbide pump seals are standard on all
allow independent control of dual cooling
models.
zones with the convenience of common
cooling water manifolds and electrical
connections.
settles contaminants away from the pump
seals.
Options
Compressed Air Purge Valve Corrosion Resistance Package
Quickly evacuates fluid from the process Protect components from damage with bronze or stainless
circuit, allowing for faster, cleaner external fittings, non-ferrous pump impellers, stainless steel
disconnection of the temperature heater flanges and corrosion-resistant coating on all interior
controller from molds and hoses. fluid surfaces, including heater tanks and pump volute.
Modulating Cooling Valve Stacking Rack

Fully modulating cooling valve provides Save floor space by stacking TCUs two-high. The stacking rack
consistent temperature control while can be used only with single-zone models.
eliminating water hammer issues.
Alarm Packages Communications Options

Call attention to alarm conditions with Autostart/Remote start, Remote dry alarm, Remote temperature
red alarm strobe light. sensor, 4-20mA supply output, ModBUS RTU & SPI RS-485
communication.
Closed Circuit with Two Brazed Plate Heat Exchanger Sizes 300°F {149°C} Construction
Offers greater performance, greater capacity, and less pressure Used in high-temperature applications such as medical and
drop. packaging.
SSR Heater Controls

H-10

Control
Control Power
Autostart Signal
Pump
Heat
Cool
Coolant Pressure
Temperature Limit
Flow GPM (flash) Electrical Phase Error
Heat Error
Process Cool Down
Mold Rapid Process Mold Purge

Purge Cool Cool Down
Rapid Cool
Communications
Remote Heat/Cool
Program Mode
The TW-P Control
Control features on the TW-P Series Thermolators Control features on the TW-S and TW-V Series Thermolators
Model TW-P Model TW-S TW-V
| z Standard
Closed Circuit - Common Source Closed Circuit - Common Source
Closed Circuit - Separate Source | | Optional Closed Circuit - Separate Source
3/4 to 10 Hp * 4-20mA 3/4 to 10 Hp 3/4 or 2 Hp
{0.56 to 7.45 kW} {0.56 to 7.45 kW} {0.56 or 1.49 kW}
Standard Heater Range 0 to 48 kW Standard Heater Range 0 to 48 kW 12 kW
300°F Setpoint Range | 300°F Setpoint Range |
Controls Controls
Setpoint / Actual Display z Purge On/ Setpoint / Actual Display z z
Password Protection z Off button Password Protection z
Modbus RTU via RS-485 | included on Modbus RTU via RS-485
SPI via RS-485 | control. SPI via RS-485
Retransmit Process Temp (4-20mA) | Retransmit Process Temp (4-20mA)
Hand Held Remote | Phase Hand Held Remote
Auto Restart Capability z detection Auto Restart Capability z
High Temperature Safety | indicates
High Temperature Safety |
Mold Purge | incorrect
Mold Purge |
Phase Detection Circuit z pump rotation
Phase Detection Circuit
or an open
Heat Error for Heater Malfunction z Heat Error for Heater Malfunction
electrical leg.
Remote Start/Stop z Remote Start/Stop z
120°F Air Purge Cancel z 120°F Air Purge Cancel z
Quick Access Cool Down Mode z Remote Start/
Quick Access Cool Down Mode z
Stop works
Status / Alarm Lights Status / Alarm Lights
with external
Panel Mounted Status Lights 12 LEDs timers or Panel Mounted Status Lights 7 LEDs 1 LED
Panel Mounted Alarm Lights 5 LEDs switches for Panel Mounted Alarm Lights 3 LEDs 1 LED
Audible Alarm z convenient Audible Alarm z
Strobe Light | preheating of Strobe Light |
molds.

H-11

Specifications
Models TW-P (direct injection)‡ TW-P (closed circuit)§
Maximum setpoint temperature °F {°C} 250 {121}, (300 {149} optional)
Standard cooling valve size inches {mm} 1/4 {6.35} 3/4 {19.05} (varies)
Available pump sizes 0.75, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10 Hp {0.56, 0.75, 1.49, 2.24, 3.73, 5.59, or 7.46 kW}
Available heater sizes 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36 or 48 kW 9, 12, 18, 24, or 36 kW
Connections to/from process NPT (female) 1.50 inches
Connections in/out cooling water NPT (female) 1.00 inches
Pump 3/4 Hp {0.56 kW} 1 Hp {0.75 kW} 2 Hp {1.49 kW} 3 Hp {2.24 kW} 5 Hp {3.73 kW} 7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 10 Hp {7.46 kW}
Nominal flow gpm {lpm} 50 {189} 55 {208} 75 {284} 85 {322} 100 {379} 120 {454} 150 {568}
Pressure @ nominal flow psi {kg/cm2} 20 {1.4} 25 {1.7} 30 {2.1} 32 {2.2} 46 {3.2} 56 {3.9} 65 {4.5}
Cabinet style Single Zone (A) Dual Zone (B)†
Height 28.43 {722} 29.00 {734} TW-S and
A B† TW-P only†
Width 14.00 {356} 28.34 {720}
Depth 25.75 {654} 26.06 {662}
Shipping weight ranges lb {kg} Weights vary depending on cabinet size, options, and cooling type (DI or CC).
Single Zone Dual Zone
Pump Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
0.75 Hp {0.56 kW} 240 {109} 280 {127} 491 {223} 576 {261}
1 Hp {0.75 kW} 245 {111} 290 {132} 499 {226} 584 {265}
2 Hp {1.49 kW} 248 {113} 298 {135} 515 {234} 590 {268}
3 Hp {2.24 kW} 259 {118} 299 {136} 538 {244} 623 {283}
5 Hp {3.73 kW} 302 {137} 352 {160} 629 {285} 699 {317}
7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 317 {144} 362 {164} 649 {294} 729 {331}
10 Hp {7.46 kW} 329 {149} 379 {172} 683 {310} 763 {346}
Total full load amps per zone **
Voltage 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60
Pump size
0.75 Hp {0.56 kW} 25.9 15.0 12.9 10.5 33.4 19.3 16.7 13.5 48.5 28.0 24.2 19.5
1.0 Hp {0.75 kW} 26.8 15.2 15.3 13.3 10.6 34.3 19.5 19.6 17.1 13.6 49.4 28.2 28.3 24.5 19.6
2.0 Hp {1.49 kW} 28.9 16.6 16.7 14.3 11.6 36.4 20.9 21.0 18.1 14.6 51.5 29.6 29.7 25.6 20.6
3.0 Hp {2.24 kW} 31.7 13.4 18.0 15.4 12.5 39.2 22.4 22.3 19.2 15.5 54.3 31.1 31.0 26.7 21.5
5.0 Hp {3.73 kW} 36.3 20.7 18.2 17.7 14.2 43.8 25.0 22.5 21.5 17.2 58.9 33.7 31.2 29.0 23.2
7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 42.1 24.9 20.5 20.3 16.3 49.6 29.2 24.8 24.1 19.3 64.7 37.9 33.5 31.6 25.3
10.0 Hp {7.46 kW} 50.3 28.9 24.8 24.1 18.9 57.8 33.2 29.1 27.9 21.9 72.9 41.9 37.8 35.4 27.9
Total full load amps per zone **
Voltage 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60 208/3/60 230/3/60 380/3/60 400/3/50 460/3/60 575/3/60
Pump size
0.75 Hp {0.56 kW} 63.6 36.6 31.7 25.6 93.7 54.0 46.8 37.6 N/A 61.9 49.7
1.0 Hp {0.75 kW} 64.5 36.8 36.9 32.1 25.7 94.6 54.2 54.3 47.2 37.7 N/A 62.3 49.8
2.0 Hp {1.49 kW} 66.6 38.2 38.3 33.1 26.7 96.7 55.6 55.7 48.2 38.7 N/A 63.3 50.8
3.0 Hp {2.24 kW} 69.4 39.7 39.6 34.2 27.6 99.5 57.1 57.0 49.3 39.6 N/A 64.4 51.7
5.0 Hp {3.73 kW} 74.0 42.3 39.8 36.5 29.3 104.1 59.7 57.2 51.6 41.3 N/A 66.7 53.4
7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 79.8 46.5 42.1 39.1 31.4 109.9 63.9 59.5 54.2 43.4 N/A 69.3 55.5
10.0 Hp {7.46 kW} 88.0 50.5 46.4 42.9 34.0 118.1 67.9 63.8 58.0 46.0 N/A 73.1 58.1
* Lower operating temperatures can be obtained with larger cooling valves. ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
†
Available in TW-S and TW-P models only. on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
‡
Direct Inject (DI) cooling injects cooling water directly into the process loop upon applied to the machine.
demand.
§
Closed Circuit (CC) cooling injects cooling water into the process loop only during the most current information.
initial filling or when make-up water is needed.

H-12
TPHX004-0317 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITS4(%2-/,!4/2-)#2/4%-0-4#
7!4%24%-0%2!452%#/.42/,,%2
Compact, Reliable
Temperature Controller
The microTemp water temperature controller is designed to
maintain the process temperature with circulated water that has
been heated or cooled to the required setpoint.
The microTemp is manufactured specifically for small processing

machines, such as 80-ton or smaller injection molding machines.
-ODEL-4#
Solid Construction, Easy Maintenance
The microTemp is a direct injection, single-

zone unit that can heat or cool water to 250°F ` #OMPACTLOW PROFILECABINET
{121°C}. Pump sizes are available to 1/2 Hp Save valuable floor space with one of the smallest temperature controllers available.
{0.37 kW}, heaters to 6 kW.
` ,IFT OFFACCESSPANEL
Three-piece cast construction nearly Convenient access to internal components. Turn one fastener by hand, and the
eliminates leak-prone pipe fittings. cabinet lifts away for easy servicing. The hinged operator console offers toolfree
access to electrical components.
IEC rated contactors are field tested and offer
proven reliability. ` 3TATE OF THE ARTCONTROLS
The off-the-shelf, plug-in microprocessor control is easy to use and simultaneously
The microprocessor control is a full function, displays process and setpoint temperatures.
automatic tuning PID controller designed for
precise temperature control. ` )NCOLOYHEATERS
Standard on the microTemp, incoloy heaters offer better resistance to chemical
Options include high-temperature safety degradation than stainless steel and better heat strength characteristics than copper.
switch; prewired alarm package with audible
and visual warnings; SPI communications; ` 4WO YEARWARRANTY
and a compressed air purge circuit to speed From the casters up, there is a two-year warranty.
up mold changes and help conserve water.
H-13
TPHX004-0317 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITS4(%2-/,!4/2-)#2/4%-0-4#
7!4%24%-0%2!452%#/.42/,,%2
Specifications
microTemp Thermolator Control
is operator friendly.
Digital microprocessor control provides simultaneous display of

process and setpoint temperatures. This waterproof, durable control
is operator friendly.
" #
-ODEL MTC-1 Features

Minimum operating temperature* 20°F {-7°C} above cooling water • Process temperature display
Minimum setpoint temperature 32°F {0°C} • Setpoint temperature display
Maximum setpoint temperature 250°F {121°C} • Status lights indicate heating and cooling cycles and high or
0UMPPERFORMANCE low deviation alarms.
Pump Hp {kW} 1/3 Hp {0.25} 1/2 Hp {0.37} • Auto-tune of PID parameters for precise temperature control.
Heater element 3 kW 6 kW 3 kW 6 kW
Nominal flow gpm {l/min} 10 {38} 25 {95}
Pressure @ nominal flow psi {bar}
15 {1.0} 13 {0.9}
Options
A - Height 18 {457} • SPI communications port
B - Width 15.5 {394}
• Visual and audible alarms
C - Depth 11 {279}
D - Height with hinged console open 29 {737}
• Compressed air mold-water purge
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Pump size 1/3 Hp {0.25} 1/2 Hp {0.37} Specification Notes
Installed 75 {34} 79 {36}
* Requires 25 psi cooling water supply for normal operation.
Shipping 85 {39} 89 {40}
†
7ATERCONNECTIONSNPT (female) FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or
accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific
Process 3/4 inch machines and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order
Cooling 1/2 inch and the nameplate applied to the machine.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative
4OTAL&ULL,OAD!MPSo( all voltages are 3 phase, 60 Hz ) for the most current information.
(EATER K7 K7
6OLTAGE 208V 230V 460V 208V 230V 460V
0UMP
1/3 Hp {0.25 kW} 13.7 12.4 6.2 23.7 21.4 10.7
1/2 Hp {0.37 kW} 14.2 12.8 6.4 24.2 21.8 10.9
H-14
TPHX011-0317 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITS4(%2-/,!4/26!#542!#642 $)!.$642 $)
0/3)4)6%.%'!4)6%02%3352%
Control Temperature
and Stop Mold Leaks
Keep your operation up and running with the Thermolator®
vacuTrac water temperature controller. This positive/negative
pressure unit can be used as a temporary fix for a leaky mold or
bad O-rings.
The vacuTrac is equipped with a manual three-way ball valve that

allows you to change the unit from positive pressure to negative
pressure by moving the valve handle on the back of the unit
counterclockwise. Changing the unit to operate with negative
-ODEL642 $)
pressure allows the unit to draw air into the mold, effectively SINGLEZONE
stopping leaks.
Single or Dual Zone Models available
Use the vacuTrac to produce negative

pressure in the from process lines. Otherwise, ` )NCOLOYHEATERS
Standard on the vacuTrac, Incoloy heaters resist damage from high temperatures
the unit functions like a direct injection
and chemicals.
temperature control unit and can be used
when your application requires process ` 4HREE WAYBALLVALVE
temperatures up to 180°F {82.2°C}. Quick and easy changeover from standard positive pressure to negative pressure
operation.
The unit is equipped with a high capacity,
heavy-duty jet pump/venturi. Choose 9 or 12 ` ,IFT OFFACCESSPANELS
kW heaters and pumps from 2 to 7.5 Hp Convenient, tool-free access to internal components. The cabinet lifts away for easy
{1.49 to 5.59 kW}. maintenance and servicing.
Specify single zone if you need one ` 3TATE OF THE ARTCONTROLS

temperature throughout your mold, or dual Easy-to-use microprocessor controls provide accurate temperature control. Auto-
tuning of the PID control parameter provides uniform temperature control regardless
zone if two different setpoints are required.
of light or heavy external loading.
You have a choice of two advanced
` #OMPACTSTURDYDESIGN
microprocessor control systems. Other options
Small footprint. Designed for efficient use of your valuable floor space.
include: bell, strobe or piezo horn for alarm
conditions.
H-15
0/3)4)6%.%'!4)6%02%3352%
Features
/VERFLOWCONNECTION
%XPANSIONFLUIDRESERVOIR relieves system static pressure.
accepts thermal expansion of
fluid when heated. 6ENTINGLINE
prevents trapped air in system.
,EVELSWITCHES
control tank fluid level. 0RESSURERELIEFVALVE
prevents system over pressurization.
!IRWATERSEPARATIONTANK 4OPROCESSPRESSUREGAUGE
allows entrapped air to 4HREE WAYBALLVALVE
escape to the expansion tank. diverts flow to generate vacuum.
&ROMPROCESSPRESSUREGAUGE
(IGHEFFICIENCYPUMP
pushes fluid through the system. *ETPUMPVENTURI generates vacuum.
#OOLINGWATEROUTLET
#OOLINGSOLENOIDVALVE
#OOLINGCHECKVALVE
lets hot fluid out of system.
prevents coolant back flow
into the vacuTrac.
-AKE UPSOLENOIDVALVE
maintains tank level. #OOLINGWATERINLET
6ENTAND/VERFLOW
#ONNECTION
Note:
-AXIMUM3ET
!IR6ENT 0OINTIS&
'ALLON -AKE 5P3WITCH 5NION ,INE
2ESERVOIR
,OW,EVEL3WITCH
&ROM0ROCESS !IR7ATER
0RESSURE'AUGE 2ETURN 3EPERATION
4EMPERATURE 4ANK
&ROM0ROCESS 4HERMOCOUPLE
*ET0UMP
5NION 6ENTURI
-AKE 5P
3OLENOID6ALVE
#OOLING)N
AND-AKE 5P
3UPPLY $RAIN
-ANUAL4HREE WAY 4EMPERATURE 0RESSURE
"ALL6ALVE 4HERMOCOUPLE 2ELIEF
4O0ROCESS 6ALVE
0RESSURE'AUGE
4O0ROCESS (EATER4ANK
ORK7
#OOLING/UT
#HECK #OOLING 0UMP
$RAIN
6ALVE 3OLENOID
Process Piping 6ALVE
Cooling Water / Make-up Piping
Positive/negative pressure units use a jet pump/venturi to produce negative pressure in the “from process” lines. Water at positive pressure
will leak out of mold cracks or bad o-rings. During negative pressure operation, however, air is drawn through the lines, and the mold
operates without leaking. A manual three-way ball valve can be closed to make these units into standard direct injection units. Because the
units use water and vent to the atmosphere, they have a maximum process temperature of 180°F {82.2°C}.
H-16
0/3)4)6%.%'!4)6%02%3352%
Controls
VACU4RAC#ONTROL47 VACU4RAC0LUS#ONTROL47
Our waterproof, durable control is operator friendly and smart. Includes all of the features of the standard vacuTrac control,
Standard features: PLUS:
• Automatic fine-tuning of PID control parameters provides • Autostart capability for convenient preheating of molds.
uniform temperature control regardless of external loading. Works with external timers or switches.
• Adjustable high/low deviation warnings track with your • Choice of temperature control points allows you to monitor
setpoint temperature. Pre-programmed acceleration feature and control from the process supply or process return
speeds up setting parameters. temperature, or from an average of the two.
• 18 operating and fault indicator lights, including 7 bi-color • Phase detection circuit indicates incorrect pump rotation or
LEDs, tell you the status of critical components and an open electrical leg.
parameters.
• Remote control up to 50 feet. Magnetic panel back allows
• Password entry prevents unauthorized or accidental changes you to place the controls where you need them. Comes with
to operating parameters. 15-foot cable. Lengths of 30 or 50 feet optional.
.OTEThe purge option is not available on the vacuTrac positive/negative

pressure water temperature controllers.
Options
!LARM0ACKAGES
Call attention to alarm conditions with a light and horn package.
23COMMUNICATION
using SPI protocol. Baud rates and addresses are programmable
on the operator panel.
H-17
0/3)4)6%.%'!4)6%02%3352%
Specifications
642 $)REARVIEWANDCONNECTIONS
! !
4OPROCESS
&ROM
PROCESS
#OOLING #OOLING
WATERIN WATEROUT
" "
642 $)SINGLEZONE 642 $)DUALZONE
-ODELS 642 $) 642 $)

Minimum setpoint temperature 32°F {0°C}
Maximum setpoint temperature 180°F {82°C}
0UMPPERFORMANCE
Pump Hp {kW} 2 {1.49} 3 {2.24} 5 {3.73} 7.5 {5.59} 2 {1.49} 3 {2.24} 5 {3.73} 7.5 {5.59}
Nominal flow gpm {l/min} 55 {208} 80 {303} 100 {379} 115 {435} 55 {208} 80 {303} 100 {379} 115 {435}
Pressure @ nominal flow psi {bar} 31 {2.2} 35 {2.5} 43 {3.0} 51 {3.6} 31 {2.2} 35 {2.5} 43 {3.0} 51 {3.6}
A - Height 43 {1090}
B - Width 14 {355} 28 {710}
Depth 31.5 {800}
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Operating 300 {136} 305 {138} 310 {141} 320 {145} 600 {272} 610 {277} 620 {281} 640 {290}
Shipping 470 {213} 475 {216} 480 {218} 490 {222} 770 {349} 780 {354} 790 {358} 810 {367}
7ATERCONNECTIONSNPT (female) inches
To / from Process 1.25
Cooling water inlet / outlet 0.75
4OTAL&ULL,OAD!MPS
o
642 $) 642 $)
PERZONE
(EATER K7 K7 K7 K7
6OLTAGE 208V 230V 460V 575V 208V 230V 460V 575V 208V 230V 460V 575V 208V 230V 460V 575V
0UMPSIZE
2 Hp {1.49 kW} 31.8 28.8 14.4 11.5 40.2 36.4 18.2 14.6 63.6 57.6 28.8 23.0 80.4 72.8 36.4 29.1
3 Hp {2.24 kW} 34.7 31.4 15.7 12.6 43.1 39.0 19.5 15.6 69.3 62.8 31.4 25.1 86.1 78.0 39.0 31.2
5 Hp {3.73 kW} 38.5 34.8 17.4 13.9 46.8 42.4 21.2 17.0 76.9 69.9 34.8 27.8 93.7 84.8 42.4 33.9
7.5 Hp {5.59 kW} 45.7 41.4 20.7 16.6 54.1 49.0 24.5 19.6 91.5 82.8 41.4 33.1 108.3 98.0 49.0 39.2
* All voltages are 3 phase, 60 Hz.

†
H-18
TPHX010-1217 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITSTHERMOLATOR® HEATRAC (HTR1-500)
OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Consistent High Heat

Temperature Control
The Thermolator® heaTrac oil temperature controller circulates
heat transfer oil, adding or removing heat as needed to maintain
a precise process temperature.
Certain materials and processes require the use of oil as a heat

transfer fluid for precise temperature control.
Unlike water or glycol mixtures, oil can be safely operated at

temperatures ranging from 70° to 500°F {21.1° to 260°C}.
Model HTR1-500
Designed for Applications over 250ºF
Use the heaTrac oil temperature controller

when your application requires process ` Low-watt density heater
Does not allow your oil to heat up to the point of degradation giving longer life to
temperatures above 250°F {121.1°C}.
your oil.
Typical applications include thermoplastic
` Air-cooled pump seals
resins, reactor vessels, roll stands or platen No need to supply water to the unit to cool the seals. Air-cooled seals extend the life
presses. of the seal and eliminate the need for an additional water connection.
Specify single zone if you need one ` Lift-off access panels

temperature throughout your mold, or dual Convenient, tool-free access to internal components. The cabinet lifts away for easy
zone if two different setpoints are required. maintenance and servicing.
` State-of-the-art controls
The optional heat exchanger cooling circuit is
Easy-to-use microprocessor controls provide accurate temperature control. Auto-
recommended for process cooling or end-of- tuning of the PID control parameter provides uniform temperature control regardless
cycle cooling. of light or heavy external loading.
` Compact, sturdy design

Small footprint. Designed for efficient use of your valuable floor space.

H-19
Features
Low-watt density electric
immersion heater
Sight glass
Expansion / fluid for visual inspection of oil level.
reservoir tank
Venting solenoid
Low level pump valve prevents trapped air in
shutoff safety system.
TEFC Pump
Shell and tube heat
Totally enclosed fan
exchanger cooling circuit
cooled pump motor.
(optional) cools the unit before
powering it down.
Air-cooled seal cavity
no cooling water required.
Cooling check valve
prevents coolant back flow into
the exchanger.
Options
Alarm Packages
Call attention to alarm condition with a
bell, strobe or piezo horn.

H-20
TH-1 and TH-2 Controls

Digital microprocessor controls provide simultaneous display of the process and setpoint temperatures. These waterproof, durable controls come
with unparalleled standard features.
heaTrac Control (TH-1)

Our waterproof, durable control is operator friendly and
smart. Standard features:
• Automatic fine-tuning of PID control parameters provides
uniform temperature control regardless of external loading.
• Adjustable high/low deviation warnings track with your
setpoint temperature. Pre-programmed acceleration feature
speeds up setting parameters.
• 18 operating and fault indicator lights, including
7 bi-color LEDs, tell you the status of critical components
and parameters.
• Password entry prevents unauthorized or acci dental
changes to operating parameters.
Options
RS485 communication using SPI protocol. Baud rates and addresses are programmable on the operator panel.
Note: The purge option is not available on the heaTrac or positive/negative pressure water temperature controllers.
heaTrac Control (TH-2)

Includes all of the features of the standard heaTrac control,
2 PLUS:
• Autostart capability for convenient preheating of molds.
Works with external timers or switches.
• Choice of temperature control points allows you to
monitor and control from the process supply or process
return temperature, or from an average of the two.
• Phase detection circuit indicates incorrect pump rotation
or an open electrical leg.
• Remote control up to 50 feet. Magnetic panel back
allows you to place the controls where you need them.
Comes with 15-foot cable. Lengths of 30 or 50 feet optional.

H-21

Specifications
HTR1-500 rear view and connections
Sight glass
To Process
From process
Cooling water in
Pressure
Cooling water out relief valve
B
(for optional cooling circuit)
HTR1-500 (single zone)
Models HTR1-500
Maximum setpoint temperature °F {°C} 500 {260}
Pump performance
Pump Hp {kW} 1 {0.75} 1.5 {1.12} 2 {1.49} 3 {2.24}
Nominal flow gpm {l/min} 35 {132} 40 {151} 45 {170} 55 {208}
Pressure @ nominal flow psi {bar} 15 {1.0} 18 {1.3} 23 {1.6} 28 {1.9}
A - Height 43 {1090}
B - Width 14 {355}
Depth 31.5 {800}
Weight lb {kg}
Operating 300 {136} 305 {138} 310 {141} 320 {145}
Shipping 470 {213} 475 {216} 480 {218} 490 {222}
Water connections NPT (female) inches
To / from Process 1.25
Cooling water inlet / outlet * 0.75
Total Full Load Amps per zone † ‡ HTR1-500

Voltage 208V 230V 460V 575V 208V 230V 460V 575V 208V 230V 460V 575V
Pump size
1 Hp {0.75 kW} 21.2 19.2 9.6 7.7 37.8 34.2 17.1 21.4 54.4 49.2 24.6 19.7
1.5 Hp {1.12 kW} 21.9 19.8 9.9 7.9 38.5 34.8 17.4 13.9 55.0 49.8 24.9 19.9
2 Hp {1.49 kW} 23.6 21.4 10.7 8.6 40.2 36.4 18.2 14.6 56.8 51.4 25.7 20.6
3 Hp {2.24 kW} 26.5 24.0 12 9.6 43.1 39.0 19.5 15.6 59.7 54.0 27.0 21.6
* For units equipped with optional heat exchange cooling circuit.

†
All voltages are 3 phase, 60 Hz.
‡

H-22
TPHX043-0317 PORTABLE CHILLER%03%2)%3
Precise Temperature
Control; Compact Footprint
The Conair EP1 Series Portable Chillers are designed for 1 to
3 ton applications. Available as air-cooled or water-cooled,
with pump sizes from 1/4 to 3 Hp {0.2 to 2.2 kW} for air-cooled
units, and 1 to 3 Hp {0.7 to 2.2 kW} for water-cooled units, the
EP1 Series boasts nonferrous construction (evaporator, pump,
reservoir and piping) to resist corrosion, a compact footprint
with easy-to-access interior, and a control that provides precise
temperature control along with extensive diagnostics.
-ODEL%0!
(air-cooled, 1 ton capacity)
Quality Construction; Reliable Operation
With more standard features than the

competition, the EP1 Series Portable Chillers ` $EPENDABLECHILLERPERFORMANCE
are designed for indoor use in industrial Designed with a comprehensive group of built-in protective features, the EP1
manufacturing locations. assures dependable performance with minimum downtime. A 2.5 minute anti-
cycle timer prevents excessive compressor cycling. A low-load thermostat extends
Both water-cooled and air-cooled units ship operating time at idle and low-load conditions and a non-cycling low pressure switch
with a full refrigerant charge, eliminating specifically designed for portable chillers helps protect the compressor from damage
the need for charging before operation. This and unnecessary wear.
saves time and money, right out of the box.
Units with a remote air-cooled condenser ship ` -ORESTANDARDFEATURES
with a nitrogen charge. The EP1 Series Portable Chillers come equipped with standard features that other
manufacturers would offer as options. Features which guarantee long life, simple
All EP1 Chillers are manufactured using operation, and quality end results are included as standard with this series.
painted, heavy-gauge steel to form a cabinet
with tool-free access. ` %NERGYEFFICIENT
Constructed with the energy efficient and reliable rotary compressor (1 ton unit)
Conair’s innovative microprocessor control and the energy efficient and industrial scroll compressor (2 and 3 ton units), these
system is designed specifically for portable compact chillers save you money by saving energy.
chiller applications. The easy-to-use operator
panel utilizes a four-plug wiring design which ` %XTENSIVEWARRANTY
allows the entire control board to be replaced In addition to Conair’s standard one year parts and labor warranty, the EP1 comes
in minutes. with a five year parts warranty for the microprocessor, and a lifetime $175 exchange
policy after the initial five year warranty period.
H-23
Control Features
3TANDARDCONTROLFEATURES
• Two easy-to-read LED digital displays show “Actual” and
“Setpoint” temperatures
• Manual reset of safeties from front panel eliminates need to
open chiller cabinet
• Thirty minute deviation delay stops nuisance alarms during
start-up and setpoint changes
• Compressor cycling delay prevents short cycling
• PID control program algorithm provides ± 1°F / °C accuracy
• High/low temperature deviation alarm
• Power failure indicator signals brown out
• Easily switches between °F and °C readouts
• Low-flow protection
• Diagnostic lights that indicate: no flow, high and low
refrigerant pressure, freezestat, over and under setpoint,
pump on, compressor on, partial load, probe fault and
optional low water level and water make-up
/PTIONALCONTROLFEATURES
• Hand-held, remote control operator panel
• SPI communications
• Audible alarm
• “From Process” temperature readout
• Remote alarm contacts
• Remote on/off contacts
High Quality Electrical Components

All Conair EP1 Series Portable Chillers come standard with
a NEMA 1 electrical enclosure to protect the microprocessor
and chiller wiring. High quality electrical components meet
IEC electrical standards and are fully tested before shipping.
Disconnect switches, C-UL 508A industrial control panel are
affordable options.
H-24
Features
01
03
Stainless steel brazed plate evaporator provides
high efficiency heat transfer
02
Insulated polyethylene reservoir with removable
cover
01 03
04 02 Water-cooled units have cleanable shell-and-tube
condensers and a water regulating valve for head
pressure control
04
Efficient and reliable one ton rotary compressor or
05 two and three ton scroll compressors
05
Process pump with pressure gauge
)NTERNALVIEWOFTHE%07
-ECHANICALFEATURES %LECTRICALFEATURES
• Electronic hot gas bypass for stable capacity control • Compressor, pump and condenser fan starters mounted and
• Air-cooled units have copper tube / aluminum finned condensers wired to motors
and includes air inlet filter (optional on-one-ton unit) • Single-point main power block for simple wiring connection
• Remote condenser units include a galvanized steel remote • Freezestat safety switch with solid state sensor
condenser with fans and copper tube / aluminum fin coils with a • Encapsulated high and low refrigerant pressure safeties
nitrogen holding charge
• Pressure or flow switch interlocked with compressor
/THERFEATURES
• Nonferrous construction of evaporator, pump, reservoir and piping • Hot gas bypass provides accurate capacity control and extends
to resist corrosion compressor life
• Microprocessor controller to provide diagnostic and accurate • Process Y-strainer protects the evaporator from contaminants in
temperature control the water
• Air-cooled condenser is generously sized for ambient • External sight glass, fill connection and drain connection
temperatures up to 115°F {46°C} • Smaller footprint that takes up less floor space
• Internal insulated polyethylene reservoir comes with large • Easily removable side panels allow quick access to interior
capacity and a removable top components
• Condenser fan discharges air quietly through the top of the unit
H-25
Pump Curves
Water temperature at 50F {10 C}
%03ERIES0UMP#URVES(Z
Flow (l/min)
0 20 40 60 80
70 160
¼ Hp positive displacement pump (EP1A-01)
140
60
120
50
2 Hp, 2-stage
100
40 3 Hp
Pressure (psi)
Pressure (ft)
80
2 Hp
30
60
1 Hp
20
40
10
20
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Flow (gpm)
Pump availability: 0.25 Hp {0.19 kW} standard for 1.0 ton; 1 Hp {0.75 kW} standard for 2 and 3 ton; 2 Hp, 2 Hp {1.49 kW} 2-stage and 3 Hp {2.24 kW}
optional for 2 and 3 ton.
Pump curves do not reflect pressure drops due to internal piping.
These pump curves are non-overloading using the service factor of the motors.
Specifications may change without notice. Check with your Conair representative for the most current information.
H-26
Specifications
!IRCOOLED
1/2 inch FPT

Pump pressure
water make-up
gauge
(option)
1 inch FPT chilled 1 inch FPT chilled

! water supply water return
Water level
sight glass
# "
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW 2EARVIEW

(EP1A) (EP1A) (EP1A)
7ATERCOOLEDREMOTECONDENSERINDOORUNIT
1/2 inch FPT
Pump pressure
water make-up
gauge
(option)
1 inch FPT condenser

water out
1 inch FPT chilled
! water supply
1 in. FPT condenser
water in
Water level
sight glass 1 inch FPT chilled
water return
# "

(EP1W and EP1R) (EP1W and EP1R) (EP1W and EP1R)
2EMOTECONDENSEROUTDOORUNIT
1/2 inch FPT
Pump pressure
water make-up
gauge
(option)
7/8 inch discharge

line
1 inch FPT chilled
water supply
!
7/8 inch liquid line
Water level
sight glass 1 inch FPT chilled
water return
" # "

(EP1W and EP1R) (EP1W and EP1R) (EP1W and EP1R)
H-27
Specifications
%02 %02
-ODELS %0! %0! %0! %07 %07
(Indoor unit)‡ (Outdoor unit)‡
#ONDENSER !IRCOOLED 7ATERCOOLED 2EMOTE
Cooling capacity tons* 1.0 2.0 3.0 2.2 3.3 3.0 N/A
Setpoint range °F {°C} † 20 to 65 {-7 to 18} N/A
Refrigerant R407C
Air flow ft3/min 1110 1585 2470 N/A 6750
Condensed water flow gpm {l/min} N/A 7 {27} 10 {38} N/A
Reservoir holding capacity gal. {l} 3 {11} 11 {42} N/A
Condenser fan Hp {kW} N/A 0.50 {0.40}
0UMPPERFORMANCE
Pump motor size Hp {kW} 0.25 {0.18} 1 {0.75} N/A
Pump flow gpm {l/min} 2 {7.5} 5 {18.9} 7 {26.4} 5 {18.9} 8 {30.2} 7 {26.5} N/A
Pump pressure psi {bar} 80 {5.5} 39 {2.68} 38 {2.62} 39 {2.68} 37 {2.55} 38 {2.6} N/A
A - Height 33.125 {841} 41.500 {1054} 36.625 {930} 41.440 {1053}
B - Width 18.625 {473} 24.000 {610} 38.750 {984}
C - Depth 27.625 {702} 39.625 {1006} 45.750 {1162}
6OLTAGESMCA
230/1 phase/60 Hz 11.8 N/A 3.0
230/3 phase/60 Hz N/A 17.0 21.5 15.4 18.9 N/A
460/3 phase/60 Hz N/A 9.0 11.9 8.2 10.6 N/A
575/3 phase/60 Hz N/A 7.2 9.6 6.6 8.5 N/A
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Shipping 255 {116} 420 {191} 430 {195} 420 {191} 430 {195} 565 {256}
* Based on the 50°F {10°C} water to the process, single pump selections, a maximum of 95°F {35°C} ambient air and 60 Hz. Adjust capacities up 2% per degree above 50°F
{10°C} to a maximum of 65°F {18°C}. Adjust capacities down 2% per degree below 50°F {10°C} to a minimum of 20°F {-7°C}. Capacities are ± 5% based on the compressor
manufacturer’s ratings and are subject to change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for other conditions. Capacities change depending on selected options.
†
Standard set point range is 20°F to 65°F {-7 to 18°C}. To extend range to 20°F to 80°F {-7 to 27°C} the CPR valve option is required.
‡
Remote condenser operation requires both indoor and outdoor unit.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the most current information.
How it Works
Optional return
process temperature
0ROCESSCIRCULATION
High pressure Guage
Y-strainer
From
Process fluid enters through the “From
switch Low pressure
HP switch Tank process process” connection to the reservoir tank.
LP Pump The pump draws water from the tank and
moves it through the evaporator. Fluid is
Compressor chilled and exits through the “To process”
Process fluid Make-up
FS connection.
flow switch water
Optional make-up
water solenoid 2EFRIGERANTCIRCULATION
valve
Air, water The evaporator extracts heat from the
or remote Evaporator
condenser
process fluid. Vaporized refrigerant travels
Bypass valve
Thermal Supply from the evaporator to the compressor,
expansion FZ process
valve temperature
where it is com-pressed. The high-pressure
To process vapor travels to the condenser. Air or water
Filter
removes heat from the vapor, condensing it
Hot gas bypass valve to liquid. This liquid is metered back to the
evaporator by the expansion valve (TXV).
H-28
TPHX046-0917 PORTABLE CHILLEREP2 SERIES
Outstanding Performance;
Application Flexibility
EP2 Series Portable Chillers are designed for 4 to 43 ton
applications. Units are available in air-cooled, water-cooled and
remote condensers models in a wide range of sizes.
Using quality components such as scroll compressors, micro-
channel condensers, low noise fans, stainless steel brazed plate
evaporators and sophisticated controls provide the best available
technologies for unmatched performance and reliability in a chiller
package. Integrated with R-410A non-ozone depleting refrigerant,
the EP2 series functions with the environment in mind.
Model EP2A-05
(air-cooled, 5 ton capacity)
Dependable, Easy-to-Use, Wide Size Range
The EP2 Series offers superior performance

and innovative technology in a dependable ` Available with optional touchscreen control
portable chiller package. The EP2 Series Portable Chillers come with a standard controller, with 19 operational
and diagnostic lights, or can be upgraded to include the new premium touchscreen
This series of chillers boasts the best controller with operational and diagnostic screens for easier diagnosis of faults. Both
components and technology available for the controls are easy to operate and completely sealed to protect against contamination
highest level of performance and flexibility from dirt or fluids.
to meet the needs of today’s industrial
manufacturing environment. ` More standard features
The EP2 models come equipped standard with features that other manufacturers
Designed for total efficiency, all air-cooled would offer as options, features that guarantee long life, simple operation and quality
models have tools-free removable door panels end-results.
for easy access to all components.
` Energy efficient
Conair’s EP2 air-cooled units also feature Reliable and energy efficient scroll compressors are used in every EP2 chiller. Units
high-efficiency, low noise fans with integral over 20 tons utilize compressor staging for reduced energy use. Save even more
condensers for reduced operating noise and energy with the variable speed compressors available on 10-ton and 20-ton Air-
increased efficiency. Also included as standard Cooled and Water-Cooled units! See the savings in the Payback section of this spec
are totally enclosed air over (TEAO) motors sheet. These Conair chillers save you money by saving energy.
that contribute to the long life of the chiller.
` Extensive warranty
In addition to Conair’s standard one year parts and labor warranty, the EP2 comes
with a five year parts warranty for the PLC controller and interface, and a lifetime $175
exchange policy after the initial five year warranty period (on the standard board).

H-29
Control Features
Standard control features: Optional control features:

• Start-to-start anti-cycle • Panasonic PLC with
timer prevents short- touchscreen interface
cycling of compressor for enhanced diagnostic
while minimizing off periods and operational display
capabilities
• Adjustable deviation
alarm timer delay to • Refrigeration pressure
prevent nuisance alarms transducers with sensor
during start-up fault alarms (with PLC)
• Setpoint ambient tracking
• Display temperatures easily
or remote control
switched from °F to °C
• Hand-held, remote control
• Display of compressor operator panel
and pump running hours
helps with maintenance • SPI, ModBus RTU,
scheduling BACnet, and LonWorks
communication capability
• 3-phase monitor protects
• Variable speed compressor
against unit damage due
(10 and 20 ton units)
to phase reversal or loss
of phase
• Master reset function to
restore factory defaults
Control Features
Our most advanced controller
option comes with a Panasonic
PLC that features operational
and diagnostic screens with
a touch screen interface.
Controller display screens
are easy to read and easy to
operate. This sophisticated
controller option guarantees
maximum chiller performance
and reliability.

H-
Features
01
Aluminum microchannel condensers for
easier maintenance and improved reliability
(air-cooled models)
04 02
01 Stainless steel brazed plate evaporator
provides higher heat transfer coefficients
due to reduced fouling
03
02
Y-strainer to protect evaporator from
contamination
03
04
Rotary non-fused disconnect switch
Mechanical features
• Stepper motor driven hot gas bypass for reliable and precise • Freezestat safety integrated into password protected menu to
temperature control reduce risk of tampering provides evaporator freeze-up protection
• Air-cooled units with generously sized air-cooled condensers • Encapsulated high and low refrigerant pressure safeties
designed for industrial environments and tested to 700 PSIG
• RTD temperature sensors yield higher precision and repeatability
{48 bar}. Includes air inlet filters. Condenser fan blade, motor,
than thermocouples
nozzle, and guard are a single piece assembly for improved
reliability. The fan motors have a rugged external rotor design • Nonferrous water circuit construction
with totally enclosed air over construction
• Stainless steel process pump with pressure gauge
• Water-cooled units use cleanable shell-and-tube water cooled
• Fail safe flow switch interlocked with compressor
condensers for industrial environments. Units are equipped with
condenser water regulating valve to provide constant head pressure • Internal valved bypass line to protect pump and evaporator
• Remote condenser units are designed with divided fan sections • Internal insulated polyethylene reservoir comes with large
which prevent “wind-milling” during fan cycling, that include capacity and a removable top
galvanized steel fan sections and coil baffles, copper tube /
• Smaller footprint takes up less floor space than chiller units from
aluminum fin coils tested to 650 PSIG {45 bar}, and direct drive
other manufacturers
multi-blade propeller fans with venture orifices to optimize efficiency
• Easily removable side panel allows for quick access to internal
• External sight glass / fill connection / drain connection components

H-
How it Works
High pressure
switch Low pressure Process fluid
Optional return
Process circulation: HP switch flow switch
process temperature
LP FS
Process fluid enters through the “From process” and enters Y-strainer
the evaporator. The process fluid is cooled in the evaporator Compressor

From
process
and is returned to the tank. The pump draws water from the Optional make-up
tank and delivers it to the “To Process” connection where it is water solenoid
valve
distributed to the process load(s) and returned to the chiller.
Air, water Freezestat
Refrigerant circulation: or remote FZ
condenser
The evaporator extracts heat from the process fluid. Vaporized Thermal Evaporator
expansion Make-up
refrigerant travels from the evaporator to the compressor, valve water
where it is compressed. The high-pressure vapor travels to Filter
L
Level Tank
the condenser. Air or water removes heat from the vapor, switch
Hot gas bypass valve Bypass valve
condensing it to liquid. This liquid is metered back to the Supply
Guage
evaporator by the expansion valve (TXV). process Pump To process
temperature
Options
• Oversized pumps for increased process • Wide temperature condenser air range • High pressure variable-speed fans for
fluid flows and/or pressures (0°F to 122°F) air-cooled condenser chillers for ducting of
• High flow unit design for reduced internal • Remote air-cooled condenser coil coating discharge air
pressure loss at higher processes fluid flows for installations near coastal regions • Modbus RTU, BACnet, LonWorks, or SPI
• Alarm horn • Pump and tank deduct for applications that communications ports
• Alarm relay do not require the standard internal pump • 4 to 20 mA cooling supply temperature
and tank retransmit
• Rotary non-fused or fused disconnection
switch • Oversized reservoirs • Emergency stop button to provide a quick
• Water circuit designed for use with means of stopping the chiller
• C-UL508A industrial control panel
construction de-ionized water • Hand-held remote controller with 50 foot
• Stainless steel cabinetry for special wire to duplicate unit mounted controls
• Extended condenser air range (0°F to 110°F)
applications such as food processing plants • Special color paint for applications requiring
• High temperature condenser air range
• Automatic electric water make-up valve the chiller match the color of other
(60°F to 122°F)
for applications requiring automatic fluid equipment
• Low temperature condenser air range
make-up
(-20°F to 110°F)
Optional PLC Controller with 7-inch Touchscreen HMI

• PLC with touchscreen interface for enhanced diagnostic and
operational display capabilities
• Refrigeration pressure transducers with fault alarms
(requires PLC option)
• Process flow meter with digital flow display on the
touchscreen interface (requires PLC option)
• Set point ambient tracking or remote control for specialize
process applications
• 3-way water temperature control valve for isolation heat
exchangers (requires PLC option)

H-
Options
Variable-Speed Scroll Compressors (10 and 20 ton Water-Cooled and Air-Cooled chillers only)
Industrial portable chillers operate in a variety of applications with This works well to keep the compressor running and ready for any
process heat loads frequently less than 100% of available capacity. fluctuations in the actual process load; however, it runs the compressor
With increasing emphasis on energy efficiency and reduced operating at full speed all the time.
costs, we developed a variable-speed scroll compressor option to help
Our variable-speed scroll compressor technology varies the
improve the efficiency of our industrial portable chillers.
compressor speed to match the process load. By automatically
Most portable chillers use fixed-speed scroll compressors with hot adjusting the compressor speed, the chiller works only as hard as
gas bypass to provide capacity and temperature control. This valve necessary to provide optimum performance with significantly reduced
bypasses a portion of the hot discharge refrigerant gas back into the power use.
compressor to give the compressor a simulated 100% load situation.
Payback
10-Ton Air-Cooled Variable-Speed Compressor Option Payback (Years based on $0.10/kWHr power cost)
Hours/Year Process Load as Percent of Available Chiller Capacity

Based on 50 Weeks/Year 50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90%
4,000 hours/year
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.4 3.2 5.1
(16 hours/day, 5 days/week)
6,000 hours/year
0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.4
8,400 hours/year
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.5 2.4
20-Ton Air-Cooled Variable-Speed Compressor Option Payback (Years based on $0.10/kWHr power cost)
Hours/Year Process Load as Percent of Available Chiller Capacity

Based on 50 Weeks/Year 50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90%
4,000 hours/year
1.4 1.5 1.8 2.2 3.3 6.5
6,000 hours/year
0.9 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.2 4.4
8,400 hours/year
0.7 0.8 1.1 1.6 3.1
10 -Ton Chiller Energy Use 20 - Ton Chiller Energy Use 10 -Ton Chiller Energy Use
100% 100% 100%
90% 90% 90%

Power Use (% of Full Load Power)
80% 80%
80%
70%
70% 70%
Energy Savings
60%
60% 60%
50%
50% 50%
40%
40% 40%
Energy Savings
30%
30% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%
30%
30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% Load Percentage (% of Full Capacity)
Load Percentage (% of Full Capacity) Load Percentage (% of Full Capacity)
Fixed Speed Compressor (Hot Gas Bypass Capacity Control)
Fixed Speed Compressor (Hot Gas Bypass Capacity Control) Fixed Speed Compressor (Hot Gas Bypass Capacity Control) Digital Compressor (Digital Unloader Capacity Control)
Variable Speed Compressor (Variable Speed Capacity Control) Variable Speed Compressor (Variable Speed Capacity Control) Variable Speed Compressor (Variable Speed Capacity Control)

H-
Pump Curves
Water temperature at 50˚ F {10˚ C}
EP2 Series Pump Curves (60 Hz)

Flow (lpm)
120.0
110.0
100.0
5 Hp 2-stage
90.0
80.0
70.0
Pressure (bar)
60.0
50.0 3 Hp 2-stage
5 Hp
40.0 3 Hp
7½ Hp 10 Hp
30.0
2 Hp
1½ Hp
20.0
10.0
0.0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Flow (gpm)
Pump availability: 1-1/2 Hp {1.12 kW} pump standard for 4, 5, 8; 2 Hp {1.49 kW} pump standard for 10 and 13 ton units; 3 Hp {2.24 kW} pump standard for 15 ton units and
optional for 4, 5, 8, 10 and 13 ton units; 3 Hp {2.24 kW} 2-stage pump optional for 4 and 5 ton units; 5 Hp {3.73 kW} pump standard for 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 ton units and
optional for 8, 10, 13, 15 and 20 ton units; 5 Hp {3.73 kW} 2-stage pump optional for 4 and 5 ton units; 7-1/2 Hp {5.60 kW} pump optional for 8, 10, 13, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40
ton units; 10 Hp {7.46} pump optional for 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 ton units.
Pump curves do not reflect pressure drops due to internal piping.
Specifications may change without notice. Check with your Conair representative for the most current information.

H-
Specifications
Air cooled: EP2A-04, EP2A-05, EP2A-08, EP2A-10 and EP2A-13
B C C
Front view Rear view Side view Side view

(EP2A-04 and EP2A-05) (EP2A-08, EP2A-10 and EP2A-13)
Air cooled: EP2A-15 and EP2A-20
B C C

(EP2A-15) (EP2A-20)
Air cooled: EP2A-25 and EP2A-30
B C C

(EP2A-25) (EP2A-25)

H-
Specifications
Water cooled: EP2W-05, EP2W-08, EP2W-10 and EP2W-15
Remote condenser (indoor unit): EP2R-05, EP2R-08, EP2R-10 and EP2R-15
B C C

(EP2W-05 and EP2R-05) (EP2W-08, EP2W-10, EP2W-15, EP2R-08,
EP2R-10 and EP2R-15)
Water cooled: EP2W-20, EP2W-25, EP2W-30, EP2W-35 and EP2W-40

Remote condenser (indoor unit): EP2R-20, EP2R-25, EP2R-30, EP2R-35 and EP2R-40
B C
Front view Rear view Side view
Remote condenser (outdoor unit) : Used with models EP2R-05, EP2R-08,

EP2R-10,EP2R-15, EP2R-20, EP2R-25, EP2R-30, EP2R-35 and EP2R-40
B C
(EP2R-05 and EP2R-08)
Front view
C
(EP2R-10,EP2R-15 and EP2R-20)
C
C
Side view

H-
All specifications listed here reflect the standard product as configured with standard pump, evaporator, and hardware, and operating
Specifications at environmental levels as noted below. For a more detailed list of specifications for unique circumstances or including EP2 options,
refer to the Conair EP2 Product Data booklet, available on the Conair website or from your Conair representative.
Models EP2A-04 EP2A-05 EP2A-08 EP2A-10 EP2A-13 EP2A-15 EP2A-20 EP2A-25 EP2A-30
Condenser Air cooled
Cooling capacity tons* 4.4 5.1 7.8 11.0 12.5 14.9 20.9 25.6 30.6
Setpoint range °F {°C} 20 to 80 {-7 to 27}
Refrigerant R410A
Condenser Air flow ft3/min 4000 8000 10,450 18,000 20,000 24,000
Sound pressure dBA @ 1 meter† 73.8 74.0 75.8 76.2 82.2 84.4 85.9
Minimum unloaded capacity tons 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.7 3.1 3.6 4.8 6.0 7.2
Standard pump performance
Pump motor size Hp {kW} 1.5 {1.1} 2 {1.4} 3 {2.2} 5 {3.7}
Pump flow gpm {l/min} 11 {42} 12 {45} 19 {72} 27 {102} 30 {114} 36 {136} 48 {182} 60 {227} 72 {273}
Net pump pressure psi {bar}‡ 38 {2.6} 39 {2.6} 37 {2.5} 38 {2.6} 35 {2.4} 43 {2.9} 50 {3.4} 48 {3.3}
A - Height with standard fans 61 {1549} 94 {2388}
A - Height with high pressure fans N/A 63 {1600} 96 {2438}
B - Width 35 {889} 41 {1041}
C - Depth 48 {1219} 75 {1905} 87 {2210} 105 {2667}
Power requirements
MCA§ 460/3 phase/60 Hz 16 18 26 31 37 44 58 70 83
MOP§ 460/3 phase/60 Hz 25 30 45 60 70 80 100 125
Water requirements
Reservoir holding capacity gal {l} 11 {42} 22 {83} 40 {151} 50 {189} 67 {254}
Process connections (NPT) inches 1.5 2.0
Weight lb {kg}
Shipping 720 {327} 1195 {542} 1215 {551} 3200 {1451} 3300 {1497} 3800 {1724} 4150 {1882}
Models EP2W-05 EP2W-08 EP2W-10 EP2W-15 EP2W-20 EP2W-25 EP2W-30 EP2W-35 EP2W-40
Condenser Water cooled
Cooling capacity tons* 5.5 8.1 12.0 16.5 22.6 28.1 33.3 38.9 43.4
Refrigerant R410A
Condenser water flow gpm {l/min} 17 {64} 24 {91} 36 {136} 48 {182} 65 {246} 82 {310} 96 {363} 111 {420} 124 {469}
Sound pressure dBA @ 1 meter 69.8 70.3 71.3 73.3 73.7 74.7 76.6 78.1
Pump motor size Hp {kW} 1.5 {1.1} 2 {1.4} 3 {2.2} 5 {3.7}
Net pump pressure psi {bar}‡ 37 {2.5} 36 {2.5} 35 {2.4} 40 {2.7} 45 {3.1} 46 {3.1} 44 {3.0} 41 {2.8} 38 {2.6}
A - Height 54 {1372} 47 {1194}
B - Width 35 {889} 41 {1041}
C - Depth 48 {1219} 75 {1905} 87 {2210} 105 {2667}
Power requirements
MCA§ 460/3 phase/60 Hz 16 23 28 40 49 61 69 74 78
MOP§ 460/3 phase/60 Hz 30 40 50 70 90 100 110
Water requirements
Reservoir holding capacity gal {l} 11 {41.6} 22 {83} 50 {189} 67 {254}
Process connections (NPT) inch 1.5 2.0 2.5
Condenser connections (NPT) inch 1.5 2.5 3.0
Weight lb {kg}
Shipping 720 {327} 1195 {542} 1315 {596} 1900 {862} 2100 {953} 2250 {1021} 3400 {1542} 3900 {1769}
§
* Cooling tons based on 12,000 BTUH with 50˚F {10˚C} leaving coolant and 85˚F {˚C} MCA is Minimum Circuit Amps with standard condenser fan(s) and pump under full
condenser water. load, used for minimum wire size requirement.
† §
Sound power shown is for standard high-efficiency constant speed AC fan motors. A MOP is Maximum Overcurrent Protection with standard condenser fans(s) and pump,
high pressure varibale speed EC motor fan option is available for EP2A and larger units. used for sizing main power protection devices.
‡
Net available pressure at outlet of chiller is pump discharge pressure less the internal Standard units are design for 5K SCCR (short circuit current rating) RMS
pressure loss through the fluid circuit. symmetrical amps.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the

H-
All specifications listed here reflect the standard product as configured with standard pump, evaporator, and hardware, and operating
Specifications at environmental levels as noted below. For a more detailed list of specifications for unique circumstances or including EP2 options,
refer to the Conair EP2 Product Data booklet, available on the Conair website or from your Conair representative.
Models* (indoor unit) EP2R-05 EP2R-08 EP2R-10 EP2R-15 EP2R-20 EP2R-25 EP2R-30 EP2R-35 EP2R-40
Condenser Remote air cooled
Cooling capacity tons† 5.3 7.6 11.0 15.3 20.8 25.8 30.7 35.5 39.9
Refrigerant R410A
Sound pressure dBA @ 1 meter 69.8 70.3 71.3 73.3 73.7 74.7 76.6 78.1
Pump motor size Hp {kW} 1.5 {1.1} 3 {2.2} 5 {3.7}
Net pump pressure psi {bar}‡ 35 {2.4} 36 {2.5} 30 {2.1} 48 {182} 39 {2.7} 57 {3.9} 54 {3.7} 53 {3.7} 50 {3.4}
A - Height 54 {1372} 47 {1194}
B - Width 35 {889} 41 {1041}
C - Depth 48 {1219} 75 {1905} 87 {2210} 105 {2667}
Power requirements
MCA§ 460/3 phase/60 Hz 16 23 28 40 49 61 69 74 78
MOP§ 460/3 phase/60 Hz 30 40 50 70 90 100 110
Water Requirements
Reservoir holding capacity gal {l} 11 {41.6} 22 {83} 50 {189} 67 {254}
Process connections (NPT) inches 1.5 2 2.5
Refrigerant liquid line size in inch 0.625 0.875 1.125 1.375
Refrigerant discharge line size in inch 0.625 0.875 1.125 1.375
Weight lb {kg}
Shipping 720 {327} 1195 {542} 1315 {596} 1900 {862} 2100 {953} 2250 {1021} 3400 {1542} 3900 {1769}
Models* (outdoor unit) EP2R-05 EP2R-08 EP2R-10 EP2R-15 EP2R-20 EP2R-25 EP2R-30 EP2R-35 EP2R-40
Condenser Remote condenser
Condenser air flow ft3/min 6870 6620 14400 24000 22600 20600 33900 32000 30900
Sound pressure dBA @ 3 meters 60.0 62.0 72.0 73.0
A - Height 48.125 {1222} 54 {1372}
B - Width 43.625 {1108} 45.625 {1159}
C - Depth 53.625 {1362} 93.625 {2378} 125.750 {3194} 180.750 {4591}
Power requirements **
MCA§ 460/3 phase/60 Hz 1.4 2.6 7 10.1
MOP§ 460/3 phase/60 Hz 15
Water Requirements
Refrigerant liquid line size in inch 0.875 1.375 2.125 2.625
Refrigerant discharge line size in inch 1.125 1.375 1.625 2.625
Weight lb {kg}
Shipping 245 {111} 265 {120} 415 {188} 680 {308} 720 {327} 1050 {476} 1075 {488} 1175 {533} 1450 {658}
§
* Remote condenser operation requires both indoor and outdoor unit. MOP is Maximum Overcurrent Protection with standard pump, used for sizing main
†
Cooling tons based on 12,000 BTUH with 50˚F {10˚C} leaving water temp. power protection devices. Standard units are design for 5K SCCR (short circuit
and 95˚F {32˚C} ambient air temperature. current rating) RMS symmetrical amps.
**
‡
Net available pressure at outlet of chiller is pump discharge pressure less internal Condenser power requirements may require two independent wiring drops for dual
coolant circuit pressure losses. refrigerant circuit systems. Check condenser installation manual for specific wiring
§
requirements before installation.
MCA is Minimum Circuit Amps with standard pump under full load, used for
Specifications may change without notice. Consult a Conair representative for the most
minimum wire size requirement.

H-
TPHX045-0317 COOLING TOWERS%&3%2)%3&/2#%$$2!&4-/$%,3n4/4/.3
High-Efficiency,
Budget-Friendly Cooling
Conair’s E1F Series Cooling Towers are lightweight fiberglass
towers designed for corrosion resistance, low maintenance, and
efficient operation at a competitive price.
These towers are carefully engineered and manufactured with

the optimum combination of heat transfer media, uniform air
flow, and even water distribution to minimize operating costs.
Conair’s E1F Series induced draft, counterflow towers are rust-

proof, not just rust-protected.
-ODEL%&
(with optional
ladder)
Rugged, Consistent, Efficient Operation
Conair cooling towers pay for themselves by

recirculating process cooling water, which ` 2UST FREEDESIGN
saves water costs and sewer taxes. Fiberglass tower casing, basin and air inlet louvers have a smooth exterior gel-coat
with UV inhibitors. Galvanized steel supports and stainless steel fasteners prevent rust.
Hot water enters at the top and is sprayed
` #OSTSLESSTOINSTALL
over a continuous coil of angle-baffle PVC
The main casing and basin ship fully-assembled. To prevent shipping damage, the
decking. Air flowing upward from the base
fan motor, fan blade and sprinkler head assembly ship uninstalled requiring
removes the heat through evaporation. The
only minor field assembly to complete tower installation.
spiral decking design extends the water’s
travel path and exposure to air, increasing the ` 3IMPLEINLETOUTLETCONNECTIONS
heat transfer area for efficient cooling. The E1F features single-point inlet water connections. Choose the optional side outlet
with make-up float valve, or the standard bottom outlet for use with remote tanks and
All water connections, the water distribution sumps. Drain and overflow connections are included.
system and the wet decking are made of PVC
to eliminate corrosion and resist rot, decay ` !PPLICATIONSPECIFICOPTIONS
and biological attack. Conair has a variety of options for your specific application. A structural steel base
and legs can be purchased for quick installation. A mechanical float make-up
The adjustable pitch cast aluminum fan valve maintains water level for optimum performance. A basin heater is ideal
blades allow for energy-efficient operation. for colder locations. An equalization connection for connecting several tower basins
equalizes basin water levels by letting cooled water flow between basins. A stainless
Options include: basin heater, fan thermostat, steel sprinkler head is available.
mechanical float make-up valve, vibration
switch, structural steel mounting base and ` YEARSHELLWARRANTY
mounting legs. We warrant the fiberglass shell and basin against material defects and workmanship
for ten years. The remainder of the tower has a one year parts warranty.
H-39
TPHX045-0317 COOLING TOWERS%&3%2)%3&/2#%$$2!&4-/$%,3n4/4/.3
Features
01 05 05
01
Durable fiberglass shell resists Totally enclosed fan motor.
corrosion and harsh weather 06
conditions. 06
02 Direct-drive cast aluminum or
polypropylene fan, angled for 02
Convenient sight glass for optimal air movement.
inspection of internal features or 07
for maintenance. 07
03
03 Self-rotating, nonferrous water
08
Optional ladder for easy access to distribution system with no-clog
the motor and fan. openings.
08 04
04
Detachable fiberglass inlet louvers PVC fill media maximizing air/
making it easy to clean and inspect water contact which optimizes
the basin. heat transfer.
Specifications
-ODEL %& %& %& %& %&
Tower capacity tons* 38 60 80 100 120
Sump capacity gallons {liters} 105 {397} 162 {613} 183 {693} 190 {719} 198 {750}
Blower motor Hp {kW} 2.0 {1.49} 3.0 {2.24} 5.0 {3.73}
A - Total height 84 {2134} 92 {2337} 109 {2769} 115 {2921}
Diameter 75 {1905} 84 {2134} 95 {2413} !
Shipping (dry) 600 {272} 750 {340} 1250 {567} 1300 {590} 1400 {635}
Operating 1475 {669} 2100 {953} 2780 {1261} 2890 {1311} 3050 {1383}
6OLTAGEfull load amps p
230v/3 phase/60 Hz 8.0 10.0 12.0 16.0
460v/3 phase/60 Hz 4.0 5.0 6.0 8.0
#ONNECTIONSNPT inches &RONTVIEW
Water inlet / outlet 3.0 4.0 5.0
Drain 2.0
Make-up water 0.75 1.0
Overflow 1.0
7ATERREQUIREMENTS
Minimum inlet pressure psi {bar} 3.0 {0.20} 5.0 {0.34}
Maximum flow rate gpm {l/min} 200 {750} 340 {1285} 500 {1890}
Maximum inlet temperature °F {°C} 110 {43}
‡
* Cooling tower tons are based on 15,000 BTU/Hr/ton with 95°F {35°C} entering water FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
temperature, 85°F {29°C} leaving water, 78°F {26°C} ambient wet bulb temperature on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
and 3.0 gpm/ton water flow except note below. systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and
†
the nameplate applied to the machine.
Maximum gpm for tower.
H-40
TPHX044-0317 COOLING TOWERS%&3%2)%3n4/4/.3
Light Weight
Maintenance-Free
Fiberglass Construction
An ideal and cost-efficient alternative to metal cooling towers,
the fiberglass Conair E2F Series Cooling Tower is available for
applications ranging from 100 to 240 tons. The E2F Series is
designed for outdoor use in industrial manufacturing locations.
All water connections, the water distribution system, and the

cellular fill are made to resist rot, decay, and biological attack.
No on-site construction or fabrication is necessary because the

entire tower is delivered in one piece. The fan and motor are -ODEL%&
shipped separately to prevent shipping damage.
Remarkable Features; Corrosion-Resistant
The E2F Series Cooling Towers were designed

to be environmentally friendly and virtually ` $ESIGNEDTOPERFORMANDKEEPPERFORMING
maintenance free. Fiberglass tower casing, basin, and air inlet louvers have a smooth exterior gel coat
with UV inhibitors. E2F Series towers are built using completely non-ferrous materials.
Evaporative cooling systems have long caused Large, non-clogging ABS nozzles are used to uniformly distribute water across all fill
problems with corrosion, scale, heavy metals surfaces. Adjustable pitch, high efficiency, fiberglass reinforced polypropylene fan
and acid feeds (used to control pH levels in blades with a cast aluminum alloy fan hub and a heavy duty TEAO (Totally Enclosed Air
cooling water) that damage system equipment Over Motor) fan motor with permanently lubricated motor bearings promise longevity
and performance.
and result in environmentally unacceptable
discharge levels. As a matter of fact, any ` &URTHERIMPROVETHEPERFORMANCE
time galvanized metal comes in contact with Pre-engineered options designed exclusively for this series further improve
cooling water, problems can arise. the performance of the tower for specific applications. The outlet strainer can
be upgraded to stainless steel. Inlet and outlet flanges can be added for quick
The E2F Series cooling towers provide peace connections. A structural steel base and legs can be purchased for quick installation.
of mind because Conair has eliminated these An optional thermostat saves energy and provides a constant, stable water
problems by excluding galvanized metal temperature. A water make-up float valve assembly maintains consistent water level
from the system. All fasteners are made of for maximum performance. A basin heater package is ideal for colder locations. An
high quality 304 stainless steel. The tower equalization connection for connecting several tower basins equalizes basin water
shell is fiber-reinforced plastic (FRP) with UV levels by letting cooled water flow between basins.
inhibitors. PVC is used for fill, drift eliminators,
and inlet louvers. Schedule 40 PVC is used for ` YEARSHELLWARRANTY
A Conair cooling tower installation assures peace-of-mind. We warrant the fiberglass
the water distribution system.
shell and basin against material defects and workmanship for ten years. The
remainder of the tower has one year parts warranty.
H-41
Features
01 05
Durable fiberglass shell Totally enclosed fan motor 05
resists corrosion and harsh with bearings that are
weather conditions. permanently lubricated and
02 require no maintenance. 01
Access door to the tower 06 06

interior with stainless steel PVC water distribution system
fasteners. includes large non-clogging
03 nozzles that efficiently and 02
uniformly distribute water
Louvers made of durable PVC across all fill surfaces.
that are designed to eliminate
possible back splash and 07 07
are removable to allow full
PVC fill media maximizing
access to basin. 03
air / water contact which
04 optimizes heat transfer.
Leak-proof, one piece basin 04 08
08
that can be mounted on two
I-beams or optional structural Optional inlet and outlet
steel base. flanges.
Options
• Stainless steel outlet strainer can be used to provide system • Basin heater package prevents the water in the basin from freezing
filtration when the basin of the tower is used as a reservoir. in applications where the basin is used as a reservoir.
• A pre-assembled, painted structural steel base makes tower • Equalization connection creates a system reservoir by connecting
installation quick and easy. The base is designed to be mounted on several tower basins. Piping equalizes basin water levels by letting
four support points and available with legs up to 20 feet {6 meters} cooled water flow between the basins.
long and appropriate cross bracing.
• Water make-up float valve assembly can be used in applications
• NEMA 3R thermostat saves energy and provides stable supply where a tower basin acts as an integral reservoir. The float valve
water temperature by shutting off power to the fan motor when the assembly monitors the water level in the basin, adding water when
water in the basin drops below a set temperature. necessary to maintain a consistent level ensuring maximum system
performance.
• Flanges can be supplied on both inlet and outlet connections for
quick mating with plant piping. • A high temperature option allows for the tower to be operated at
inlet water temperatures up to 150°F {66°C}.
H-42
Specifications
-ODELS%& %& %& AND%&
"
" #
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW 4OPVIEW
-ODEL %& %& %& %& 7ATER&LOW
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS 12
Tower capacity tons* 100 115 125 140

Sump capacity gallons {liters} 333 {1260} 10

$IMENSIONSinches {mm} 8
A - Height ‡ 122.75 {3118} 125.00 {3175} 128.25 {3258} )NLETPRESSUREPSI
B - Depth 90 {2286} 6
C - Width 114.5 {2908}

!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} 4
Shipping (dry) 1760 {799} 1910 {867} 2150 {975}

Operating 4535 {2057} 4685 {2125} 4925 {2234} 2

6OLTAGEfull load amps

230v/3 phase/60 Hz 12.0 18.0 24.0 0
460v/3 phase/60 Hz 6.0 9.0 12.0 150 250 350 450 550 650
#ONNECTIONSinches {mm} &LOW'0-
Water inlet 4 {120} PVC

Water outlet 8 {203} PVC
Drain connection 2 {51} FPT
7ATERREQUIREMENTS
Minimum inlet pressure psi {bar} 6.0 {0.41} 4.0 {0.28}
Maximum flow rate gpm {l/min} 600 {2270}
Maximum inlet temperature§ 110°F {43°C}
**
* Cooling tower tons are based on 15,000 BTU/Hr/ton with 95°F {35°C} entering water, FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
85°F {29°C} leaving water, 78°F {26°C} ambient wet bulb temperature and 3.0 gpm/ton on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
water flow except note below. systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
†
Maximum gpm for tower. applied to the machine.
‡
Height does not include the portion of the basin that extends beyond the bottom of the Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
basin. the most current information.
§
Optional high temperature maximum inlet temperature: 150°F {66°C}.
H-43
Specifications
-ODELS%& %& %& AND%&
"
" #
-ODEL %& %& %& %& 7ATER&LOW
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS 12
Tower capacity tons* 170 185 205 240

Sump capacity gallons {liters} 340 {1285} 10
)NLETPRESSUREPSI
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} 8
A - Height ‡ 124.5 {3162} 127.5 {3239}

B - Depth 100.5 {2553} 6
C - Width 139.5 {3543}

!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} 4
Shipping (dry) 2660 {1207} 2700 {1225} 2750 {1248}

Operating 5230 {2373} 5530 {2509} 5570 {2527} 2
230v/3 phase/60 Hz 24.0 34.0 48.0 0

300 400 500 600 700 800
460v/3 phase/60 Hz 12.0 17.0 24.0
&LOW'0-
#ONNECTIONSinches{mm}
Water inlet 2 x 4 {102} PVC
Water outlet 8 {203} PVC
Drain Connection 2 {51} FPT
7ATERREQUIREMENTS
Minimum inlet pressure psi {bar} 5.0 {0.34} 6.0 {0.41} 7.0 {0.48} 10.0 {0.69}
Maximum flow rate gpm {l/min} 725 {2740}
Maximum inlet temperature§ 110°F {43°C}
§
* Cooling tower tons are based on 15,000 BTU/Hr/ton with 95°F {35°C} entering water, Optional high temperature maximum inlet temperature: 150°F {66°C}.
85°F {29°C} leaving water, 78°F {26°C} ambient wet bulb temperature and 3.0 gpm/ton **
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
water flow except note below. on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
†
Maximum gpm for tower. systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate
‡
Height does not include the portion of the basin that extends beyond the bottom of the applied to the machine.
basin. Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
H-44
TPHX013-0317 COOLING TOWERS%3%2)%3).$5#%$$2!&4-/$%,3n4/4/.3
Efficient Cooling with

Minimum Maintenance
Conair’s E2 series induced draft, counterflow cooling towers
offer more cooling, but require less space and less maintenance.
From the rust-proof molded polyethylene tower shell to the

corrosion-resistant direct drive fan assembly, E2 towers contain
fewer components that could fail and hamper performance.
All water connections, the water distribution system and the

wetdecking are made of PVC to resist rot, decay and biological
attack.
-ODEL%
(with optional access ladder and
installation platform)
Less Water and Sewer Usage; Save Money
Conair cooling towers pay for themselves by

recirculating process cooling water, which ` %ASYINLETOUTLETCONNECTIONS
saves water costs and sewer taxes. Single-point inlet water connection. Choose the optional side outlet with make-up
float valve, or the standard bottom outlet for use with remote tanks and sumps.
A fixed PVC water distribution system sprays
hot water over a continuous coil of angled-
` 3EAMLESSRUST FREEDESIGN
baffle PVC decking. The spiral decking design
extends the water’s travel path and exposure Our one-piece MDPE tower shell will not rust, corrode, chip, crack or require
to air, increasing the heat transfer area for protective coating or painting. There are no seams, panels or rivets to fail or
efficient cooling. compromise performance. All fasteners are 304 stainless steel.
The fan draws air through inlet louver panels ` #OSTSLESSTOINSTALL

at the base, and then upward through the
Lightweight design reduces rigging and structural roof support requirements.
decking. Heat is removed when water
Everything is factory assembled for easy installation. Simply attach the fan assembly
evaporates from the multiple surfaces of the
to the tower, and hook up the water and electricity.
decking.
Options include: variable frequency drives on ` YEARWARRANTY

the fan motor to closely control temperature We’re so confident our molded polyethylene shell will not rust, chip or crack, we back
and save energy; an aluminum access ladder it with a 20-year warranty. We also warrant the totally enclosed, direct drive fan motor
with safety cage; and installation platform. for five years and provide a one-year parts and labor warranty on the entire tower.
H-45
Specifications
&AN-OTOR
"
OPTIONALLADDER !CCESS
IN[CM] ,IFTING COVER
LUG
#LEAN OUT
WALK THROUGH &ILL PORT
! IN[CM]
4OPVIEW /PTIONAL
,OUVER LADDER
PANELS
)NSTALLATION.OTES
The tower should be located no less than 5 feet -AKE UP
from a single solid wall, or not less than the
diameter of the tower from two intersecting walls. /PTIONAL
/VERFLOW
& The tower must be mounted on a flat rigid surface SIDEOUTLET
# % $ that is properly supported. All external piping must 7ATER $RAIN
be independently supported. The fan ring, where INLET
air is discharged, should be level or higher than the 3TANDARDBOTTOMOUTLET
3IDEVIEW wall or roof line.
-ODEL % % % % % % % % %

Tower capacity tons * 55 70 85 100 125 150 175 200 250
Sump capacity gallons {liters} 330 {1249} 468 {1772} 718 {2718}
Fan motor Hp {kW} 2 {1.49} 3 {2.24} 5 {3.73} 7.5 {5.59} 10 {7.45} 15 {11.18}
A - Total height 146 {371} 178 {452} 211 {535}
B - Diameter 84 {213} 95 {241} 114 {290}
C - Height to center of inlet 5.75 {14.6} 6.75 {17.1} 5.75 {14.6} 9.0 {22.9} 8.63 {21.9}
D - Height to center of outlet† 5.75 {14.6} 6.75 {17.1} 7.75 {19.6} 9.0 {22.9}
E - Height to center of drain 3.5 {8.9} 4.0 {10.2} 4.5 {11.4}
F - Height to center of overflow 19.0 {48.3} 20.5 {52.1} 22.0 {55.9}
G - Height to center of make-up 24.5 {62.2} 25 {63.5} 26.5 {67.3}
Shipping (dry) 1180 {535} 1250 {567} 1270 {576} 1510 {684} 1585 {719} 1785 {810} 1925 {873} 3170 {1438} 3365 {1526}
Operating‡ 3980 {1805} 4050 {1837} 4070 {1846} 4235 {1921} 4310 {1955} 5570 {2527} 5810 {2635} 8440 {3838} 8640 {3919}
Operating with remote sump/tank 1385 {628} 1455 {660} 1475 {669} 1715 {778} 1790 {812} 2020 {916} 2260 {1025} 2945 {1336} 3090 {1402}
208v/3 phase/60 Hz 7.3 12.2 19.4 19.4 25.0 33.0 48.0

230v/3 phase/60 Hz 6.6 11.0 16.8 16.8 22.0 29.0 42.0
400v/3 phase/50 Hz 3.9 5.5 8.7 8.5 11.3 15.2 21.7
460v/3 phase/60 Hz 3.3 5.5 8.4 8.4 11.0 14.5 21.0
575v/3 phase/60 Hz 2.4 3.2 5.5 5.5 8.0 10.5 16.3
#ONNECTIONSinches
Water inlet / outlet - Socket style 4.0 4.0 / 6.0 6.0 6.0 / 8.0
Make-up water - NPT 1.0
Overflow and drain - NPT 2.0 3.0
7ATERREQUIREMENTSe
Inlet pressure / temperature 7-10 psi {0.48-0.69 bars} / 140° F {60°C} maximum
§
* Based on 95°F {35°C} inlet water, 85°F {29°C} outlet water, and 78°F {26°C} Due to the unique design of the E2 Series Cooling Towers, customer specifications
entering wet bulb temperature and 3.0 gpm/ton of water flow. Consult factory for must include design flow requirements.
other conditions. 1 tower ton = 15,000 Btu/hr. ** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories
†
For the standard bottom outlet, the maximum opening in the support should be: on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
E2-55 to E2-175, 14 x 14 inches; E2-200 to E2-250, 19 x 19 inches. systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and
‡
Operating weights are based on the following water levels: E2-55 to E2-125, 14 the nameplate applied to the machine.
inches; E2-150 to E2-175, 15 inches; E2-200 to E2-250, 16 inches. Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
H-46
Efficient Cooling with

Minimum Maintenance
Conair’s E4 series induced draft, counterflow cooling towers offer
more cooling, but require less space and less maintenance.
From the rust-proof molded polyethylene tower shell to the

corrosion-resistant direct drive fan assembly, E4 towers contain
fewer components that could fail and hamper performance.
All water connections, the water distribution system and the cellular
fill are made of PVC to resist rot, decay and biological attack.
-ODEL%
(with optional top platform with hand rails)
Less Water and Sewer Usage; Save Money
Conair cooling towers recirculate process

cooling water, paying for themselves in ` %ASYINLETOUTLETCONNECTIONS
reduced water costs and sewer taxes. Single-point inlet water connection. Choose the optional side outlet with make-up
float valve, or the standard bottom outlet for use with remote tanks and sumps.
A fixed PVC water distribution system sprays
hot water over high-efficiency angled-baffle ` 3EAMLESSRUST FREEDESIGN
PVC cellular fill. The spiral fill design extends Our one-piece MDPE tower shell will not rust, corrode, chip, crack or require
the water’s travel path and exposure to air, protective coating or painting. There are no seams, panels or rivets to fail or
increasing the heat transfer area for efficient compromise performance. All fasteners are 304 stainless steel.
cooling.
` #OSTSLESSTOINSTALL
The fans draw air through inlet louver panels The lightweight design reduces rigging and structural roof support requirements.
at the base, and then upward through the fill. Everything, including the tower mounted base structure, is factory assembled for easy
Heat is removed when water on the multiple installation. Just lift the tower into place and hook up water and electricity.
surfaces of the fill evaporates.
` YEARWARRANTY
Options include: variable frequency drives on We’re so confident our molded polyethylene shell will not rust, chip or crack, we back
the fan motor to closely control temperature it with a 20-year warranty. We also warrant the totally enclosed, direct drive fan motor
and save energy; an aluminum access ladder for five years and provide a one-year parts and labor warranty on the entire tower.
with safety cage.
H-47
Specifications
&AN
MOTOR
!CCESS
COVER
! &ILL
%
3TANDARD
,OUVER BOTTOMOUTLET
PANELS /PTIONAL
SIDEOUTLET
"
-ODELS% TO% -ODELS% TO%
/PTIONALLADDER
AVAILABLE
7ATERINLET
%
/VERFLOW -AKE UP
$RAIN
# #
$ $
)NSTALLATION.OTES
For best performance, the tower must be installed in a location free from obstructions that may restrict airflow through the intake louvers or induce recirculation of discharge air.
All external piping must be independently supported. The fan ring, where air is discharged, should be level with or higher than the wall or roof line.
-ODEL % % % % % % % %

Tower capacity tons† 310 346 377 428 604 681 738 836 * Larger and other sizes of towers
Sump capacity gallons {liters} 480 {1817} 960 {3596} in this series are available, consult
Fan motor number x Hp {kW} 2 x 5 {3.73} 2 x 7.5 {5.59} 2 x 10 {7.45} 2 x 15 {11.2} 4 x 5 {3.7} 4 x 7.5 {5.6} 4 x 10 {7.5} 4 x 15 {11.2} factory.
†
$IMENSIONSinches {cm} Based on 95°F {35°C} inlet water,
A - Total height 186.0 {472} 85°F {29°C} outlet water, and
B - Total length 208.0 {528} 78°F {26°C} entering wet bulb
C - Mounting base length 64.56 {164} 2 x 64.56 {164} temperature and 3.0 gpm/ton of
water flow. Consult factory for
D - Total width 102.0 {259} 204.0 {518}
other conditions. 1 tower ton =
E - Height to inlet 131.5 {334} 15,000 Btu/hr.
Height to center of overflow 16.0 {41}
‡
Height to center of drain 5.25 {13} Due to the unique design of the
E4 Series Cooling Towers,
Height to center of make-up 28.0 {71} 16.0 {41}
customer specifications must
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} include design flow requirements.
Shipping (dry) 6400 {2903} 6500 {2948} 6600 {2994} 6700 {3039} 13000 {5897} 13100 {5942} 13200 {5988} 13300 {6033}
§
Operating with side outlet 12100 {5489} 12200 {5534} 12300 {5579} 12400 {5625} 24400 {11068} 24500 {11113} 24600 {11159} 24700 {11204}
FLA data for reference purposes
only. Does not include any options
Operating with remote sump/tank 8350 {3788} 8450 {3833} 8550 {3878} 8650 {3924} 16900 {7666} 17000 {7711} 17100 {7757} 17200 {7802}
or accessories on equipment. For
6OLTAGEfull load amps § full FLA detail for power circuit
208v/3 phase/60 Hz 33.2 48.7 70.8 97.3 66.3 97.3 141.5 194.6 design of specific machines and
230v/3 phase/60 Hz 30.0 44.0 64.0 88.0 60.0 88.0 128.0 176.0 systems, refer to the electrical
400v/3 phase/50 Hz 17.3 25.3 36.8 50.6 34.5 50.6 73.6 101.2 diagrams of the equipment order
460v/3 phase/60 Hz 15.0 22.0 32.0 44.0 30.0 44.0 64.0 88.0 and the nameplate applied to the
575v/3 phase/60 Hz 15.0 22.0 32.0 44.0 30.0 44.0 64.0 88.0 machine.
#ONNECTIONSinches Specifications may change
Water inlet / outlet - Flanged 6.0 / 8.0 2 x 6.0 / 2 x 8.0 without notice. Consult with a
Make-up water - NPT 1.0 2 x 1.0 Conair representative for the most
Overflow and drain - NPT 4.0 2 x 4.0
7ATERREQUIREMENTSp
Inlet pressure psi {bars} 4.0 - 5.5 {0.28 - 0.38}
Max. inlet temperature °F {°C} 140 {60}
H-48
/ *8ä{äÈ£Ç COOLING SYSTEMS%!24(3-!244-!$)!"!4)#4/7%23
Water and
Energy Efficient
Adiabatic Cooling
Adiabatic cooling systems are ideal for processors with
concerns about their water supply and process water purity,
where conventional tower systems could put their process at
risk. The EarthSmartTM Adiabatic Tower (ESTW Series) design
provides efficient, easily managed heat control with less need
for maintenance than other systems. All this is accomplished
-ODEL%347
with smart motor technology and a simple fluid flow through the
system to bring temperatures down to the right level.
Resource-Efficient, Reliable Cooling
EarthSmart Adiabatic Towers cool process

fluids at an industrial scale while minimizing ` #LOSEDLOOPPURITYMINIMALWATERCONSUMPTION
the amount of energy and water that is The EarthSmartTM Towers circulate process fluid inside the tubes of the cooler coils
consumed. isolating it from ambient contamination. This fluid is cooled by circulating ambient air
across the coils. As air passes through the wetted pads, water is evaporated and the
air inside the unit is lowered to provide process fluid cooling.
Utilizing adiabatic wetted panels, mounted
outside of the cooling tower coil, process ` 3TRONGRESILIENTCOILDESIGN
fluids move efficiently through the tower coils Coils are supported independently of the frame, allowing for natural expansion and
without ever being exposed to ambient air, contraction which eliminates wear points and extends the lifespan of the coil.
contamination, or even evaporation. Conair
` 3MARTFANTECHNOLOGYSMOOTHANDQUIETOPERATION
units can cool up to 510 gallons per minute*
One piece fan and motor units provide powerful cooling performance and energy
while potentially saving millions of gallons of savings. Variable fan speed is automatically controlled to minimize energy use. Motor
water per year. repair switches allow fans to be individually serviced without stopping the process.
Options are available for epoxy coating, to ` ,ONG LIFEEASILYSERVICEDCOOLINGPANELS

protect machines in coastal areas, and motor Internal air temperature is cooled with a carefully moderated supply of water, while
repair switches, to allow fans to be serviced process fluids remain safely within the coils of the tower module. EarthSmart wetted
without stopping the process. media panels slide out easily for cleaning with no special tools required.
` )NTELLIGENT7ATER3AVING!DAPTIVE#ONTROLS
* Nominal flow rate of 35% Ethylene Glycol (35% EG) fluid
mixture by weight. Our new controls add industry best water conservation levels. Our sophisticated
controls precisely calculate the minimum amount of water needed to cool the
incoming warm air based on the dry air temperature, the wet bulb temperature, and
the actual process load. A modulating valve precisely controls water use for peak
performance.
H-49
How it works
01
&ROMPROCESSHOT !DIABATICPADS are kept cool by an

01 independent water supply which never
mixes with your process, to prevent
contamination.
02
!IRFLOWis managed by the cool
4OPROCESSCHILLED 02 adiabatic pads, keeping the unit’s interior
refrigerated, while the fans keep air
moving out of the machine as it warms.
The adiabatic design SAVESWATERANDENERGY by keeping the process fluid separate

from the water evaporated during the adiabatic process. By only utilizing the adiabatic
process when it is absolutely required during higher outdoor air temperatures, the unit
minimizes water consumption to fractions of traditional systems.
The reduction in compressor energy usage permits higher coefficients of performance,
with a significantly reduced energy footprint and cost to the operator.
Options
-OTORREPAIRSWITCHES %POXYCOATEDFINS
Provides a non-fused fan motor safety- An epoxy coating is applied to the fins
switch for each fan of a single row unit to protect them from damage in coastal
(ESTW-12 through ESTW-14) or one installations where the aluminum fins
for each pair of fans on a dual-row unit on standard units are prone to corrosion
(ESTW-22 through ESTW-29). Inside from the presence of salt in the air. This
the fluid cooler each fan of a single-row option is recommended if the fluid cooler
unit or each pair of fans on a double- is installed within five miles of a coastal
row unit are separated with an air area. The epoxy coating has a slight
deflector plate to allow a fan motor to insulating effect and the ability of the fins
be serviced without stopping the unit. to dissipate heat is slightly diminished
with approximately a 7% reduction in the
overall capacity of the unit.
H-50
Specifications
-ODEL%347 &RONTVIEW
-ODEL %347 %347 %347 -ODEL%347 SIDEVIEW
Nominal flow rate* gpm 45 70 105
†
Nominal tons 17 26 40
Coil design entering air temperature‡ °F {°C} 80.3 {26.8}
#
Fluid pressure drop PSI 5.3 7.6 9.8
Approximate internal water volume gallons {l} 15 {57} 22 {83} 30 {114}
Adiabatic full flow rate gpm 6.2 9.4 12.5
§
Noise level dBA 55 dB (A) 57 dB (A) 58 dB (A)
"
A - Length 1{3} 1 {4} 2 {5}
B - Width {1}
C - Height 6 {17}
* Nominal flow rate of 35% Ethylene Glycol (35% EG)
Number of legs 6 8 10 fluid mixture by weight.
†
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} Nominal Tons is heat rejection based on 35% EG
cooling fluid at Nominal Unit Flow Rate entering the
Shipping (dry) 1100 {499} 1600 {726} 2075 {941} unit at 95°F and leaving at 85°F with 95°F DB/77°F
WB ambient design conditions. Tons = 12,000
Operating 1225 {556} 1783 {809} 2325 {1055} BTUH.

%LECTRICALCHARACTERISTICS ‡
Coil Design Entering Air Temperature is the Dry
Bulb (DB) temperature entering the coil after the
Fans (quantity) Hp {kW} (2) 3 {2.2} (3) 3 {2.2} (4) 3 {2.2} adiabatic effect at 95°F DB/77°F WB ambient
200/3/60 MCA / MOP 17.4 / 30 25.1 / 35 32.8 / 45 design conditions. This would be the ambient DB
temperature at which adiabatic water usage is
230/3/60 MCA / MOP 17.4 / 30 25.1 / 35 32.8 / 45 required to produce the leaving water temperature
at design full load.
400/3/50 MCA / MOP 8.4 / 15 12.1 / 20 15.8 / 20
§
Noise Level dBA weighted at 32.8 ft.
460/3/60 MCA / MOP 8.4 / 15 12.1 / 20 15.8 / 20 **
MCA is Minimum Circuit Ampacity / MOP is
#ONNECTIONSinches {mm} Maximum Overcurrent Protection.
Inlet & outlet connection (quantity) (2) 1.37 {35} (2) 1.56 {41} (2) 2.12 {54} Specifications may change without notice. Consult
Adiabatic water inlet size 1 {25} information.
H-51
Specifications
-ODEL %347 %347 %347 %347 %347 %347 %347 %347
Nominal flow rate* gpm 107 165 210 280 290 333 400 510
†
Nominal tons 41 63 81 107 111 128 153 195
Coil design entering air temperature‡ °F {°C} 80.3 {26.8}
Fluid pressure drop PSI 4.3 5.4 4.0 7.2 9.2 2.3 3.6 6.9
Approximate internal water volume gallons {l} 50 {1270} 75 {1905} 100 {2540} 125 {3175} 150 {3810} 165 {4191} 190 {4826} 205 {5207}
Adiabatic full flow rate gpm 6.2 9.4 12.5 15.6 18.7 21.8 24.9 28.0
§
Noise level dBA 58 60 61 62 63 64
A - Length 14 {36} 19 {49} 24 {61} 29 {74} 34 {8} 39 {} 4 {1} 4 {12,}
B - Width {2]
C - Height 112 {2845}
Number of legs 4 6 8 10 8
Shipping (dry) 3350 {1520} 4650 {2109} 6250 {2835} 7760 {3520} 8375 {3799} 10400 {4717} 12160 {5516} 13225 {5999}
Operating 3767 {1709} 5276 {2393} 7084 {3213} 8803 {3993} 9626 {4366} 11776 {5342} 13745 {6235} 14935 {6774}

%LECTRICALCHARACTERISTICS
Fans (quantity) Hp {kW} (4) 3 {2.2} (6) 3 {2.2} (8) 3 {2.2} (10) 3 {2.2} (12) 3 {2.2} (14) 3 {2.2} (16) 3 {2.2} (18) 3 {2.2}
200/3/60 MCA / MOP 32.8 / 45 48.3 / 60 63.6 / 80 79.0 / 90 94.4 / 110 109.8 / 125 125.2 / 140 140.5 / 175
230/3/60 MCA / MOP 32.8 / 45 48.3 / 60 63.6 / 80 79.0 / 90 94.4 / 110 109.8 / 125 125.2 / 140 140.5 / 175
400/3/50 MCA / MOP 15.8 / 20 23.2 / 30 30.6 / 35 38.0 / 45 45.34 / 50 52.8 / 60 60.2 / 70 67.6 / 80
460/3/60 MCA / MOP 15.8 / 20 23.2 / 30 30.6 / 35 38.0 / 45 45.34 / 50 52.8 / 60 60.2 / 70 67.6 / 80
#ONNECTIONSinches {mm}
Inlet & outlet connection (quantity) (2) 2.12 {54} (2) 2.62 {67} (2) 3.12 {79} (2) 3.62 {92} (2) 4.12 {105} (2) 4.12 {105}
Adiabatic water inlet size 1 {25} 1.5 {38}
* Nominal flow rate of 35% Ethylene Glycol (35% EG) fluid mixture by weight.
†
Nominal Tons is heat rejection based on 35% EG cooling fluid at Nominal Unit Flow Rate entering the unit at 95°F and leaving at 85°F with 95°F DB/77°F WB ambient design
conditions. Tons = 12,000 BTUH.
‡
Coil Design Entering Air Temperature is the Dry Bulb (DB) temperature entering the coil after the adiabatic effect at 95°F DB/77°F WB ambient design conditions. This would be the
ambient DB temperature at which adiabatic water usage is required to produce the leaving water temperature at design full load.
§
Noise Level dBA weighted at 32.8 ft.
**
MCA is Minimum Circuit Ampacity / MOP is Maximum Overcurrent Protection.
H-52
TPHX027-0317 CENTRAL CHILLERS !)2 #//,%$-/$%,3%3! 4/%3!
Year-Round Chilling
With Precise Control
Engineered to meet the most demanding job schedules, these
chillers are ideal for plastic processors. Units are self-contained
and easy to install and maintain. The modular microprocessor
control coordinates the actions of the chillers and provides
stand-alone operation of the unit. The small size, convenient
lifting and complete wiring allow fast, easy integration into your
central cooling system.
Nominal Capacity from 22 Tons to 136 Tons
The Conair air-cooled central chillers are totally

self-contained for easy, economical installation ` 3TATE OF THE ARTPRECISIONCONTROL
and use. These chillers are designed for year- The up-front, easy-to-use control is the brain of the chiller. PLC displays process status
round applications in ambient conditions from information as well as lets you make quick setting changes. Control uses common
0°F to 125°F {-18°C to 52°C}. English language interface and no symbols or codes.
Made of high strength cast iron, the scroll ` #USTOMIZEDTOFITYOURNEEDS

compressor is designed for less thermal Choose sizes, capacities and horsepower; Conair has the chiller to match your process.
Pick capacities from 22 tons up to 136 tons.
distortion, less leakage, and higher
efficiencies. ` 3IMPLECOMPRESSORDESIGN
The scroll compressor has 70% fewer parts than an equal capacity reciprocating
The air-cooled chillers automatically shut down
compressor, eliminating the need for pistons, connecting rods, wrist pins and valves.
during a loss of flow to protect the evaporator
Fewer moving parts mean less internal friction and greater efficiency.
from freezing.
` h3MARTvAUTOLEADLAG
All units are factory tested with water running
The chiller is designed for even compressor starts and even run times to decrease wear
through the evaporator to confirm proper on the compressors.
operation.
H-53
Features
• 4OPAIRDISCHARGE • &ACTORYTESTED • 2EFRIGERANTCIRCUIT
Direct-drive condenser fans release air All chillers are factory tested at typical Larger chillers have dual refrigerant
away from personnel, building. ambient air and water conditions to circuits with two compressors. Passive oil
• %VAPORATOR confirm proper operation. management maintains proper oil levels
Brazed plate evaporator is designed with • &LOW3WITCH within compressor.
seamless internally finned copper tubes, Factory installed to positively detect flow • $3CROLLCOMPRESSOR
roller-expanded into tube sheets. loss of evaporator solution. The compressor has simple mechanical
design with minimal moving parts,
inherently low vibration for increased
efficiency.
• (EAVYGAUGEGALVANIZEDSTEELPANELS
Fourteen and Sixteen gauge panels and
access doors for support and strength. All
are finished with heavy-duty paint.
• 7EATHERPROTECTEDCONTROL
The control has automatic compressor and
condenser fan sequencing, load limiting,
and anti-recycle functions.
• #ONDENSER
Air-cooled condenser coils have aluminum
fins mechanically bonded to seamless
copper tubing.
Control
01
&ILE4ABS 01
Advanced interface allowing the user to access set-points, active
temperatures, modes, electrical data, pressures and diagnostics.
02 02
,#$$ISPLAY
Easy-to-read screen provides system information.
-ICROPROCESSOR#ONTROLWITH(UMAN)NTERFACE0ANEL(-)
• Designed to take corrective action to prevent unit shutdown.
• Limit compressor operation with smart safety controls, avoiding compressor or evaporator failures.
• Built-in chiller flow protection automatically detects no-water flow condition.
• Improved chiller start-up, load limiting, compressor anti-recycle timing, and lead/lag functions.
• Alarm diagnostic displays specific information for quick action.
• Service menu offers easy troubleshooting by controlling all outputs individually.
• Chiller capacity algorithm optimizes setpoint control and provides evaporator freeze protection.
• Failure protections include loss of chilled solution flow, chiller freeze protection, chilled solution flow interlock, head pressure control,
pump down control, and low ambient lockout.
H-54
Scroll Compressor
• FEWERPARTS - When compared to an equal capacity reciprocating compressor. Fewer

moving parts means greater efficiency.
• 3INGLEORBITINGSCROLL - eliminates the need for pistons, connecting rods, wrist pins and
valves.
• .ON OZONEDEPLETINGREFRIGERANT - HFC-410A.
• 3MOOTHCOMPRESSIONCYCLE - with torque variations only 30% of that produced by a
reciprocating compressor, stress on the motor is very low; noise and vibration are reduced.
• -ATCHEDSCROLLPLATES - touch in all three dimensions, forming a completely enclosed
compression chamber for higher efficiency.
• 3UCTIONGAS COOLEDMOTOR - keeps the motor cooler for longer life and better efficiency.
Options
$IFFERENT,742ANGES #OMPRESSOR7ARRANTY
Standard leaving water temperature ranges from 42°F to Five-year compressor replacement warranty.
65°F {5.6°C to 18.3°C} and optional temperature range from
$ISCONNECT
20°F to 65°F {-6.7°C to -18.3°C}.
External handle allows local power shutoff to control center.
2EMOTE3ETPOINT
Input for integration into the control system. Choose 0-5VDC or
0-10VDC.
Specifications
# "
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
Specification Notes (see following pages)
* Capacity data based on ambient air temperature of 95°F {35°C}, leaving water temperature as shown, 10°F {5.6°C} water temperature drop through evaporator, and 60 Hz
electrical supply unless noted. Capacity ratings are +/- 5% based on compressor manufacturer’s ratings and are subject to change without notice.
†
Leaving water temperature setpoints lower than 42°F {5.6°C} require the optional “Low Temperature Processing” package and the use of Glycol. Capacities shown are with
30% Propylene Glycol.
‡
Chilled water flow is based on nominal capacity at 50°F {10.0°C} leaving water temperature and 10°F {5.6°C} water temperature drop through the evaporator.
§
Differential pressure (drop) through evaporator is for listed nominal design flow of 100% water.
** GRV: Grooved pipe connections.
††
MCA: Minimum circuit ampacity. MOP: Maximum overcurrent protection. An additional 120/1/60, 15 amp customer provided power connection is required to power evaporator
heaters. Rated voltage usage range: 200/30/60 (180-220), 230/3/60 (208-254), 460/3/60 (414-506), 575/3/60 (516-633).
H-55
Specifications
-ODEL %3! %3! %3! %3! %3! %3! %3!
#APACITY
in tons {kcal} at 95°F {35°C} ambient and leaving water temperature
†
20°F {-6.7°C} 12.1 {36,590} 15.7 {47,476} 17.2 {52,012} 20.4 {61,689} 22.9 {69,248} 30.2 {91,323} 33.9 {102,512}
†
25°F {-3.9°C} 13.4 {40,521} 17.3 {52,314} 19.1 {57,757} 22.7 {68,644} 25.1 {75,901} 33.5 {101,302} 37.9 {114,608}
†
30°F {-1.1°C} 14.9 {45,057} 19.1 {57,757} 21.2 {64,108} 25.1 {75,901} 28.0 {84,671} 37.1 {112,189} 42.1 {127,308}
†
35°F {1.7°C} 16.3 {49,290} 21.0 {63,503} 23.4 {70.760} 27.6 {83,461} 31.0 {93,742} 40.8 {123,377} 46.6 {140,916}
†
40°F {4.4°C} 17.9 {54,129} 22.9 {69,248} 25.6 {77,413} 30.2 {91,323} 34.3 {103,721} 44.6 {134,868} 51.3 {155,129}
45°F {7.2°C} 19.9 {60,177} 25.4 {76,808} 28.7 {86,787} 33.7 {101,907} 38.9 {117,632} 49.8 {150,593} 57.6 {174,179}
50°F {10.0°C} 21.6 {65,317} 27.4 {82,856} 31.1 {94,045} 36.5 {110,374} 42.3 {127,913} 53.9 {162,991} 62.7 {189,602}
55°F {12.8°C} 23.3 {70,458} 29.5 {89,207} 33.6 {101,605} 39.3 {118,841} 45.9 {138,799} 58.0 {175,389} 67.9 {205,326}
60°F {15.5°C} 25.0 {75,599} 31.6 {95,557} 36.2 {109,467} 42.2 {127,611} 49.7 {150,290} 62.3 {188,392} 73.2 {221,353}
65°F {18.3°C} 26.8 {81,042} 33.7 {101,907} 38.8 {117,329} 45.2 {136,683} 53.4 {161,479} 66.6 {201,395} 78.7 {237,985}
Qty of refrigerant circuits/ compressors 1/2 2/4
Unloading steps, % 50-100 43-100 25-50-75-100
Chilled water flow gpm {lpm} ‡ 51.6 {195} 65.6 {248} 74.5 {282} 87.3 {330} 101.4 {384} 128.9 {488} 150.0 {568}
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} § 7.2 {0.50} 6.5 {0.45} 8.3 {0.57} 6.4 {0.44} 9.5 {0.66} 8.7 {0.60}
Evaporator volume, gal {l} 1.4 {5.3} 1.8 {6.8} 2.2 {8.3} 2.8 {10.6} 2.5 {9.5} 3.9 {14.8} 5.0 {18.9}
$IMENSIONSWEIGHTSAMPSCHILLERONLY inches {mm}
A - Height 84.7 {2151} 84.8 {2154}
B - Width 50.6 {1285} 88.6 {2250}
C - Length 114.0 {2896} 150.0 {3810} 114.0 {2896} 150.0 {3810}
Connections GRV ** 2.00 {51} 2.50 {64} 3.00 {76}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Shipping 1967 {892} 1995 {905} 2561 {1162} 2580 {1170} 3507 {1591} 3584 {1626} 4640 {2105}
Installed 2030 {921} 2060 {934} 2629 {1192} 2654 {1204} 3578 {1623} 3666 {1663} 4730 {2145}
5TILITYREQUIREMENTS
oo
0OWERCONSUMPTIONAMPS -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0
200V/3 phase/60hz 105.1 125 120.6 150 154.6 200 183.6 225 197.3 225 246.2 250 287.9 300
230V/3 phase/60hz 92.3 125 115.6 150 135.5 175 168.3 200 197.7 225 219.8 250 259.2 300
460V/3 phase/60hz 49.2 60 57.7 80 68.3 90 77.3 110 94.6 210 105.7 125 131.6 150
575V/3 phase/60hz 41.0 50 48.2 60 54.1 70 61.7 80 79.4 90 93.0 110 106.8 125
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS@ 50 Hz electrical service
#APACITY
in tons {kcal} at 95°F {35°C} ambient and leaving water temperature:
50°F {10°C} 18.4 {55,641} 23.3 {70,458} 26.6 {80,437} 30.7 {92,835} 35.9 {108,560} 45.3 {136,985} 53.3 {161,177}
††
Power consumption amps MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP
400V/3 phase/50hz 48.6 60 51.7 70 66.6 90 77.0 110 84.8 100 101.8 110 132.5 150
-ODEL %3! %3! %3! %3! %3! %3! %3!
#APACITY
†
20°F {-6.7°C} 40.5 {122,470} 46.0 {139,102} 52.2 {157,850} 58.2 {175,994} 63.8 {192,928} 70.0 {211,676} 75.5 {228,097}
†
25°F {-3.9°C} 45.1{136,380} 51.3 {155,129} 58.2 {175,994} 64.9 {196,254} 71.0 {214,700} 77.9 {235,566} 84.0 {253,776}
†
30°F {-1.1°C} 50.0 {151,197} 56.9 {172,063} 64.4 {194,742} 72.0 {217,724} 78.6 {237,682} 86.1 {260,362} 93.0 {280,967}
†
35°F {1.7°C} 55.1 {166,620} 62.7 {189,602} 71.0 {214,700} 79.4 {240,102} 86.7 {262,176} 94.8 {286,670} 102.4 {309,366}
†
40°F {4.4°C} 60.4 {182,647} 68.8 {208,048} 77.8 {235,263} 87.2 {263,688} 95.0 {287,275} 103.8 {313,886} 112.2 {338,973}
45°F {7.2°C} 67.4 {203,814} 77.1 {233,147} 86.8 {262,479} 97.6 {295,137} 106.1 {320,841} 115.8 {350,173} 125.4 {378,852}
50°F {10.0°C} 73.1 {221,051} 83.6 {252,802} 94.0 {284,251} 106.0 {320,539} 115.1 {348,057} 125.3 {378,901} 135.9 {410,574}
55°F {12.8°C} 78.9 {238,590} 90.4 {273,365} 101.5 {306,931} 114.5 {346,242} 124.2 {375,575} 135.1 {408,536} 146.7 {443,202}
60°F {15.5°C} 84.9 {256,733} 97.2 {293,928} 109.0 {329,611} 123.3 {372,853} 133.5 {403,697} 145.0 {438,473} 157.7 {476,435}
65°F {18.3°C} 91.0 {275,179} 104.2 {315,096} 116.7 {352,895} 132.2 {399,766} 143.0 {432,425} 155.1 {469,015} 169.0 {510,574}
Unloading steps, % 21-43-71-100 25-50-75-100 22-44-72-100 25-50-75-100 23-45-73-100 25-50-75-100 15-31-46-62-8
Chilled water flow gpm {lpm} ‡ 174.9 {662} 200.0 {757} 225.0 {852} 253.5 {960} 275.3 {1,042} 300.0 {1,136} 325.0 {1230}
§
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} 6.9 {0.48} 7.7 {0.53} 6.7 {0.46} 7.0 {0.48} 7.3 {0.50} 8.6 {0.59} 7.6 {0.53}
Evaporator volume, gal {l} 5.7 {21.6} 7.0 {26.5} 7.5 {28.4} 8.6 {32.6} 10.3 {39.0} 12.3 {46.6}
A - Height 84.8 {2154} 92.4 {2347} 92.5 {2350}
B - Width 88.6 {2250} 89.0 {2261}
C - Length 150.0 {3810} 143.1 {3635} 165.9 {4214} 201.9 {5128}
Connections GRV ** 3.0 {76} 4.0 {102}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Shipping 4656 {2112} 5278 {2394} 5637 {2557} 6283 {2850} 6328 {2870} 7511 {3407}
Installed 4751 {2155} 5384 {2442} 5746 {2606} 6401 {2903} 6461 {2931} 7618 {3455}
5TILITYREQUIREMENTS
oo
200V/3 phase/60hz 354.5 400 413.7 500 441.4 500 478.4 500 523.4 600 563.4 600 569.3 600
230V/3 phase/60hz 317.2 350 368.8 400 392.9 450 427.5 500 477.4 500 521.6 600 531.3 600
460V/3 phase/60hz 147.8 175 162.2 175 182.3 200 206.5 225 226.1 250 243.6 250 261.1 300
575V/3 phase/60hz 119.8 125 131.4 150 148.5 175 168.9 200 179.3 200 188.5 225 211.7 225
#APACITY
50°F {10°C} 61.4 {185,671} 71.3 {215,608} 80.6 {243,730} 89.8 {271,551} 98.4 {297,557} 104.7 {316,608} N/A
††
Power consumption amps MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP
400V/3 phase/50hz 147.2 175 160.2 175 181.1 200 199.7 225 214.4 250 223.2 250 N/A
Specification Notes (see previous page)
H-56
TPHX029-0317 CENTRAL CHILLERS !)2 #//,%$-/$%,3! 3+4/! 3+
Designed to Perform
Year-Round
The Conair Air-Cooled A-SK series Central Chillers are
engineered to meet the most demanding needs of plastic
processors. The modular microprocessor control coordinates
the actions of the chiller and provides stand-alone operation
of the unit. These chillers are space conscious — they can be
positioned as close as 4 ft. {1.2 m} from a vertical wall.
-ODEL! 3+
Chilling Capacity from 156 to 527 Tons
The Conair A-SK series air-cooled central

chillers provide better control of process ` (IGH EFFICIENCYCOMPRESSOR
temperature, better reliability and greater The helical rotary compressor is a direct drive, low speed design with only four moving
efficiency. These chillers are designed for parts for high reliability and low maintenance.
year-round applications in ambient conditions ` #USTOMIZEDTOFITYOURNEEDS
from 30° to 115°F {-1° to 46°C}. Conair has the central chiller to match your process. Pick nominal chilling capacities
Made of high strength cast iron, the from 156 tons to 527 tons.
screw compressor is designed for less ` 3UCTIONGAS COOLEDMOTOR
thermal distortion, less leakage, and higher The motor operates at lower temperatures for a longer motor life.
efficiencies. The variable unloader valve
provides stable temperature control under ` 2UGGEDCOMPRESSORDESIGN
The screw compressor has only four moving parts eliminating the need for pistons,
varying loads.
connecting rods, wrist pins and valves. Fewer moving parts means less internal friction
The air-cooled chillers automatically shut and greater efficiency.
down during a loss of flow to protect the
evaporator from freezing.
Options include low ambient operation,
louvered air intake, remote temperature
setpoint, and extended compressor warranty.
H-57
Features
• 4OPAIRDISCHARGE • #ONDENSER • $UALREFRIGERANTCIRCUITS
Direct-drive condenser fans release air Air-cooled condenser coils have aluminum Chillers have dual refrigerant circuits.
away from personnel, building. fins mechanically bonded to seamless Compressors are designed to handle liquid
• %VAPORATOR copper tubing. slugging.
Tube-in-shell evaporator is designed with • 3UCTIONGAS COOLEDMOTOR • (ELICALROTARYCOMPRESSOR
seamless internally finned copper tubes, Motor operates at lower temperatures for Compressor has only four moving parts;
roller-expanded into tube sheets. longer motor life. direct-drive, low-speed for high-efficiency
and high-reliability.
• (EAVY GAUGEGALVANIZEDSTEELPANELS
Fourteen and sixteen gauge panels and
access doors for support and strength. All
are finished with heavy-duty paint.
• 7EATHER PROTECTEDCONTROL
Control has automatic compressor and
condenser fan sequencing, load limiting,
and anti-recycle functions.
Control
01
&ILE4ABS 01
02 02
,#$$ISPLAY
H-58
Helical Rotary Screw Compressor

• Helical screw design results in part
load performance far superior to single
reciprocating compressors.
• Only four moving parts when compared to
reciprocating compressors; there are no
pistons, connecting rods, suction and dis
charge valves or mechanical oil pump.
• Latest heat transfer technology results in
increased condenser and evaporator tube
efficiency.
• Reduced rotor tip clearance results
in reduced leakage between the high
and low pressure cavities during
compression.
• Resistant to liquid slugging this
compressor design can handle amounts
of liquid refrigerant that would severely
damage a reciprocating compressor. #UTAWAYOFHELICALROTARYSCREWCOMPRESSOR
Specifications
# "
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW

* Based on water temperature (100% water) leaving the chiller, 50°F {10°C} water temperature drop through the evaporator, standard pump selections, 95°F {35°C} ambient air
temperature, for the 60 Hz units. Capacity ratings are (+/-) 5% based on compressor manufacturer’s ratings and are subject to change without notice.
†
Leaving water temperature setpoints lower than 40°F {4.4°C} requires the “Low Temperature Processing” option and the use of Glycol. Capacities shown are with 30%
Propylene Glycol. Capacities with 6°F {3.3°C} temperature drop to meet minimum evaporator flow requirements.
‡
Chilled water flow is based on nominal capacity at 50°F {10°C} leaving water temperature and 10°F {5.6°C} water temperature drop through the evaporator.
§
Differential pressure (drop) through evaporator is for listed nominal design flow of 100% water.
** GRV: Grooved pipe connections.
††
MCA: Minimum circuit ampacity. MOP: Maximum overcurrent protection. Where two numbers are listed, dual power source is required. An additional 120/1/60, 15 amp
customer provided power connection is required to power evaporator heaters. Rated Voltage Usage Range: 200/3/60 (180-220), 230/3/60 (208-254), 460/3/60 (414-506),
575/3/60 (516-633).
H-59
Specifications
-ODEL ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+
#APACITY
†
20°F {-6.7°C} 79.3 {239,799} 87.5 {264,596} 97.6 {295,137} 107.0 {323,563} 116.5 {352,290} 120.6 {364,688} 131.9 {398,859}
†
25°F {-3.9°C} 80.6 {243,730} 88.6 {267,922} 102.7 {310,560} 112.9 {341,404} 122.7 {371,039} 141.2 {426,982} 154.5 {467,200}
†
30°F {-1.1°C} 97.0 {293,323} 106.6 {322,353} 119.5 {361,362} 130.9 {395,835} 142.5 {430,913} 160.2 {484,437} 175.4 {530,401}
†
35°F {1.7°C} 110.9 {335,356} 121.8 {368,317} 135.0 {408,233} 147.6 {446,335} 160.8 {486,251} 178.8 {540,682} 195.8 {592,089}
†
40°F {4.4°C} 128.4 {388,275} 141.1 {426,679} 154.5 {467,200} 168.6 {509,838} 183.6 {555,197} 201.5 {609,326} 220.9 {667,990}
45°F {7.2°C} 140.7 {425,470} 154.6 {467,503} 169.1 {511,350} 184.3 {557,314} 200.6 {606,604} 220.1 {665,571} 241.3 {729,679}
50°F {10.0°C} 153.5 {464,176} 168.6 {509,838} 184.3 {557,314} 200.7 {606,907} 218.2 {659,826} 239.3 {723,631} 262.5 {793,787}
55°F {12.8°C} 166.7 {504,092} 183.1 {553,685} 200.0 {604,790} 217.5 {657,709} 236.2 {714,257} 259.1 {783,505} 284.2 {859,406}
60°F {15.5°C} 180.3 {545,218} 198.1 {599,044} 216.2 {653,778} 234.8 {710,023} 254.8 {770,502} 279.4 {844,892} 306.4 {926,538}
Qty of refrigerant circuits/ compressors 2/2
Modulating capacity range 15% to 100% 13.5% to 100% 15% to 100% 13.8% to 100% 15% to 100% 13.6% to 100% 15% to 100%
§
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} 5.5 {0.38} 5.7 {0.39} 5.9 {0.41} 6.1 {0.42} 6.0 {0.41} 9.1 {0.63} 9.0 {0.62}
Evaporator volume, gal {l} 29.0 {109.8} 32.0 {121.1} 33.0 {124.9} 35.0 {132.5} 39.0 {147.6} 38.0 {143.8} 42.0 {159.0}
$IMENSIONSWEIGHTS inches {mm}
A - Height 93.0 {2362}
B - Width 89.0 {2261}
C - Length 196.0 {4978} 232.0 {5893} 268.0 {6807}
Connections GRV ** 4.0 {102} 6.0 {152}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Shipping 10,995 {4987} 11,034 {5005} 11,073 {5023} 12,685 {5754} 13,104 {5944} 14,687 {6662} 14,853 {6737}
Installed 10,752 {4877} 10,769 {4885} 10,796 {4897} 12,391 {5620} 12,784 {5799} 14,370 {6518} 14,507 {6580}
5TILITYREQUIREMENTS
oo
200V/3 phase/60hz 660 800 730 1000 785 1000 874 1200 947 1200 1045 1200 1124 1200
230V/3 phase/60hz 581 800 641 800 691 800 770 1000 843 1000 920 1200 898 1200
460V/3 phase/60hz 288 400 317 450 341 450 380 500 412 500 454 600 489 600
575V/3 phase/60hz 230 300 254 350 273 350 304 400 329 450 364 500 392 600
#APACITY
50°F {10°C} 147.9 {447,242} 161.3 {487,763} 175.1 {529,494} 193.7 {585,739} 213.7 {646,218} N/A 256.5 {775,643}
Chilled water flow gpm {lpm} 353.9 {1340} 386.0 {1461} 419.1 {1586} 463.5 {1755} 511.3 {1935} N/A 613.9 {2324}
§
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} 5.2 {0.36} 5.3 {0.36} 5.4 {0.37} 5.8 {0.40} 5.8 {0.40} N/A 6.9 {0.48}
Power consumption, amps †† MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP
400V/3 phase/50hz 333 450 373 500 406 500 446 600 479 600 N/A N/A 563 700
-ODEL ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+ ! 3+
#APACITY
†
20°F {-6.7°C} 140.4 {424,563} 159.3 {481,715} 183.2 {553,988} 226.9 {686,134} 252.8 {764,454} 277.1 {837,936}
†
25°F {-3.9°C} 170.5 {515,583} 191.9 {580,296} 218.7 {661,338} 264.4 {799,532} 292.4 {884,203} 320.0 {967,664}
†
30°F {-1.1°C} 195.6 {591,485} 219.5 {663,757} 249.5 {754,475} 299.1 {904,463} 329.7 {996,996} 360.6 {1,090,436}
†
35°F {1.7°C} 219.6 {664,059} 246.0 {743,892} 279.4 {844,892} 333.1 {1,007,278} 366.7 {1,108,882} 401.0 {1,212,604}
†
40°F {4.4°C} 249.3 {753,871} 278.7 {842,775} 316.3 {956,475} 374.6 {1,132,772} 411.9 {1,245,565} 450.3 {1,361,685}
45°F {7.2°C} 272.3 {823,421} 304.4 {920,490} 345.4 {1,044,472} 408.5 {1,235,283} 449.1 {1,358,056} 491.1 {1,485,062}
50°F {10.0°C} 296.9 {897,811} 330.9 {1,000,625} 375.6 {1,135,795} 443.6 {1,341,424} 487.5 {1,474,175} 533.3 {1,612,672}
55°F {12.8°C} 322.0 {973,712} 358.3 {1,083,481} 406.6 {1,229,538} 479.7 {1,450,589} 527.1 {1,593,924} 576.6 {1,743,609}
60°F {15.5°C} 347.9 {1,052,032} 386.5 {1,168,757} 438.4 {1,325,700} 516.9 {1,563,080} 567.6 {1,716,394} 620.8 {1,877,268}
Modulating capacity range 9.5% to 100% 10% to 100% 8.8% to 100% 7.5% to 100% 6.8% to 100% 7.5% to 100%
Chilled water flow gpm {lpm} ‡ 710.8 {2691} 792.2 {2999} 899.1 {3403} 1061.8 {4019} 1167.0 {4418} 1276.4 {4832}
Evaporator volume, gal {l} 60.0 {227.1} 66.0 {249.8} 70.0 {265.0} 81.0 {306.6} 84.0 {318.0} 88.0 {333.1}
$IMENSIONSWEIGHTS inches {mm}
A - Height 96.0 {2438}
B - Width 89.0 {2261}
C - Length 362.0 {9195} 434.0 {11,024} 470.0 {11,938} 542.0 {13,767}
Connections GRV ** 8.00 {203}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Shipping 19,536 {8861} 21,103 {9572} 21,904 {9935} 25,754 {11,682} 26,373 {11,963} 27,798 {12,609}
Installed 18,876 {8562} 19,572 {8878} 21,450 {9730} 25,074 {11,373} 25,678 {11,647} 27,056 {12,272}
5TILITYREQUIREMENTS
oo
0OWERCONSUMPTIONAMPS -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0
200V/3 phase/60hz 785/522 1000/800 947/522 1200/800 1124/522 1200/800 947/947 1200/1200 1124/947 1200/1200 1124/1124 1200/1200
230V/3 phase/60hz 681/459 800/700 834/459 1000/700 989/459 1200/700 834/834 1000/1000 989/834 1200/1000 989/989 1200/1200
460V/3 phase/60hz 536 70 600 700 678 800 786 864 1000 934 934 1000
575V/3 phase/60hz 430 500 481 600 544 700 628 700 693 1000 750 1000
#APACITY
50°F {10°C} 284.8 {861,221} 323.8 {979,155} 352.6 {1,077,131} 433.7 {1,311,487} N/A
Chilled water flow gpm {lpm} 681.8 {2581} 775.1 {2934} 852.5 {3227} 1038.1 {3930} N/A
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} § 6.4 {0.44} 6.9 {0.47} 7.8 {0.54} 8.7 {0.60} N/A
Power consumption, amps †† MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP
400V/3 phase/50hz 629 800 694 800 770 800 909 1000 N/A
H-60
TPHX050-0317 COOLING SYSTEMS %3%3%2)%3#%.42!,#(),,%23
Dependable, Customizable
Central Cooling Modules
ESE Series Central Chillers are designed for cooling applications
between 10 and 160 tons, and can be linked with one control
to cool up to 1,200 tons. Water-cooled and remote air-cooled
options are available in a wide range of sizes, with a choice of
single or dual refrigerant circuits.
These chillers are designed to work in a system. At any point

before or after installation, you can link a control panel for up to
six chillers with up to twelve total refrigeration circuits.
-ODEL%3%7 $
Capacities From 10 to 160 Tons
The Conair ESE Central Chillers provide up

to 1,200 tons of cooling capacity in a proven ` 2ESILIENTCONSTRUCTION
design - one that is compact, reliable, and ESE Chillers are built in an ISO 9001-certified facility using the highest quality materials
simple. Installation is quick and easy with available, including stainless steel evaporators to resist corrosion. Scroll compressors
compact chillers that come with electrical are direct-drive and hermetic to minimize the need for maintenance. Water-cooled
models are equipped with a filtration system to keep out debris and prevent clogs.
components and sensors already mounted
and wired for you. ` 3IMPLEINSTALLATIONANDMAINTENANCE
The compact chiller is factory wired and piped, ready to be connected and activated
If your process changes, you don’t need to upon arrival. Components are easy to access thanks to the multi-leveled galvanized
replace the whole machine - you can add steel frame.
new ESE Chillers to the line, and keep them
` 2OBUST0,#CONTROLSYSTEM
all controllable from a single unit. What’s The ESE enables quick monitoring and control, using a clear, simple-to-understand
more, the ESE’s non-ozone depleting R-410A display. A single high-resolution LCD touch-screen interface can be connected to up
refrigerant make it a cost-efficient and to 6 chillers with individual settings for each. There are also functions available for
environmentally-friendly chilling option, easily automating run time and low-load cycling limits to extend compressor life.
matched to growing system layouts.
` .%-! STANDARDCONTROLPANELS
The ESE’s NEMA-12 control panel features UL-508A safety certification. The control
circuit is isolated from static interference, to ensure stability and precision as you
manage your cooling processes.
H-61
How it Works
Process fluid enters through the process return connection to the
recirculation tank. The recirculation pump moves it through the
brazed plate evaporator cooled by R-410A refrigerant, back to the
tank, and out through the process supply connection.
2EMOTEAIR COOLED%3%2MODEL
The brazed plate evaporator is supplied refrigerant from a remote
air condenser, provided with the ESER model chiller.
7ATER COOLED%3%7MODELFLOWDIAGRAMBELOW
Refrigerant is provided from a shell and tube water cooling
condenser, which can be supplied with condenser water from a
preexisting cooling tower or a reservoir provided as an option.
Tandem scroll
compressors
(Optional)
Filter/dryer Brazed plate

Auto water make-up
evaporator Process return
Condeser water
return
Condenser Recirculation Overflow to
water supply
W/C condenser drain
Sight Process
Single-Circuit Flow Diagram Shown glass
Process piping
Tank
Refrigerant piping
Cooling water/Make-up piping Process supply
Process Process
pump (p2) pump (p1)
Options
• (OTGASBYPASSVALVE • -OD"53245COMMUNICATIONSPORT

Install a failsafe for low- or variable-volume systems to minimize Install a RS-485 connector on the PLC which is located inside the
heat changes due to compressor cycling. control cabinet.
• )NTEGRALRESERVOIRANDPUMPINGSYSTEM • "!#NETCOMMUNICATIONSPORT

Provide the central chiller with a stainless steel reservoir and Add a ModBUS expansion cassette to the PLC, a ModBUS to
pumping system already piped, insulated, and wired for a faster BACnet gateway, as well as a RS-485 connector.
installation.
• ,ON7ORKSCOMMUNICATIONSPORT

• 2OTARYNON FUSEDDISCONNECTSWITCH Add a ModBUS expansion cassette to the PLC, a ModBUS to
5 kA SCCR (Short Circuit Current Rating) rotary non-fused LonWorks gateway, as well as a RS-485 connector.
disconnect switch for safe power lock-outs.
* Note that the ESE Chiller is only able to operate using one communications port
• %XTENDEDYEARCOMPRESSORPARTSWARRANTY option, so only one communications port option is available.
Extend the standard 12 month compressor parts warranty to 60
months for those applications where there is a need for an added
level of compressor parts warranty coverage.
H-62
Specifications
%3%7AND%3%2MODELCHILLERS
%
Diagrams shown with water-cooled integral reservoir and pumping system option.
"
Dimensions A, B, and C reflect chillers without reservoir.
#& !$
%
"
!$
/VERHEADVIEW
%
!$ "
5PSIZE
TANK
#&
#&
3TANDARD
TANK
3IDEVIEW &RONTVIEW
2EMOTEAIR COOLEDMODELS
* Cooling capacity when cooling water with 50°F set point, 60°F return, 95°F condenser air, R-410A refrigerant.
†
MCA is minimum circuit ampacity (for wire sizing), complies with NEC, Section 430-24
7ATER COOLEDMODELS
** Cooling capacity when cooling water with 50°F set point, 60°F return, 85°F condenser water, R-410A refrigerant.
††
MCA is minimum circuit ampacity (for wire sizing), complies with NEC, Section 430-24
‡‡
To keep the shipping dimensions within a 102 inch width for standard flatbed shipping, the condenser inlet manifold is removed for shipment.
Operating weight varies based on system refrigeration charge and operating conditions.
H-63
Specifications Water-Cooled Single-Circuit Chiller 60 Hz
-ODEL %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Cooling capacity** tons 10.9 16.1 22.2 27.3 32.6 42.2 53.3 68.4 86.2
Setpoint range °F {°C} 20 to 80 {-2.6 to 26}
Process fluid in/out - Standard
1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
inches
Process fluid in/out - High Flow
2 2 1/2 3 4 N/A
inches
Condenser water in/out inches 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
Refrigerant charge
10 30 35 40 50 70 80 100
lbs of R410A
Min unloaded capacity ton 5.5 8.1 11.1 13.7 16.2 21.0 25.9 33.9 42.6
with hot gas bypass option ton 2.7 4.0 5.5 6.8 8.1 10.5 13.0 17.0 21.3
$IMENSIONSWEIGHTSAMPSCHILLERONLY
A - Length inches {mm} 68 {1727} 72 {1828} 100 {2540} 105 {2667}
B - Width inches {mm} 24 {610} 30 {762}
C - Height inches {mm} 69 {1753}
Shipping weight lbs {kg} 950 {431} 1050 {476} 1150 {522} 1350 {612} 1800 {816} 1850 {839} 2250 {1021}
Operating weight lbs {kg} 965 {438} 1070 {485} 1180 {535} 1183 {537} 1387 {629} 1860 {844} 1920 {871} 2336 {1060} 2640 {1197}
††
MCA @ 460/3/60 amps 22 34 42 53 62 71 86 124 165
$IMENSIONSWEIGHTS amps (chiller with standard flow reserVOIROPTIONª&'4PROCESSª&'4CHILLER
Reservoir capacity gal {l} 275 {1041} 450 {1703}
Pump models (process/chiller) 5D/1.5A 7.5D/2A 10D/2A 10D/3A 15D/3A
Process connection size in 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
D - Length inches {mm} 84 {2134} 96 {2438} 108 {2743 }
E - Width inches {mm} 72 {1829} 76 {1930} 92 {2337} 95 {2413} 100 {2540}
F - Height inches {mm} 75 {1905}
Shipping Weight lbs {kg} 2650 {1202} 2750 {1247} 2850 {1293} 3950 {1792} 3250 {1474} 3800 {1724} 4000 {1814} 4700 {2132} 5500 {2495}
Operating Weight lbs {kg} 4950 {2245} 5050 {2291} 5150 {2336} 5250 {2381} 5550 {2517} 6100 {2767} 6300 {2858} 8450 {3833} 9250 {4196}
MCA @ 460/3/60 amps 32 43 50 62 75 86 104 141 188
$IMENSIONSWEIGHTS amps (chiller with high flow reserVOIROPTIONª&'4PROCESSª&'4CHILLER
Pump models (process/chiller) 5D/1.5A 7.5D/1.5A 10D/1.5A 10D/2A 15D/2A 15D/3A 20D/3A 25D/3A
Process connection size inches 2 2 1/2 3 4 6
D - Length inches {mm} 84 {2134} 120 {3048} 132 {3353}
E - Width inches {mm} 72 {1829} 76 {1930} 92 {2337}
Operating Weight lbs {kg} 6200 {2812} 6300 {2858} 6450 {2926} 6500 {2948} 6800 {3084} 7350 {3334} 7600 {3447} 10,400 {4717} 11,200 {5080}
††
MCA @ 460/3/60 amps 32 46 57 68 78 91 109 153 201
H-64
Specifications Water-Cooled Dual-Circuit Chiller 60 Hz

%3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7 %3%7
-ODEL
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Cooling capacity** tons 21.7 32.1 44.3 54.7 65.2 84.5 106.7 136.9 172.5
2 2 1/2 3 4 6
inches
2 1/2 3 4 6 N/A
inches
Condenser water in/out inches 2 2 1/2 3 4 6
Refrig. charge/circuit
10 30 35 40 50 70 80 100
lbs of R410A
Min. unloaded capacity tons 5.5 8.0 11.1 13.7 16.2 20.9 25.9 33.9 42.6
with hot gas bypass option tons 2.7 4.0 5.5 6.8 8.1 10.5 13.0 16.9 21.3
A - Length inches {mm} 75 {1905} 80 {2032} 85 {2159} 115 {2921} 118 {2997} 125 {3175}
B - Width inches {mm} 56 {1422}
Shipping weight lbs {kg} 1650 {748} 1900 {862} 2150 {975} 2200 {998} 2550 {1157} 3450 {1565} 3600 {1633} 4450 {2018} 5100 {2313}
††
MCA @ 460/3/60 amps 42 63 76 99 115 131 161 232 311
Reservoir size gal {l} 275 {1041} 450 {1703} 700 {2650} 1000 {3785}
Pump models (process/chiller) 5D/1.5A 7.5D/2A 10D/2A 10D/3A 15D/3A 15D/5A 20D/7.5F 25D/10E
D - Length inches {mm} 108 {2743} 120 {3048} 132 {3353} 144 {3658}
E - Width inches {mm} 78 {1981} 90 {2286} 105 {2667}‡‡ 110 {2794}‡‡
F - Height inches {mm} 75 {1905} 90 {2286}
Shipping Weight lbs {kg} 3650 {1656} 4100 {1860} 4450 {2018} 4650 {2109} 5200 {2359} 6550 {2971} 7200 {3266} 8300 {3765} 10,150 {4604}
Operating Weight lbs {kg} 5950 {2699} 6400 {2903} 6750 {3062} 6950 {3152} 8950 {4060} 10,300 {4672} 13,050 {5919} 14,150 {6418} 18,500 {8391}
††
MCA @ 460/3/60 amps 51 76 93 117 133 154 187 269 356
Reservoir size gal {l} 400 {1514} 650 {2461} 1000 {3785}
Pump models (process/chiller) 10D/1.5A 10D/2A 15D/2A 15D/3A 20D/3A 25D/3A 30D/5A 40D/7.5F 40D/10E
Process connection size inches 2 1/2 3 4 6
E - Width inches {mm} 78 {1981} 90 {2286} 105 {2667}‡‡ 110 {2794}‡‡
Shipping Weight lbs {kg} 5950 {2699} 6400 {2903} 6750 {3062} 6950 {3152} 8950 {4060} 10,300 {4672} 13,050 {5919} 14,150 {6418} 18,500 {8391}
Operating Weight lbs {kg} 7200 {3266} 7650 {3470} 8000 {3629} 8200 {3719} 10,900 {4944} 12,250 {5557} 16,250 {7371} 17,250 {7824} 19,500 {8845}
††
MCA @ 460/3/60 amps 59 79 98 122 145 168 207 294 375
H-65
Specifications Remote Air-Cooled Single-Circuit Chiller 60 Hz

%3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2
-ODEL
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Cooling capacity* tons 10.0 14.9 20.4 25.2 30.1 38.9 48.9 63.6 78.7
1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
inches
2 2 1/2 3 4 N/A
inches
Refrigerant discharge line inches 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 2 1/8
Refrigerant liquid line inches 5/8 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 5/8
Refrig. charge lbs of R410A Varies based on refrigerant system piping
A - Length inches {mm} 68 {1727} 72 {1828} 102 {2594} 105 {2667}
B - Width inches {mm} 24 {610} 30 {762}
Shipping weight lbs {kg} 850 {386} 1000 {454} 1050 {476} 1150 {522} 1550 {703} 1600 {726} 1900 {862} 2200 {998}
†
MCA @ 460/3/60 amps 22 34 42 53 62 71 86 124 165
Pump models (process/chiller) 5D/1.5A 7.5D/2A 10D/2A 10D/3A 15D/3A
Process connection size inches 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4
E - Width inches {mm} 64 {1626} 76 {1930} 92 {2337} 96 {2438} 95 {2413}
MCA @ 460/3/60† amps 32 43 50 62 75 86 104 141 188
$IMENSIONSWEIGHTS amps (chiller with high process flow reserVOIROPTIONª&'4PROCESSª&'4CHILLER
Pump models (process/chiller) 5D/1.5A 7.5D/1.5A 10D/1.5A 10D/2A 15D/2A 15D/3A 20D/3A 25D/3A
E - Width inches {mm} 64 {1626} 76 {1930} 92 {2337} 96 {2438} 95 {2413}
Shipping weight lbs {kg} 2800 {1270} 2950 {1338} 3000 {1361} 3300 {1497} 3750 {1701} 4000 {1814} 4600 {2087} 5350 {2427}
Operating weight lbs {kg} 6150 {2790} 6300 {2858} 6350 {2880} 6650 {3016} 7100 {3221} 7350 {3334} 10050 {4559} 10800 {4899}
MCA @ 460/3/60† amps 32 46 57 68 78 91 109 153 201
H-66
Specifications Remote Air-Cooled Dual-Circuit Chiller 60 Hz

%3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2 %3%2
-ODEL
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
Cooling capacity* tons 20.4 29.9 40.7 50.5 60.2 77.8 97.7 127.2 157.5
2 2 1/2 3 4 6
inches
2 1/2 3 4 6 N/A
inches
Refrig. discharge line/circuit in. 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 2 1/8
Refrig. liquid line/circuit inches 5/8 7/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 5/8
Refrigerant charge/circuit Varies based on refrigeration system piping
lbs of R410A
A - Length inches {mm} 75 {1905} 80 {2032} 85 {2159 } 105 {2667} 110 {2794} 125 {3175}
B - Width inches {mm} 48 {1219} 52 {1321}
Shipping weight lbs {kg} 1550 {703} 1800 {816} 1850 {839} 1900 {862} 2150 {975} 2900 {1315} 3000 {1361} 3650 {1656} 4250 {1928}
MCA @ 460/3/60† amps 42 63 76 99 115 131 161 232 311
Reservoir size gal {l} 275 {1041} 450 {1703} 700 {2650} 1000 {3785}
Pump models (process/chiller) 5D/1.5A 7.5D/2A 10D/2A 10D/3A 15D/3A 15D/5A 20D/7.5F 25D/10E
E - Width inches {mm} 74 {1880} 92 {2337} 102 {2591}
Operating Weight lbs {kg} 5800 {2631} 6300 {2858} 6500 {2948} 6650 {3016} 8550 {3878} 9750 {4423} 12,450 {5647} 13,350 {6055} 17,650 {8006}
MCA @ 460/3/60† amps 51 76 93 117 133 154 187 269 356
Reservoir size gal {l} 400 {1514} 650 {2461} 1000 {3785}
Pump models (process/chiller) 10D/1.5A 10D/2A 15D/2A 15D/3A 20D/3A 25D/3A 30D/5A 40D/7.5F 40D/10E
Process connection size inches 2 1/2 3 4 6
E - Width inches {mm} 74 {1880} 92 {2337} 102 {2591}
Shipping weight lbs {kg} 3850 {1746} 4200 {1905} 4400 {1996} 4550 {2064} 5050 {2291} 6250 {2835} 7300 {3311} 8100 {3674} 10,300 {4672}
Operating weight lbs {kg} 7200 {3266} 7550 {3425} 7750 {3515} 7900 {3583} 10,500 {4763} 11,700 {5307} 15,650 {7099} 16,450 {7462} 18,650 {8459}
MCA @ 460/3/60† amps 59 79 98 122 145 165 207 294 375
H-67
Reservoir Pump Specifications

Reservoir Option Pumps
(Water @ 50˚F, 60 Hz)
90.0
80.0
70.0
40 hp
Process
60.0
Pressure (psi)
7½ hp 10 hp 20 hp 25 hp
Process Process Process Process
50.0
5 hp 15 hp
Process Process
40.0 30 hp
Process
30.0
10 hp
20.0 Chiller
7½ hp
1½ hp 5 hp Chiller
2 hp
10.0 Chiller
Chiller 3 hp
Chiller
0.0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Flow (gpm)
Air Condenser Specifications

$IMENSIONSINCHES[MM] 3HIPPING 4OTALAIR 3OUND -#! 2EFRIGLINESINCHES
#HILLERMODEL
#IRCUIT -ODEL WEIGHT flow PRESSURE )NLETPER /UTLETPER
USEDWITH
,ENGTH 7IDTH (EIGHT LB[KG] CFM LEVELD"!† AMPSp CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
KCM014 ESER-010S 83 {2108} 43 {1092} 48 {1219} 415 {188} 14,400 53 2.6 1 3/8 1 1/8
KCL023 ESER-015S 113 {2870} 45 {1143} 54 {1372} 670 {304} 24,000 63 7.0 2 1/8 1 3/8
KCL030 ESER-020S 113 {2870} 45 {1143} 54 {1372} 720 {327} 22,600 63 7.0 2 1/8 1 5/8
3INGLE CIRCUIT
KCL037 ESER-025S 113 {2870} 45 {1143} 54 {1372} 800 {363} 20,600 63 7.0 2 1/8 1 5/8
KCL045 ESER-030S 168 {4267} 45 {1143} 54 {1372} 1075 {488} 33,900 64 10.1 2 5/8 1 5/8
KCL056 ESER-040S 168 {4267} 45 {1143} 54 {1372} 1200 {544} 30,900 64 10.1 2 5/8 2 1/8
KCL068 ESER-050S 223 {5664} 45 {1143} 54 {1372} 1475 {669} 42,400 65 16.0 2 5/8 2 1/8
KCL095 ESER-060S 278 {7061} 45 {1143} 54 {1372} 1950 {885} 51,800 66 16.0 3 1/8 2 5/8
KCL110 ESER-080S 333 {8458} 45 {1143} 54 {1372} 2300 {1043} 62,100 67 21.0 3 1/8 2 5/8
KCM034 ESER-020D 83 {2108} 83 {2108} 48 {1219} 830 {376} 28,400 55 4.9 1 5/8 1 1/8
KCL047 ESER-030D 113 {2870} 87 {2210} 54 {1372} 1275 {578} 47,900 65 16.0 2 1/8 1 3/8
KCL060 ESER-040D 113 {2870} 87 {2210} 54 {1372} 1350 {612} 45,200 65 16.0 2 1/8 1 5/8
$UAL CIRCUIT
KCL074 ESER-050D 113 {2870} 87 {2210} 54 {1372} 1525 {692} 41,200 65 16.0 2 1/8 1 5/8
KCL090 ESER-060D 168 {4267} 87 {2210} 54 {1372} 2050 {930} 67,800 67 21.0 2 5/8 1 5/8
KCL112 ESER-080D 168 {4267} 87 {2210} 54 {1372} 2275 {1032} 61,800 67 21.0 2 5/8 2 1/8
KCL137 ESER-100D 223 {5664} 87 {2210} 54 {1372} 2800 {1270} 84,800 68 24.8 2 5/8 2 1/8
KCL190 ESER-120D 278 {7061} 87 {2210} 54 {1372} 3700 {1678} 103,500 69 36.0 3 1/8 2 5/8
KCL224 ESER-160D 333 {8458} 87 {2210} 54 {1372} 4400 {1996} 124,200 70 46.0 3 1/8 2 5/8
* One condenser is required per chiller; dual-circuit chillers use one remote condenser Operating weight varies based on system refrigeration charge and operating
that has two refrigeration circuits. conditions.
†
Sound pressure level at 30 feet. Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair representative for the
‡
MCA is minimum circuit amps (for wire sizing), as provided by the remote condenser most current information.
manufacturer.
H-68
TPHX031-0317 CENTRAL CHILLERS 7!4%2 #//,%$-/$%,37 3+4/7 3+
Energy Efficient
Central Chilling
Provide chilled fluid for industrial applications from a central
location with the Conair Water-Cooled W-SK Series Central
Chillers.
The simple design of the screw compressor provides both full
load and part load efficiencies unmatched in the industry, and
results in lower energy costs when compared to reciprocating
compressors.
-ODEL7 3+
Cooling Capacities from 86 Tons to 268 Tons
The Conair Water-Cooled W-SK Series Central

Chillers are engineered for improved efficiency ` %CO FRIENDLYANDENERGYEFFICIENT
and reliability. The screw compressor is the All models use environmentally-friendly HCFC-free R-134a refrigerant and have
most advanced compressor in the industry. ASHRAE 90.1 compliant energy efficiency ratings for improved energy-savings.
The unit protects against starting and running ` 2UGGEDCOMPRESSORDESIGN
overload, under and over voltages, phase loss, The screw compressor has only four moving parts eliminating the need for pistons,
phase reversals, high winding temperature connecting rods, wrist pins and valves. Fewer moving parts means less internal friction
and rapid recycling. and greater efficiency.
The microprocessor control maintains chilled ` 4ROUBLE FREEOPERATION
water temperature more accurately, resulting Smart safety features and over 40 diagnostic displays for easy and virtually trouble-
in less temperature drift. free operation that includes one year warranty on parts and labor.
The microprocessor monitors temperature ` %ASYSETUP
and rate of change over time, controlling Small unit size, factory wiring, easy lifting procedures and startup control logic result
compressor loading for efficient chiller in quick and easy installation. And includes one day of startup services by a factory-
operation. trained technician.
The screw compressor’s positive displacement

design along with staging dual refrigerant
circuits result in lower energy costs.
H-69
Features
• %ASYACCESSCONTROLS • /PERATORINTERFACE • $UALREFRIGERANTCIRCUITS
Control has automatic compressor and Monitors temperature and rate of Chillers have dual refrigerant circuits.
condenser fan sequencing, load limiting, change over time, effectively controlling Compressors are designed to handle liquid
and anti-recycle functions. compressor loading. slugging.
• 7ATERREGULATINGVALVES
for condenser water lower than 85°F
{29.4°C}.
• &LOWSWITCH
Field installed to positively detect flow loss
of evaporator fluid flow.
• (ELICALROTARYCOMPRESSOR
Compressor has only four moving parts;
direct-drive, low speed for high efficiency
and high reliability.
• %VAPORATOR
Shell-and-tube evaporator uses seamless,
internally finned copper tubes, roller-
expanded into tube sheets.
• %NERGYEFFICIENT
Results in lower energy costs when
compared with reciprocating compressor
designs.
Control
01
&ILE4ABS 01
02 02
,#$4OUCH3CREENWITH,%$"ACKLIGHT
H-70
Helical Rotary Screw Compressor Options

• Only four moving parts when compared to reciprocating • Different LWT Ranges
compressors; there are no pistons, connecting rods, suction and Standard leaving water temperature ranges from 40° to 65°F
discharge valves or mechanical oil pump. {4.4° to 18.3°C} and optional temperature ranges from
• Reduced rotor tip clearance results in reduced leakage between 0° to 39°F {-17.8° to 3.9°C}.
the high and low pressure cavities during compression. • Remote Setpoint
• Latest heat transfer technology results in increased condenser Input for integration into the control system. Choose 0-5 vDC or
and evaporator tube efficiency. 0-10 vDC.
• Resistant to liquid slugging with a compressor design • Disconnect
that can handle amounts of liquid refrigerant that would severely External handle allows local power shutoff to control center.
damage a reciprocating compressor. • Compressor Warranty
• Helical screw design results in part load performance far superior Choose an additional two- to five-year compressor component
to single reciprocating compressors. replacement warranty.
• Wye-delta starter
Reduces energy surges during chiller start-up.
• Remote condenser
Air-cooled remote condenser option to replace water cooled
condenser on chiller. Refrigerant piping on site is required.
#UTAWAYOFTHESCREWCOMPRESSOR
Specifications
INCHES
[MM]
INCHES
[MM]
INCHES[MM]

* Based on entering condenser water temperature of 85°F {29.4°C}, leaving condenser water temperature of 95°F {35°C}, leaving chilled water temperature as shown and
10°F {5.56°C} water temperature drop through the evaporator. Capacity ratings are (+/-) 5% and are subject to change without notice.
†
Leaving water temperature setpoints lower than 45°F {4.4°C} may require low temperature processing, 3-pass evaporator, or high efficiency performance option in order to
operate properly. Consult factory for pricing. Not available for W-163SK models with remote condenser option. Capacities shown have been selected with low temperature
processing.
‡
§
Differential pressure (drop) is for listed nominal design flow of 100% water.
** Tower water flow based on nominal capacity with 85°F {29.4°C} entering water temperature and 10°F {5.6°C} water temperature drop through the evaporator.
††
GRV: Grooved pipe connections.
‡‡
MCA: Minimum circuit ampacity. MOP: Maximum overcurrent protection. Rated voltage usage range: 200/3/60 (180-220), 230/3/60 (208-254), 400/3/50 (364-440), 460/3/60
(414-506), 575/3/60 (516-633). Starters for 400/3/50, 460/3/60 and 575/3/60 standard will be Across-the-Line; starters for 200/3/60 and 230/3/60 will be Wye-Delta.
H-71
Specifications
-ODEL 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+
#APACITY
†
35°F {1.7°C} 61.4 {185,671} 72.8 {220,144} 83.3 {251,895} 92.5 {279,715} 98.2 {296,952} 104.5 {316,003} N/A
†
40°F {4.4°C} 71.1 {215,003} 84.9 {256,733} 96.6 {292,114} 107.5 {325,075} 114.5 {346,242} 121.7 {368,015} N/A
45°F {7.2°C} 78.1 {236,170} 89.4 {270,341} 102.2 {309,048} 115.7 {349,871} 127.1 {384,344} 135.2 {408,838} 147.8 {446,940}
50°F {10.0°C} 85.9 {259,757} 98.1 {296,649} 112.2 {339,287} 127.0 {384,042} 139.7 {422,446} 148.7 {449,661} 162.6 {491,694}
55°F {12.8°C} 94.1 {284,554} 107.3 {324,470} 122.7 {371,039} 138.8 {419,724} 153.2 {463,269} 163.0 {492,904} 178.3 {539,170}
60°F {15.5°C} 102.9 {311,164} 117.0 {353,802} 133.8 {404,604} 151.4 {457,826} 167.5 {506,512} 178.2 {538,868} 194.9 {589,368}
65°F {15.5°C} 112.2 {339,287} 127.4 {385,251} 145.7 {440,589} 164.7 {498,044} 182.6 {552,173} 194.3 {587,553} 212.6 {642,892}
Minimum operating tons at 50°F {10°C} 15.5 17.7 20.2 22.9 25.1 26.8 29.3
Tower water flow gpm {lpm} ** 244.0 {924} 278.00 {1052} 318.1 {1204} 359.8 {1362} 394.6 {1494} 419.8 {1589} 459.6 {1740}
§
Condenser pressure drop psi {bar} 8.7 {0.60} 7.9 {0.55} 7.7 {0.53} 8.6 {0.59} 8.8 {0.61} 9.9 {0.68} 9.0 {0.62}
Evaporator connections GRV †† 4.0 {102} 5.0 {127}
Condenser connections GRV †† 5.0 {127}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Shipping 5705 {2588} 5721 {2595} 5902 {2677} 6074 {2755} 6248 {2834} 6244 {2832} 6649 {3016}
Installed 5900 {2676} 5933 {2691} 6140 {2785} 6332 {2872} 6530 {2962} 6535 {2964} 6971 {3162}
5TILITYREQUIREMENTS
0OWERCONSUMPTIONAMPS‡‡ -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0
200V/3 phase/60hz 216 300 249 350 291 400 324 450 356 500 382 500 425 600
230V/3 phase/60hz 188 250 217 300 252 350 280 400 309 450 332 450 368 500
460V/3 phase/60hz 94 125 110 150 127 175 141 200 155 225 166 225 185 250
575V/3 phase/60hz 76 100 87 110 102 150 114 150 125 175 134 175 148 200
#APACITY
50°F {10°C} 94.5 {285,763} 107.3 {324,470} 114.2 {345,335} 121.1 {366,200} 134.6 {407,024} 148.2 {448,149} 159.9 {483,530}
Chilled water flow gpm {lpm} 226.1 {856} 256.8 {972} 273.3 {1035} 289.8 {1097} 326.4 {1236} 354.6 {1342} 382.7 {1449}
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} § 7.0 {0.48} 7.1 {0.49} 7.9 {0.55} 8.8 {0.61} 9.0 {0.62} 8.7 {0.60} 10.0 {0.69}
Tower water flow gpm {lpm} ** 267.6 {1013} 303.6 {1149} 322.6 {1221} 341.9 {1294} 384.0 {1454} 415.9 {1574} 450.5 {1705}
Condenser pressure drop psi {bar} § 7.4 {0.51} 7.1 {0.49} 7.0 {0.48} 7.8 {0.54} 8.4 {0.58} 7.4 {0.51} 8.7 {0.60}
Power consumption, amps ‡‡ MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP
400V/3 phase/50hz 123 175 137 175 152 200 164 225 180 250 193 250 211 300
-ODEL 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 + 7 3+ 7 3+
#APACITY
†
35°F {1.7°C} 112.9 {341,404} 122.0 {368,922} 133.5 {403,697} 145.7 {440,589} 156.5 {473,248} 167.1 {505,302}
†
40°F {4.4°C} 131.6 {397,952} 142.3 {430,308} 156.1 {472,039} 170.3 {514,979} 184.2 {557,012} 199.0 {601,766}
45°F {7.2°C} 156.3 {472,643} 170.6 {515,886} 186.2 {563,059} 202.3 {611,745} 221.4 {669,502} 243.5 {736,332}
50°F {10.0°C} 172.0 {520,119} 187.7 {567,595} 204.8 {619,305} 222.5 {672,829} 243.3 {735,727} 267.8 {809,814}
55°F {12.8°C} 188.7 {570,619} 205.9 {622,631} 224.6 {679,179} 244.0 {737,844} 266.5 {805,883} 293.5 {887,529}
60°F {15.5°C} 206.4 {624,143} 225.1 {680,691} 245.6 {742,682} 266.9 {807,092} 290.8 {879,365} 320.7 {969,781}
65°F {15.5°C} 225.1 {680,691} 245.5 {742,380} 267.8 {809,814} 290.9 {879,667} 316.4 {956,778} 349.3 {1,056,266}
Minimum operating tons at 50°F {10°C} 31.0 33.8 36.9 40.1 43.8 48.2
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} § 11.0 {0.76} 11.4 {0.78} 11.0 {0.76} 10.0 {0.69} 9.6 {0.66}
Tower water flow gpm {lpm} 479.6 {1815} 523.7 {1982} 570.2 {2158} 618.1 {2340} 678.6 {2569} 746.6 {2826}
Condenser pressure drop psi {bar} § 10.0 {0.69} 10.2 {0.70} 9.0 {0.62} 6.8 {0.47}
Evaporator connections GRV ** 5.00 {127} 6.00 {152}
Condenser connections GRV ** 6.00 {152}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Shipping 7544 {3422} 8036 {3645} 8098 {3673} 8157 {3700} 8995 {4080} 9478 {4299}
Installed 7884 {3576} 8395 {3808} 8490 {3851} 8578 {3891} 9493 {4306} 10,071 {4568}
5TILITYREQUIREMENTS
0OWERCONSUMPTIONAMPSoo -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0
200V/3 phase/60hz 415 600 446 600 484 700 515 700 583 800 637 800
230V/3 phase/60hz 362 500 389 500 421 600 447 600 509 700 558 800
460V/3 phase/60hz 183 250 196 250 213 300 227 300 256 350 279 400
575V/3 phase/60hz 146 200 157 225 171 250 182 250 204 300 222 300
#APACITY
50°F {10°C} 174.1 {526,470} 184.6 {558,221} 203.4 {615,071} 223.0 {674,341} 243.5 {736,332} 265.8 {803,766}
Chilled water flow gpm {lpm} 416.7 {1577} 442.0 {1673} 486.9 {1843} 534.0 {2021} 582.9 {2207} 636.5 {2409}
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} § 10. 0 {0.69} 9.2 {0.64} 9.4 {0.65} 8.6 {0.59} 9.1 {0.63} 9.5 {0.65}
Tower water flow gpm {lpm} 489.8 {1854} 512.4 {1940} 565.1 {2139} 619.3 {2344} 677.9 {2566} 739.9 {2801}
Condenser pressure drop psi {bar} § 8.8 {0.61} 8.3 {0.57} 8.6 {0.59} 7.6 {0.53} 9.0 {0.62} 8.2 {0.56}
Power consumption, amps †† MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP
400V/3 phase/50hz 225 300 223 300 247 350 266 350 296 400 320 450
H-72
Central Chilling
With Large Capacity
Free up factory floor space with the Conair Water-Cooled W-SK
Central Chillers. These large-capacity, heavy-duty chillers make
the most of your energy dollars. Precise temperature control at
the mold, die, screw or barrel results in faster cycle times and
less warping and shrinking of the product.
Recirculating cooling water through a tower-chiller system also
reduces water and sewer bills.
-ODEL7 3+
Cooling Capacities from 210 Tons to 463 Tons
The Conair Water-Cooled W-SK Series Central

Chillers are engineered for efficiency and ` 2UGGEDCOMPRESSORDESIGN
reliability. The screw compressor is the most The screw compressor has only four moving parts eliminating the need for pistons,
advanced compressor in the industry. The unit connecting rods, wrist pins and valves. Fewer moving parts means less internal friction
protects against starting and running overload, and greater efficiency.
under and over voltages, phase loss, phase ` #USTOMIZEDTOFITYOURNEEDS
reversals, high winding temperature and rapid Conair has the central chiller to match your process. Pick nominal chilling capacities
recycling. from 210 tons to 463 tons. Smaller capacities are available.
The microprocessor control maintains chilled ` %ASYSETUP
water temperature more accurately, resulting Small unit size, factory wiring, easy lifting procedures and startup control logic result
in less temperature drift. in quick and easy installation. And includes one day of startup services by a factory-
trained technician.
The microprocessor monitors temperature
and the rate of change over time, effectively ` 4ROUBLE FREEOPERATION
controlling compressor loading for efficient Smart safety features and over 40 diagnostic displays for easy and virtually trouble-
chiller operation. free operation.
The screw compressor’s positive displace-

ment design results in lower energy costs.
H-73
Features
• %ASYACCESSCONTROLS • /PERATORINTERFACE • 4OLERATESSLUGGING
Control has automatic compressor and Monitors temperature and rate of Compressors are designed to handle liquid
condenser fan sequencing, load limiting, change over time, effectively controlling slugging.
and anti-recycle functions. compressor loading. • ,OWFLOWSWITCH
Field installed to positively detect flow loss
of evaporator solution.
• 7ATERREGULATINGVALVES
for condenser water lower than 85°F
{29.4°C}.
• (ELICALROTARYCOMPRESSOR
Compressor has only four moving parts;
direct-drive, low speed for high efficiency
and high reliability.
• %VAPORATOR
Shell-and-tube evaporator uses seamless
internally finned copper tubes, roller-
expanded into tube sheets.
• %NERGYEFFICIENT
Results in lower energy costs when
compared with reciprocating compressor
designs.
Control
01
&ILE4ABS 01
02 02
,#$4OUCH3CREENWITH,%$"ACKLIGHT
H-74
Helical Rotary Screw Compressor

s /NLYFOURMOVINGPARTS when compared to reciprocating
compressors; there are no pistons, connecting rods, suction and
discharge valves or mechanical oil pump.
s 2EDUCEDROTORTIPCLEARANCE results in reduced leakage between
the high and low pressure cavities during compression.
s ,ATESTHEATTRANSFERTECHNOLOGY results in increased condenser
and evaporator tube efficiency.
s 2ESISTANTTOLIQUIDSLUGGING with a compressor design
that can handle amounts of liquid refrigerant that would severely
damage a reciprocating compressor.
s (ELICALSCREWDESIGN results in part load performance far
superior to single reciprocating compressors. #UTAWAYOFTHESCREWCOMPRESSOR
Options
• $IFFERENT,742ANGES • $ISCONNECT
Standard leaving water temperature ranges from 37° to 65°F External handle allows local power shutoff to control center.
{2.8° to 18.3°C} and optional temperature ranges from 10° to 65°F • 3OLID3TATE3TARTER
{-12.2° to 18.3°C}. Hybrid SCR/Contactor to extend starter life on units that will be
• 2EMOTE3ETPOINT starting frequently.
Input for integration into the control system. • 3MOOTH"ORE4UBES
Choose 4-20 mA or 2-10 vDC.
Smooth wall 0.035 inch {0.889 mm} tubes in condenser for high
• 0ERCENT&ULL,OAD fouling water applications.
Output indicating percent of chiller nominal RLA. Choose 4-20 mA or • #OMPRESSOR7ARRANTY
2-10 vDC. Choose an additional two- to five-year compressor component
• 0ROGRAMMABLE2ELAYS replacement warranty.
Factory installed relays for dry contact indication of chiller
status with choice of relay assignments from a list of possible
assignments.
Specifications
* Based on entering condenser water temperature of 85°F {29.4°C}, leaving condenser water temperature of 95°F {35°C}, leaving chilled water temperature as shown and
10°F {5.56°C} water temperature drop through the evaporator. Capacity ratings are (+/-) 5% and are subject to change without notice.
†
Leaving water temperature setpoints lower than 45°F {4.4°C} may require 3-pass evaporator or special tube construction in order to operate properly. Consult factory for
pricing. Capacities shown have been selected with water.
‡
§
Differential pressure (drop) is for listed nominal design flow of 100% water.
** Tower water flow is based on nominal capacity with 85°F {29.4°C} entering water temperature and 10°F {5.6°C} water temperature drop through the evaporator.
††
GRV: Grooved pipe connections.
‡‡
MCA: Minimum circuit ampacity. MOP: Maximum overcurrent protection. Rated voltage usage range: 200/3/60 (180-220), 230/3/60 (208-254), 400/3/50 (364-440),
460/3/60 (414-506), 575/3/60 (516-633). Standard starter will be Across-the-Line. Solid state available as an added price option.
H-75
Specifications
"
#
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODEL 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+ 7 3+

#APACITY
at 85°F {29°C} condenser water inlet tons {kcal}
†
40°F {4.4°C} 168.5 {509,536} 182.1 {550,661} 252.0 {762,035} 292.9 {885,715} 346.5 {1,047,799} 376.8 {1,139,424}
45°F {7.2°C} 188.7 {570,619} 203.9 {616,583} 281.6 {851,544} 327.1 {989,134} 385.6 {1,166,035} 418.6 {1,265,825}
50°F {10.0°C} 209.9 {634,727} 226.8 {685,832} 312.7 {945,589} 363.1 {1,097,996} 426.8 {1,290,622} 462.6 {1,398,879}
55°F {12.8°C} 232.4 {702,766} 251.2 {759,616} 345.8 {1,045,682} 401.1 {1,212,906} 470.1 {1,421,559} 508.9 {1,538,888}
60°F {15.5°C} 256.2 {774,736} 277.1 {837,936} 380.8 {1,151,520} 441.2 {1,334,167} 515.8 {1,559,753} 557.6 {1,686,154}
Tower water flow gpm {lpm} ** 590.3 {2235} 637.3 {2412} 873.4 {3306} 1009.2 {3820} 1195.5 {4525} 1295.0 {4902}
Condenser pressure drop psi {bar} § 7.1 {0.49} 5.2 {0.36} 6.7 {0.46} 10.4 {0.72} 10.5 {0.73}
A - Height 74.40 {1890} 76.20 {1935} 76.10 {1933}
B - Width 64.90 {1648} 67.90 {1725} 68.20 {1732}
C - Length 125.40 {3185} 143.00 {3632} 145.50 {3696}
Evaporator connections †† 8.00 {203} 10.00 {254}
Condenser connections †† 6.00 {152} 8.00 {203}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Shipping 9292 {4215} 9402 {4265} 14,718 {6676} 16,168 {7334} 16,187 {7342} 16,820 {7629}
Installed 9867 {4476} 10,019 {4545} 15,818 {7175} 17,560 {7965} 17,537 {7955} 18,220 {8264}
5TILITYREQUIREMENTS‡‡
0OWERCONSUMPTIONAMPS -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0 -#! -/0
200V/3 phase/60hz 490 800 525 800 697 1200 N/A
230V/3 phase/60hz 426 700 457 800 606 1000 700 1200 N/A
460V/3 phase/60hz 213 350 229 400 303 500 350 600 414 700 447 800
575V/3 phase/60hz 170 300 183 300 242 400 280 500 331 500 358 600
#APACITY
at 95°F {35°C} ambient and leaving water temperature tons {kcal}
50°F {10°C} 174.0 {526,167} 190.7 {576,667} 257.4 {778,365} 309.0 {934,400} 353.6 {1,069,269} 385.4 {1,165,430}
Evaporator pressure drop psi {bar} § 1.9 {0.13} 1.8 {0.12} 1.6 {0.11} 1.2 {0.08} 1.9 {0.13}
Tower water flow gpm {lpm} ** 486.0 {1840} 532.4 {2015} 714.7 {2705} 853.1{3229} 982.4 {3719} 1070.3 {4052}
Condenser pressure drop psi {bar} § 5.0 {0.35} 5.1 {0.35} 3.6 {0.25} 4.9 {0.34} 7.3 {0.50} 7.4 {0.51}
Power consumption, amps ‡‡ MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP MCA MOP
400V/3 phase/50hz 199 350 215 350 228 450 333 500 394 700 414 700
H-76
TPHX048-0917 STEEL PUMP TANKS PTCS AND PTSS SERIES
Efficient Operation
And Quality Construction
Conair’s PTCS (carbon steel), and PTSS (stainless steel) Series
Pump Tanks are designed to meet and exceed the needs of your
application. Fully engineered for a complete range of tower or
chiller applications, Conair’s tanks provide the highest quality
design and construction features available.
This series of pump tanks promises years of trouble-free
operation with the use of high quality components.
Model PTSS-0450
Choose Carbon Steel or Stainless Steel
Conair incorporates more value-added

features into every pump/reservoir system ` Quality construction, safe operation and simple maintenance
than anyone else. Every PTCS and PTSS All pumps are mounted on a solid deck for added strength, serviceability, and safety.
tank includes standard, full-size pump trim, Reservoirs are constructed of rugged plate steel for superior strength and reliability.
extended pump suction legs, inside and ` Leak-free construction
outside welded seams, and solid steel decking Steel reservoir seams are double welded, inside and out, for the ultimate protection
under the pump. from leaks and corrosion. Carbon steel reservoir interiors are carefully covered with a
thick coat of marine duty coal tar epoxy to prevent water-to-metal contact and extend
High-efficiency, close-coupled, non-
reservoir life.
overloading centrifugal pumps are precisely
matched to your application, providing ` Easy to operate
optimum flow and pressure to the process The Conair programmable controller comes with digital temperature display and RTD
with reduced electrical costs, and improving probe that controls temperature by cycling the tower fan and recirculating pump. The
motor life by assuring the motor operates control includes a high temperature alarm with indicator light. Liquid-filled pressure
within its horsepower rating. gauges enable accurate flow adjustment. All control panels conform to cUL 508A.
Conair’s full-sized pump suction legs feature ` Quick installation

a 45° angle opening to prevent vortexing By using the grooved pipe connecting system, the need for flexible couplings is
and pump cavitation. This also enables the reduced, eliminating pipe stress at start-up. Grooved connections quickly assemble
and disassemble for fast installation, maintenance, and reconfiguration when adding
tank to operate at a lower water level, saving
or changing pumps. Conair’s prewired and mounted control panel is hardwired to
water costs and reducing the use of valuable
pump motors and all alarms, simplifying field installation and significantly reducing
chemicals that may otherwise overflow to installation costs.
drain at shutdown.

H-77
Pump Curves
Process Pumps for Water
Water at 50°F, 60 Hz
110
100
90
80
70
60H
Pump Pressure (PSI)
60 50D
20D 25D 50H
7.5D 10D
40D
50 15D
5D
40 30D
15C
25E
30
10C
20E
5C
20
10
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
Pump Flow (GPM) Form 5-226.11

April 2016
Recirculation Pumps for

Water Water at 50°F, 60 Hz
45
40
35
30
Pump Pressure (PSI)
30E
25
10E
25C
20
20B
15 7.5F
5A
15B
2A
1.5A
10 10B
3A
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600
Pump Flow (GPM) Form 5-227.11

April 2016
Pump curves do not reflect pressure drops due to internal piping.

H-7
Reservoir Features
01
01
PVC elbow at reservoir overflow increases holding capacity
02
Extended pump suction legs with 45° angle backcut prevents 02
vortexing and pump cavitation
Options
• Single or dual standby pumps for process and recirculating • Factory-installed and wired alarms with panel mounted indicator
eliminate downtime. Pumps are available with complete connecting lights warn of low flow, low pressure, low level and high
trim, including discharge manifold and isolation valves. temperatures. Sonalert horn with silencer switch warns of system
failure.
• Automatic switching to standby pump protects against downtime
due to pump failure. • Solid-state sensor with alarm provides trouble-free sensing of low
water levels.
• Full insulation maintains reservoir water temperature and eliminates
“sweating”. • For operator protection, a fused disconnect shuts off power before
door is opened for maintenance or inspection.
• Premium efficiency motors cut electrical operating costs and offer
rapid payback with utility rebate programs. • Panel-installed programmable logic controller (PLC) allows control
sequences and alarm settings to be customized for individual
• Unbreakable sight glass features shutoff valves and brass safety
process requirements.
rods; allows for a quick visual check of reservoir operating level.
• Reservoir support legs conserve valuable floor space, support a
• Tank cover prevents contamination and evaporation.
cooling tower to reduce roof loading and eliminate additional roof
support costs.
Specifications
To process To chiller or cooling tower
C
Overflow
connection
Make-up
valve
Water level
sightglass
A
Temperature
sensor port
Drain
connection
D B

H-7
Specifications
Carbon Steel Models PTCS-2800 PTCS-3700 PTCS-4500* PTCS-6000*
Performance characteristics gallon {liter}†
Capacity to overflow 2775 {10,504} 3710 {14,044} 4700 {17,791} 5645 {21,369}
Operating capacity 2100 {7949} 2815 {10,652} 3560 {13,476} 4280 {16,202}
Operating chiller 2450 {9274} 3300 {12,491} 4155 {15,728} 4990 {18,889}
Dimensions inch {mm}‡
A - Height 102 {2591} 107 {2718}
B - Width 96 {2438} 127 {3226} 151 {3835}
C - Tank length 71 {1803} 95 {2413} 105 {2667}
D - Total length 168 {4267} 173 {4394}
Connections NPT inch
Overflow 4.0
Make-up 1.0
Drain 2.0
Weight lb {kg}
Shipping 5500 {2495} 7500 {3402} 10,500 {4763} 16,000 {7257}
Operating 29,500 {13,381} 39,000 {17,690} 50,000 {22,680} 63,000 {28,576}
Stainless Steel Models PTSS-0275 PTSS-0450 PTSS-0700 PTSS-1000 PTSS-1000XL PTSS-1300 PTSS-1300XL
Capacity to overflow 265 {1003} 430 {1628} 695 {2630} 1025 {3880} 1000 {3785} 1290 {4883} 1250 {4731}
Operating capacity 185 {700} 305 {1154} 485 {1836} 720 {2725} 700 {2650} 905 {3426} 880 {3331}
Operating chiller 225 {852} 370 {1400} 590 {2233} 875 {3312} 850 {3218} 1090 {4126} 1060 {4012}
A - Height 49 {1244} 52 {1321} 64 {1626} 52 {1321}
B - Width 60 {1524} 72 {1829} 84 {2133} 72 {1829} 84 {2133}
C - Tank length 23 {584} 36 {914} 48 {1219} 71 {1803} 59 {1498} 71 {1803} 59 {1498}
D - Total length 60 {1524} 72 {1829} 96 {2438} 144 {3657}
Overflow 4.0
Make-up 1.0
Drain 1.0 1.5
Weight lb {kg}
Shipping 2000 {907} 2500 {1134} 3000 {1361} 3400 {1542} 3600 {1633}
Operating 4500 {2041} 6500 {2948} 9000 {4082} 12,500 {5670} 14,500 {6577}
Stainless Steel Models PTSS-1600 PTSS-1600XL PTSS-1700 PTSS-2100 PTSS-2800 PTSS-3700 PTSS-4500* PTSS-6000*
Capacity to overflow 1570 {5943} 1525 {5773} 1725 {6530} 2075 {7855} 2775 {10,504} 3710 {14,043} 4700 {17,791} 5645 {21,368}
Operating capacity 1105 {4183} 1060 {4013} 1210 {4580} 1575 {5962} 2100 {7949} 2815 {10,655} 3560 {13,476} 4280 {16201}
Operating chiller 1330 {5035} 1270 {4807} 1460 {5527} 1750 {6624} 2450 {9274} 3300 {12492} 4155 {15,728} 4990 {18,889}
A - Height 76 {1930} 66 {1676} 78 {1981} 102 {2591} 107 {2718}
B - Width 72 {1829} 84 {2133} 96 {2438} 127 {3226} 151{3835}
C - Tank length 71 {1803} 59 {1498} 71 {1803} 95 {2413} 105 {2667}
D - Total length 144 {3657} 156 {3962} 168 {4267} 173 {4394}
Overflow 4.0
Make-up 1.0
Drain 1.5 2.0
Weight lb {kg}
Shipping 4000 {1814} 4500 {2041} 5000 {2268} 5500 {2495} 7500 {3402} 10,500 {4763} 16,000 {7257}
Operating 17,000 {7711} 19,500 {8845} 22,500 {10,205} 29,500 {13,380} 39,000 {17,690} 50,000 {22,679} 63,000 {28,576}
* Pump deck shipped separately, field connection required.
†
Operating level based upon allowing for 30 ft {9144 mm} of vertical riser drain down and for tower systems the typical cooling tower drain down.
‡
Dimensions and weights shown are for a typical 3-pump arrangement. Actual weights and dimensions will vary depending on pump and option selections.

H-
TPHX047-0317 FIBERGLASS PUMP TANKS 04&'3%2)%3
Rust-Free Operation
For Years of
Reliable Service
Conair’s PTFG (fiberglass) Series Pump Tanks are designed
to meet and exceed the needs of your application. Fully
engineered for a complete range of tower or chiller applications,
Conair’s tanks provide the highest quality design and
construction features available.
This series of pump tanks promises years of trouble-free
operation with the use of high quality components.
-ODEL04&'
To Eliminate Corrosion Issues — Choose Fiberglass
Conair incorporates more value-added

features into every pump/reservoir system ` 1UALITYCONSTRUCTIONSAFEOPERATIONANDEASYMAINTENANCE
than anyone else. Every PTFG tank includes All pumps are mounted on a solid deck for added strength, serviceability, and safety.
standard, full-size pump trim, extended pump Reservoirs are constructed of thick fibre-reinforced plastic (FRP) for superior strength
suction legs and solid steel decking under the and reliability. Horizontal stiffeners are used for extra strength. Interiors are coated
with a smooth white gelcoat lining.
pump.
High-efficiency, close-coupled, non- ` %CONOMICALTERNATIVETOSTAINLESSSTEEL
The PTFG Series fiberglass reservoirs offer a significantly less expensive alternative to
overloading centrifugal pumps are precisely
stainless steel reservoirs in applications where corrosion can be problematic.
matched to your application, providing
optimum flow and pressure to the process ` %ASYTOOPERATE
with reduced electrical costs, and improving The Conair programmable controller comes with digital temperature display and a RTD
motor life by assuring the motor operates probe that controls temperature by cycling the tower fan and recirculating pump. The
within its horsepower rating. control includes a high temperature alarm with indicator light. Liquid-filled pressure
gauges enable accurate flow adjustment. Isolation cocks prevent gauge pressure
Conair’s full-sized pump suction legs feature fluctuation and extend gauge life.
a 45° angle opening to prevent vortexing
and pump cavitation. This also enables the ` 1UICKINSTALLATION
tank to operate at a lower water level, saving By using the grooved pipe connecting system, the need for flexible couplings is
reduced, eliminating pipe stress at start-up. Grooved connections quickly assemble
water costs and reducing the use of valuable
and disassemble for fast installation, maintenance, and reconfiguration when adding
chemicals that may otherwise over-flow to
or changing pumps. Conair’s prewired and mounted control panel is hardwired to
drain at shutdown. pump motors and all alarms, simplifying field installation and significantly reducing
installation costs.
H-81
Reservoir Features
01
Fiberglass tank divider 01
02
Make-up valve assembly guarantees constant water level
02
Control Panel
All Conair PTFG Series control panels come

completely prewired and use only high
quality components.
Options
• Single or dual standby pumps for process and recirculating • Factory-installed and wired alarms with panel mounted indicator
eliminate downtime. Pumps are available with complete connecting lights warn of low flow, low pressure, low level and high
trim, including discharge manifold and isolation valves. temperatures. Sonalert horn with silencer switch warns of system
failure.
• Automatic switching to standby pump protects against downtime
due to pump failure. • Solid-state sensor with alarm provides trouble-free sensing of low
water levels.
• Full 0.75 inch {19mm} insulation maintains reservoir water
temperature and eliminates “sweating”. • For operator protection, a fused disconnect shuts off power before
door is opened for maintenance or inspection.
• Premium efficiency motors cut electrical operating costs and offer
rapid payback with utility rebate programs. • Panel-installed programmable logic controller (PLC) allows control
sequences and alarm settings to be customized for individual
• Unbreakable sight glass features shutoff valves and brass safety
process requirements.
rods; allows for a quick visual check of reservoir operating level.
• Reservoir support legs conserve valuable floor space, support a
• Tank cover prevents contamination and evaporation.
cooling tower to reduce roof loading and eliminate additional roof
support costs.
H-82
Pump Curves
0ROCESS0UMPSFOR 7ATER
7ATERATª&(Z
110
100
90
80
70
60H
0UMP 0RESSURE 03)
60 50D
20D 25D 50H
7.5D 10D
40D
50 15D
5D
40 30D
15C
25E
30
10C
20E
5C
20
10
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200
0UMP &LOW '0- Form 5-226.11

April 2016
2ECIRCULATION0UMPSFOR
7ATER7ATERATª&(Z
45
40
35
30
0UMP 0RESSURE 03)
30E
25
10E
25C
20
20B
15 7.5F
5A
15B
2A
1.5A
10 10B
3A
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600
0UMP &LOW '0- Form 5-227.11

April 2016
Pump curves do not reflect pressure drops due to internal piping.
H-83
Specifications
To process To chiller or cooling tower
#
Overflow
connection
Make-up
valve
Water level
sightglass
!
Temperature
sensor port
Drain
connection
$ "
3IDEVIEW &RONTVIEW
(Electrical control panel and variable frequency
drives not shown in this view for clarity.)
-ODELS 04&' 04&' 04&' 04&' 04&' 04&'
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICSgallon {liter}*
Capacity to overflow 275 {1041} 470 {1779} 705 {2669} 1105 {4183} 1615 {6113} 2200 {8328}
Operating capacity 160 {606} 335 {1268} 480 {1817} 710 {2688} 1165 {4410} 1600 {6057}
Operating chiller 200 {757} 355 {1344} 540 {2044} 850 {3218} 1345 {5091} 1790 {6776}
$IMENSIONS inch {mm}†
A - Height 52 {1321} 55 {1397} 84 {2133} 86 {2184}
B - Width 70 {1778} 57 {1448} 81 {2057} 74 {1880} 81 {2057} 98 {2489}
C - Tank length 33 {838} 57 {1448} 59 {1498} 82 {2083} 84 {2134}
D - Total length 62 {1575} 98 {2489} 122 {3099} 146 {3708}
#ONNECTIONSNPT inch
Overflow 4.0
Make-up 1.0
Drain 1.0 2.0
7EIGHT lb {kg} †
Shipping 2000 {907} 2500 {1134} 3000 {1361} 3500 {1588} 4000 {1814} 4500 {2041}
Operating 4200 {2041} 6400 {2903} 9000 {4082} 14,200 {6441} 17,300 {7847} 24,100 {10,932}
* Operating level based upon allowing for 30 ft {9144 mm} of vertical riser drain down and for tower systems the typical cooling tower drain down.
†
Dimensions and weights shown are for a typical 3-pump arrangement. Actual weights and dimensions will vary depending on pump and option selections.
H-84
TPHX023-0317 COOLING WATER STRAINERS34!).,%3334%%,#&33%2)%3
Simple and Efficient

Space-Saving Design
Conair’s stainless steel CFS Series strainers provide an economical
solution for your full-flow cooling water filtration needs.
The CFS Series strainers significantly reduce particulate and

debris in cooling water, maximizing cooling system efficiency.
As water enters the bottom of the strainer and flows upward,
heavier sediment and debris is deflected and accelerated
downward into the large debris reservoir in the base of the
strainer. Sediment and debris are then purged from the reservoir
through the debris flush port. #&3SERIESSTRAINERS
Minimal Maintenance; No Moving Parts
The CFS Series Strainers are all constructed

` 3TAINLESSSTEELCONSTRUCTION
of T304 stainless steel, including the housing
Strainer housing and screen filter element are constructed of T304 stainless steel.
and the screen frames.
` #OMPACTSPACE SAVINGDESIGN
The patented conical strainer screen allows
Reduces floor space requirements.
the larger debris to fall into the reservoir while
sealing the clean water in the upper chamber. ` ,OWPRESSURELOSS
All models have 1/4 inch stainless steel inlet All models operate with less than 1 PSI pressure loss at maximum flow when clean.
and outlet gauges as standard.
` ,ARGEDEBRISRESERVOIR
To monitor the system pressure at inlet and Heavier debris and particulate fall down, away from the filter screen into the debris
outlet, add the optional pressure differential reservoir, and can be flushed while the strainer is in service. Backflushing is
alarm (PDA) package. When the filter screen not required when purging the reservoir.
becomes clogged, the audible/visual alarm ` .OMINIMUMFLOWRATES
alerts personnel that the strainer screen Each model accommodates a wide range of flow rates with minimum flow
needs servicing. requirements.
The optional automatic timer flush (ATF) ` #HOOSEMESHOPTIONS

package uses a time-based valve controller to Available screen meshes include 16, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, 120, 150, and 200, as
flush the debris reservoir. well as 1/4 inch and 1/8 inch perforated sheet.
H-85
TPHX023-0317 COOLING WATER STRAINERS34!).,%3334%%,#&33%2)%3
Features
01 05 01
2EMOVABLESTRAINERLID with stainless #ONICALSTRAINERSCREEN patented
steel bolts and brass nuts on larger design separates water from large debris.
models, clamped lids on smaller models. 06 05
02 /UTLETPRESSUREGAUGEmeasures water 02
pressure on outlet side of screen.
#LEANWATEROUTLET exits to process.
07 06
03 )NLETPRESSUREGAUGE monitors inlet
#LEANWATERSEPARATIONSEAL seals side of screen. 03 08
strainer and separates water from debris. 08 07
)NLET dirty water enters strainer. 04
04
$EBRISFLUSHPORTfor cleaning reservoir.
09 09
(1.5 inches {38.1 mm} male NPT drain ,ARGEDEBRISRESERVOIR captures and
port on all sizes.) collects sediment.
Specifications
# #
" "
!
!
* Maximum flow varies depending on solids loading
$ $ and viscosity.
†
With no options installed.
% with a Conair representative for the most current
information.
#&3 #&3 #&3 #&3 #&3 #&3

-ODEL #&3 #&3 #&3 # #&3 " #&3 #&3 #&3
Max. flow* gal/min {m3/min} 100 {0.38} 200 {0.76} 350 {1.32} 750 {2.84} 1300 {4.9} 2000 {7.6}
Max. pressure rating PSI 125 150
A - Height 16.4 {41.5} 24.9 {63.2} 27.2 {69.2} 25.9 {65.7} 38.0 {96.5} 49.0 {124.5} 60.2 {153.0}
B - Width 6.7 {16.7} 9.0 {22.9} 11.5 {29.2} 17.0 {43.2} 23.0 {58.4} 30.0 {76.2}
C - Depth 9.3 {23.7} 12.7 {32.2} 19.2 {48.9} 24.5 {62.2} 31.4 {79.7} 39.7 {101.0}
D - Height to outlet port 11.7 {29.7} 18.6 {47.3} 18.2 {46.2} 29.1 {73.9} 35.3 {89.7} 45.6 {115.7}
E - Height to inlet port N/A 6.8 {17.3} 10.2 {26.0} 11.8 {30.1} 13.2 {33.5}
Inlet size, type inches {mm} 2 NPT 3 NPT 4 {102} flanged 6 {152} flanged 8 {203} flanged 10 {254} flanged
Outlet size, type inches {mm} 2 NPT 3 NPT 4 {102} flanged 6 {152} flanged 8 {203} flanged 10 {254} flanged
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Installed † 15 {7} 30 {14} 65 {29} 125 {57} 230 {104} 400 {181}
Lid closure type clamp bolt

Screen mesh sizes 16, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, 120, 150, 200, 1/4 inch {6.35 mm} perforated sheet, 1/8 inch {3.18 mm} perforated sheet
Gasket type EDPM
H-86
TPHX024-0317 TOWER WATER FILTER SYSTEMS3-&&),4%23934%-3
Removes Solids From

the Cooling System
This uniquely designed media filter is ideal for removing
suspended solids in the cooling system.
The special media removes solids down to 0.5 microns. As

particulates are removed from the process water, the unit
will automatically backflush to self-clean based on time or
increasing pressure drop.
-ODEL3-&
Unit Reduces Installation and Downtime
The SMF Series media filter systems are

delivered to you preassembled on a skid ` 7ILLNOTCORRODE
mounted package. Only filter inlet and filter Strong, light modeled fiberglass is rated to 50 psig and will not corrode. Choose
outlet connections and electrical hookup is your model from a range of sizes. The exclusive distribution system minimizes
required on tower water backwash systems. backwash time.
The systems include a centrifugal selfpriming
pump, pre-strainer, fiberglass vessel, bronze ` 0RE ASSEMBLEDPIPINGSYSTEM
three-way valves and control center. All interconnecting pipe is sturdy schedule 80 PVC. None of the ferrous components
are wetted. The pump is bronze with a self priming prestrainer. The pump motor is
Pre-plumbed and factory tested, this unit
totally enclosed and fan cooled. The prestrainer can be separately maintained.
will provide years of service with only minor
maintenance. Your process cooling water will
` !UTOMATICBACKWASHING
be clean and efficient allowing you to achieve
maximum profits. Standard flow is from down to up in the media vessel. When the media is clogged the
system changes the flow to upward in the media, fluidizing the bed which washes the
Units can be specified with either process trapped debris down the drain.
(tower) water backflush or city water
backflush, which requires an extra hookup. ` /UTDOORDUTYCONTROLS
Epoxy coated NEMA 3R control center contains disconnect, motor starter with thermal
overload, control circuit transformer, solid state time, NEMA 4 differential pressure
switch and manual backwash button.
H-87
TPHX024-0317 TOWER WATER FILTER SYSTEMS3-&&),4%23934%-3
Specifications
NEMA-rated
Inlet/outlet control panel
pressure gauges
Electrical valve
Auto air vent actuator
Manual air vent
See detail below
! (Universal Face
Piping Options) for
back wash piping
configurations.
2 inch
filter inlet
" 304 stainless steel
-ODEL 3-& 3-& 3-& 3-& 3-& 3-& 5NIVERSAL&ACE

0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS 0IPING/PTIONS
Cooling tower system capacity tons to 280 to 460 to 650 to 940 to 1280 to 1590
Pump Hp {kW} 1 {.75} 2 {1.5} 3 {2.3} 5 {3.8}
Pump flow rate GPM {l/min} 43 {162.8} 63 {238.5} 98 {370.9} 142 {537.5} 192 {726.8} 253 {953.9}
City water
0IPE#ONNECTIONSNPT inches
inlet
Inlet suction strainer 2 1/2 flanged 3 flanged 4 flanged
Outlet 2 FNPT 3 FNPT
Drain (backwash out) 2 FNPT 3 FNPT City water
A - Height 53 {135} 61 {155}
B - Width 57 {145} 58 {147} 66 {168} 76 {193} 88 {224} 93 {236}
Depth 29 {74} 30 {76} 39 {99} 42 {107} 48 {122}
Backflush water requirements
Backwash flow rate GPM {l/min} 43 {163} 63 {238} 98 {371} 142 {538} 200 {757} 250 {946}
2-minute backwash cycle
Tower
86 {326} 126 {477} 196 {742} 284 {1075} 400 {1514} 500 {1893} water
discharge volume gal {l}
Installed 615 {279} 770 {349} 1165 {528} 1900 {862} 3000 {1361} 4360 {1978}
Shipping 410 {186} 425 {193} 500 {227} 700 {318} 900 {408} 1100 {499}
6OLTAGETotal full load amps based on motor size
City water
208v/3 phase/60 Hz 6.6 4.0 10.6 16.7 24.2 inlet
230v/3 phase/60 Hz 6.0 3.6 9.6 15.2 22.0 Auto city/

460v/3 phase/60 Hz 3.0 1.8 4.8 7.6 11.0 Tower
combo
575v/3 phase/60 Hz 2.4 1.4 3.9 6.1 9.0
‡
H-88
TPHX033-0317 HEAT EXCHANGERS4/7%2)3/,!4)/.0&3%2)%3
Eliminate Fouling on
Cooling Surfaces
Plate and frame type heat exchangers offer more heat transfer in
less space. The Conair Tower Isolation PF Series perform with one
third to one fifth the surface area of conventional shell and tube
heat exchangers for the same application. By isolating the tower
water from the plant cooling passages the reduction in preventative
maintenance reduces staffing and quickly pays for itself.
-ODEL0&
Maintenance Saving Tower Water Isolation
Cooling towers, while very efficient in cooling

processes, also collect debris and grow ` 3UPERIORHEATTRANSFER
dangerous biologicals in the water. The Conair Get the most heat transfer with the least temperature difference. And keep tower
process water to within 3° or 5°F {1.6° or 2.8°C} of the actual tower water at design
Tower Isolation Heat Exchangers PF Series
heat load.
isolate the contaminated water to the tower
pump, filter and heat exchanger only. ` 4RUECOUNTERCURRENTFLOW
All heat exchangers perform most efficiently and output the smallest approach with
These components, while still requiring countercurrent flow. Multipass shell and tube types lose some of this effectiveness.
consistent preventative maintenance for peak
performance, isolate any biologicals from the ` %XPANDABLEDESIGN
rest of the facility. Biocide in the evaporative Many models are expandable to meet increasing loads just by adding plates. The unit
towers does not flow freely throughout the can be backflushed to clean, and disassembled to restore original performance after
plant. long periods of use.
` ,OWPRESSUREDROP
The PF Series Heat Exchangers are available
Pressure drops of 10 psi or less at design keeps pump power losses to a minimum
in 3-degree and 5-degree approach models.
and energy costs low.
Process water can get to within 3° or 5°F
{1.6° or 2.8°C} of the tower temperature at a ` 2EDUCEDMINERALIZATION
designated day. The 10°F {5.6°C} standard range Since plant process water is not continuously concentrated plating of minerals on
(difference of inlet and outlet temperatures) heat transfer surfaces is significantly reduced and preventative maintenance nearly
works with standard tower designs. eliminated.
H-89
TPHX033-0317 HEAT EXCHANGERS4/7%2)3/,!4)/.0&3%2)%3
Specifications
&ª $UTY4OWER $UTY (OT#OLD U0 #ONNECTIONS ,ENGTH 7IDTH (EIGHT 7EIGHTLBS
!PPROACH 4ONS "45HR &LOW2ATE "OTH3IDES
INCHES INCHES INCHES
-ODELS "45HR '0- $RY 7ET
PF3-20 19.88 298200 60 4.00 2" FNPT 31.42 12.13 47.0 464 504
PF3-30 29.82 447300 90 4.23 2" FNPT 31.42 12.13 47.0 509 569
PF3-40 39.76 596400 120 4.52 2" FNPT 47.26 12.13 47.0 592 672
PF3-50 49.70 745500 150 5.00 2" FNPT 47.26 12.13 47.0 630 727
PF3-60 59.60 894700 180 10.00 4" 150 lb 34.49 20.50 72.1 1497 1637
PF3-75 74.60 1118300 225 10.00 4" 150 lb 34.49 20.50 72.1 1541 1680
PF3-85 84.50 1267400 255 10.00 4" 150 lb 34.49 20.50 72.1 1581 1743
PF3-100 99.40 1491100 300 10.00 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 72.1 1678 1859
PF3-115 114.30 1714800 345 9.80 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 72.1 1727 1937
PF3-125 124.26 1863900 375 9.90 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 72.1 1766 1999
PF3-170 169.00 2534900 510 10.00 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 72.1 1916 2236
PF3-175 174.00 2609500 525 10.00 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 72.1 1934 2264
PF3-185 184.00 2758600 555 10.00 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 72.1 1969 2318
PF3-210 208.70 3131400 630 10.00 4" 150 lb 62.09 20.50 72.1 2117 2525
PF3-240 238.60 3578800 720 10.00 4" 150 lb 62.09 20.50 72.1 2240 2719
PF3-270 268.40 4026100 810 10.00 4" 150 lb 69.89 20.50 72.1 2412 2972
PF3-300 298.20 4473500 900 10.20 4" 150 lb 89.57 20.50 72.1 2587 3203
PF3-340 338.00 5069900 1020 10.00 6" 150 lb 90.31 25.70 77.6 2849 3714
PF3-370 367.80 5517300 1110 9.90 6" 150 lb 90.31 25.70 77.6 2944 3887
PF3-475 477.20 7157600 1440 10.00 6" 150 lb 110.00 25.70 77.6 3430 4693
PF3-500 497.00 7455800 1500 10.00 6" 150 lb 110.00 25.70 77.6 3508 4836
PF3-600 596.50 8947000 1800 10.00 6" 150 lb 110.00 25.70 77.6 3820 5393
PF3-630 628.30 9424200 1896 10.00 8" 150 lb 95.01 31.50 87.3 6078 7882
&ª $UTY4OWER $UTY (OT#OLD U0 #ONNECTIONS ,ENGTH 7IDTH (EIGHT 7EIGHTLBS
!PPROACH 4ONS "45HR &LOW2ATE "OTH3IDES
INCHES INCHES INCHES
-ODELS "45HR '0- $RY 7ET
PF5-20 19.87 298100 60 9.8 2" FNPT 23.62 12.13 47.00 408 432
PF5-30 29.81 447100 90 9.9 2" FNPT 31.42 12.13 47.00 453 489
PF5-40 39.74 596200 120 10 2" FNPT 31.42 12.13 47.00 480 527
PF5-50 49.68 745200 150 9.9 2" FNPT 34.53 20.50 46.63 900 958
PF5-60 59.62 894300 180 9.3 4" 150 lb 34.53 20.50 46.63 950 1018
PF5-75 74.53 1117800 225 10 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 46.63 1004 1091
PF5-85 84.46 1266900 255 9.9 4" 150 lb 49.49 20.50 46.63 1033 1133
PF5-100 99.36 1490500 300 9.9 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 46.63 1062 1182
PF5-115 114.27 1714000 345 9.9 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 46.63 1096 1233
PF5-125 124.21 1863100 375 9.9 4" 150 lb 50.21 20.50 46.63 1116 1264
PF5-170 168.92 2533800 510 10.0 4" 150 lb 62.09 20.50 46.63 1253 1455
PF5-175 173.90 2608400 525 10.0 4" 150 lb 62.09 20.50 46.63 1260 1465
PF5-185 183.83 2757400 555 10.0 4" 150 lb 62.09 20.50 46.63 1287 1508
PF5-210 208.67 3130000 630 10.0 4" 150 lb 69.89 20.50 46.63 1380 1638
PF5-240 238.48 3577200 720 10.0 4" 150 lb 89.57 20.50 46.63 1530 1835
PF5-270 268.29 4024300 810 10.0 4" 150 lb 89.57 20.50 46.63 1617 1970
PF5-300 298.10 4471500 900 9.9 4" 150 lb 62.71 25.70 77.60 2338 2791
PF5-340 337.85 5067700 1020 9.9 6" 150 lb 62.71 25.70 77.60 2282 2796
PF5-370 367.66 5514900 1110 10.0 6" 150 lb 62.71 25.70 77.60 2344 2908
PF5-475 476.96 7154400 1440 10.0 6" 150 lb 70.63 25.70 77.60 2613 3367
PF5-500 496.84 7452500 1500 10.0 6" 150 lb 70.63 25.70 77.60 2657 3447
PF5-600 596.21 8943000 1800 10.0 6" 150 lb 90.31 25.70 77.60 2998 3970
PF5-630 628.00 9420000 1896 10.0 6" 150 lb 90.31 25.70 77.60 3125 4152
* Pressure drops are measured on new, clean equipment at design flow rates.
H-90
TPNM005-0317 #%.42!,#//,).'3934%-3
Improve Productivity
and Profits with Precise,
Energy Efficient Control
of Process Temperature
Conair’s central cooling systems can put money back in your
pocket by supplying precise process water temperature and
pressure for your application. If you need more than 20 tons
capacity to cool dies, molds, screws, barrels or machine
hydraulics, a central system could be the solution.
Air or Water-Cooled Systems, From 20 to Over 1000 Tons
` #ONSERVEENERGYANDWATER
Replacing portable chillers with a central cooling system can
cut energy costs by as much as a third. Recirculating cooling
water through a tower-chiller system also reduces water and
sewer bills. Optional pressure-controlled variable frequency
drives (VFD’s) provide optimal performance at reduced energy
costs.
` 2EDUCESCRAPANDPRODUCTIONTIME
Precise temperature control at the mold, die, screw or barrel
results in faster cycle times and less warping and shrinkage in
the product.
` )NCREASEMANUFACTURINGFLOORSPACE
Central cooling systems free machine cell space taken by
portable cooling equipment, and can save on expansion/
construction costs.
H-91
TPNM005-0317 #%.42!,#//,).'3934%-3
Let Us Design the Most Effective, Efficient System for Your Application
04
03
CONFIDENTIAL
This drawing, information, and design are property
of THE CONAIR GROUP. This drawing and information
is confidential and must not be copied or made
public without prior written approval from THE CONAIR
GROUP. Acceptance or possession of this drawing
constitutes full agreement with the above conditions.
02 01 The Conair Group

200 West Kensinger Drive
SAMPLE
Cranberry Twp., PA 16066
10-12-11
10-17-11
01 03
)NSTALLATION$RAWINGS 0UMP4ANK!SSEMBLIES
• Complete, color-coded flow schematic • Choose one-piece molded polymer or rugged
drawings show pump curves, electrical stainless steel tank construction
connections and pipe sizes • Single and dual compartment tank designs
We want our central cooling
• Plan view layout drawings with equipment • Automatic float valve and drain for constant
systems to be easy to use, easy
and piping are available water level
to service and easy to expand.
So we design and install these • Heavy-duty industrial pumps
02
systems with maximum efficiency • IEC-rated motor starters
and optimum performance in #ENTRAL#HILLERS • Triple-duty valve performs shut off, check
mind. • Air-cooled or water-cooled models and balancing functions
• Capacities ranging from 20 to more than • Simple push button to high-end PLC with
Just tell us about the materials 500 tons touchscreen controls
you process and what you want • Single, dual or multiple circuit evaporators • Variable frequency drives
to cool. We’ll help you determine • State-of-the-art scroll and helical rotary
what kind of system is the best screw compressors 04
choice for your facility and • Factory-assembled refrigeration #OOLING4OWERS
application. components, including piping, sight glasses, • Seamless, rust-free design
filter/dryers and expansion valves • Capacities from 10 to 500 tons
• Complete indicator and fault light packages • Single-point inlet water connections
• Oil, high refrigerant and low refrigerant • Bottom or side outlet connections
pressure switches • Lightweight molded polyethylene tower is as
• Flow and pumpdown switches strong as steel, but costs less to install
• Microprocessor controls for reliable, long- • 15-year warranty on tower shell
term operation • 5-year warranty on fan/blower motors
H-92
TPHX055-0317 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITS4(%2-/,!4/2!##%33/2)%3
Thermolator® Accessories
3TACK2ACK
To be used for stacking two Thermolators in a vertical configuration. Rack will be
provided with standard grade casters (optional medical grade for Medline units) to allow
mobility of the stacked Thermalators. Construction will be black powder coated carbon
steel (optional medical white or stainless steel for MedLine). Adjustable wheel tracks will
support both older and newer style Conair Thermolators (TW-S, TW-P and TW-V).
0ART.UMBER 3TACK2ACK
330-040-02 Standard Painted Black
330-040-01 MedLine Painted Medical White
330-040-04 MedLine Stainless Steel
2EMOTE(-)
Used to duplicate the control functionality of the TW-P front panel HMI. HMI will come with
a designated length of unprotected 5-wire cable complete with termination connector
to match Thermolator connector. Note: In order for the remote HMI to be functional with
the Thermator, the unit must be provided with the TW-P control platform and an optional
remote HMI connection point must be ordered with the Thermolator.
0ART.UMBER #ONSTRUCTION #ABLE,ENGTH

331-045-04-004 Stainless Steel 15 Feet
2EMOTE4EMPERATURE3ENSOR
PT100 RTD to be field wired to Thermolator and can be used as the sensor “in control”
of the Thermolator. Probe will be 3-1/2” straight with 30 feet of either un-protected or
armored 2-wire shielded cable
0ART.UMBER -OUNTING4YPE 0ROBE4YPE #ABLE4YPE #ABLE,ENGTH

209-518-28 None Provided 3-1/2" straight Bare Cable 15 Feet
209-518-30 None Provided 3-1/2” straight Armored Cable 30 Feet
#OOLING7ATER0RESSURE2EGULATING6ALVE
To be field installed on “Cooling In” piping. Helps to prevent nuisance opening of pressure
relief valve when high cooling water pressure combined with Thermolator pump pressure
could open the safety pressure relief valve. Part Number 266-712-01.
H-93
TPHX055-0317 TEMPERATURE CONTROL UNITS4(%2-/,!4/2!##%33/2)%3
Thermolator® Accessories
&LOW-ETER
Water flow meter kits to be field installed on Thermolator “To Process” piping.
$IFFERENTIAL0RESSURE style flow meters will be either carbon or stainless
steel, suitable for maximum operating temperature of 212°F {100°C} or 350°F
{175°C} with maximum flow rates of 60 or 100 GPM {225 or 375 lpm} as
scheduled. Meter is provided with integral analog indication of flow rate and
can be used on any Thermolator control platform. Meter can be provided with
an optional auxiliary alarm contact for field connection to customer’s alarm.
4URBINE style water flow meters will be either carbon or stainless steel
suitable for maximum operating temperature of 350°F {175°C} with maximum
flow rate of 180 GPM {680 lpm} as scheduled. Meter can be field wired to
Thermolator control panel to allow visual display of flow rate on TW-P front
panel. (Only available on TW-P models.)
0ART -AXIMUM !UXILIARY %LECTRICAL -AXIMUM 4YPEOF
.UMBER -ATERIAL &LOW GPM {lpm} #ONTACTS $ISPLAY 3ETUP 4EMPERATURE -ETER #ONTROLLER
331-046-03-01 Carbon Steel 60 {225} No 212°F {100°C}
331-046-03-02 Stainless Steel 60 {225} No 212°F {100°C}
331-046-03-05 Carbon Steel 60 {225} Yes 212°F {100°C}
Integral on
331-046-03-06 Stainless Steel 60 {225} Yes 212°F {100°C} Differential
Meter Stand Alone Any
331-046-03-07 Carbon Steel 100 {375} Yes 212°F {100°C} Pressure
331-046-03-08 Stainless Steel 100 {375} Yes 350°F {176°C}
331-046-03-20 Carbon Steel 180 {680} No Shown on 350°F {176°C}
Wired to TW-P Turbine TW-P
331-046-03-21 Stainless Steel 180 {680} No TW-P display 350°F {176°C})
5NIVERSAL!LARM"OX
In noisy manufacturing environments, immediately see and hear where your process
problem is before you lose production and quality. The Conair Universal Alarm Box signals
with a loud, clear buzzer and a flashing strobe light notifying you of a problem.
The alarm box is designed to alert workers of a problem with dryers, blenders, loading,
material flow and material levels. Connect directly to existing alarm signals, or use where
no alarm signals presently exist. See the Audible/Visual Alarm and Alarm Kits specification
sheet in the Conveying section for more details.
&IELD2ETROFIT+ITS
We offer a variety of field retrofit kits to help you add optional functions and features to units that are already in service. Those include
cooling valve kits, communication kits, pump size change kits, heater size change kits and many more.
Please contact Conair Parts at 1.800.654.6661 with your requirements. Chances are we already have a kit to help. If not, we will generate a
parts kit for you.
H-94
Size Reduction
Storage
Beside-the-Machine Granulators
33ERIES '
63ERIES '
3ERIES '
Conveyin
y g 3ERIES '
3ERIES '
3ERIES '
Central Granulators
3ERIES '
Drying
3ERIES '
Under Press/Low Profile Granulators

!5NDERTHE0RESS '
,3ERIES '
Blending/Feedin
ing
Shredders
'03ERIES '
&,%83ERIES '
5,42!3ERIES '
Heat Transferr
Size Red
duction
Upstrea
eamm
Downstream
Size Reduction Quick Reference
Thick-Walled
Thin-Walled
Pipe Profile
Film/Sheet
Web Scrap
Purgings
Runners
Medium
Sprues
Small
Large
Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts
-ODELS
#UTTING
0RODUCT !CCESSTO 2OTOR -OTOR 4HROUGHPUT
-ODEL
#HAMBER !PPLICATIONS
'ROUP #UTTING#HAMBER Configuration (P LBHR[KGHR]
INCHES[MM]
"ESIDE THE -ACHINE
33ERIES X
3CREENLESS
3
[X]
3PLIT(INGED#HAMBER -ULTI 4OOTHED 6ERY,OW20-
[n] s s
X
3
[X]
[n] s s
X
3
[X]
[n] s s
X
3
[X]
[n] s s
63ERIES X
6
[X]
$ROP $OWN#RADLE 3TAGGERED ,OW20-
[n] s s
X
6
[X]
[n] s s
X
6
[X]
[n] s s
X n
6
[X]
[n] s s s s s s
3ERIES X

[X]
[n] s s
X

[X]
[n] s s
X

[X
[n] s s
3ERIES X

[X]
$ROP $OWN#RADLE 3TAGGERED/PEN ,OW20-
[n] s s s s s s s
X

[X]
$ROP $OWN#RADLE 3TAGGERED/PEN
,OW20- [n] s s s s s s s
X

[X]
X

[X]
3ERIES X

[X]
0IVOT#HAMBER /PEN",",
[n] s s s s s s s s s
X

[X]
X

[X]
3ERIES X

[X]
[n] s s s s s s s s
X

[X]
X

[8]
#ENTRAL,ARGE0ART
3ERIES X

[X]
X

[X]
X

[X]
[n] s s s s s s s s s s
3ERIES X /PEN

[X]
0IVOT#HAMBER
",",",

X /PEN

[X]
0IVOT#HAMBER
",",",

X /PEN

[X]
0IVOT#HAMBER
",",",

Size Reduction Quick Reference
Thick-Walled
Thin-Walled
Pipe Profile
Film/Sheet
Web Scrap
Purgings
Runners
Medium
Sprues
Small
Large
Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts
-ODELS
#UTTING
0RODUCT !CCESSTO 2OTOR -OTOR 4HROUGHPUT
-ODEL #HAMBER !PPLICATIONS
'ROUP #UTTING#HAMBER Configuration (P LBHR[KGHR]
INCHES[MM]
5NDER0RESS,OW0Rofile
3ERIES X
!
[X]
[n] s s
,3ERIES X

[X]
$ROP $OWN#RADLE /PEN",
[n] s s
X

[X]
[n] s s
X

[X]
[n] s s
3HEET
0Rofile
0Rofile
(ARD
3CRAP
0IPE
&ILM
&IBER
-ODELS
#UTTING#HAMBER 2OTOR$IAMETER -OTOR

0RODUCT'ROUP -ODEL !PPLICATIONS
INCHES[MM] INCHES[MM] (P
3HREDDERS
'0 '0 X[X] [] s s s
'0 X[X] [] s s s
&,%8 &,%8 X[X] [] n s s s s
&,%8 X[X] [] n s s s s
&,%8 X[X] [] n s s s s
&,%8 X[X] [] n s s s s
&,%8 X[X] [] n s s s s
&,%8 X[X] [] n s s s s
&,%8 X[X] [] n s s s s
5,42! 5,42! X[X] [] n s s s
5,42! X[X] [] n s s s
5,42! X[X] [] n s s s
5,42! X[X] [] n s s s s
5,42! X[X] [] n s s s s
5,42! X[X] [] n s s s s
4HERMOFORM%DGE4RIM2OLL3TOCK
INCH[MM]WIDEFEEDROLLSAVAILABLEFORUSEWITHAPPROPRIATESIZEGRANULATORSFORTHERMOFORMAPPLICATIONS
INCH[MM]WIDEFEEDROLLSAVAILABLEFOREDGETRIMAPPLICATIONS
'UILLOTINE#UTTERSAVAILABLEFORHEAVYGAUGEINCH[MM]ANDGREATER EDGETRIMAPPLICATIONS
!CCESSORIES
s &INES3EPARATION
s 2OLLFEEDS
s #ONVEYORS
s -ETAL$ETECTORS
s "LOWER%VACUATION3YSTEMSNEGATIVEPOSITIVEPRESSURE
TPGX045-0317 METER FEED GRANULATORS33%2)%3
Screenless Slow Speed

Beside-the-Press Recycling
Compact S Series Granulators are ideally suited for metered
robot or conveyor feed beside small injection molding machines.
This quiet, energy efficient granulator features a screenless
cutter housing and ultra-low rotor speed to reduce sprues and
runners to consistently sized granules, virtually free of fines and
longs.
-ODEL3
Ultra-Low RPM for Clean Regrind
The S Series screenless granulators turn

sprues and runners into extremely uniform ` -ULTI TOOTHROTOR
granulate with low energy consumption and Multi-tooth rotor cleanly reduces sprues and runners to consistent sized particles.
Rotors with D2 teeth and cutting wheels can be re-sharpened. The automatic reversing
very little noise.
option helps to clear obstructed material.
Available in three sizes for throughputs of
` %ASYPORTABILITY
up to 40 lb/hr, the S Series granulators are
Large casters allow easy movement; the S Series conveniently services multiple
built around a single, low-speed rotor. As the presses. The small footprint accommodates tight spaces and the wide-mouth, flared in-
rotor turns, large crusher blades slide through feed hopper easily handles a range of robot or conveyor drops and sprue/runner sizes.
blind slots in the cutting chamber, breaking
` 1UIETOPERATION
up scrap parts/runners into smaller pieces
The S Series low-speed rotor decreases noise levels with most materials to as low as
that are further reduced by a series of cutters
80 dbA and in some cases as low as 70 dbA, eliminating the need for sound enclosures.
machined into the rotor. These cutters pass
through stationary combs to produce properly ` .OTOOLSACCESS
sized regrind fall into a catch bin. No screen Hand knobs for the hopper and bin provide fast convenient access to the rotor and
swing-open cutter housing cover. Thorough clean out and material changeover is easily
is needed.
accomplished in minutes.
The resulting regrind is uniform in size and
` 2EDUCEMACHINEWEARPRESERVEMATERIAL
contains very little dust or fines, so it can
When the automatic reversing option is included, the granulator will reverse rotor
be metered evenly back into the process rotation up to three times to clear any thick material from the cutting circle before
providing consistent melt homogeneity for automatically shutting down. This option eliminates potential damage to your granulator
higher-quality molding. and cutting blades.
G-1
Feeding/Evacuation Configurations
(AND&EEDING 2OBOT&EEDING
The standard, clear feed The tall, open top feed hopper
hopper allows easy dropping includes a bolt on funnel that
of scrap into the granulator by provides a large target for robotic
hand. Safe, low speed/ low scrap feeding. The clear hopper
noise operation means the visually confirms that scrap
S Series can be located near is freely moving through the
personnel with no concerns. granulator.
#ONVEYOR&EEDING
Optimized, meter feeding of scrap by a compact, speed-controlled 6ACUUM4AKE OFF%VACUATION
conveyor. Conveyor can include a metal detector that stops A vacuum pick-up tube is used to pull granulate from its
conveying when metal in the scrap is detected. An optional metal compact drawer. Multiple types of loaders/receivers can be used,
detection system in the S Series can also detect tramp metal and programmed to convey by a sensor in the granulator drawer or
stop the granulator. special loading control settings.
6ACUUM3YSTEM%VACUATION
Multiple granulators can be
emptied by a central vacuum
system to a common collection
bin or box. Each granulator is
equipped with a vacuum pick-up
tube and a material line valve,
#OMPRESSED!IRTO%6"%VACUATION
sequenced by the central loading
A pick-up tube with venturi is used to pull granulate from the control (e.g. Conair FLX-128).
granulator drawer and push it into a barrel. Conair's CAML-EVB
compressed air evacuation system can be set to move granulate
on a timed basis, or with a demand sensor.
G-2
Specifications
$ %
# "
-ODELS 3 3 3 3

Maximum throughput* lb/hr {kg/hr} up to 9 {4} up to 20 {9} up to 30 {14} up to 40 {18}
9 x 6.8 9 x 10.4 9 x 14.1 9 x 17.8
Cutting chamber opening inches {mm}
{228 x 173} {228 x 265} {228 x 359} {228 x 453}
Rotor speed rpm 28
Motor power Hp {kW} 3 {2.2}
Cutter size inches {mm} 5 {127}
A - Height 50.6 {1284} 52.1 {1,325} 58.0 {1,473} 57.7 {1,466}
B - Width 24.2 {615 19.0 {485} Cutter wheel (multi-toothed) and large
C - Overall depth 30.8 {782} 50.2 {1,276} 54.0 {1,370} 57.6 {1,466}
crusher blades.
D - Hopper opening width 13.6 {345} 17.6 {448} 19.8 {502} 27.0 {691}
E - Hopper opening depth 13.5 {342}
Options
Specification Notes • Integrated metal detection protects
machine from damage or metal
* Throughputs are provided as a capacity guideline only. Throughput will be greater or lesser than the values
shown according to the shape, size, thickness and properties of the material to be cut. contamination
Consult Conair for a material test or help determining the correct granulator model for your application. • Automatic reversing system is available
Specifications may change without notice. Check with a Conair representative for the most current information for reversing the rotation of the rotor to
easily clear any material obstruction
Features
• Infeed hopper specifically designed for • Energy saving low horsepower • Quiet operation (70 to 80 dB)
beside-the-press manual or robot-fed • Uniform granule size
loading • Multiple safety interlocks prevent injury by
• Heavy-duty construction restricting access to the granulator while
• No sizing screen (screenless)
• No special tools are required to open the operating
• Clear-view hopper design allows the granulator
operator to see the material being • Compact and mobile, caster mounted base
processed • D2 crusher blades and cutting wheels
saves valuable floor space and provides
• Emergency stop button • Re-sharpenable blades and cutting wheels
greater versatility
G-3
G-4
Low-Cost; Fast Delivery,

Compact Design
The V Series model granulators are ideal for the processor who
has small injection molding machines and wants a lot of value
without spending a lot of money.
These quiet, energy efficient granulators conserve valuable floor

space while producing quality regrind from robot-fed sprues,
runners and small parts. These models feature tangential feed
cutting chambers, low-speed motors, and staggered rotors with
replaceable cassette knives.
-ODEL6
Off-the-Shelf, Quick-Ship Granulators
Designed for fast delivery and loaded with

standard features; the V Series models ` ,OW SPEEDROTOR
offer extraordinary value at rock bottom The low-speed rotor decreases noise and flyback during operation and provides a better
quality, consistent regrind.
prices. Stock configuration includes our
highly efficient staggered rotor that provides ` (IGHERTHROUGHPUTLESSDUST
powerful cutting force by concentrating total The tangential feed chamber, combined with scissor-cutting, slant-knife technology, and
granulation energy in one short knife at a staggered rotor results in faster processing, high-quality regrind and less dust.
time. Also included are gap-free throwaway ` .OKNIFERESHARPENINGNEEDED
knives, tangential cutting chamber, rotating Eliminate the costly and time-consuming task of resharpening and resetting knives.
end discs, and low-speed motor. These granulators use cassette knives that are so economical they can be replaced
when worn.
V Series models feature throughput rates from
80 to 140 lbs/hr {36 to 64 kg/hr} in a compact ` 3AFETOOL LESSFULL FRONTACCESS
package designed to accommodate tight Hinged components and a drop-down screen cradle provide easy access to the cutting
spaces and conveyor or robot drops. The chamber and screen area for adjustment and quick cleaning. A single integral limit
V Series granulators are painted soft white switch prevents accidental operation during servicing or clean-out.
only. ` 2EVERSIBLESCREEN
Convenient lift-out screens are reversible for extended life.
Standard options are limited to a choice of
screen size, vacuum tube size and motor ` 3EALEDHOPPERANDVACUUMBINDESIGN
voltage. The sealed design of the hopper chamber and bin prevents material leakage.
2OBOT&EEDING
(AND&EEDING The tall, open top feed hopper
The tall, angled feed hopper includes a flanged inlet that
allows easy dropping of scrap provides a large target for robotic
into the granulator by hand. scrap feeding.
Safe, low speed/ low noise
operation means the V Series can
be located near personnel with
no concerns.
#ONVEYOR&EEDING 6ACUUM4AKE OFF%VACUATION

Optimized, meter feeding of scrap by a compact, speed-controlled A vacuum pick-up tube is used to pull granulate from the
conveyor. Conveyor can include a metal detector that stops compact drawer. Multiple types of loaders/receivers can be used,
conveying when metal in the scrap is detected. programmed to convey by a sensor in the granulator drawer or
special loading control settings.
6ACUUM3YSTEM
%VACUATION
Multiple granulators can
be emptied by a central
vacuum system to a
common collection bin
or box. Each granulator
is equipped with a
#OMPRESSED!IRTO%6"%VACUATION vacuum pick-up tube
A pick-up tube with venturi is used to pull granulate from the and a material line
granulator drawer and push it into a barrel. Conair’s CAML-EVB valve, sequenced by the
compressed air evacuation system can be set to move granulate central loading control
on a timed basis, or continuously. (e.g. Conair FLX-128).
Specifications
-ODELS666 %
$
IN
!
[MM]
" IN #
[MM]
-ODELS 6 6 6

Maximum throughput* lb {kg} up to 80 {36} up to 120 {54} up to 140 {64}
Cutting chamber inches {mm} 6 x 9 {150 x 230} 6 x 14 {150 x 350} 6 x 17 {150 x 432}
Rotor speed rpm 190 190 190
Motor power Hp {kW} {4 - 5 - 6 - 8 mm}
Screen hole sizes inches {mm} 5/32 - 3/16 - 1/4 - 5/16 {4 - 5 - 6 - 8}
Drive type Belt
Hopper type Robot/hand feed
Vacuum discharge side Front
2OTOR
Rotor type Staggered rotor Staggered rotor with cassette knives
Cutting circle inches {mm} 5.9 {150}
+NIVES???
Number of rotating knives 9 (3 x 3) 15 (3 x 5) 18 (3 x 6) Features
• No-tools access
A - Height 49.5 {1260}
B - Width 20.0 {508} 25.0 {635} 28.0 {712} • D2 tool steel knives
C - Depth 24.5 {623} • No knife adjustment
D x E - Hopper opening 19.5 x 28 {580 x 712} • Safety interlock and
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} emergency stop
Installed 353 {160} 441 {200} 485 {220} • Low infeed height
Shipping 428 {194} 516 {234} 560 {254}
• Scissor-cut action knives
6OLTAGESApprox. full load amps (refer to motor nameplate) o
• Caster mounted
208/3 phase/60 Hz 10.0
230/3 phase/60 Hz 9.0
• Low RPM motor
400/3 phase/50 Hz 5.5 • Removable flaps
460/3 phase/60 Hz 5.3 • Tilt-back hopper
575/3 phase/60 Hz 3.7 • Drop-down screen cradle
†
* Throughputs are provided as a capacity guideline only. Throughput will be greater or FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any accessories added such
lesser than the values shown according to the selected screen size and the shape, as blower or conveyor motor loads. Includes main 3Hp motor only.
size, thickness and properties of the material to be cut. For true, full FLA for power circuit design of specific machine refer to electrical
diagram of the machine order or nameplate applied to machine at shipment.
Consult Conair for a material test or help determining the correct Granulator model
for your application. Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
Exceptional Value in a
Compact, Quiet Design
6 Series Granulators are ideal for the processor who has small
injection molding machines and wants a lot of value in a small
package.
This quiet, energy efficient granulator conserves valuable floor
space while producing quality regrind from robot-fed sprues,
runners and small parts. All models feature tangential feed,
case-hardened cutting chambers; low-speed motors; and
staggered rotors with replaceable cassette knives.
The 6 Series is also available in an auger-feeding configuration
designed to roll neatly below the molding area of an injection
molding machine, to catch robotically separated sprue and -ODEL
runner scrap.
Staggered Rotor for Efficient Cutting Action
The staggered rotor, combined with a low-

speed motor, offers cleaner, quieter cutting ` ,OW SPEEDROTOR
and uses less energy. The low-speed rotor decreases noise and flyback produced during operation and
provides a better quality, consistent regrind.
A staggered rotor design produces energy
` 3OUNDPROOFEDHOPPER
efficient cutting, resulting in low energy
The sound-proof hopper greatly reduces noise levels of the machine.
consumption. Smaller bites reduce the
chance of jamming or shearing. The scissor- ` .OKNIFERESHARPENINGNEEDED
cutting action of slanted cassette rotor knives Eliminate the costly and time-consuming task of resharpening and resetting knives.
produces superior quality regrind. 6 Series granulators use cassette knives that are disposable; economical replacement
knives make for reduced downtime and increased safety.
6 Series models feature rotor speeds of 190
(3 Hp) to 225 rpm (5 Hp) and throughput ` 3AFETOOL LESSFULL FRONTACCESS
Hinged components and a drop-down screen cradle provide easy access to the cutting
rates up to 140 lb/hr {64 kg/hr} in a compact
chamber and screen area for adjustment and quick cleaning. A single integral limit
package. switch prevents accidental operation during service or clean out.
The 6 Series models standard features ` (ARDENEDCUTTINGCHAMBER
include: a constant cutting circle, staggered The hardened cutting chamber provides greater resistance to wear.
rotor, a case-hardened cutting chamber,
cassette knives, rotating end disc, dust tight ` 2EVERSIBLESCREEN
Get extended life with reversible screens.
construction, neoprene casters and a sound-
proof hopper. ` 3EALEDHOPPERANDVACUUMBINDESIGN
The sealed design of the hopper chamber and bin prevents material leakage.
G-9
(AND&EEDING
The standard top feed hopper 2OBOT&EEDING
allows easy dropping of scrap The standard, open top feed hopper
into the granulator by hand. includes a bolt-on funnel that
Safe, low speed/ low noise provides a large target for robotic
operation means the 6 Series can scrap feeding.
be located near personnel with
no concerns.
#ONVEYOR&EEDING 6ACUUM4AKE OFF%VACUATION
Optimized, meter feeding of scrap by a compact, speed-controlled A vacuum pick-up tube is used to pull granulate from the
conveyor. Conveyor can include a metal detector that stops compact drawer. Multiple types of loaders/receivers can be used,
conveying when metal in the scrap is detected. programmed to convey by a sensor in the granulator drawer or
special loading control settings.
6ACUUM3YSTEM
%VACUATION
Multiple granulators can
be emptied by a central
vacuum system to a
common collection bin
or box. Each granulator
is equipped with a
#OMPRESSED!IRTO%6"%VACUATION vacuum pick-up tube
A pick-up tube with venturi is used to pull granulate from the and a material line
granulator drawer and push it into a barrel. Conair’s CAML-EVB valve, sequenced by the
compressed air evacuation system can be set to move granulate central loading control
on a timed basis, or with a demand sensor. (e.g. Conair FLX-128).
G-10
Specifications Features
$ %
• Soundproofed hopper • Low infeed height
• Hardened cutting chamber • Scissor-cut action knives
• Solid rotor pulley • Caster mounted
• No-tools access • Low RPM motor
• D2 tool steel knives • Removable flaps
• No knife adjustment • Tilt-back hopper
! • Safety interlock and • Drop-down screen cradle
emergency stop • Power Band Belt
Standard staggered rotor with

cassette knives and case-
hardened chamber.
IN # "
[MM]
-ODELS

Maximum throughput* lb/hr {kg/hr} up to 80 {36} up to 120 {54} up to 140 {64}
Rotor speed rpm 190
Motor power Hp {kW} † 3 {2.2}
Screen hole sizes inches {mm} 5/32 - 3/16 - 1/4 - 5/16 {4 - 5 - 6 - 8 mm}
Drive type Belt
Hopper type Robot / hand feed
Vacuum discharge side Front
2OTORAND+NIVES
Rotor type staggered
Number of rotating knives 9 (3 x 3) 15 (3 x 5) 18 (3 x 6)
Number of fixed knives 2
A - Height 49.5 {1257}
B - Width 20.0 {508} 25.0 {635} 28.0 {711}
C - Depth 24.5 {622}
D x E - Feed opening 13 x 19.5 {330 x 495} 13 x 25 {330 x 635} 13 x 28 {330 x 711}
Installed 350 {131} 440 {164} 485 {181}
Shipping 425 {193} 515 {234} 560 {254}
6OLTAGESFull load amps based on motor size op
(P (P (P (P (P
208/3 phase/60 Hz 10.0 10.0 7.3 10.0 7.3
230/3 phase/60 Hz 9.0 9.0 6.6 9.0 6.6
400/3 phase/50 Hz 4.8 4.8 8.2 4.8 8.2
460/3 phase/60 Hz 4.4 4.4 3.3 4.4 3.3
575/3 phase/60 Hz 3.7 3.7 2.6 3.7 2.6
* Throughput rates are provided as a capacity guideline only. Throughput will vary according to size, shape, thickness and properties of the material to be cut, as well as the
desired size of the granulate. Consult Conair for a material test or help determining the correct granulator model for your application.
†
The 3 Hp motor is standard on all three models, an optional 5 Hp motor is available.
p
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any accessories added such as blower or conveyor motor loads. Includes main 3Hp motor only.
For true, full FLA for power circuit design of specific machine refer to electrical diagram of the machine order or nameplate applied to machine at shipment.
Options
• High-level visual alarm • 208/575V controls • Custom hoppers and funnels
• Evacuation systems • High base for larger capacity bin • Manual bin
G-11
G-12
TPGX048-0317 TANGENTIAL FEED GRANULATORS3%2)%3
Less Floor-Space;
Great Versatility
Conair’s 8 Series super-tangential granulators have footprint
dimensions at least 30% smaller than many other granulators
with similar capabilities. Multiple cutting chamber configurations
are ideal for handling lightweight bulky parts such as bottles,
as well as runners, film, edge trim and parts. Different hopper
designs and rotor/knife choices are available to maximize
performance with a wide variety of scrap types.
A tilt-back hopper and drop down screen cradle provide easy

access to the cutting chamber for maintenance and cleaning.
These features contribute to increased productivity and reduced
downtime. An optional sound attenuation package also makes
the 8 Series quieter than other small granulators.
-ODEL
Easy Maintenance; Excellent Productivity
The super-tangential chamber design ensures

that the rotor grips bulky scrap on the ` 2EDUCEDENERGYCOSTS
downward stroke, drawing it into the knives The rotor blade configuration and low speed rotation significantly minimize energy
and preventing it from bouncing on the rotor. consumption.
Standard tangential and straight-drop infeed ` 1UALITYREGRIND
configurations are also available. The optional The unique cutting action produces consistent quality regrind.
open rotor with three rows of double-angled
fixed knives for a clean scissor cut of film with ` #ONSTANTCUTTINGCIRCLE
minimum heat generation. The unique, integrated rotating shaft end-plates of the cutter assembly eliminate
frictional heat and minimize dust and fines. Rotor knives adjust outward to the
For tougher materials, a solid rotor can stationary bed knives and screen, eliminating screen clogging, even with the toughest
be equipped with three rows of up to five applications.
cassette knives in a staggered array. Cassette
` 3IMPLIFIEDCLEANOUTANDMAINTENANCE
knives allow for quick and easy knife changes
Conair’s innovative 8 Series cutting chamber features a drop-down cradle. Rotor
and minimize downtime for service and
access is straight-in versus from underneath, greatly simplifying clean out and blade
maintenance. The knives require no adjusting
maintenance, saving you time and money.
to maintain a consistent knife gap for
improved cutting quality. ` (IGHLY EFFECTIVEGRIPPINGANDCUTTINGOFBULKYPARTS
An improved super-tangential cutter housing design is ideal for lightweight bulky
items such as bottles, and containers.
` %XTENDEDSCREENLIFE
The convenient lift-out screens are reversible for extended life.
G-13
System Configurations
(AND&EEDING 2OBOT&EEDING
Standard feeding method. Flyback is minimized by rugged curtains. The 8 Series upturned feed tray provides an ample target for robotic
Feed tray is oriented upward to allow easy feeding, while minimizing delivery of scrap.
overfeeding that could create sluggish performance.
2OLL&EEDING
For film scrap on rolls (IE:
film extrusion start-up scrap),
feeding is automatically
controlled by speed-controlled
pinch rollers slaved to the
amperage of the granulator
drive and/ or the closed-loop
#ONVEYOR&EEDING film reclaim system. A relief
head to receive blown-in edge
Optimized, meter feeding of scrap by a speed-controlled conveyor. trim can be included.
Conveyor speed can be linked to granulator drive motor amps. Conveyor
can include a metal detector that stops conveying when metal in the scrap
is detected.
2ELIEF(EAD
&EEDING
Thin strips of film #YCLONE&EEDING
edge trim and other
For near continuous
film products are
feeding of tabs and
transferred to the
tails, small scrap/parts
granulator by a
fed from a blower.
blower system and
the conveying air
is exhausted by the 3IDE&EEDING
screen shell of the
relief head. Commonly required for long extruded parts and
scrap. Preliminary cutting, folding or breaking of
scrap is not required, since feed chute delivers
scrap directly to rotor knives.
G-14
6ACUUM4AKE /FF%VACUATION #OMPRESSED!IRTO%6'%VACUATION

A vacuum pick-up tube is used to pull granulate from the granulator A pick-up tube with a venturi is used to pull granulate from the granulator
drawer. Multiple types of loaders/receivers can be used, programmed to drawer and push it to a gaylord. The Conair CAML-EVG system can be set
convey by a sensor in the granulator drawer or special loading control to unload the granulator on a timed basis or continuously.
settings.
6ACUUM3YSTEM%VACUATION
#OMPRESSED!IRTO%6"%VACUATION 32" #YCLONE%VACUATION
Multiple granulators can be emptied by a
A pick-up tube with a venturi is used to pull Fully optimized evacuation by an central vacuum system to a common collection
granulate from the granulator drawer and push integrated blower and mini-cyclone bin or box. Each granulator is equipped with a
it to a barrel. The Conair CAML-EVB system can assures the granulator never overfills, vacuum pick-up tube and a material line valve,
be set to unload the granulator on a timed basis while granulate is cooled by the blower's sequenced by the central loading control
or continuously. air flow. (e.g. Conair FLX-128).
32" #YCLONE%VACUATION
Fully optimized evacuation by a blower and cyclone
system assures the granulator never overfills, while
granulate is cooled by the blower's air flow.
G-15
Specifications
'
$
&
!
" #
& % 4OPVIEW
&RONTVIEW
3IDEVIEW
-ODELS 3ERIES#UTTER(OUSING#ONFIGURATIONS
Rotor diameter inches {cm} 8.0 {20.3}
super-tangential/ tangential 3-blade with 3rd bed knife/ tangential
Cutter house configuration
3-blade
Rotor type staggered (standard), open (optional)
Rotor speed rpm 260 (optional 400, 840)
Rotating knives
Staggered configuration 3x2 3x3 3x4 3x5
Open configuration 3x2
8 x 10 8 x 14 8 x 19 8 x 24
Cutting chamber inches {mm}
{203 x 254} {203 x 356} {203 x 483} {203 x 610} 3UPER4ANGENTIALwith staggered rotor
Motor standard Hp {kW}* 5 {3.7} 7.5 {5.6}
Maximum throughput capacity † lbs {kg} 165 {75} 220 {100} 325 {147} 450 {204}
A - Height 58.00 {147.32}
B - Width 26.00 {66.04} 30.00 {76.20} 35.00 {88.90} 43.00 {109.22}
C - Depth 35.50 {90.17}
D - Clearance height 68.50 {173.99}
E - Overall depth 53.50 {135.89}
F - Side clearance (door swing) 8.25 {20.96} 13.00 {33.02} 17.75 {45.09} 22.50 {57.15}
G - Front clearance (door swing) 13.00 {33.02} 17.75 {45.09} 22.50 {57.15} 27.00 {68.58}
Rear clearance 10.00 {25.40} 4ANGENTIALwith open 3-blade rotor
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTplb {kg}
Installed 1100 {499} 1200 {544} 1400 {635} 1650 {748}
Shipping 1300 {590} 1400 {635} 1650 {748} 1900 {862}
* Optional available motors are 5 Hp {3.7 kW}, 7.5 Hp {5.6 kW}, 10 Hp {7.5 kW}, and 15 Hp {11.2 kW}.
†
Throughputs are provided as a capacity guideline only. Throughput will be greater or lesser than the values shown
according to the selected screen size and the shape, size, thickness and properties of the material to be cut.
p
Weight is estimated and will vary based on configuration
Consult Conair for a material test to help in determining the correct granulator model for your application.
4ANGENTIALwith open 3-blade rotor/3rd bed knife
G-16
TPGX049-1017 TANGENTIAL FEED GRANULATORS10 SERIES
Adaptable 2-Way
Chamber For Multiple
Applications
The innovative and adaptable cutting chamber on the 10 Series
allows these granulators to be configured with different cutting
chamber geometries to meet specific application requirements.
These quiet, heavy-duty granulators feature modular

components that modify the cutting chamber from super
tangential to tangential, accommodating virtually everything
from large bulky parts to heavy-wall profiles, sheets to sprues
and runners. The result is increased throughput, greater
efficiency and a more consistent and uniform regrind.
Model 1018
Shown with optional base
sound enclosure
Wide Access for Easy Cleaning and Blade Maintenance
The robust 10 Series offers a swing-open

screen cradle for the industry's fastest rotor ` Direct and easy access to machine core
access and lowest in-feed height in its class. Conair's innovative 10 Series cutting chamber features a swing-open removable
A three-blade, slant-knife open rotor provides screen, cradle and granule discharge bin for wide open access. Rotor access
is straight-in versus from underneath, greatly simplifying clean out and blade
scissor-cutting action for fast, efficient
maintenance saving you time and money.
processing.
` High-quality regrind
10 Series also offer custom hoppers for
A standard two (and an optional third) bed knives tailor the number and position of
conveyor, front, side, rear and roll feed to
cuts to the type of part, optimizing the process and assuring the highest quality and
accommodate most every type of feed system
level of production.
and a gas-assist hopper opening.
` Constant cutting circle
10 Series options include: wear resistance Rotor knives adjust outward to the stationary bed knives to maintain an unchanging
packages, second flywheel for added inertia, gap between the knives and screen, eliminating screen clogging, minimizing heat
blower systems, high level/high amp alarms, buildup and reducing dust and fines even with the toughest applications.
larger horsepower motors, base sound
enclosure and incline conveyors with and ` Quiet operation
without a metal detector, electric ball screw 10 Series granulators have hinged feed trays; double-wall, sound-proofed hoppers;
hopper lift, roll feeds and pre-adjustable knife and optional integral base sound enclosures to reduce noise during granulation.
fixtures. ` Pre-Adjustable knives
Provides the ultimate in blade changes. Knives are pre-set in the included knife
setting fixture decreasing the time it takes to replace knives while improving safety.

G-17
Hand Feeding Side Feeding

Standard feeding method. Flyback minimized by rugged curtains. Feed Commonly required for long extruded parts and scrap. Preliminary cutting,
tray may be rotated up to close off opening; down to feed scrap. folding or breaking of scrap is not required, since feed chute delivers
Rear Feeding
Cyclone Feeding Commonly used for sheet and
For near continuous feeding of tabs other wide scrap, the angled
and tails, small scrap/parts fed from chute is as wide as the cutting
a blower. chamber and scrap is fed directly
into the rotor knives. May include
a hand feeding opening in the
front, as well.
Roll Feeding
For film scrap on rolls (IE: Relief Head Feeding
film extrusion start-up scrap),
feeding is automatically Thin strips of film edge trim and other film
controlled by speed-controlled products are transferred to the granulator
pinch rollers slaved to the by a blower system and the conveying air is
amperage of the granulator exhausted by the screen shell of the relief
drive and/ or the closed-loop head.
film reclaim system. A relief
head may also be included, to
receive blown-in edge trim.

G-18
Conveyor Feeding Compressed Air to EVG Evacuation

Optimized, meter feeding of scrap by a speed-controlled conveyor. A pick-up tube with a venturi is used to pull granulate
Conveyor speed can be linked to granulator drive motor amps. Conveyor from the granulator drawer and push it to a gaylord.
can include a metal detector that stops conveying when metal in the scrap The Conair CAML-EVG system can be set to unload the
is detected. granulator on a timed basis or continuously.
Vacuum System Evacuation Vacuum Take-Off Evacuation

Multiple granulators can be emptied by a central vacuum system to a A vacuum pick-up tube is used to pull granulate from the granulator drawer.
common collection bin or box. Each granulator is equipped with a vacuum Multiple types of loaders/receivers can be used, programmed to convey by a
pick-up tube and a material line valve, sequenced by the central loading sensor in the granulator drawer or special loading control settings.
control (e.g. Conair FLX-128).
SRB-1 Cyclone Evacuation

Fully optimized evacuation by a blower and cyclone
system assures the granulator never overfills, while
granulate is cooled by the blower's air flow.

G-19
Specifications
Granulator with standard hand feed hopper
D E
{2134 mm}
84 in.
F
Wide open access

Conair’s innovative cutting chamber features a swing-open
B C removable screen, cradle and granule discharge bin for the
11 in.
{280 mm}
industry’s fastest rotor access.
Front view Side view
Models 1012 1018 1024
Performance characteristics 10 Series Cutter Housing Configurations
Maximum throughput* lb/hr {kg/hr} up to 200 {90} up to 300 {135} up to 500 {225}
Super tangential 14 x 12 14 x 18 14 x 24
cutter chamber opening inches {mm} {356 x 305} {356 x 457} {356 x 610} Super Tangential for bulk
Tangential 10 x 12 10 x 18 10 x 24 waste. Standard configuration
cutter chamber opening inches {mm} {254 x 305} {254 x 457} {254 x 610} includes two fixed knives.
Rotor speed rpm 750 Typical applications are bulky
Cutting circle inches {mm} 10 {254} parts and scrap.
Motor power Hp {kW} 7.5, 10, 15 {5.6, 7.5, 11.2}
Rotor type 3-blade rotor
Screen hole sizes inches {mm} 1/8, 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 1 {4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 17, 25}
Knives
Number of rotating knives 3 Tangential for thicker-
Number of fixed knives Super tangential 2 standard (3 optional);Tangential 3 standard walled parts. Three fixed
Dimensions inches {mm} knives are standard on
A - Height to hopper infeed 50 {1270} tangential chambers for
B - Width 45 {1143} 51 {1295} 57 {1448} increased throughputs. Typical
C - Depth 64 {1626} applications are thick-walled,
D - Feed hopper opening - width 12 {305} 18 {457} 24 {610}
heavy-cross section parts and
E - Feed hopper opening - height 10 {260}
scrap.3-blade rotor
F - Overall height 65 {1651}
Installed 1764 {800} 1984 {900} 2205 {1000} Motor Options
Shipping 2315 {1050} 2590 {1175} 2866 {1300} z= standard |= optional 1012 1018 1024
Voltages Full load amps based on motor size † 7.5 Hp {5.6 kW} z z z
Motor power Hp 7.5 10 15 7.5 10 15 7.5 10 15 10.0 Hp {7.5 kW} | | |
208V/3 phase/60 Hz 25 32 48 25 32 48 25 32 28 15.0 Hp {11.0 kW} | | |
230V/3 phase/60 Hz 22 28 42 22 28 42 22 28 42
460V/3 phase/60 Hz 11 14 21 11 14 21 11 14 21 Evacuation Blower options
575V/3 phase/60 Hz 9 11 17 9 11 17 9 11 17 |= optional 1012 1018 1024
Noise level ‡ 1.5 Hp {1.1 kW} | | |
With standard hopper soundproofing 90 to 95 dbA 3.0 Hp {2.2 kW} | | |
With optional base soundproofing 80 to 85 dbA 5.0 Hp {3.7 kW} | | |
* Throughputs are provided as a capacity guideline only. Throughput will be greater or lesser than the values shown according to the selected screen size and the shape, size,
thickness and properties of the material to be cut. Consult Conair for a material test to help in determining the correct granulator model for your application.
†
‡
Noise level will vary according to material type being processed and the granulator configuration. These ranges are based on tests using SPI standards.

G-20
Adaptable 2-Way
Applications
Versatile, rugged 14 Series Granulators are designed for
central or machine-side recycling of tough, injection molded
parts; bulky blow-molded containers; film; sheet; and
extruded parts and scrap.
These heavy-duty granulators feature a modular cutting

chamber design and multiple rotor designs allowing you to
process virtually any kind of scrap.
Easy pre-adjustment of the gap between rotor and fixed

bed knives ensures a constant cutting circle, resulting in
increased through-puts and high-quality, uniform regrind.
Model 1424
Open Access for Easy Cleaning and Maintenance
The robust 14 Series offers a swing-open

screen cradle for the industry's fastest rotor ` Direct and easy access to machine core
access. Conair's innovative 14 Series cutting chamber features a swing-open removable
screen, cradle and granule discharge bin for wide open access. Rotor access
With our engineered modular design and is straight-in versus from underneath, greatly simplifying clean out and blade
variable rotors, you can process batch-fed maintenance saving you time and money.
sprues and runners; bulky, thin-walled parts;
` High-quality regrind
sheet and film; profiles; smaller pipes; and
The standard two or optional three bed knives tailor the number and position of cuts
hard-to-grab molded parts, such as pails,
to the type of part, optimizing the process and assuring the highest quality and level
housings, drums and automotive moldings.
of production.
Hopper styles to suit all application needs ` Constant cutting circle
including custom, hand feed, sheet feed, Rotor knives adjust outward to the stationary bed knives to maintain an unchanging
profile feed, roll feed, and conveyor feed. gap between the knives and screen, eliminating screen clogging, minimizing heat
14 Series options include: wear resistance buildup and reducing dust and fines even with the toughest applications.
packages, second flywheel for added inertia, ` Quiet operation
blower systems for evacuation from the 14 Series granulators have hinged feed trays; double-wall, sound-proofed hoppers;
granulate bin, high level/high amp alarms, and optional integral sound enclosures to reduce noise during granulation.
larger horsepower motors, base sound
enclosure and incline conveyors with and ` Pre-Adjustable knives
without a metal detector, electric ball screw Provides the ultimate in blade changes. Knives are pre-set in the included knife
hopper lift, roll feeds and pre-adjustable knife setting fixture decreasing the time it takes to replace knives while improving safety.
fixtures.

G-21
Cyclone Head Feeding

For near continuous feeding of tabs
and tails, small scrap/parts fed from
a blower.
Hand Feeding
Standard feeding method. Flyback minimized by rugged curtains. Feed
tray may be rotated up to close off opening; down to feed scrap.
Rear Feeding
F
Comm
Commonly used for sheet
and other
oth wide scrap, the
angled chute is as wide as
cutting chamber and
the cut
scrap isi fed directly into the
rotor kknives.
Side Feeding
Commonly required for long extruded parts and scrap. Preliminary cutting,
folding or breaking of scrap is not required, since feed chute delivers
Roll Feeding
For film scrap on rolls Relief Head Feeding
(IE: film extrusion start- Thin strips of film edge trim and other film
up scrap), feeding is products are transferred to the granulator
automatically controlled by a blower system and the conveying air is
by speed-controlled exhausted by the screen shell of the relief
pinch rollers slaved to head.
the amperage of the
granulator drive and/
or the closed-loop film
reclaim system.

G-22
Conveyor Feeding Vacuum Take-Off Evacuation

Optimized, meter feeding of scrap by a speed-controlled conveyor. Conveyor A vacuum pick-up tube is used to pull granulate from the granulator drawer.
speed can be linked to granulator drive motor amps. Conveyor can include a Multiple types of loaders/receivers can be used, programmed to convey by a
metal detector that stops conveying when metal in the scrap is detected. sensor in the granulator drawer or special loading control settings.
Vacuum System Evacuation

Multiple granulators can be emptied by a central vacuum system to a
common collection bin or box. Each granulator is equipped with a vacuum
pick-up tube and a material line valve, sequenced by the central loading
control (e.g. Conair FLX-128).
SRB Cyclone Evacuation

Fully optimized evacuation by a blower and
cyclone system assures the granulator never
overfills, while granulate is cooled by the
blower's air flow.

G-23
Specifications
F
E
{2250 mm}
89 in.
A
Wide open access

Conair’s innovative cutting chamber features a swing-open
10 in.
removable screen, cradle and granule discharge bin for the
C D
{250 mm} industry’s fastest rotor access.
Front view Side view
Models 1418 1424 1436
14 Series Cutter Housing Configurations
Maximum throughput* lb/hr {kg/hr} 450 {204} 600 {272} 1000 {454}
Super tangential 17 x 18 17 x 24 17 X 36 Super Tangential for bulk
cutter chamber opening inches {mm} {432 x 457} {432 x 610} {432 X 914}
Tangential 14 x 18 14 x 24 14 X 36 waste. Standard configuration
cutter chamber opening inches {mm} {356 x 457} {356 x 610} {356 X 914} includes two fixed knives.
Rotor speed rpm 540 Typical applications are bulky
Cutting circle inches {mm} 14 {356} parts and scrap.
Motor power † Hp {kW} 10 {7.5} 15 {11.0}
Rotor type 3-blade open rotor (5-blade open rotor, optional)
1/8, 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8 and 1 inches
Screen hole sizes inches {mm}
{4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 17 and 25 mm}
Knives Tangential for thicker-
Number of rotating knives 3 walled parts. Three fixed
Number of fixed knives Super tangential 2 standard; Tangential 3 standard knives are standard on
Dimensions inches {mm} tangential chambers for
A - Overall height 72 {1829} increased throughputs. Typical
B - Height to hopper infeed 53 {1346}
applications are thick-walled,
C - Width 51 {1295} 57 {1448} 69 {1753}
D - Depth 66 {1677} heavy-cross section parts and
E - Feed hopper opening - width 18 {457} 24 {610} 35 {889} scrap.3-blade rotor
F - Feed hopper opening - height 14 {356}
Approximate weight lb {kg} Motor options
Installed 2094 {950} 2425 {1100} 3600 {1633} z= standard |= optional 1418 1424 1436
Shipping 2315 {1050} 2646 {1200} 3850 {1746} 10.0 Hp {7.5 kW} z N/A N/A
Voltages Full load amps based on motor size ‡ 15.0 Hp {11.0 kW} | z z
Motor power Hp {kW} 10 {7.5} 15 {11.2} 25 {18.6} 40 {29.8} 50 {37.3} 25.0 Hp {18.7 kW} | | |
208V/3 phase/60 Hz 30.8 46.2 74.8 120.0 150.0 § 40.0 Hp {29.8 kW} N/A | |
230V/3 phase/60 Hz 27.9 41.8 53.7 104.0 130.0 50.0 Hp {37.3 kW} N/A | |
400V/3 phase/50 Hz 16.0 24.0 39.1 62.7 78.2
460V/3 phase/60 Hz 13.9 21.0 34.0 52.0 65.0 Evacuation Blower options
575V/3 phase/60 Hz 11.1 16.7 27.1 41.0 52.0 |= optional 1418 1424 1436
Noise level ** 1.5 Hp {1.1 kW} | N/A N/A
With standard hopper soundproofing 90 to 95 dbA 3.0 Hp {2.2 kW} | | |
With optional base soundproofing 80 to 85 dbA 5.0 Hp {3.7 kW} | | |
†
The chart lists standard motor selections. Additional motor sizes are listed under Motor Options.
‡
§
Consult factory on availability.
**

G-24
TPGX051-1017 CENTRAL GRANULATORS18 SERIES
Adaptable 3-Way
Applications
18 Series Granulators utilize an innovative, adaptable cutting
chamber to provide exceptional and dedicated size reduction
on blow molding, injection and extrusion parts.
These quiet, heavy-duty granulators feature a modular

design, multiple rotor and bed knife designs that allow us to
configure to specific applications. The results are increased
throughput, greater efficiency and a more consistent and
uniform regrind.
Model 1836
Design Flexibility Optimizes Regrind
Conair's 18 Series is a robust, heavy-duty

central granulator for reclaim of all types of ` Swing-open screen and bin
plastic materials and applications. Conair's innovative 18 Series cutting chamber features a swing-open removable
screen, cradle and granule catch bin. Rotor access is straight-in versus from
In addition to the uniquely adaptable cutter underneath, greatly simplifying clean out and blade maintenance.
housing, the 18 Series offers a swing-open
` Optional bed knife positions
screen cradle for the industry's fastest rotor
Two, three or four bed knives tailor the number and position of cuts to the type of
access and lowest in-feed height in its class.
part, optimizing the process and assuring the highest quality and level of production.
A three-blade slant-knife open rotor provides
scissor-cutting action for fast, efficient ` Automatic rotary safety lock
processing. An optional five-blade open rotor The 18 Series rotor automatically locks in place when the hopper is raised. This
is available for more demanding applications. safety feature, which also has a manual release, protects the operator during blade
maintenance by holding the rotor firmly in place.
18 Series also offer custom hoppers for front,
side, rear and roll feed to accommodate most ` Constant cutting circle
every type of feed system. Hoppers are easily Rotor knives adjust outward to the stationary bed knives to maintain an unchanging
opened/closed with the included electric jack- gap between the knives and screen, eliminating screen clogging, minimizing heat
screw device. 18 Series options include: wear buildup and reducing fines.
resistance packages, second flywheel for ` Extended screen life
added inertia, blower systems, high level/high Convenient lift-out screens are reversible for extended life.
amp alarms, larger horse-power motors, base
sound enclosure and incline conveyors. ` Pre-Adjustable knives
Provides the ultimate in blade changes. Knives are pre-set in the included knife
setting fixture decreasing the time it takes to replace knives while improving safety.

G-25
Hand Feeding Conveyor Feeding

Large and/or cumbersome scrap can be hand fed, typically without Optimized, meter feeding of scrap by a speed-controlled conveyor. Conveyor
preliminary cutting or breaking. Flyback is minimized by rugged curtains. speed can be linked to granulator drive motor amps. Conveyor can include a
Feed tray may be rotated up to close off opening; down to feed scrap. metal detector that stops conveying when metal in the scrap is detected.
Hearing protection is recommended.
Rear Feeding Roll Feeding

Commonly used for sheet and other wide scrap, the angled chute is as wide For film scrap on rolls (e.g. film extrusion start-up scrap), feeding is
as the cutting chamber and scrap is fed directly into the rotor knives. High automatically controlled by speed-controlled pinch rollers slaved to the
hopper entry requires a platform or other elevation. Hearing protection is amperage of the granulator drive and/or the closed-loop film reclaim system.
recommended. A relief head may be included on top for edge trim.

G-26

For near continuous feeding of tabs Relief Head Feeding
and tails, small scrap/parts fed from a
Thin strips of film edge trim and other
blower.
film products are transferred to the
granulator by a blower system and
the conveying air is exhausted by the
screen shell of the relief head.
Side Feeding
folding or breaking of scrap is not required, since feed chute delivers scrap
directly to rotor knives. Flyback is minimized by rugged curtains. High
hopper entry requires a platform or other elevation. Hearing protection is
recommended.

Fully optimized evacuation by a
blower and cyclone system assures
the granulator never overfills, while
granulate is cooled by the blower's
air flow.

G-27
Specifications
17.72
{450}
A
103.94 {2640}
80.31 {2040}
55.11 {1400}
B
66.92 {1700}
Front view 74.80 {1900}

C
18 Series swing-open screen cradle and granule
catch bin.
Side view
Models 1824 1836 1848
Performance characteristics 18 Series Cutter Housing Configurations
Throughput* lb/hr {kg/hr} 1350 {612} 2000 {907} 2800 {1270} (shown with optional bed knife positions)
Cutter chamber opening inches {mm} 18 x 24 {450 x 600} 18 x 36 {450 x 900} 18 x 48 {450 x 1200}
Rotor speed rpm 513
Standard motor power Hp {kW} † 25 {19} 40 {30}
Drive type Belt drive
Hopper type Front hand feed
Evacuation discharge Side
Screen hole sizes inches {mm} 1/4, 5/16, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 1 {6, 8, 10, 12, 17, 25}
Rotor type Herringbone 3-blade open (optional 5-blade open)
Knives
Number of rotating knives 6 (optional 10)
Super Tangential
Number of fixed knives 2 (optional 3-4)
A - Width of feed hopper opening 23.62 {600} 35.43 {900} 47.24 {1200}
B - Width 56.69 {1440} 68.50 {1740} 80.31 {2040}
C - Overall depth with door open 98.42 {2500} 102.36 {2600} 114.17 {2900}
Installed 5400 {2450} 6500 {2950} 8100 {3675}
Shipping 5900 {2675} 7000 {3175} 8750 {3970}
Voltages Full load amps based on standard motor ‡ §
208V/3 phase/60 Hz 69 118
230V/3 phase/60 Hz 62 106
Tangential
460V/3 phase/60 Hz 31 53
575V/3 phase/60 Hz 25 43
Noise level **
With full sound enclosure 85 dbA
Motor Options
z= standard |= optional 1824 1836 1848
25 Hp {19 kW} z N/A N/A
40 Hp {30 kW} | z z
50 Hp {37 kW} | | |
60 Hp {45 kW} | | | Pre-Cut
75 Hp {56 kW} N/A | |
100 Hp {75 kW} N/A | |
* Throughput is based on a 1/2 inch {12.7 mm} screen. Throughput rates are provided §
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any accessories added such
as a capacity guideline only. Throughput will vary according to the selected screen as blower or conveyor motor loads. Includes main 3Hp motor only.
size, the shape, thickness and properties of the material to be cut. Consult Conair for For true, full FLA for power circuit design of specific machine refer to electrical
a material test or help determining the correct granulator model for your application. diagram of the machine order or nameplate applied to machine at shipment.
†
The chart lists standard motor selections. Additional motor sizes are listed under ** Noise level will vary according to material type being processed and the granulator
motor options. configuration. These ranges are based on tests using SPI standards.
‡
Refer to the motor nameplate for exact FLA and motor specifications. Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for

G-28
Adaptable Chamber
Heavy-Duty Applications
A large, heavy duty series of central granulators with

unparalleled accessibility! With three (3) cutting chamber
configurations, multiple rotor choices and many other options
available, the 24 Series will satisfy all large part and high
throughput applications for all plastic processes.
The 24 Series features variable cutting chamber geometries

from super tangential to tangential or pre-cut, providing
high-quality regrind from virtually all applications including
large bulky parts to pipe, film and sheet. The result is
increased throughput, greater cutting efficiency and a more
consistent and uniform regrind.
Model 2448
High Throughputs; Wide-Open Rotor Access
The high-throughput 24 Series offers a swing-

open screen cradle for the industry's fastest ` Direct and easy access to machine core
rotor access. A three-blade, slant-knife open Conair's innovative 24 Series cutting chamber features a swing-
rotor provides scissor-cutting action for fast, open removable screen, cradle and granule discharge bin for wide-
open access. Rotor access is straight-in versus from underneath,
efficient processing of bulk materials.
simplifying clean out and blade maintenance; saving you time and
Power-assisted opening and closing of the money.
feeding hopper is standard on the
` Safe, easy access
24 Series. An integrated safety switch
Hinged components provide access to the cutting chamber and
prevents accidental powering of the
screen for knife adjustment and cleaning. An electrical lift opens the hopper while an
granulator while the feed hopper is open. integral limit switch ensures that the rotor is at rest and prevents the granulator from
24 Series options include: wear resistance being switched on during maintenance.
packages, second flywheel for added inertia, ` High-quality regrind
blower systems, high level/high amp alarms, Four (4) rotor styles and up to four (4) bed knives coupled with one of three (3) cutting
larger horsepower motors, base sound chamber styles provides the most efficient cutting system of any granulator in it's
enclosure and incline conveyors with and class and delivering high throughputs with high-quality regrind.
without a metal detector, roll feeds and
adjustable knife fixtures. ` Consistent cutting circle
Rotor and bed knives are adjusted outside of the machine for fast and safe blade
changes and maintains the cutting circle even after knife sharpening eliminating
screen clogging, minimizing heat buildup and decreasing fines.
` Extended screen life

Convenient lift-out screens are reversible for extended life.

G-29
Hand Feeding Conveyor Feeding

Very large and/or cumbersome scrap can be hand fed, typically without Optimized, meter feeding of scrap by a speed-controlled conveyor. Conveyor
preliminary cutting or breaking. Flyback minimized by rugged curtains. High speed can be linked to granulator drive motor amps. Conveyor can include
hopper entry requires a platform or other elevation. Hearing protection is a metal detector that stops conveying when metal in the scrap is detected.
essential. Sometimes, conveyor and granulator are separated by a wall.
Roll Feeding Relief Head Feeding

For film scrap on rolls (e.g. film extrusion start-up scrap), feeding is Thin strips of film edge trim and other film products are transferred to the
automatically controlled by speed-controlled pinch rollers slaved to the granulator by a blower system and the conveying air is exhausted by the
amperage of the granulator drive and/or the closed-loop film reclaim system. screen shell of the relief head.
A relief head may be included on top for edge trim.

G-30

For near continuous feeding of tabs
and tails, small scrap/parts fed
from a blower.
Side Feeding
folding or breaking of scrap is not required, since feed chute delivers scrap
directly to rotor knives. Flyback is minimized by rugged curtains. High
hopper entry requires a platform or other elevation. Hearing protection is
essential.

Fully optimized evacuation by a blower and
cyclone system assures the granulator never
overfills, while granulate is cooled by the
blower's air flow.

G-31
Specifications
37.8 in.
{961 mm}
163.3 in.
{4147 mm}
A
24 Series Cutter Housing Configurations
B
Super Tangential with
3-blade open rotor for
bulk waste. Standard
configuration includes two
D
(2) fixed knives. Typical
C
applications are bulky parts
Front view Side view and scrap.
Models 2436 2448 2460
Maximum throughput* lb/hr {kg/hr} up to 2500 {1136} up to 3000 {1363} up to 4000 {1818} Tangential with 5-blade
Super tangential 35.4 x 31.5 47.2 x 31.5 59.0 x 31.5
cutter chamber opening inches {mm} {900 x 800} {1200 x 800} {1500 x 800}
beam rotor for thick bulk
Tangential 35.4 x 24.8 47.2 x 24.8 59.0 x 24.8 waste. Three (3) fixed knives
cutter chamber opening inches {mm} {900 x 630} {1200 x 630} {1500 x 630} are standard on tangential
Pre-cut 35.4 x 23.6 47.2 x 24.8 59.0 x 24.8 chambers for increased
cutter chamber opening inches {mm} {900 x 600} {1200 x 630} {1500 x 630}
throughputs. Typical
Rotor speed rpm 470
applications are thick-walled,
100 {74.6} standard; heavy-cross section parts and
Motor power † Hp {kW} scrap.
125, 150, 200 {93.2, 111.9, 149.1} optional
Rotor type 3-blade standard ; 5 & 7 -blade optional
Screen hole sizes inches {mm} standard: 5/16 {8} optional: 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 1 {10,12,17, 25} Pre-cut with 5- or 7-blade
Knives
beam rotor for thick-walled
Number of rotating knives 3-blade open (3-blade beam, 5-, 7-blade optional)
Super tangential 2 standard {3 optional}; Tangential 3 stan- waste . Three (3) fixed knives
Number of fixed knives are standard on tangential
dard {up to 4 optional}; Pre-cut standard {up to 4 optional}
Dimensions inches {mm} chambers for increased
A - Overall height 143.3 {3640} throughputs. Typical
B - Height to hopper infeed 98.4 {2500} applications are thick-walled,
C - Width 77.2 {1960} 88.9 {2260} 100.8 {2560} heavy-cross section parts and
D - Depth 125.9 {3200} 137.8 {3500} 149.6 {3800} scrap.
E - Feed hopper opening - width 35.4 {900} 47.2 {1200} 59.0 {1500}
F - Feed hopper opening - height 35.4 {900}
Approximate weight lb {kg} Motor options
Installed 14,330 {6500} 16,534 {7500} 19,841 {9000} z= standard |= optional 2436 2448 2460
Shipping 14,661 {6650} 16,865 {7650} 20,172 {9150} 100 Hp {75 kW} z | |
Voltages Full load amps based on motor size ‡ 125 Hp {93 kW} | z z
Motor power Hp {kW} 100 {74.6} 150 Hp {110 kW} | | |
208V/3 phase/60 Hz 268 200 Hp {160 kW} | | |
230V/3 phase/60 Hz 242
460V/3 phase/60 Hz 121 Evacuation Blower options
575V/3 phase/60 Hz 97 z= standard |= optional 2436 2448 2460
Noise level § 10 Hp {7.5 kW} z z N/A
With standard hopper soundproofing 95 dbA 15 Hp {11.1 kW} | | |
With optional base soundproofing 90 dbA 25 Hp {18.6 kW} N/A | |
†
The chart lists standard motor selections. Additional motor sizes are listed under Motor Options.
‡
§

G-32
TPGX054-0317 UNDER THE PRESS GRANULATORS3%2)%3n-/$%,!
Compact, Quiet, Under-

the-Press Granulation
The Conair 6 Series Model 69A granulator minimizes scrap
handling by fitting neatly below the mold in your injection
molding machine. As parts and scrap are separated robotically
or by hand in the mold area, scrap falls freely into the open
feeding auger of the 69A and moves smoothly to the quiet, low
speed cutting chamber for instant size reduction.
The 69A conserves valuable floor space while producing quality -ODEL !
-ODEL!
regrind from sprues, runners and small scrap parts that can be
recycled immediately, often eliminating the need for material
drying.
Staggered Rotor For Efficient Size Reduction
The 69A is equipped with a 0.5 Hp gear motor

for moving scrap from its feed opening to the ` ,OW SPEEDROTOR
cutting chamber. The staggered, helical, The low-speed rotor delivers under 85 dbA while providing clean, consistent regrind.
6 inch diameter rotor is 9 inches wide and is
` .OKNIFERESHARPENINGNEEDED
driven by a separate 3 Hp motor. Disposable, Forget re-sharpening or even gapping. The Model 69A uses cassette knives that are so
cassette knives provide a superior scissor economical they are quickly replaced when worn.
cutting action and require no clearance
adjustments. When the blades are worn, they ` 3AFETOOL LESSFULL FRONTACCESS
can be simply replaced and automatically lock Hinged, lift-up components and a drop-down screen cradle provide easy access to
into proper clearance with the bed knives, the cutting chamber and screen area for quick cleaning. Integrated lock-outs prevent
with no gapping procedure required providing operation during service or clean out.
fast and safe blade changes. ` %ASYINEASYOUT
Locking casters provide easy mobility in and Casters allow easy movement below the press for set-up, service and mold changes.
out of the press and the entire auger assembly ` 2EVERSIBLESCREEN
hinges up and out of the way with no tools for Get extended life with reversible screens.
easy cleaning and maintenance.
` )NTEGRATEDSEALEDHOPPERVACUUMBIN
The auger feeding system extends 31 inches Easily integrate your auger granulator with material handling equipment for instant
from the main frame of the granulator and recycling of granulate through your ratio loader, blender or feeder.
provides a sound dampened 17 inch long
and 12 inch wide trough for scrap entry,
making the Model 69A an ideal molding
partner. A vacuum take-away tube permits
easy connection to a variety of vacuum or
compressed air unloading systems.
G-33
TPGX054-0317 UNDER THE PRESS GRANULATORS3%2)%3n-/$%,!
Feeding/Evacuation
g Configuration
g
#LOSED,OOP3YSTEM
Scrap dropped into the granulator can be recycled back to material handling equipment
on the molding machine for immediate scrap recovery.
Features
• Hardened cutting chamber
• No-tools access
• D2 tool steel cassette knives
• No knife adjustment
• Safety interlock and emergency stop
• Low, 21.5 inch infeed height
• Scissor-cut action knives
• Caster mounted
• Quiet operation. Under 85 dbA
Specifications -ODELS
!
Maximum throughput* lb {kg} up to 80 {36}

Cutting chamber inches {mm} 6 x 9 {150 x 230}
Rotor speed rpm 190
Motor power Hp {kW}
Cutting 3 {2.2}
.OTOOLSWIDEOPEN Auger 0.5 {0.4}
ACCESS Screen hole sizes inches {mm}
1/8 - 5/32 - 3/16 - 1/4 - 5/16
The entire auger {3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 mm}
Drive type Powerband Belt
housing swivels open Hopper type Robot / seperator drop
for wide open access to Vacuum discharge side Front
the cutting chamber for 2OTORAND+NIVES
Rotor type Staggered
cleaning and service.
Number of rotating knives 9 (3 x 3)
&RONTVIEW Number of fixed knives 2
IN
Installed 350 {131}
[MM] Shipping 425 {193}
6OLTAGESFull load amps based on motor size o
IN (PPLUS(PAUGER
IN
[MM] 208/3 phase/60 Hz 10.0
[MM] 230/3 phase/60 Hz 9.0
400/3 phase/50 Hz 4.8
460/3 phase/60 Hz 4.4
575/3 phase/60 Hz 3.7
4OPVIEW Specification Notes
IN * Throughput rates are provided as a capacity guideline only. Throughput will vary
[MM] according to size, shape, thickness and properties of the material to be cut, as
well as the desired size of the granulate. Consult Conair for a material test or help
determining the correct granulator model for your application.
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any accessories added
such as blower or conveyor motor loads. For true, full FLA for power circuit design
IN
[MM] of specific machine refer to electrical diagram of the machine order or nameplate
applied to machine at shipment.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for
3IDEVIEW
G-34
TPGX05-0317 LOW PROFILE GRANULATORS,3%2)%3
Low-Profile Under-Press
Granulation
Conair’s Under-Press Granulator, the L Series, is a low-profile
granulator designed for use beneath extrusion lines for the
immediate, direct feed of scrap film and web materials. It
eliminates the need for long conveyors and conventional
granulators that take up valuable floor space. Multiple widths
are available to accommodate infeed requirements. An
optional sound enclosure provides extra quiet operation.
No need to accumulate scrap for feeding an off-line granulator
with the L Series. Its low profile, integrated design make -ODEL,
it a crucial, space saving, and fully integrated part of your
processing line.
Compact Granulator for Thermoforming
The L Series Granulators have a compact

footprint and low height provide an easy fit ` )NTEGRATESEASILY
below web cutters. Casters allow for simple L Series Granulators accommodate line widths from 35 to 59 inches
placement and removal. Optional speed {900 to 1500 mm} with a height of only 23.5 inches {600 mm} making them ideal
controlled infeed rolls, complete with loop integration partners for your thermoforming or other sheet lines. Casters allow
control, can synchronize with your process easy rolling into position below cutters and remote controls mean adjustments and
line speeds for smooth, fully automatic monitoring are close at hand.
feeding of even the most unwieldy webs and ` 1UALITYREGRINDRECYCLESEASILY
scrap. The cutting chamber drive motors The 12-inch {300 mm} diameter rotor, outfitted with six, eight, or ten rotor knives, cut in
are available in up to 40 Hp {30 kW} sizes, a herringbone pattern against bed knives for the most uniform, dust free cutting of sheet
allowing the L Series to rival the performance scrap and webs. Uniform regrind means reliable, uniform re-processing. An optional
of conventional full size granulators. open 3-blade rotor is available for L Series L36 and L48 models to reduce heat build up
during difficult granulation applications.
The free standing control system is positioned
next to the line for easy access. Quick ` %ASYSERVICE
disconnect plugs connect the control to the Conair’s popular clam shell design allows wide-open access to the cutting chamber,
L Series, allowing safe, instant mobility for knives and screen, simply and quickly. Highly accurate, yet easily adjustable rotor
service and cleaning. knives assure a uniform cutting circle, even after multiple knife sharpenings for clean
cutting, year after year.
G-35
,OWPROFILEDESIGN $IRECTRECYCLINGUNDERSHREDDER
Allows unit to fit below trim station to capture cut thermoform For direct feed of material from shredder - saves valuable
web scrap. floor space.
2OLLFEEDERWITHLOOPCONTROL 'ENERALFILMANDSHEETINFEED
Allow direct feed from the thermoformer with loop control to match Heavy duty design allows manual feed of heavy sheet and film.
line speed. Optional deformer rolls available to crush parts still in the
web at start up.
G-36
Specifications
!
IN
[MM]
IN
[MM]
" IN
[MM]
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS , , ,

Throughput capacity* lbs/hr {kg/hr} up to 1750 {800} up to 2200 {1000} up to 2600 {1200}
Rotor diameter inches {mm} 12 {300}
Rotating knives 6 8 10
Fixed knives 6 9
Standard motor hp {kW} 10 {7.5} 15 {11}
Motor options hp {kW} 10 {7.5}, 15 {11}, 20 {15}, 25 {18.5}, 30 {22}, 40 {30}
Standard screen diameter inches {mm} 1/4 {6}
Screen diameter options inches {mm} 5/32 {4}, 5/16 {8}, 3/8 {10}, 1/2 {12}
Height 23.5 {600}
Height with standard infeed tray 31.5 {800}
Length 27.5 {700}
A - Infeed width 35 {900} 47 {1200} 59 {1500}
B - Total width 79 {2000} 90 {2300} 102 {2600}
7EIGHT lb {kg}
Installed 2600 {1200} 3000 {1350} 3300 {1500}
* Throughput capacity is provided as a guideline. Throughput will vary according to screen size and the shape, size, and thickness of the material being cut.
Specifications can change without notice. Contact a Conair representative for the most current information.
Options
• 2OLLFEED • "LOWER
A roll feed will synchronize with your line speed to feed plastic Transport the granulate produced to a dust separation system,
residue and scrap into the L Series Granulator. hopper or other container. Available with or without sound
• $IRECTSHREDDERRECYCLING insulating enclosures.
Further reduce granulate fed through a high-capacity Conair • #YCLONE
shredder like the FLEX Series. Separate air from the granulate produced by the L Series. The
• &ILMANDSHEETINFEED cyclone’s air outlet can be provided with a filter for dust.
Feed sheet up to 5/16 inch {8 mm}. • /PEN BLADEROTOR
Maintain cooler cutting during large, taxing jobs. (Available on
L Series L36 and L48 only.)
G-37
G-38
TPGX055-0317 SHREDDERS'%.%2!,0520/3%3%2)%3
General Purpose
High Volume
Size Reduction
Bulk plastic scrap is quickly size-reduced with the economical
General Purpose (GP) Series Shredders from Conair. Designed
specifically for quickly cutting through plastic scrap, the
GP Series readily accepts loose scrap, bundles, and even gaylord
quantities of plastic materials dumped into its reinforced surge
hopper. Scrap flows efficiently by an automatic ram feed into
rotating rows of rugged knives, welded into machined pockets of
the solid steel rotor.
'0-ODEL
Economical Plastic Scrap Shredding
The GP Series is the solution for processes

that need to grind plastic scrap in higher ` ,ONGLIFEHIGHIMPACTROTORTAKESTHEABUSE
volumes than granulators can manage. The 10 inch {254 mm} diameter, solid steel rotor is 4140 high alloy steel, heat treated
for high tensile strength and a lifetime limited warranty. Oversized end bearings assure
The dagger-cut knives offer four cutting edges proper alignment and long life.
that can be renewed by simply unbolting and
` %XTRALONGSERVICEFROMINDEXABLEBLADES
indexing each four-edged knife to reveal a
Each dagger-cut knife penetrates and efficiently cuts through plastic scrap and can be
fresh cutting edge. Each knife slices against easily indexed to employ a fresh tip. Each knife provides four cutting edges.
adjustable, notched bed knives for fast,
efficient, primary size reduction. ` -INIMALMAINTENANCEROTORSEALS
Self-cleaning, non-contaminating rotor seals provide continuous operation, even with
Final particle size is created by forcing the dusty scrap.
flow of shredded material through a broad
` /PTIONAL#ONTROLLEDSHREDDINGTHATREQUIRESNOMONITORING
choice of reinforced screens. Screens are
Automatic rotor and ram control is provided via a PLC control in a choice of touch screen
provided in holes sizes from a coarse 3 inch interfaces. All models include an auto-reverse rotor shaft, to quickly and automatically
{72 mm} down to fine 3/4 inch {19 mm} recover from rotor jams.
diameter, often minimizing the need for
secondary granulation.
G-39
TPGX055-0317 SHREDDERS'%.%2!,0520/3%3%2)%3
Features
• 3OLIDSTEELSINGLE PIECEFORGEDROTORS maximize durability and • (IGHEFFICIENCYRAMANDHYDRAULICSYSTEM maximizes throughput
strength and efficiency with patented controls and high speed dual pump
• 3ELF CLEANINGNON CONTAMINATINGROTORSEALSprotect bearings hydraulics package. (3 to 5 Hp {2.2 to 3.7 kW} standard)
from material contamination for longer bearing life • 3ERVICEACCESSDOORS (with removable rear compartment) provide
• 5LTRA DUTYGEARBOXES are directly coupled to regulate torque and easy access for maintenance
rotor speed in rugged shredding applications • (EAVYDUTYCONSTRUCTIONCUTTINGCHAMBER maximizes
• /VERSIZEDSPHERICALBEARINGS limit drift and handle heavy duty dimensional stability to ensure precision, strength, and durability
applications • /VER TORQUELIMITINGCLUTCH provides automatic shutdown to
• !UTO REVERSEROTOROPERATION quickly recovers in the event of prevent damage in the event of prolonged clutch slippage
jams (Standard in 40 and 50 Hp {30 and 37 kW} models, optional in
other models)
• )NDEXABLEDAGGERCUTTINGSYSTEM WAY requires no
sharpening and little maintenance to keep cutting efficient
• 3TRAIGHT WALLSHOPPER minimize the chance of materials bridging
or compacting
$AGGER #UT"LADES
The dagger-cut blade is used for granulating hard plastic with
minimal strain to the blade or the rotor. Four cutting surfaces
are available on each dagger-cut blade, indexable with only
a wrench. Each blade holder is welded into the surface of the
machined rotor surface for superior reinforcement.
Spring screens are available from 3/4 to 3 inches and are easily
maintained via twin access doors.
G-40
TPGX055-0317 SHREDDERS'%.%2!,0520/3%3%2)%3
Options
• 4AKE AWAYCONVEYORS • /VER TORQUELIMITINGCLUTCHASSEMBLY
• %LEVATINGLEGS • (IGH POWEREDROTORMOTORS available from 20 to 50 Hp {15 to 37 kW}
• #USTOMFEEDHOPPERS • (YDRAULICRAMMOTORS available as 3 Hp or 5 Hp {2.2 or 3.7 kW}
• %VACUATIONBLOWERVACUUMSYSTEM • 6ARIETYOFSCREENHOLESIZES available from 3/8 to 3 inches {10 to
• )NTERLOCKINGCONTROLS for both feed and take-away conveyors 76 mm} - triple-cut small sizes can use water cooling to reduce size
efficiently, eliminating the need for secondary granulation
• !UTO SHREDCONTROLSYSTEM
!UTO 3HRED/PERATION/PTION
With Conair’s Auto-Shred control option, fully automatic
operation is provided for true “load it and forget it” operation. Up
to six fully auto-matic control programs may be easily initiated
via the full color touch screen.
Once started, Auto-Shred guides forward motion of the ram
for smooth, highly efficient shredding with minimal rotor drive
spikes. In the event of a jam, Auto-Shred automatically reverses
the rotor to reduce damage.
In addition, Auto-Shred provides fast return-to-home position of
the ram for fast recovery and restart of shredding.
/VER 4ORQUE,IMITING#LUTCH!SSEMBLY
This option stops the rotor when it detects impassable
contaminants such as steel or thick aluminum, to pre-vent undue
stress to the rotor.
The mechanical clutch is designed to monitor both instantaneous
and gradual clutch slippage. It slips automatically when limits
of the gearbox are breached for powerful rotor and drive train
protection.
Comes with a simple PLC push button reset or a touch screen
non-mechanical reset.
(Special assembly comes standard with 40 and 50 Hp {30 and
37 kW} models, optional on other models.)
G-41
TPGX055-0317 SHREDDERS'%.%2!,0520/3%3%2)%3
Specifications
%
&
$
#
"
# $
-ODELS '0 '0

Cutting chamber opening inches {mm} 32 x 45 {813 x 1143} 42 x 45 {1067 x 1143}
Rotor speed rpm 109 - 130
Rotor diameter inches {mm} 10 {254}
Rotor width inches {mm} 32 {813} 42 {1067}
Motor range Hp {kW} 20, 30, 40 {15, 22, 30} 30, 40, 50 {22, 30, 37}
Ram height inches {mm} 7 {178}
Ram hydraulic motor Hp {kW} 3.0, 5.0 {2.2, 3.7}
Standard Screen hole diameter inches {mm} 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3 {38, 51, 64, 76}
Optional Screen hole diameter inches {mm} 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4 {10, 13, 16, 19, 25, 32}
Screen type round holes
Number of dagger cutters / rows 22 cutters/1 row 30 cutters/1 row
A - Overall height (to infeed) 78.3 {1989}
B - Height of discharge 21.8 {554}
C - Total length 97.8 {2484}
D - Total width 70.7 {1796} 81.7 {2075}
E - Feed hopper opening width 31.1 {790} 42.1 {1069}
F - Feed hopper opening length 44.5 {1130}
Ram stroke distance 34 {863}
Installed weight lb {kg} 8000 {3629} 9000 {4082}
6OLTAGES Full load amps
460 V/3 phase/60 hz Consult Conair
Consult factory for throughput specifications.

G-42
TPGX056-0317 SHREDDERS&,%83%2)%3
High Volume Extra Duty

Size Reduction
Large quantities of bulk plastic scrap are quickly size-reduced
with the heavy-duty FLEX Series Shredders from Conair.
Designed specifically for size-reducing high volumes of plastic
scrap, the FLEX Series includes features that allow Conair to
customize the FLEX to meet your specific shredding needs. With
rotor diameters of 15 or 20 inches, widths up to 105 inches and
drive motors from 40 to 300 Hp. The FLEX Series can be readily
matched to the challenges of hard, soft, flexible plastic scrap in
bundles, dumped from gaylords or fed loosely.
Controlled feeding is provided by an automatic hydraulic ram
&,%8-ODEL
&,%8 -ODEL
that pushes scrap into a rotating row of rugged knives welded with optional
(standard) or bolted (optional) into machined pockets of the solid wide-open access
steel rotor. Once started, operation is fully automatic.
Flexible Shredder Design for Maximum Efficiency
The FLEX Series can be provided with Conair’s

wide-open design that allows easy opening ` ,ONG LIFEHIGH IMPACTROTORTAKESTHEABUSE
of the entire shredder body for full access to The drop-forged, single-shaft, solid steel rotor is 4140 high alloy steel, heat treated for
high tensile strength with a lifetime limited warranty. Oversized outboard pillow block
the rotor and ram from inside the shredder.
bearings with split housings provide long life and easy shaft removal.
Maintenance is fast, safe and thorough.
` %XTRA LONGSERVICEFROMINDEXABLE WAYBLADES
Standard dagger-cut knives offer four
Dagger-cut design penetrates and efficiently cuts through plastic scrap and can be
cutting edges that can be renewed by simply easily rotated to employ a fresh tip.
unbolting and indexing each four-edged knife
to reveal a fresh cutting edge. Each knife ` 3ELF PROTECTINGDRIVETRAIN
The over-torque limiting clutch assembly eliminates shredding resistance from being
slices against notched bed knives for fast,
transferred to the gearbox, providing smoother operation and extended life of all drive
efficient, size reduction.
train components.
Optional trapezoid "trap cut" blades provide
` #ONTROLLEDSHREDDINGTHATREQUIRESNOMONITORING
two cutting edges and may be selected for Automatic rotor and ram control is provided via a PLC control with a touch screen
even tougher shredding applications. interfaces. All models include an auto-reverse rotor shaft, to quickly and automatically
recover from rotor jams.
Final particle size is established by forcing
the shredded scrap through a broad choice ` 7IDE/PEN!CCESSFORWALK INSERVICE
of reinforced screens. Screens are provided A patented sliding, horizontal body separation allows easy access to knives, rotor, and
in holes sizes from a coarse 4 inch {102 mm} all material contact surfaces for easy maintenance and cleaning.
down to fine 3/8 inch {10 mm} diameter.
G-43
Features
• 3OLIDSTEELSINGLE PIECEFORGEDROTORS maximize durability and • 3ERVICEACCESSDOORS(with removable rear compartment) provide
are heat treated for strength easy access for maintenance
• 3ELF CLEANINGNON CONTAMINATINGROTOR seals ensure bearings • )NDEXABLEDAGGER CUTTINGBLADES WAY require little
last significantly longer sharpening or maintenance to keep cutting efficient
• /VERSIZEDSPHERICALBEARINGSlimit drift and handle even heavy • /VER TORQUELIMITINGCLUTCHprovides automatic shutdown to
regrind prevent damage in the event of prolonged clutch slippage
• !UTO REVERSEROTOROPERATION quickly recovers your process in • (EAVYDUTYCONSTRUCTIONCUTTINGCHAMBERmaximizes
the event of jams dimensional stability to ensure precision, strength, and durability
• 3TRAIGHT WALLEDHOPPERminimizes chance of materials bridging • 5LTRA DUTYGEARBOXESare directly coupled to regulate rotor speed
or compacting
$AGGER #UT"LADES
/NE0IECE2OTOR %ASY3CREEN!CCESS
Conair is one of the very few suppliers that offer a one piece Dual access doors provide easy, safety interlocked access to
forged/machined rotor that eliminates the chance of rotor the FLEX Series screen, offered in a range of hole sizes from 3/8
breakage or separation. The brute force nature of shredding through 4 inches. The doors are located above the scrap exit
requires maximum rotor strength and the heat treated high alloy chute, so quick inspections and cleaning can take place without
steel in the FLEX series assures long operational life. moving the take-away conveyor or secondary granulator.
G-44
Options
• 4AKE AWAYCONVEYORS • 4RAP CUTKNIVES
• %LEVATINGLEGS • %XTRAROWOFBLADES
• #USTOMFEEDHOPPERS • "OLT INTOOLHOLDERS
• 7IDEOPENCHAMBERACCESSfor fast, safe cleaning and • (IGH POWEREDROTORMOTORS available from 50 to 300 Hp
maintenance {37 to 224 kW}
• %VACUATIONBLOWERVACUUMSYSTEM • 6ARIETYOFSCREENHOLESIZES available from 3/8 to 4 inches
• )NTERLOCKINGCONTROLS for both feed and take-away conveyors {10 to 102 mm}
4RAP #UT+NIVES
The trapezoid-shaped Trap-Cut knives offer two cutting edges
that are easily renewed by simply unbolting and rotating each
knife to reveal a fresh cutting edge. Each blade holder is
embedded and bolted below the surface of the machined rotor
surface for superior reinforcement. Blade holders may be easily
unbolted and replaced if ever required.
to six fully automatic control programs may be easily initiated via
the full color touch screen.
Once started, Auto-Shred guides the motion of the ram for
smooth, highly efficient shredding with minimal rotor drive
7IDE/PEN!CCESS
Each FLEX shredder model has the option of the Wide Open Access configuration. With this option, awkward top entry into the shredding
zone is eliminated by splitting the hopper and exposing all cutting and ramming components to walk-in entry. Proper maintenance is
encouraged, personnel safety is enhanced, and shredder cleaning has never er been easier.
G-45
Specifications
%
"
&
# $
/PENCLEARANCEADD
INCHES[MM]
-ODELS &,%8 &,%8 &,%8 &,%8 &,%8 &,%8 &,%8

30 x 50 42 x 50 54 x 60 66 x 85 54 x 65 66 x 90
Cutting chamber opening inches {mm} 15 {381}
{762 x 1270} {1067 x 1270} {1372 x 1524} {1676 x 2159} {1372 x 1651} {1676 x 2286}
Rotor diameter inches {mm} 15 {381} 20 {508}
40-75 40-100 75-200 100-250 100-250 125-300 150-300
Motor range Hp {kW}
{30-56} {30-75} {56-149} {75-186} {75-186} {93-224} {112-224}
Ram height inches {mm} 11 {279} 16 {406
Ram hydraulic motor Hp {kW} 7.5 {5.6}
Screen hole diameter inches {mm} 3/8 - 4 {9 - 102}
Screen type standard round or square options available
$IMENSIONS standard configuration inches {mm}
A - Overall height (to infeed) 93.5 {2375}
C - Total length 103.0 {2616} 123.0 {3124} 173.0 {4394} 133.0 {3378} 183.0 {4648} 213.0 {5410}
Length when open 139 {3530} 159 {4039} 209 169 219 249
D - Total width 74.5 {1892} 92.5 {2350} 104.5 {2654} 116.5 {2959} 108.5 {2756} 120.5 {3061} 131.5 {3340}
E - Feed hopper opening width 29.3 {744} 41.1 {1044} 53.1 {1349} 65.1 {1654} 53.1 {1349} 65.1 {1654} 76.1 {1933}
F - Feed hopper opening length 50.0 {1270} 60.0 {1524} 85.0 {2159} 65.0 {1651} 90.0 {2286} 105.0 {2667}
Approximate installed weight lb {kg} 8000 {3629} 10000 {4536} 14000 {6350} 17000 {7711} 15000 {6804} 18000 {8165} 22000 {9979}

G-46
TPGX057-0317 SHREDDERS5,42!3%2)%3
High Volume Extra Duty

Size Reduction
Large quantities of bulk plastic scrap are quickly size-reduced
with the heavy-duty Ultra Series Shredders from Conair.
Designed specifically for cutting through high volumes of plastic
scrap, the Ultra Series readily accept loose scrap, bundles, and
even gaylord quantities of plastic materials dumped into the
reinforced surge hopper.
Controlled feeding is provided by an automatic hydraulic ram
that pushes scrap into a rotating row of rugged knives bolted
into machined pockets of the solid steel rotor. Once started,
operation is fully automatic.
5LTRA-ODEL
Wide-Open, Sliding Access Simplifies Maintenance
The Ultra Series Shredders are the solution for

processes that need to grind plastic in higher ` 7IDE/PEN!CCESSFORWALK INSERVICE
volumes than granulators can manage. A patented sliding, horizontal body separation allows easy access to knives, rotor, and
all material contact surfaces for the easiest possible maintenance and cleaning.
The dagger-cut knives offer four cutting edges
` ,ONG LIFEHIGH IMPACTROTORTAKESTHEABUSE
that can be renewed by simply unbolting and
The drop-forged, single-shaft, solid steel rotor is 4140 high alloy steel, heat treated for
indexing each four-edged knife to reveal a
high tensile strength with a lifetime limited warranty. Oversized outboard pillow block
fresh cutting edge. Each knife slices against bearings with split housings provide long life and easy shaft removal.
adjustable, notched bed knives for fast,
efficient, primary size reduction. ` %XTRA LONGSERVICEFROM WAYROTATABLEBLADES
Dagger-cut design penetrates and efficiently cuts through plastic scrap and can be
Optional trapezoid "trap cut" blades may easily rotated to employ a fresh tip.
be selected for even tougher shredding
` 3ELF PROTECTINGDRIVETRAIN
applications.
The over-torque limiting clutch assembly eliminates shredding resistance from being
Final particle size is created by forcing the transferred to the gearbox, providing smoother operation and extended life of all drive
flow of shredded material through a broad train components.
choice of reinforced screens. Screens are ` #ONTROLLEDSHREDDINGTHATREQUIRESNOMONITORING
provided in holes sizes from a coarse 4 inch Automatic rotor and ram control is provided via a PLC control in a choice of touch screen
{102 mm} down to fine 3/8 inch {10 mm} interfaces. All models include an auto-reverse rotor shaft, to quickly and automatically
diameter, minimizing the need for secondary recover from rotor jams.
granulation for some applications.
G-47
TPGX057-0317 SHREDDERS5,42!3%2)%3
Features
• 3OLIDSTEELSINGLE PIECEFORGEDROTORS maximize durability and • 3ERVICEACCESSDOORS(with removable rear compartment) provide
strength easy access for maintenance
• 3ELF CLEANINGNON CONTAMINATINGROTOR seals ensure bearings • )NDEXABLEDAGGERCUTTINGBLADES WAY require little
last significantly longer sharpening or maintenance to keep cutting efficient
• 7IDEOPENCHAMBERACCESSfor fast, safe cleaning and • /VER TORQUELIMITINGCLUTCHprovides automatic shutdown to
maintenance prevent damage in the event of prolonged clutch slippage
• /VERSIZEDSPHERICALBEARINGS limit drift and handle even heavy • INCH HIGH[MM]RAMFEED prevents jamming using a
regrind torque-con-trolled, over-sized 7.5 Hp {5.6 kW} dual pump hydraulic
• !UTO REVERSEROTOROPERATION quickly recovers in the event of drive system
jams • (EAVYDUTYCONSTRUCTIONCUTTINGCHAMBERmaximizes
• 3TRAIGHT WALLEDHOPPERminimizes chance of materials bridging dimensional stability to ensure precision, strength, and durability
or compacting • 5LTRA DUTYGEARBOXESare directly coupled to regulate rotor speed
$AGGER #UT"LADES
7IDE/PEN!CCESS
Each Ultra shredder model is supplied with Wide Open Access. With this feature, awkward top entry into the shredding zone is eliminated by
splitting the hopper and exposing all cutting and ramming components to walk-in entry. Proper maintenance is encouraged, personnel safety
is enhanced, and shredder cleaning has never been easier.
G-48
TPGX057-0317 SHREDDERS5,42!3%2)%3
Options
• 4AKE AWAYCONVEYORS • %XTRAROWOFBLADES
• %LEVATINGLEGS • "OLT INTOOLHOLDERS
• #USTOMFEEDHOPPERS • (IGH POWEREDROTORMOTORS available from 50 to 300 Hp
• %VACUATIONBLOWERVACUUMSYSTEM {37 to 224 kW}
• )NTERLOCKINGCONTROLS for both feed and take-away conveyors • 6ARIETYOFSCREENHOLESIZES available from 3/8 to 4 inches
{10 to 102 mm}
• 4RAP CUTKNIVES
4RAP #UT+NIVES
The trapezoid-shaped Trap-Cut knives offer two cutting edges
that are easily renewed by simply unbolting and rotating each
knife to reveal a fresh cutting edge. Each blade holder is
embedded and bolted below the surface of the machined rotor
surface for superior reinforcement. Blade holders may be easily
unbolted and replaced if ever required.
to six fully auto-matic control programs may be easily initiated
via the full color touch screen.
Once started, Auto-Shred guides forward motion of the ram
for smooth, highly efficient shredding with minimal rotor drive
G-49
TPGX057-0317 SHREDDERS5,42!3%2)%3
Specifications
4OPVIEW
2EARVIEW 3IDEVIEW
"
$ &
#
/PENCLEARANCEADD
INCHES[MM]
-ODELS 5LTRA 5LTRA 5LTRA 5LTRA 5LTRA 5LTRA

42 x 52 52 x 60 62 x 80 52 x 60 62 x 80 72 x 101
Cutting chamber opening inches {mm}
{1067 x 1321} {1052 x 1524} {1575 x 2032} {1052 x 1524} {1575 x 2032} {1829 x 2565}
Rotor diameter inches {mm} 15 {381} 20 {508}
Rotor width inches {mm} 42 {1067} 52 {1052} 62 {1575} 52 {1052} 62 {1575} 72 {1829}
50-100 75-200 100-250 150-250 150-300 200-300
Motor range Hp {kW}
{37-75} {56-149} {75-186} {112-186} {112-224} {149-224}
Ram height inches {mm} 11 {279} 16 {406}
Ram hydraulic motor Hp {kW} 7.5 {5.6} 10 {7.5}
Screen hole diameter inches {mm} 1 1/2, 2, 2 1/2, 3, 4 {38, 51, 64, 76, 102}
Screen type round (standard) or square options available
Number of dagger cutters / rows 30 cutters/1 row 37 cutters/1 row 45 cutters/1/row 74 cutters/2 rows 90 cutters/2 rows 106 cutters/2 rows
Number of trap-cut knives / rows (optional) 34 cutters/2 rows 42 cutters/2 rows 52 cutters/2 rows 63 cutters/3 rows 78 cutters/3 rows 90 cutters/3 rows
A - Overall height (to infeed) 96.5 {2451} 101.5 {2578}
C - Total length 95.8 {2433} 124.2 {3155} 116.3 {2954} 95.8 {2433} 124.0 {3150} 140.0 {3556}
D - Total width 109.2 {2774} 104.0 {2642} 164.2 {4171} 109.2 {2774} 170.2 {4323} 222.8 {5659}
Length when open 131.8 {3348} 160.2 {4069} 152.3 {3868} 131.8 {3348} 160.0 {4064} 176.0 {4470}
Width of opening 36.0 {914}
E - Feed hopper opening width 42.1 {1067} 51.4 {1304} 62.3 {1582} 42.0 {1067} 62.3 {1582} 73.3 {1862}
F - Feed hopper opening length 51.5 {1308} 59.0 {1499} 79.8 {2027} 51.5 {1308} 80.4 {2042} 98.0 {2489}
Ram stroke distance 33 {838} 40 {1475} 61 {1549} 33 {838} 60 {1524} 78 {1981}
Installed weight lb {kg} 18000 {8165} 21000 {9525} 25000 {11340} 20000 {9072} 33000 {14969} 36000 {16329}

G-50
Upstream
Sttor
orage
Extrusion Control
4RUE7EIGH©#ONTROL47# 5
4RUE7EIGH©47(-ODELS 5
4RUE7EIGH4-,INE-ANAGER 5
C nveyin
Co y g
Film Trim Reclaim Systems
42)3ERIES4RIM)NDUCERS 5
3CRAP3AVER©33--ODELS 5
Related Equipment
Drying
%XTRUSION#ONTROL"LENDER4"%84-ODELS "
47"#ONTINUOUS"LENDER-ODELS "
Bleending/Feeeding
g
Hea
at Transsfe
f r
Siize
S z Red
duction
Upstream
Do
own
w st
stream
Upstream Quick Reference
4OUCH 3CREEN3IZE -AXIMUM.UMBER

-ODELS 2ECIPE"OOK
INCHES %XTRUDERS
%XTRUSION#ONTROL
47##ONTROL 500 recipes and 250 resins
4RUE7EIGH4-,INE-ANAGER 1000 recipes and 250 resins
(OPPER#APACITY -INIMUM%XTRUDER -AXIMUM%XTRUDER

-ODELS
FT[L] 3IZEINCHES[MM] 3IZEINCHES[MM]
'RAVIMETRIC,OSS )N7EIGHT
(OPPERS
47( (OPPER [] [] []
47( (OPPER [] [] []
47( (OPPER [] [] []
/PTIONS
s %XTRUDER$RIVE#ONTROL s "UMPLESS4RANSFER
s (AUL OFF#ONTROL s 4HROAT!DAPTERS
-INIMUM)NLET$IAMETER -AXIMUM/UTLET$IAMETER -OTOR

-ODELS
INCHES[MM] INCHES[MM] (P[K7]
4RIM)NDUCERS
42) [] [] []
42) [] [] []
-INIMUM%XTRUDER3IZE -AXIMUM6OLUMETRIC3CRAP2ATE -OTOR

-ODELS
INCHES[MM] FTHR[LHR] (P[K7]
3CRAP3AVERS
33- [] [] []
33- [] [] []
33- [] [] []
33- [] [] []
/PTIONS
s #YCLONE#&-2ATINGSFROMTO
TPEX025-0317 EXTRUSION CONTROL 425%7%)'(4-#/.42/,47#
Accurate, Precise
Extrusion Control
TrueWeighTM Gravimetric Control System allows extrusion
processors to put their equipment on “cruise control.” It tracks
material being fed to the extruder and automatically adjusts
screw rpm and the haul-off device to maintain a consistent
product output regardless of changes in raw materials, ambient
conditions or processing variables.
The system offers functionality that suits both mono-layer and
co-extrusion applications in film, sheet, extrusion coating, pipe,
profile, tubing and wire & cable extrusion.
47##ONTROLLER
Automates Extrusion Control by Weight
Varying process conditions, back-pressure,

material bulk density, and even operator ` 4IGHTENSTOLERANCESSAVESMATERIALCOSTS
skill sets can reduce extruder throughput TrueWeighTM allows processors to run products at minimum thicknesses (+/- 0.5% of
and affect productivity and profitability. This set point). The extrusion control system synchronizes the extruder(s) and the haul-off
easy-to-use extrusion control system gives device, optimizing stability of the production process and creating less start-up scrap
processors complete visibility and control over by achieving production speeds quicker, and reducing or eliminating off-spec scrap.
throughput and finished product dimensions. ` %ASY TO USEINTUITIVETOUCHSCREEN
TrueWeighTM coordinates operation of up to 7.0-inch LCD touch-screen controller with full color graphics allows quick and easy
twelve (12) extruders, governing not only total set-up. User-friendly screens are configurable to match each specific extrusion
product throughput and dimensions, but also process type. Simple menu driven touch screens use a Q&A approach to guide the
the relative weight of different layers. operator through set-up. The operator can monitor the extrusion control set points,
the haul-off control data, current and past alarm status and complete management of
Processors realize increased yield through material inventory data.
precise, consistent control over extruder
output and weight per length to maintain ` 1UALITYMAINTAINEDDURINGTRANSITIONS
consistent rate and product thickness. Product Advanced programming ramps extruder(s) and haul-off drives synchronously. This
quality can be improved with precise layer- allows the system to make smooth transitions from one line output setting to a new
target output while maintaining product quality.
ratio control in co-extruded film or sheet, and
through better dimensional stability in tubing,
pipe and profile wall thickness.
U-1
TPEX025-0317 EXTRUSION CONTROL 425%7%)'(4-#/.42/,47#
Specifications
4RUE7EIGH#ONTROL0ANEL
2EMOTE4OUCH3CREEN
INCHES
[MM]
INCHES INCHES
[MM] [MM]
" $
INCHES
[MM]
-ODEL 47# 47# 47# 47# 47# 47# Specification Notes

Maximum number of extruders 1 3 5 7 9 12 Specifications may change without notice. Please
consult a Conair representative for the most current
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} information.
A - Overall width 16 {406} 18 {457} 23 {584} 30 {762}
B - Overall height 20 {508} 26 {660} 28 {711} 32 {813} 39 {991}
C - Mounting width 14.5 {368} 16.5 {419} 21.5 {546} 28.5 {724}
D - Mounting height 18.5 {470} 24.5 {622} 26.5 {673} 30.5 {775} 37.5 {953}
Features Options
• 7.0-inch touch-screen HMI with PLC based controls • Extruder drive control
• Monitor one to twelve extruders and one haul-off • Ramp drives simultaneously or independently
• Recipe book (stores 500 recipes and 250 resins) • Haul-off pulse encoder and drive control
• Trending, diagnostics, alarms and built-in help screens • Remote mounted touch screen interface
• USB output to flash drive or printer • Audible/visual alarm
• Reports (inventory, alarm and status) • Selectable remote communications protocols (OPC, Modbus
• Virtual Network Client (VNC) Viewer TCP, Ethernet IP)
• Selectable languages: English, Spanish, Portuguese, • Bumpless transfer
German, French, Russian, Chinese, Swedish and Korean • SQL Data Output
U-2
TPEX021-0317 EXTRUSION CONTROL 425%7%)'(4-47(-/$%,3
Precise Measurement
Of Material Throughput
Engineered as part of the Conair TrueWeighTM Gravimetric
Extrusion Control System, the TrueWeigh hopper measures the
mass flow of material into the extrusion process and sends
this loss-in-weight information to the TrueWeigh controller. The
controller then accurately monitors or adjusts the extruder screw
RPM and/or haul-off RPM to maintain a consistent yield control.
This enables an operator to run a uniform product within the
tightest tolerances at the lowest possible cost.
-ODEL47(
Accurately Measures Extruder Rate by Weight
Mounting directly to the extruder throat,

the TrueWeighTM hopper includes the weigh ` %ASEOFINSTALLATION
electronics and load cell required to precisely TrueWeighTM hoppers are supplied with sub-plates for direct connection to the extruder
measure the extruder’s material throughput. feed throat. Supplied as a blank, the sub-plate eliminates the need for feed throat
The “floating” weigh hopper is cantilevered off detailing prior to installation. Simply measure and drill the matching feed throat bolt
the load cell and is contained within a heavy- pattern, fasten the sub-plate in place and mount the hopper. No additional support is
duty frame. needed. Optional custom mounting adapters are also available.
Three (3) hopper sizes are available for ` )NTEGRALLOADINGSUPPORTPLATFORM

throughput rates from 10 to 5,000 lbs/hr TrueWeigh standard loading options accommodate Conair positive slide gates with
{4.5 to 2268 kg/hr}. The hoppers include a vacuum receivers, surge hoppers, stub, or blending systems. Custom adapters are
60 degree bottom cone for constant plug available to accommodate non-Conair loading equipment.
flow to optimize blend integrity through the ` 4RUE"LENDINTEGRATION
weigh hopper. The steep wall hopper works The TrueWeigh hopper can be used in conjunction with a TrueBlend Gravimetric Batch
well with any combination of free-flowing Blending System. The largest hopper can support up to a TB900 with loaders with no
pellet, flake, regrind and free-flowing powder additional support required.
or granular materials. A clear polycarbonate
inspection/clean-out door or sight glass allows
at-a-glance visual inspection of the hopper
contents.
U-3
TPEX021-0317 EXTRUSION CONTROL 425%7%)'(4-47(-/$%,3
Specifications
$
" #
3IDEVIEW &RONTVIEW
%
&
(
* Features
% & '
• Mild steel construction
• High accuracy, precision cantilever load cell
• High resolution weighing electronics
"OTTOMPLATE • Integral loader/surge hopper support platform for

4OPPLATE
Note: Standard plate is supplied blank Conair equipment
-ODEL 47( 47( 47(

• Inspection sight glass (on TWH-05)
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS • Clear polycarbonate inspection cleanout door
3
Hopper capacity ft {l} 0.5 {14} 2.7 {76} 4.4 {125} (on TWH-27 and TWH-44)
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} • Dust seals
A - Height 18.50 {469.9} 30.50 {774.7} 42.00 {1066.8} • Extruder mounting sub-plate (drilled in the field)
B - Depth 12.00 {340.8} 20.00 {508}
C - Hopper width 18.00 {457.2} 26.00 {660.4} 28.00 {711.2}
D - Overall width 23.91 {607.36} 32.12 {815.9} 34.12 {866.7}
E - Mounting plate width 10.16 {257.96} 11.00 {279.4} 13.00 {330.2} Options
F - Hole diameter 8.00 {203.2} 9.00 {228.6} 11.00 {279.4}
• Stainless steel construction
G - Hole diameter 2.56 {65.07} 3.00 {76.2} 3.50 {88.9}
H - Hole diameter 0.38 {9.53} 0.42 {10.54}
• High temperature design (up to 350° F {177° C})
J - Hole diameter 7.00 {177.8} 12.25 {311.15} • Dry air purge ports
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHT lb {kg} • Dust tight seals
Shipping 75 {34} 125 {57} 250 {114} • Drain valve (on TWH-27 and TWH-44)
%XTRUDERSIZE inches {mm]
• Positive shut-off valve on inlet
Minimum 2.5 {63.5} 3.0 {76.2} 3.5 {88.9}
Maximum 4.5 {114.3} 6.0 {152.4} 8.0 {203.2}
• Custom mounting adapter
• Integration with TrueBlend Blender for mono-extrusion line
Specification Notes control
Specifications may change without notice. Please consult a Conair • Special paint
representative for the most current information.
U-4
TPEX042-0317 EXTRUSION CONTROL 425%7%)'(©,).%-!.!'%2
Remote, Precise, Extended

Extrusion System Control
The TrueWeigh™ Line Manager allows extrusion processors
to put their equipment on “cruise control”. It tracks material
being fed to the extruder and automatically adjusts screw rpm
and the haul-off device to maintain a consistent product output
regardless of changes in raw materials, ambient conditions or
processing variables.
The TrueWeigh™ Line Manager has expanded features to
control up to 12 extruders, including blenders and haul-off. The
expanded functionality suits both mono-layer and co-extrusion
applications in film, sheet, coating, pipe, profile, tubing and
wire & cable extrusion.
INCH4RUE7EIGH,INE-ANAGER
Centrally Coordinate Pullers and Blenders
Varying process conditions, backpressure,

material bulk density, and even operator ` 4IGHTEREXTRUSIONANDTRANSITIONSREDUCESCRAP
skill sets can cut extruder productivity. The TrueWeigh allows processors to run products at minimum thickness (+/- 0.5% of
TrueWeigh system gives processors complete set point). Extruder(s) synchronize with haul-off, optimizing stability and creating
visibility and control over throughput and less scrap. Extruders and haul-off drives can ramp synchronously, so starting up and
finished product dimensions. transitioning between line settings happens smoothly and stays on-spec.
TrueWeigh coordinates operation of up to ` ,ARGERSCREENSTREAMLINESCONTROL

twelve (12) extruders, governing dimensions, The new, larger TrueWeigh touch screen can
relative weight of different layers, and total control more parts of your line - you can ramp up
throughput. The Line Manager can coordinate to 12 connected extruders in unison, along with
with pullers and blenders installed in a line, pullers or haul-off, synchronized or at independent
rates. Even blenders in the line can be adjusted
and output data in SQL format for use with
from the large, comprehensive touch screen
Conair’s SQL reporting software.
menus.
The TrueWeigh Line Manager’s control
` 3IMPLIFYSET UPANDREPORTING
of extruder output and weight per length
User-friendly screens are configurable to match each specific extrusion process type.
helps maintain consistent rate and product
The operator can monitor the extrusion control set points, the haul-off control data,
thickness. Product quality can be improved
current and past alarm status and complete management of material inventory data.
with precise layer-ratio control in co-extruded
Additionally, extensive data from connected blenders can be output in SQL format, for
film or sheet, and through better dimensional
use with Conair’s SQL reporting software.
stability in tubing, pipe and profile wall
thickness.
U-5
TPEX042-0317 EXTRUSION CONTROL 425%7%)'(©,).%-!.!'%2
Specifications
INCH
[MM] Specifications may change without notice. Please consult a Conair representative
for the most current information.
* Smaller dimensions denote space between
mounting slots.
TrueWeigh
INCH INCH
[MM] [MM]
INCH
[MM]
4RUE7EIGH,INE-ANAGER
2EMOTE4OUCH3CREEN Centrally and automatically control the rates and proportions of
Unit has a depth of 8 inches {203 mm} all ingredients, extruders and pullers. Adjust for weight per length,
cross-sectional accuracy, maximum yield, and more for targeted,
scrap-free results.
Icon-driven operational sets for film, profile, sheet, and more on The TrueWeigh Line Manager provides menus for individual
a 15-inch full color screen enable faster start-up, speed ramping, blenders and the individual ingredients of each, and allows you to
streamlined monitoring, and dynamic changes. centrally set and change recipes.
Features Options
• 15-inch touch-screen HMI with PLC based controls • Extruder drive control
• Monitor one to twelve extruders and one haul-off • Ramp drives simultaneously or independently
• Recipe book (stores 1,000 recipes and 250 resins) • Haul-off pulse encoder and drive control
• Trending, diagnostics, alarms and built-in help screens • Audible/visual alarm
• USB output to flash drive • Selectable remote communications protocols (OPC, Modbus
• Reports (inventory, alarm and status) TCP, Ethernet IP)
• Virtual Network Client (VNC) Viewer • Bumpless transfer
• Selectable languages: English, Spanish, German and • SQL Data Output
Chinese. Other languages available upon request.
U-6
TPEX026-0317 FILM TRIM RECLAIM SYSTEMS 42)3%2)%342)-).$5#%23
Automatically Remove
Trim Scrap
Use this trim pick-up system with an induction blower for
conveying thin-gauge edge and/or bleed trims generated in the
production of film, foam, sheet or tape extrusion lines. Trims are
picked up from the winder and conveyed in a continuous stream
to an in-line granulator system or off-line storage bin.
Closed-loop reprocessing of the trim scrap reduces scrap
handling costs and labor expenses and eliminates the risk of
product contamination. Trim scrap is restored to its original feed
stock value.
-ODEL42)
Trim Inducer
High Performance Trim Scrap Conveying
High induced-to-primary air ratio provides

consistent and reliable trim pick-up and ` &LEXIBLEINSTALLATION
conveying. Blower operation on the trim On the floor or in the air, the Conair Trim Inducer adapts easily to the installation
removal inducer is maximized by a simple requirement of any extrusion line. The unit is supplied with the venturi in a horizontal
venturi nozzle adjustment that changes the arrangement above the blower, but can easily be rotated to provide an optimal
venturi orientation. The venturi may also be mounted remotely from the blower using
induced air flow. This converts a specific
additional tubing.
volume of airflow on the vacuum side into a
much greater induced airflow on the pressure ` %FFICIENTTRIMPICK UPS
side. The design achieves higher air volumes Spun metal bellmouth pick-up nozzles provide a steady material flow without clogging
with less horsepower as compared to fixed or snagging. Stainless lined metal flex hose allows movement of the pick-up nozzles
designs and optimizes efficient system to ensure smooth trim material flow and prevent plugging in the convey lines. Optional
performance. custom manifolds for edge, bleed and/or center trims are adjustable and designed to
maintain constant material conveying velocity.
Conair TRI Series Inducers are available in
three (3) sizes to handle any thin-gauge ` 1UIETOPERATION
material trim convey application. The blower The continuous Trim Inducer is much quieter than an in-line cutter blower or guillotine
system. The blower is supplied with a silencer on the fan intake as standard. Optional
starter and controls are typically supplied in
silencers can be added to both the venturi inlet and/or the venturi outlet. A sound
the granulator control panel when supplied
enclosure can be added to the blower as well.
with a complete Conair scrap recycling system
or can be supplied as a stand-alone panel
when used as a stand-alone trim conveying
system.
U-7
TPEX026-0317 FILM TRIM RECLAIM SYSTEMS 42)3%2)%342)-).$5#%23
Specifications
/PTIONALINLET /PTIONALDISCHARGE
SILENCER SILENCER
' (
" %
# $ &
!
4OPVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODEL 42) 42) "LOWERMOUNTINGPATTERN

,
Inlet minimum 4.0 {101.6}
Discharge maximum 6.625 {168.3} 8.000 {203.2}
A - Overall length 162.0 {4115} 171.5 {4356} +
B - Depth 30.3 {769.6} 42.5 {1079.5}
C - Blower length 20.1 {510.5} 25.0 {635.0}
D - Air intake length 46.8 {1189.0} 47.0 {1193.8}
E - Height of material outlet 61.3 {1557.0} 69.0 {1752.6}
F - Height to center of air intake 19 {482.6} 26 {660.4} *
G - Optional silencer length 33 {838.2}
H - Optional silencer length 47.0 {1193.8} 54.0 {1371.6} Specification Notes
J - Blower mounting width 14.125 {358.8} 19.5 {495.3} * FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not
K - Blower mounting length 17.75 {450.9} 21.75 {552.5} include any options or accessories on equipment.
L - Hole diameter 0.563 {14.3} specific machines and systems, refer to the
-OTOR Hp {kw} electrical diagrams of the equipment order and
5 {3.7} 15 {11.2}
6OLTAGE Full load amps * a Conair representative for the most current
460V/3 phase/60 Hz 5.9 17.0 information.
Features Options
• Mild steel construction • Various venturi inlet configurations
• Adjustable venturi • Custom pick-up manifolds
• 230V/460V/3 phase/60Hz supply voltage • Silencers on the venturi inlet and/or outlet
• Silencer on the blower inlet • Sound enclosure for the blower
• TEFC Motors • Special voltages
• Stand-alone starter controls
• Special paint
U-8
TPEX023-0317 FILM TRIM RECLAIM SYSTEMS 3#2!03!6%24-33--/$%,3
Automatic, Consistent
In-Line Scrap Reprocessing
The ScrapSaverTM volumetrically feeds ground light density film
scrap to the extruder feed screw in a stable, consistent flow.
Conair trim systems handle all kinds of film and sheet waste and
return it directly to the extruder at rates of 25% or more.
Direct in-line reprocessing of scrap material eliminates scrap
handling costs and the risk of cross-contamination. Scrap
inventory and labor expenses are significantly reduced and
additional heat histories associated with secondary re-pelletizing
or densifying operations are eliminated.
-ODEL33-
with control panel
Direct Closed-Loop Reclaim Increases Profits
The ScrapSaverTM delivers a consistent

ratio of ground scrap and virgin pellets. Two ` ,ONGLIFEMOTORANDGEARBOXES
hoppers maintain component segregation until The vertical scrap auger is driven with a reliable AC inverter motor. The drive system
discharge approximately 1/2 - 1 inch {12-25 comes equipped with multi-level current overload protection with alarm status to
mm} above the screw flights. An agitator protect against premature drive and gearbox failure.
auger in the fluff hopper ensures reliable ` 7ONTOVERFEEDORUNDERFEEDTHEPROCESS
feeding of the scrap, while the virgin pellets The ScrapSaverTM follows any change in the extruder throughput rate. The following
are gravity fed. To optimize scrap re-feed circuit provides consistent feed, avoids “cramming” the flights and eliminates related
rates and protect process stability, pellets extruder surging. A low speed cut-out and an internal level sensor with delay timer
enter the flights in an annular ring surrounding controls the scrap granulator roll feed to prevent overfeeding.
the fluff. This creates a consistent flight-to-
` !GITATIONPREVENTSBRIDGING
flight mix ratio and provides a steady, and Agitator arms on the auger are designed to prevent bridging in the ScrapSaver machine
consistent flow of material. and keep a consistent flow of ground scrap into the extruder.
Four different auger sizes are available to ` )NEXPENSIVEOPERATION
match extruder sizes up to eight (8) inch Automated system virtually eliminates operator involvement and scrap handling costs.
{200 mm}. Scrap re-feed rates are typically
up to 25% of overall extruder throughput, but ` !DDITIVEFEEDERSIDEMOUNT
higher rates may be possible depending on A replaceable sight glass accommodates TrueFeed and other additive feeders for direct
the extruder feed section, screw design and input to the ScrapSaver pellet feed chute.
the end-product being extruded.
U-9
TPEX023-0317 FILM TRIM RECLAIM SYSTEMS 3#2!03!6%24-33--/$%,3
Specifications !
IN
[MM]
/PTIONAL
#YCLONE
"
IN
[MM]
Features
$
• Remote mounted touch screen
#
operator interface displays motor load
CONTROLPANEL and speed
• Current overload protection with alarm
% • Control panel: 18 inches {457.2 mm}
wide x 18.3 inches {464.82 mm} high
IN /PTIONAL#YCLONE x 8 inches {203.2 mm} deep
[MM]
IN • NEMA 12 enclosure
[MM]
• Variable speed AC drive
• Extruder screw following circuit
IN
• Internal level indicator
[MM]
IN
• Scrap chamber bridge breaker
[MM]
• Mild steel material contact surfaces
• Custom designed machine mount
flange
! • Virgin pellet and scrap view ports
&RONTVIEW 4OPVIEW • Virgin pellet drain
-ODEL 33- 33- 33- 33- • Safety interlocks
A - Auger tube size at
1.5 {38.1} 2.5 {63.5} 3.5 {88.9} 4.5 {114.3}
outlet inches {mm}
Maximum scrap rate
ft3/hr {l/hr}
10 {283} 30 {850} 75 {2124} 150 {4248} Options
Minimum extruder sizes
2.0 {50.8} 3.0 {76.2} 4.0 {101.6} 5.0 {127} • High efficiency cyclone with optional
inches {mm}
#APACITYft3 {l} filter
Virgin chamber 0.5 {14}
Scrap chamber 2.5 {70} • Pellet inlet adapter
Auger motor Hp {kW} 1.5 {1.12} • Additive feeder port
!PPROXIMATE7EIGHT lb {kg}
Shipping 600 {272} • Diverter valve (feeds two
6OLTAGE Full load amps * ScrapSaverTM machines from a
400V/3 phase/50 Hz 3.3 single source)
460V/3 phase/60 Hz 3.1
/PTIONAL#YCLONE
-ODEL #9# #9# #9# #9# Specification Notes
* FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not
Maximum CFM rating 375 500 850 1600 include any options or accessories on equipment.
Use with blower FB-1 FB-1.5 FB-3 FB-7.5 For full FLA detail for power circuit design of
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} specific machines and systems, refer to the
A - Exhaust outlet 7 {177.8} 8 {203.2} 10 {254} 14 {355.6} electrical diagrams of the equipment order and
B - Inlet 4 {101.6} 5 {127.0} 6 {152.4} 8 {203.2}
C - Inlet height 37.25 {946.2} 43.00 {1092.2} 53.00 {1346.2} 79.50 {2019.3} Specifications may change without notice. Consult
a Conair representative for the most current
D - Overall height 46.25 {1174.75} 52.00 {1320.8} 63.00 {1600.2} 91.50 {2324.1} information.
E - Material outlet 4.0 {101.6} 5.0 {127.0} 5.5 {139.7} 6.0 {152.4}
U-10
Downstream
Storage
Vacuum Sizing Equipment

-ED6AC4ANKS %
(4-03ERIES %
-46ACUUM3IZING4ANKS %
Conveying
Spray Vacuum Sizing Equipment
-3"()3ERIES7ATER3PRAY4ANKS %
Cooling Tanks
-#"3ERIES %
Drying -0#"3ERIES %
%#"3ERIES %
Belt Pullers
0RECISION3ERIES"ELT0ULLERS %
"03ERIES"ELT0ULLERS %
Blending/Feeding
Cleated Pullers
#03ERIES#LEATED0ULLERS %
Cutters and Saws

#3#-ODEL3ERVO#UTTER %
Heat Transfer 3URE#UT2OTARY+NIFE#UTTERS %
40#0LANETARY#UTTER %
- 40#0LANETARY#UTTER %
435P #UT4RAVELLING#UT OFF3AWS %
#OMBINATION0ULLER#UTTER-ED,INE-ODELS %
#OMBINATION0ULLER#UTTER#0#-ODELS %
Size
ze Reduction
Coilers
!4#3ERIES %
Takeaway Conveyor
Upstream
am 4!#3ERIES %
-4!#3ERIES %
Dump Tables
$43ERIES %
Accessories
!CCESSORY%QUIPMENT %
Downstream
Downstream Extrusion Quick Reference
Plastic Lumber/
Thin-Wall Tube
Window / Door
Flexible Trim /
Water Passes
Small Profile
Rigid Tube /
Rigid Trim /
Small Pipe
Number of
Gasketing
* Vacuum
Decking
(straws)
Medical
Flexible
Lineals
Tubing
Water
Hose
-/$%,3
6ACUUM3IZING 4UBE0Rofile 0UMP 6ACUUM4ANK #OOLING

4YPE !PPLICATIONS
4ANKS #APACITYINCHES (P ,ENGTHFT ,ENGTHFT
-ED6AC3ERIES MICROTODIA TO 3INGLEPASS TO .! z z
(4-03ERIES MICROTODIA -ULTIPASS TO TO z z
-4 UPTODIA 3INGLEPASS TO .! z z z z
-4 UPTODIA 3INGLEPASS TO .! z z z z z
6#3ERIESTANKSAREAVAILABLEFORDIAMETERSGREATERTHANINCHES
0#4#ALIBRATION4ABLESAREAVAILABLEFORPRofiles to 30 inches wide and tabled lengths to 32 feet. Consult factory for quote.
-3"()3ERIES UPTOWIDE 3INGLEPASS TO .! z z z z z
6ACUUM,EVELS(P INCHESOF(/(P INCHESOF(/
4UBE0Rofile #APACITY 0UMP #OOLING 4ANK4ABLE

!PPLICATIONS
#OOLING4ANKS INCHES (P -ETHOD ,ENGTHFT
-#"3ERIES TODIA )MMERSION3PRAY TO z z z z z z z z
-0#"3ERIES -ICROTODIA )MMERSION-ULTI PASS TO z z
%#"3ERIES TODIA )MMERSION TO z z z z z z z z
-3"()3ERIES UPTODIA TO 3PRAY TO z z z z z
"ELT,ENGTH "ELT7IDTH -OTOR -AX"ELT "ELT

0ULLERS !PPLICATIONS
INCHES INCHES (P /PENINGINCHES 4YPE
0RECISION3ERIES TO TO TO TO Poly-V/flat z z z z z z
"03ERIES TO TO TO 0OLY 6 z z z z z z
#03ERIES TO TO TO #LEATED z z z
#UTTERS 4UBE0Rofile $RIVE -OTOR #UTSUPTO

!PPLICATIONS
AND3AWS #APACITYINCHES 4YPE (P PERMINUTE
#3# ,#3# , 3ERVO z z z z z
#3##3# 3ERVO z z z z z
#3# #3# 3ERVO z z z z
3URE#UT4UBE TO 3ERVO TO z z z z z
3URE#UT0Rofile XTOX 3ERVO TO z z z z z
435P #UT3ERIES UPTODIA !# TO #ONSULT#ONAIR z z z z
40# 3ERIES TODIA 3ERVO 5PTO z
- 40# 3ERIES UPTODIA 3ERVO #ONSULT#ONAIR z z
#OMBINATION 4UBE0Rofile #UTTER-OTOR 0ULLER-OTOR "ELT,ENGTH "ELT7IDTH ,INE3PEED

!PPLICATIONS
0ULLER#UTTER #APACITYINCHES (P (P INCHES INCHES FTMIN
-ED,INE3ERIES MICROTODIA TO TO TO TO UPTO z z
#0#3ERIES UPTODIA TO TO TO TO UPTO z z z z z
#UTAND4RANSFER 4UBE0Rofile #OIL3IZE 4URRET ,INE3PEED

4RAVERSE !PPLICATIONS
7INDERS #APACITYINCHES INCHES $RIVE FTMIN
!4#!UTOMATIC TO TODIA 3ERVO 3ERVO TO z z
-4#-ANUAL TO TODIA 3ERVO .! 5PTO z z
#ONVEYORS #ONVEYOR,ENGTHFT -OTOR(P "ELT7IDTHINCHES "ELT3PEEDFTMIN !PPLICATIONS

4!#3ERIES TO TO z z z z
-4!#3ERIES TO TO z z z z
$UMP4ABLES 4ABLE,ENGTHFT 4ABLE7IDTHFT 4ILT !PPLICATIONS

$43ERIES TO 0NEUMATIC z z z z z
TPEX027-0317 VACUUM SIZING EQUIPMENT-%$6!#4!.+3
Precision Sizing for

Medical Tubing
Products
MedVac flood-cooling sizing tanks are uniquely designed to meet
the specialized process needs of medical tubing manufacturers.
These high technology, vacuum sizing systems feature advanced
digital controls for rock-steady precision to ensure optimum
product quality for single and multilumen microbore heart
catheters to large-gauge medical tubing.
-ODEL-ED6AC
(Shown with optional UV filter.)
Absolutely Consistent Dimensional Control
Available in five models, MedVac Series

vacuum tanks provide exceptional tube ovality ` #LEANERINTERIORDESIGN
and concentricity for product sizing under Tank interior is designed to ease cleanout by minimizing sharp corners and
vacuum or as a process aid for free extrusion. exposed threads where bacteria, pyrogens and other particulate matter can build up.
Telescoping drip tray is one piece to aid wipe-down by eliminating open seams. Guide
Industrial duty, stainless steel construction rollers inside the tank are attached to free-standing, removable mounts for cleaning.
combined with bow resistant half-inch
{12.7 mm} tempered glass lids and an ` -EDICAL GRADEFILTRATION
integrated proportional valve allow fine-control Process water is segregated from the heat/cool circuit to eliminate contamination.
of the vacuum level to within 0.1 inch of System can be fitted with a UV water purifier and a 5 micron sedimentary
water for repeatable, precise process control. pre-filter as options.
Optional water tempering controls the bath to
±1 degree optimizing heat transfer rates for ` %ASYSET UPANDOPERATION
obtaining specific material properties. Narrow tank frame accommodates almost any extruder or melt pump, even three
Pivoting overhead controls allow process layer. Three-axis tank alignment system with hand wheels, linear slides and ball-
adjustments and monitoring right at the screw actuators provide stable, precision positioning to within thousandths of an inch.
extrusion die.
` 0ROCESSVALIDATION
Special non-contact tooling is available for the Optional PAVC+ control offers a serial interface for a host microprocessor to
processing of low durometer materials. record process settings. Optional transducer provides a digital, linear readout for
measuring/recording distance from die face to where the tube enters the water.
E-1
Features
01 06
3TAINLESSSTEELTANK 2OCK STEADY AXISPRECISIONPOSITION
08 ADJUSTMENT offer fine adjustment, is tighter
02
and less prone to vibration and unwanted
3INGLEPIECETELESCOPINGDRIPTRAY movement during process of critical tubes.
easier to clean since there are no
separate pieces to hide pyrogens or 07
01
other contaminates. 04 02 -ANUAL INCH[MM]
07 LONGITUDINALADJUSTMENT with hand
03 wheel provides fast linear movement to
2OUNDEDBOTTOMFOREASIERCLEANING 03 and from the die.
eliminates corners to ease cleanout
and removal of contaminates. 08
3WINGARMPIVOTINGCONTROLPOD with
04 06 ten-turn potentiometer speed control
(INGEDONE HALFINCH[MM] and vacuum guage offers ease of
TEMPEREDGLASSTANKLIDS 09
access while allowing use of a co-
solid design restricts bending to provide extruder without frame interference.
excellent visibility of the product and
uncompromised sealing. 09
05
0AINTEDSTEELFRAME
05 10
(IGHLYDURABLEURETHANESWIVEL 10
CASTERS with jackscrews for positive &ULLCAPACITYSTAINLESSSTEEL
positioning. RESERVOIR with easy access glass lids.
• 6ARIABLESPEED6&!#VACUUM • 3TAINLESSSTEEL CENTRIFUGAL • !DJUSTABLEWATERLEVELCONTROL

PRESSUREBLOWER WATERCIRCULATIONPUMP with thermometer.
High CFM capacity with low RPM allows and heat exchanger.
• &REE STANDINGBLANKPRODUCT
operation to 130 inches water
• 1UICKCHANGESPINOFFFILTER ROLLERASSEMBLIES
{3.3 meters water} with minimum noise.
lift out of the tank for ease of cleaning.
• &LOATVALVE for automatic filling and
make up.
Options
• Left-to-right direction • Stainless steel plumbing package for • Ultraviolet water treatment unit
deionized water for medical applications
• Special non-automotive powder coat • Filter housing with 5 micron rating filter
• Mounting of customer supplied ultra
• Stainless steel frame sonic wall unit in first 18 inches • Special power: 230/3/60, 380/3/50 or
{457 mm} of vacuum chamber with water 575/3/60
• Full-length stainless steel splash tray
under main tank connections, including de-bubbling unit • Increased vacuum capability of up to 200
for water input inches water
• Passivation of stainless components
to minimize corrosion • PAVC+ Ethernet or Analog interface • CE certification
• Electropolish of main stainless • PAVC+ Temperature control • UL certification

components
E-2
Tooling Options
• Pre-skinning chamber with in- • Flow meter rated for • Flow meter option in stainless steel
dependent water flow control 0 to 70 gallons per hour
valve complete with one set of {0 to 284 liters per hour} with • Additional blank product guide
tooling brass pressure regulator roller assemblies
• Additional sets of pre-skinner • Split design air wipe assembly with • Contoured product guide roller
inserts for other product sizes mounting bracket assemblies
0RE SKINNINGCHAMBERWITHTOOLINGINSERTSFORFLEXIBLEPOLYMERS
• Calibrate/quench assembly for flexible • Split-design air-wipe assemblies
materials
• Split design air wipe assembly with
• Hold-down guide rollers, contoured or mounting bracket
non-contoured
• Adjustable water level
PAVC+ Vacuum Control
The optional touchscreen PAVC+

Vacuum Control is used with Conair
vacuum water tanks to maintain a
constant and precise vacuum pressure
within the tank. Connections are
provided for automatic feedback
control of the setpoint by use of X/Y
laser scanners that monitor the profile.
The PAVC+ provides recirculation and
vacuum pump Start and Stop, with
input conditioning. Setpoint adjustment
is done via the HMI control panel of
the vacuum tank. The local setpoint
can also be adjusted externally via
Raise and Lower contacts, or Ethernet
communications.
With recipe storage and optional
Ethernet communication for interfacing
with a host computer or other
equipment, the PAVC+ control is
ideal for fine tuning vacuum sizing
and storing those settings for rapid
startups in the future.
E-3
Specifications
"
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS -ED6AC -ED6AC -ED6AC -ED6AC -ED6AC
Tube/profile capacity Up to 2 inch {51 mm}
Vacuum system Variable-speed vacuum blower / 0 to 130 In. H2O {0 to 32.38 kPa}
Water system Stainless steel centrifugal water circulation pump and heat exchanger with spin-off filter
Recirculating pump Hp {kW} 1 {0.74} 2 {1.4}
Vacuum pump Hp {kW} 1.70 {1.26}
Tank length inches {mm} 60 {1524} 96 {2438} 132 {3353} 204 {5181} 276 {7010}
Number of compartments 3 3 4 5 6
#OMPARTMENTTYPE
Vacuum inches {mm} 36 {914} 72 {1829} 108 {2743} 180 {4572} 252 {6401}
Water (flood) seal inches {mm} 10 {254}
Air wipe inches {mm} 14 {355.6}
Blank roller assemblies included 2 3 4 8 12
A - Height 76.8 {1951}
B - Height to centerline 42 ± 2 inch {1067 ± 51 mm}
C - Overall length 80.8 {2052.32} 107.2 {2722.88} 143 {3632.2} 215 {5461} 287.5 {7302.5}
D - Overall depth 33 {838} 33 {838} 33 {838} 36 {914} 36 {914}
Longitudinal adjustment (manual) 8 - 12 inches {203 - 305 mm}
Tank compartment cross section 8 x 8 inch {203 x 203 mm}
Shipping 1250 {567} 1400 {635} 1600 {726} 2100 {953} 2600 {1180}
460V/3 phase/60 Hz Consult Conair
Water requirements City, tower or chiller water. Main supply line: 1 inch NPT fitting
* FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to
the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
E-4
TPEX032-0317 VACUUM SIZING EQUIPMENT(4-03%2)%3
Conserve Space with

Multi-pass Extrusion
Cooling Tanks
HTMP multi-pass tanks accommodate tight space demands
for high speed, high rate tubing production. High technology
vacuum sizing is integrated with over-sized servo-driven
sheaves within the primary cooling tank to satisfy product-
specific residence times while precisely cooling and metering
the product. Ideally designed for cleanroom and other space
limited production areas, the HTMP delivers the industry’s best
control for medical product sizing, ovality, tolerance and tension
for flexible PVC, TPE, TPU and PE tubing.
-ODEL(4-0
Save Space, Eliminate Stretch and Tighten Tolerances
HTMP combination multi-pass vacuum tanks

are designed for high-speed commodity tube ` )MPROVEPROCESSCONTROL
extrusions requiring extensive bath cooling. Supplied with an integral vacuum chamber, the HTMP adds critical stability to the
The multi-purpose tanks take up to five process by holding precise and repeatable ovality, concentricity and wall thickness.
times less floor space compared to standard Vacuum can be held to 0.10 inches of water {0.19 mm Mercury}. Seamless control
cooling tanks. HTMP tanks incorporate a integration with third party measuring systems ensure repeatability.
vacuum (or free extrusion) chamber and
feature a servo-driven 20-inch {508 mm} ` )NTEGRATEDCOMPONENTSSAVECOST
diameter primary sheave that doubles as a The HTMP integrates a precision vacuum tank, primary puller, multi-pass cooling
puller. The large diameter and controlled pull and air wipe chamber into a single package, eliminating added cost and space
force avoid tube flattening and distortion. requirements for stand-alone components.
Sheaves can be machined to a particular
tube diameter, improving accuracy over belt ` #UTMATERIALWASTEANDINCREASEYIELD
pullers by eliminating any undesirable normal Precision vacuum combined with a third party ID/OD gauge provides exceptional
‘crush’ effect. The driven sheave significantly dimensional control to save tens of thousands of pounds of material while increasing
shortens the travel distance of the tube before production yield. Example: HTMP systems can have reduced tolerances from
pickup, minimizing stretch and tension. ±0.005 inch {±0.127 mm} down to ±0.003 inch {±0.076 mm}.
Precision glass bearings on non-driven ` #LEANERINTERIORDESIGN

sheaves eliminate drag and stretching as the Tank interior is designed to ease daily cleanout by minimizing sharp corners and
tubing makes subsequent passes through the exposed threads where bacteria, pyrogens and other particulate matter can build up.
tank at line speeds up to 800 feet/minute Telescoping drip tray is one piece to aid wipe-down by eliminating open seams.
{243 meters/minute}. Guide rollers inside the vacuum tank are fixed to free-standing mounts to allow
removal for cleaning.
E-5

06 01
05
02
09
04
06
03
10
12
13
07
11
14
08
01 06 10
Heavy guage stainless steel tank 12-inch {304 mm} secondary sheaves Stainless steel (304) centrifugal water
circulation pump and heat exchanger
02 07 11
Single piece, telescoping drip tray - easier to
Rock-steady, 3-axis precision position Full capacity stainless steel reservoir with
clean since there are no separate pieces to
adjustment with manual 12 inch {304} easy access glass lids
hide pyrogens or other contaminates.
longitudinal, 1 inch {25 mm} side to side
03 and ±2 inch {51 mm} height adjustment. 12
Stainless steel splash tray Variable speed VFAC vacuum pressure
08
blower
04 Urethane swivel casters with jackscrews
for positive positioning 13
Hinged one-half inch {12.7mm} tempered
glass tank lids Water circulation pump for cooling
09
05 Ten-turn potentiometer control with 14
20-inch {508 mm} primary sheave vacuum gauge Braised stainless steel heat exchanger
/PTIONS
• &LOATVALVE for automatic filling and • 2OUNDEDBOTTOMFOREASIERCLEANING • 1UICKCHANGESPIN OFFFILTER
make up eliminates corners to ease cleanout and
• ,EFT TO RIGHTOPERATION
removal of contaminates
• 6ARIABLESPEED6&!#VACUUM
• #USTOMPAINT
PRESSUREBLOWER • "LANKPRODUCTROLLERASSEMBLIESfor
High CFM capacity with low RPM allows vacuum tank • 2!,WHITEPAINT
operation to 130 inches water
• !DJUSTABLEWATERLEVELCONTROLwith • 0ASSIVATIONOFSTAINLESSSTEEL
{3.3 meters water} with minimum noise
thermometer recommended for medical applications
• 3TAINLESSSTEEL CENTRIFUGALWATER
• 0AINTEDSTEELFRAME • 3TAINLESSSTEELFRAME
CIRCULATIONPUMPand heat exchanger
E-6
/PTIONSCONTINUED
• 3TAINLESSSTEELANDPLASTICPLUMBING • 56-AXULTRAVIOLETWATERTREATMENTUNIT • INCHTHICKPOLYCARBONATEHINGED
PACKAGEincluding nickel braised heat COVERS with gas shocks for the non
• -INNTECHBRAND POLYPROPYLENEFILTER
exchangers. (no copper or brass) vacuum section
housing with 5 micron rating filter
• OR • #%#ERTIFICATION
• TWOADDITIONALNONDRIVENWHEEL for five
POWERSUPPLY
pass operation • 5,#ERTIFICATION
• 3ERVODRIVEN INCHFIRSTPASSROLLER
Tooling Options
0RE SKINNINGCHAMBERWITHTOOLINGINSERTSFORFLEXIBLEPOLYMERS
• Calibrate/quench • Hold-down guide • Split-design
assembly for rollers, contoured air-wipe
flexible materials or non-contoured assemblies
• Additional sets of pre-skinner inserts for other product sizes

• Flow meter rated for 0 to 70 gallons per hour {0 to 265 liters
per hour} with pressure regulator
• Flow meter option in stainless steel
• Split design air wipe assembly with mounting bracket
• Additional blank product guide roller assemblies
• Contoured product guide roller assemblies

The touchscreen PAVC+ Vacuum Control
digitally maintains a constant and
precise vacuum pressure within the tank.
Connections are provided for automatic
feedback control of the setpoint by use
of X/Y laser scanners that monitor the
profile. The PAVC+ provides recirculation
and vacuum pump Start and Stop, with
input conditioning. Setpoint adjustment
is done via the HMI control panel of the
vacuum tank. The local setpoint can also
be adjusted externally via Raise and Lower
contacts, or Ethernet communications.
With recipe storage and optional Ethernet
communication for interfacing with a host
computer or other equipment, the PAVC+
control is ideal for fine tuning vacuum
sizing and storing those settings for rapid
startups in the future.
E-7
Specifications
"
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS (4-0 (4-0 (4-0

Capacity (tube) Up to 0.5 inch {12.7 mm} diameter
Compartments 3 4 5
Number of passes Up to 5
Vacuum system Variable-speed vacuum blower / 0 to 130 In. H2O {0 to 32.38 kPa}
Water circulation pump (vac) 2 Hp
Water circulation pump (open) 2 Hp
Water system contacts Non-ferrous
A - Overall height inches {mm} 76.8 {1951}
B - Tank height inches {mm} 8 {203}
C - Overall length feet {mm} 15.25 {387.3} 21.25 {539.75} 27.20 {690.88}
D - Overall width inches {mm} 55 {1397}
Vacuum chamber length feet {mm} 6 {1829} 12 {3657} 18 {5486}
Vacuum chamber width inch {mm} 8 {203}
Cooling chamber length feet {mm} 12 {3658} 18 {5486} 24 {7315}
Cooling chamber width inch {mm} 26 {660}
Air wipe chamber length inch {mm} 24 {610}
Primary (driven) sheave inch {mm} diameter 20 {508}
Secondary (non-driven) sheave 12 {304}
Adjustments 3-plane manual
Centerline height inches {mm} 42 ±2 {1066.8 ±50.8}
#ONSTRUCTION
Tank material Stainless steel
Full length splash tray Stainless steel
Product guide roller brackets* 12 18 24
Base frame Carbon steel
Shipping 2800 {1270} 3400 {1542} 3900 {1769}
6OLTAGEFull Load Amps †
* Product guide roller bracket not included.
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to
E-8
TPEX001-0317 VACUUM SIZING EQUIPMENT-46!#55-3):).'4!.+3
Precise Sizing
and Cooling of
Tubing and Profiles
Conair MT Series vacuum sizing tanks provide stable
vacuum for precise sizing of tube and profile extrusions
up to 4.5 inches {114.3 mm} in diameter. Water/air
separation technology improves product tolerances and surface
finishes and allows for repeatable quality while minimizing scrap.
All models offer a high-efficiency plate heat exchanger, an

improved spray bar and water level adjustment system, and a
wide range of tank sizes and pump configurations.
-ODEL-4
Water/Air Separation Ensures Vacuum Stability
Most vacuum sizing tanks use a single

standpipe to maintain water levels and ` %ASYTOOPERATE
pull vacuum into the chamber. Pockets of Built-in water-manifold system with water and vacuum valves are dedicated to
water and air surging through the same line each vacuum chamber (up to 5). Convenient quick dump valves drain the tank.
can cause a hammer effect and vacuum Optional digital control offers automatic vacuum adjustment and in-line gauge or
fluctuations that can harm the shape and computer interface.
surface finish of the product.
` )MPROVEDTANKSTABILITY
MT sizing tanks eliminate this problem by Designed to handle heavier pulling forces. Heavy-duty shafts and bearings provide
using separate water and air pipes in a closed precise yet rigid longitudinal, vertical and side-to-side adjustment capabilities.
water reservoir. Float valves in the reservoir (Roller system eliminates tank rock).
maintain the water level below the vacuum
pump inlet. The vacuum pump evacuates ` 3TAINLESS STEELCOMPONENTS
only the air in the reservoir, never the water, The vacuum tank, water reservoirs, splash tray, drip trays and dome lid are stainless
allowing optimum pump performance and steel. Other surfaces are painted for corrosion resistance.
minimizing surges in vacuum level.
` 4ANKLENGTHSTOFEET
Wide range of sizes, from a 7-foot {2.1 meter}, 2-chamber tank to the 22-foot
{6.7 meter}, 5-chamber tanks.
E-9
Features
01 07
Vacuum tank with built-in
Vacuum gauge High-efficiency plate
guide roller positions every
heat exchanger
12 inches {305 mm}
02 (back of tank)
01
07 Sight glass
08
08
03 Glass lids
02
03 Temperature gauges
09 09
04
04 Internal water level
Quick dump valves control
10
05 10
Water manifold with Telescoping drip tray
05 valves designated for
each chamber 11
11 Heavy-duty actuators
06 06 for longitudinal,
Open and sealed vertical and side-to-
reservoirs side alignment
Features / Options
y 3TANDARD /PTIONAL – .OT!VAILABLE
7ATER 6ACUUM !IR7IPE 7ATER&LOW 'LASS 4ELESCOPING

/PTIONS
0UMP 0UMP #OMPARTMENT -ETERS ,IDS $RAIN4RAY
(P (P (P (P (P
MT104-7-2 y - - y -
MT104-10-3 y - - y -
MT104-13-3 y - - y -
MT104-16-4 y - - y -
MT104-22-5 y - - y -
MT105-7-2 y - - y -
MT105-10-3 y - - y -
MT105-16-4 y - y
MT105-22-5 y y
E-10
Options
OR(PWATERPUMP (PVACUUMPUMP
for processing thick-walled for processes that require
products or high-speed lines vacuum pressures up to 200
that require greater water flow. inches of water (14.7 inches of
2 Hp = 30 gpm @ 45 psi mercury) and cfm rates up to
5 Hp = 100 gpm @ 45 psi 150 for producing larger tubes
7.5 Hp = 125 gpm @ 45 psi and profiles.
"OLT ONCOMPRESSEDAIRWIPE
&LOWMETERS on the water COMPARTMENTfor drying the
valves in each chamber. plastic product as it leaves the
sizing tank. 80 psi required.
• 'LASSVIEWINGLIDS not available on units • 0!6#0RECISION!UTOMATIC6ACUUM • #USTOMPAINT

with vacuum blowers over 1.7 Hp, CONTROLWITHTOUCHSCREEN(-)for
• &ILTERSYSTEMWITHFLUSHCAPABILITIESfor
producing pressures greater than digital vacuum control providing increased
minimum pressure drop and one hundred
135 inches of water {3.4 meters of water}. accuracy and interface with measuring
gallons per minute filter capacity.
equipment including an invertor drive.
• 4ELESCOPINGFRONTDRIPTRAY for catching
• 4HREEWAYVALVEFORVACUUMSHUTOFFin
water running off the calibration tool. • 0!6#
secondary chamber. This allows chamber
The tray expands from 4 to 12 inches s%THERNETMICROPROCESSORINTERFACE
to operate in the flood cooling mode.
{102 mm to 305 mm}. s!NALOGMICROPROCESSORINTERFACE
• /PTIONALVOLTAGES
• 6ACUUMCONTROLincluding eye level, NEMA • 0!6#TEMPERATURECONTROLincluding
230V/3 phase/60Hz
12 enclosure with ten turn potentiometer plug in module, thermocouple pickup and
575V/3 phase/60Hz
control, AC invertor and manual vent valve heat exchanger solenoid valve.
for 1.7 hp vacuum blower. 400V/3 phase/60Hz
• 0RESKINNERASSEMBLYfor non contact
• ,EFT TO RIGHTOPERATION sizing applications including one set of
glass inserts bored to size.

/PTIONAL$IGITAL#ONTROL
The touchscreen PAVC+ vacuum control maintains a constant and
precise vacuum pressure within the tank. Connections are provided
for automatic feedback control of the setpoint by use of X/Y laser
scanners that monitor the profile. The PAVC+ provides recirculation
and vacuum pump Start and Stop, with input conditioning. Setpoint
adjustment is done via the HMI control panel of the vacuum tank.
The local setpoint can also be adjusted externally via Raise and
Lower contacts, or Ethernet communications.
With recipe storage and optional Ethernet communication for
interfacing with a host computer or other equipment, the PAVC+
control is ideal for fine tuning vacuum sizing and storing those
settings for rapid startups in the future.
E-11
Specifications
"
INCH
$
[MM]
# %
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS -4 -4
4ANK3TYLE
Tube/profile capacity Up to 2 inches {50 mm} Up to 4.5 inches {125 mm}
Vacuum blower / Water pump 1.7 Hp vacuum / 2 Hp water
Number of compartments 2 3 3 4 5 2 3 4 5
3 ft. / 6 ft. / 1 ft. seal 0/1/1 1/1/1 0/2/1 1/2/1 1/3/1 0/1/1 1/1/1 1/2/1 1/3/1
Tank compartment width 12 {306}
Tank compartment height 8 {203} 12 {306}
A - Overall height 80 {2032}
B - Height to centerline† 42 {1067}
C - Overall length 100 {2540} 137 {3658} 180 {4572} 210 {5334} 285 {7239} 100 {2540} 137 {3658} 210 {5334} 285 {7239}
D - Tank length feet {mm} 7 {2134} 10 {3048} 13 {3962} 16 {4877} 22 {6705} 7 {2134} 10 {3048} 16 {4877} 22 {6706}
E - Overall width 7 {178} 48.5 {1232}
Shipping 1500 {680} 1800 {816} 2200 {998} 2800 {1270} 3500 {1587} 1500 {680} 2200 {998} 2800 {1270} 3500 {1587}
%LECTRICALREQUIREMENTSFull load amps p
240V/3 phase/50-60 Hz Consult Conair

480V/3 phase/50-60 Hz (Std) Consult Conair
7ATERREQUIREMENTS
City, tower or chiller water; main supply line 1 inch NPT fitting
* You will need a V-groove caster adapter if you have rails that are not spaced 25 inches {635 mm} apart. Adapters are available for rails with center line spacing of 22 to 25 inches
{559 to 635 mm}.
†
Centerline height is adjustable ± 2 inches {50.8 mm}.
‡
Amp draws will increase for optional pump configurations.
** FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to the
E-12
TPEX004-0317 SPRAY VACUUM SIZING EQUIPMENT-3"()3%2)%37!4%2302!94!.+3
High-Intensity Spray
for more Rapid Cooling
Conair MSBHI Series cooling tanks produce a high-pressure
spray that cools tube and profile extrusions faster and in less
space than immersion tanks.
For pipe and tube of significant mass, immersion tanks

compromise cooling efficiency due to the formation of an
insulation layer over the hot product surface. MSBHI high
intensity spray tanks eliminate this problem and increase cooling
efficiency through the process of extreme turbulent cooling.
Cooling water droplets striking the hot surface rapidly conduct
the heat away and are driven off in a continuous process.
-3"()
Keyhole Tank Design: Minimizes Plumbing / Enhances Flow
The keyhole design of MSBHI tanks

incorporate the spray and reservoir tanks into ` %ASYTOOPERATE
one compartment. The combination requires Built-in water manifold system has water valves dedicated to each spray chamber.
less plumbing, minimize future maintenance, Individual spray bars control the direction of the spray to optimize cooling for each
and improves water flow through the tank for product's geometry. Quick dump valves are provided for draining the tank.
more efficient cooling of extruded products.
` 3TAINLESS STEELCOMPONENTS
All standard MSBHI models include an integral The tank, water reservoirs, and drip pans are stainless steel. Other surfaces are
reservoir/spray tank, individual control of all painted for corrosion resistance.
spray zones (VPTOX), a spray system sized for
up to 100 gpm {379 liters/min}, stainless steel ` 4ANKLENGTHSOFTOFEET[TOMETERS]
lids and adjustable tank height and The MSBHI is available in a range of sizes; from a 16-foot {4.9 meters}, two-chamber
side-to-side movement. tank to the 24-foot {7.3 meters}, three-chamber tank.
For faster cooling rates, you can increase the ` /PTIONSTOFITYOURNEEDS

flow rate to as much as 220 gpm Optional recirculation and heat exchanger packages increase cooling efficiency by
{833 liters/min} and cooling efficiency with an circulating from 100 to 220 gallons {379 to 833 liters} of cold water per minute
optional process pump and heat exchanger. around the extrudate. Reduce maintenance with a filter system for optional
Other options include motorized tank forward, 7.5 or 10 Hp process pumps. Also available: Four foot start-up chamber for flood
reverse movement and clear lids. or independent vacuum and recirculation system, motorized forward and reverse tank
movement and nozzle spray bar configuration.
E-13
TPEX004-0317 SPRAY VACUUM SIZING EQUIPMENT-3"()3%2)%37!4%2302!94!.+3
Specifications
"
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS Options
4ANK3TYLE
Tube/profile capacity inches {mm} Up to 12 {305} • ,EFT TO RIGHTEXTRUSIONDIRECTION
Number of compartments 1
Length of compartments ft {cm} 16 {488} 24 {732}
• 4HERMOMETERfor upper tank or reservoir
4ANKMOVEMENTinches {mm} • (PWATERCIRCULATIONSYSTEMincluding high performance stain
Width ± 1.5 {38} less steel brazed plate heat exchanger. For extrusion rates less than
Height ± 2.5 {64} 600 pounds per hour. Rated for 180 gallons per minute at 40 psi
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} based on 45 °F chiller temperature and 30 gallons per minute flow
Overall length ft {cm} 17 {518} 25 {762} rate to the heat exchanger. Includes 3 inch turbo filter which is rated
A - Overall height inches {mm} 60 {1524} 84 {1524} for 200 gallons per minute
B - Height to centerline inch {mm} 39 {991}
C - Tank length ft {cm} 16 {488} 24 {731} • (PWATERCIRCULATIONSYSTEMincluding high performance stain
D - Overall width inches {mm} 53 {1346} less steel brazed plate heat exchanger. For extrusion rates less than
Tank compartment width inch {mm} 12 {306} 800 pounds per hour. Rated for 220 gallons per minute at 40 psi
Tank compartment height inch {mm} 8 {203} based on 45 °F chiller temperature and 45 gallons per minute flow
Bulk head diameter inch {mm} 12 {305} 16 {406} rate to the heat exchanger. Includes two 3-inch turbo filters which are
7EIGHTlb {kg} rated for 200 gallons per minute
Shipping 4000 {1814} 4800 {2177}
• !DDITIONAL INCHOR INCHTURBOFILTERwith three way valve and
two check valves enabling in line switching of filters for cleaning

460V/3 phase/60 Hz (Std.) Consult Conair • "UILTINRAILSYSTEMwith electronic actuator with 36-inch travel
7ATERREQUIREMENTSp and single speed of 0.6 inches per second forward and reverse
100 gpm {379 liters/min} (if purchased without pumps)
• !#INVERTERANDSELECTORSWITCHallowing slow speed 0.2 inches per
main supply line 1 inch NPT fitting
second and fast speed 0.6 inches per second via selector switch
Specification Notes • (PLIQUIDRINGVACUUMPUMPpowered by 7.5 Hp motor and 72
* Amp draws will increase with the addition of an optional pump(s). cubic feet per minute. For vacuum levels upto 20 inches of mercury
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories All chambers are connected to the single vacuum pump and served
on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and by one common integrated reservoir
applied to the machine. • "OLT ON AIRWIPECHAMBERincludes lock line nozzles
‡
Consult factory for 32 ft {975 cm} and 40 ft {1219 cm} models for pipe and profile
• 3PECIALROLLERRACKSYSTEMfor solid profiles
applications.
This table defines pipe and profile configurations only. • #USTOMPAINT
most current information. • %IGHTCONTOUREDPRODUCTROLLERS
• &OURFOOTFLOODCOOLINGCOMPARTMENT
!PPLICATION.OTES
• /NEINCHTHICKCLEARLIDSfor ease of process observations including
The base unit is supplied without pumps. Using plant supplied water nearly 100 gpm
hold down clamps for water retention
can be circulated through the tank. The tank is drained by gravity.
E-14
TPEX006-0317 COOLING TANKS-#"3%2)%3
Uniform Cooling for

Tube, Pipe and Profile
Conair MCB Series cooling tanks provide flood or optional
spray cooling of profile, tubing and pipe extrusions up to
6 inches {152 mm}.
Flood cooling is designed to provide maximum turbulence. To

break up the warmer water that tends to surround and insulate
the product, allowing maximum cooling efficiency. Optional spray
cooling enhances the heat transfer rate through evaporative cooling.
An adjustable rotary water level control is used to easily adjust

process water level for flood or spray cooling.
-ODEL-#"
drip tray.)
Durable Stainless Steel Construction
MCB cooling tanks are constructed using

welded, heavy gauge stainless steel for ` %ASYTOOPERATE
maintenance-free operation. Adjustments and water valves are positioned for ease of operation.
Grooved casters and positioning screws ` 4ANKLENGTHSFROMTOFEET[TOMM]

ensure proper tank alignment. Also, hand Cross sections range from 8 x 8 {203 x 203 mm} to 16 x 16 inches {406 x 406 mm}.
wheels are positioned at each end of the The wide range of sizes allows you to choose a tank that meets your needs.
tank for precise height adjustment. Optional
adjustments for linear movement and ` /PTIONSTOMEETYOURNEEDS
side-to-side movement are available. • Add a 2 Hp (40 gpm), 5 Hp (100 gpm) • 2-inch filter systen with flush
or 7.5 Hp (180 gpm) recirculation capabilities sized for minimum
The optional closed recirculation system with system and high efficiency heat pressure drop
water reservoir pump and heat exchanger can exchanger; a process filter for a 2 Hp,
interface with your Conair portable or central 5 Hp or 7.5 Hp pump; longitudinal and • Four schedule 80 pvc distributions
chiller for reduced water consumption. side-to-side adjustments; spray bars bars with high velocity brass spray
and tank lids made from polycarbonate nozzles for enhanced evaporative
cooling
• Left-to-right extrusion direction
• Special paint
• Thermometer for upper tank
• CE certification
or reservoir
• UL certification
• Up to 90 gallon capacity reservoir
• 230/3/60 recirculation voltage
E-15
TPEX006-0317 COOLING TANKS-#"3%2)%3
Specifications
!
"
$
# %
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS -#" -#" -#"

4ANKLENGTHft.
Tube/profile capacity 1 inch {25 mm} Up to 2 inches {50 mm} Up to 4 inches {101 mm}
Pumps 0.5 Hp 2 Hp or 5 Hp water 2 Hp, 5 Hp or 7.5 Hp water
6 feet {1829 mm} / 11 ft. / 15 ft. / 20 ft. / 29 ft. / 11 ft. / 15 ft. / 20 ft. / 29 ft. /
Size - Cooling / Air wipe
1 foot {305 mm} 1 ft. 1 ft. 1 ft. 1 ft. 1 ft. 1 ft. 1 ft. 1 ft.
B - Height to centerline
Centerline height is adjustable 42 {1067} 45 {1143}
± 2 inches {50.8 mm}
C - Overall length 84 {2134} 180 {4572} 216 {5486} 288 {7315} 396 {10058} 180 {4572} 216 {5486} 288 {7315} 396 {10058}
D - Tank length ft. {m} 7 {2.1} 13.5 {4.1} 17.5 {5.3} 22.5 {6.9} 31.5 {9.6} 13.5 {4.1} 17.5 {5.3} 22.5 {6.9} 31.5 {9.6}
E - Overall width 30 {762} 48.5 {1232}
Tank compartment width* 8 {203} 12 {306} 16 {406.4}
Tank compartment height 8 {203} 8 {203} 16 {406.4}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} o
700 2200 2800 3500 4500 2200 2800 3500 4500
Shipping
{318} {998} {1270} {1587} {2041} {998} {1270} {1587} {2041}
Water requirements City, tower or chiller water; main supply line 1.5 inch NPT fitting
* You will need a V-groove caster adapter if you have rails that are not spaced 25 inches {635 mm} apart. Adapters are available for rails with centerline spacing of
22 to 25 inches {559 to 635 mm}.
†
Weights are based on standard configuration only and do not include any of the available options.
‡
Consult factory. Amp draws will based on options selected.
!PPLICATION.OTES
The base tank is supplied without the recirculation system. The tank is drained by gravity.
E-16
TPEX041-0317 COOLING TANKS-0#"3%2)%3
Conserve Space with

Multi-pass Flood Cooling
Conair’s MPCB Series multi-pass tanks are designed for
applications where space is tight and a combination
puller/cooling tank is needed. The MPCB tank utilizes servo
driven multi-pass sheaves within the cooling tank to circulate
product multiple times within a limited space. Multi-pass tanks,
a Conair invention, are designed to minimize floor space and
water consumption by utilizing a shorter length of tank for
multiple passes of product. Product can pass through the three
compartments of the MPCB tank up to five times, thus giving
120 feet {36 m} of flood cooling with only a 27-foot long {8 m}
-ODEL-0#"
footprint (MPCB-24 model).
Use 80% Less Floor Space!
MPCB multi-pass tanks are designed for bath

cooling up to 1/2 inch tubing. The multi- ` 3PACE SAVINGTECHNOLOGY
purpose tanks use up to five times less floor Conair designed multi-pass tank technology to help alleviate a common pain point –
space compared to standard cooling tanks. space, and long extrusion line lengths. As an added benefit, the multi-pass tanks
MPCB tanks incorporate a servo-driven 20- use less water, and allow for easy supervision of the product cooling all within
inch {508 mm} primary sheave that doubles one tank, close to the extruder if adjustments to the process are required.
as a puller. The large diameter and controlled
pull force avoid tube flattening and distortion. ` 3IMPLIFIEDCLEANOUT
Sheaves can be machined to a particular tube The stainless steel tank interior is designed to ease daily cleanout by minimizing
diameter, improving accuracy over belt pullers sharp corners and exposed threads where bacteria, pyrogens and other particulate
by eliminating the normal “crush” effect. The matter can accumulate. The telescoping drip tray is one-piece to aid in wipe-down
driven sheave significantly shortens the travel by eliminating open seams. Guide rollers inside the vacuum tank are fixed to free-
distance of the tube before pickup, minimizing standing mounts to allow removal for cleaning
stretch and tension.
` )NTEGRATEDCOMPONENTSSAVECOST
Precision glass bearings on non-driven The MPCB tank integrates a single-piece drip tray, primary puller, multi-pass cooling,
sheaves reduce drag and stretching as the and air wipe chamber into a single package, eliminating added cost and space
tubing makes subsequent passes through the requirements for stand-alone components.
tank at line speeds up to 800 feet/minute
{243 meters/minute}.
E-17
TPEX041-0317 COOLING TANKS-0#"3%2)%3
Specifications
"
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS -0#" -0#" Options

Capacity (tube) Up to 0.5 inch {12.7 mm} diameter • Left-to-right direction
Compartments 3 • Special paint
Number of passes Up to 5
• Passivation of stainless components to
Water circulation pump (open) 2 Hp minimize corrosion caused by surface
Water system contacts Non-ferrous impurities that is recommended for
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} medical applications
A - Overall height 74 {1879.6} • Stainless steel frame
B - Tank height 8 {203} • Stainless steel and plastic plumbing
C - Overall length feet {mm} 21.25 {6477} 27.20 {8290.56} package with no copper or brass
D - Overall width 55 {1397} • 230/3/60, 380/3/50 or 575/3/60
Cooling chamber length feet {mm} 18 {5486} 24 {7315} power supply
Cooling chamber width 26 {660} • Servo driven 20-inch first pass roller to
Air wipe chamber length 24 {610} minimize rubber band effect
Primary (driven) sheave diameter 20 {508} • Mounting of customer supplied ultra-
Secondary (non-driven) sheave 12 {304} sonic wall unit in first 18 inches of
Adjustments 3-plane manual vacuum chamber with water connections
including debubbling unit for water input
Centerline height 42 ±2 {1066.8 ±50.8}
and two adjustable roller pedestals
#ONSTRUCTION
• Trojan (model) UV Max ultraviolet water
Tank material Stainless steel treatment unit
Full length splash tray Stainless steel
• Minntech (model) polypropylene filter
Tank roller brackets* 18 24 housing with 5 micron rating filter
Base frame Welded painted steel
• Two additional non driven wheel for
7EIGHTlb {kg} five pass operation
Shipping 3400 {1542} 3900 {1769}
• CE Certification
o
6OLTAGE Full load amps
• UL Certification
* Tubing rollers not included.
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to
E-18
TPEX037-0317 COOLING TANKS%#"3%2)%3
Economy Cooling Tank

for Tube, Pipe and Profile
ECB Cooling Tanks provide flood cooling or optional
spray cooling for profile, tubing, and pipe extrusions up
to 6 inches {152 mm}.
The internal plumbing for flood cooling has been designed to

provide maximum turbulence to break up the warmer water that
tends to surround and insulate the product, allowing maximum -ODEL%#"
cooling efficiency. The spray cooling option enhances the heat
transfer rate through evaporative cooling. Support and hold-
down rollers keep the buoyant extrusion in place as it passes
through the tank. The extrusion can be held above the water
level, or submerged in the water of the spray compartment
when the spray option is chosen.
Spray or Flood Cooling of Extruded Profiles, Tubing, and Pipe
The ECB Tank, constructed using welded,

heavy gauge stainless steel, has two ` 3IMPLIFIEDFEATURESINANECONOMYPACKAGE
compartments: a long water or spray Vertical adjustment is completed by pumping a pair of hydraulic jacks built into the
compartment for controlled cooling of the tank support system.
extrusion, and a short air-wipe compartment
for removing water from the extrusion surface ` 4ANKLENGTHSFROMTOFEET[nCM]
as it leaves the water or spray compartment. Cross sections range from 8 x 12 {20 x 31 cm} to 16 x 16 inches {41 x 41 cm}.
The wide range of sizes allows you to choose a tank that meets your needs.
The water and spray compartments are
sealed by gaskets on each end. ` /PTIONSTOMEETYOURNEEDS
Height adjustment hydraulic jacks at both • Add a 2 Hp (40 gpm) recirculation system to the 12 or 25 foot lengths, or a
ends of the tank permit and ensure proper 5 Hp (100 gpm) to the 30 foot model. The system includes a brazed plate
heat exchanger, reservoir, and strainer filter.
alignment with the extrusion line. Grooved
casters and positioning screws also ensure • An advanced filtration system with flush capabilities can also be supplied
proper tank alignment is maintained. The • An array of 4, schedule 80 PVC water distribution manifolds with brass spray
optional closed water recirculation reservoir, nozzles for advanced evaporative cooling
pump, and heat exchanger can interface
with your portable chiller or central chiller for
reduced water consumption. • UL certification
E-19
TPEX037-0317 COOLING TANKS%#"3%2)%3
Specifications
!
"
$
# %
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS %#" %#" %#" %#"
4ANKLENGTHft.
Tube/profile capacity 1 inch {25 mm} Up to 2 inches {50 mm} Up to 4 inches {101 mm} Up to 6 inches {152 mm}
Pumps 0.5 Hp 2 Hp or 5 Hp 2 Hp, 5 Hp or 7.5 Hp
Size - Cooling / Air wipe 6 inch {152 mm} 11 {3353} 15 {4572} 20 {6096} 29 {8839} 11 {3353} 15 {4572} 20 {6096} 29 {8839} 11 {3353} 15 {4572} 20 {6096} 29 {8839}
ft. {mm} / 1 inch {25 mm} / 1 {305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305} / 1{305}
B - Height to centerline 42 {1067} Centerline height is adjustable ± 2 inches {50.8 mm}
84 180 216 288 396 180 216 288 396 180 216 288 396
C - Overall length
{2134} {4572} {5486} {7315} {10058} {4572} {5486} {7315} {10058} {4572} {5486} {7315} {10058}
7 13.5 17.5 22.5 31.5 13.5 17.5 22.5 31.5 13.5 17.5 22.5 31.5
D - Tank length ft {m}
{2.1} {4.1} {5.3} {6.9} {9.6} {4.1} {5.3} {6.9} {9.6} {4.1} {5.3} {6.9} {9.6}
E - Overall width 30 {762} 48.5 {1232}
Tank compartment width* 8 {203} 12 {306} 14 {356}
Tank compartment height 8 {203} 12 {306} 14 {356}
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} o
2200 2800 3500 4500 2200 2800 3500 4500 2200 2800 3500 4500
Shipping 700 {318}
{998} {1270} {1587} {2041} {998} {1270} {1587} {2041} {998} {1270} {1587} {2041}
240 V/3-phase/50-60 Hz Consult Conair
480 V/3-phase/50-60 Hz Consult Conair
7ATERREQUIREMENTS
City, tower, or chiller water; main supply line 1 inch NPT fitting
* You will need a V-groove caster adapter if you have rails that are not spaced 25 inches {635 mm} apart. Adapters are available for rails with centerline spacing of
22 to 25 inches {559 to 635 mm}.
†
Weights are based on standard configuration only and do not include any of the available options.
‡
Consult factory. Amp draws will based on options selected.
!PPLICATION.OTES
The base tank is supplied without the recirculation system. The tank is drained by gravity.
E-20
TPEX008-0317 BELT PULLERS02%#)3)/.3%2)%3"%,405,,%23
Rock-Steady
Precision Pulling with
Application Flexibility
Conair Precision Series Belt Pullers combine exceptional
application versatility with low investment and installation costs.
Precision Pullers are available in three (3) standard model sizes

to accommodate tubing diameters to 3 inch {76 mm} as well as
flexible and rigid extrusions with belts up to 6 inch {152.4} wide.
-ODEL
-ODEL 0ULLER
(Show
Smooth, Reliable Pulling for Tubing / Profiles
rofiles belt ga
gap readout.)
With superior tracking capabilities and low x

variation motor speed controls, these pullers ` 0ERFORMANCEVERSATILITY
provide rock-steady accuracy and smooth Precision pullers are supplied standard with open-loop vector with HMI control.
pulling precision. Precise speed controls, Optional drive packages include single or dual servo with touchscreen for optimum
easily adjusted belts and numerous options performance. The servo touchscreen offers built-in tuning of the servo.
to suit your application ensure optimum ` )NDUSTRIALDESIGNPROLONGSLIFE
productivity. These smooth, reliable pullers feature components that are selected for long service
life, yet readily accessible for any required maintenance. The heavy duty cabinet,
A choice of belt widths, contact lengths,
leveling floor locks and casters provide a highly stable base for the table mounted
torque ratings, entrance openings and belt
puller assembly.
coverings are available for a broad range of
applications and ensure product consistency. ` 4ABLETOPDESIGNADDSCONVENIENCE
Tabletop versions allow the puller assembly to be conveniently removed for
Safeguards include OSHA color-coded labels, maintenance and feature a walk-through design that allows flexible parts to be fed in
adjustable entrance guides that allow walk- from the side versus only from the belt end.
through operation and an emergency stop.
` 4OUCHSCREENCONTROL
Every Precision Puller features a
full-color touchscreen control with
intuitive graphic icons for easy
operation! Switch operation modes,
make adjustments, save recipes,
and create unique user privileges
all from a touchscreen control
that allows for easy communication
to other devices. All Conair controls
are designed with the same style
icon/button operation, making learning a new piece of equipment easy and comfortable.
E-21
TPEX008-0317 BELT PULLERS02%#)3)/.3%2)%3"%,405,,%23
Specifications Options
• Hand-held remote belt speed control with
25 feet of cable
• Pro scale digital belt gap sensor
• Pneumatic upper belt actuation
• Communication package including Ethernet
and analog microprocessor interface, speed
signal to measuring equipment, encoder
input and output connections.
! • Left-to-right extrusion operation
• Special paint
• Optional voltages
230V/3 phase/60 Hz power supply
"
• Full belt safety enclosure
• CE Certification
• UL Certification
• Flat Belts
$ #
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS
Belt width inches {mm} 3 {76} 4 {102}; optional 6 {152} 6 {152}; optional 8 {203}
Belt contact length inches {mm} 20 {508} 26 {660} 39 {991}
Maximum feed opening inches {mm} 3.5 {88.9} 4.5 {101.6} 6.5 {165.1}
-OTOR$RIVESHp
Belt drive - vector 1.0 1.5 2.0
Servo drive* 3.25 (optional)
Drive type Open loop
Belt type Poly-V, 40,55 or 70 durometer natural rubber covering/Precision flat option 60 FDA White Nitrile
Drive type vector servo vector servo vector servo
Available speed ranges feet/min 8 - 80 3 - 270 6 - 60 1 - 107 6 - 60 1 - 107
16 - 160 5 - 552 12 - 118 2 - 202 12 - 118 2 - 202
32 - 320 24 - 236 4 - 397 24 - 236 4 - 397
47 - 473 9 - 941 47 - 473 10 - 941
B - Height to centerline ±2 {±51} 42 {1016}
C - Width 34 {864} 37 {940}
D - Length 34 {864} 50 {1270}
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Installed 840 {381} 920 {417} 1410 {639}
Shipping 990 {449} 1070 {485} 1560 {707}
* FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems, refer to
the electrical diagrams the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
E-22
TPEX034-0317 BELT PULLERS"03%2)%3"%,405,,%23
Consistent Pulling with

In-Line Flexibility
Conair BP Series belted pullers with a consistent pulling force
offer a wide range of belt speeds and contact lengths for
maximum flexibility.
BP pullers are designed to handle tubing, flexible products,

as well as rigid extrusions. Contact lengths up to 50 inches
{1270 mm} minimize the chance for product distortion or
slippage, especially with thin-wall profiles.
Every BP puller offers an easy-to-use operator interface, -ODEL"0

maximum quantity pull torque, low maintenance requirements
and flexible operation.
Accurate, Reliable Pulling for Tubing and Profiles
They are called haul-offs, pullers, take-offs

or tractor capstans. What you call them is not ` !CCURATEPULLINGSPEED
important. Your choice of one is. The AC open loop drive provides a wide range of precisely controlled belt speeds,
with longer motor life than the DC drives.
Pullers, in combination with the extruder
` 3MOOTHSTEPLESSOPERATION
output, is what will maintain the dimensions
Traction belts are tandem driven for synchronous travel. Grooved aluminum sheaves
of your product and the stability of your
offer straight, non-slip traction. Non-marking, poly-v grooved belts are standard.
production.
` %ASYTOOPERATE
BP Series traction assemblies are individually Controls are front-mounted and angled up toward the operator for ease of use. The
driven to supply the required power for accurate, height of traction belts can be adjusted individually.
consistent and dependable pulling force.
` (EAVYDUTYLOWMAINTENANCE
Available in belt widths range from The BP Series is caster-mounted puller and has locking leveling screws for line
6 to 12 inches {152 to 305 mm}. And stability. Fan-cooled motors are totally enclosed. Construction is welded, heavy-duty
contact lengths up to 50 inches {1270 mm}. steel. All material parts are painted, plated or made to resist corrosion.
` /PTIONALSERVODRIVE
The optional servo drive adds to the guaranteed reliability and speed regulation.
` /PTIONSTOMEETYOURNEEDS
• Hand-held remote with 100 feet • Optional voltages
of cable 230V/3 phase/60 Hz power supply
• Left-to-right extrusion operation 575V/3 phase/60 Hz power supply
• Custom paint
E-23
TPEX034-0317 BELT PULLERS"03%2)%3"%,405,,%23
Specifications Control
The BP Puller features a full-color

"
touchscreen control. With graphic icons,
intuitive operation is simple! Switch operation
modes, make adjustments, save recipes,
and create unique user privileges all from
a touchscreen control that allows for easy
communication to other devices. All Conair
controls are designed with the same style
# $
icon/button operation, making learning a new
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW piece of equipment easy and comfortable.
-ODELS "0 "0 "0

Belt width inches {mm} 6 {152} 8 {203} 12 {304}
Belt contact length inches {mm} 50 {1270}
Maximum feed opening inches {mm} 6 {152} 8 {203} 12 {304}
Drive motor 2 Hp 3 Hp
Drive types available Open loop vector; Servo
Belt type Poly-V belt with 1/2 inch 40A duro pure gum rubber (60A duro red EPDM belts are optional)
"ELTSPEEDS
Drive type Fixed Reducer (Dual speed transmission available as an option)
Available speed ranges feet/min. Consult Conair for pull forces and speed ranges
A - Height 76 {1930}
B - Height to centerline 42.5 {1080}
C - Overall length 66 {1676} 54 {1372}
D - Overall width 32 {813} 37 {940}
7EIGHTlb {kg}
Installed 1910 {866} 1810 {821} 1710 {776}
Shipping 2210 {1002} 2110 {957} 2010 {912}
6OLTAGEFull load amps * o
* 3-phase power available on AC inverter, flux vector and servo equipped models.
†
electrical diagrams the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
E-24
TPEX035-0317 CLEATED PULLERS#03%2)%3#,%!4%$05,,%2
Maximum Pulling
Strength with no crush
Conair CP Series cleated pullers provide enormous power to
cleated belts, designed to effectively grip large extrusions and
pull them smoothly through cooling and push them onto cutting
operations. Thick, cleated belts deliver maximum squeezing
pressure and grip on the extrusion yet with enough give to
prevent product distortion. Maximum pulling strength and
product quality is the result, ideal for large profiles, pipe and
decking products.
Strong Pulling Performance, Day After Day After Day
Cleated pullers are the number one choice of

extrusion operations that require maximum ` #ONSISTENTACCURATEPULLING
pulling power with no distortion of the Variable frequency AC drives achieve a high level of accuracy.
extruded product. Thick, elastomeric surfaces
optimize traction yet conform to the product ` $EPENDABLE
shape. The cleated segments provide a Conair CP pullers have a record of low maintenance requirements, long production
continuous loop that rotates easily for years of life and uniform pulling performance.
low-maintenance production.
` &LEXIBLEANDEFFICIENT
The traction assemblies are individually driven With the end mounted pivot designed upper beam assembly, easy operator interface
by variable frequency AC drives for maximum with front mounted controls and many other options, this line of pullers offers
power and control that easily locks onto extrusion maximum flexibility for minimum cost. A very efficient package.
process speeds and remains consistent. The
touchscreen graphical control panel provides ` (EAVY DUTYDESIGN
operators with an easy to understand overview of All steel-welded construction. All material parts are painted, plated or made to resist
operation, easy speed changes. corrosion.
Start-ups have never been easier with side- ` /PTIONSTOMEETYOURNEEDS

mounted upper beam supports and pneumatic
upper beam controls for easy open/close. • Hand-held remote belt speed control • Optional voltages
Full size plexi-glass doors are interlocked for with 100 feet of cable 575V/3 phase/60 Hz power supply
safety and allow for easy viewing at all times. 400V/3 phase/50 Hz power supply
• Servo drive
• Cleats with a vee notch for tubing
Belt surfaces are flat as standard. Talk to • Left-to-right operation
and small pipe
Conair about custom-machined cleated belt • Custom paint
assemblies, to match your product geometry. • UL certification
Standard models provided for 230 or 460 volt,
3-phase power.
E-25
TPEX035-0317 CLEATED PULLERS#03%2)%3#,%!4%$05,,%2
Specifications
! !
$
$
" #
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS #0 #0 #0

!PPLICATIONS Tube / Profile Profile Profile
Capacity inches {mm} 6 x 6 {152 x 152} 8 x 8 {203 x 203}
Cleat width inches {mm} 3.375 {85.72} 8 {203}
Cleat contact length inches {mm} 50 {1270} 80 {2032}
Maximum feed opening inches {mm} 6 {152.4} 8 {203.2}
Pull force lbs/kg 1700 {771} 2500 {1134}
Drive motor* (2) 2 Hp (2) 3 Hp
"ELTSPEEDRANGESft/min {m/m}
1-10 {0.3-3}
The CP Puller features a full-color touchscreen
2-20 {0.6-6.1}
control. With graphic icons, intuitive operation
3-30 {0.9-9.1} Consult Conair for pull forces and speed ranges
is simple! Switch operation modes, make
4-40 {1.2-12.2} adjustments, save recipes, and create unique
4-40 {1.2-12.2} user privileges all from a touchscreen control that
#LEATASSEMBLIES allows for easy communication to other devices.
All Conair controls are designed with the same
Caterpillar-type traction assembly with
Cleat type style icon/button operation, making learning a
65 durometer non-marking cleats
new piece of equipment easy and comfortable.
Cleat style Bolt-on
Cleat height inches {mm} 1 {25.4}
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} Specification Notes
A - Height 74 {1880} 84 {2133} * Motor horsepowers are listed as standard. Line speed
requirements may change horsepower requirements.
B - Length 79 {2006} 120 {3048} 150 {3810}
†
C - Width 38 {990}
D - Centerline height ± 3 {76.2} 42 {1067} For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific
!PPROXIMATEWEIGHTlb {kg} machines and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams
the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the
Installed 2500 {1134} 2700 {1225} machine.
Shipping 2900 {1315} 3100 {1406} 3600 {1633} These tables define standard configurations only.
%LECTRICALREQUIREMENTSFull load amps o Specifications may change without notice. Consult
information.
E-26
TPEX002-0317 SERVO CUTTER#3#-/$%,
High Torque Cutting

with Speed and Accuracy
Conair (CSC) Servo Cutter Series precisely cuts corrugated,
flexible, rigid tubing or custom profiles to precise lengths on-
demand or automatically. Choose from two models to match
your high-speed cutting needs: pick the CSC-L (light duty) for
maximum cuts per minute on flexible tubing, or the heavy-duty
model CSC with increased cutting torque for tough materials and
heavy wall extrusions.
The eye-level, front-mounted operator interface allows easy setup

and monitoring, and links seamlessly with your extrusion line.
-ODE
-ODEL#3#
Eliminate Part Length Variations
CSC Servo Cutters provide enhanced precision

cutting for your application. Cut on-demand ` #UTCAPACITYUPTO INCHES
at anytime or easily program the CSC for Cut parts up to 4-3/4 inches {121 mm} in diameter while essentially eliminating part
automatic multi-length cuts based on size variations.
extrusion speed.
` !LLNEWOPERATORCONTROL
The optional follower mode lets you input The CSC features a user-friendly 7-inch {178 mm} touchscreen with high visibility
cut length and number of blades. The rotary graphics and common sense commands for controlling the cutter. A large pop-
encoder then automatically compensates for up “soft” keypad makes recipe entry fast and easy.
puller speed fluctuations to maintain very
accurate cut lengths. ` !DJUSTABLECENTERLINE
The CSC Servo Cutter meets domestic or international requirements for centerline
Offset stabilizing bushing allow centering height as material travels into the cutter.
parts on a take away conveyor making
downstream functions easier to set up. ` %NHANCEDCUTTING
CSC models include precision 4:1 inline planetary gear reducer for enhanced cutting
This cutter incorporates category 2 safety torque. (maximum RPM=750)
circuit for redundant safety control, offering
operators the highest level of safety possible. ` (IGH SPEED
CSC-2L uses no reduction, which allows flywheel operation up to 2800 RPM.
E-27
TPEX002-0317 SERVO CUTTER#3#-/$%,
Specifications
The CSC Cutter features a full-color touchscreen control with

"
intuitive graphic icons for easy operation! Switch cutting modes,
adjust blade speed, customize operation, save recipes, and create
unique user privileges all from a touchscreen control that allows
for easy communication to other devices. All Conair controls are
designed with the same style icon/button operation, making learning
a new piece of equipment easy and comfortable.
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS #3#, #3#, #3# #3# #3# #3# Options

Extrudate capacity 1.25 2.25 1.75 2.75 3.75 4.75 • Stainless steel
inches {mm} diameter {318} {572} {445} {699} {953} {1207} cutter head
Blade drive motor 3.25 4.4 • Cutting torque horse
Hp {kW} {2.4} {3.2} power upgrade (Std.
High torque motor* N/A N/A 3.8 {2.8} 3.8 {2.8} STD STD on CSC4 & CSC5)
Feed direction right to left
• Follower cutting mode
A - Height 63 {1600}
• Timer mode
B - Height to • Variable blade speed
42 {1067}
centerline (± 2) for on-demand and
C - Width 36 {914} flywheel cut modes
D - Depth 24 {614} • Slide base system
7EIGHTlb {kg}
• Batch counter
Installed 600 {272}
Shipping 700 {317}
• Electric eye and
bracket for use with
end sense mode
#UTTERHEAD • Blade wipe system
Aluminum 2-position Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA • Bushing lubrication
Stainless steel 2-position* NA NA Yes Yes STD STD system
Cutter Control Touchscreen • Left-to-right operation
Specification Notes • Custom paint
* Optional. • Blade heater with
These tables define standard configurations only. Athena temperature
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of control
specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
E-28
TPEX011-0317 SERVO CUTTERS 352%#542/4!29+.)&%#544%23# !.$3#
One Cutter
for Many Applications
Conair Sure Cut Series rotary knife cutters offer excellent
versatility for processors who need one cutting system for a
variety of applications. Essential for processors with one or more
product changes a day, the Sure Cut can go from cutting small
parts at high line speeds to cutting large tubes and profiles. In -ODEL3#
fact, a Sure Cut can handle parts so large, that a saw would
typically be used.
With its oversized flywheel and easy access side and top covers,
the Sure Cut Series opens wide for changes, but clamps closed
and interlocks for safety.
Cutting Torque to spare for Large Profiles / Tubes
The Sure Cut series employs a 24-inch

{610 mm} diameter flywheel, mounted below ` #UTCAPACITYUPTOXINCHES
the cutter bushings. The SC-5 has the capability to cut tube/pipe up to 5.25 inches {133 mm} in diameter
or profiles as large as 4 x 10 inches {102 x 254 mm}. The SC-8 can cut tube/pipe up to
The large fly wheel offers unmatched blade 7.25 inches {184 mm} or profiles as large as 6.25 x 12.25 inches {159 x 311 mm}. The
surface speed and cutting torque. Blade position-controlled servo drive provides variable speed and repeatable cut accuracy.
speeds are adjustable up to 300 RPM and
can be modified easily to obtain clean, square ` 5PTOCUTSPERMINUTE
cuts. Multiple-blade mounting positions on The SC-5 can achieve up to 150 cuts/minute and the SC-8 can achieve up to 100
the flywheel allow you to add blades for even cuts/minute on demand with one blade. Blade speeds are adjustable up to 300 RPM,
achieve higher cutting rates. and multiple-blade mounting system lets you add blades to increase cutting rates.
An optional blade lubrication system, assures
` 4OUCHSCREENOPERATORCONTROL
clean, accurate, quality cuts with any material
Sure Cut Series cutters feature a user-friendly 7-inch {178 mm} touchscreen
and extrusion geometry.
with high visibility graphics and common sense commands for controlling the cutter.
A safety interlocked sliding observation A large pop-up "soft" keypad makes recipe entry fast and easy.
window provides easy cut monitoring.
A discharge chute efficiently directs product ` 2EDUCEDMAINTENANCECOSTS
away from the cutter. A discharge conveyor The heavy-duty yet exacting positional servo drive system, with planetary gear
and automatic parts ejection systems are reduction, minimizes the maintenance and downtime associated with traditional
available as options. clutch/brake cutters.
E-29
TPEX011-0317 SERVO CUTTERS 352%#542/4!29+.)&%#544%23# !.$3#
Overview Controls
01
4OUCHSCREEN 01
#ONTROL
Parts discharge chute or optional
discharge conveyor
02
03 02
Wide range of cutter bushing capacities
04 03
24-inch {610 mm} diameter flywheel
with multiple blade mounting system The Sure Cut features a full-color
05 touchscreen control. Switch cutting
04 modes, adjust blade speed, customize
Polycarbonate blade observation window operation, save recipes, and create
06 unique user privileges all from a
05 touchscreen control that allows for
Optional blade lubrication system easy communication to other devices.
(EAVY DUTY All Conair controls are designed with
3WIVELCASTERS
LEVELING 06 the same style icon/button operation,
SCREWS
ANDPADS Optional slide base assembly with making learning a new piece of
position locking mechanism equipment easy and comfortable.
Specifications Features
• Surface speeds to 0.438 inches
{11.1 mm} per millisecond
• Heavy-duty positional AC brushless
servo drive
!
"
• 10:1 planetary gear head reducer
as standard
• 3,000 pulse bi-directional encoder
#
&RONTVIEW
$
3IDEVIEW
Options
-ODELS 3# 3#
0ERFORMANCECHARACTERISTICS • Custom paint
%XTRUSIONCAPACITYinches {mm} • Left-to-right operation
Tube diameters 2.25 - 4.75 {57 - 121} 2.25 - 7.25 {57 - 184}
2 x 4 - 2 x 10, 4 x 7 2.25 x 26.6 - 6.25 x 12.25 • Custom round bushing holder sizes
Profile dimensions
{51 x 102 - 51 x 254, 102 x 178} {57 x 676 - 159 x 311} available: 3.25, 4.25, 5.25 inch
Blade drive motor 4.6 Hp {3.4 kW} 10.0 Hp {7.5 kW}
Feed direction right to left • Blade lubrication system including
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} large capacity stainless steel blade
A - Overall height 47 {1193.8} 70 {1778} lubrication tray and blade wipe with
B - Height to centerline (± 2) 42 {50.8} 43 ±3 {1092 ±76.2}
C - Length 37 {939.8} 43 {1092}
replaceable felt pads
D - Width 52.0 {1321} 61 {1549} • Slide base assembly with position locking
mechanism for 12 inches of movement

460 V/3/60 Hz Consult Conair
Specification Notes • Timer mode
* FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design • CE certification
of specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair representative for the most current information. • UL certification
Specification .OTES E-30
TPEX036-0317 PLANETARY CUTTER40# 0,!.%4!29#544%23%2)%3
High-Speed
Planetary Cutting
Conair's TPC-5 Planetary Cutter offers a highly desirable, high
speed tube cutting solution on a precision traveling table. The
cutting blade rotates rapidly around tubular extrusions for clean,
square cuts, free of the crush and distortion common to other
cutting machines.
The TPC-5 accommodates up to a 5-inch {127.0 mm} cutting

capacity and is designed to move with your extruded product to
clamp, cut, release and repeat without sacrificing line speed.
The clamping system and servo table assure quality, planetary

cuts. The standard planetary cutter orientation is right-to-left,
but left-to-right orientation cutters are available.
-ODEL40#
Avoid Cutting Debris, Distortion, and

dBBurrs
Conair’s TPC-5 Planetary Cutter provides the

most precise cut possible for tube products. ` #UTTUBULAREXTRUSIONSWITHOUTDISTORTIONORSWARF
The cutter itself displaces material which Difficult to cut materials such as styrene, PET, HIPS, PC, etc. can now be cut
virtually eliminates debris while creating a accurately. Other cutters and saws are unable to cut tubular extrusions without
clean, square cut without distorting the tube distorting them, and often create cuts that are not square and generate particulate.
or pipe. A servo motor uses a sophisticated
` %LIMINATESECONDARYTRIMMINGDEBURRINGOPERATIONS
velocity profile to modify the speed of rotation
The TPC, with its smooth planetary cutting action,
for cut quality and line speed.
displaces material for a clean and precise cut, eliminating
The TPC has been engineered to allow quick the need for trimming, deburring or blowing off.
blade changes without having to remove ` 2EDUCEDMACHINEMAINTENANCE
product from the machine. This forethought A heavy-duty precision linear motion system provides
eliminates the need to restart the line from smooth and consistent table movement with
strach any time a blade is replaced. commercially available components.
Clear polycarbonate provides guarding for the ` 0RECISIONCUTLENGTHS
cutting enclosure, for full observation of the Servo table travel is provided by planetary reducers
planetary cutting process. and a heavy-duty timing belt eliminating costly
secondary functions, and providing cut-to-length
repeatability.
` %ASYTONAVIGATETOUCHSCREEN
Front-mounted touchscreen control allows you to
start and stop the cutter, adjust table travel velocity, blade velocity profiles, and scale
factors, all while utilizing storable recipies.
E-31
TPEX036-0317 PLANETARY CUTTER40# 0,!.%4!29#544%23%2)%3
Specifications
"
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS 40# Specification Notes

* Profile capacity dimensions are provided for guidance
Applications Tube only. The actual capacity can vary depending on the
Pipe diameter capacity* inches {mm} 5 {127.0} diameter you are attempting to produce.
Maximum cuts per minute† 20 †
Based on material, wall thickness, cut quality and length.
Blade drive servo motor Hp {kW} 2.7 {2.0}
‡
Blade speed Variable blade speed standard on all modes ‡ Maximum blade surface speeds are individually
configured based on each models blade diameter.
§
A - Height 71 {1803} FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not
B - Height to centerline (± 2) 42 {1067}
C - Overall width 48 {1219} specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical
D - Overall depth 62 {1575} diagrams the equipment order and the nameplate
Maximum table travel 24 {609} applied to the machine.
6OLTAGEeFull load amps Specifications may change without notice. Consult
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz Consult Conair with a Conair representative for the most current
#OMPRESSEDAIRREQUIREMENTS information.
80 psl {5.52 bars}
Control Options
The TPC features a full-color touchscreen control • Power: 230/3/60, • Left-to-right
with intuitive graphic icons for easy operation! 380/3/50, 208/3/60 operation
or 575/3/60
Make cutting speed adjustments, customize • Powder coated
operation, save recipes, and create unique user • Photo eye and/or frame
privileges all from a touchscreen control that dead stop precision
allows for easy communication to other devices. cut-to-length
All Conair controls are designed with the same • UL certification
• Bushing sets for
style icon/button operation, making learning a additional product • Full enclosure
new piece of equipment easy and comfortable. sizes guarding
E-32
TPEX042-0317 PLANETARY CUTTER- 40# 0,!.%4!29#544%2
Planetary Tube Cutting

for Medical Products
Conair's M-TPC-1 Planetary Cutter offers a highly desirable, high
speed tube cutting solution on a precision traveling table. The
cutting blade rotates rapidly around tubular extrusions for clean,
square cuts, free of the crush and distortion common to other
cutting machines.
The M-TPC-1 accomodates up to a 1-inch {25.4 mm} cutting

capacity and is designed to move with your extruded product to
clamp, cut, release and repeat without sacrificing line speed.
The clamping system and servo table assure quality, planetary

cuts. The standard planetary cutter orientation is right-to-left, -ODEL- 40#
but left-to-right orientation cutters are available. (Shown with
optional dead stop.)
Clean, Balanced Planetary Cutting of Medical Tubing
Conair’s M-TPC-1 Planetary Cutter provides

the most precise cut possible for tube ` #UTMEDICALTUBULAREXTRUSIONSWITHOUTDISTORTIONORSWARF
products. The cutter itself displaces material Difficult to cut materials such as styrene, PET, HIPS, PC, etc. can now be cut
which virtually eliminates debris while accurately. Other cutters and saws are unable to cut tubular extrusions without
creating a clean, square cut without distorting distorting them, and often create cuts that are not square and generate particulate.
the tube or pipe. A servo motor uses a
` %LIMINATESECONDARYTRIMMINGDEBURRINGOPERATIONS
sophisticated velocity profile to modify the
The M-TPC, with its smooth planetary cutting action, displaces material for a clean and
speed of rotation for cut quality and line speed.
precise cut, eliminating the need for trimming, deburring or blowing off.
The M-TPC has been engineered to allow ` 2EDUCEDMACHINEMAINTENANCE
quick blade changes without having to remove A heavy-duty precision linear motion system provides smooth and consistent table
product from the machine. This forethought movement with commercially available components.
eliminates the need to restart the line from
strach any time a blade is replaced. ` 0RECISIONCUTLENGTHS
Servo table travel is provided by planetary reducers and a heavy-duty timing belt
Clear polycarbonate provides guarding for the eliminating costly secondary functions, and providing cut-to-length repeatability.
cutting enclosure, for full observation of the
planetary cutting process. ` %ASYTONAVIGATETOUCHSCREEN
Front-mounted touchscreen control allows you to start and stop the cutter, adjust table
travel velocity, blade velocity profiles, and scale factors, all while utilizing storable recipies.
` #LEANROOMREADY
Available in RAL-9003 white paint, or stainless steel.
E-33
TPEX042-0317 PLANETARY CUTTER- 40# 0,!.%4!29#544%2
Specifications
"
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS - 40# Specification Notes

* Profile capacity dimensions are provided for guidance
Applications Tube
only. The actual capacity can vary depending on the
Pipe diameter capacity* inches {mm} 1.00 {25.4}
diameter you are attempting to produce.
Maximum cuts per minute† 33 to 45
†
Blade type Round Based on material, wall thickness, cut quality and length.
Blade drive servo motor Hp {kW} 2.7 {2.0} ‡
Maximum blade surface speeds are individually
Blade speed Variable blade speed standard on all modes ‡ configured based on each models blade diameter.
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} §
A - Height 74 {1880} include any options or accessories on equipment.
B - Height to centerline (± 2) 42 {1067} For full FLA detail for power circuit design of
C - Overall width 64 {1626} specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical
D - Overall depth 40 {1016} diagrams the equipment order and the nameplate
Maximum table travel 24 {609}
6OLTAGEeFull load amps Specifications may change without notice. Consult
460 V/3 phase/60 Hz Consult Conair with a Conair representative for the most current
information.
80 psl {5.52 bars}
Control Options
The M-TPC-1 features a full-color touchscreen • Power: 230/3/60, • Left-to-right
control with intuitive graphic icons for easy operation! 380/3/50, 208/3/60 operation
or 575/3/60
Make cutting speed adjustments, customize operation, • Powder coated
save recipes, and create unique user privileges all • Photo eye and/or frame
from a touchscreen control that allows for easy dead stop precision
communication to other devices. All Conair controls cut-to-length
are designed with the same style icon/button • UL certification
• Bushing sets for
operation, making learning a new piece of equipment additional product • Full enclosure
easy and comfortable. sizes guarding
E-34
TPEX029-0317 TRAVELING CUT-OFF SAW4350 #54
Automatic Cutting for

Large or High Density
Extruded Products
Conair TS Series Up-Cut Saws offer heavy-duty cutting performance ce
for larger, thicker extrusions that cannot be effectively cut with fly
knife cutters.
The TS Traveling Saw, moves along with the process speed to
cut pipe or profiles exacting to lengths with a carbide-tipped
circular saw blade that rises from below the moving table. The
operation is fully shielded to prevent injury and operates fully
automatic.
-ODEL43
Follows the Process for Accuracy
Quality materials and workmanship go into

every TS Saw. The combination of heavy-duty, ` 2EDUCEDMACHINEMAINTENANCE
steel-welded design and construction offers A heavy-duty, precision servo system provides smooth and consistent table top
you the most reliable saw operation with the movement.
least amount of maintenance. ` 0RECISIONCUTLENGTHS
The cutting motor on the TS Saw is direct Optional servo table travel with planetary reducers and
drive eliminating belts, reducing maintenance a heavy-duty timing belt eliminates costly secondary
and allowing for the highest blade speeds operations, offers extreme cut-to-length repeatability
for faster cycle times. Carbide tipped blades and eliminates pneumatic adjustments for table travel.
provide prolonged durability and resistance ` )NCREASEDPRODUCTIVITY
to product melting. Application specific The simplified arbor motor design reduces maintenance
blade styles are also available from Conair and increases blade rotation allowing faster line speeds.
to optimize cutting of any type of extruded Blade speed is matched to blade diameter selection.
material.
` 7IDE OPENACCESS
An integrated, heavy-duty linear bearing TS Saws feature access door panels for easy servicing.
system provides table top travel, driven by A NEMA-12 electrical enclosure with rotary lockable
a precision servo motor that easily matches disconnect, a table top blade guard and a blade
table motion to line speed. shroud design for ease of vacuum dust/chip removal
Standard table travel is 20 and 24 inches are standard features.
{508 and 610 mm}. Longer table travel is ` %ASYTONAVIGATETOUCHSCREEN
available as an option. Front-mounted touchscreen control allows start and stop control adjust blade
travel, cutting speed and clamping pressure from one convenient location.
E-35
TPEX029-0317 TRAVELING CUT-OFF SAW4350 #54
Specifications
&RONTVIEWUP CUT 3IDEVIEWUP CUT
-ODELS 4350 4350 43/50 Specification Notes

* Profile capacity H x W dimensions are provided for
Applications Pipe or Profile guidance only. The actual capacity can vary depending
Pipe diameter capacity inches {mm} 5 {127} 7 {178} 9 {228} on the profile you are attempting to produce.
Profile capacity inches {mm} H x W* 1 x 28.5 {25.4 x 724} 2 x 16 {50.8 x 406} 2.75 x 23 {69 x 584} †
Maximum blade surface speeds are individually
Blade diameter inches {mm} 18 {457} 22 {559} 27 {686} configured based on each models blade diameter.
Blade type Carbide tipped ‡
Blade drive motor Hp {kW} 3 {2.4} 3 {2.4} 5 {3.73} any options or accessories on equipment. For full FLA
Blade speed Variable blade speed standard on all models† detail for power circuit design of specific machines and
systems, refer to the electrical diagrams the equipment
order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
Height to centerline 42 {1067} (± 2)
Maximum table travel 24 {609} 24 {609} 20 {508} a Conair representative for the most current information.
Control Options
• Special power: 230/3/60, 380/3/50 or 575/3/60
• Electronic cut to length measuring system with

digital automatic reset counter and encoder for
mounting to puller
• Servo drive package for saw table travel. System

uses an AC servo motor with a precision planetary
gear drive assembly
• Left-to-right extrusion direction
• Custom paint
The TS Up-Cut features a full-color touchscreen control. Switch • Special non-auto powder coat
cutting modes, adjust blade speed, customize operation, save
recipes, and create unique user privileges all from a touchscreen • Chip collection system
control that allows for easy communication to other devices. All
Conair controls are designed with the same style icon/button • CE certification
operation, making learning a new piece of equipment easy and • UL certification
comfortable.
E-36
TPEX016-0317 COMBINATION PULLER/CUTTER-%$,).%-/$%,3
Precision Pulling and

Cutting for Medical
Tubing Products
Conair’s extensive experience in medical grade extrusion
equipment offers processors a wide selection of precision
pulling and cutting equipment for maximizing cleanliness,
efficiency and precision.
Choose from small, medium or large, high-speed fly-knife

cutters, mounted on precision rails for optimized positioning.
And precision pullers, with belts of various sizes or pinch rollers
with single or dual drive systems. Each of these selections can
be ordered alone, or mounted together on a combined base, -ODEL-$, 3,
(Shown with stainless
integrated with intuitive touch screen controls for the ultimate steel base option and
solution in cutting and pulling efficiency. misting system option.)
Highly efficient microbore tubing production
Start with a movable/lockable stainless steel

base cabinet and touchscreen control and ` 0RECISEPULLINGWITHSERVOMOTORS
add a cutter, a puller or both to provide the Independent servo motors with precision, inline, planetary gear reducers provide
best possible production system available consistent, repeatable pulling with optimum torque and minimum drive system backlash.
for microbore tubing production. Each cutter/
` %LIMINATEBELTSLIPPAGE
puller MedLine package can also be equipped
The helical offset tooth design and self-tracking belts on the 1-12 puller provide a
with fully integrated control of downstream
highly accurate and efficient puller drive system.
take-away tables to keep the product moving
and/or upstream feeding roll control for offline
` 6ISIBLEPROCESSING
cutting operations. All pinch rolls and cutters, as well as the 1-12 puller and the 2-12 puller, are
MedLine fly-knife cutters are mounted on equipped with 0.25 inch {6.4 mm} thick polycarbonate window guards that ease the
stainless steel rails for optimized positioning, string-up procedure by allowing the user to visually follow the microbore tubing
assuring smooth, zero-friction tubing entry. through the pulling and cutting processes.
Encased in clean, clear, highly visible plexiglass
` #UTTINGCAPACITYUPTOINCHES
housings, cutters are offered in 0.25, 1.0 and 2.0
The 0.25L cutter can handle extrudates of up to 0.25 inches {6.4 mm} in diameter.
maximum tube sizes and are shipped complete
Optional 1 inch {25 mm} or 2.0 inch {51 mm} cut capacities are available with the
with sized bushings for your tubing product.
larger cutter models.
Up to 350 cuts per minute can be achieved
with a precision, servo motor drive system. ` 4OUCHSCREENCONTROL
Pullers are offered in belt models up The intuitive, 8-inch, chemical resistant digital operator control provides a user-
to 3-inch {76.2 mm} wide and 20-inch friendly method to communicate with the Conair Combination Puller/Cutter.
{508 mm} long or advanced pinch rollers for Optional 10-inch dedicated program screens for taper/bump/bubble tubing ease the
high speed, minimal contact applications. setup process. An optional 15-inch control is also available.
Single or dual servo motors are supplied for
highly controlled, precision pulling control.
E-37
Features
05
01 05
3IMPLECONVEYORSETUP /PTIMUMEYE LEVELMONITORING
Cutting from above the conveyor improves Controls are at eye-level and within easy
discharge interface. reach.
02 06 06
02 01
6ISIBLECUTTERHEAD 0RECISELYCONTROLBELTTENSION
Clear knife guard lets you view the rotating Adjust puller belts and control tension on
cutter head and blade(s) during operation. 03 07
your material by opening or closing the
Designed for easy access! 08 belts with an easy turn or servo boom.
Wheel or servo control. Digital belt gap
sensor also available.
03
"UILT INSTAINLESSSTEELPARTICULATE 04
OVERFLOWTRAY
07
Collects waste lubricant and material with #ENTEREDGUIDEDMATERIAL
each pass of the cutter blades. A fitting is An adjustable roller guides material onto the
provided for ease of draining. puller belts.
3AFETYFEATURESINCLUDE
04 • Easy-to-reach emergency stop buttons* 08
3TAINLESSSTEELCABINET • Polycarbonate knife guard 0RECISEPULLING
An optional stainless steel cabinet is • Upper and lower clear polycarbonate belt guards Opposing belts uniformly draw material
available for medical applications. • Heavy-duty lockdown screws through to the cutter.
* The MedLine models include two independent emergency
shutdown switches that, once pressed, will disconnect power to
the entire unit and must be reset to restart the puller/cutter.
Puller Features / Options
)NDEPENDENTSERVOPULLERMOTORS #HOICEOFIN LINEPLANETARYGEARREDUCERRATIOS

with low backlash planetary gearheads. Reducer ratios can be selected to optimize
puller performance based on your application.
2EMOTEBELTSPEEDCONTROLOPTION /PTIONALINTUITIVETAPERBUMPBUBBLE
Exclusive remote control digital potentiometer SOFTWARE
eases start-up by allowing you to conveniently A digital, positional control is added to the
adjust your belt puller speed while making puller servo drive along with a programmable
extruder adjustments. You can dial in your controller (PLC) enabling you to program up to
precise speed with the 36 position rotary 32 speed variations and 32 analog air pressure
control knob; virtually eliminating variations due adjustments that can be stored for repeatable
to voltage/noise fluctuations associated with tube profiling. This combination of air pressure
Keep your process running smooth with analog controls. and speed control allow you to produce a high
independent precision planetary gearhead quality, consistent end-product.
reducers. The MedLine pullers feature helical
gearing and gear tooth microgeometry reducers $IGITALBELTGAPSENSORANDREADOUTOPTION INCH[MM]INCH[MM]ORINCH
that allow you to produce flaw-free product. Allows you to set and measure belt gap, to three [MM]DUALSERVODRIVENPINCHROLLS
* Optional on heavy duty models only. decimal places, for consistent belt traction.
E-38
Configuration and Naming

The MedLine Puller/Cutter Series can be configured in many different ways to suit your application perfectly. All MedLine Puller/Cutter models
have the same cabinet design. The MedLine can be a medical application puller/cutter combination, a medical puller, or a medical cutter.
The model name/number is determined by the configuration that is desired.
0ULLINGINFORMATION Single or Dual The colon in the #UTTINGINFORMATION

The first digit in the model name Servo pulling. This model name The second number
following the MDL (MedLine) spot in the model separates the represents the diameter
distinguishes the difference between will be S for single puller information capacity of the cutter. If
a belt puller and a pinch roll. servo pullers, and and the cutter the unit is a puller only
D for dual servo information. MedLine, this second
If the first digit is a number, the number number will be 0.00.
represents the width of the puller belt. pullers.
The second number represents the
length of the belt.
Light or Heavy
If the third digit is the letter R, the puller Duty. An L will
utilizes a pinch roll puller. The first and appear in this
second digits represent the pinch roll space if this is
diameter and width, respectively. a light-weight
model. The H
If the unit is a cutter-only MedLine, will appear if
this first number will be 0-00. this is Heavy
Duty.
MDL - : .
For example, a MDL1-12S:0.25 is a MedLine that has a puller with 1 inch wide belt, 12 inches long, driven by a single servo.
It has a cutter capable of cutting 0.25 inch diameter material.
A MDL6-3RD:0.00 is a MedLine that has a pinch roll 6 inches in diameter, 3 inches wide, driven by dual servos.
It has a no cutting head.
The MedLine Puller/Cutter is used in-line, downstream from the extruder and tank, to pull, cut, or pull and cut product which
can then be transferred to a Medical Take Away Conveyor or coiled onto a Conair ATC coiler.
E-39
Configuring the Right MedLine for you
0INCHROLL 2
(3.12 inch diameter, 1.3 inches
wide. Maximum opening 4.0
inches. Single servo only.)
#UTTER
0INCHROLL 2
(2.25 inch
bushing diameter) INCH(-) wide. Maximum opening
-ED,INE#ONTROL 3.0 inches. Single servo only.)
(w/bump tube)
0INCHROLL 2
INCH(-) wide. Maximum opening
#UTTER -ED,INE#ONTROL 3.0 inches. Dual servo only)
(1.25 inch (w/bump tube)
bushing diameter)
0ULLER
INCH(-) (3 inches wide,
#ONTROL 20 inches long.
(Not bump tube 3 inch opening.)
capable)
#UTTER
0ULLER
(0.75 inch
(2 inches wide,
bushing diameter)
12 inches long.
3 inch opening.)
0ULLER
(1 inch wide,
12 inches long.
.OCUTTER 2 inch opening.)
.OPULLER
-4!#(connected to control)
-ED,INE
* Some pullers shown without guarding
E-40
Control Options
The MedLine Puller/Cutter touchscreen control, • 10-inch HMI screen
available in standard 8-inch or optional 10, or • Stainless steel cabinet
15-inch models, provides a graphical interface
designed for easy navigation by even novice • Left-to-right puller motion
operators through clear multi-lingual icons and • Variable blade speed in both demand
actions optimized for commonly requested and flywheel cutting modes
functions. Two software selections are offered
• Bushing lubrication system
to match processing and final product needs:
• Scrap mode
• Standard software accommodates all straight
tubing applications and about 85% of common • 2-inch cut capacity
taper tube applications, and features easy to • Bushing sizes to 2.25 inch {57mm}
use controls, with all set-up data included on a • Multiple length and batch counts
Puller Remote Control
single page.
% Torque
• Follower cutting mode
FPM
• Optional software is offered for more complex,
• Digital belt gap sensor
multi-step, taper tubing applications and
features sophisticated, yet easy to understand • Tapered/bubble control tube /
adjustments for pulling and cuttingcoordinated profile software
$IGITAL"ELT programing. A Conair exclusive. • Gauging interface
'AP3ENSOR Regardless of software choice, each includes easily • Optional package for multi-lumen control
This option allows changed cutting modes, adjustment of blade speed,
you to set the zero $IGITAL2EMOTE#ONTROL • Two 120 Volt ACC auxiliary outlets
up to three quality control settings, recipe storage,
point for the belt This optional control with maximum12 amps
control of a takeaway conveyor, multiple levels of
gap, and then allows the puller’s security and communication with other devices. All • Pinch roll puller units
set and measure speed to be fine-tuned Conair controls are designed in a common, friendly, • Stainless steel blank cutter bushings
belt gap to three from down the line to 36 international style, making learning a new piece of
decimal places. programmable settings. • CE certification
equipment easy and comfortable.
Dimensional Specifications
-ODELS -ED,INE
Extrudate capacity inches {mm} dia. 0.25 - 2.00 {6.4 - 50.8}
Blade drive motor (3000 rpm) 3.25 - 4.4 {2.4 - 3.3}
"A"
cutter Hp {kW}
"B"
Servo puller drive motor Hp {kW} 1.5 - 2.0 {1.2 - 1.5}

!
$IMENSIONSinches {mm} "A" "B" "C"
A - Height 71.0 {1803.4}

B - Height to centerline, ±2 {±50.8} 42.0 {1067.0} "
C - Width 40.0 {1016.0}
D - Depth 27.0 - 36.0 {685.8 - 914.4}
Belt width ±3/8 {±9.5} 1.0 - 3.0 {25.4 - 76.2}
Belt traction length 12.0 - 20.0 {304.8 - 508.0} $ #
2EDUCERRATIOBELTSPEED
Available speeds† ft/min 1.4 to 140 2.5 to 250 5.5 to 550 10 to 700 Specification Notes
* Specifications will vary based upon configuration selected. See the next page for
7EIGHTlb {kg}
specifications for individual components.
Installed 715.0 - 790.0 {324.0 - 358.4} †
Examples of possible speeds are shown. Belt speeds will vary depending on drive type
Shipping 700.0 - 800.0 {317.5 - 363.0} (single or dual).
6OLTAGEFull load ampsp ‡
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options or accessories on
460V/3 phase/60Hz Consult Conair equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific machines and systems,
refer to the electrical diagrams of the equipment order and the nameplate applied to the
(-)CONTROL Touchscreen
machine.
E-41
Pulling Component Specification

0INCH2OLL0ULLER-ODELS
Roller width inches {mm} 1.30 {33} 2.00 {51} 2.26 {57}
Roller diameter inches {mm} 3.20 {81} 4.12 {105} 6.06 {154}
Feed opening inches {mm} 4 {102} 3 {76} 3 {76}
Drive type servo (single) servo (single) servo (dual)
Roller drive motor Hp {kW} 2 {1.5} 2 {1.5} 3.25 {2.4}
Roller speed* ft/min {m/min} up to 250 {76} up to 500 {152} up to 1200 {366}
"ELT0ULLER-ODELS
Belt width inches {mm} 1.0 {25.4} 2.00 {51} 3.0 {76}
Belt traction length inches {mm} 12.0 {305} 12.0 {305} 20.0 {508.0}
Feed opening inches {mm} 2.0 {50.8} 3.0 {76} 4.0 {102}
Drive type servo (single or dual) servo (single)
Belt drive motor Hp {kW} (2) 1.0 Hp {0.75 kW} (2) 2.0 Hp {1.5 kW}
Belt speed ranges* ft/min {m/min} 1.4 - 140 {36 - 3600} 1.4 - 150 {36 - 3810}
2.5 - 250 {64 - 6350}
5.5 - 550 {140 - 13970}
10 - 750 {254 - 19050} 10 - 700 {254 - 17780}
Cutting Component Specifications

* Examples of possible
speeds are shown.
Belt speeds will vary
depending on drive type
(single or dual).
†
Dependent on material
and wall thickness.
‡
Optional.
Specifications may
change without
#UTTER-ODELS , , , ( notice. Consult with
a Conair representative
for the most current
Extrudate capacity inches {mm} diameter 0.25 {6.35} 1.00 {25.4}† 2.00 {50.8}† 2.00 {50.8} information.
Bushing inches {mm} diameter 0.75 1.25 2.25 2.25
Blade drive motor Hp {kW} 3.25 {2.4} 3.25 {2.4} 4.4 {3.3} 4.4 {3.3}
High torque motor‡ N/A 4.4 {3.3} STD STD
Feed direction right-to-left right-to-left right-to-left right-to-left
#UTTERHEAD
Aluminum 2-position Yes Yes NA NA
Stainless steel 2-position‡ NA Yes STD STD
Roller speed* ft/min {m/min} Yes‡ Yes‡ Yes‡ Yes‡
E-42
TPEX003-0317 COMBINATION PULLER / CUTTER#0#-/$%,3
Pull and Cut with

Repeated Accuracy
and Precision
Precisely pull and cut plastic and rubber tubing, rigid tubing,
profiles, at precision tolerances and high cutting speeds.
Combination Puller/Cutters are available with your choice of
puller belt sizes, cutting capacities and pulling torque to meet
your specific needs. The Conair CPC provides a long tradition of
industrial service, easy setup and precision operation.
-ODEL#0# #3#
(Shown with optional dead stop.)
Follows the Process for Accuracy
The Conair CPC Series combines a robust

puller with a precision cutter for a fully ` -ORETORQUEANDMOTORLIFE
integrated, space saving solution for tubing, Eliminating maintenance while improving performance, Conair's unique, in-line gear
pipe and profile producers. With a mast- reducer improves torque while reducing maintenance. CRM and Helical bevel
mounted control for both functions, set-up is reducers are used on the puller drive system.
fast, easy and consolidated, minimizing the
time required for coordinating multiple devices. ` )NTUITIVEOPERATORCONTROL
The CPC features a user-friendly, 7-inch {178mm} touchscreen with high visibility
The 3 ¼ Hp servo cutter motor provides graphics and intuitive commands for controlling the puller and cutter. A large pop-up
fast, clean, fly-knife cutting below a safe, “soft” keypad makes recipe entry fast and easy.
interlocked, easy-access hood. Up to 4-inch
{101.6 mm} diameter tubing maybe precision ` #UTTINGCAPACITYTOINCHES
cut with a range of selectable cutting modes. Choose belt widths from up 3 to 4 inches {76.2 to 101.6 mm} and nominal traction
All functions are easily viewed, set-up and lengths to 26 inches {660.4 mm}. Belt options are available for cutting corrugated
changed through the conveniently-located, plastic.
mast-mounted touchscreen control, equipped
with colorful, intuitive, international graphics ` #HOOSECUTTERSFORSPEEDORTORQUE
for fast, easy understanding. Standard cutter models include precision 4:1 inline planetary gear reducer for
enhanced cutting torque up to 750 RPM.
E-43
Features
01 05
01
/PTIMUMEYE LEVELMONITORING #ONTROLLEDEXTRUDATEGRIP
Controls are at eye-level and Adjust belts and control tension
within easy reach. on material by opening/closing 05
belt gap with an easy turn.
02
06
%ASY ACCESSCUTTERMOTOR 02
Quick-remove cover for #ENTEREDGUIDEDMATERIAL
Adjustable rollers guide material 06
easy access to motor during
maintenance. into the belts.
03
07
03 07
6ISIBLECUTTERHEAD 0RECISEPULLING
04
Clear knife guard lets you view AC vector drive uniformly draws and
rotating cutter head, blade(s) pushes material through to the cutter.
08
during operation.
08
04 /PTIONALPULLERENCLOSURE
"UILT INCLEANING
Stainless steel blade lubrication 3AFETYFEATURESINCLUDE
tray cleans and lubricates the
blade(s) with each pass, and the • Polycarbonate knife guard • Electric eye and bracket for use with Endsense mode
cutting chamber includes a fitting
• Upper and lower clear polycarbonate belt guards • Heavy-duty lockdown screws
for drainage.
Control
)N LINEGEARBOX
REDUCER lessens the
maintenance required
by traditional belt-
and-pulley designs.
The reducer improves
torque performance,
improves side load
capabilities and
extends the life of the
servo motor. (Does not
apply for L models.)
3TANDARDTOUCHSCREENFEATURESINCLUDE
5PPERANDLOWER • Full-color • Selectable cutting • Total access to
BELTGUARDS protect graphics modes, blade vector or servo
the user and are • Large easy-to- speed and Start/ drives for tuning
easily removed when read display Stop functions and service
changing the belts of
the cutter. $IGITAL"ELT'AP3ENSOR
This option allows you to set the zero point
for the belt gap, and then set and measure
belt gap to three decimal places.
E-44
Specifications
CSC2L cutters do not come with planetary reducers,

allowing flywheel operation up to 3000 RPM.
* Option exists for dual servo pullers for high speeds at
!
minimal backlash.
†
" specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical
diagrams the equipment order and the nameplate
information.
$ #
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS #0# #3#, #0# #3# #0# #3#, #0# #3# #0# #3#,
Extrudate capacity inches {mm} diameter 1.25 {32} 1.75 {44} 2.25 {572} 3 {76} 2.25 {572}
CSC cutter motor (servo) Hp {kW} 3.25 {2.4}
High-torque cutter motor (servo)* Hp {kW} N/A 3.8 {2.8} N/A 3.8 {2.8} N/A
Servo puller motor* Hp {kW} 3.25 {2.4} (optional)
A - Height 66.6 {1691}
B - Height to centerline, ±2 {±50.8} 42.0 {1067}
C - Width 26.6 {676}
D - Length 74.0 {1880}
Belt width ±3/8 {±9.5} 3.0 {76}
Belt traction length 20.0 {508}
Feed opening 3.5 {88.9}
Installed 1200 {545}
Shipping 1300 {590}
%LECTRICALREQUIREMENTSFull load amps o
460V/3 phase/60Hz (Std.) Consult Conair
Puller Options
• Upgrade to Emerson 3.25 Hp velocity servo • Remote belt speed control with ten turn • High precision flat belts. Recommended for
e-drive with plus minus 1/100 percent set potentiometer and digital speed display with applications with speeds above 200 feet per
speed regulation and additional lower torque one hundred feet of cable minute or applications requiring extreme cut to
at lower speeds including a serial operator length tolerances
interface with feet per minute and totalizing • Electronic totalizing footage counter
footage counter
• Digital belt gap sensor
E-45
Specifications
#UTTER(EADS
Standard: Aluminum 2-position
Optional: Stainless Steel 2-position
Optional: Stainless Steel HD 2-position
! Specification Notes
CSC2L cutters do not come with planetary reducers, allowing flywheel
operation up to 3000 RPM.
* Option exists for dual servo pullers for high speeds at minimal backlash.
"
†
FLA data for reference purposes only. Does not include any options
or accessories on equipment. For full FLA detail for power circuit design
of specific machines and systems, refer to the electrical diagrams the
equipment order and the nameplate applied to the machine.
Specifications may change without notice. Consult with a Conair
representative for the most current information.
# $
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS #0# #3#, #0# #3# #0# #3# #0# #3# #0# #3#
Extrudate capacity inches {mm} diameter 1.25 {32} 1.75 {44} 2.75 {51} 3.75 {95} 4 {102}
CSC cutter motor (servo) Hp {kW} 3.25 {2.42} 3.25 {2.42} 3.25 {2.42} N/A
High-torque cutter motor (servo)* Hp {kW} 4.4 (3.3)
Servo puller motor* Hp {kW} 3.25 {2.4} (Optional)
A - Height 66.6 {1691}
B - Height to centerline, ±2 {±50.8} 42.0 {1067}
C - Width 26.6 {676} 29 {736.6}
D - Length 74.0 {1880} 74.0 {1880} 80.0 {2032} 80.0 {2032} 100 {2540}
Belt width ±3/8 {±9.5} 4.0 {102} 6 {152.4}
Belt traction length 26.0 {660} 39 {990.6}
Feed opening 4.5 {114.3} 6.5 {165.1}
Installed 1350 {613}
Shipping 1450 {658}
%LECTRICALREQUIREMENTSFull load amps o
460V/3 phase/60Hz (Std.) Consult Conair
Cutter Options
• Cutting torque horse power • Follower cutting mode featuring • Stainless steel cutter bushings • Multiple lengths and batches,
upgrade to 4.4 Hp continuous operator programs desired cut bored to size for round product up to three additional lengths with
duty positional servo controller length and number of blades. associated batch counts, for use
Controller takes the encoder input • Blade wipe system includes with timer and encoder mode
• Stainless steel cutter head in and automatically ratios the brackets and felt pad mounted on
place of standard aluminum cutter head to the puller speed the top of the brushing holder and • Host microprocessor interface
cutter head for additional inertia lubricant bottle with sight valve connections
• Electric eye and bracket for
• Second axis slide base provides use with end sense mode, for • Bushing lubrication system includes • Timer mode
unobstructed access to the puller optimizing cut to length accuracy. spray system with reservoir and
belts for processes which do not This unit is designed for cutting nozzle and connection for customer • 230/3/60 power supply
require a cutting mode rigid parts from 4 to 24 inches supplied pressurized air. Spray is
directed on a product at entry to • Custom paint
long. (.OTEit is always required
• Variable blade speed in both on to send in samples of product for cutter bushing to minimize drag
demand and flywheel cut mode • Left-to-right operation
proper application and set up of associated to sticky and flexible
an electric eye.) extrusions
E-46
TPEX033-0317 COILERS!4#3%2)%3
Tensionless Winding
with Automatic Cut
and Spindle Transfer
Conair ATC dual spindle coilers wind small flexible extrusions
with little-to-no friction or winding tension. This eliminates
deformities in delicate products making it ideal for extrusions
such as flexible tubing, medical tubing, filled cords and small
flexible profiles.
-ODEL!4#
The fully automated process transfers the product to the new (Shown with
reel without operator involvement or process disruption. optional full
plexiglass
enclosure and
tail retainer.)
Servo Precision for Highest Performance
Automatic Cut and Transfer Coilers (ATC's) are

the perfect choice for tensionless, high speed ` "ESTACCURACYWITHSERVOCONTROL
winding of small diameter flexible tubing. Spindle rotation, traverse motion and spindle speed are all servo driven. This provides
Tension control is accomplished through a the perfect in speed and positioning control for error-free high repeatability and
non-contact sonic detector communicating optimum product tension throughout the entire high speed coiling and cut/transfer
with the ATC's PLC to automatically adjust process. Finished spools require no dial-in for product changeover.
coil speed and traverse motor. The ATC
accommodates tube diameters from ` $ISTORTION FREEPRODUCT
0.085 inch to 0.50 inch {2.16 to 12.7 mm}. Optimum tension is achieved by an advanced control algorithm that calculates each
Tubes as small as 0.020 inch {0.5 mm} can successive wrap diameter to adjust coil speed and traverse motion relative to the
be wound with a specialized minimal tension tube size and puller speed. This allows the sonic loop control to perform as a
trim control. Automatic spindle changeover is fine-trim device and ensures accurate, distortion-free, error-free lay of each
accomplished when the programmed footage wrap. The following circuit allows automated ramp-up of the winder synchronously
for the coil is reached. with the line at startup.
The system comes complete with collapsible ` 2ECIPESCUTOPERATORVARIABILITYERROR

core assemblies or spools and can optionally Every operating parameter can be saved within a recipe for repeatable production
accept customer supplied spools. All winder consistency. This includes coil speed changes during cut and transfer, traverse
components that come into contact with the speed for accurate lay and turret speed during changeover to avoid product touching
tube are made from stainless steel or are hard the floor.
coat anodized.
` /PTIONSTOMEETYOURNEEDS
• Spare set of collapsible • Additional product tips • Custom paint
coils • 230V/3 phase/60 Hz • Manufactured to meet
• Modifications for use of voltage medical requirements
customer coils • Left-to-right operation • Full plexiglass enclosure
E-47
TPEX033-0317 COILERS!4#3%2)%3
Specifications
4RIMCONTROL 4RIMCONTROL
!4#&RONTVIEW !4#3IDEVIEW FRONTVIEW SIDEVIEW
! %
"
# $ & '
-ODELS !4# !4# Specification Notes

* FLA data for reference
Product range tube diameter inches {mm} Typical 0.085 to 0.5 {2.16 to 12.7} / Optional 0.02 {0.5} and up to 1.0 {25.4} purposes only. Does not
Coil type Collapsible for coreless reel - one set included include any options or
Coil drive Independent servo drive on each reel accessories on equipment.
Core size OD inches {mm} 24 {610} 36 {914} For full FLA detail for power
Core width inches {mm} 12 {305} circuit design of specific
Core size ID inches {mm} 8 {203} machines and systems,
Spool size OD inches {mm} 20 {508} 28 {711} refer to the electrical
diagrams the equipment
Spool width inches {mm} 12 {305} 18 {457}
order and the nameplate
Spool size ID inches {mm} 6 {152} applied to the machine.
Spool flange thickness inches {mm} 1.5 {38}
Traverse Servo control on traverse assembly
Turret drive Servo control on turret shaft Specifications may
change without notice.
Line rate Nominal 500 FPM {152m/min} up to 800 FPM {243m/min} - Tube size dependant
Consult with a Conair
Line direction Right-to-left (STD) representative for the
Frame Heavy-duty welded steel with four (4) swivel casters and four (4) leveling screws most current information.
#ONTROLS
PLC Programmable microprocessor with touchscreen HMI
Panel NEMA-4
A - Overall height 66.3 {1684.0} 86.0 {2184.4}
B - Height to spindle centerline 40.0 {1016.0} 41.2 {1046.5}
C - Overall length 72 {1828.8} 99.7 {2532.4}
D - Overall width 54 {1371.6} 83.1 {2110.7}
Shipping 2200 {998} 4400 {1996}
6OLTAGE Full load amps

Consult Conair
4RIM#ONTROL
Non-contact ultrasonic for tube diameters 0.085 to 0.5 in. {2.16 to 12.7 mm} Ultra-lightweight roller
Dancer type
contact ultrasonic for tube diameters 0.02 to 0.085 in. {0.5 to 2.16 mm}
E - Overall height 70.0 {1778}
F - Overall length 30.0 {762}
G - Overall width 24.4 {620}
Shipping 500 {226.8}

E-48
TPEX028-0317 TAKEAWAY CONVEYOR4!#3%2)%3
Hands-Free
Take-Away Conveyors
The Conair belt discharge conveyor is a rugged, low profile
conveyor designed to be used when cutting flexible and semi-
rigid products. The conveyors enhance the cut length tolerance
and cut quality by supporting and transporting the extruded
product away from the cutter bushing. The product can then be
optionally ejected into a collection tray for operator removal.
-ODEL4!#
Convenient Belt Support and Take-Away
TAC Series take-away belt conveyors support

and convey extruded parts postcutter. Parts ` ,ABORFREEPARTSCOLLECTION
discharge off the end of the conveyor or The conveyor automatically discharges parts to a collection tray or scrap collection
can be directed by a mechanical arm to a bin, allowing operators to tend to other value added activities. TAC conveyors can be
collection tray. An optional pneumatic ejector optionally configured for split manifolds for common side front and rear collection or
system blow-off offers front and rear or for dual sided collection.
side-to-side ejection for automated parts
separation, for example by size. ` %ASYSEGREGATIONOFGOODANDBADPARTS
The conveyor can be interfaced with the diameter or wall thickness measuring gauge
A variable speed drive allows the conveyor to separate parts which do not meet specifications. The ejector system is disabled
speed to be set slightly faster than the line and the parts discharge off the end of the conveyor instead of into the collecting tray.
speed, ensuring adequate separation between
the parts as they are moved to the collection tray. ` -EDICALAPPLICATIONOPTION
Medical option includes precision, geared height actuator for fine adjustment for up/
Heavy-duty frame construction provides rigid down/tilt to optimize part support and take-away. The TAC can be powder coated or
support at each end of the conveyor. Swivel supplied with a stainless steel frame to aid wash down.
casters are utilized for easy alignment. Height
adjustment of ±2 inches {51 mm} is provided. ` 3TATIC FREEPRODUCTIONCOLLECTION
An optional de-ionizer removes any static build-up generated from the process to aid
Air nozzles are easily positioned for fast consistent product ejection and positioning in the collection tray(s).
removal of the parts to the collection tray.
E-49
TPEX028-0317 TAKEAWAY CONVEYOR4!#3%2)%3
Options
• Pneumatic ejector system including accumulator tank, regulator and • Stainless steel parts collection tray (various lengths available)
controls with air knife or positionable, variable flow nozzles to eject
• High speed drive configurations for 500 and 600 FPM applications
the parts into a collecting tray. Available single or dual station blow-off
• Left-to-right operation
• Medical configuration with precision up/down/tilt actuators. Available
powder coated or in stainless steel
Specifications
* Optional.
EMERGENCY
STOP RESET
EMERGENCY
STOP
R RM
†
3PBL
1PB

For full FLA detail for power circuit design of specific
machines and systems, refer to the electrical
! diagrams the equipment order and the nameplate
information.
"
$
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS 4!# 4!# 4!# 4!# 4!# 4!# 4!#
Belt width inches {mm} 4 {101} 4 {101} 4 {101} 4 {101} 8 {203} 8 {203} 8 {203}
Conveyor length feet {m} 6 {1.83} 8 {1.22} 12 {3.66} 16 {4.88} 8 {1.22} 12 {3.66} 16 {4.88}
Belt type Endless Poly-Kleen white covered belts
Belt speed 500 FPM {152 m/min.}
Drive motor 1 Hp variable speed AC motor
A - Overall height 71.7 {1820}
B - Height to top of belt 40 ± 2 {1016± 51}
C - Overall length 72 {1829} 96 {2438} 144 {3658} 192 {4877} 96 {2438} 144 {3658} 192 {4877}
D - Overall width 29.5 {749.3}
Shipping Consult Conair
6OLTAGEFull Load Amps †
230 V/3 phase/60 Hz Consult Conair
E-50
TPEX043-0317 TAKEAWAY CONVEYOR-4!#3%2)%3
Automated
Take-Away Conveyors
for Extruded Products
Conair MTAC Series take–away conveyors assure efficient
extruded product handling. Typically located directly after
cutting devices, the MTAC assures product is moved away from
the cutter at adjustable speeds typically in excess of line speed,
eliminating accumulation and sorting confusion. Extruded
products are efficiently moved toward packaging and/or other
handling operations. Diverter arms may be easily added to direct
product flow.
The belt surface, in 4 or 8-inch widths and up to 16 feet long -ODEL-4!#
(Show with optional compressed
is white and durable, minimizing handling contamination of air blow-off / sorting system and
extruded product by operators. The belt drive is a 1 Hp variable collection trough.)
speed AC motor.
Convenient Belt Support and Take-Away

Each MTAC consists of heavy, welded tubing
construction and is equipped with swivel, ` ,ABORFREEPARTSCOLLECTION
locking casters for easy alignment with the The conveyor automatically discharges parts to a collection tray or scrap collection
extrusion line. Height can be adjusted within a bin, allowing operators to tend to other value added activities. As an option, MTAC
wide range and fine-tuning, hand wheel height conveyors can be configured for split manifolds for common side front and rear
adjustments of +/- 2 inches is provided. collection or for dual sided collection.
Options include programmable compressed ` %ASYSEGREGATIONOFGOODANDBADPARTS

air blow-off for quality sorting, a side mounted The conveyor can be interfaced with the diameter or wall thickness measuring gauge
collection trough for accepted or rejected to separate parts which do not meet specifications. The ejector system is disabled
product, and touchscreen controls that and the parts discharge off the end of the conveyor instead of into the collecting tray.
integrate with the processing line.
Compressed air sorting systems operate ` -EDICALAPPLICATIONOPTION

seamlessly with Conair cutters and permit Medical option includes precision, geared height actuator for fine adjustment for up/
a series of programmed air pulses for down/tilt to optimize part support and take-away. The MTAC can be powder coated or
blowing extruded off the belt and into supplied with a stainless steel frame to aid wash down.
product collection bins by length or by quality
assurance, for example. Discharging can be ` 3TATIC FREEPRODUCTIONCOLLECTION
off either side of the conveyor, while unblown An optional de-ionizer removes any static build-up generated from the process to aid
products roll off the end of the conveyor. The consistent product ejection and positioning in the collection tray(s).
optional stainless steel trough is ideal for
neatly collecting and holding long product
lengths for manual packaging.
E-51
TPEX043-0317 TAKEAWAY CONVEYOR-4!#3%2)%3
Specifications
#
EMERGENCY EMERGENCY
STOP RESET STOP
R RM
3PBL
1PB
*
! FLA data for reference purposes only.
Does not include any options or accessories
on equipment. For full FLA detail for power
circuit design of specific machines and
systems, refer to the electrical diagrams
the equipment order and the nameplate
"
Specifications may change without notice.

Consult with a Conair representative for the
$
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS -4!# -4!# -4!# -4!# -4!#

Belt width inches {mm} 4 {101}
Conveyor length feet {m} 6 {1.83} 8 {2.43} 10 {3.04} 12 {3.65} 16 {1.82}
Belt type Endless Poly-Kleen white covered belts
Belt speed 20 FPM to 500 FPM {152 m/min.}
Drive motor 1 Hp variable speed AC motor
B - Height to top of belt 40 ± 2 {1016± 51}
C - Overall length 72 {1829} 96 {2438} 120 {3048} 144 {3657} 192 {4877}
D - Overall width 29.5 {749.3}
Shipping Consult Conair
6OLTAGE Full load amps *
110V/1 phase/60Hz Consult Conair
Puller Options
• Pneumatic ejector system including • Single station full length blow off manifold • Left-to-right operation
accumulator tank, regulator and controls with with lock line air nozzles designed to blow
• Custom paint
air knife or positionable, variable flow nozzles cut pieces from conveyor top including
to eject the parts into a collecting tray. discrete time delay • Dual sided with catch trays on both sides
Available single or dual station blow-off
• Dual station with parts blowing off front or • Static de-ionizer bar with controls
• Medical configuration with precision up/ rear of conveyor
down/tilt actuators. Available powder coated • CE certification
• HMI touchscreen control
or in stainless steel • Precision height adjustment with hand
• Upgrade to air knife discharge in place of wheel and gearbox at each end of frame
• Upgrade to swing arm control
steel pipe for single or dual station blow off
• Stainless steel parts collection tray • UL certification
• High speed drive configurations for 500 and
(various lengths available) • 230/3/60 and 460/3/60 voltages
600 FPM applications
• Full or compact length
E-52
TPEX017-0317 DUMP TABLES$43%2)%3
Automatic Cycles for

Consistent Operation
Conair DT Series Dump Tables provide a long, stable holding
surface for pipe, tubing, and profiles as they emerge from
extrusion operations. Located directly after the cutter or saw, the
DT provides a smooth, firm landing until cutting is complete, then
automatically dumps the cut extrusion to an off-line location, then
quickly returns to home position, ready to accept the next length.
The dump sequence is fully automated and typically programmed
to occur as soon as the extruded product is cut to length and
needs to be moved to make way for the next piece.
The use of a Conair Dump Table eliminates typical hang-up

points in large extruded product operations, preserving finished
product integrity and uniformity.
-ODEL$4 ($
Stainless Steel Table; All Welded-Steel Frame HEAVYDUTY
Featuring rugged, welded steel construction

with all stainless steel product contact areas, ` 3IMPLE TO USEOPERATION
the DT Series are offered in standard duty for Simply adjust the table's floor bolts to the center line height of your process and
common profiles and tubing and heavy duty connect to 115 Volts. DT series Dump Tables tilt when it's pneumatic cylinder is
versions for heavy pipe and dense building activated by a control signal or the table’s flag switch has been triggered.
product extrusions.
` 2EDUCEDMAINTENANCE
Lengths are available up to 20 feet and All stainless steel material contact points and a welded-steel frame offer long life with
stainless table widths up to 12 inches. A only routine maintenance.
series of vertical, stainless steel guide arms
are included and are easily adjusted to help ` !VAILABLEINAVARIETYOFSIZERANGES
direct the product as it is dumped onto the Choose from a variety of table widths and lengths or choose to upgrade to the
lower section of the table. Essential for tubing optional DT20-12 HD model when processing large pipe, tubing or profiles. Consult
and pipe, to prevent rolling. Conair for the best choice for your application.
The DT Series easily integrates with your
operation’s downstream product collection,
handling and packaging operations and
should be considered as an essential tool in
automating your downstream operations. A
Conair downstream extrusion specialist is
ready to assist in helping you create and
integrate the ideal extrusion system including
cooling tanks, pullers, cutters and saws for
nearly any extruded product.
E-53
TPEX017-0317 DUMP TABLES$43%2)%3
Specifications
% $
"
&RONTVIEW 3IDEVIEW
-ODELS $4 $4 $4 $46 o

A - Height 65 {1651}
B - Height to centerline 39 - 45 {991 - 1143}
C - Table width 12 {305} 6 {152}
D - Width 37.1 {942} 32.1 {815}
E - Length 156 {3962} 204 {5182} 252 {6401}
Feed direction right-to-left (STD)
Installed 800 {363} 995 {451} 1400 {635} 1400 {635}
Shipping 1100 {499} 1295 {587} 1780 {870} 1780 {870}
)NPUTVOLTAGE
115V/1 phase/60 Hz 1 Amp
Pressure psi {bars} 60 - 80 {4.14 - 5.52}
Consumption ft3/m {liter/sec} 3 - 5 {1.4 - 2.4}
NPT fitting size inch 3/8
* Left-to-right feed direction is available as an option.

†
V denotes a “V” shape tray for the collection of pipe or tube.
E-54
TPEX040-0317 $/7.342%!-%84253)/.!##%33/2)%3
Downstream Extrusion Accessory Equipment

0RESKINNER!SSEMBLY
• Calibrate/quench assembly for flexible materials
• Hold-down guide rollers, contoured or non-contoured
• Split-design air wipe assemblies
• Additional sets of pre-skinner inserts for other product sizes
• Flow meter rated for 7.5 to 75 gallons/hour {28.4-284 l/hr.}
with pressure regulator
'UAGINGINTERFACE
• Monitors the wall thickness
• Detects and measures ovality at any shape or angle
• Accurately measures diameter and circumference
• Helps as a fault detector
• A key accessory for precision tubing applications such as
medical and automotive
#ALIBRATORSAND7ATER7ELLS
• Helps maintain the size of the product to your specifications
• Sleeve-type, wafer, adjustable iris, or split design
• Split sizing plate for easy startup
• Sleeve-type, wafer, or split design
• Quick-change design
• FDA/Medical grade materials available
#USTOM#UTTER"USHINGS
• Made in a variety of • Air feed and bolt- • Can be used for
materials, including for together, and lubed corrugated product
non-stick applications designs, along with to cut accurate
traditional style lengths
• (316, 304 stainless,
bushing
tool steel) • Variety of sizes
• Quick-change design available
• Can be used with both
Conair and other manu • FDA/Medical grade
factured equipment materials available
E-55
TPEX040-0317 $/7.342%!-%84253)/.!##%33/2)%3
Downstream Extrusion Accessory Equipment

#USTOM4OOLING • Utilize Conair’s lab facility to run
trials of your production
• Quicker lead-time than all of our
competition • Tool steel or stainless steel available
• Lower costs • Heater band kits available
• Better quality • Easy changeover from size to size.
Four bolts remove quickly for
• Precision engineering and
disassembly to replace pin and
manufacturing
bushing sizing tools.
• Assembled and manufactured in
• Variety of sizes to fit most extrusion
the USA
applications
• Custom designed to your
• Frosting units are available
specifications for your application
2UNNING,AB3ERVICES
Conair has a running lab that can be used to run trials of your production. Customers and potential customers are welcome to travel to the
lab and see the capabilties of the Conair equipment.
E-56
When it comes to
system installations...
46.2 HOURS OF TRAINING (AVERAGE) COMPLETED IN 2016

BY EACH PROJECT SERVICES TEAM MEMBER
200
)8/ 6
F U L L T IME
S Y S T EMDES IG N
5538'5
1,530((8#
8/ 80/
EN G IN EER S
25
1,530((031),
13
F U L L T IME
93%
)$I+53)'8/5I50
+/85.
,031),1#8
0R /*E#T M!N !G ER S 38!((I(1 8(
150+
/83/,I3)
+),01/I$)/
381/I,8 3
#/M"IN EDY E!R S 5538'
/F E80ER IEN #E
...the numbers don't lie!

0B&IDF9ICG=HAIB><<?EHAID-C>GIG=HEAIB9BGH;BI@HBE7FIDF@IEFBGD??DGECFI:D<D-E?EGEHBIDF@I9C>!??IBHH6I,C-C@9IIDF@I2HI;HDFI
FC-C@9II=DBIG=HIF>;-HABI+CFDEAI@CHB6I'CAHI<HC<?H.I2EG=I;CAHIH"<HAEHF:HIDF@I&FC2?H@7H.I;CAHIAHBC>A:HBIDF@I=E7=HAI
?H*H?BI:>BGC;HAIBDGEB4D:GECF6I=HFI9C>!AHIH"<DF@EF7ICAI->E?@EF7IDIFH2I<?DFG.I9C>I2DFGIG=HIAE7=GIH>E<;HFGIEFBGD??H@I
CF%GE;HIDF@I2EG=EFI->@7HG.IDF@I9C>I2DFGIEGI><IDF@IA>FFEF7IH44E:EHFG?9I4AC;I#D9I)FH6I3=DG!BI2=9.I4CAI@H:D@HB.IBCI;DF9I
<?DBGE:BI<AC:HBBCABI=D*HI-HHFIG>AFEF7IGCI+CFDEAI4CAI;DGHAED?%=DF@?EF7.I@A9EF7.IDF@I=HDG%GADFB4HAIB9BGH;BI<ACH:GB6I
,C2.IG=CBHIDAHIF>;-HABI9C>I:DFI-H?EH*HIEF6
Find out more at www.conairgroup.com/numbers

Anyone can say they have
the best parts and service...
700 CUSTOMER CONTACTS HANDLED

SUCCESSFULLY EVERY DAY
95%
)$I+53)'8/5
0/8I131,
150
'1(85
)$I0I58/1+8I38+
30
$((%31'8
0/35
58/1+8I530$$
%
8708/08I)$
50'8%#0
39
3/01,8#I0,#
40%
$1/53%+0((
58/1+8
5)(31),
+8/31$18#I
)/
392
80/5I)$
,8 3I#0
0/35I51 '8,35
$18(#I58/1+8
38+,1+10,5
1,I38I
0/35I0,#I58/1+8 656I0,#
8' ()88 '8 1+)
8 8/18,+8
INSTANT ACCESS
0/35 58/1+8
8:00 AM - 5:00 PM EST
EMERGENCY HELP 24/7/365
1.5+ '1((1),I 0/35I1,I53)+
US 800.458.1960
INT +1.814.437.6861
...but our numbers don't lie!

0B&IDF9ICG=HAIB><<?EHAI4CAIG=HIBD;HIEF4CA;DGECFIDF@I9C>!??IBHH6I,C-C@9IIDF@I2HI;HDFIFC-C@9II
=DBIG=HIF>;-HABI+CFDEAI@CHB6I,C-C@9I=DBI;CAHI<HC<?H.IEFI;CAHI<?D:HB.I2EG=I;CAHIH"<HAEHF:HI
DF@I&FC2?H@7H.I;CAHIB<DAHI<DAGB.ICAIDI-HGGHAIAH:CA@I4CAIAHB<CFBHIDF@IB>::HBB6
=HFI9C>IFHH@I<DAGBICAIBHA*E:HIB><<CAG.I2=DGI9C>IAHD??9I2DFGIEBIDI4DBG.I:C;<HGHFGIAHB<CFBH6I
+CFDEAI:>BGC;HABI7HGIEGII=C>ABIDI@D9.II@D9BIDI2HH&.II@D9BIDI9HDA6I,C2.IG=CBHIDAHI
F>;-HABI9C>I:DFI-H?EH*HIEF6
Find out more at www.conairgroup.com/numbers
Our Promise to You
#C2FGE;HIEBI?CBGI<AC@>:GE*EG9IDF@I?CBGI<AC4EG6I3=DG!BI2=9IG=HIHFGEAHI+CFDEAICA7DFEDGECF.I4AC;IBD?HBIHF7EFHHAB
GCIDBBH;-?HABIGCI<ACH:GI;DFD7HABIDF@IBHA*E:HIGH:=B.IEBI:C;;EGGH@IGCI7HGGEF7I9C>I><IDF@IA>FFEF7IDF@
&HH<EF7IEGIG=DGI2D96I
3=EBI:C;;EG;HFGIGCI7HGIEGIAE7=GIIG=HI4EABGIGE;HIDF@IH*HA9IGE;HIIBGDF@BI-H=EF@IC>AI'D"E;>;I<GE;HI AC;EBH6
C>!??IB<HF@I;CAHIGE;HI;D&EF7I>D?EG9I<AC@>:GBIDF@I?HBBIGE;HIEFBGD??EF7IDF@I;DEFGDEFEF7IH>E<;HFG.IDF@IE4
9C>I@CF!GI2H!??I;D&HIEGIAE7=G6IWe promise!
Visit www.conairgroup.com/promise
INSTANT ACCESS
0/35 58/1+8
24 HOURS A DAY • 7 DAYS A WEEK
US 800.458.1960
INT +1.814.437.6861
Conair Corporate Office

and Technology Center Global Locations
200 West Kensinger Dr. Conair in Mexico Conair in China Conair in Taiwan Conair in Singapore Conair in India
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 'CFGHAAH9 5=DF7=DE 3DE<HE 5EF7D<CAH 0=;H@D-D@
+1.724.584.5500 666 666 666 66 66
email: info@conairgroup.com

Conair Equipment Catalog

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Conair Equipment Catalog

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Equipment Catalog

Doing Our Part for Over 60 Years

Gaylord Tilters Bulk Conveying Systems

Accessories Central Drying System

Gas Process Air Heater Extrusion Control Blender

Hot Air Dryers Continuous Gravimetric Blenders

Drying Hoppers Blender Reporting Software

Accessories Central Chillers

Shredders Cutters and Saws

Spray Vacuum Sizing Equipment

5SABLE#APACITY LB LBFT

Broad Range of Storage Capacities Available

Conair offers welded silos in a variety of

Two cone conﬁgurations are available. Cone ` 1UALITYINTERNALLINER

All-Aluminum and Roll Formed

The Conair spiral silo is manufactured, literally,

Broad Range of Storage Capacities Available

Conair offers bolted silos in a variety of

3"-ODELS Speciﬁcation Notes

Mobile Storage for Blended or Virgin Materials

Conair’s Mobile Surge Bins are designed to

• Epoxy coated interior • Casters*

• Bag opening grate and blade

-ODEL (OPPERCONEANGLE 7IDTHDEPTH (EIGHT #APACITY 5SABLECAPACITY† 5SABLEVOLUME† 3HIPPINGWEIGHT

For critical applications, bins can be constructed of

* Usable volume based on a 30° angle of repose.

In-Plant Surge Bin

Easy Access For Blended Or Virgin Materials

In-Plant Surge Bins are available in a wide

www.conairgroup.com | info@conairgroup.com | 724 584 5500

Features Custom mounting pattern

• 4-inch {102 mm} drop tube • Leg extensions*

• Ladder • Special paint

www.conairgroup.com | info@conairgroup.com | 724 584 5500

SB48, top view SB60, top view

Models SB48-17 SB48-47 SB60-64 SB60-94 SB60-125

Volume at low level sensor ft3 {m3} 4 {0.11}

Dimensions inch {mm}†

www.conairgroup.com | info@conairgroup.com | 724 584 5500

Models SB72-134 SB72-163 SB72-192 SB72-222 SB72-251

Models SB84-285 SB84-342 SB84-400 SB84-457 SB84-514

www.conairgroup.com | info@conairgroup.com | 724 584 5500

Safely Directs Materials

The tilters can be used beside your processing machines or in

Floor Level Or Raised Platform Models

Gaylord tilters are available for holding

www.conairgroup.com | info@conairgroup.com | 724 584 5500

Models 299-276-01 299-276-02 120-004 120-005 Speciﬁcation Notes

Performance characteristics * Allow a minimum of 30 inches on each side of

www.conairgroup.com | info@conairgroup.com | 724 584 5500

Capable of being conﬁgured to monitor low, mid or high levels of

Intuitive User Interface, Configurable Monitoring

The Resin Level Display (RLD) offers a

The RLD can be mounted anywhere within ` 3IMPLE TO USEINTERFACE

Options Speciﬁcation Notes

RLD Warning Messages Alarm Configurations

Material Storage Accessory Equipment

Material Storage Accessory Equipment

Self-Contained Vacuum Loaders

Compressed Air Material Loaders

Central Vacuum Receivers

Conveying System Controls

Vacuum Pumps/Dust Collectors

Continued on next page

5SABLE#APACITYLB LBFT

-ODEL (OPPERCONEANGLE 7IDTHDEPTH (EIGHT #APACITY 5SABLECAPACITY† 5SABLEVOLUME† 3HIPPINGWEIGHT

%:, )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z z { { z .!

%:, )NTEGRAL6ACUUM z z { { z .!

+,OADER #ENTRAL6ACUUM {z

02 02 #ENTRAL6ACUUM z { z z {

%,# OPTIONAL OPTIONAL

&,8 0LUS BACKUP OPTIONAL OPTIONAL

%,3 OPTIONAL OPTIONAL

0$ $# $# $UST#OLLECTOR z

,$0 $# $UST#OLLECTOR z

(OPPER,OADING2EMOTE/UTLET-ODELS Speciﬁcation Notes &IGURE (OPPER,OADING